HANDBOUND AT THE

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO PRESS

T

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR

FOR BEGINNERS,

IN

DEVANAGARl AND ROMAN LETTERS THROUGHOUT,

BY

F. MAX MtiLLER, M.A.,

FOREIGN MEMBER OF THE FRENCH INSTITTTTB,

ETC.

SECOND EDITION, REVISED AND ACCENTUATED.

LONDON:

LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO. 1870.

T. COMBE, M.A., E. B. GARDNER,- AND E. PICKARD HALL,

PRINTERS TO TH.E UNIVERSITY.

PREFACE

TO THE FIRST EDITION.

J. HE present grammar, which is chiefly intended for beginners, is believed to contain all the information that a student of Sanskrit is likely to want during the first two or three years of his reading. Rules referring to the language of the Vedas have been entirely excluded, for it is not desirable that the difficulties of that ancient dialect should be approached by any one who has not fully mastered the grammar of the ordinary Sanskrit such as it was fixed by Panini and his successors. All allusions to cognate forms in Greek, Latin, or Gothic, have likewise been suppressed, because, however inter- esting and useful to the advanced student, they are apt to deprive the beginner of that clear and firm grasp of the grammatical system peculiar to the language of ancient India, which alone can form a solid foundation for the study both of Sanskrit and of Comparative Philology.

The two principal objects which I have kept in view while com- posing this grammar, have been clearness and correctness. With regard to clearness, my chief model has been the grammar of Bopp ; with regard to correctness, the grammar of Colebrooke. If I may hope, without presumption, to have simplified a few of the intricacies of Sanskrit grammar which were but partially cleared up by Bopp, Benfey, Flecchia, and others, I can hardly flatter myself to have reached, with regard to correctness, the high standard of Colebrooke's great, though unfinished work. I can only say in self-defence, that it is far more difficult to be correct on every minute point, if one endea- vours to re-arrange, as I have done, the materials collected by Panini, and to adapt them to the grammatical system current in Europe, than if one follows so closely as Colebrooke, the system of native grammarians, and adopts nearly the whole of their technical termi- nology. The grammatical system elaborated by native grammarians is, in itself, most perfect; and those who have tested P£ninTs work, will readily admit that there is no grammar in any language that

a 2

iv PEEFACE TO THE

could vie with the wonderful mechanism of his eight books of grammatical rules. But unrivalled as that system is, it is not suited to the wants of English students, least of all to the wants of beginners. While availing myself therefore of the materials collected in the grammar of P&nini and in later works, such as the Prakriy£-Kaumudi, the Siddh£nta-Kaumudi, the Sarasvati Prakriya, and the Madhaviya-dhatu-vritti, I have abstained, as much as pos- sible, from introducing any more of the peculiar system and of the terminology of Indian grammarians* than has already found admittance into our Sanskrit grammars ; nay, I have frequently rejected the grammatical observations supplied ready to hand in their works, in order not to overwhelm the memory of the student with too many rules and too many exceptions. Whether I have always been successful in drawing a line between what is essential in Sanskrit grammar and what is not, I must leave to the judgment of those who enjoy the good fortune of being engaged in the practical teaching of a language the students of which may be counted no longer by tens, but by hundreds f. I only wish it to be understood that where I have left out rules

* The few alterations that I have made in the usual terminology have been made solely with a view of facilitating the work of the learner. Thus instead of numbering the ten classes of verbs, I have called each by its first verb. This relieves the memory of much unnecessary trouble, as the very name indicates the character of each class ; and though the names may at first sound somewhat uncouth, they are after all the only names recognized by native grammarians. Knowing from my experience as an examiner, how difficult it is to remember the merely numerical distinction between the first, second, or third preterites, or the first and second futures, I have kept as much as possible to the terminology with which classical scholars are familiar, calling the tense corresponding to the Greek Imperfect, Imperfect; that corresponding to the Perfect, Reduplicated Perfect; that corresponding to the Aorist, Aorist; and the mood corresponding to the Optative, Optative. The names of Periphrastic Perfect and Periphrastic Future tell their own story; and if I have retained the merely numerical distinction between the First and Second Aorists, it was because this distinction seemed to be more intelligible to a classical scholar than the six or seven forms of the so-called multiform Preterite. If it were possible to make a change in the established grammatical nomenclature, I should much prefer to call the First the Second, and the Second the First Aorist; the former being a secondary and compound, the latter a primary and simple tense. But First and Second Aorists have become almost proper names, and will not easily yield their place to mere argument.

t In the University of Leipzig alone, as many as fifty pupils attend every year the classes of Professor Brockhaus in order to acquire a knowledge of the elements of Sanskrit, previous to the study of Comparative Philology under Professor Curtius.

FIRST EDITION. v

or exceptions, contained in other grammars, whether native or European, I have done so after mature consideration, deliberately preferring the less complete to the more complete, but, at the same time, more bewildering statement of the anomalies of the Sanskrit language. Thus, to mention one or two cases, when giving the rules on the employment of the suffixes vat and mat (§ 187), I have left out the rule that bases ending in m, though the m be preceded by other vowels than a, always take vat instead of mat. I did so partly because there are very few bases ending in m, partly because, if a word like kim-vdn should occur, it would be easy to discover the reason why here too v was preferred to m, viz. in order to avoid the clashing of two m's. Again, when giving the rules on the formation of denominatives (§ 495), I passed over, for very much the same reason, the prohibition given in Pan. m. i, 8, 3, viz. that bases ending in m are not allowed to form denominatives. It is true, no doubt, that the omission of such rules or exceptions may be said to involve an actual misrepresentation, and that a pupil might be misled to form such words as kim-mdn and kim-yati. But this cannot be avoided in an elementary grammar ; and the student who is likely to come in contact with such recon- dite forms, will no doubt be sufficiently advanced to be able to consult for himself the rules of Panini and the explanations of his commentators.

My own fear is that, in writing an elementary grammar, I have erred rather in giving too much than in giving too little. I have therefore in the table of contents marked with an asterisk all such rules as may be safely left out in a first course of Sanskrit grammar*, and I have in different places informed the reader whether certain portions might be passed over quickly, or should be carefully committed to memory. Here and there, as for instance in § 103, a few extracts are introduced from Panini, simply in order to give the student a foretaste of what he may expect in the elaborate works of native grammarians, while lists of verbs like those contained in $ 332 or § 462 are given, as everybody will see, for the sake of reference only. The somewhat elaborate treatment of the nominal bases in i and #, from § 220 to § 226,

* In the second edition all these paragraphs are printed in smaller type.

vi PEEFACE TO THE

became necessary, partly because in no grammar had the different paradigms of this class been correctly given, partly because it was impossible to bring out clearly the principle on which the peculiarities and apparent irregularities of these nouns are based without entering fully into the systematic arrangement of native grammarians. Of portions like this I will not say indeed, TIS n$,\\ov $ fiiftrjo-eTai, but I feel that I may say, *t% ^ra sfts^ ^ta: ; and I know that those who will take the trouble to examine the same mass of evidence which I have weighed and examined, will be the most lenient in their judgment, if hereafter they should succeed better than I have done, in unravelling the intricate argumentations of native scholars *.

But while acknowledging my obligations to the great gram- marians of India, it would be ungrateful were I not to acknowledge as fully the assistance which I have derived from the works of European scholars. My first acquaintance with the elements of Sanskrit was gained from Bopp's grammar. Those only who know the works of his predecessors, of Colebrooke, Carey, Wilkins, and Forster, can appreciate the advance made by Bopp in explaining the difficulties, and in lighting up, if I may say so, the dark lanes and alleys of the Sanskrit language. I doubt whether Sanskrit scholarship would have flourished as it has, if students had been obliged to learn their grammar from Forster or Colebrooke, and I believe that to Bopp's little grammar is due a great portion of that success which has attended the study of Sanskrit literature in Germany . Colebrooke, Carey, Wilkins, and Forster worked independently of each other. Each derived his information from native teachers and from native grammars. Among these four scholars, Wilkins seems to have been the first to compose a Sanskrit grammar, for he informs us that the first printed sheet of his work w^as destroyed by fire in 1795. The

* To those who have the same faith in the accurate and never swerving argumen- tations of Sanskrit commentators, it may be a saving of time to be informed that in the new and very useful edition of the Siddhanta-Kaumudi by S'ri Taranatha-tarkava- chaspati there are two misprints which hopelessly disturb the order of the rules on the proper declension of nouns in i and tt. On page 136, 1. 7, read ^JNr^ instead of ^sffcl^ this is corrected in the Corrigenda, and the right reading is found in the old edition. On the same page, 1. 13, insert «f after fa^IT, or join fanitrfl^tasnrK

FIRST EDITION. vii

whole grammar, however, was not published till 1808. In the mean time Forster had finished his grammar, and had actually delivered his MS. to the Council of the College of Fort William in 1804. But it was not published till 1810. The first part of Colebrooke's grammar was published in 1805, and therefore stands first in point of time of publication. Unfortunately it was not finished, because the grammars of Forster and Carey were then in course of publication, and would, as Colebrooke imagined, supply the deficient part of his own. Carey's grammar was published in 1806. Among these four publications, which as first attempts at making the ancient language of India accessible to European scholars, deserve the highest credit, Colebrooke's grammar is facile princeps. It is derived at first hand from the best native grammars, and evinces a familiarity with the most intricate pro- blems of Hindu grammarians such as few scholars have acquired after him. No one can understand and appreciate the merits of this grammar who has not previously acquired a knowledge of the gram- matical system of P£nmi, and it is a great loss to Sanskrit scholar- ship that so valuable a work should have remained unfinished.

I owe most, indeed, to Colebrooke and Bopp, but I have derived many useful hints from other grammars also. There are some por- tions of Wilson's grammar which show that he consulted native grammarians, and the fact that he possessed the remaining portion of Colebrooke's * MS., gives to his list of verbs, with the exception of the Baft class, which was published by Colebrooke, a peculiar interest. Professor Benfey in his large grammar performed a most useful task in working up independently the materials supplied by Panini and Bhattojidlkshita ; and his smaller grammars too, pub- lished both in German and in English, have rendered good service to the cause of sound scholarship. There are besides, the grammars of Boiler in German, of Oppert in French, of Westergaard in Danish, of Flecchia in Italian, each supplying something that could not be found elsewhere, and containing suggestions, many of which have proved useful to the writer of the present grammar.

But while thus rendering full justice to the honest labours of my predecessors, I am bound to say, at the same time, that with

* See Wilson's Sanscrit and English Dictionary, first edition, preface, p. xlv.

viii PEEFACE TO THE

regard to doubtful or difficult forms, of which there are many in the grammar of the Sanskrit language, not one of them can be appealed to as an ultimate authority. Every grammar contains, as is well known, a number of forms which occur but rarely, if ever, in the literary language. It is necessary, however, for the sake of systematic completeness, to give these forms ; and if they are to be given at all, they must be given on competent authority. Now it might be supposed that a mere reference to any of the numerous grammars already published would be sufficient for this purpose, and that the lists of irregular or unusual forms might safely be copied from their pages. But this is by no means the case. Even with regard to regular forms, whoever should trust implicitly in the correctness of any of the grammars, hitherto published, would never be certain of having the right form. I do not say this lightly, or without being able to produce proofs. When I began to revise my manuscript grammar which I had composed for my own use many years ago, and when on points on which I felt doubtful, I con- sulted other grammars, I soon discovered either that, with a strange kind of sequacity, they all repeated the same mistake, or that they • varied widely from each other, without assigning any reason or authority. I need not say that the grammars which we possess differ very much in the degree of their trustworthiness ; but with the exception of the first volume of Colebrooke and of Professor Benfey's larger Sanskrit grammar, it would be impossible to appeal to any of my predecessors as an authority on doubtful points. Forster and Carey, who evidently depend almost entirely on materials supplied to them by native assistants, give frequently the most difficult forms with perfect accuracy, while they go wildly wrong immediately after, without, it would seem, any power of controlling their authorities. The frequent inaccuracies in the grammars of Wilkins and Wilson have been pointed out by others ; and however useful these works may have been for practical purposes, they were never intended as authorities on contested points of Sanskrit grammar.

Nothing remained in fact, in order to arrive at any satisfactory result, but to collate the whole of my grammar, with regard not only to the irregular but likewise to the regular forms, with Pftnini and other native grammarians, and to supply for each doubtful case,

FIRST EDITION. U

and for rules that might seem to differ from those of any of my predecessors, a reference to P£nirii or to other native authorities. This I have done, and in so doing I had to re -write nearly the whole of my grammar ; but though the time and trouble expended on this work have been considerable, I believe that they have not been bestowed in vain. I only regret that I did not give these authoritative references throughout the whole of my work*, because, even where there cannot be any difference of opinion, some of my readers might thus have been saved the time and trouble of looking through Panini to find the Sutras that bear on every form of the Sanskrit language.

By this process which I have adopted, I believe that on many points a more settled and authoritative character has been imparted to the grammar of Sanskrit than it possessed before ; but I do by no means pretend to have arrived on all points at a clear and definite view of the meaning of Panini and his successors. The grammatical system of Hindu grammarians is so peculiar, that rules which we should group together, are scattered about in different parts of their manuals. We may have the general rule in the last, and the exceptions in the first book, and even then we are by no means certain that exceptions to these exceptions may not occur somewhere else. I shall give but one instance. There is a root *wijdgri, which forms its Aorist by adding ^q isham, f: th, fi^ it. Here the simplest rule would be that final ^ ri before ^ isham becomes ^ r (Pan. vi. i, 77). This, however, is prevented by another rule which requires that final ^ ri should take Guna before ^t isham (Pan. vii. 3, 84). This would give us 'smmfts ajdgar-isham. But now comes another general rule (Pan. vii. 2, i) which prescribes Vriddhi of final vowels before ^ isham, i.e. v«uii(XM ajdgdrisham. Against this change, however, a new rule is cited (Pan. vn. 3, 85), and this secures for "*W[jdgri a special exception from Vriddhi, and leaves its base again as Wf^jdgar. As soon as the base has been changed to IJPTJ jdgar, it falls under a new rule (Pan. vn. 2, 3), and is forced to take Vriddhi, until this rule is again nullified by Pan. vn. 2, 4, which does not allow Vriddhi in an Aorist that takes interme- diate 5 i, like ^MinfiH ajdgarisham. There is an exception, however,

* They have been given in the second edition. b

x PEEFACE TO THE

to, this rule also, for bases with short ^r a, beginning and ending with a consonant, may optionally take Vriddhi (Pan. vn. 2, 7). This option is afterwards restricted, and roots with short ^r a, beginning with a consonant and ending in ^r, like vtm^jagar, have no option left, but are restricted afresh to Vriddhi (Pan. vn. 2, 2). However, even this is not yet the final result. Our base vtin^jdgar is after all not to take Vriddhi, and hence a new special rule (P&n. vn. 2, 5) settles the point by granting to *rnr jdgri a special exception from Vriddhi, and thereby establishing its Guna. No wonder that these manifold changes and chances in the formation of the First Aorist of in7! jdgri should have inspired a grammarian, who celebrates them in the following couplet :

«r«r u

" Guna, Vriddhi, Guna, Vriddhi, prohibition, option, again Vriddhi and then exception, these, with the change of ri into a semivowel in the first instance, are the nine results."

Another difficulty consists in the want of critical accuracy in the editions which we possess of Panini, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, the Laghu-Kaumudi, the Sarasvati, and Vopadeva. Far be it from me to wish to detract from the merits of native editors, like Dharanldhara, Kasinatha, Taranatha, still less from those of Professor Boehtlingk, who published his text and notes nearly thirty years ago, when few of us were able to read a single line of Panini. But during those thirty years considerable progress has been made in unravelling the mysteries of the grammatical literature of India. The commentary of Sayana to the Rig-veda has shown us how practically to apply the rules of Panini ; and the translation of the Laghu-Kaumudi by the late Dr. Ballantyne has enabled even beginners to find their way through the labyrinth of native grammar. The time has come, I believe, for new and critical editions of Panini and his commentators. A few instances may suffice to show the insecurity of our ordinary editions. The commentary to Pan. vn. 2,42, as well as the Sarasvati n. 25, i, gives the Benedictive Atmanepada ^Mte varishishta and ^rtfrrte starisMshta ; yet a reference to Pan. vil. 2, 39 and 40, shows that these forms are impossible. Again, if Panini (vm.3,92) is right — and how could the Infallible be wrong? —

FIKST EDITION. xi

in using ^ii'iifrfa agragdmini with a dental n in the last syllable, it is clear that he extends the prohibition given in vm. 4, 34, with regard to Upasargas, to other compounds. It is useless to inquire whether in doing so he was right or wrong, for it is an article of faith with every Hindu grammarian that whatever word is used by Panini in his Sutras, is eo ipso correct. Otherwise, the rules affecting compounds with Upasargas are by no means identical with those that affect ordinary compounds ; and though it may be right to argue a fortiori from HJiifaPn pragdmini to tujinrnfn agragdmini, it would not be right to argue from mij^M agraydna to inrR praydna, this being necessarily TRTCT praydna. But assuming ^UMifHfH agra- gdmini to be correct, it is quite clear that the compounds ^A«

svargakdminau, ymtfmtft vrishagdminau, gfXchmiflu harikdmdni, and ^(X«H*)<ii harikdmena, given in the commentary to vm. 4, 13, are all wrong, though most of them occur not only in the printed editions of Panini and the Siddh£nta-Kaumudi, but may be traced back to the MSS. of the Prakriy4-Kaumudi, the source, though by no means the model, of the Siddhanta-Kaumudi. I was glad to learn from my friend Professor Goldstticker, who is preparing an edition of the KMk4 -Vritti, and whom I consulted on these forms, that the MSS. of Vamana which he possesses, carefully avoid these faulty examples to Pan. vm. 4, 13.

After these explanations I need hardly add that I am not so san- guine as to suppose that I could have escaped scot free where so many men of superior knowledge and talent have failed to do so. All I can say is, that I shall be truly thankful to any scholar who will take the trouble to point out any mistakes into which I may have fallen ; and I hope that I shall never so far forget the regard due to truth as to attempt to represent simple corrections, touching the declension of nouns or the conjugation of verbs, as matters of opinion, or so far lower the character of true scholarship as to appeal, on such matters, from the verdict of the few to the opinion of the many.

Hearing from my friend Professor Btihler that he had finished a Sanskrit Syntax, based on the works of Patnini and other native grammarians, which will soon be published, I gladly omitted that portion of my grammar. The rules on the derivation of nouns, by means of Krit, Unadi, and Taddhita suffixes, do not properly belong to the sphere of an elementary grammar. If time and health permit,

b2

xii PEEFACE TO THE FIEST EDITION.

I hope to publish hereafter, as a separate treatise, the chapter of the Prakriya-Kaumudi bearing on this subject.

In the list of verbs which I have given as an Appendix, pp. 244-285, I have chiefly followed the Prakriya-Kaumudi and the Sarasvati. These grammars do not conjugate every verb that occurs in the Dhatupatha, but those only that serve to illustrate certain grammatical rules. Nor do they adopt, like the Siddhanta- Kaumudi, the order of the verbs as given in Panini's Dhatupatha, but they group the verbs of each class according to their voices, treating together those that take the terminations of the Parasmai- pada, those that take the terminations of the Atmanepada, and, lastly, those that admit of both voices. In each of these subdi- visions, again, the single verbs are so arranged as best to illustrate certain grammatical rules. In making a new selection among the verbs selected by Eamachandra and Anubhutisvarupacharya, I have given a preference to those which occur more frequently in Sanskrit literature, and to those which illustrate some points of grammar of peculiar interest to the student. In this manner I hope that the Appendix will serve two purposes : it will not only help the student, when doubtful as to the exact forms of certain verbs, but it will likewise serve as a useful practical exercise to those who, taking each verb in turn, will try to account for the exact forms of its persons, moods, and tenses by a reference to the rules of this grammar. In some cases references have been added to guide the student, in others he has to find by himself the proper warranty for each particular form.

My kind friends Professor Cowell and Professor Kielhorn have revised some of the proof-sheets of my grammar, for which I beg to express to them my sincere thanks.

F. MAX MULLEE.

PARIS, 5th April, 1866.

|»: - PREFACE

TO THE SECOND EDITION.

JL HE principal alterations in the new edition of my Sanskrit grammar consist in a number of additional references to Panini, in all cases where an appeal to his authority seemed likely to be useful, and in the introduction of the marks of the accent. I have also been able to remove a number of mistakes and misprints which, in spite of all the care I had taken, had been overlooked in the first edition. Most of these I had corrected in the German translation of my grammar, published at Leipzig in 1868; some more have now been corrected. I feel most grateful to several of my reviewers for having pointed out these oversights, and most of all to Pandit Rajaramasastri, whose list of notes and queries to my grammar has been of the greatest value to me. It seems almost hopeless for a European scholar to acquire that familiarity with the intricate system of Panini which the Pandits of the old school in India still possess ; and although some of their refinements in the interpretation of Panini's rules may seem too subtle, yet there can be no doubt that these living guides are invaluable to us in exploring the gigantic labyrinth of ancient Sanskrit grammar.

There is, however, one difficulty which we have to contend with, and which does not exist for them. They keep true throughout to one system, the system of Panini ; we have to transfer the facts of that system into our own system of grammar. What accidents are likely to happen during this process I shall try to illustrate by one instance. E^j^r4mas4strl objects to the form Tpxpunsu as the locative plural of gm^ pumdn. From his point of view, he is perfectly right in his objection, for according to P&nini the locative plural has Anusvara, TJ*J pumsu. But in our own Sanskrit grammars we first have a general rule that ^ s is changed to ^ sh after any vowel except *r and ^r #, in spite of intervening Anusvara (see § 100); and it has even been maintained that there is some kind of physiological reason for such a change. If then, after having laid

xiv PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

down this rule, we yet write ^g pumsu, we simply commit a gram- matical blunder ; and I believe there is no Sanskrit grammar, except Colebrooke's, in which that blunder has not been committed. In order to avoid it, I wrote ^ punsu, thus, by the retention of the dental ^ n, making it grammatically and physically possible for the ^5 to remain unchanged. It may be objected that on the same ground I ought to have written Instr. iprr punsd, Gen. ipr: punsah, &c. ; but in these cases the ^s is radical, and would therefore not be liable to be changed into * sh after a vowel and Anusvara (Pan. vin. 3, 59). Professor Weber had evidently overlooked these simple rules, or he would have been less forward in blaming Dr. Keller for having followed my example in writing ^ punsu, instead of 33 pumsu. In Panini's grammar (as may be seen from my note appended to § TOO) the rule on the change of ^s into ^ sh is so care- fully worded that it just excludes the case of g*j pumsu, although the *j su of the loc. plur. is preceded by an Anusvara. I have now, by making in my second edition the same reservation in the general rule, been able to conform to P&nini's authority, and have written TJ*J pumsu, instead of ip§ punsu, though even thus the fact remains that if the dot is really meant for Anusv&ra, and if the g su is the termination of the locative plural, the ^ s would be sounded as ^ sh, according to the general tendency of the ancient Sanskrit pronunciation.

I have mentioned this one instance in order to show the peculiar difficulties which the writer of a Sanskrit grammar has to contend with in trying to combine the technical rules of P&nini with the more rational principles of European grammar ; and I hope it may convince my readers, and perhaps even Professor Weber, that where I have deviated from the ordinary rules of our European grammars, or where I seem to have placed myself at variance with some of the native authorities, I have not done so without having carefully weighed the advantages of the one against those of the other system.

F. MAX MULLER.

PARKS END, OXFORD,

August, 1870.

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

CHAPTER I.— THE ALPHABET.

The Devanagari letters § i. The Devandgari alphabet .

2. Direction of Sanskrit alphabet .

3. How to write the letters . .

4. Sounds represented by the De-

vandgari alphabet . .

5. Number of letters .

6. The letter It .

7. Jihvamuliya and Upadhma"niya

8. Signs of nasals and their substi-

tute

9. The three nasal semivowels

10. Consonants without correspond-

ing nasals ....

1 1. Auusvara before /, sh, s, h

% 1 2. Names of letters . . .

1 3. Vowel signs, initial, medial, and

final .....

14. Consonants followed by vowels

15. Virama .....

1 6. Combination of consonants

17. The sign for r

1 8. The Virama used as a stop-gap 19^ The signs for a pause

20. The Avagraha. List of com-

pound consonants

21. Numerical figures .

22. Rules of pronunciation

CHAPTER II.— RULES OF SANDHI. §23. Object and use of Sandhi .

24. Distinction between External

and Internal Sandhi

25. Classification of vowels, long,

short, protracted . . .

PAGE	§26.
2	27.
3	28.
4	29.
4
	30-
4	31.
5	32.
5
5
	33-
5	34-
6
	35-
6
6	36.
7
	37-
7
7	38.
7
7	39-
8	40.
8	41.
8	42.
8	43-
9
10
'im	44.
11	*45-
11	*47-
	*48.
12	*49-

PAGE

Monophthongs and diphthongs . 12 Nasalized vowels . . .12 Light and heavy vowels . .13 Acute, grave, and circumflexed

vowels . . . .13 Guna and Vriddhi . . .13 Gunaof d, d . . . .13 Combination of vowels at the

end and beginning of words.

No hiatus . . . .13 Vowels meeting the same vowels 13 Vowels d and d, followed by

different vowels . . .14 Vowels d and d, followed by

diphthongs . . . .14 Vowels I, #, A, followed by dis- similar vowels . . .15 Vowels e and o, followed by any

vowel except d . . .15 Vowels ai and au, followed by

any vowels . . . .16 Treatment of final y and v .16 The hiatus occasioned by Sandhi 17 Vowels e and o before d . .17 Unchangeable or Pragrihya

vowels . . . .17 Irregular Sandhi ; prepositions

ending in d or d, followed by

e or o . . . . .18 Prepositions ending in d or A,

followed by ri . . .18 The o of osJithah and otah . 18 Irregular compounds . .19 The final & of indeclinable words 19 Monosyllabic indeclinable words 19 Sandhi of the particle d . .19

XVI

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

* §50. Particles unaffected by Sandhi % 51. Protracted vowels unaffected by Sandhi

52. Table showing the combination

of final with initial vowels .

53. Combination of final and initial

consonants

54. The eleven final consonants .

55. No word ends in two consonants 5 6 . Classification of consonants, ac- cording to their place

5 7. Classification of consonants, ac- cording to their quality, i. e. contact, approach, opening .

58. Surd and sonant consonants .

59. Aspirated and unaspirated con-

sonants .

60. Changes of place, and changes

of quality ....

6 1 . Changes of place affect Dentals,

Anusvara, and Visarga

62. Final t before Palatals ch, chh,

j, jh, n, s .

63. Final n before jt jh, n, s .

64. Final t before t, th, d, dh, n

(not sh)

65. Final n before d, dh, n (not sh)

66. Changes of quality . .

67. Final k, t, t, p before nasals . % 68. Final k, t, t, j> before may a or

mdtra •¥r 69. Initial h after final k, t, t, p .

70. Final t before I

71. Final n before I

72. Final n, n, n after a short vowel

73. Final n before the firsts and

seconds ....

74. Final n and n before s, sh, s .

75. Final n before s or s (not sh) .

76. Final t before s

77. Anusvara and final m

78. Mm pausd, and before conso-

nants .

79. Final m before hn, hm, hy, hi, hv

50. Sam before kri, samskri .

51. Sam before rdj, samrdj . 8.2. Visarga and final s or r .

PAGE
19	§ 83.
19	84.
20	85-
	86.
21	87.
21	88.
22	89.
	90.
22	91.
	92.
	93-
23
23
	94.
23
24	95-
24	96.
	97-
24
24	98.
24	99-
25
25	IOO.
26	101.
27	102.
27
27	* 103-
27
27	* 104.
28	* 105.
28	106.
28	* 107.
29	% 108.
29
	% 109.
30	% no.
30
30
31	* in.
31

The only final sibilant inpausd, Visarga, and its modifications

Visarga before a sonant letter changed to r, and exceptions

Final radical r

Final r before initial r .

Pronouns sah and eshah, syah

JShoh . . . . .

Exceptions in compound words

Nouns ending in radical r

Initial chh and medial chh .

Initial s changeable to chh »

Final h, gh, dh, dh, bh, throw- ing their aspiration back on initial g, d, d, b.

Table showing the combina- tion of final with initial con- sonants . • f

Nati, or change of n into n, and s into sh .

Change of n into n

Tripnoti and kshubhndti

Table. . . ,./. .

Change of n into n in a com- pound ....

Optional changes of n into n in the preposition ni

Change of s into sh

Change of s into sh in the re- duplicative syllable .

Change of s into sh after pre- positions ....

Extracts from Panini on cer- tain changes of s into sh .

Change of s into sh in com- pounds ....

Change of dh into dh .

RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI

Final vowels. No hiatus

Final d and d, followed by vowels ....

Verbal bases in d

Final i, i, u, d, ri changed to y, v, r; final *, i, u, d, ri, ri changed to iy, uvt ri, ir

Final ri, before consonants, changed to ir or fir .

PAGE

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

xvu

*§H2.

US- 114.

115-

116.

* 117.

* 118.

* 119-

* 120.

* 121,

* 122.

* 123.

* 124. .* 125.

* 126.

* 127.

* 128.

* 129.

* I30-

* I31-

* 132-

* 133-

* 134.

* 135-

* 136- '37-

PAGE

Final e, ai, ot au changed to ay, dy, av, dv; roots ending in diphthongs . . .53 Final consonants, only eleven 53 Two consonants at the end of

a word impossible . .54 Sonant and surd initials require

sonant and surd finals . 54 Final aspirates lose their aspi- ration . . . .55 Final gh, dh, dh, bh, followed by t, th, lose their aspiration and change t, th into dh . 55 Final gh, dh, dh, bh, followed by dhv, bh, and s, or final, lose their aspiration and throw it back on initial g, d, d, b . 55 Final ch,j,jh changed to k or g 56 Final sh changed to t . . 56 Final sh before s changed to k 56 Final sh before t, th, changes

them to t, th . . .56 Final sh changed to t before

other consonants . .56 Final j in certain roots treated

likesA . . . . 57 Final s, chh, ksh, s'ch treated ' like sh . . . .57 Final / changed to k . .57 Final h before s treated like gh 57 Final h treated like ghordh. 57 Final h optionally treated like

gh or dh . . . .58 Final h of nah treated like dh 58 Final s changed into t in cer- tain nominal bases . .58 Final s before s changed into t in verbal bases ; s dropt be- fore dhi; optionally changed into t . . .58

Final n or m before sibilants

changed to Anusvara . 59 ^unchanged before semi vowels 59 M unchanged before y, r, I . 59 M changed to n . . .59 The five nasals abbreviated into the Anusvara dot 59

PAOB

§ 1 38. Anusvara before /, sh, s, h . 60

139. N after ch or j changed into ft 60

1 40. CJJi changed to chchh . . 60

141. Chh before n or m changed to / 60 t 142. Final y and v dropt before

consonants, except y . .60

143. Final iv, ir, ur lengthened if

followed by consonants . 60

144. Final ir and ur lengthened if

ending a word . . .60

145. Radical is or us at the end of

nominal bases lengthened . 60

146. 147. Doubling of consonants . 61 148. Explanation of some gramma- tical terms used by native grammarians . . .61

CHAPTEK III.— DECLENSION. §149. Gender, number, and case . 64

1 50. I. Bases ending in consonants ;

II. bases ending in vowels . 64

151. I. Bases ending in consonants ;

no bases in n, n, y . .64

152. Terminations . . .64

153. I. i. Unchangeable and I. 2.

Changeable bases . .65

154. 1. 1. Unchangeable bases; sugan 65

155. Sarvasak . . . .66

156. Chitralikh .... 66

157. Harit, agmmath,suhrid,budh,

gup, kakubh . * .67

158. Jalamuch . . . .67

159. Special bases in ch; brunch,

prdnch, vrtich . . .68

1 60. Prdchh . . . .68

161. Ruj, 'Arj . . . .68

162. Bases in j, changeable to d;

samrdj, vibhrdj, devej,visva- srij,parivrdj, visvardj, bhrijj 6 8

163. Irregular nouns inj; khanj,

avaydj . . . .69

164. Bases in r ; gir, vdr,pur, dvdr,

far . . . . .70

165. Bases ins; A. bases formed by

as, is, us; sumanas, sujyotis 71

1 66. Jaras andjard . . .72

167. Nirjaras and nirjara . . 73

C

XV111

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

*§i68. * 169.

* 172-

* 173- % 174-

* 175-

* I76- *I77-

* 178. 179-

1 80. 181.

182.

% 184-

* 185. 186. 187.

% 188.

* 189-

* 190. 191.

192.

* 193-

Anehas, purudamsas . .•»

Usanas ....

Bases in s ; B. bases ending in radical s ; pindagras, supis, sutus f

Pipathis . . .

Asis, sajus ; list of bases in s .

DJivas, sras .

Bases ending in s, sh, chh, ksh, h

1. Dis, dris, spris

2. Nas . . .

3. Vis

4. Dhrish .

5. Dvish .

6. Prdchh .

7. Taksh .

8. X/ihf guli

g. Duh, ushnih .

10. Druh, muh, snih, snuh

11. Nah . . . . . Turdsdh

Ukthasds .

Prasdm . .

I. 2. Nouns with changeable

bases ; A. nouns with two

bases, adat Prdch . B. Nouns with three bases,

pratyach . . . Bases in at and ant; adat The nasal in the nom. and ace.

dual of neuters, and in the

feminine base

The nasal in participles of re- duplicated verbs . - . Brihat, prishat . . Mahat .

Bases in mat and vat . Bhavat, Your Honour . Arvat and arvan . Kiyat . . . . .

Bases in an, man, van; rdjan,

ndman . . .

Brahman, divan . Feminines of bases of nouns in

an, van, man

PAGE
74	^.§194.
74	* 195-
	196.
	* 197-
74	*ip8.
75	199.
76	% 200.
77	* 201.
77	% 2O2.
77	203.
77	204.
77	205.
77	206.
77	* 207.
77
77	* 208.
78	* 209.
78	* 2IO.
78	211.
78	* 212.
78	* 213.
78	* 214-
79	215.
79
	216.
79	217.
80	2l8.
	* 219.
81	#• 22O.
82
83	% 221.
	% 222.
83
84	* 223.
84
84	224.
85
86
86	225.
86
87	^ 226.
88

PAGE

Optional feminine compounds 88 Pathin, ribhukshin, maihin . Ahan . . . . Ahan at the end of compounds Ahan at the end of compounds Svan, yuvan

Maghavan .... Pdshan, aryaman Han ..... Bases in in, dhanin Participles in vas . Participles in ivas Bases in tyas, gariyas . Miscellaneous nouns with

changeable bases, pdd Vdh .

fevetavdh .... Anaduh . . . »\ Ap ' . . . , ' ,• Pums ..... Div, dyu .... Asan and other Metaplasta . II. Bases ending in vowels,

subdivided . . . II. i . Bases ending in any vowel

except d . . . . Bases in ai and au . . Bases in o . . . . Dyo .... . Bases in i and ft . . .

1. Monosyllabic bases in i and $, being both masc. and fern.

A. By themselves ; dhi, krt, M

B. At the end of compounds .

2. Polysyllabic bases in t and d, being both masc. and fern. .

The five fuller feminine termi- nations . . . .

1. Monosyllabic bases in I and d, being feminine only, dhi, IM

2. Polysyllabic bases in i and $, being feminine only, nadi, vadhd ....

Compounds ending in mono- syllabic feminine bases in i and d, subhrii . ..; .

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

xix

#§227.

228.

* 229. 230.

* 231. 232. 233.

* 234. 235.

^ 236.

* 237. 238.

* 239.

* 240.

Compounds ending in poly

syllabic feminine bases in i

and d, bahuJreyast . Strt . . . . Atistrl . . . Bases in i and M, masc. fern. neut. 109 Kati . . . . . Sakhi ..... Pad ..... Akshi, asthi, dadhi, sakthi . Bases in ri, masc. fern, neut.,

naptri, pitri . . . Kroshfu . . . . Nri ..... II. 2. Bases ending in a and d,

kdntah, td, tarn . .

Bases in d, masc. and fern.,

visvapd . . . . Ifdhd .....

CHAPTER IV.— ADJECTIVES. §241. Declension of adjectives .

242. Formation of feminine base .

243. Priyah, fern, priyd . .

244. Pdchakah, pdchikd . .

245. Feminines formed by t . .

246. Exceptional feminines in t . .247. Irregular feminines . .

248. Formation of feminine sub-

stantives . . . .

249. Degrees of comparison . .

250. Tara and tama, how added .

251. lyas and ishtha, how added .

252. Exceptional comparatives and

superlatives . . .

CHAPTER V.— NUMERALS. §253. Cardinals and declension of cardinals, eka . . .

254. Dvi .....

255. Tri, tisri . . . .

256. Chatur, chatasri . . .

257. Panchan, shash, ashtan .

258. Construction of cardinals .

259. Ordinals ....

260. Numerical adverbs and other

derivatives .

PAGE
,	§261.
107	262.
108	* 263.
108	264.
109	265.
111	266.
111	267.
112	268.
112	£
112	269. % 270.
113	271.
114	272.
	273-
114	* 274-
	275.
115	276.
116	277.
	278.
116	279.
117	280.
117	28l.
117	* 282.
117	*283.
117
117	* 284.
	*285.
118
118	CH
118	§286.
118	287.
	288.
119
	289.
	290.
	291.
120
124	292.
124
124	CHAP
124	§293- !
124
125	294.
126	295- -

PAGI

CHAPTER VI.— PRONOUNS. Personal pronouns . . 127 Sah, sd,tat. . . .128 Syah, syd, tyat . . .128 Possessive pronouns . .128 Reflexive pronouns, svayam . 129 Atman .... 129 Svah, svd, warn . . . 129 Demonstrative pronouns,e*AaA,

eshd, etat . . . . 129 Ayam, iyam, idam . .129 Enam, endm, enat . .130 Asau, asau, adah . . . 130 Yah, yd, yat ... 131 Kah, kd, kim . . . 131 Pronouns modified by ak . 131 Compound pronouns, tddris&c. 132 Tdvat &c ..... 132 Ka^chit&LC ..... 132 Pronominal adjectives, sarva,

visva, &c. . . . .133 Any ah, anyd, any at . .134 Ubhau, ubJie, ubke . .134 Ubhayah, yi, yam . .134 Pilrva and its optional forms . 134 Pratharva and its optional

nominative plural . .134 Dvitiya and its optional forms 135 Adverbial declension . .135

CHAPTER Vn.— CONJUGATION. §286. Active and passive . . 137

287. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada 137

288. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

in derivative verbs . . Passive . . . . The thirteen tenses and moods Signification of tenses and

moods . . . . Numbers and persons . .

138 138 138

139 140

CHAPTER VIII.— THE TEK CLASSES. §293. Special and general tenses, in

the ten classes . . .140 Special or modified, general or

unmodified tenses . .140 295. Division of verbal bases . . 141

C 2

XX

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

§296. I. First division; Bhu, Tud,

Div, Chur classes . .141

297. II. Second division, and sub-

divisions . . . .142

298. II a. Su, Tan, Kri classes . 143

299. 116. Ad, Hu, Rudh classes . 143

CHAPTEK IX. — AUGMENT, REDUPLICA- TION, AND TERMINATIONS. §300. Augment and reduplication . 145

301. Augment a . . . . 145

302. Keduplication in the perfect,

and in the Hu verbs . .145

303. General rules of reduplication ^46

304. Aspirated initials . . .146

305. Guttural initials . . .146

306. Double initials . . .146

307. Initial sibilant followed by a

tenuis . . . .146

308. The vowel of the reduplicative

syllable is short . . .146

309. Medial e and ai are redupli-

cated by i, o and au by u . 146

310. Final e, ai, o are reduplicated

by a 146

311. Irregular reduplication by

Samprasarana . . .147

312. Short initial a . . . 147

313. Initial a followed by two con-

sonants . . . .148

314. Initial ri . . . .148

315. Short initial i and u . .148

316. Special rules of reduplication . 148 * 317. Nij, vij, vish . . .148 % 318. Mdjhd .... 148 % 319. Han, hi,ji, chi . . . 148

320. Terminations . . .149

321. Terminations of first and se-

cond divisions . . .149

322. Regular conjugation . .150

CHAPTER X.— GENERAL TENSES.

§323. General or unmodified tenses . 159

324. Reduplicated perfect . .159

325. Verbs which may form the re-

duplicated perfect . .159

326. The periphrastic perfect . 159

PAGE

§327. Strong and weak termina- tions 160

328. Weakening of base . . 160

329. Bases ending in d and diph-

thongs, how changed . .161

330. Bases ending in i, i, ri, u, d, ri,

how changed . . .161

CHAPTER XI.— INTERMEDIATE i. §331. When it must be omitted, when it may be omitted, when it must be inserted . 162

#332. List of verbs in which the inter- mediate i must be omitted . 163

^•333. Verbs in which the interme- diate i must be omitted in certain tenses . . . .165

•* 334- Special rules for the redupli- cated perfect . . .167

^•335. Special rules for the 2nd pers.

sing. Par. of the red. perf. . 167

#336. Table showing when interme- diate i must be omitted . 168

#337. Optional insertion of i . .168

#338. Necessary insertion of i . 170

339. The intermediate i never liable

to Guna .... 171

340. Insertion of long t . .171 3t 341. Optional insertion of long i . 171

342. Periphrastic perfect . .172 #343. Periphrastic perfect of inten-

sives and desideratives . 172 Paradigms of the reduplicated perfect . . . .172

CHAPTER XII.— STRENGTHENING AND

WEAKENING.

§344. Two classes of terminations, strengthening or weakening a verbal base . . .175 #345- Special forms of strengthening

and weakening certain bases 177

CHAPTER XIII.— AORIST. §346. First and second aorist . . 179

347. Four forms of the first aorist . 179

348. Rules for the first form . .180

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

xxi

*§349- 350-

352.

* 353-

* 354-

* 355- *35<5.

357- *358.

* 359- 360.

* 361.

* 362.

363- 364- 365- 366.

*3<>7-

* 369- 370.

* 37i- 372.

373- 374-

375-

* 376.

*377-

378.

*379-

380.

Rules for desideratives, inten-

sives, <fec. •

Rules for the second form Terminations beginning with

at or ath

Roots in d and diphthongs . Mi, mi, di, li

Han

Gam ..... Yam ..... Rules for the third form Mi, mi, li . Yam, ram, nam . Rules for the fourth form

Stish

Duh, dih, lih, guh

Paradigms ....

Second aorist

Roots ending in d, e, i, ri; dris 187

Roots with penultimate nasal . 187

Irregular forms

Verbs which take the second

aorist .... Verbs which take the second

aorist in the Par. only The Tan verbs

Reduplicated second aorist . Sri, dru, sru, kam; 6vi, dhe . Shortening of bases ending in

ay .... Bases that cannot be shortened Compensation between base

and reduplicative syllable . Vowels of reduplicative syllable 190 Verbs beginning and ending

with double consonants Verbs with penultimate ri, ri . Verbs beginning with vowels . Irregular reduplicated aorist . Paradigm .... When the different forms of

the aorists are used .

CHAPTER XIV.— FUTURE, CONDITIONAL, PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE, AND BENEDICTIVE. §381. Future 382. Changes of the base

PAGE	§383.
181	384.
181	385.
181	387.
181
181
181	388.
181	* 389-
181	* 390-
182	* 391-
182	* 392.
182	* 393-
182
182	* 394
182
182	* 395-
186	396-
187
187
187	§397-
	398.
187	* 399
188	400.
188	401.
188	402.
189	403-
	% 4°4-
189	* 405-
189	* 406.
189	* 407-
190	*4<>8.
	409.
190	410.
190
191	411.
191	* 412.
191
	* 4I3-
191 STAL	CHAP'
VE. 192 1Q9	§414. Alt.

PAGE

Conditional . . . .193 Periphrastic future . .194 Benedictive . . . .195 Bases ending in ay . .195 Weakening in benedictive Pa-

rasmaipada, strengthening in

benedictive Atmanepada . 195 Intermediate i . . .195 Weakening of base before y . 196 Verbs ending in t, u, ri, rt .196 Verbs ending in n . .196 Verbs ending in d . . .196 Verbs which take SampraszU

rana 197

Other verbs which take Sam-

prasarana .... 197 Sds changed to fish . .197 Benedictive Atmanepada . 198

CHAPTER XV.— PASSIVE. Atmanepada terminations . 198 Special tenses of passive . 198 Causative, denominative, in- tensive bases . . .198 Weakening of base. Paradigm 199 General tenses of passive . 199 The aorist passive . . .200 The 3rd pers. sing, aorist passive 200 Aorist of verbs ending in d .200 Aorist of verbs ending in ay . 200 Aorist of intensive and desi-

derative bases . . . 200 Irregular forms . . .201 Verbs ending in am . .201 Paradigm . . . .201 Future, conditional, and bene- dictive passive . . .201 Their optional forms . .201 Aorist passive of intransitive

verbs .... 203 Optional forms . . . 203

CHAPTER XVI. — PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS,

AND INFINITIVE. . Participle present Parasmai-

pada. . . . 203

415. Participle future Parasmaipada 204

XX11

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

Participle of reduplicated per- fect Parasmaipada . .204

Participle of reduplicated per- fect with i . . . . 205

Participle of reduplicated per- fect Atmanepada . .205

Participle present Atmanepada 205

Participle future Atmanepada 206

Participle present and future passive .... 206

Past participle passive and gerund .... 206

Gerund in tvd . . .206

I. The terminations tah and tvd, with intermediate i .207

Penultimate u with optional

Guna . . . .207 Tvd with intermediate i and

Guna . . . .207 Tvd with intermediate i and

without Guna . . .207 Nasal lost before th, ph; vanch,

lunch .... 207

II. The terminations tah and tvd, without intermediate i. 207

Final nasal dropt before tah and tvd . 207

Final n dropt and vowel length- ened ; final chh, v, rchh, and rv 208

Roots changing v to u . . 208

Final ai changed to d or i . 208

Do, so, md, sthd, dhd, hd change their final into i . .208

/So and chho take i or d . . 208

Exceptional forms

§416.

#417.

418.

419. 420. 421.

422.

423. #424.

^425. #426. ^427. ^428. ^429. ^430. ^431.

^432. #433. ^434.

•* 435- #•436. :fc 437.

rana ..... #438. Verbs which lose penultimate

nasal ....

439. Causal verbs

440. Desiderative verbs

441. Intensive verbs

442. Participles in nah . jfc 443. Adjectival participles

444. Vat added to participles

445. Gerund in ya

446. Gerund in tya

Verbs which take Samprasa-

208 208

209 209 209 209 209 210 210 210 210

^§447. Gerund of causatives

#•448. Ghu verbs, md, sthd, gd, pd,

hd, so, take final d

% 449. Verbs ending in nasals . * % 450. Verbs ending in ri * 451. Ve,jyd,vye . . % 452. Mi, mi, di, li . ' " .'

PAGE

211

211 211 211 211 211

CHAPTER XVII.— VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

§453- Verbal adjectives, Kritya . 211

454. Adjectives in ta vya , , . 212

455. Adjectives in cmiya, . .212

456. Adjectives in ya . . . 212 ^457. Exceptional verbal adjectives .

in ya and tya . . . 214 % 458. Verbs changing final ch andj

into k and g . . .214

459. Infinitive in turn . . .214

460. Verbal adverbs in am . .214

CHAPTER XVIII.— CAUSATIVE VERBS.

§461. Causal bases, how formed .215

% 462. Guna or Vriddhi . , . 215

463. Exceptional causative bases, I.

*II. . . , . 217

464. Conjugation of causative verbs 219

465. Passive of causative verbs . 219

466. General tenses of the passive . 219

CHAPTER XIX. — DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

§467. Desiderative bases, how formed 220

468. Desiderative bases, how con-

jugated . . . . 220

469. Desiderative bases, with or

without intermediate i .220 % 470. Strengthening of base . . 220 ^•471. Exceptional strengthening or

weakening. . . . 220 #472. Desiderative bases, treated as

Bhu verbs. . . .221 473. Reduplication of desiderative

bases .... 222

^t 474. Bases in av and dv . . 222

•* 475- $ru> sru> d™, pru, plu, chyu . 222

476. Internal reduplication . .222

#477. Exceptional forms . .222

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

x\in

PAGE CHAPTER XX.— INTENSIVE VERBS.	PAGE §508. Conjunctions . . . 233
§478. Meaning of intensive or fre-	509. Interjections . . . 233
quentative verbs . .223
1 479. Verbs which may form inten-	CHAPTER XXIIL— COMPOUND WORDS.
sive bases .... 223	§510. Manner of compounding nomi-
480. Two kinds of intensive bases.	nal bases .... 233
Atmanepada . . .223	* 511. Treatment of feminine bases . 234
481. Intensive bases in ya, how	512. Six classes of compounds . 234
formed and conjugated . 223	I. Tatpurusha, determinative
482. Parasmaipada bases, how form-	compounds . . .234
ed and conjugated . .224	I b. Karmadharaya, apposi-
483. Conjugation of Parasmaipada	tional determinative com-
bases .... 224	pounds . .234
484. Reduplication of intensive bases 224	Ic. Dvigu, numeral deter-
* 485. Verbs which insert ni . . 225	minative compounds . 234
#486. Verbs ending in nasals . .225	II. Dvaudva, collective comp. . 235
#487. Jap, jabh, dah, dams, bhanj,	III. Bahuvrihi, possessive com-
pas 225	pounds . . . 235
* 488. Char, phal .... 225	IV. Avyayibhava, adverbial com-
# 489. Verbs with penultimate ri . 225	pounds . . . 235
# 490. Verbs ending in ri . .226	513. I. Determinative compounds . 235
#491. Exceptional intensive bases . 226	#514. Exceptional determinative
492. Secondary and tertiary bases . 226	compounds . . . 237
	#515. Inverted determinative com-
CHAPTER XXI.— DENOMINATIVE VERBS.	pounds .... 237
§493. Character of denominative	#516. Determinative compounds end-
verbs . 227	ing in verbal bases . .237
494, 495. Denominatives in ya, Pa- rasmaipada . . .227 # 496. Changes of base . . . 227	517. 16. Appositional determinative compounds . . .237 * 518. Inverted determinative com-
497. Denominatives in ya, Atmane- 1	pounds . . . .238 519. Ic. Numeral determinative
pada 228 * 498. The Kandvadi verbs . .228 ^499. Denominatives in sya . .229 # 500. Denominatives in kdmya . 229 501. Conjugation of denominatives 229	compounds . . .238 * 520. Modifications of the final letters of determinative compounds 238 521. II. Collective compounds, Ita- retara and Samahara . . 240
* 502. Denominatives in aya . . 229 % 503. Denominatives without affixes 230	* 522. Precedence of words . .240 * 523. Nouns ending in ri . .240
	#524. Names of deities (fee. . .240
CHAPTER XXII.— PREPOSITIONS AND	#525. Modifications of the final letters
PARTICLES.	of collective compounds in
§504. Prepositions, Upasarga. . 230	the singular . . .241
505. Prepositions, Gati. . . 230	* 526. Idiomatic expressions . .241
506. Prepositions, Karmapravacha-	527. III. Possessive compounds . 241
niya 231	* 528. Modifications of the final letters
507. Adverbs . . . .231	of possessive compounds . 241

XXIV

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

§529. IV. Adverbial compounds . 242 % 530. Exceptional compounds . 243 #531. Modifications of the final letters

of adverbial compounds . 243

APPENDIX I.

PAGE 244-285

. 245 . 245 . 260

LIST OF VERBS ... Bhft Class (Bhvadi, I Class) I. Parasmaipada Verbs II. Atmanepada Verbs III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs . . . .263 Tud Class (Tudadi, VI Class) . . 265 I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs . . . .265

II. Parasmaipada Verbs . . 266

III. Itmanepada Verbs . .267

Div Class (Divadi, IV Class) . . 267

I. Parasmaipada Verbs . .267

II. Atmanepada Verbs . .269

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs .... 269

Chur Class (Churadi, X Class) . . 270

Parasmaipada Verbs only . .270

Su Class (Svadi, V Class) . . 270

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs .... 270 "II. Parasmaipada Verbs . .271 III. Itmanepada Verbs . .271

PAGE

Tan Class (Tanvadi, VIII Class) . 272 Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs . . . 272

Kri Class (Kryadi, IX Class) . .273 I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs . ^ . . .273

II. Parasmaipada Verbs . .274

III. Atmanepada Verbs . .274

Ad Class (Adadi, II Class) . . 275

I. Parasmaipada Verbs . .275

II. Atmanepada Verbs . .279

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs . . . .280

Hu Class (Juhotyadi, III Class) . 281

I. Parasmaipada Verbs . .281

II. Atmanepada Verbs » .282

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs . . . . 283 Rudh Class (Rudhadi, VII Class) . 284 I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada

Verbs . , . .284

II. Parasmaipada Verbs . .284

III. Atmanepada Verbs . .285

APPENDIX II.

PAGE

ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT . 286-292 INDEX OF NOUNS . . . 293-297 INDEX OF VERBS . . 297-300

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR

THE DEVANiGARI LETTEKS.

VOWELS.

CONSONANTS.

Initial. Medial

W T T f

nitial. Medial.

Equivalent.

a

ri (or ri)

n(orri)

e ai o au

TT

^

k kh

g n

ch (or k) chh(orM)

j (or 9) jh

t (or t) th (or th) d (or d) dh (or dh) 7 (or n}

t

th

d

dh

n

vfil

P ph

b

bh

m

s (or s) sh

s

h

m (or m) m (or m) h (or h)

(Jihvamuliya), x (Upadhmamya), <

1 Sometimes represented in the Veda by

2 Sometimes represented in the Veda by

} (or 0- » lh (°r

CHAPTER I.

THE ALPHABET.

§ i. SANSKRIT is properly written with the Devanagari alphabet; but the Bengali, Grantha, Telugu, and other modern Indian alphabets are commonly employed for writing Sanskrit in their respective provinces.

Note — Devandgarf means the Ndgart of the gods, or, possibly, of the Brahmans. A more current style of writing, used by Hindus in all common transactions where Hindi is the lan- guage employed, is called simply Ndgarf. Why the alphabet should have been called Ndgarl, is unknown. If derived from nagara, city, it might mean the art of writing as first practised in cities. (Pan. iv. 2, 128.) No authority has yet been adduced from any ancient author for the employment of the word Devandgari. In the Lalita-vistara (a life of Buddha, translated from Sanskrit into Chinese 76 A. D.), where a list of alphabets is given, the Devandgart is not mentioned, unless it be intended by the Deva alphabet. (See History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p. 518.) Albiruni, in the nth century, speaks of the Nagara alphabet as current in Malva. (Reinaud, Memoire sur 1'Inde, p. 298.)

Beghram (bhagdrdma, abode of the gods) is the native name of one or more of the most important cities founded by the Greeks, such as Alexandria ad Caucasum or Nicaea. (See Mason's Memoirs in Prinsep's Antiquities, ed. Thomas, vol. I. pp. 34^-350.) Could Devanagari have been meant as an equivalent of Beghrami?

No inscriptions have been met with in India anterior* to the rise of Buddhism. The earliest authentic specimens of writing are the inscriptions of king Priyadarsi or Asoka, about 250 B.C. These are written in two different alphabets. The alphabet which is found in the inscription of Kapurdigiri, and which in the main is the same as that of the Arianian coins, is written from right to left. It is clearly of Semitic origin, and most closely connected with the Aramaic branch of the old Semitic or Phenician alphabet. The Aramaic letters, how- ever, which we know from Egyptian and Palmyrenian inscriptions, have experienced further changes since they served as the model for the alphabet of Kapurdigiri, and we must have recourse to the more primitive types of the ancient Hebrew coins and of the Phenician inscriptions in order to explain some of the letters of the Kapurdigiri alphabet.

But while the transition of the Semitic types into this ancient Indian alphabet can be proved with scientific precision, the second Indian alphabet, that which is found in the inscription of Girnar, and which is the real source of all other Indian alphabets, as well as of those of Tibet and Burmah, has not as yet been traced back in a satisfactory manner to any Semitic prototype. (Prinsep's Indian Antiquities by Thomas, vol. n. p. 42.) To admit, however, the independent invention of a native Indian alphabet is impossible. Alphabets_were never invented, in the usual sense of that word. They were formed gradually, and purely phonetic alphabetlfalways point back to earlier, syllabic or ideographic, stages. There are no such traces of the growth of an alphabet on Indian soil ; and it is to be hoped that new- discoveries may still bring to light the intermediate links by which the alphabet of Girnar, and through it the modern Devanagari, may be connected with one of the leading Semitic alphabets.

B 2

THE ALPHABET.

$ 3. Sanskrit is written from left to right.

Note — Samskrita (u**jjd) means what is rendered fit or perfect. But Sanskrit is not called so because the Brahmans, or still less, because the first Europeans who became acquainted with it, considered it the most perfect of all languages. Samskrita meant what is rendered fit for sacred purposes ; hence purified, sacred. A vessel that is purified, a sacrificial victim that is properly dressed, a man who has passed through all the initiatory rites or samskdras; all these are called samskrita. Hence the language which alone was fit for sacred acts, the ancient idiom of the Vedas, was called Samskrita, or the sacred language. The local spoken dialects received the general name of prdkrita. This did not mean originally vulgar, but derived, secondary, second-rate, literally what has a source or type,' this source or type (prakriti) being the Samskrita or sacred language. (See Vararuchi's Prakrita-Prakasa, ed. Cowell, p. xvii.)

The former explanation of prdkrita in the sense of 'the natural, original continuations of the old language (bhdshd),' is untenable, because it interpolates the idea of continuation. If prdkrita had to be taken in the sense of ' original and natural,' a language so called would mean, as has been well shown by D'Alwis (An Introduction to Kachchayana's Grammar, p. Ixxxix), the original language, and samskrita would then have to be taken in the sense of * refined for literary purposes.' This view, however, of the meaning of these two names, is opposed to the view of those who framed the names, and is rendered impossible by the character of the Vedic lang*1^ ; ..

§ 3. In writing the Devanagari alphabet, the distinctive portion of each letter is written first, then the perpendicular, and lastly the horizontal line.

Ex.

k; «?,

i\g; *, n,

, &c.

Beginners will find it useful to trace the letters on transparent paper, till they know them well, and can write them fluently and correctly.

j 4. The following are the sounds which are represented in the Devanagari alphabet :

Hard,

(tenues.)

Hard and aspirated, (tenues aspiratae.)

Soft, (mediae.)

Soft and aspirated,

(media? aspiratae.)

Nasals.

Liquids.

Sibilants.

Vowels. Short, Long.

Diphthongs.

1. Gutturals,

2. Palatals, 3.Linguals,

4. Dentals,

5. Labials,

Jft

-Hth

Mdh H bh

H/

US

Unmodified Nasal or Anusvara, * m or Unmodified Sibilant or Visarga, t h.

m.

1 In the Veda "5 d and <? dh, if between two vowels, are in certain schools written 35 I and 335 lh.

2 "% h is not properly a liquid, but a soft breathing.

3 ^ v is sometimes called Dento-labial.

4 The signs for the guttural and labial sibilants have become obsolete, and are replaced by the two dots : h.

-§ 8. THE ALPHABET. 5

Students should be cautioned against using the Roman letters instead of the Devanagari when beginning to learn Sanskrit. The paradigms should be impressed on the memory in their real and native form, otherwise their first impressions will become unsettled and indistinct. After some progress has been made in mastering the grammar and in reading Sanskrit, the Roman alphabet may be used safely and with advantage.

f 5. There are fifty letters in the Devanagari alphabet, thirty- seven consonants and thirteen vowels, representing every sound of the Sanskrit language.

$ 6. One letter, the long 7£ li, is merely a grammatical invention ; it never occurs in the spoken language.

f 7. Two sounds, the guttural and labial sibilants, are now without distinctive representatives in the Devanagari alphabet. They are called Jihvdmdliya, the tongue-root sibilant, formed near the base of the tongue ; and Upadhmdniya, i. e. afflandus, the labial sibilant. They are said to have been represented by the signs X (called Vajrdkriti, having the shape of the thunderbolt) and m (called Gajakumbhdkriti, having the shape of an elephant's two frontal bones). [See Vopadeva's Sanskrit Grammar, i. 185 History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p. 508.] Sometimes the sign X, called Ardha-visarga, half -Visarga, is used for both. But in common writing these two signs are now replaced by the two dots, the Dvivindu, :, (dvi, two, vindu, dot,) properly the sign of the unmodified Visarga. The old sign of the Visarga is described in the Katantra as like the figure S 4 ; in the Tantrabhidhana as like two 3 th's. (See Prinsep, Indian Antiquities, vol. i. p. 75.)

j 8. There are five distinct letters for the five nasals, ^ n, *r n, iff n, «j n, *Tx m, as there were originally five distinct signs for the five sibilants. When, in the middle of words, these nasals are followed by consonants of their own class, (n by k, kh, ff, gh ; n by ch, chh, j, jh ; n by /, th, d, dh ; n by t, th, d, dh ; m by p, pht b, bh,) they are often, for the sake of more expeditious writing, replaced by the dot, which is properly the sign of the unmodified nasal or Anusvara. Thus we find

instead of ^f^dl ankitd.

instead of ^ fWrt I1 anchitd. * «N \ <<& V * I

^

instead of ^fertl kunditd.

"H f<j ri i instead of H^dl nanditd. \

4fljrfT instead of cfffujril kampitd.

The pronunciation remains unaffected by this style of writing. ^f<*HI must be pronounced as if it were written ^HfffrU ankitd, &c.

The same applies to final IT m at the end of a sentence. This too,

6 THE ALPHABET.

9-

though frequently written and printed with the dot above the line, is to be pronounced as H m. 'snr, I, is to be pronounced ^r*w aham. (See Preface to Hitopades'a, in M. M/s Handbooks for the Study of Sanskrit, p. viii.)

Note — According to the Kaumaras final *T m in pausd may be pronounced as Anusvara j cf. Sarasvati-Prakriya, ed. Bombay, 1829*, pp. 12 and 13.

T I ^IWI% TOTWig^ntfr *RflT 33. I ^ I ^* II The Kaumaras are the followers of Kumara, the reputed author of the Katantra or Kalapa grammar. (See Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, Preface; and page 315, note.) S'arvavarman is quoted by mistake as the author of this grammar, and a distinction is sometimes made between the Kaumaras and the followers of the Kalapa grammar.

$ 9. Besides the five nasal letters, expressing the nasal sound as modified by guttural, palatal, lingual, dental, and labial pronunciation, there are still three nasalized letters, the IT, r|, ^, or ^, 77, "4, y, I, v, which are used to represent a final *T w, if followed by an initial T{y, 7^ /, ^v, and modified by the pronunciation of these three semivowels. (Pan. vm. 4, 59-) Thus instead of "if *rrfTT tarn ydti we may write Tf^rifTf toy ydti;

instead of w cjvnr tarn labhate we may write TlWHff tal labhate ; instead of if ^ffir tarn vahati we may write Tflhrfa tav vahati. Or in composition,

^TJlrf samydnam or ^CTR sayydnam; ^c53f \amlabdham or ^l%3tf sallabdham; ^N^frT samvahati or ^^f? savvahati.

But never if the ^ m stands in the body of a word, such as cfiruj: kdmyah ; nor if the semivowel represents an original vowel, e. g. Rig-veda x. 132, 3. *W T ^TR«T sam u dran, changed to ^Tt'T sam varan.

§ 10. The only consonants which have no corresponding nasals are T r, Sl^ ^, ^ sh, ^ s, ^ h. A final 3^ m, therefore, before any of these letters at the beginning of words, can only be represented by the neutral or unmodi- fied nasal, the Anusvara.

IT t^"fir tarn rakshati. Or in composition, ^UjPrf samrakshati.

if SHlfrflT tarn srinoti. ^nrftflT samsrinoti.

W ^RTT tarn shaMram. ^J/l^rrf samshthivati.

if ^tfrr tarn sarati. TOT^fir samsarati.

3 ^flT tarn harati. M$*Sfi samharati.

J 1 1 . In the body of a word the only letters which can be preceded by

* This edition, which has lately been reprinted, contains the text — ascribed either to Vani herself, i.e. Sarasvati, the goddess of speech (MS. Bodl. 386), or to Anubhuti-svarupa-acharya, whoever that may be — and a commentary. The commentary printed in the Bombay editions is called J^hrrt or in MS. Bodl. 382. tl^nft, i.e. IT^Rft. In MS. Bodl. 382. Mahidhara or Mahidasabhatta is said to have written the Sarasvata in order that his children might read it, and to please Is'a, the Lord. The date given is 1634, the place Benares, (S'ivarajadhani.)

-$ l6. THE ALPHABET. 7

Anusvara are 9^,^*A, ^s, ^A. Thus^r. amfah, vffi dhanumshi, ijjriftr yatdmti, ftff : simhafy. Before the semivowels ^ y, t r, ^ /, ^ v, the * m, in the body of a word, is never changed into Anusvara. Thus ifJirb gamy ate , «ro namrah, *ry: amlah. In $nft: bamyoh (Rv. i. 43, 4, &c.) the m stands 'padante/ but not in ^iHjfd &dmyati. (See f 9.)

J J 2. With the exception of JihvdmiiUya X x (tongue-root letter), Upadh- mdniya X <£ (to be breathed upon), Anusvara * m (after-sound), Visarga : £ (emission, see Taitt.-Brahm. in. p. 23 a), and Repha r (burring), all letters are named in Sanskrit by adding kdra (making) to their sounds. Thus ^ a is called ^raRTC: akdrah ; "9R ka, <**K: kakdrah, &c.

§ 13. The vowels, if initial, are written,

a, d, e, r, H, H, /i, (/Q, w, tf, e, az, o, aw; if they follow a consonant, they are written with the following signs —

T f ^ M ^ * > 1

— > '» 'i '» e> t> ««> Vcj/^ v*» cv» ' > '» '

a, a, t, ^, H, rt /«, (^0> M» ^ «» ai» °> OM-

There is one exception. If the vowel ^ ri follows the consonant ^ r, it retains its initial form, and the r is written over it. Ex. PH^fHl nirritify.

In certain words which tolerate an hiatus in the body of the word, the second vowel is written in its initial form. Ex. Tft^jj goagra, adj. preceded by cows, instead of ifts?I go 3gra or 'NliJ gavdgra ; ift^rt goa&vam, cows and horses ; in7! prauga, yoke ; fdri^J ^7«w, sieve.

J 14. Every consonant, if written by itself, is supposed to be followed by a short a. Thus OR is not pronounced k, but Ara ; ^ not y, but ya. But «| k or any other consonant, if followed by any vowel except a, is pronounced without the inherent a. Thus

^FT kdy far ki, ctf ki, ^ /5rn, c« kri, -9j kli, (w Ar/z), ^ ku, ^ ATM, % ke, % Arai,

^t ^ro, ^ kau.

The only peculiarity is that short ft is apparently written before the con- sonant after which it is sounded. This arose from the fact that in the earliest forms of the Indian alphabet the long and short t's were both written over the consonant, the short i inclining to the left, the long t inclining to the right. Afterwards these top-marks were, for the sake of distinctness, drawn across the top-line, so as to become fti and sift, instead of % and ^. (See Prinsep's Indian Antiquities, ed. Thomas, vol. n. p. 40.)

J 15. If a consonant is to be pronounced without any vowel after it, the consonant is said to be followed by Virdma, i. e. stoppage, which is marked by v Thus ak must be written ^TC^ ; kar, w^ ; ik, ^.

J 1 6. If a consonant is followed immediately by another consonant, the two or three or four or five or more consonants are written in one group

8 THE ALPHABET. § 17-

(samyoga). Thus atka is written ^Trfi ; alpa is written ^T3T ; kdrtsnya is written <*|f^. These groups or compound consonants must be learnt by practice. It is easy, however, to discover some general laws in their forma- tion. Thus the perpendicular and horizontal lines are generally dropt in one of the letters: ^r + ^R = ^M0; ft + ^ = ?%nda ; !f + ^ = r* tva ; ^ + ^ = -&skha; ^ + -Q = ^chya; ^+-n = Kpta; o^ + U = *R kta; c(T + Tr + ^ = ^j ktva ; c(r + Wx+ T\ = ^ ktya.

$17. The T: r following a consonant is written by a short transverse stroke at the foot of the letter; as ^ + ^=•35 or ^kra; J^+T = 3T$r#/ r^+^=^or •* tra; ^ + ^ = ~$dra; T{+^ + T. = 'g shtra.

The ^r preceding a consonant is written by *• placed at the top of the consonant before which it is to be sounded. Thus ^+ -31; = ^rifi arka ; ^+ •^+?T = ^«§ varshma. This sign for ^r is placed to the right of any other marks at the top of the same letter. Ex. ^nij arkam ; ^fer arkena ; ^FJ arkendu.

c^ k followed by *t sh is written Sf or ^ ksha.

*^j followed by *T n is written ^jna.

T^jh is sometimes written v^jh.

^ r followed by T u and g» ti is written ^ ru, ^ rd.

^ d followed by 7 u and •gi it is written ^ duy <* dd.

^^, particularly in combination with other letters, is frequently written *r.

Ex. ^J£M; i^tol; Vl6ra.

J 1 8. The sign of Virdma N (stoppage), which if placed at the foot of a consonant, shows that its inherent short a is stopped, is sometimes, when it is difficult to write (or to print) two or three consonants in one group, placed after one of the consonants : thus Tp^fi instead of ipjf yunkte.

$ 19. The proper use of the Virama, however, is at the end of a sentence, or portion of a sentence, the last word of which ends in a consonant.

At the end of a sentence, or of a half-verse, the sign I is used ; at the end of a verse, or of a longer sentence, the sign n.

$ 20. The sign s (Avagraha or Arddhakdra) is used in most editions to mark the elision of an initial W a, after a final wfr o or ^ e. Ex. sftsfxr so 'pi for Ft ^Tft so api, i. e. TO ^rfo sas api ; %sftr te 'pi for K ^fq te api.

List of Compound Consonants.

\ ^ k-ka, cRj k-kha, SRI k-cha, "^ k-ta, ^ k-t-ya, ^ k-t-ra, ^gf-k-t-r-ya,

k-t-va} «R k-na, ^f k-n-ya} ^F»T k-ma, "SR k-ya, JR or ^ k-ra, ^f or ^=pj k-r-ya,

k-la, J& k-va, "%% k-v-ya, "Sf k-sha, ^{ k-sh-ma, ^r k-sh-ya, ^ k-sh-va ; —

r kh-ya, ^ kh-ra ; — HT g-ya, TJ g-ra, v% g-r-ya ; — H gh-na, & gh-n-ya,

f gh-ma, "oy gh-ya, TJ gh-ra ; — ^» n-ka, ^ n-k-ta, <j»Jf n-k-t-ya9 ^»J n-k-yat

-^ 21. THE ALPHABET. 9

^ n-k-sha, ^ n-k-sh-va, j§ n-kha, ^ h-kh-ya, jf n-gat $5J n-g-ya, ^ n-ghat iff n-gh-ya, ^ h-gh-ra, |? h-ha, ^f n-ma, 357 n-ya.

^T ch-cha, *5 ch-chha, *Q ch-chh-ra, ^ ch-iiay "U? ch-may ^f ch-ya ; — w chh-ya, ; — Tr* j-ja, *£J-jha, * j-na, fq j-n-yat ** j-ma, »q j-ya, W j-ra, ^r n-cha, ^R n-ch-mat ^aj n-ch-ya, ¥fj n-chha,

J^f 4-ff-ya, f

4-gh-ra, ^f (/-ma, *Q d-ya; — ^ 4h-ya, ^ rfA-ra; — IP w-/a, TT5 »/-</«, ^ y-tt-ya* 1® n-d-rat ^ n-d-r-ya, m n-dha, 15 n-nat *p

* t-tay ^ t-t-ya, ^ t-t-ra, fBT t-t-va, w ^-Ma, <=T

^-^-ra, w /-ma, |W t-m-ya, w ^-ya, ?T or •* /-ra, /-va, w ^-5a, 1^ t-s-na, r^r t-s-n-ya, wt t-s-ya ; — ^«T ^A-ya ;—

c?-^a, f d-gha, f d-gh-ra, ^ cf-c?a, ^ d-d-ya, ^ d-dha, 9 d-dh-ya, if d-na,

d-ba, ?j d-bha, jf d-bh-ya, TT rf-ma, n d-ya, ^ c?-ra, ^f d-r-ya, f d-va, T d-w-ya ; — K rf^-wa, ]fl dh-n-ya, «T dh-ma, K| c?A-ya, V rfA-ra, 91 dh-r-ya, *3 dh-va ; — TR n-ta, TR n-t-yay t^c n-t-ra, fl( n-da, "^ n-d-ra, ^ n-dha, ^ n-dh-ra, ^ n-nay ^ n-pa, ?B n-p-ra, "** n-ma, *( n-ya, ^ n-ra, "^r n-sa.

H p-tat PI p-t-ya, TT jo-wa, "aj jt?-/?a, "^ p-ma, *m p-ya, H ^?-ra, 3T /?-/«, •^ j9-v«, "^ j^-csa, x^r p-s-va ; — 3T b-gha, *5T ^-^'a, ^ 5-c?a, 3* b-dha, "jf b-na, i$ b-ba, «*T b-bha, "ssq b-bh-ya, "m b-ya, w b-ra, *$ b-va ; — V bh-na, »T bh-ya, **& bh-ra, v^ M-va ; — ^ m-w«, «T m-pa, ^pgr m-p-ra, ^ m-da, *H m-bha, wr m-ma, 1*1 m-ya, ^ m-ra, ^ w-/a, 13 m-va.

«i y-ya, z^ y-va ; — ^R /-A:«, ^i /-joa, ^R 7-ma, ^ l-ya, ^ l-la, ^ l-va ; — jf v-na, tq v-ya9 w v-ra, "$ v-va.

^ 6-cha, ^ s-ch-ya, ^ £-rca, »q ^-ya, ^r ^-ra, Wf ^-r-y«, ^r ^-/a, ^r 6-va, ^ s-v-ya, ^T ^a / — ^ *^-/«, w sh-t-ya, jr sh-t-ra, ^r sh-t-r-ya, % sh-t-va9 f sh-tha, w sh-na, tnn sh-n-ya, tq sh-pa, w sh-p-ra, ^ sh-ma9 tq sh-ya, ^ sh-va ; — ^ s-kay ^ 5-Ha, H 5-^o> *W s-t-ya, T^f s-t-ra, T& s-t-va, ^ s-tha, ^ s-na, ^q s-n-ya, ^q 5-joa, 9fi s-pha, w s-ma, ^q s-m-yay FJ *-ya, ^r 5-ra, ^ s-va, w *-*a.

"^ A-wa, g h-na, it h-rtia, ^f h-ya, ^ h-ra, |f A-/a, 2£ h-va.

Numerical Figures.

§ 21. The numerical figures in Sanskrit are

q^^dMtr^b^o 1234567890

These figures were originally abbreviations of the initial letters of the Sanskrit numerals. The Arabs, who adopted them from the Hindus, called them Indian figures ; in Europe, where they were introduced by the Arabs, they were called Arabic figures.

c

10 THE ALPHABET. 22-

Thus ^ stands for TJ e of f&Rl eM, one.

^ stands for If cfo of "§T cfocm, two.

3 stands for ^ £r of ^TJ trayah, three.

8 stands for ^T ch of ^r^THS chatvdrah, four.

M stands for ^p of Tfar pancha, five.

The similarity becomes more evident by comparing the letters and numerals as used in ancient inscriptions. See Woepcke, ' Memoire sur la Propagation des Chiffres Indiens,* in Journal Asiatique, vi serie, tome i ; Prinsep's Indian Antiquities by Thomas, vol. n. p. 705 Chips from a German Workshop, vol. n. p. 289.

Pronunciation.

$ 2,2,. The Sanskrit letters should be pronounced in accordance with the transcription given page 4. The following rules, however, are to be observed : i. The vowels should be pronounced like the vowels in Italian. The short ^ a,

however, has rather the sound of the English a in ' America/ 2,. The aspiration of the consonants should be heard distinctly. Thus H kh is said, by English scholars who have learnt Sanskrit in India, to sound almost like kh in e inkhorn / ^ th like th in e pothouse / ifi ph like ph in ' topheavy / TI gh like gh in ' loghouse f V dh like dh in ' madhouse f H bh like bh in * Hobhouse/ This, no doubt, is a somewhat exaggerated description, but it is well in learning Sanskrit to distinguish from the first the aspirated from the unaspirated letters by pronouncing the former with an unmistakable emphasis.

3. The guttural ^ n has the sound of ng in * king/

4. The palatal letters ^ ch and *fj have the sound of ch in 'church' and

of j in 'join/

5. The lingual letters are said to be pronounced by bringing the lower

surface of the tongue against the roof of the palate. As a matter of fact the ordinary pronunciation of t, d, n in English is what Hindus would call lingual, and it is essential to distinguish the Sanskrit dentals by bringing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front-teeth. In transcribing English words the natives naturally represent the English dentals by their linguals, not by their own dentals ; e. g. fiX*^ Direktar, Jimi*U!d Gavarnment, &c. *

6. The Visarga, Jihvdmuliya and Upadhmdniya are not now articulated

audibly.

7. The dental ^r s sounds like s in ' sin/ the lingual "^ sh like sh in ' shun/

the palatal ^f § like ss in ' session/

* Biihler, Madras Literary Journal, February, 1864. Rajendralal Mitra, ' On the Origin of the Hindvi Language,' Journal of the Asiatic Society, Bengal, 1864, p. 509.

-$ 24. RULES OP SANDHI. 11

The real Anusvara is sounded as a very slight nasal, like n in French ' bon.* If the dot is used as a graphic sign in place of the other five nasals it must, of course, be pronounced like the nasal which it represents *.

CHAPTER IT.

RULES OF SANDHI OR THE COMBINATION OP LETTERS.

$ 23. In Sanskrit every sentence is considered as one unbroken chain of syllables. Except where there is a stop, which we should mark by interpunction, the final letters of each word are made to coalesce with the initial letters of the following word. This coalescence of final and initial letters, (of vowels with vowels, of consonants with consonants, and of consonants with vowels,) is called Sandhi.

As certain letters in Sanskrit are incompatible with each other, i. e. cannot be pronounced one immediately after the other, they have to be modified or assimilated in order to facilitate their pronunciation. The rules, according to which either one or both letters are thus modified, are called the rules of Sandhi.

As according to a general rule the words in a sentence must thus be glued together, the mere absence of Sandhi is in many cases sufficient to mark the stops which in other languages have to be marked by stops. Ex. ^

<<TMi H^Ht astvagnimdhdtmyam, indrastu devdndm mahattamah, Let there bte'the greatness of Agni; nevertheless Indra is the greatest of the gods.

Distinction between External and Internal Sandhi.

§ 24. It is essential, in order to avoid confusion, to distinguish between the rules of Sandhi which determine the changes of final and initial letters of words (pada), and between those other rules of Sandhi which apply to the final letters of verbal roots (dhdtu) and nominal bases (prdtipadikd) when followed by certain terminations or suffixes. Though both are based on the same phonetic principles and are sometimes identical, their application is different. For shortness3 sake it will be best to apply the name of External

* According to Sanskrit grammarians the real Anusvara is pronounced in the nose only, the five nasals by their respective organs and the nose. Siddh.-Kaum. to Pan. i. i, 9.

The real Anusvara is therefore ndsikya, nasal; the five nasals are anunasika, nasalized, i.e. pronounced by their own organ of speech, and uttered through the nose.

C 2

12 RULES OP EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 25-

Sandhi or Pada Sandhi to the changes which take place at the meeting of final and initial letters of words, and that of Internal Sandhi to the changes produced by the meeting of radical and formative elements.

The rules which apply to final and initial letters of words (pada) apply, with few exceptions, to the final and initial letters of the component parts of com- pounds, and likewise to the final letters of nominal bases (prdtipadika) when fol- lowed by the so-called Pacto-terminations («ri bhydm, fa: bhih, wr: bhyah, ?J su), or by secondary (taddhita) suffixes beginning with any consonants except ^ y.

The changes produced by the contact of incompatible letters in the body of a word should properly be treated under the heads of declension, conjugation, and derivation. In many cases it is far easier to remember the words ready-made from the dictionary, or the grammatical paradigms from the grammar, than to acquire the complicated rules with their numerous exceptions which are generally detailed in Sanskrit grammars under the head of Sandhi. It is easier to learn that the participle passive of fe^ lih, to lick, is cTte: lidhah, than to remember the rules according to which ^ + J^h + 1 are changed into ^ + TT dh -f t, 3 + ^ d + dh, and T + "%d + dh; ^ d is dropt and the vowel lengthened : while in «j(V^ + IT: parivrih + tafy, the vowel, under the same circumstances, remains short ; parivrih + tah = parivridh + tah, parivrid + dhah =parivrid + dhah = parivridhah. In Greek and Latin no rules are given with regard to changes of this kind. If they are to be given at all in Sanskrit grammars, they should, to avoid confusion, be kept perfectly distinct from the rules affecting the final and initial letters of words as brought together in one and the same sentence.

Classification of Vowels.

§ 25. Vowels are divided into short (hrasva), long (dirgha), and protracted (pluta) vowels. Short vowels have one measure (mdtrd), long vowels two, protracted vowels three. (Pan. i. 2, 27.) A consonant is said to last half the time of a short vowel.

1. Short vowels : ^ a, ^ iy T u, ^ ri, c£ li.

2. Long vowels : ^rr d, $t, "& d, ^ ri, u e, ^ ai, ^ft 0, ^ au.

3. Protracted vowels are indicated by the figure 3 3 ; ^r$ a 3, ^T 3 d 3, ^ 3 i 3,

^ 3 ^ 3) ^ 3 e 3> ^TC 3 ou 3. Sometimes we find ^r $ ^, a 3 i, instead of ^ 3, e 3 ; or ^n 3 ^, d 3 u, instead of ^ 3, au 3.

§ 26. Vowels are likewise divided into

1. Monophthongs (samdndkshara) : <* a, ^?T d, \it ^^u^H^ ri, ^ri, o£ li.

2. Diphthongs (sandhyakshara) : ^ e, ^ ai, ^ o, *$h au.

§ 27. All vowels are liable to be nasalized, or to become anundsika : ^fa,^f d.

-$ 33- BULBS OP EXTERNAL SANDHI. 13

J 28. Vowels are again divided into light (laghu) and heavy (guru). This division is important for metrical purposes only.

1. Light vowels are V a, ^ i, Tw,^ ri, 75 li, if not followed by a double consonant.

2. Heavy vowels are *? a, $ i, T» A, ^ r*, * *, * at, wt o, w> at/, and any

short vowel, if followed by more than one consonant. J 29. Vowels are, lastly, divided according to accent, into acute (udatta), grave (anudatta), and circumflexed (svarita). The acute vowels are pronounced with a raised tone, the grave vowels with a low, the circumflexed with an even tone. (Pan. i. 2, 29-32.) Accents are marked inVedic literature only.

Guna and Vriddhi.

J 30. Guna is the strengthening of «^ i, ^ z, 3" M, g; u, ^ ri, ^ ri, <$ It, by means of a preceding ^w a, which raises ^ i and ^ i to ^ e, ? u and n u to wt o, ^ ri and ^ ri to ^ ar, "& li to ^ al. (Pan. i. i, 2.)

By a repetition of the same process the Vriddhi (increase) vowels are formed, viz. ^ ai instead of F et ^n au instead of ^ft o, ^TTT dr instead of ^T ar, and ^n?^ dl instead of ^Tc5 al. (Pan. i. i, i.)

Vowels are thus divided again into :

1. Simple vowels :

2. Guna vowels:

3. Vriddhi vowels : w d *di (a-f a+i), ^aw (a+a+w),

J 31, ^T a and ^n a do not take Guna, or, as other grammarians say, remain unchanged after taking Guna. Thus in the first person sing, of the reduplicated perfect, which requires Guna or Vriddhi, ^i? han forms with Guna ^T^jaffhana, or with Vriddhi «niT«T jaghdna, I have killed.

Combination of Vowels at the end and beginning of words.

J 32. As a general rule, Sanskrit allows of no hiatus (vivritti) in a sentence. If a word ends in a vowel, and the next word begins with a vowel, certain modifications take place in order to remove this hiatus.

$ 33. For the purpose of explaining the combination of vowels, they may be divided into two classes :

1. Those which are liable to be changed into semivowels, ^ i, ^ i, "su, gi w,

^ ri> ^ & > also the diphthongs, * e, ^ at, ^ o, ^rr au.

2. Those which are not, ^r a, ^T d.

Calling the former liquid *, the latter hard vowels, we may say : If the

* The Pratis'akhya calls them ndmin, for a different reason ; see Rig-veda-pratis'akhja, ed. M. M., p. xxiii.

14 RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 34-

same vowel (long or short) occurs at the end and beginning of words, the result is the long vowel. (Pan. vi. i, 101.) Thus ^sr or ^rr + ^ or wr = ^n a + CL — d.

^ or ^ + 3[ or ^= ^ ? -{- £ — z.

£ c *

Ex. "3W ^Ttpraflf = ^IM-M^rd uktvd + apagachchhati = uktvdpagachchhati, having spoken he goes away.

ft nadi + idrisi = nadidrisi, such a river. = oJuNr kartri + riju — kartriju, doing (neuter) right.

kintu + udeti = kintudeti, but he rises. Or in compounds, *T^t 4- ^t = *T^$ri mahi + Uah — mahisah, lord of the earth. $ 34. If hard vowels (long or short) occur at the end of a word, and the next begins with a liquid vowel (except diphthongs), the result is Guna of the liquid vowel. (Pan. vi. I, 87.) Thus

£. ^ ^ / w *\

^T or ^TT + T or •gjm^ft a + u = o (du). ^T or ^3TT + ^ or ^= m d + ri = ar. (Pan. i. i, 5 ! •) Ex. cf^ ^5: = KT5;: tava + indrafy = tavendrah, thine is Indra.

^TT ^W1^ ^ftw sd + uktvd = soktvdy she having spoken. t *TT ^fe: = ^f%t sd + riddhih — sarddhih, this wealth.

rf^ oSoRT^: = ri^^Kt ^«v« + likdrah = tavalkdrah, thy letter /z. Or in compounds, <*1WJ + ^%J = <*l*-Mfy: kdmya-[-ishtih = kdmyeshtih, an

offering for a certain boon.

f^lT + ^M^i: = f^7ftaRf5K A^a + upadesah = hitopadesah, good advice. ^ 35. If hard vowels (long or short) occur at the end of a word, and the next begins with a diphthong, the result is Vriddhi. (Pan. vi. i, 88.) Thus ^T or ^rr H- ^ = ^ a + e = di. ^T or ^TT + 5j = $ d-{- di = di.

Ex. if^ H3 = i^( tava + eva = tavaiva, of thee only.

m + aikshishta = saikshishta, she saw.

* The letter ~3l U is left out, because it is of no practical utility. It is treated like ^ ri, only substituting c^ I for T r in Guna and Vriddhi. Thus "^-J- W*J<5Ni li -\-anubandhah becomes cTfJ^K lanubandhah, i. e. having U as indicatory letter.

t Some grammarians consider the Sandhi of a with ri optional, but they require the shortening of the long d. Ex. WSTT-f^jfa brahmd-\- rishik==?mfa Irahmarshih or W5f brahma rishih, Brahma, a Rishi.

-§37-

RULES OP EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.

15

r: = mrro: tava + oshthah = tavaushthah, thy lip. *TT TOT7W4»H»fl = *flrW*Hcf1 sd -f autsuky avail = sautfukyavatt, she desirous. Or in compounds, TJ*T -f ^R = tl^R rdma + aisvaryam = ramaibvaryam,

the lordship of Rama. *rfafT + WH«J = *X\A\m*l8itd + aupamyam = sitaupamyam, similarity with

Sita, the wife of Rama.

J 36. If a simple liquid vowel (long or short) occurs at the end of a word, and the next begins with any vowel or diphthong, the result is change of the liquid vowel into a semivowel. (Pan. vi. i, 77.) Thus

& or ^n = *T or TTT f or ^= ^ or ^ r or "31 = ^ or ^ r or *j = ^ or ^ SM or TOT = 'H or ^

!T or TOT = t or TJ [ or ^="ftc or ift r or -31 = ^ or ^

fft or TO^ = ^ or 5 J or TOT~^ or ^T ; or ^ = f% or ^ % or ^£= ^ or ^ [ or ^ = ^ or % sn or TOT = ^ or ^

e, ai = ye, yai. o, au = yo9 yau.

i=ri.'

ri \ t =

e9 ai = re, rat. L o, au = ro, ran.

or

= va.

Ex.

TH =

ri = vn. e, ai = ve, vai. L o, au = vo, van.

dadhi + atra = dadhyatra, milk here. kartri + uta = kartruta, doing moreover. madhu + iva = madhviva, like honey. = «f€U*4j nadi + aidasya — nadyaidasya, the river of A Ida. In compounds, t^ + ^f§ = tTirS nadi + artham = nadyartham9 for the sake

of a river.

Note — Some native grammarians allow, except in compounds, the omission of this Sandhi, but they require in that case that a long final vowel be shortened. Ex. ^ft "&& chakrf atra may be ^-sfcJW chakryatra or ^if^i ^T^ chakri atra.

§ 37. If a Guna- vowel occurs at the end of a word, and the next begins with any vowel or diphthong (except a), the last element of the Guna-vowel is changed into a semivowel. If a follows, a is elided, and no change takes place in the diphthong; see $ 41. (Pan. vi. i, 78.) Thus

^ (e) + any vowel (except a) = ^r^(ay).

^ (o) + any vowel (except a) = ^T^ (av).

16 KULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 38-

Ex. *rif -^MNsd. = *U?miJ|<ad. sakhe dgachchha = sakhay dgachchha, Friend, come !

sakhe iha = sakhayiha, Friend, here ! = TW%f^ prabho ehi =prabhavehi, Lord, come near !

llVRfav prabho aushadham=prabhavaushadham, Lord, medicine.

In compounds, ift + -|$i: = TT^H go + Uah = gavisafy. There are various exceptions in compounds where ift go is treated as *re gava. (§ 41.)

J 38. If a Vriddhi-vowel occurs at the end of a word, and the next begins with any vowel or diphthong, the last element is changed into a semivowel. (Pan. vi. i, 78.) Thus

% (ai) + any vowel = ^TH^ (ay), ^T (au) + any vowel = w^ (dv). Ex. fafl ^r§: = rwwS: sriyai arthah = sriydy arthah. friyai rite = sriydy rite.

H ravau astamite = ravdvastamite, after sunset.

m ^frf = 'rfTrMfrf tau iti ~ tdviti. In composition, tfr + ^T^ = "TR^ nau + artham = ndvartham, for the sake of

ships. § 39. These two rules, however, are liable to certain modifications :

1. The final i^y and ^v of^tnay, ^r^av, which stand according to rule for

?? e, ^ft o, may be dropt before all vowels (except a, $ 41) ; not, however, in composition. Thus most MSS. and printed editions change ^ '-HNI^ sakhe dgachchha, not into *K<WI-ed sakhay dgachchha, but into

TO WT35 sakha dgachchha.

TOf ^ sakhe iha, not into *R^fM^ sakhayiha, but into ^?T ^5 sakha iha. IWt nfe prabho ehi, not into TW%fi| prabhavehi, but into iw itf^prabha ehi. H*ft ^W prabho aushadham, not into TpT^rNv prabhavaushadham, but into TW WW prabha aushadham.

2. The final ^y of *%r*{dy, which stands for ^ di, may be dropt before all

vowels, and it is usual to drop it in our editions. Thus fo**l ^T§: sriyai arthah, is more usually written foRT ^: 6riyd arthah instead of ftsnrnr^t Sriydyarthah .

3. The final ^ v of ^rr^ dv, for ^ au, may be dropt before all vowels, but is

more usually retained in our editions. Thus ^ ^fir tau iti is more usually written rilfcPri tdviti, and not HT ^TT id iti.

Note— Before the particle T u the dropping of the final \y and \v is obligatory.

It is without any reason that the final ^y of Guna and Vriddhi and the final ^u of Guna are generally dropt, while the final ^v of Vriddhi is generally retained. It would be more consistent either always to retain the final semivowels or always to drop them. See Rig-veda-pratis'akhya, ed. M. M., Sutras 129, 132, 135 : Pan. vi. i, 78; vm. 3, 19.

-J 42. BULBS OP EXTERNAL SANDHI. 17

$ 40. In all these cases the hiatus, occasioned by the dropping of ^ y and ^ v, remains, and the rules of Sandhi are not to be applied again.

f 41. *T e and ^ 0, before short ^st a, remain unchanged, and the initial ^T a is elided. (Pan. vi. I, 109.) Ex. f$re ^ra = f^1 5 ?f &ve atra = 6ive 'tra, in S'iva there.

ipft WVJJj^liy = JWts *JJ]£HU prabho anugrihdna =prabho 'nugrihdna,

Lord, please.

In composition this elision is optional. (Pan. vi. i, 122.) Ex. ift + ^nar: = Jfts^rr: or jftwHli: go + a$vdh=go '6vdfy or go crfvdh, cows

and horses.

In some compounds iR gava must or may be substituted for ift go, if a vowel follows ; JNTHft gavdkshah, a window, lit. a bull's eye ; J^jg: gavendrah, lord of kine, (a name of Krishna) ; Jl^lf^'f or jftsftnf gavajinam or go 'jinam, a bull's hide.

Unchangeable Vowels (Pragrihya).

J 42. There are certain terminations the final vowels of which are not liable to any Sandhi rules. These vowels are called pragrihya (Pan. i. i, n) by Sanskrit grammarians. They are,

1. The terminations of the dual in ^ i, "gs ^, and ^ ey whether of nouns or

verbs.

Ex. oF^ft ^ kavi imau, these two poets, fhrrfr ^TTT giri etau, these two hills.

sddhd imau, these two merchants.

bandhu dnaya, bring the two friends. late ete, these two creepers. vidye ime, these two sciences.

baydte arbhakau, the two children lie down, t baydvahe dvdm, we two lie down. ydchete artham, they two ask for money.

Note — Exceptions occur, as HJi.^ mantva, i.e. JTTlft ^ mani wa, like two jewels ; <;Hfll<« dampatfoa, i.e. ^rtl ^ dampattiva, like husband and wife.

2. The terminations of ^^ ami and ^n^ffwtf, the nom. plur. masc. and the

nom. dual of the pronoun ^^ ados. (Pan. 1. 1, 12.) Ex. ^nft ^TOT: ami a$vdh, these horses, t ami ishavahy these arrows.

amd arbhakau, these two children. (This follows from rule i.)

18 EULES OF EXTEENAL SANDHI. § 43-

Irregular Sandhi.

§ 43. The following are a few cases of irregular Sandhi which require to be stated. When a preposition ending in ^r or ^TT a is followed by a verb beginning with Tj e or ^ o, the result of the coalescence of the vowels is ^ e or ^ft 0, not $ ai or ^r au. (Pan. vi. I, 94.) Ex. jf -f- 1T3TTT = JHT^ pra + ejate =prejate.

^TT + ^Wff = T^Nw upa + eshate = upeshate. U + ^^rfrr = iNlfif pra + eshayati —pr eshayati *. TO + TOfir = TJTJsrflT para + ekhati =parekhati. ^T + ^"WrT = ^iftafTT upa + oshati = uposhati. TO + ^f^frT = ^T^flT para + ohati =parohati.

This is not the case before the two verbs TT^ec?A, to grow, and 3[ «, to go, if raised by Guna to ^ e. (Pan. vi. i, 89.)

Ex. "3T + TJViT = "^Vff upa-\-edhate = upaidhate.

In verbs derived from nouns, and beginning with TT or ^ffr e or o, the elision of the final ^T or ^TT a of the preposition is optional.

§ 44. If a root beginning with ^j ri is preceded by a preposition ending in ^? a or ^rr a, the two vowels coalesce into WHC ur instead of ^ ar. (Pan. vi. i, 91.)

Ex. "SHr + ^<ed.frf = ^TTRtflf apa -f- richchhati = apdrchchhati. ^ft + ^Ullfff = vS^|iSlfri ava + rindti — avdrndti. IT + ^prff = in^rw pra + rijate —prdrjate. tm + ^qfff = TO^fa j9«m + rishati =pardrshati.

In verbs derived from nouns and beginning with ^ ri, this lengthening of the ^FT a of the preposition is optional. (Pan. vi. i, 92.)

In certain compounds ^TOT rinam, debt, and ^TlTt ritah, affected, take Vriddhi instead of Guna if preceded by ^aj H + ^$18 = TR^ pra+rinam=prdrnam, principal debt ; ^JW + ^CJ = ^fUMW rina+rinam = rindrnam, debt contracted to liquidate another debt ; ^ftW + ^Wt = ^n^l'^t soka-{-ritah-=sGkdrta.h, affected by sorrow. Likewise "3!^ uh, the substitute for ^Tf vdh, carrying, forms Vriddhi with a preceding ^ a in a compound. Thus f%^T-f "^t visva+uhah, the ace. plur. of fqiyqT^ visvavdh, is fmyi^: visvauhah. (Pan. vi. i, 89, vart.)

§ 45. If the initial ^ft o in ^Ft oshthah, lip, and Wtg* otuh, cat, is preceded in a com- pound by ^ or ^TTa, the two vowels may coalesce into ^5n au or ^ft o. (Pan. vi. i, 94, vart.) }Ex. ^WC + ^fVffl = '^IMClSt or viMOst adhara+ oshthah =.adharaushtJiah or adharoshthah,

the lower lip. ^y<*) + ^rVfft = W^T?n or t^^lrft sthula-\-otuh = sthulautuh or sthulotuh, a big cat.

* In nouns derived from U^ ^res^, the rule is optional. Ex. ifa? or 9*51 preshya or praisJiya, a messenger. IR presha, a gleaner, is derived from ITp-a and ^[&A.

-§ 51. RULES OP EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 19

If *iW oshtha and WlJ o/a are preceded by ^ or ^JT a in the middle of a sentence, they follow the general rule.

Ex. *T*T + ^ffat = THTOJ mama + oshthaJi = mumau8ht hah, my lip. § 46. As irregular compounds the following are mentioned by native grammarians : "Sat svairam, wilfulness, and Jflfi^roairtfi, self-willed, from ^f + ^ ma+ira. »2f«fliy<UT akshauhini, a complete army, from ^ftlf 4- ^tfigil aksha -\-uhini.

: praudhah, from IT 4- TO? pra+ddhah, full-grown. j^ HT?[: prauhati, investigation, from IT + "31^: pr a -\-uhah.

ifa praishah, a certain prayer, from IT -f '&?. pra + eshah. (See § 43.) uW. praishyah, a messenger.

§ 47. The final ^ft o of indeclinable words is not liable to the rules of Sandhi. (Pan. 1. 1,15.) Ex. "SHft ^nrf^ aho apehi, Halloo, go away !

§ 48. Indeclinables consisting of a single vowel, with the exception of Vf d (§ 49), arc not liable to the rules of Sandhi. (Pan. i. i, 14.)

Ex. ^ ^ i indra, Oh Indra ! T <3H^| u umesa, Oh lord of Uma ! ^TT ^^"a evam, Is it so indeed ?

§ 49. If ^TT<2 (which is written by Indian grammarians W^ dh) is used as a preposition before verbs, or before nouns in the sense of so far as' (inclusively or exclusively) or a little,' it is liable to the rules of Sandhi. Ex. ^\ ^U|lMli^= ^mmHTf^a adhyayandt=ddhyayandt, until the reading begins.

^||f^a ekadesdt = aikadesdt, to a certain place. n = ^ I d\ P«l ri d dlochitam = dlochitam, regarded a little. d ushnam = oshnam, a little warm.

^TT ^l^ = *f» d ihi = ehi, come here.

If ^TT d is used as an interjection, it is not liable to Sandhi, according to § 48. Ex. ^TT ^ f^R7 (TiT d, evam kila tat, Ah, — now I recollect, — it is just so.

§ 50. Certain particles remain unaffected by Sandhi. Ex. ^ ^£ he indra. Oh Indra.

§ 51. A protracted vowel remains unaffected by Sandhi, because it is always supposed to stand at the end of a sentence. (Pan. vi. i, 125 ; viu. 2, 82.) Ex. ^ei^rU $ I ^f^ devadattd 3 ehi, Devadatta, come here !

D 2

20

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

48

^

T.

**'

IW'

tr

F

1

tfr

tr*

5s;

UTS-

fcr"

r

S

S-

1C"

« I

ft

s

I

§»

»

1 e 5*1*

•c 'C-

s; a

W

- I

& &

•C. 'C.

ur

P

*

9 f

"C "*•

,l" T!S

rfip* p

$1

I I

ri

t**

tvf

p

-$54- EXTERNAL SANDHI. 21

Combination of Final and Initial Consonants.

$ 53. Here, as in the case of vowels, the rules which apply to the final consonants of words following each other in a sentence are equally applicable to the final consonants of words following each other in a compound. The final consonants of nominal bases too, before the so-called Pa</a-terminations (wit bhydrn, fa bhih, wi: bhyah, g su) and before secondary (taddhita) suffixes beginning with any consonant but i^ y, are treated according to the same rules. But the derivatives formed by means of these and other suffixes are best learnt from the dictionary in their ready-made state ; while the changes of nominal and verbal bases ending in consonants, before the terminations of declension and conjugation and other suffixes, are regulated by different laws, and are best acquired in learning by heart the principal paradigms of nouns and verbs.

J 54. In order to simplify the rules concerning the changes of final consonants, it is important to state at the outset that eleven only out of the thirty-five consonants can ever stand in Sanskrit at the end of a word ; viz. «^ k, ^ n, ^t, is^n, j^t, "^n, ^/?, i{m, <^ /, : h, • m.

1. There are five classes of consonants, consisting of five letters each ;

thus giving twenty-five. In every one of these five classes the aspirates, if final, are replaced by their corresponding unaspirated letters: ^M by ^ k / -^ gh by IT g ; ^ chh, however, not by ^ ch, but by 7 /, &c. Ex. f^ y PC* ^ chitralikh, painter; voc. fad fc«5 «^ cldtralik. This reduces the twenty-five letters to fifteen.

2. In every class the sonant (J 58) letters, if final, are replaced by their cor-

responding surd letters; i\^g by c^Ar; ^d by TT£, &c. Ex. ^ hnd, heart ; nom. ^ir hrit. This reduces the fifteen to ten *.

3. No palatal ^ch can ever be final; hence the only remaining palatal,

the ^cA, is replaced by the corresponding guttural ^ k f. Ex. '^T^vdch, speech; voc. "^T^vdk. Final *{n does not occur. This reduces the ten to eight. In a few roots the final *^/ is replaced by a lingual instead of a guttural.

4. Of the semivowels, (TI y, T r, <^ /, \v3)^l is the only one that is found at

the end of words. This raises the eight to nine letters.

5. "^ h cannot be final, but is changed into ^t / sometimes into ^ k or K^t.

* Some grammarians allow the soft or sonant letters as final, but the MSS. and editions generally change them into the corresponding hard letters.

t The only exceptions are technical terms such as "3^ acfc, a vowel ; -*»in; ajantah, ending in a vowel, instead of ^^t?n agantah.

22 EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 55-

6. Of the sibilants, the only one that is found at the end of words is Visarga. For, radical v^sh cannot be final, but is replaced by £ 1. Thus fg^dvish becomes fgz^dvit. In a few words final "S sh is changed into cir k. Radical ^s cannot be final, but is replaced by £ t. Thus f^^vis becomes

fe<T vit. In some words final ^rs is changed into cF k. (§ 174.) Final radical ^ s is treated as Visarga. The Visarga, therefore, raises the nine to ten ; and the Anusvara, to eleven

letters, the only ones that can ever stand at the end of real words. Hence the rules of Sandhi affecting final consonants are really reduced to eleven heads.

$ 55. It is important to observe that no word in Sanskrit ever ends in more than one consonant, the only exception being when an T r precedes a final radical tenuis cjf &, 7tf, i^t, T^p. Thus

If = ^fsfH^ abibhar + t = abibhar, 3. p. sing. impf. of H bhri, to carry. ^rfe*n: abibhar + s = abibhar, 2. p. sing. impf. of H bhri, to carry. = ^p<^ suvalg + s = suval, nom. sing, well jumping. But "3fi(r urk, strength, nom. sing, of ^f^ urj.

avarivart, 3. p. sing. impf. intens. of ^ff vrit'OT ^^vridh. amdrt, from ?n^ mrij. (Pan. vin. 2, 24.) The nom. sing, of fqpjft*(chikfrsh is f%«sh chikih, because here the r is not followed by a tenuis.

Classification of Consonants.

§ 56. Before we can examine the changes of final and initial consonants, according to the rules of external Sandhi, we have to explain what is meant by the place and the quality of consonants, i. The throat, the palate, the roof of the palate, the teeth, the lips, and the

nose are called the places or organs of the letters. (See $ 4.) a. By contact between the tongue and the four places, — throat, palate, roof, teeth, — the guttural, palatal, lingual, and dental consonants are formed. Labial consonants are formed by contact between the lips.

3. In forming the nasals of the five classes the veil which separates the

nose from the pharynx is withdrawn *. Hence these letters are called Anundsika, i. e. co-nasal or nasalized.

4. The real Anusvara is formed in the nose only, and is called Ndsikya, i. e.

nasal.

5. The Visarga is said to be pronounced in the chest (urasya) ; the three or

five sibilants in their respective places.

* Lectures on the Science of Language, Second Series, p. 145.

- $ 59- EXTERNAL SANDHI. 23

6. The semivowels, too, are referred to these five places, and three of them, ly> <* l> iv* can be nasalized, and are then called Anundsika. (3, <$, ^, or 4, <*,^, y, /*, v.) *r cannot be nasalized in Sanskrit. $ 57. According to their quality (prayatna*, effort) letters are divided into,

1. Letters formed by complete contact (sjmshta) of the organs: "*k, wM,

Tiff, Vffh, Trc; *ch, -^chh9 *lj, T$j/i, *tn; */, 7#, T<£ *dh, *r n ; K /, ^f /A, ^d, vdh^n ; TJ/?, iR/?A, * b, * bh, urn. These are called Spar&a in Sanskrit, and, if they did not comprehend the nasals, would correspond to the classical mutes.

2. Letters formed by slight contact (ishat sprishta): ^y, *r, <* /, ^ v (not ^ h).

These are called A ntahsthd (fern.), i.e. intermediate between Sparsas and Cshmans, which has been freely translated by semivowel or liquid.

3. Letters formed by slight opening (ishad vivrita) : X X» ^^» ^8^ * *>

o (f>} ^ h. These are called Cshman (flatus) in Sanskrit, which may be rendered by sibilant or flatus.

4. Vowels are said to be formed by complete opening (vivrita)^. § 58. A second division, according to quality, is,

1. Surd letters : ^R &, ^ kh, ^ch, -^chhy zt, *th, *£, Vth, vp, TXph; X X>

^T ^, W sh9 Its, X $* an(i Visarga : h. In their formation the glottis is open. They are called Aghosha, non-sonant.

2. Sonant letters : JT#, Vffh, ^/, T(jh, ^d^dh, ^ d, vdh, ib, *bh, *n,*n9

3JT n9 "f n, »T m ; ^ h, ny, T^r, T5/, "3V, the Anusvara * m, and all vowels. In their formation the glottis is closed. They are called Ghoshavat. J 59. Lastly, consonants are divided, according to quality, into,

1. Aspirated (mahdprdna) : ^ kh, Tf ffh, "^chh, "%jh9 7 th, "% dh, "nth, v dh9

T*ph, * bh; X X, ^ &, V shy * s, g 0; ^ h; the Visarga : h and Anusvara * m.

2. Unaspirated (alpaprdna) : all the rest.

It will be seen, therefore, that the change of ^ch into ^ k is a change of place, and that the change of ^ch into ^J is a change of quality ; while in the

* Sanskrit grammarians call this ^i*sn<; M«4<7t. dbhyantarah prayatnah, mode of articu- lation preparatory to the utterance of the sound, and distinguish it from «M*I; HM<^; rdhyah prayatnah, mode of articulation at the close of the utterance of the sound, which produces the qualities of surd, sonant, aspirated, and unaspirated, as explained in § 58, 59.

t Some grammarians differ in their description of the degrees of closing or opening of the organs. Some ascribe to the semivowels duhsprishta, imperfect contact, or ishadasprishta, slight non-contact, or fshadvivrita, slight opening ; to the sibilants nemasprishta, half-contact, i.e. greater opening than is required for the semivowels, or vivrita, complete opening ; while they require for the vowels either vivrita, complete opening, or asprishta, non-contact. Siddh.- Kaum. vol. I. p. 10. Rig-veda-pratis'. xin. 3. In the Atharva-veda-pratisakhya i. 33. we ought to read ^fiS^JI? eke 'sprishtam instead of ^«5 FJT? eke sprishtam.

24 EXTEENAL SANDHI. § 60-

transition of ^ ch into TT g, or of TT^ into IT n, we should have a change both of place and of quality.

§ 60. The changes which take place by the combination of the eleven final letters with initial vowels or consonants may be divided therefore into two classes.

Final letters are changed, I . with regard to their places or organs, 2. with regard to their quality.

i. Changes of Place.

§ 61. The only final consonants which are liable to change of place are the Dentals, the Anusvara, and Visarga. The Dentals, being incompatible with Palatals and Linguals, become palatal and lingual before these letters. Anusvara and Visarga adapt themselves as much as possible to the place of the letter by which they are followed. All other changes of final consonants are merely changes of quality ; these in the case of Dentals, Anusvara, and Visarga, being superadded to the changes of place.

$ 62. Final ^ t before palatals (^ ch, "^ chh, *(j,T£Jh, *T n, SIN 3) is changed into a palatal. (Pan. vm. 4, 40.) Ex. •fTW + ^ = 1TW tat + cha = tachcha, and this.

TFrT + f^Rf% = ri (W'H (Vf tat + chhinatti = tachchhinatti, he cuts this.

TTfT + SJJUlfri = W^sniflPd' tat + srinoti = tachsrinoti, he hears this *.

rTcT + ^rnT^1 = d-nJUH tat + jay ate = tajjdyate, this is born. The final

7^ t is changed into ^ ch and then into ^ j according to $ 66. In composition, «T»r?T + WlfT= WTWifT jagat +jetd =jagajjetd, conqueror of

the world.

The same change would take place before an initial T(jh; and before an initial >r n, i^t might become either *{j or *{n. (§ 68.)

§ 63. Final »T n before *{j, T^jh, *{n, and 3^ is changed to palatal >^n. Ex. Trif^ + »nrfir = rtiy^frf tan +jayati = tdnjayati, he conquers them. (Pan. vin. 4, 40.)

Note — Rules on the changes of final »f» before ^cA, TS^chh, and "S^s will be given hereafter. See § 73, 74.

j 64. Final i^t before 7#, 7 th, T d, ^ dh, w n (not \sh, Pan. vm. 4, 43) is changed into a lingual. (Pan. vm. 4, 41.) Ex. TTif + T*Tff = TT!"qTT tat +dayate = taddayate. The final T{t is changed

into T t and then into ^ d according to <J 66. In composition, ffff + ^^1 = 1^^1 tat + tikd = tattikd, a gloss on this.

t etat + thakkurah = etatthakkurah, the idol of him.

* ST 4, according to § 92, is generally changed to "$ chh : ri^lififri tachchhrinoti.

-J 66. EXTERNAL SANDHI. 25

The same change would take place before an initial *4h; and before an initial us n, l^t might become either "^d or ^ n. (J 68.)

§ 65. Final ^n before ^ <L, ^ <fh, u^n (not \sh, Pan. vin. 4, 43) IB changed to ^w.

Ex. *J£N^ 4- *!*H: = fl^llKItu: mahdn + ddmarah = mahdrufdmarah, a great uproar.

Note — Rules on the changes of «Jn before ^( and fyh (not ^*A) will be given hereafter (§ 74). The changes of place with regard to final Anusvara (m) and Visarga (A) will be explained together with the changes of quality to which these letters are liable.

2. Changes of Quality. J 66. Sonant initials require sonant finals.

Surd initials require surd finals.

As all final letters (except nasals and ^ I) are surd, they remain surd before surds. They are changed into their corresponding sonant letters before sonants.

As the nasals have no corresponding surd letters, they remain unchanged in quality, though followed by surd letters, unless the contact can be avoided by inserting sibilants.

Examples : i. oFA; before sonants, changed into i^ff:

samyak + uktam = samyaguktam, Well said !

dhik + dhanagarvitam = dhigdhanagarvitam, Fie on the purse-proud man ! In composition, f^cfi + 7r»f : = fyj|*{: dik + gajafc = diggajah, an elephant

supporting the globe at one of the eight points of the compass. Before Pada- terminations: f^«fi + f*Tt = f^fmidik + bhih = e%£At#,instrum.plur. Before secondary suffixes beginning with consonants, except ^ y : TT^ +

fin^= cnfj*^ vdk -f min = vagmin, eloquent *. 3. Zt before sonants, changed into ^d:

+ ^R = tfwi&qparivrdt + ay am =parivrddayam9 he is a mendicant. + ^^flf = M fild I ^fi Pd parivrdt + hasati =parivrdd hasati, the mendi- cant laughs; (also qftjU^ T^aflf parivrdd dhasati. J 70.) In composition, Mf^dl'^ + f*fij[ = wf^dir^Jci parivrdt + mitram =: parivrd4mi-

tram, a beggar's friend.

Before Pada -terminations : qfXdl? + ^Tt = irfX'ailj: parivrdt + bhih =pari- vrddbhify.

* Panini is driven to admit a suffix gmin instead of win, in order to prevent the nasaliza- tion of the final consonant of vdch; cf. Pan. vin. 4, 45, v&rt.

E

26' EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 67-

before sonants, changed into

kakup + atra = kakubatra, a region there, (inflectional base '3ftt^kakubh.)

= ^T3TJ: ajo + ghatah = abghatah, a water-jar. ^HT + »nK = ^M*K ap -\-jayah = abjayah, obtaining water. may ah = ammayah, watery. (§ 69.)

+ bhih = kakubbhih, instrum. plur.

before sonants, changed into <* d, except before sonant palatals and linguals> when (according to $ 62) it is changed into *(J and T$:

+ ^3 = *rft^W sarit + atra = saridatra, the river there. »R1T + ^r: = *lJ|<fl3i; jagat + Uah =jagadisah, lord of the world. : mahat + dhanuh = mahaddhanuh, a large bow. mahat + 6A^ = mahadbhih, instrum. plur.

•ff / before sonant palatals, changed into "S^/: see $62:

*rfci^-f 'STF? = *cftWc3 sarit +jalam = sarijjalam, water of the river.

II t before sonant linguals, changed into T d: see $ 62 :

^W?T + TRT: = ^rf|THT:t etat + ddmarah, = etadddmarah, the uproar of them.

Note — There are exceptions to this rule, but they are confined to Taddhita derivatives which are found in dictionaries. Thus final Tt^t before the possessive suffixes Tt^maf, ^i(vat, fV»Ttfw, 3c5 vala is not changed. Ex. fq^rt^ + ^^= fa^i*i \vidyut + ca^ = vidyutvat, possessed of lightning. Final ^ s too, which represents Visarga, remains unchanged before the same Taddhitas. Thus TT»f^ + f^T«T= IMftjl t^<c/as+rtn= tejasvin, instead of H »ft f«4 H^ t ej ovin j see § 84. 3. WlTn*^ + HW = 'aifi Pri1^ 1(fyotis-}-mat=jyotishmat, instead of **4\fa*i!{jyotirmat; § 84. (Pan. I. 4, ip?)

J 67. Additional changes take place if the final surds ^ k, 7 t, T{t, ^p are followed by initial nasals, chiefly ^ n and H m. The nasals being sonant, they require the change of o^ k, ^ t, Ji^t, and "q jo into JT g, T d, ^ d, and ^ ^>; but these final sonants may be further infected by the nasal character of the initial nasals, and may be written ^ n9 ^ n, ^ n, *{m. (Pan. viu. 4, 45.) Ex. f^oF + »TPT: = f^nn: or f^ni: dik + ndgah — dignagafy or dihndgah,

a world-elephant.

'Tvf^ + 7Tff7T = nvfej|fif or H^f^rt^ madhulit + nardati = madhu- lidnardati or madhulinnardati, the bee hums.

: or ^NTVJ: jagat + ndthah ^jagadndthah, or jagan- ndthah, lord of the world. -

or *%&$ ap + nadi = abnadi or amnadi, water-river. -f- H^: = TTT^^: or m^TO: prdk + mukhah =prdgmukhah or prdnmu- khah, facing the east.

or ^^ bhavat+matam = bhavadmatam or b vanmatam, your opinion.

-§ 72. EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 27

Note — If a word should begin with a guttural, palatal, or lingual n (^ «, *^ff, or then a final T^/ would change its place or organ at the same time that it became a nasal. It would become "^ /i, *^fl, or ^n. There are, however, no words in common use beginning withTri, *f3, or Tffn.

§ 68. Before the suffix TO maya and before HTO mdtra the change into the nasal is not optional, but obligatory. (Pan. vm. 4, 45, vart.)

Ex. ^T^T + *HI = ^T^pT rdk-\-mayam=. vdhmayam, consisting of speech.

*Ojf<$^ + *n^ = wfrt<i»iid madhulit+mdtram = mntlhulinmdtram, merely a bee. •HI -f- TTpT = CT*HI^ tat-}- mdtram = tanmdtram, element. Note — Ninety-six is always muqfif shannavati, never Mflliqfrt shadnavati.

§ 69. The initial ^ h, if brought into immediate contact with a final ^ Jt (*ty), ^ ( (\<f)t 1(f (1 ^)f ^P (^^)> ^ commonly, not necessarily, changed into the sonant aspirate of the class of the final letter, viz. into Igh, "Zdh, VrfA, H6A. (Pan. vm. 4, 62.)

Ex. fVcf + ^(Vsrit = ftl'^tW'iJ or fvrirfttnfl dhik-\-hastinah=dhighastinah or dhiggha$- tinah, Fie on the elephants !

"Q HC3T7 -f ^1H = ^fCsfT^Tft or ^iVctrsFn! parivrdt -j- hut ah ^parivrddhaiah or jjari-

vrdddhatah, the mendicant is killed.

inr + "?iT = W^.Sff or TTSTiT tat-\-hutam= tadhutam or taddhutam, this is sacrificed. ^T^-f- ^<<i( = ^i «3«u or vi«H«u ap+haranam = abharanam or abbharanam, water-

fetching.

J 70. if ^ before c^£ is not changed into <* d, but into <^/. (Pan. vm. 4, 6O.)1 Ex. Wf^4- 75W = TTWW ^«^ + labdham = tallabdham, this is taken.

^T^+ c3c3T? = ^d'cftl? brihat + laldtam = brihallaldtam, a large fore- head.

J 71. Final T^TI before <^ / is changed into <^/; but this c^/ is pronounced through the nose, and is written with the Anusvara dot over it. It is usual in this case to write the Anusvara as a half-moon, called Ardha-chandra. Ex. H^l^+ HTH: = Hgl|fl*T: mahdn + Idbhah = mahdl Idbhah, large gain.

J 72. Final ^ n, ur n, and tT n, preceded by a short vowel and followed by any vowel, are doubled. (Pan. vm. 3, 32.)

Ex. vre^-f ^ng: = >n^*Sf: dhdvan + asvah =. dhdvannaSvah, a running horse. U7TT + ^rr^" = HW^I^d pratyah + dste = pratyahhdste, he sits turned

toward the west.

*J*TW 4- ^mir = gnWT^ sugan + dste = suganndste, he sits counting well *. If ^ n, T^ n, and ^ n are preceded by a long vowel and followed by any vowel, no change takes place. Ex. ^SThT + ^idgma kavin + dhvayasva, call the poets.

* Technical terms like ^tUlty unddi, a list of suffixes beginning with un, or filTW tihanta, words ending in tin, are exempt from this rule. See also Wilkins, Sanskrita Grammar, §30.

E 2

28 EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 73-

J 73. Final "^n before initial cp k, ^kh, and IT p, T§ph, remains unchanged. Final tT w before ^(ch, "^ chh, requires the intercession of 5^s. Final f^n before T ty ^ th, requires the intercession of "^sh. Final 7^ n before I(t9 i(th9 requires the intercession of ^s. (Pan.

vin. 3, 7.)

Before these inserted sibilants the original ^w is changed to Anusvara. Ex. ^n^+^flRTC^^^aRTR hasan + chakdra = hasam$chakdra, he did it

laughing. *Tre«^+ '$Tn: = vrf^gNH dhdvan + chhdgah = dhdvamschhdgah, a run-

ning goat. tq^TT + frfjvr: = ^cfffefpr: chalan + tittibhah — chalamshtittibhah, a

moving tittibha-bird. HgR + Tips = H^i»a<: mahdn + thakkurah = mahdmshthakkurafi, a great

idol. "^1^+ IT^t = HAW^:patan + taruh, =patamstaruh} a falling tree.

Note — TT^nw prasdm, quiet, forms the nom. U$| ['^prasdn ; but this final «^n, being the representation of an original *^w, is not allowed before "^ch, ^chh, 7f, ^th, T^t, ^th to take a sibilant. Ex. *K^H*t + fW«iTfif = H^lTi%*ltrfT prasdn -\-chinoti =prasdnchinoti; not »firrr prasdmschinoti. (Pan. vin. 3, 7.)

J 74. Final ^ n and ^n may be followed by initial "5{s, ^shy^s without causing any change ; but it is optional to add a OF k after the ^ n and a ^ # after the HT n. Thus T$F nsa becomes ^r nksa (or ljr§ nkchha, § 92) ; ^ W5^a becomes ^ nksha; ^T w^a becomes »^r nksa; TT$T ?M« becomes ntsa (or TP"5 ntchha); TR ws^a becomes K?TR ntsha; ^T ws# becomes /5fl. (Pan. vin. 3, 28.)

Ex. TTTT + ^W^Trr^^W or Wl^iJM (or Mli^ri) prdn + sete=prdnsete or prdnksete (or prdnkchhete).

or *pni#*rcfr sugan + sarati = sugansarati or

$ 75. The same rule applies to final 7^ w before . s^ ^ and ^ s, but not before \sh, where it remains unchanged. Before 3^ s it is first changed into palatal ^ n* (^ 63) ; and ^ ns may again be changed to 355^ nchs, s«5 nchchh (J 72, 92), or 's^nchh. Before ^s, f^n may remain unchanged, or -^(ns may be changed into '^nts. (Pan. vin. 3, 30.) Ex. rTHT -f "^7 = ifT^M? /a/z + shat = tdnshat, those six.

or rfincci* or rti>«aLic*>i« or ni>€tirti^f

tan + sdrddldn = tdn&drduldn or tdnchsdrduldn or tdnchchhdrduldn or tdnchhwrddldn, those tigers. (Pan. vni.3, 31.)

* To allow «^w to remain unchanged before ^s was a mere misprint in Benfey's large grammar, and has long been corrected by that scholar.

-$ 77- EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 29

or HlfH^rt tan + sahate = tdnsahate or tdnttahate,

he bears them.

f^ (fi[^) + *J = f^g or H$rr« Ain (hints) + *M = /a//*w or hintsu, among enemies. (The base f^9[ hims, before the *J su of the loc. plur., is treated as a Pada.) See J 53, 55.

J 76. A final ^ f before ^a must remain unchanged, and if t may be inserted. Ex. TO + *finr. = MZ«fCff: or M^rHiXd: shat + saritafy = shatsaritah or shatjsa- ritaht six rivers. (Pan. vm. 4, 42 ; 3, 29.)

Anusvdra and Final i^m.

$77. i^m at the end of words remains unchanged if followed by any initial vowel.

Ex. f^T -f ^ra kim + atra = faHd kimatra, What is there ? Before consonants it may, without exception, be changed to Anusvara. (Pan. vm. 3, 23.)

This is the general rule. The exceptions are simply optional (Pan. vm.

4> 59)> v12-

Before ^ £, -^kh, i{</9 \gh> ^n> t^e fin&l *^m or Anusvara may be changed into ^ n.

Before ^ch, -&chh, *{j, T^jh, *{n, to ^n.

Before 7/, ^th, ^d, ^dhy iffw, to Tffw.

Before tt^t, ^th9 ^d, ^dh, ^w, to ^n.

Before ^p9 T^ph, ^b, ^bh9 ^m, to urn.

Before T{y9 7^1, ^v, to ^y, ^T, 1(v. See J 56. 6.

Hence it follows that final J^m may be changed into Anusvara before all consonants, and must be so changed only before si s, \sh, ^s, ^h, and ^r, i. e. the five consonants which have no corresponding nasal class-letter.

It would be most desirable if scholars would never avail themselves of the optional change of final Anusvara into ^», ^ n, H^n, «^n, *TN?n. We should then be spared a number of compound letters which are troublesome both in writing and printing ; and we should avoid the ambiguity as to the original nature of these class-nasals when followed by initial sonant palatals, linguals, and dentals. Thus if 1R *H4fH tarn jayati, he conquers her, is ' written riiy^fri tan jayati, it may be taken for WT^ ^^fri fan jayati, he conquers them, which, according to § 63, must be changed into m^qPn tan jayati. In the same manner tan damayati may be either UTT ^*iMfn tan damayati, he tames them, or TITT

tarn damayati, he tames her. All this uncertainty is at once removed if final \m is always changed into Anusvara, whatever be the initial consonant of the following word.

Ex. fcwv+ oM>fa = f% ohOfM (or fa^OfM) kim + karoshi = kirk karoshi (or

kin karoshi), What doest thou ?

^T 4- ^ = 5RJ ^ff? (or ^Tf^%) satrum +jahi = satrumjahi (or satrun jahi), kill the enemy.

30 EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 78-

— :«T^f IRflf (or r^^Tfncfif) nadim -f tarati = nadiih tarati (or tarati), he crosses the river.

N + H H frl = g% «T*rfifr (or *T^wrfir) gurum -\-namati-gurum namati (or gurun namati), he salutes the teacher. far* + Tfic5 = fa W5 (or PcM-Mie^) kirn + phalam = kiih phalam (or kirn

phalam), What is the use ? 31HdH + *ftafaff = STT^1 *rfafaffi (or ^n^Ffhrni'ff) sdstram + mimdmsate =

bdstram mimdmsate (or sdstram mimdmsate), he studies the book. Before i^y, e^/, ^v.1

^H^CH + TTTfrf = TR?rt TTfcf (or ^RT^iiffr) satvaram +ydti = satvaram ydti (or satvaray ydti), he walks quickly.

+ c5HW = frot cW^ (or fwrS"^) vidydm + labhate = vidydm la-

^

(or vidydl labhate), he acquires wisdom. TO + $^ = 7 ^ (or 1T^^) tarn + veda — tarn veda (or tav veda), I

know him. Before ^r, ^s, \sh, T^S, ^h:

flR^T]r^+ Or^fd = «R^T!J Xtf^fw karunam + roditi = karunam roditi, he cries

piteously. 3luimraN+3r? = $|aimf $ff sayydydm-\-sete=-sayydydm sete, he lies on

the couch. *fft^r 4- ^%1T = iftet ir^H moksham + 5eve/a = moksham seveta, let a man

cultivate spiritual freedom. TVT^+^rfw = Tgt '^ufif madhuram + hasati = madhuram hasati, he

laughs sweetly.

$ 78. Jf^m at the end of a word m pausd, i. e. at the end of a sentence, is pronounced as m, not as Anusvara. It may be written, however, for the sake of brevity, with the simple dot ($ 8, note), and it is so written through- out in this grammar. Ex. *r=r evam, thus, (or T&ft^evam.)

$ 79. Final ^m before ^ h, if^h be immediately followed by ^n9 *^w, \y> <^ ^> ^[ v> may be treated as if it were immediately followed by these letters (Pan. vin. 3, 26; 27). See, however, J 77. Ex. foiw + Fff= f$ ^W or fofi^ff kim + A/iw^e = A:z/^ hnute or Am hnute, What

does he hide ? f^ + ^r: = f^; -3: or foh^: ^m + hyah — kim hyah or kiy hyah, What

about yesterday \ f^TH + ^Tc^rfif = f% ^TH^firT or fch'i^rM^fir kim + hmalayati = kim hmalayati

or kimhmalayati, What does he move ?

J 80. If ^ Ari is preceded by the preposition ^T sam, an ^[ s is inserted, and Hm changed to Anusvara. (Pan. VT. i, 137; vin. 3, 2—5.) Ex. TO + cpn: = Tlff: 5am + kritah = samskritah, hallowed.

-J 83. EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 31

$ 81. In WTr^ samrdj, nom. fmi^ samrdt, king, i^ m is never changed. (Pan. vin. 3, 25.)

Visarga and Final ^s and ^r.

$ 82. The phonetic changes of final sibilants, which are considered the most difficult, may be reduced to a few very simple rules. It should only be borne in mind :

1. That there are really five sibilants, and not three ; that the signs for the

guttural and labial sibilants became obsolete, and were replaced by the two dots (:) which properly belong to the Visarga only, i. e. to the unmodified sibilant.

2. That all sibilants and Visarga are surd, and that their proper corresponding

sonant is the ^ r.

§ 83. The only sibilant which can be final in pausd is the Visarga. If Visarga is followed by a surd letter, it is changed into the sibilant of that class to which the following surd letter belongs, provided there is a sibilant.

It should be observed, however, that the guttural and labial sibilants are now written by : h, and that the same sign may also be used instead of any sibilant, if followed by a sibilant.

Ex. mr. + ^TC = Hif: ^FTC (originally cHT X ^w:) tatafy + kamab = tatah kdmah

(originally tata% kdmah), hence love.

^jS: + ^: = MJ§^£: purnah + chandrah = purnaS chandrah, the full moon.

W = riOw*n taroh + chhdyd = taros chhdyd, the shade of the tree.

T. -f 375f7f = WlriEMfri bhitah + talati = bhitashtalati, the frightened man is disturbed.

T^t: = HH«^: bhagnah + thakkurah = bhagnashthakkurah, the broken idol.

r: -f fftt = «nrreftt nadydfy + tiram = nadydsttram, the border of the river.

tnt=TOT: mt (originally TOTX^ni) nadydh+pdram = nadydk par am (originally nadyd <f>pdram), the opposite shore of a river. Visarga before sibilants (Pan. vin. 3, 36):

H 4- f^: = *prf35TST: or grr: f^rsj: suptah + &isuh = supta& tiiuh or suptah bisuh, the child sleeps.

t or shoda&ah or bhdgaJj, shodasah, a sixteenth part.

: or inw: *ni: prathamafy sargah or prathamah sargah, the first section.

32 EXTERNAL SANDHI. § 84-

Note i — If Visarga is followed by an initial ?f( ts, it is not changed into dental ^s, but remains Visarga, as if followed by ^s. (Pan. vm. 3, 35.)

Ex. ^HK + rovPff = $T3t W^Pff sathah+tsarati = sathah tsarati, a wicked man cheats. «FJ + W^J = «K W^J kah-\-tsaruh = kah tsaruh, Which is the handle of the sword ?

Note 2 — If, on the contrary, Visarga is followed by a sibilant with a surd letter, the Visarga is frequently dropt in MSS. (Pan. vm. 3, 36, vart.)

Ex. t^TC + ^ej = ^Tt ^r or ^^T <W devdh-\-stha=.devdh stka or devd stha, you are gods;

(also <^IH?i| devds stha.)

^ftt 4-^fCfw = ^fct ^firflT or 1[fT «*jj<Jn harih+ sphurati =harih sphurati or hari sphurati, Hari appears ; (also ?Tpr^Wjn haris sphurati.)

Note 3 — If nouns ending in ^«s or <T^ws, like ^f%t havih or V»JJ dhanuh, are followed by words beginning with off &, ^(kh, ^p, tf(ph, and are governed by these words, "^sh may be substituted for final Visarga. *U«jf«iH^Tir or ^TPtft fs«iFn sarpishpibati or sarpih pibati, he drinks ghee ; but flH?jJ ^It ftr«r j^H^^T tishthatu sarpih, piba tvam udakam, let the ghee stand, drink thou water. (Pan. vui. 3, 44.)

§ 84. If final Visarga is followed by a sonant letter, consonant or vowel, the general rule is that it be changed into ^r. (See, however, $ 86.) This rule admits, however, of the following exceptions :

1. If the Visarga is preceded by ^rr a, and followed by a sonant letter

(vowel or consonant), the Visarga is dro'pt.

2. If the Visarga is preceded by ^r a, and followed by any vowel except ^ a,

the Visarga is dropt.

3. If the Visarga is preceded by ^r a, and followed by a sonant consonant,

the Visarga is dropt, and the ^T a changed to ^ft o.

4. If the Visarga is preceded by ^r a, and followed by ^r a, the Visarga is

dropt, ^ a changed into ^ft o, after which, according to §41, the initial ^1 a must be elided. The sign of the elision is s, called Avagraha. Examples of the general rule :

= ohfaiji kavih + ay am = kavirayam, this poet. : + ^Pri1 = ift'^fri ravih + udeti = ravir udeti, the sun rises.

n^33fif gauh + gachchhati = gaur gachchhati, the ox walks. : + ^nrffT = fVuu^NPrf vishnuh +jayati = vishnur jayati, Vishnu is victo- rious.

= ti^lv: pafofi + bandhah, =pasorbandhah, the binding of the cattle.

91* "*" SI* = oltl* muhuh + muhuh = muhurmuhuh, gradually. ^TRJ 4- ^Tfw = ^T^frrff vdyuh, + vdti = vayur vdti, the wind blows.

%f^fTT §isuh + hasati = sisur hasati, the child laughs.

: = fVf§rf: ni h + dhanah = nirdhanah, without wealth. 5: + THfr: = JiuTPri: duh + nitih = durnttih, of bad manners. aiftflT: + ftr: = vffffiffiljyotifr + bhih =jyotirbhify, instrum. plur.

-$ 85. EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 33

Examples of the first exception :

: 4- ^nft = ^TOT ^nft asvdh 4- amf= a6vd ami, these horses. i: 4- ^pni: = vu'lfll ^jNii: dgatdh 4- rishayah = dyatd rishayah, the poets have arrived.

4- T3TT: = inn *nn: hatdfy + gajah = hatd gajdfy, the elephants are killed. tt 4- "qnrrt = 3*ldl *nn: unnatdh 4- nagdh = unnatd nagdfy, the high mountains.

rrar Trfir chhdtrdfr 4- yatante = chhdtrd yatante, the pupiU strive.

iff: + fn: = *rrfa ?/^A + ^AiA = mdbhify, instrum. plur. of in^ma^, moon. Examples of the second exception :

: Xrz/^aA + dgatah = X:w^a dgatab, Whence come ? ^ + eshah = ka eshah, Who is he ? + ^fq*. = cfi ^f^: A:a^ + rishih — ka rishih, Who is the poet ?

manah +ddi = mana ddi, beginning with mind. Examples of the third exception :

. + TO = ^ft>rft TO 6obhanah+gand/iab = $obhano gandhah, a sweet scent.

: + ^7: = HHH! TI7: nUtanalj, + ghatah = ndtano ghatah, a new jar. r: 4- ?5!rarrT: = IjNt ^riiraiTC: mdrdhanyah 4- nakardh, = mtirdhanyo nakdrah, the lingual n.

ftfrcft ^hn nirvdnah 4- ^aA = nirvdno dipah, the lamp is blown out.

TO: atitah 4- mdsah = atito mdsah, the past month.

K 4- 1(Sr: = ^ift T^1: kritah + yatnah = krito yatnah, effort is made. inr: 4- T?T: = iRfaR: manah + rcmaA = manoramaJi, (a compound), pleasing

to the mind, delightful.

7ft 4- fa: = »fVfa: wa# 4- bhih = nobhih, instrum. plur. with the noses. Examples of the fourth exception :

i = »TTts*T narah, 4- ay am = naro 'yam, this man.

^s\rhn vedah, 4- adhitah — vedo 'dhitab, the Veda has been read. ^Wl 4- ^jf = ^nfts^- ayah 4- astram = ayo 'sir am, an iron- weapon.

$ 85. There are a few words in which the final letter is etymologically ^r*. This ^ r, as a final, is changed into Visarga, according to J 82, and it

* It is called XSTTrft fe*l*h rqjdto visargah, the Visarga produced from r. It occurs, preceded by *3T a, in JtTt punah, again j UTHi prdtah, early ; WrH on/a/*, within ; ^5 *ra^, heaven ; ^T^t ahaJi, day (§ 196); in the voc. sing, of nouns in ^p, ex. fain pitaJi, father, from f^pitri, &c. ; and in verhal forms such as ^*ii«i^. ajdgar, 2. 3. sing. impf. o

F

34 EXTERNAL SANDHI. $ 86-

follows all the rules affecting the Visarga except the exceptional rules § 84. 2, 3, 4 ; i. e. if preceded by w a, and followed by any sonant letter, vowel or consonant, the "tr is retained.

Ex. •jrf: + ^rfa = g»Rftr punah + api =punarapi, even again, n -f ^T= TnOtSprdtah + eva =prdtareva, very early.

^ = «TfT^ bhrdtah + dehi = bhrdtar dehi, Brother, give !

$ 86. No Tcr can ever be followed by another ^ r (Pan. vin. 3, 14). Hence final Visarga, whether etymologicaUy ^ s or ^ r, if followed by initial ^ r, and therefore by § 84 changed to ^r, is dropt, and its preceding vowel lengthened. (Pan. vi. 3, 1 1 1 .)

Ex. "fag: + UlTH = f^<Wri vidhuh + rdjate = vidhd raj ate, the moon shines. «Tlf: + T^f = *m TT^ bhrdtah + raksha — bhrdtd raksha, Brother, protect ! 5«T: + tfaft = *pTT ft^punah + rogi=pund rogi, ih1 again.

These are the general rules on the Sandhi of final Visarga, ^ s and ^ r. The following rules refer to a few exceptional cases.

$ 87. The two pronouns *c: safy and ^m eshah, this, become *f sa and ^TET esha before consonants and vowels, except before short ^r a and at the end of a sentence. (Pan. vi. i, 132.)

Ex. *: + ^ifff = *C ^Tflf safy + daddti = sa daddti, he gives.

^r: ^5: = ^[ ^5: sah indraft = sa indrah, this Indra. The two vowels are not liable to Sandhi.

But TO + »JW^fT = ^sn^rr safy + abhavat — 50 'bhavat, he was. JJIT: TO mritah sah} he is dead.

Sometimes Sandhi takes place, particularly for the sake of the metre Thus *c ^ sa esha becomes occasionally ffa saisha, he, this person. sa indrah appears as ^hj: sendrafy. (Pan. vi. i, 134.)

The pronoun ^q: syah, he, follows the same rule optionally in poetry. (Pan

$ 88. Ht: bhoh, an irregular vocative of vc%i(bhavat, thou, drops its Visarga before all vowels and all sonant consonants. (Pan. vui. 3, 22.)

Ex. H^: 4- ^TR = Ht f$n«T bhoh + Udna = bho Udna, Oh lord! *Tfc + ^Ti: = Ht ^i: bhoh + devdfr = bho devdh, Oh gods ! The same applies to the interjections H*ft: bhagoh and ^nft: aghoh, really irregular vocatives of v(TFR(bhagavat, God, and ^SWRJ^aghavat, sinner.

$ 89. Numerous exceptions, which are best learnt from the dictionary occur in compound and derivative words. A few of the more importanl may here be mentioned.

-jj 89. EXTERNAL SANDHI. 35

I. Nouns in ^Bft^as, ^is, ^^ us, forming the first part of a Compound.

1. Before derivatives of tf kri, to do (e.g. IRkara, ITT kdra), before derivatives ofW(kam,

to desire (e. g. "aRTTT kdnta, WTT kdma), before WH karhsa, goblet, ^>? kumbha, jar, TfT&pdtra, vessel, gi^iiJttt^, counter, board, muFfkarnt, ear, the final Visarga of bases in "W^a5 is changed to ^s. (Pan. VIH. 3, 46.)

Ex. ^Rt 4- oRI = ^M*»O 6reyah+karah = sreyaskarah, making happy. ^T^fJ 4- «WS = ^n^T^iC ahah-\-karah = ahaskaraht sun. ^Hi: -\- ^W = *tM*<jiH: ayah+kumbhah = aya8kumbhah, iron-pot. There are several words of the same kind — which are best learnt from the dictionary _ in

which the Visarga is changed into dental sibilant. (Pan. vm. 3, 47.) Ex. ^nn 4~ ^J = vnitMtj adhah+padam — adhaspadam, below the foot.

divah+patih = divaspatih, lord of heaven.

J H- ^rt = qi'qt^nJ vdchah+patih = vdchaspatih, lord of speech. Hi: + "an:: = *TCRT. bhdh+karah = bhdskarah, sun, &c.

2. Nouns in ^»s and "^(us, such as ^f^l havih, V^t dhanuh, &c., before words beginning

with ^Ar, ?^ kh, ^p, and t$ph, always take ^sh. (Pan. vm. 3, 45.)

Ex. ?fr4t + TT»T ^ ^TiM'mT sarpih-\-pdnam=^sarpishpdnam, ghee-drinking.

WJJ! + cRTHt = ^TTJKRTlTt dyuh+kdmah = dyushkdmah1 fond of life. Note — ^TTJ^JWi bhrdtushputrah, nephew, is used instead of WTjJJ J^I bhrdtuh putrah, the son of the brother.

II. Words in ^SH^as, ^is, T^us, treated as Prepositions.

1. The words rHTt namah, "JTJ purah, ftRttirak, if compounded prepositionally with ifkri,

change Visarga into ^Ts. (Pan. vm. 3, 40.)

Ex. "?Wt + «KRt = n«i<5hiO namah-\-kdrah = namaskdrah, adoration; (but •W ^HT namah kritvd, having performed adoration.)

purah+kritya=puraskritya, having preferred.

= frR*?hlO tirah-\-kdri= tiraskdri, despising. In f?TTJ tirah the change is considered optional. (Pan. vm. 3, 42.)

2. The words f^f \ nih, Jt duh, "^f^t vahih, ^iPMJ a»z^, Tttglprddufi, ^TJt chatuh, if compounded

with words beginning with cF Ar, ^ fcA, "T p or TRpA, take ^sh instead of final Visarga. (Pan. vm. 3, 41.)

Ex. f^TJ + oFRt = ftT^fiTTt nih+kdmah = nishkdmah, loveless. f%t + "^Rc^I = P^Ufcc^: nih+phalah = nishphalah, fruitless.

t + ^IIT— ^if«i«*fljiii dvih+kritam = dvishkritam, made manifest. = J^fff duh+kritam = dushkritam, badly done, criminal. chatuh+konam-=chatushkonam, square.

III. Nouns in ^PR[as, ^is, T^us, before certain Taddhita Suffixes. r. Before the Taddhita suffixes ^mat, 'Zitvat, f^Ttnn, and ^Jra/a, the final ^s appears

as ^5 or ^sh (§ icx>). Ex. W*T: 4- f^ = H »f Pf*f «^ tejah+vin = tejasvin, with splendour.

: 4- TrT= a*ft Pel «« AJyotih + mat =jyotishmat, with light. t 4- W(9 = <=>H<M rajafr+vala = rajasrala, a buffalo.

F 2

36 EXTEBNAL SANDHI. $ 90 -

2. Before Taddhita suffixes beginning with \t, the ^s, preceded by ^i or ^w, is changed

into \sh, after which the 7^ t becomes 7 t .

Ex. vtpqt + ?t= viPqg arcMh-\-tvam = archishtvam, brightness.

^Wt + TnT = ^IJBfl chatuh-\-tayam=chatushtayam, the aggregate of four.

3. Before the Taddhita suffixes tTT^f pdsa, «K^T kalpa, cfi ka, and in composition with the

verb <^i**(^nkdmyati, nouns in ^T^ as retain their final ^ s, while nouns in ^^is and ~^^us change it into \sh (§ 100). (Pan. vm. 3, 39.)

Ex. TT*n + ^Tni? = TfMW i ^r payah+pd£am =payaspdsam, bad milk.

JTOi + cR^I= H*|t*h<34 p ay ah -\- k alp am = pay ask alp am j a little milk. K + «K = M^lt^ti*. yasah+kah = yasaskah, glorious.

n + cni^Pn = 1^T*5hi*<|f7f yasah+kdmyati=:yasaskdmyati, he is ambitious. n + ^n^T= tf (M •»« I ^r sarpih +pdsam = sarpishpdsam, bad ghee. l + ^R^T = tiPM^snttH sarpik+kalpam = sarpishkalpam, a little ghee. V»J* + «RJ = ^^«x=n; dhanuh+kah = dhanushkah, belonging to the bow. V»J* + <*!*<< fn = V»Jl*am*'H fn dhanuh+kdmyati=dhanushkdmyati, he desires a bow.

$ 90. Nouns ending in radical *.r (§ 85) retain the ^r before the g su of the loc. plur., and in composition before nouns even though beginning with surds. Ex. 3T^ + *J = ^T§ vdr + su = vdrshu, in the waters.

fh^: + ilftf: = llMfff: gir -\-patih =girpatih, lord of speech. In compounds, however, like inQfii: girpatih, the optional use of Visarga is sanc- tioned (Pan. vm. 3, 70, vart.), and we meet with Jftrprfjn gihpatih, vttjfTT: dhuh- patih, and ^fir: dhurpatifr; ^fqfin svahpatih and ^Rfin svarpatih, lord of heaven ; ^:"qfir: ahahpatify and ^qfrf: aharpatih, lord of the day.

v«^<. ahar, the Pada base of ^I^»^ ahan, day, is further irregular, because its final "•£ r is treated likens before the Pada-terminations, and in composition before words beginning with ^>: hence ^Iff J + f*Tt = vt^lfat ahah-\- bhih — ahobhih ; ^T^J + ^ = ^n?^J ahah+su = ahahsu; ^?^t + -CTsft = 4l^ilc|t ahah+rdtrah = ahordtrah, day and night. (Pan. vm. 2, 68, vart.)

$ 91. ^chh at the beginning of a word, after a final short vowel, and after the particles ^TT d and ITT md, is changed to ^55 chchh. Ex. 1T^ + "5THT = TPf ^3TRT tava + chhdyd = tava chchhdyd, thy shade. *H + f^lTN= *n fsa^H ma + chhidat — md chchhidat, let him not cut. ^T + •gT^TflT = m Wl^ Tn a + chhddayati = dchchhddayati, he covers. After any other long vowels, this change is optional.

or cj^O'Q&mi badarichhdyd or badarichchhdyd, shade of Badaris,

In the body of a word, the change of t$ chh into ^5 chchh is necessary both after long and short vowels.

Ex. S^arfir ichchhati, he wishes, fra: mlechchhafy, a barbarian. (Pan. vi. i, 73-7^.)

_$ 93. EXTERNAL 8ANDHI. 37

f 92. Initial $T 6, not followed by a hard consonant, may be changed into *5 chh, if the final letter of the preceding word is a hard consonant or (for ^rc). (Pan. vm. 4, 63.)

Ex. ^T^ + 5ITT = TTOfnr or TO«[W vdk + Mam — vdktatam or vdkchhatam, a hundred speeches.

i|(Xfll^ fft or nfldl<(«^ parivrdf + &ete = parivrd( tete or parivrdf chhete, the beggar lies down.

H^^r^3 or H^^^<s mahat + 6aka(am = mahach fakatam or mahach chhakafam, a great car.

rf-^t^H ^a/ + blokena — tachchhlokena, by that verse. VT3R+ ^nn = VN^f^K or VN^ft^lt dhdvan + sasafy = dhdvan sasafy or

dhdvan chhasah, a running hare.

^HJ + $1^! = ^u^|<«<: or ^^«^; ap + babdah = ap babdah or apchhabdah, the sound of water.

$ 93. If ^ /i, i{gh, ^dh, \^dh, or v^bh stand at the end of a syllable which begins with IT^, ^</, ^ d, or ^£, and lose their aspiration as final or otherwise, the initial consonants T^, ^c?, ^ c?, or ^£ are changed into

Ex. ^ C?M^, a milker, becomes >p|r dhuk.

visvagudh, all attracting, becomes , wise, becomes

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

I 94-

Sfe;

2 s

-6

4

•I

U|

Eh.s>

£

1

•*•*

^S 0

3*3.

33

*l 41

*

(

33

.'1

I** ll

s

33

•3 O

§ S

'« 0

<i ,0 0

3'

•i

33

3'

1R

*

§ 94-

00 &T

*• K»

vo p"

CO If

.f

r

r

11? r

EXTERNAL 8ANDHI.

15

§>

g

I

ir*

& lu-

(fT

tr

I?

If

IF

I .'*'

S

?

K*

If

41

II

nr fr

I* I*

17 r P^P

is

11

^ • x §

S}

"

~ V

.2 £ <2 •%

S3

£

»: .2

II

- -2

jj

•3. I S 5

3

I i

-2 2

z "

^ 03

40

EXTERNAL SANDHI.

I 94-

a*

&IS

IT

e

17

e

fl^

IB-

MS

t-

& &

i

ir

[1

**

,"*

5 »r

I

IS5

|u/ tov tr /w

:a ra ra ra

|rr fir 1C 1C

*£ PS

tr lr

ar Jr IB- Ur

x •

r"C3 ^3

-J 96. CHANGE OP ^n INTO ^n. 41

NATI, or Change of Dental t^n and ^s into Lingual T^n and f 95. In addition to the rules which require the modification of certain letters at the beginning and end of words, there are some other rules to be remembered which regulate the transition of dental «^n and ^* into lingual T^n and ^sh in the body of words. Beginners should try to impress on their memory these rules as far as they concern the change of the dental

t.sal and sibilant into the lingual nasal and sibilant in simple words : with gard to compound nouns and verbs, the rules are very complicated and pricious, and can only be learnt by long practice.

Change of ^ n into ^n.

J 96. The dental «jn, followed by a vowel, or by *jn, ^w, ^y, and ^r, is, in the middle of a word, changed into the lingual ^n if it is preceded by the linguals ^n, ^ri, ^ r, or ^ sh. The influence of these letters on a following f^ n is not stopt by any vowel, by any guttural (^1 k, Wf kht 'T #, "*f gh, ^ w, ^ h, * m), or by any labial (q p, "Ri ph, if b, H bh, qm, ^ v), or by \y, intervening between the linguals and the ^(n. (Pan. vm. 4, i ; 2.) Ex. «| + «rt = *TOT nri -f ndm = nrindm, gen. plur. of ij nri, man. : karnah, ear.

dushananij abuse.

^tf vrithhanam, nourishing, (? h is guttural and preceded by Anusvara.) arkena, by the sun, (c^ k is guttural.) grihndti, he takes, (^ h is guttural.) : kshipnuh, throwing, (^p is labial.) ifain premnd} by love, (i^m is labial.)

: brahmanyafy, kind to Brahmans, (^ h is guttural, ^ m is labial, and ^n followed by \y.)

: nishannah, rested, ("^ n is followed by «J n, which is itsetf afterwards changed to HSn.)

•# VSJ <H i^ akshanvat, having eyes, (TSTW is followed by \v.) Tn^ET prdyena, generally, (^y does not prevent the change.) But ^Hhr archana, worship, (^ch is palatal.)

arnavena, by the ocean, (^n is lingual.) darsanam, a system of philosophy, (?{6 is palatal.) ardhena, by half, (VNC?A is dental.) kurvanti, they do, (t^w is followed by i^/.) rdmdn, the Ramas, (I^TI is final.)

Note — ^7H; rugnah, like <j«Mli: vriknah (Pan. vi. i, 16), should be written with ^«. The i{g is no protection for the »^n. Thus ^P*f a^nt has to be especially mentioned as an exception for not changing its »f n into ZJT n in compounds, such as $Kif*n* (Pan. Gana kshubhnddi.)

Q

CHANGE OF

INTO

$97-

f 97. The r^w of »JWM, the sign of the Su conjugation, and the ^n of iftnd, the sign of the Kri conjugation, are not changed into H{n in the two verbs lf{tnp and Tg*^ kshubh (Pan. vin. 4, 39). Hence

TTTTfrfTT tripnoti, he pleases*. TJtfrfiT kshubhndti, he shakes. But JNuflfk brinoti, he hears. Tf^trnfrf pushndti, he nourishes. kshubhdna, imper. shake.

Table showing the Changes of^n into wn.

**,	in spite of intervening	change	if there follow
	Vowels,		Vowels, or
-=^ri,	Gutturals	-*{n
	(including ^ h and Anusvara),
\r,	Labials	into	\m,
	(including \v),		\y,
vv	and i^y,	**T n	\v-

. § 98. The changes here explained of tTw in the middle of simple words, (whether it belongs to a suffix or a termination,) are the most important to remember. But tT n is likewise liable to be changed into TQ^n when it occurs in the second part of a compound the first part of which contains one of the letters ^ri} ^rt, ^r, or \sh, and particularly after certain prepositions. Here, however, the rules are much more uncertain, and we must depend on the dictionary rather than on the grammar for the right employment of the dental or lingual nasals. The following rules are the most important :

i. The change of ^n into T^n does not take place unless the two members of the compound are combined so as to express a single conception. Hence "^nff bdrdhri, a leathern thong, + rpa nasa, nose, gives ^nffaran bdrdhrinasah, if it is the name of a certain animal ; according to Wilson, of a goat with long ears ; according to others, of a rhinoceros, or a bird. (Unadi-Sutras, ed. Aufrecht, s. v. Pan. vin. 4, 3.) But w^ charman, leather, + HlfUcM ndsikd, nose, gives ^HHlf"^: charmandsikah, if it means having a leathern nose. An important exception is ^%rnw«T sarvandman, a technical term for pronouns, (^% sarva being the first in their list,)

which Panini himself employs with the dental ^n only. (Pan. i. i, 27.) Other proper names not following the general rule, are

* In the Veda we find "iTOgf^ tripnuhi, Rv. n. 16, 6 ; ITW^t tripnavah, Rv. in. 42, 2, • t The Sarasvati says ^RT ^T, that the n is optionally changed when Trinayanah is a name. Hence f^tfTTt trinayanah or fi^T'f: trinayanah. <\. ^ ^.

-$ 98- CHANGE OF ^n INTO l^n. 43

three-eyed, name of Siva; ig •{{•!: raghunandanah, name of Rama; ^f'Anj: svarbhdnuh, name of Rahu, £c. Words to be remembered :

\l agranih, first, principal, from HTJ agra, front, and ?ft n/, to lead. \l grdmanih, head borough, from ?JTR grama, multitude, and fft n1t to lead. H vritraghnah, Indra, killer of Vritra ; but ^nptf vritrahanam, ace. of

-itrahan. (Pan. vm. 4, 12 ; 22.) or Pj|Puu<{l girinadi or girinadi, mountain-stream.

jr pardhnam, afternoon, from TTTT para, over, and ^RfT ahan, day ; but ^%T^o: sarvdhnafy, the whole day, from *r% sarva, all, and W^ ahan, day ; and the same whenever the first word ends in *R a. (Pan.vm. 4, 7.) There are minute distinctions, according to which, for instance, «/Uni»i kshirapdnam if it means the drinking of milk, or a vessel for drinking milk, ojw: K/knn: kamsah kshirapdnah, may be pronounced with dental or lingual n (^ n or T^rc) ; but if it is the name of a tribe who live on milk, it must be pronounced HfkMUli: kshirapdnah, milk-drinking. (Pan. vm. 4, 9 and 10.) In the same manner <*vNl^iU darbhavdhanam, a hay- cart, is spelt with lingual ^n; while in ordinary compounds, such as $£m^»i indravdhanam, a vehicle belonging to Indra, the dental t^n remains unchanged. (Pan. viu. 4, 8.)

2. In a compound consisting of more than two words the »T n of any one

word can only be affected by the word immediately preceding. Hence mtHTUtll mdsha-vdpena . bv sowing: beans : but ^r^'W^ri^mdsha-kumbha-

•»•'•/ ^

vdpena, by sowing from a bean-jar. (Pan. viu. 4, 38.)

3. In a compound the change of ^n into TFT n does not take place if the first

word ends in IT g. Ex. ^cjr + W*r4 = ^'I4H rik + ayanam = rigayanam.

Some grammarians restrict this to proper names. (Pan. vm. 4, 3, 5.) Or if it ends in \sh, and the next is formed by a primary suffix \vith «^n. Ex. fa: + in«T — PH^MH nih -\-pdnarn = nishpdnam.

T^t + MNH = T^HTR«T yojuh -\-pdvanam = yajushpdvanam. (Pan. vm. 4, 35-)

4. In compounds the «^w of nouns ending in tf w, and the *T n of case-termina-

tions, if followed by a vowel, are always liable to change. pflP^Trfi*»T vrihivdpin, rice-sowing, may form the genitive dlP^lPmn: IT/-

\ * ' V

hivdpinah; but also WlP^mPm: vrihivdpinah.

or '^f^ninf'T vrihivopdni or vrihivapdni, nom. plur. neut.

or "at^iiR trihivdpena or vrihivdpena, instrum. sing, o 2

44 CHANGE OF ^ n INTO TO n § 98.

Likewise feminines such as 'atf^mPmifl' or cflngmPijffl vrihivdpini or vrihivdpim.

(Kas'.-Vritti vin. 4, n.)

Note — The «T n of secondary suffixes, attached to the end of compounds, is, under the general conditions, always changed to TOxw. Thus <3<.Mt kharapah (i.e. donkey-keeper) becomes «sfi«^it*i«ut khdrapdyanah, the descendant of Kharapa. TTrWT'fi'TOrt mdtribhoginah, fit to be possessed by a mother, from TTtT mdtri, mother, and vffrTC bhogah, enjoyment, with the adjectival suffix ^tna (samdsdnta), is always spelt with TfT^n. (See also § 98. 6.) Again, while 'I'taf'i'fl gargabhagini, the sister of Garga, always retains its dental IT n, being an ordinary compound, TWff^ gargabhagint would have the lingual *JTw, if it was derived from T^HTt gargabhagah, the share of Garga, with the adjectival suffix ^r^ in, fern. ^»ft ini, enjoying the share of Garga. Words which after they have been compounded take a new suffix are treated in fact like single words (samdnapada), and therefore follow the general rule of § 96. (Pan. vin. 4, 3. Kas'.-Vritti vm. 4, u, vart.)

5. If the second part of the compound is monosyllabic, then the change of

a final ^ n followed by a terminational vowel, or of a terminational ^ n, is obligatory. (Pan. vin. 4, 12.)

Ex. "^1^ vritrahan, Vritra-killer ; gen. 4d^<u: vritrahanah ; but ^Nhjjft dirghdhni. (Pan. vin. 4, 7.)

: surdpah, drinking sura ; nom. plur. neut. ^<imf\!r surdpdni. : ksMrapah, drinking milk ; instrum. sing. ^li.ij'Jii kshirapena.

6. If the second part of a compound contains a guttural, the change is obliga-

tory, even though the second part be not monosyllabic. (Pan. vin. 4, 1 3.) Ex. ^fccRTH: harikdmah, loving Hari ; instrum. sing. ^fxcfiT^ harikdmena; but ^njirrfafrr agragdmini. (Pan. vin. 3, 92.)

sushkagomayena, instrum. sing, of 3rE5Rjfta*r sushkagomaya ; , dry, TffcR gomaya, dung.)

7. Likewise after prepositions which contain an T r, the »T n of primary affixes, such as ^R ana, ^rfTf ani, ^nft^r aniya, ^T in, Tf na (if preceded by a vowel), and mftmdna, is changed to TT^W, but under certain restric- tions. (Pan. vin. 4, 29.) Ex. iHM<!J pravapanam ; HH|Tii pramdnam ; urmHW prdpyamdnam.

While in these cases the change is pronounced obligatory, it is said to be optional after causative verbs (Pan. vin. 4, 30), and after verbs begin- ning and ending in consonants with any vowel but ^T a (Pan. vin. 4, 31); hence M^IIMHf and Otf praydpanam and praydpanam ; THfitTO or °7f prakopanam or prakopanam. Again, after verbs beginning in a vowel (not ^T a) and strengthening their bases by nasalization, the change is necessary ; it is forbidden in other verbs, not beginning with vowels, though they require nasalization : hence U -f ^r^ = TPTW pra H- inganam = prenganam ; but H + ^iiR = U«if*r?T pra + kampanam = prakampanam.

CHANGE OF 1» INTO'w. 45

Lastly, there are several roots which defy all these rules, viz. ^pd, Wfton, T^c/am, *n\pytiyt T<T vep : hence m&( prabhdnam &c., never 1THTCT prabhdnam ; 1T%*R pravepanam, never lOTTO pravepanam. 8. After prepositions containing an ^r, such as wwraw/ar, f^wtr, qn/wa, •qft joflri, and IT /?ra, and after jt */Mr, the change of ^ n into w^n takes place :

i. In most roots beginning with t^n. (Pan. vin. 4, 14.) IT -f- HHfri = HUJHfrt />ra + namati =pranamatit he bows. -qtr + j^fri = M^KM^fri j»ard + nudati = pardnudati, he pushes away. w: -f «l^flT = <iri^Mfrt antah -f nayati = antarnayati^ he leads in. jj + •rnrcK = HIIIIM^: ^?ra + ndyakah =prandyaka/i, a leader. The roots which are liable to this change of their initial *^ n are entered in the Dhatupatha, the list of roots of native grammarians, as beginning with Jtt^n. Thus we should find the root "^nam entered as qp^nam, simply in order thus to indicate its liability to change. a. In a few roots this change is optional if they are followed by Krit affixes,

viz. (Pan. vm. 4, 33.)

QllfH nis, to kiss ; nfiuftiffttj or uf«j fa ri *4 pranimsitavyam or pranimsitavyam. frSTW niksh, to kiss ; UUllttJlli or yfHH|^i pranikshanam or pranikshanam. ftjf^ nid, to blame ; nftii^H or TTPH^H pranindanam or pranindanam. 3. In a few roots the initial ^ n resists all change, and these roots are entered in the Dhatupatha as beginning with tT ny viz. (Pan. vi. I, 65, vart.)

nrit, to dance. nand, to rejoice. nardy to howl. nakk, to destroy.

?TTT ndt, to faU down, (Chur *.)

ndth, to ask.

nddh, to beg. f| nri, to

lead.

Ex. iircHHH parinartanam ; Mfc«i<H parinandanani.

4. The root ffSl^naS, to destroy, changes *T n into ?ffw only when its 31 « is

not changed to t^sh. IT -f Tr^nr = Tmpttpra + na&yate =pranasyate ; but IT + TO = TFW.pra -f nashtah =pranashtah,destroyed. (Pan. vm. 4, 36.)

5. In the root ^rfcm, to breathe, the «T/i is changed to i^n if the Tr is not

separated from the tj n by more than one letter. Thus IT 4- mftllfrf pra + aniti = prdniti, he breathes ; but xrft 4- ^fnfH part + aniti = paryaniti (Patanjali). The reduplicated aorist forms M I Hllill ^prdninat ; the desiderative with f^jpard is wftrftr^fif pardni- nishati. (Pan. vm. 4, 19, 21.)

* It is not «T^na£, to dance, but «17 nert of the Chur class, and hence written with a long a. Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 41, note.

4:6 CHANGE OF ^ ft INTO TST^. § 99-

6. In the root ^han, to kill, the ^n is changed except where "^h has to

be changed to T^gh. (Pan. vin. 4, 22.) Thus IT + ?rsrff — TnrTRTH pra + hanyate = prahanyate, he is struck down ; -eici^JLHd1 antarhanyate (Pan. vin. 4, 24) ; but TT -f "jHlT = SHlftf pra + ghnanti =praghnanti, they kill. Also H^Otf prahananam, killing. The change is optional again where f^n is followed by *rw or ^v. (Pan.

vin. 4, 23.) Thus Tnrfar or TJ^ftw prahanmi or prahanmi ; M^*4! or

U^Fi prahanvah or prahativah.

7. The tT w of fj WM of the Su and of tfT raa of the Kri conjugation is changed

to i^n in the verbs f^ hi, to send, and ?ft m£, to destroy. (Pan. vm. 4, 15.) Ex. TT^rq^fw prahinvanti ; IFfiwfTT praminanti.

8. The T^ra of the termination ^fif^dni in the imperative is changeable. (Pan.

vin. 4, 1 6.) Thus IT + *^Tftf = TW^lftr pra + bhavdni —prabhavdni.

9. The *T n of the preposition fa rci, if preceded by u pra, ifopari, &c.,

is changed into T^n before the verbs (Pan. vm. 4, 17) i\^gad9 to speak, ?, to shout, tfKjpat, to fall, Tf^pad, to go, the verbs called ^ghu, * ma, to measure, *T^ me, to change, ^ so, to destroy, ^ A«w, to kill, ITT ya, to go, ^T vd, to blow, "^T drd, to flee or to sleep, wr psd, to eat, "^vap, to sow or to weave, ^vah, to bear, yp^sam, to be tranquil (c?w), fa cAi, to collect, fij^ dih, to anoint. The same change takes place even when the augment intervenes.

(Pan. vin. 4, 17, vart.) ilimJI^TT pranyagadat ; wm<\<(i{pranyanadat.

§ 99. In all other verbs except those which follow n^ gad9 the change of f»T ni after if pra, iffcpari, &c., is optional.

TTf^q^ffrf or Mriiimfri pranipachati or pranipachati.

Except again in verbs beginning with cR ka or ^ kha, or ending in ^ sh (Pan. vin. 4, 1 8), in which the *T n of fa ni remains unchanged.

dflT pranikaroti ; irf'f^T^'fif pranikhddati ; 'wfH fi(H P« pranipinashti.

* Where it seemed likely to be useful, the Sanskrit roots have been given with their diacritical letters (anubandhas), but only in their Devanagari form. Panini in enumerating the roots which change f^ni after TKpra, "Oftpari, See., into ftff ni, mentions HTw?a, but this, according to the commentaries, includes two roots, the root m&md(n}, which forms T»i*i1n mimtte, he measures, and the root ^^me(n), which forms HTfifmayate, he changes. Where in this grammar the transcribed form of a root differs from its Devanagari original, the additional letters may always be looked upon as diacritical marks employed by native grammarians. Sometimes the class to which certain verbs belong has been indicated by adding the first verb of that class in brackets. Thus sam (div) means sdmyati, or sam conjugated like div, and not sdmayate.

-$ 100. CHANGE OP ^8 INTO ^th. 47

Change O/T^S into

J 100. A dental ^* (chiefly of suffixes and terminations*), if preceded by any vowel except v, ^Tf a, or by ^ A:, t r, ^ /, is always changed into the lingual i^sh, provided it be followed by a vowel, or by i^/, ^ th, ^n9 ^tn} i^y, or ^v ; likewise by certain Taddhita suffixes, T|Ara, VW kalpa, in^T pd6a, &c.

If an inserted Anusvaraf or the Visarga or ^sh intervenes between the vowel and the ^s, the change into "^sh takes place nevertheless.

Ex. *rfxN^ sarpis, inflectional base; ?rfch sarpih, nom. sing. neut. clarified butter ; instrum. *ff§^T sarpishd ; nom. plur. Kqffq sarpimshi (here the Anusvara intervenes) ; loc. plur. *rf§:i{ sarpihshu (here the Visarga intervenes), or «P§uj sarpishshu (here the \sh intervenes). vdkshu, loc. plur. of "ZF^vdch, speech. + ^ = *cf$T*J sarvafak + su = sarvasakshu, omnipotent.

F) + ^ = •fa^rfo'BJ chitralikh (k) + su = chitralikshu, painter. jfig girshu, loc. plur. of frf^ gir, speech.

+ *J = «F*T^ kamal + su = kamalshu, naming the goddess Lakshmi. dhrokshyati, fut. of ^ druh, to hate ; (here ^ h is changed to cfi k, and the aspiration thrown on the initial ^ d.)

pokshyati, fut. of "^push, to nourish; (here ^s/i is changed into ^ k.)

: + «K = '^f^Mi: sarpih -f kah = sarpishkah ; adj. formed by 9 ka, having clarified butter.

q; + TO = *rfqro sarpih + tarafy = sarpishtarah ; (here the ^ / of 1T^: tarah is changed into 3^, as in $ 89, III. 2.) If the penultimate vowel be long, no change takes place; irtaTO gistard. (Pan. vin.

3. I01-)

h H- Trl = frffar^sarpih + mat = sarpishmat, having clarified butter.

* The ^5 must not be a radical ^s; hence *jftn supisau, because the ^* belongs to the root f*PR(pis. (Pan.vin. 3, 59.) Yet VHlfyM: dsishah, from root JIT^Afc. l"he rules do not apply to final ^s; hence -flfHWd agnis tatra. (Pan. vin. 3, 55.)

t The Anusvara must be what Sanskrit grammarians call nuro, it must not represent a radical nasal; hence, even if we write 'Qftpumsu, loc. plur. of ip^tim*, man, Pada base ig^jwm, it does not become ^pumshu. (Pan. vin. 3, 58.) According to Bopp and other European grammarians, who do not limit the Anusvara to the inserted Anusvara, we should have to write either ^pumshu, or, if we wish to preserve the ^s, TJ^T jmnjii. According to Panini, however, TfjJ purhsu is the right form. The Sarasvati prescribes

48 CHANGE OF ^s INTO ^ sh. § IOI-

Table showing the Changes of ^ s into ^ sh.

Any Vowels except ^r, ^rr «,	change	if there follow
(in spite of	**	Vowels, or
inserted Anusvara, Visarga, or sibilant intervening,) also cff k, TT, <3/	into	tf n, JT m,
if immediately preceding,	v*	\y,\*.

§ 101. The same rule produces the change of ^ s into ^ sh in roots beginning with 1(s, if reduplicated, provided the vowel of the reduplicated syllable is not ^sr, ^TTa: Ex. ^r^&vap, to sleep ; Redupl. Perf. *J«TR sushvdpa, I have slept, ftr^ sidh, Des. ftrfMrHfrt sishitsati. This rule is liable to exceptions.

j 102. Again, many roots beginning with l^s change it into ^sh after prepositions requiring such a change, viz. ^ifff ati, over, ^rg anu9 after, ^rfa api, upon, ^rfa abhi, towards, "fa ni, in, far mr, out, Tfft joari, round, Ufa prati, towards, ft vi, away : Ex. ^rf* + ^rfw = -3ifa«ifrf abhi + stauti = abhishtauti, he praises. The same change takes place even after the augment has been added, in which case the ^ s is really preceded by an ^r a : Ex. ^HTCCTf^ abhyashtautt he praised. Some verbs, after these prepositions, keep the "^ sh in the reduplicated perfect : Ex. ftr^ sich, to sprinkle ; ^srfafttefw abhishinchati, he sprinkles ; ^rfafa^fa abhishishecha, he has sprinkled. In the intensive ftr^ sich does, not follow this rule ; hence ^Tfirofaxqif abhisesichyate (Pan. vin. 3, 112) ; but in the desiderative ^ s is changed, ^r5rftfoT5ffr abhishishikshati. Many other cases must be learnt from the dictionary or from Panini.

§ 103. In order to give an idea of the minuteness of the rules as collected by native grammarians, and of the complicated manner in which these rules are laid down, the fol- lowing extracts from Panini have been subjoined, though they by no means exhaust the subject according to the views of native grammarians. It need hardly be added that beginners should not attempt to burden their memory with these rules, though a glance at them may be useful by giving them an idea of the intricacies of Sanskrit grammar.

Native grammarians enumerate all monosyllabic verbs beginning with ^ s, and followed by a vowel or by a dental consonant, (likewise fW* smi, to smile, ft?^ svid, to sweat, <*f<j svad, to taste, ^s»^ svafij, to embrace, ^T^svap, to sleep,) as if beginning with "^ sh. Thus they write fa(skidh, ST shtM, fa? shmi. (Pan. vi. i, 64.)

This is not done with W^mp, to go, ^p^m)', to let off, ^c[>^s£r«, to cover, W^stri, to cover, w styai, to sound, ^c^sefc, to go, V sri, to go, in order to show that their initial ^s is not liable to be changed into t(sh under any circumstances.

They then give the general rule that this initial ^sh is to be changed inters, in all these verbs, except fe\shthiv, to spit, and "&{*%sJivashk, to go, (and according to some in w shtyai, Sar.,) unless where ^sh is enjoined a second time.

-§ 103. CHANGE OF ^* INTO ^ ah. 49

Now Vsh for 1^8 in these verbs is enjoined a second time :

I. When a preposition, or whatever else precedes it, requires such permutation, according to general rules, fa + ^RTTfrf = (qgifn vi -f stauti = vishtauti. W(tev forms ftw^ sithera in the reduplicated perfect.

2. In desideratives, when the reduplicative syllable contains ^or 7* or u. fin^ticM, Des. f« f M rw fit sishitsati.

But if the ^* of the desiderative element must itself be changed to ^*A, the initial

remains unchanged. faVsiVM, f«i« P<m Pff sisedhishati. (Pan. vm. 3, 61.) Except in ^sf«, and in derivative verbs in ^Haya, where ^« is changed to

Des. gi^Pn tushtushati. fwv^sidh, Cans, W^ftf sedhayati, Des. PuMMP*JMPrt sishedh a-

yishati; but ^J^Prt sitsushati. (viu.3, 61.) Except again, in certain causatives, in ^HTaya (vm. 3, 62), where ^* is not changed into

^sh. f^^ svid, ftKsqrMHPrf sisvedayishati. ^^ svad, ^i&M^nntn siscdduyishati.

^T? sah, \****\^\*(H\n sisdhayishati.

3. In certain verbs, after prepositions which require such a change, even when they are separated from the verb by the augment, viz. JJsM (su), 1£su (tud),1Rso (div), ^$*tu (ad), ^^stubh (Ihu); or even if separated by reduplication, in the verbs JUTT sthdy <H4 senaya, fl!R(sidh,ff(^^sich, '^[^sanj)W^svanj)'^sad1 HK^stambh, ^"^sran, «^*«>, (the last only after tjfr/>an, f«T n£, f^vi: vm. 3, 65.)

After prepositions : ^TTH^<!.il Iff abhishunoti. ^rftf^fir abhishuvati. ^rfH^fri abhishyati. M PVKI fn parishtauti. M r<.g^*nf parishtobhate. ^rf^Bl^rd abhishthdsyati. ^ft^inrfw abhishenayati. M (V«< v Per parishedhati. ^rfkfM1*! PIT abhishinchati. M fl.M H frt parishajati. s P< «*=! »i n parishvajate (vm. 3, 65). Pi^fif nishidati, but HPntfl^rn pratistdati (viu.3,66). ^rf>TFtfTfWa&A^fa6Awah'(viii.3,67andii4). Also W^?*T avashtabhya (vm. 3, 68, in certain senses), fa and *t ««««<!*(*« »» and avashvanati (vm. 3, 69, in the sense of eating). MflJ^Ti parishevate.

After prepositions and augment : ^T^l guH ^abhyashunot. M^^^ paryashuvat. abhyashyat. M ^ KI i^paryashtaut. ^T«T?^TiT abhyashtobhata. ^f^i mu *< f^ abhyashenayat. ^^f?(paryashedhat. ^wft paryashajat. WT^»Tir abhyashvajata. SN^Ml^i^ abhyashidat. WTFVT?^ abhya- shtabhndt. «s «*««iiu fl vyashvanat and VH^ I'M^Ud avdshvanat. MMM^n paryashevata. After prepositions and reduplication (vm. 3, 64) : xi(*ici8l abhitashthau.

abhishishenayishati. ^T^T'^vfT^fTT abhishishedhayishati. xiHmsiil abhishi-

shikshati. ^rftrfa^TfiT abhishishankshati and ^TWTfam^ abhyashishankshat.

parishishvankshate. f^faHRSfft nishishatsati (vm. 3, 118).

abhitashtambha. vjcm«>q|<u avashashvdna. M^m«l parishisheva, (the last only after tjftpari, f«Tnt, fat?».)

4. Only after the prepositions "^ft^art, ftfni, fari, the following words (vm. 3, 70): the part, "fain sitaA, the subst. ?HK say ah, ftf^sip, ^s«A; ^ Arri (if with initial ^*, ^5 sA:n) and similar verbs ; ^J ste.

The words mentioned in 4. and ^5^ wan; may optionally retain ^s, if the augment intervenes, (vm. 3, 71.)

H

50 CHANGE OF ^S INTO \sh. .§ 104-

5. After the prepositions ^HJ anu, fa vi, *jft pari, ^srfa abhi, f«Tm', "f&^syand may tak

except when applied to living beings, (vm. 3, 72.)

6. After the prep, fa vi, ta^^. skand may take ^sA, though not in the past participle in

Tf ta (vm. 3, 73), but after the prep, "qfic pari, throughout, even in the past participle (vm. 3, 74). ^fV^-sct or s (X«s&q t parishkannah or pariskannah.

7. After the prep. f*f^wz>, f»Tw«, fefvi, the verbs ^!^sphur and t*yco sphul may take ^sh.

(vm. 3, 76.)

8. After the prep, f^vi, ^^skambh must always take ^sh. (vm. 3, 77.)

9. The verb ^[ as, after dropping its initial vowel, takes "^sh after prepositions which

cause such a change, and after TK^prddur, if the ^sh is followed by \y or a vowel (vm. 3, 87). ^XfazfTi^abhishydt. W^?E(l^prdduhshydt. injt^fir prdduhshanti.

10. The verb CT{st?op, when changed to ^^*«p, takes \sh, after *J SM, f% m", f«T^mY, <j^c?w

(vm. 3, 88). *[$*: sushuptah. JfJW*. duhshuptah. Exceptional cases, where ^s is used, and not \sh:

11. The verb fa*{sich, followed by the intensive affix (vm. 3, 112). ^afn ^ f« ^"rf abhisesi-

cJiyate.

12. The verb ftlV sidh, signifying to go (vm. 3, 113). ^lV*i vfn parisedhati.

13. The verb ^ sah, if changed to ^iffc? sodh (vm. 3, 1 15). yP<4ft'^ parisodhum.

14. The verbs W^stambh, f^T^siv, ^ sah, in the reduplicated aorist (vm. 3, 116).

15. The verb "Qsu, followed by the affixes of the ist future, the conditional, or the desidera-

tive (vm. 3, 117). ^fHtftucPri abhisoshyati. »KfH^JfJt abhisusuh.

16. The verbs ^ sad, "^T^svanj, in the reduplicated perfect (vm. 3, 118). ^(WmiT^

abhishasdda. 'STPmifl'T abhishasvaje.

17. The verb TR^sad, optionally, if preceded by the augment (vm. 3, 119). •HtO^ or

tmaftt^nyashidat or nyasidat.

§ 104. There are many compounds in which the initial ^s of the second word is changed to TB(sh, if the first word ends in a vowel (except a). Ex. gfa ^^yudhishthira, from jfv yudhi, in battle, and f^f^sthira, firm; ^¥ sushthu, well ; g^dushthu, ill; ^^"TT sushamd, beautiful, f<1Ht vishamah, difficult, from ^RTt samah, even ; fag*T trishtubh, a metre ; vcfiTHi«iT agni- shomau, Agni and Soma ; *iin«mi mdtrishvasri, mother's sister ; ft n «i ^pitrishvasri, father's sister; TTVfft goshthah, cow-stable ; ^TP'»i8l*iJ agnishtomah, a sacrifice ; 3<4lfn«W jyoti- shtomah, a sacrifice, (here the final ?^s of Tt^^'^jyotis is dropt.) In g<itn^ turdsdh, a name of Indra, and similar compounds, ^s is changed to ^sh whenever ^ h becomes T t; nom. '^\m^turdshdt j ace. ^l^IT^ turdsdham. (Pan. vm. 3, 56.)

Change of Dental V dh into Lingual <? dh.

§ 105. The ^dh of the second pers. plur. Atm. is changed to ^ dh in the reduplicated perfect, the aorist, and in "^ftsST sMdhvam of the benedictive, provided the V dh, or the ^ft shi of ^ftt4 shidhvam, follows immediately an inflective root ending in any vowel but V, ^TT a. (Pan. vm. 3, 78.)

Ex. ^ kri; Perf. ^f|" chakridhve.

^ cAyw ; Aor. vc«*J^6 achyodhvam. Bened. ^ft Ml p loshidhvam .

-$ 107- BULBS OP INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 51

But flSp^foAtp; Aor. V f\Sf **4 akshibdhvam.

Tf*{yqj; Bened. II Ujll^ yakshidhvam.

If the same terminations are preceded by the intermediate \i, and the \% be preceded by ^ y, ^r, ^ /, ^0, ^ h, the change is optional. Ex. <J/tt; Perf. <5<5^^ luluvidhve or (Jcjfaj luluvidhve. <5 /M; Aor. ^fc5fa*4 alavidhvam or ^»«fq^ alavidhvam. «J JM; Bened. f^fqMl*4 lavishidhvam or rtf^Ml j lavishtdhvam. But "6«<M ; Aor. ^HTtftW abodhidhvam.

Rules of Internal Sandhi.

J 1 06. The phonetic rules contained in the preceding paragraphs ($32—94) apply, as has been stated, to the final and initial letters of words (padas), when brought into immediate contact with each other in a sentence, to the final and initial letters of words formed into compounds, and to the final letters of nominal bases before the Pada-terminations, and before certain secondary or Taddhita suffixes, beginning with any consonant except ^y.

There is another class of phonetic rules applicable to the final letters of nominal (prdtipadikd) and verbal bases (dhdtu) before the other terminations of declension and conjugation, before primary or Krit suffixes, and before secondary or Taddhita suffixes, beginning with a vowel or ^y. Some of these rules are general, and deserve to be remembered. But in many cases they either agree with the rules of External Sandhi, or are themselves liable to such numerous exceptions that it is far easier to learn the words or grammatical forms themselves, as we do in Greek and Latin, than to try to master the rules according to which they are formed or supposed to be formed.

The following are a few of the phonetic rules of what may be called Internal Sandhi. The student will find it useful to glance at them, without endeavouring, however, to impress them on his memory. After he has learnt that %s dvish, to hate, forms irfor dveshmi, I hate, ^ftf dvekshi, thou hatest, ifffc dveshti, he hates, ^Z advet, he hated, %fj dviddhi, Hate ! f|T7 dvif, a hater, %^: dvishah, of a hater, fg^4} dvi(su, among haters, — he will refer back with advantage to the rules, more or less general, which regulate the change of final ^ sh into ^F k, 3 /, ^ d, &c. ; but he will never learn his declensions an£ conjugations properly, if, instead of acquiring first the paradigms as they are, he endeavours to construct each form by itself, according to the phonetic rules laid down in the following paragraphs.

i. Final Vowels.

§ 107, No hiatus is tolerated in the middle of Sanskrit words. Words such as n<J<i praiiga, fore-yoke, fd'Hd titaii, sieve, are isolated exceptions. The hiatus in com- pounds, such as if&jnpura-etd, going in front, HH^fth: nama-ukiih, saying of praise, which

H 2

52 RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI. § 108-

is produced by the elision of a final ^s before certain vowels, has been treated of under the head of External Sandhi'. (§ 84. 2.)

§ 108. Final ^ a and ^TT a coalesce with following vowels according to the general rules of Sandhi.

"if^ + ^Tm tuda-\-ami= it^iUi tuddmi, I beat.

TJ<< + ^ tuda+i=ltfi tude, I beat, Atm.

<JT«T + 3[ dana+* = <P^ ddne, in the gift.

t[T»T + ^ c?awa-f£= <H% ddne, the two gifts.

If we admit the same set of terminations after bases ending in consonants and in short ^T a, it becomes necessary to lay down some rules requiring final ^T a to be dropt before certain vowels. Thus if *8R^am is put down as the general termination of the ace. sing., as in '3F3vdch-am, it is necessary to enjoin the omission of final ^Ta of f$R &va before the ^ am of the ace. sing., in order to arrive at f$rt sivam. In the same manner, if ^ am is put down as the termination of the i.p. sing. impf. Par., and U e as that of the i. p. sing. pres. Atm., we can form regularly ^s^ advesh-am and TIT^ dvishe; but we have to lay down a new rule, according to which the final ^T a of ij^ tuda is dropt, in order to arrive at the correct forms ^Tg^ atud(a)-am and TJ^ tud(a)e. By following the system adopted in this grammar of giving two sets of terminations, and thus enabling the student to arrive at the actual forms of declension and conjugation by a merely mechanical combination of base and termination, it is possible to dispense with a number of these phonetic rules.

Again, in the declension of bases ending in radical ^TT a, certain phonetic rules had to be laid down, according to which the final ^TT d had to be elided before certain terminations beginning with vowels. Thus the dative ty<sr*Hl 4- JJ sankhadhmd-\-e was said to form ^IT^TJT sankhadhme, (to the shell-blower,) by dropping the final ^TT a, and not ^l<s!**i san- khadhmai. Here, too, the same result is obtained by admitting two bases for this as for many other nouns, and assigning the weak base, in which the W[ d is dropt, to all the so-called Bha cases, the cases which Bopp calls the weakest cases (Pan. vi. 4, 140). Each of these systems has its advantages and defects, and the most practical plan is, no doubt, to learn the paradigms by heart without asking any questions as to the manner in which the base and the terminations were originally combined or glued together.

§ 109. With regard to verbal bases ending in long ^TT a, many special rules have to be observed, according to which final ^TT a is either elided, or changed to ^z or to J? e. These rules will be given in the chapter on Conjugation. Thus

ipfT -h '^ fk puna -\- anti = ^j r( in punanti, they cleanse. IpTT -j- IT: pund+mah= yvfli! punimah, we cleanse. ST -t- f^ dd-\-hi=^ dehi, Give !

§ no. Final ^i, », "3u, "31 u, ^$ri, if followed by vowels or diphthongs, are generally changed to Ty, v, ^.r.

Ex. Hw + U = JT« mati+ai=matyai, to the mind.

^ = (Vf J J* /^-H$==/fey*& they have conquered. + ^fc = *TT^t bhdnu+oh = bhdnvoh, of the two splendours. + WT = "fi^T pitri+d=pitrd, by the father.

UbM+ati — bibhyati, they fear.

-$ 1 13. RULES OP INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 53

In some cases ^t and f are changed to ^iy; 7 u and "Hi* to T«(t<p; ^ri to ftri; to ^ t> and, after labials, to "9^ ur.

Ex. fyOftl + Wy = (VPsH^t fiJri+athuJi = siJriyathuJtt you (two) have gone. tf + ^= fafr bhi+i = bhiyi, in fear. 5 -f- Wlf = ^«ffif yu-\-anti=iyuvantit they join. 53 H- T: = *nT|: yuyu+uh = yuyuvuht they have joined. *[*[ + ^ = 5?^ sushu+e=sushuve, I have brought forth. >T + ^ = gfa bhtf+i=zbhuvi, on earth. ^ + ^HTT = ftnin mri+ate=imriyatet he dies. *| + wflf = f^KPn gri+ati=girati, he swallows. 1T^+ 3[ = M ^fV papri+ i =papuri, liberal.

When either the one or the other takes place must be learnt from paradigms and from special rules given under the heads of Declension and Conjugation. See fw»rfk bibhyati from *ft bhf, but fnf£<< fnjihriyati from ^ hrt.

§m. Final ^Qrt, if followed by terminational consonants, is changed to ^Tfr; and after labials

*T grt, to shout; Passive 1^5 n gir-yate; Part. ^iWt girnah. "^prt, to fill; Passive ^npur-yate; Part "^Ipurnah.

Before the ^y of the Passive, Intensive, and Beneclictive, final ^i and "3 u are lengthened, final ^J ri changed to ftrt, final ^ ri to f^ ir or "^.ur. (See f 390.)

§ 112. ^e, ^ ai, ^uo, ^TT«M, before vowels and diphthongs, are generally changed into

9 + ^Trf = ^frf de+ate = dayate, he protects.

X + ^ = ITT rai+e-=.rdye, to wealth.

'M + JJ = T3T ^70 + e=gave, to the cow.

•H + ^Tt = TTre: nau-\-ah=.ndvah, the ships.

Roots terminated by a radical diphthong (except ^vye in redupl. perf., Pan. vi. 1,46) change it into ^TT d before any affix except those of the so-called special tenses. (Pan. vi. i, 45.)

^ + 7TT = ^TrTT de+td=ddtd, he will protect.

^ + *faT=^ltO*J de+siya = ddsiya, May I protect !

§ + WT = STrTT mlai+td= mldtd, he will wither.

^ft + HT= ^TTTTT so+td=sdtd, he will pare. But in the Present ^ + ^rfif = 'c6I^Pd glai+ati=gldyati, he is weary.

2. Final Consonants.

§ 113. The rules according to which the consonants which can occur at the end of a word are restricted to ^ k, ^ n, ^ /, ^ w, j^tt ^[ w, ^/?, «T m, ^ /, : #, * 77i, must likewise be observed where the last letter of a nominal or verbal base becomes final, i. e. where it is not followed by any derivative letter or syllable.

Thus the nominal base ifijjudh, battle, would in the vocative singular be

54 INTERNAL SANDHL § 114-

y^ yudh. Here, however, the >^ dh must be changed into ^ d} because no aspirate is tolerated as a final ($ 54. i) ; and ^ d is changed into f{t, because no word can end in a soft consonant ($ 54. 2). ^tr^vdch, speech, in the voc. sing, would change its ^ ch into cF k, because palatals can never be final

(#54-3).

In ^nftcfi adhok, instead of ^rft| adoh, the aspiration of the final is thrown back on the initial ^d (§ 118). The final ^h or TT ght after losing its aspiration, becomes *T g, which is further changed to "<? k.

§114. Nominal or verbal bases ending in consonants and followed by terminations consisting of a single consonant, drop the termination altogether, two consonants not being tolerated at the end of a word (J 55). The final consonants of the base are then treated like other final consonants.

rai vdch + s = vdk, speech ; nom. sing.

=inT prdnch + s=prdn, eastern; nom. sing. masc. Here UTcfr prank, which remains after the dropping of ^s, is, according to the same rule, reduced again to TfT^prdn, the final nasal remaining guttural, because it would have been guttural if the final ^K k had remained.

+ ^= *J^ suvalg + s = suval, well jumping. Here, after the dropping of ^ s, there would remain ^«R«F suvalk ; but as no word can end in two consonants, this is reduced to 4}4c4 suval. Before the Pada- terminations *}T^ suvalg assumes its Pada form *jc(c^ suval (§ 53) ; hence instrum. plur. *jqf*H: suvalbhih.

+ ^= ^T5*T ahan + s = ahan, thou killedst ; 2. p. sing. impf. Par. = ^7 advesh + 1 = advet, he hated ; 3. p. sing. impf. Par.

'srvVoF adoh + t = adhok, he milked ; 3. p. sing. impf. Par. Exceptions will be seen under the heads of Declension and Conjugation.

$ 115. With regard to the changes of the final consonants of nominal and verbal bases, before terminations, the general rule is,

1. Terminations beginning with sonant letters, require a sonant letter at the

end of the nominal or verbal base.

2. Terminations beginning with surd letters, require a surd letter at the end

of the nominal or verbal base.

3. In this general rule the terminations beginning with vowels, semivowels,

or nasals are excluded, i. e. they produce no change in the final con- sonant of the base.

1. T^-f fv = "^fHr vach + dhi = vagdhi. Speak ! 2. p. sing. imp. Par.

*[^4- ur = IJTJ^ prich + dhve =prigdhve, you mix ; 2. p. plur. pres. Atm,

2. ^ + fa = ^rffcr ad + si = atsi, 2. p. sing. pres. thou eatest. ^ + fir = ^rf% ad + ti = atti, 3. p. sing. pres. he eats.

- Il8. INTERNAL SANDHI. 55

marut + i = maruti, loc. sing, in the wind. — ^far vach + mi = vachmi, I speak. = ?TW7T grath + ya/e =grathyate, it is arranged. Exceptions such as fa^ -f »n = fain £/«^ + wo h = bhinnah, divided, *T»T: £Ao/ -f nah = bhagnah^ broken, must be learnt by practice rather than by rule.

$ 1 1 6. Aspirates, if followed by terminations beginning with any letter (except vowels and semivowels and nasals), lose their aspiration. (J 54. i.) Ex. *TRnqr + fcT = irRfw mdmath + ti = mdmatti, 3. p. sing. pres. Par. of the

intensive wri^mdmath, he shakes much. %V + ufr = %^ rundh + dhve = runddhve, 2. p. plur. pres. Atm. of

^^rudht you impede.

C5H4 ^=<5T^ labh+sye = lapsye, I shall take. But TJV + ^ = "5fy yudh + i = yudhi, loc. sing, in battle. 3?^-|-i: = Ht«T: lobh -H yah — lobhyah, to be desired. "Sp^ + «nfw = ^tflfif kshubh + ndti = kshubhndti, he agitates. It is a general rule that two aspirates can never meet in ordinary Sanskrit.

§ 117. If final \gh, \ dh, \dh, H bh are foUowed by T^^ or ^ th, they are changed to the corresponding soft letters, *T^, \d, 3d, 'Qb, but the 1(t and ^M are likewise softened, and the <£c? receives the aspiration. See also § 128. Ex. ^TJT^ + fff = ^ <u fa runadh+ti = runaddhi, he obstructs. cJ>T + W: = e73H: labh + talt = labdhah, taken.

rundh -\-thah-=. runddhah (also spelt ^VJ rundhah], you two obstruct. + Wt = ^r?TJ rundh +tah = runddhah, they two obstruct.

TT = vi<ri-s abdndh+tam = abdnddham, 2. p. dual aor. i. Par. you two bound. » = *i «R« i J abandh+thah = abanddhdh, 2. p. sing. aor. i. Atm. thou boundest.

In ^TOT^ abdnddham, 2. p. dual aor. i. Par., the aspiration of final ^dh is nojt thrown back upon the initial ^6, because it is supposed to be absorbed by the IT tarn of the termination, changed into V dham. The same applies to ^f«i«it abanddhdh, though here the termination *TH thdh was aspirated in itself.

§ 1 1 8. If ^gh, ^ dh, V dh, ^(bh, ^ A, at the end of a syllable, lose their aspiration either as final or as being followed by VS^dhv (not by fv c?Ai), H bh, ^s, they throw their aspiration back upon the initial letters, provided these letters be no other than *T^, ^ d, ^d, W6. See § 93.

Ex. Inflective base '^^budh, to know; nom. sing, y^bhut, knowing. Instrum. plur. ^JHfft bhudbhih. Loc. plur. iJPJ bhutsu.

Second pers. plur. aor. Atm. ^Hp| abhuddhvam. Second pers. sing. pres. Intens. «T\«fl^ + ftf = ^jWlfro bobodh+si=bobhotsi,

56 INTERNAL SANDHI. $ 119-

Desiderative of <^>T dabh, iHsfi dhipsati, he wishes to hurt.

First pers. sing. fut. of "^-f **nf*T = >irt«ll(»l bandh+sydmi=zbhantsydmi, I shall

bind.

<£? dah, to burn ; ^T^dhak, nom. sing, a burner. g^ duh, to milk j ^JTSEf adhugdhvam, 2. p. plur. impf. Atm. : but 2. p. sing. imp. Par.

jf*V dugdhi.

Note — ^V dadh, the reduplicated base of VT dhd, ^VTfiT dadhdmi, I place, throws the lost aspiration of the final Vc?A back on the initial ^d, not only before S^dhv, ^s, but likewise before TT t and ^(th, where we might have expected the application of § 1 17. <^^ 4- 1H — VWt dadh + tah = dhattah ; <^ + *n = TOT: dacta + thah = dhatthah ; ^ + % = VW cfotta + 5e = dhatse ; ^"^ + ^*f — \fS dadh + dhvam = dhaddhvam.

§ 1 19. If ^T c^, «f ./, l^y^ are final, or followed by a termination beginning with any letter, except vowels, semivowels, or nasals, they are changed to off k or *T#. Ex. Nominal base "^T^vdch; voc. <^Tc£t?a&, speech.

Verbal base "3^vach; 3. p. sing. pres. "^^ + flf = '%favach+ti=vakti. ^T + fv = ?^^ yunj-\-dhi=yungdhi, 2. p. sing. imp. Join ! But loc. sing. ^T^T + ^= ^jf^ vdch+i=vdchi.

= cfT1*! vdch+ya = vdchya, to be spoken. + ft = ^Tt vach+mah = vachmah, we speak.

= ^x^J t?acA-|-t?aA= vachvah, we two speak. (See also § 124.)

§ 1 20. "^s^ at the end of nominal and verbal bases, if it becomes the final of a word, is changed into <T t. Ex. Nominal base fg\dvish; nom. sing, fs^dvit, a hater.

Verbal base fg\dvish; 3. p. sing. impf. Par. -ws^ advet, he hated.

§ 121. Before verbal terminations beginning with ^s, it is treated like "3F k. Ex. ^"5 + ftf •=. \ fg| dvesh+si = dvekshi, thou hatest; aor. ^f^l ^ i^advikshat, he hated. *}\V#rApokshyati (posh+syati), he will nourish.

§ 122. Before IT t or "^M it remains unchanged itself, but changes J(t and ^th into 3f and "$th. Ex. '%'^+ KJ = "%FJ dvish+tah = dvishtah, they (two) hate.

^ffrN + 7R = *lfQ8W sarpish-\-tamam=sarpishtamam, the best clarified butter. This rule admits of a more general application, namely, that every dental T^f, ^th, ^ d, l{dh, «Tw, and ^s, is changed into the corresponding lingual, if preceded by "Zj, ^th, Tc?, ^dh, ^(n, and ^sh. (Pan. vin. 4, 41.) Ex. ft^ + fV = fkf^ dvid+dhi= dviddhi, hate thou. 1"? + •rrffr = *j'^illflf mrid+ndti=.mridndti. ^5 -f- "ff = ^ &?+ #e = ftf e, he praises.

= "^TT shat+ndm = shanndm, of six.

rri« shat+navatih = shannavatih, ninety-six. (Pan. vin. 4, 42, vart.)

§ 123. Before other consonantal terminations ^sh is treated like Z^t. Ex. <fe1^+ l4 = fk^|' dvish+dhvam-=dviddhvam, 2. p. plur. imp. Atm. Hate ye c?»MA+«-«= dvitsu, loc. plur. among haters.

-§ 128. INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 57

Exceptions to this rule, such as TJ*{dhrish, nom. V^rfArt'A, and to other rules will be seen under the heads of Declension and Conjugation.

§ 124. In the roots WT^bhrdj, to shine, lp(mrij,to wipe, 11^ yaj, to sacrifice, TXi(rdj, to shine, fjftsrij, to let forth, and m^bhrajj, to roast (VKi^bhrasj, Pan. vm. 2, 36), the final f[j is replaced by *{sh, which, in the cases enumerated above, is liable to the same changes as an original ^«A. Thus

>p^ + T = 1J1T mrij+tka = mrish(ha, you wipe.

TT*^ + *} = TT^| rdj + su = rdfsu . ^H<^ + l4 = ^Hf^f ay qj + dhvam = ayaddhvam .

§ 125. Most verbal and nominal bases ending in S^, "^ chh, l^ksh, ^tch (some in ^j, § 124) are treated exactly like those ending in simple ^*A. Ex. Nominal base foetus; nom. f*T^v»f> a man of the third caste.

Put. q*3^-f t*uf*i =• q«jii(*i ves+sydmi=zvekshydmi, I shall enter. Fut. periphr. ^ + ifT = ^7T ves+td=.veshtd, he will enter.

r«t9^ + m = f«i^ vis+dhvam=.viddhvam, enter you. Loc. plur. f%5^+ ?J = fq^tj rw+*M = r*Y*M, among men. Nominal base ili^prdchh ; nom. TRZprdt, an asker.

Verbal base V^prachh; IF^. + twPM = Utt^lfr prachh+sydmi=prakshydmi, I shall ask.

= WT prachh + td=prashtd, he will ask. = Ml<^tJ prdchh+su =prdtsu, among askers.

Nominal base Jf^ltaksh; THST + ^ = JC&^taksh-\-su = tatsu, among carpenters. Nominal base TQraksh; *\\*J5{ + ^ = '!W^<J goraksh+su-=goratsu, among cow- herds.

Verbal base ^TGfchaksh; ^fW + *f = ^^ chaksh+se=chakshe, thou seest.

^ ^

"^TST + l«i = ^^" chaksh-}-dhve=zchaddhve, you see.

, to cut; nom. sing. '^vrit.

tt*n(*i vrasch+sydmi = vrakshydmi, I shall cut. vrasch-\-td-=.vrashtd, he will cut.

§ 126. The 3^s' of f%S{dis, to show, ^^ c?r«V, to see, Up^spris, to touch, if final, or followed by Pada-terminations, is changed into «^ A;. Ex. Nominal base T7^ dis; nom. sing, t^c^ dik ; instrum. plur. f^f'«Tt diybhih ; loc.

plur. f$& dikshu.

"^3^ dris; nom. sing. 7f3^ drik ; instrum. plur. ^t^» drigbhih.

In the root •TSJnas, the change of 31 s into «^ A: or ^t is optional (Pan. vm. 2, 63). For further particulars see Declension and Conjugation.

§ 127. ^ h at the end of verbal bases, if followed by a termination beginning with ^s, is treated like ^gh, i.e. like a guttural with an inherent aspiration, which aspiration may be thrown forward on the initial letter. Ex. 75^ + t«i(«i = co\asi(#i leh-\-sydmi= lekshydmi, I shall lick.

<^ + Wrf*T = ^Hy^nfH doh+sydmi = dhokshydmi, I shall milk.

§ 128. In all other cases, whether at the end of a word or followed by terminations, ^A is treated either (i) like ^gh in most words beginning with ^d (Pan. vm. 2,32), and in ! ushnih ; or (2) like <£ dh in all other words.

I

58 INTERNAL SANDHI. $ 129-

Ex. (i) V^duli; nom. Vffidhuk ; instrum. plur. vfrn: dhugbhih ; loc. plur. WZdhukshu;

part. pass. <|7Vi dugdhah.

"^ + TH =*^<oJ drih+tah = dridhak, fast, is an exception. Ex. (2) fc5^ lih j nom. fc57 Kf *' instrum. plur. f&f^jt lidbhih ; loc. plur. vdh, ^TT^J vdtsu).

= ^: ruh+tah =

In c*te: 74tf&a$ and ^"t rudhah, ^+!{dh+t are changed to ?T + ^ dh+dh, or, more correctly, to "^ d-fT? dh (§ 117); then the first ^ d is dropt and the vowel lengthened. The only vowel which is not lengthened is "^J ri ; e. g. ^ + Tf = ^ vrih-{-ta = vridha.

The vowel of *T^ sah and ^ vaA is changed into ^\ o (Pan. vi. 3, 112), unless Samprasarana is required, as in the part. tKiSt udhah. (Pan. vi. i, 15.)

§ 129. The final WA of certain roots ('ttdruh, Jjfi muh, ^^ snuh, f^^ snih) is treated either as "3 gh or <^c?A. From ^^ druh, to hate, we have in compounds the nom. sing. IJali dhruk and "^T c?Arwf (Pan. vin. 2, 33) ; past participle '5n^ drugdhah or "^t drudhah.

§ 130. The final "^ A of «Tt» naA, to bind, is treated as ^ dh. Ex. "grrnr^ updnah, slipper; nom. sing. <m i *i j^ updnat ; instrum. plur. ^m«if|ft upd-

nadbhih.

Past part. pass. «T^ + fft = «T^; nah+tah=naddhah, bound. As to ^R"TF anaduh, ox, &c., see Declension.

§ 131. The ^5 of the nominal bases tm^dhvas, falling, and ?5T^sra5, tearing, if final

or followed by Pada-terminations, and the ^ s of "^ vas, the termination of the part.

perf. Par., before Pada-terminations only, is changed to T^£ (Pan. vin. 2, 72). See, how-

ever, § 173,204.

Ex. $5R^ dhvas, to fall; nom. sing. V3R(^dhvat, nom. plur. SERK dhvasah, instrum. plur.

- VSffjgl dhvadbhih.

§ 132. Verbal bases ending in ^s, change it to T{t, before terminations of the general tenses beginning with ^s. (Pan. vn. 4, 49.)

Ex. ^f^vas, to dwell; fut. ^5[ + tHif«i = «wn(»i vas+sydmi = vatsydmi. Before other terminations beginning with ^s, final ^s remains unchanged. ^^ + TT = ^fW vas+se •=. vasse, thou dwellest. ^T^ + "ftf = 'flfUf sas+si = sassi, thou sleepest. f«T^ + % = fHw nims+se=nimsse, thou kissest. HH«^ + ftf = Tj^fsq pepes+si=pepeshshi, thou hurtest. (§ 100.) In certain verbs final H s is dropt before TV dhi of the imperative.

= sddhi. (Pan. vi. 4, 35.) chakds+dhi = chakddhi. In the same verbs final ^s, if immediately followed- by the termination of the second person, ^(s, may be changed to 1{t or remain ^s.

^$TT^ + ^ = ^T^T T^ or ^n: asds+s = asdt or asdh. Before the J(t of the third person, it always becomes Tf t.

= asdt. (Pan. vm. 2, 73, 74.)

-$ 137. INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 59

Final Tf t, %d,Vldh before the ^« of the 2nd pers. sing. Imperf. Par. may be regularly repre- sented by l(t orby^*; *&l(avet or *ftl aveh,thou knewest; U ^1(arvnat or W^Hn arvnah, thou preventedst. (Pan. vm. 2, 75.)

§ *33' *{n and *^wi at the end of a nominal or verbal base, before sibilants (but not before the *Jsu of the loc. plur.), are changed to Anusvara. Ex. HH HI U PH jighdmsati, he wishes to kill, from ^5T han.

^^Tn kramsyate, he will step, from 1P{kram.

But *jf?T^5 suhinsuy among good strikers, from «j(V»^ suhin, Pada base of *ffi^ suhims. If 5^ n were changed to Anusvara, we should have to write "jjf¥*J suhimshu.

§ 134. «^n remains unchanged before semivowels.

Ex. "^Tn" hanyate, he is killed, from '%*^han. n«i«^ tanvan, extending, from iP^ ten. M«-q«l prenvanam*, propelling, from ^5^«nt?.

§ I35- *^m remains unchanged before the semivowels ^y, ^ r, "^ /. Ex. cfiTWj: Mm-yah, to be loved, from ^IW A;am.

TTPff tdmram, copper, from Tf^ /aw and suflix ^ra. ^^J amlak, sour, from ^W am and sunix <5 la.

§ 136. ^w at the end of a nominal or verbal base, if no suffix follows, or if followed by a Pada-termination, or by personal terminations beginning with *T m or ^u, is changed into 5^w. (Pan. vm. 2, 65.)

Ex. H$!Ri{prasdn, nom. sing., and H^nf^Tt prasdnbhih, instrum. plur., U3li**j prasdnsu,

loc. plur., from H^Il'T^rasam, quieting. (Pan. vm. 2, 64.) VI*I«N aganma, we went, and ^i*i»<r aganva, we two went, from T^ + T gam+ma,

71*^ + ^ gam-\-va. But nom. plur. M^imt prasdmah.

J 137. With regard to nasals, the general rule is that in the body of a word the firsts, the seconds, the thirds, and the fourths of each class can only be preceded by their own fifths, though in writing the dot may be used as a general substitute. ($ 8.) Ex. ^n^TUTT or ^i^jcfcri dsankate or dsamkate, he fears.

or ^ifc^Jlfri' dlingati or dlimgati, he embraces.

or ^^mfa vanchayati or vamchayati, he cheats. or ^r*^ utkanthate or utkamthate, he longs. or ifj gantum or gamtum, to go.

or giTr?r kampate or kampate, he trembles. In compounds, such as *R-J-^H sam + kalpah, it is optional to change final ^ m, standing at the end of a Pada, into the fifth or into real Anusvara ; hence ^cR^q: or TTf^r: samkalpah or sankalpah. (See J 77.)

* If the «^ n before ^ v were treated as Anusvara, the second «^ n would have to be changed into a lingual (§ 96). Pan. vm. 4, 2, vart.

I 2

60 INTERNAL SANDHI. § 138-

J 138. In the body of a word, Anusvara is the only nasal that can stand before the sibilants s^ s9 ^ sh, ^ s, and f h. Ex. ^R damsanam, biting, ^nrft yajdmsM, the prayers. *r^n hamsahj goose, t*»lT ramhate, he goes.

§ 139. «Tw following immediately after ^ch or *^j is changed to *T n. Ex. TT^T ydchnd, prayer. TTsjftra/m, queen. ^fsir jajne, he was born.

} 140. ^chh in the middle of a word between vowels or diphthongs must be changed to ^.chchh. (See § 91.) Ex. ^f^ richh, to go ; '^^fir richchhati, he goes. Jra: mlechchhah, a barbarian.

§ 141. "Schh before a suffix beginning with «Tn or H m is .changed to Tf? s. Ex. IT^ + «T= 1TW prachh+na=prasnak, question.

HlH^ + 1*T = HmlVi pdprachh+mi=pdprasmi, I ask frequently. Before ^ v this change is optional.

§ 142. Roots ending in T^y and ^v throw off their final letters before terminations beginning with consonants, except ^ y. Ex. ^+ 7K = tjjn puy-\-tah=putak, decaying.

= THU; turv+nah=. turnah, killed. + «llH = fffiC^l^didiv -\-vdn = didivdn, having played.

§ 143. Roots ending in Wt? and ^>, if preceded by 3(i or TM, lengthen their ^i and "3" w, if ^v or^r is followed immediately by a terminational consonant. (Pan. vm. 2, 77.) See No. 92, rT^ tvar.

Ex. f^1^ div, to play, cflsHPff dtvyati, he plays. Bened. ^leqm dw-ydsam. >-, to exert, JjrSt gurnah. 'i. e. vn^jir}, to grow old, *f\^\njiryati.

"^.gir, voice; instrum. plur. iftf^t girbhih, loc. plur. Tftftgirshu. There are exceptions. (Pan. vm. 2, 79.)

"^^Mr, to sound. Bened. ^fUra kurydsam.

On a similar principle ^T u is lengthened in jj^-f^rnn = ij^i^* turv+dvah = turvdvak. (Pan. vm. 2, 78.)

§ 144. Nominal and verbal bases ending in ^C«V and T^wr lengthen ^i and Tw, when ^r becomes final after the loss of another final consonant. (Pan. vm. 2, 76.) Ex. TT^-f ^= *f^ or *f\tgir+s=gir or gfk, nom. sing, voice.

§ 145. Nominal bases ending in S^z's or ^^ws (the 3^ is or I^MS being radical) lengthen ^ » and ^fu when final, and before terminations beginning with *T bh or ^s.

Loc. plur. ^^^ + ^ = ^rt!1J supis+su=supfyshuj nom. sing. masc. and neut.

*|tfh supth. Nom. sing. masc. ^HjpT +^T = ^»n sajus+s-=sajuh; nom. sing. neut. *HT* sajuh.

-$ 148. INTERNAL 8ANDHI. 61

Doubling of Consonants.

§ 146. According to some grammarians any consonant except ^r and ¥A, followed by another consonant and preceded by a vowel, may be doubled ; likewise any consonant preceded by ^lr or * A, these letters being themselves preceded by a vowel. As no practical object is obtained by this practice, it is best, with Sftkalya, to discontinue it throughout.

In our editions doubling takes place most frequently where any consonant, except the sibilants and ? h, is preceded by ^r or ¥ A, these being again preceded by a vowel. Thus ^T% arka, sun, is frequently written ^1% arkka. m(i\brahman may be written «%*i»^6ra Amman.

If an aspirated consonant has to be doubled, the first loses its aspiration. Thus TO»T or ^Ifa vardhana or varddhana, increase.

§ 147. A sibilant after ^> must not be doubled, unless it is followed by a consonant. Tims it is always, T^K varshdh, rainy season ; «U<$: ddarsah (Prat. 387), mirror. But we may write either <^Mff or <;^Mn darsyate or darsfyate, it is shown.

Explanation of some Grammatical Terms used by Native Grammarian*.

$ 148. Some of the technical terms used by native grammarians have proved so useful that they have found ready admittance into our own grammatical terminology. Guna and Vriddhi are terms adopted by comparative gramma- rians in the absence of any classical words to mark the exact changes of vowels comprehended under these words by Panini and others. Most Sanskrit grammars have besides sanctioned the use of such terms as Parasmaipada, Atmanepada, Tatpurusha, Bahuvrthi, Karmadhdraya, Krit, Taddhita, Unddi, and many more. Nothing can be more perfect than the grammatical terminology of Panini ; but as it was contrived for his own peculiar system of grammar, it is difficult to adopt part of it without at the same time adopting the whole of his system. A few remarks, however, on some of Panini' s grammatical terms may be useful.

All words without exception, or according to some grammarians with very few exceptions, are derived from roots or dhdtus. These roots have been collected in what are called Dhdtupdthas, root-recitals, the most important of which is ascribed by tradition to Panini*.

From these dhdtus or roots are derived by means of pratyayas or suffixes, not only all kinds of verbs, but all substantives and adjectives, and according to some, even all pronouns and particles. Thus from the root m^ man, to think, we have not only ?rgw man-u-te, he thinks, but likewise »R^ man-as, mind, HMU mdnas-a, mental, &c. Words thus formed, but without as yet any case-terminations attached to them, are called Prdtipadika, nominal bases. Thus from the root Sf^Ym, to beget, we have the prdtipadika or

* Siddhanta-Kaumudi, ed. Taranatha, vol. H. p. I.

62 GRAMMATICAL TERMS. § 148.

nominal base ^jan-a, man, and this by the addition of the sign of the nom. sing, becomes *F\\jan-a-h, a man.

Suffixes for the formation of nouns are of two kinds :

1. Those by which nouns are derived direct from roots ; Primary Suffixes,

2. Those by which nouns are derived from other nouns ; Secondary Suffixes. The former are called Krit, the latter Taddhita. Thus ^jana, man, is derived from the root *{r{jan by the Krit suffix ^ a; but inffarf janina, appropriate for man, is derived from *ttjana by the Taddhita suffix f«T fact. The name prdtipadika would apply both to *&{jana and *&f\<ijanma, as nominal bases, ready to receive the terminations of declension.

The Krit suffixes are subdivided into three classes :

1. Krit, properly so called, i.e. suffixes by which nouns can be regularly

formed from roots with certain more or less definite meanings. Thus by means of the suffix WJ athu, Sanskrit grammarians form ^TTJ vepathu, trembling, from ^^vep9 to tremble, •sgrrsr svayathu, swelling, from fig km, to swell.

kshavathu, sneezing, from TO kshu9 to sneeze. davathu, vexation, from g du, to vex, to burn.

2. Kritya, certain suffixes, such as rf^T tavya, ^f»fta aniya, if ya, JffoOT elima,

which may be treated as declinable verbal terminations. Thus from cR^ kar, to do, is formed <#S<*i kartavya, Wtjtffa karaniya, CRT§ kdrya, what is to be done, faciendum.

3. Unddi, suffixes used in the formation of nouns which to native gramma-

rians seemed more or less irregular, either in form or meaning. Thus from i&(vas9 to dwell, both ^r vastu, a thing, and wi^vastu, a house.

The Taddhita suffixes are no further subdivided, but the feminine suffixes (stripratyayd) are sometimes treated as a separate class.

A root, followed by a suffix (pratyaya)9 whether Krit or Taddhita, is raised to the dignity of a base (prdtipadika), and finally becomes a real word (pada) when it is finished by receiving a case-termination (vibhakti).

Every base, with regard to the suffix which is attached to it, is called Anga, body. For technical purposes, however, new distinctions have been introduced by Sanskrit grammarians, according to which, in certain declen- sions, a base is only called Anga before the terminations of the nom. and ace. sing., nom. and ace. dual, and nom. plur. of masc. and fern, nouns ; besides the nom. and ace. plur. of neuters. The vocative generally follows the nominative. These Anga cases together are called the Sarvandmasthdna. Bopp calls them the Strong Cases.

Before terminations beginning with consonants (likewise before Taddhitas

§ 148. GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 63

beginning with any consonant except ^ y) the base is called Pada, the same term which, as we saw before, was used to signify a noun, with a case- termination attached to it. The rules of Sandhi before these terminations are in the main the same as at the end of words.

Before the remaining terminations which begin with vowels (likewise before Taddhitas beginning with vowels and ^ y) the base is called Bha. Bopp calls the Pada and Bha cases together the Weak Cases ; and when it is necessary to distinguish, he calls the Pada the Middle and the Bha the Weakest Cases.

Nouns, whether substantives, adjectives, or pronouns, are declined through three numbers with seven or, if we include the vocative, eight cases. A case- termination is called 1£{sup or fwf^i vibhakti, lit. division.

Verbs are conjugated through the active and passive voices, and some through a middle voice also, in ten moods and tenses, with three persons and three numbers. A personal termination is called fir^ tin or Owta vibhakti.

A declined noun as well as a conjugated verb, ending in a vibhakti, is called Pada.

Particles are comprehended under the name of Nipdta, literally what falls into a sentence, what takes its place before or after other words.

All particles are indeclinable (avyaya).

Particles are,

1. Those beginning with ^ cha, and, i. e. a list of words consisting of

conjunctions, adverbs, interjections, collected by native grammarians.

2. Those beginning with u prat before, i. e. a list of prepositions collected

in the same manner by native grammarians.

When the prepositions beginning with if pra govern a substantive, they are called Karmapravachaniya. When they are joined to a root, they are called Upasarga or Gati. The name of Gati is also given to a class of adverbs which enter into close combination with verbs. Ex. "astf uri in ^Oeffl urikritya, assenting ; ^TI^ khdt in ttlrjirfl khdtkritya, having made khdt, i. e. the sound produced by clearing the throat.

64 DECLENSION. § 149-

CHAPTER III.

DECLENSION.

$ 149. Sanskrit nouns have three genders, Masculine, Feminine, and Neuter ; three numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural ; and eight cases, Nominative, Accusative, Instrumental, Dative, Ablative, Genitive, Locative, and Vocative.

Note — There are a few nouns which are indeclinable in Sanskrit: *5^ svar, heaven; ^*m^ayds, fire; W33(^samvat, year, (of Vikramaditya's era); ^tj svayam, self; *l|f*f saw*, half; *j$.bhur, atmosphere; '^fesudi, the light fortnight, and ^f^ badi, the dark fortnight, the usual abbreviations for 5J^M^t suklapakshah and ^snqsj: krishnapakshah, or ^c^UHft bahulapakshah, (Warren, Kalasankalita, p. 361.) According to Radhakanta, *jf?f sudi is used in the West only.

Some nouns are pluralia tantum, used in the plural only ; <f!TTJ ddrdh, plur. masc. wife ; . dpah, plur. fern, water ; ^rtTS varshdh, plur. fern, the rainy season, i. e. the rains ; sikatdh, plur. fern, sand ; q^coit bahuldh, the Pleiades.

§ 150. Sanskrit nouns may be divided into two classes : i. Those that have bases ending in consonants. 2,. Those that have bases ending in vowels.

i. Bases ending in Consonants.

£ Iji. Nominal bases may end in all consonants except *&n} 5Tn, Tty. The final letters of the inflective bases of nouns, being either final or brought in contact with the initial letters of the terminations, are subject to some of the phonetic rules explained above.

§ 152. Bases ending in consonants receive the following terminations :

Terminations for Masculines and Feminines.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

Norn. ^5 (which is always dropt) l^au

Ace. ^ am J

Instr. ^rra " fa: bhih

Dat. ire ... Abl. ^: ah

Gen. ^r: ah ] ^TT dm

Loc. v }^:o* ISM

Voc. like Nom., except bases in ^\n and "^s ^ au ^r: ah

Neuters have no termination in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. singular (Pada cases).

They take \i in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. dual (Bha cases).

They take ^ i in the Nom., Ace., and Voc. plural, and insert a nasal before the final consonant of the inflective base (Anga cases). This nasal is

1 \vi\bhyah

J

.DECLENSION.

65

determined by the consonant which follows it; hence ^n before gutturals, ^tf before palatals, T^n before linguals, ^n before dentals, i^m before labials, Anu- svara before sibilants and ^ h. Neuters ending in a nasal or a semivowel do not insert the nasal in the plural. (See Sarasv. i. 8, 5; Colebrooke, p. 83.) § 153. Bases ending in consonants are divided again into two classes :

1. Unchangeable bases.

2. Changeable bases.

Nouns of the first class have the same base before all terminations, this base being liable to such changes only as are required by the rules of Sandhi. Nouns of the second class have two or three bases, according as they are followed by certain terminations. Thus from TTW^ pratyach, Nom. Dual Jfitf^ pratyanch-au ; base UW^ pra-

tyanch. (Anga.)

Instrum. Plur. umfhr: pratyag-bhih ; base M^f^pratyach. (Pada.) Gen. Dual Tfift^h: pratich-oh ; base Itfffa^pratich. (Bha.)

i. UNCHANGEABLE BASES.

Paradigm of a regular Noun with unchangeable Base. $ 154. Bases ending in ^w and <^ / are not liable to any phonetic changes before the terminations, except that in the Nom. Sing, the ^s of the termi- nation is dropt (see $ 114; 55) ; and that in the Loc. Plur. a ^ t may be inserted after the final TQ^n.

Base ^T^t^suffdn, a ready reckoner, masc. fern. neut. (from *J su, well, and root IRT ^*M, to count.) (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 169.)

DUAL.

SINGULAR,

MASC. FEM.

MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

N. A. I.

D.

Ab

G

L.

V.

'}

sugdn-am *J WT sugdn-d sugdn-e

sugdn-ah

sugn-i an

SINGULAR.

N. A.V. *p*l sugdn f

sugdn-au

sugdn-bhydm

I sugdn-oh

\ ^n^H sugdn-ah

HlUl«?t sugdn-bhih \

sugdn-bhyah sugdn-dm

sugan-au NEUTER.

DUAL.

sugdn-i

sugan-ah

PLURAL.

sugn-

* Or l7^! sugdnt-su, § 74.

t As the accent in the vocative is always on the first syllable, it should be remembered, once for all, that wherever the nom. ace. and voc. are given together, the vocative is under- stood to have its proper accent on the first syllable. The vocative of the neuter sugan would therefore be, not sugan, but sugan.

K

DECLENSION.

§ 155. Bases ending in gutturals, ^ k, ^kh, ir #, ^ffh. These bases require no special rules.

Base TRtsPB sarvaSdk, omnipotent, masc. fern. neut. (from *f sarva, all, and root 3 §&%> to be able.)

SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

N.V. *t

A. ^%5nfc sarvasdkam

I. **im«m,aOkd

D.

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

sarvasdkah

Ab.l r Q

sarvasdkah sarvasdki

SINGULAR.

, , ,. _

sarvasakoh

NEUTER.

DUAL.

L.

N. A.V. '^5^1 «h sarvasdk ^^"h sarvasdki

All regular nouns ending in ^ A:, ^ A;

sarvasdgbhyah

sarvasdkdm ' sarvasdksTiu *

PLURAL.

sarvasdnki

may be declined after the model of ^rfsr^ sarvasdk.

§ 156. Base ending in^M. faRffa(chitratikkf painter, (from f%^ chitra, picture, and root f&^likh, to paint.)

SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

N.V. A. I. D.

G L.

I .

cUtralik^

f chitralikham J

chitralikhd "1 h

chitrahkhau

i-+ n /, * chitralikhah

cUtraligbUh

t chitralikhah

.

p. .r^i^i. L-* 7-77. T, \ f<^r<4^u chitrahkhoh

f^^fc^r/?r chitralikhi J

chitralikham

SINGULAR.

NEUTER.

DUAL.

N. A.V.

chitralikU

chitralikshu*

PLURAL.

5fe chitralihkhi

Note — In the paradigms of regular nouns with unchangeable consonantal bases it will be sufficient to remember the Nom. Sing., Nom. Plur., Instr. Plur., Loc. Plur., and Norn.

* On the change of *J su after "3U, see § 100. t «R& instead of T^kh, see § 113; 54. I.

~§ 158. DECLENSION. 67

Plur. Neut. The Ace. Instr. Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing., Nom. Ace. Voc. Gen. Loc. Dual, Ace. Gen. Plur., follow the Nom. Plur. The Instr. Dat. Abl. Dual, Dat. Abl. Plur., follow the Instr. Plur. The Vocative is the same as the Nominative.

§ 157. Regular nouns to be declined like

BASE. NOM. 8. NOM.PL.M.F. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT.

fftl(harit, green f fVj^ ^(Vn. ^Wilt f fU4l ^(Xfn

m. f. n. harit haritah haridbhih haritsu harinti

^ifr wifagnimath, fire-kindling vif*r|ti|i VffjrWYj: %tf' 1*1(5! >«P"i*iw lwi*»i»iPiq

m. f. n. agnimat* agnimathah agnimadbhih\ agnimatsu% agnimanthi

^Q^suhrid, friendly g^ *J^t ^<jf«: *J37*J ^^

m.f. n. si i hr it suhridah suhridbhih suhritsu suhrindi

^{budh, knowing ijl^ ^VJ ^jfe* ^P5 7^

m. f. n. bhut \\ budhah bhudbhfh bhutsu bundhi

*£{gup, guardian ^J*^ JPi; 5^*^ 79 1Sf^

m. f. n. gup gupah gubbhih gupsu gumpi

«JT5pT kakubh, region 4^;^ «F^Tt <*<^f»*Tt cf|c|H{ °4^f*T

f. kakup kakubhah kakubbhih kakupsu -kakumbhi

I 158. Bases ending in palatals, ^ch, ^ c^ Bases ending in ^ ch change ^ ch into «R k, or IT ^r, except when followed by a termination beginning with a vowel.

Base ^^^Jalamuch, masc. cloud (water-dropping).

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

N.V. vK&ttjalamuk "] ^ 1

« >• ^c^H^T jalamuchau > ico^^ii jalamuchah

A. «io*i"*i jalamucham ]

I. ^TOT^n jalamuchd ~] nc5^ f* •« jalamugbhih

Ab. 1 G. j

D. ^^jalamuche [ TOWin jalamugb hydm 1 ^^ jalamugb1iyaH

Ah. 1 J

1 ^ .^ ^j, W&$*1jalamuchdm

t jalamuchah

m.

jalamuchoh

L. «i«*jni jalamuchi

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. 5Tc51 <%jalamuk *T c^fl^ jo lamu cM *i &•*{'* jalamufichi

Decline like fTc3$^ jalamuch, — ^n^ vdch, fern, speech ; W9 tvach, fern, skin ; ^^ ruch, fern, light ; ^^ sruch, fern, ladle.

* ^th final changed into 1(t. See § 113; 54. i. Final ^5 dropt, § 55. t See §66. J See § 54. i. || See § 118.

68 DECLENSION. § 159-

§ 159. Special bases in ^ch.

BASE. NOM.S. INSTR.PL. LOC.PL. NOM.PL.

^5*1 krunch*, moving crookedly, "^ "J^fa ^Q "f^* (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 182)

a curlew krun krunbhih krunkshu krunchah

if it means worship- TTT^ Ul^'fa: Tlh| JtHlJ (Accent, Pan. vi. 1, 182)

ping pran pranbhih prdnkshu prdnchah (Ace. the same)

^^ vrisch f, cutting ^7 ^* f^l ^f* (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 168)

mit% vridbhih vritsu vnschuh

§ 1 60. Bases ending in *&.chh change "^ chh into 3^s, which becomes 7 t, when final, and before consonants. (See § 125; 174.6: Pan. vi. 4, 19.)

NOM. SING. NOM.PL. INSTR.PL. LOC.PL. NOM. PL. NEUT.

TffRZprdchh, an asker Tfl^prdt W$f\prdsah UTSfftt prddbhih m^prdtsu Tfif$[prdmsi

§ 161. Bases ending in *^j, if regular, follow the example of nouns in "^ch, except that they preserve *{j before vowels.

BASK. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. INSTR.PL. LOC.PL. NOM.PL. NEUT.

ruj, disease ^TofT ruk ^ITt rujah ^^Tt rugbhih ^jTST rukshu f runji

^T urj, strength "31^ tirk \\ *3&(\ urjah ^Rfr^J tirgbhih "3R3£ drkshu 1!^ urji

Other regular nouns in *^j, — ^f^T^vanij, m. merchant; fiTO^ bhishaj, m. physician; ^i frcf »^ ritvij, m. priest; &5tsraj, f. garland; 41 ^•^om,/, n. blood. (On the optional forms of vj^^amj, see § 214.) if^majj, Nom. Sing. T«^ mak, diving.

§ 162. Bases ending in *{j changeable to ^ d.

Some bases ending in *tj change 1TJ into 7 1 or ^ d when final, and before terminations beginning with consonants.

* Derived from the root ^^krunch. The Nom. Sing, would have been ^pfi + 1{krunk +s; ^s and «FA; are dropt, see § 114.

f Derived from the root 'ZF^vrasch, (in the Dhatupatha, ^fld*^), to cut. According to Sanskrit grammarians, the penultimate ^s or S^^'is dropt, and ^(ch before consonants or if final changed into Vt. (See § 114.)

J The form ^ftvrit (not 'ffZvrat} is confirmed by Siddhanta-Kaumudi (1863), vol. i. p. 182.

|| On the two final consonants, see § 55. The Nom. Plur. Neut. would be "^rf^ urji or 3OTn ttmr/t*. At the end of compounds the optional forms are ^if^ urji or 01(3* urnji. The latter form is confirmed by Colebrooke, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, vol. i. p. 194, and the Prakriya-Kaumudi. The Prakriya-Kaumudi (p. 44 a) says : "3^ I ^ft ^gfrf

^rf^i ^|f^ ^rfrr^: i ^|f^ ^T^T i ^WTT^ ^ft^w% i *rffst i (Pan.vn. i,

72, vart.)

-§ i<53-

Base

N.V.

A.

I.

D.

Ab. 1

G. j

L.

DECLENSION.

69

SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

samrdj, masc. sovereign. DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.

MASC. FKM.

4 \

rdjam \

samr* samrdjd samrdje

samrdjah

,

samr dj an

samrddbhydm samrdjoh

samrdjah : samrddbhih \ Hyi^*K samrddbhyah *fli»ii samrdjdm

The words which follow this declension are mostly nouns derived, without any suffix, from the roots OT5T 6Artf/ (j^THJ, not ^fT3j), to shine; 1»T mn;, to clean ; T^yo; (except ^J Prf »^ ritvij), to sacrifice; tT^rtf;, to shine, to rule; ^p^*n;', to dismiss, to create, (^n^sro/, wreath, and WJJ^asn;', blood, are not derived from ^5^«n;)j HM^bkrajj, to roast (£T5T). Also Tfft$K*{parivrdj ', a mendicant.

BASE.

f^TTS^ vibhrdj, resplen

dent mbhrdtf

i%y worshipper <^"3 of the gods devet

visvasrij, creator tqvjtii of the universe visvasrit

H R« I ^parivrdj, a men- MPi^l^ dicant parivrdt

universal monarch JJ5^ bhrijj, roasting

NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. IN8TR. PLUR.

LOC. PLCB.

vibhrdj ah devejah

vibhrdtlbhih devedbhih

vibhrdtsu devetsu

visvasrijah visvasridbhih visvasritsu

visvdrdt

parivrdjah parivrddbhih parivrdtsu

f^^i.i'ii fq^Ki^UTJ rq*aKT^

visvardjah visvdrddbhih visvdrdtsu

bhrtjjah § 163. Irregular bases in ^Tj. ,

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR.

bhridbhtTt

bhritsu

INSTR. PLUR. LOC. PLUR.

'll", lame

khdnjah

J khanbhih

vibhrdk, famfh?. vibhrdgbhih &c. may be formed. (Siddh.-

* Cf. § 76.

t From another root, Kaum. vol. i. p. 165.)

J From ^ efefla, god, and ^H^ yq;, to sacrifice, contracted into ^"5^ y.

|| The lengthening of the ^T a in f^I rt«?a takes place whenever *^^' is changed into a lingual. (Pan. vi. 3, 128.)

IT See Siddh.-Kaum. ed. Taranatha, vol. i. p. 165.

70

DECLENSION.

§ 164-

2. *RiRv{avaydj, name of a Vedic priest, has two bases. The Norn. Sing, is vt^MiJ avaydh, and all the cases beginning with consonants (Pada cases) are formed from the same base, ^ra^ avayas. The Voc. Sing., too, is irregular, being, against the rule of these bases, identical with the Norn. Sing. Some grammarians, however, allow if ^rezi: he avayah. Base ^RTRH avayas and vtq*u^ avaydj.

SINGULAR.

MASC.FEM.

DUAL.

MASC.FEM.

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

N.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G

L.

V.

TJ avaydh v<q*iin avaydjam avaydj d avaydje

b. 1 > . J

I viq*(mi avaydjau L

1 ±

avayobhydm

avaydjah

avayobhifr

avayobhyah

avaydjah

avaydjdm avayahsu like Nom.

}*i«i«nnlS avaydjoh 2 „„ .

avaydh or viq*(i avayah like Nom. § 164. Bases ending in ^ r.

Bases ending in ^ r are regular, only ^ i and 7 u, preceding the "£ r, are lengthened, if the ^r is final or followed by a consonant (f 144). In the Loc. Plur. the final ^ r remains unchanged though followed by "S sh. (§ 90.) Base frrr^r, fern, voice.

SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

N.V.

A.

I.

D.

Ab

G

L.

k'}

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

r fJTU girau

f Tft^T girbhydm

J- fH^t gir6h

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

> fiRt girah TftfH: girbht'h

\ Tft^l girbhydh "PTTT giram

Base

, neut. water.

SINGULAR.

NEUTER.

DUAL.

N.A.V. I.

BASE.

, f. town c?t?ar, f. door Arir, m. f. n. scattering

^WT vdrbhydm

NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR.

Jf&purah Ct dvdrah

INSTR. PLUR.

vdri

: vdrbhih, &c.

LOC. PLUR.

: k/h

purbhih

j dvdrbhzh ?TT§ dvdrshu

* According to Pan. vi. i, 168, aari would have the accent on the first, while according to Pan.vi. i, 171, would have it on the second syllable, because the Nom. and Ace. Dual in the neuter are not Tritiyadi, but are Asarvanamasthana.

t Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 125.

-$ [65. DECLENSION. 71

J 165. Bases in ^s.

(A.) Bases formed by the suffixes VT^as, ^w, f^us. Bases ending in ^$ change the ^s according to the general euphonic rules explained above. Thus

as, if final, becomes w: ah. (§ 83.)

as followed by terminations beginning with vowels remains unchanged. and ^ is and us followed by terminations beginning with vowels are changed to ^and f^ish and ush. (See J 100.)

as before ^ bh becomes ^ft o ($ 84. 3) ; ^ is and 7^ us before ^ bh become ^.ir and T^ur. ($82.)

before ^su becomes W(as or *r: ah; ^ & and 7^ us before *J *w become ^ish or ^: i#, T^MS/J or T: wA. Besides these general rules, the following special rules should be observed :

1. Nouns formed by the suffix ^^as lengthen their V a in the Nom. Sing.

masc. and fern., but not in the Vocative. Thus Nom. Sing. m. f. *ptTK sumandh, well-minded (eifyzej/ifc) ; Voc. tJ*Hi sumanah.

2. Nouns formed by the suffixes ^ or g^ is or us do not lengthen their

vowel in the Nom. Sing. masc. and fern. Hence Nom. Sing. m. f. ^TtflPff: sujyotify, having good light, from *J su, good, and rtftPH: jyotih, n. light ; *J^Er: suchakshufy, having good eyes, from *J su, good, and ^TB|: chakshuh, n. eye. (Pan. v. 4, 133, com.)

3. Neuter nouns in ^r^as, ^(isy "&3(us, lengthen their vowel and nasalize

it in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. From JR: manah, *HJfa mandmsi ; from **ftftt jyotih, T«fl tijfajyotimshi ; from ^T^t chakshuh, ^TSffa chakshumshi. Base *p?F^ sumdnas, well-minded, masc. fern. neut. (from ^ su and m^mdnas, neut. mind.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.

U

_ sumdnasau HH^: sumdnasah

A. tpntt sumdnasam

I. D.

n

\ J

1 -^

J '

sumdnasah

I ^ ^HH^I sumanasam

r f ««i«l"'«l; sumdnasoh

L. <}«ini« sumanasi J ?*^»" sumanahsu

V. '5*^* sumanah ^HH^I sumanasau ^intil sumanasah

NEUTER. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. 5*Rt sumanah 4J*Htfl sumanasi ^i«iirt« sumdndmsi

The rest like the masc. and fern.

72

DECLENSION.

§ i66-

Base ?JTif)Prf^ sujyotis, well-lighted, masc. fern. neut. (from *j su and is, neut. light.)

SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

N.V.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

L.

sujy6tih

sujyotisham f sujyotishd

sujy6tishe

I sujy6tisJiah \ sujy6tishi

sujy6tishau

sujyrftirbhydm

sujy6tishoh

sujydtishah sujydtirbhih sujy6tirbhyah

sujydtishdm sujytitihshu

SINGULAR.

NEUTER. DUAL.

PLURAL.

N.A.V.

The rest like the masc. and fern.

sujy6tisM

sujydtimslii

sujyotis the

Decline after the model of *JT«T^ sumanas and following bases :

%V^ vedhas, Nom. sing. ^VT* vedhdh, m. wise. ^"S^1^ chandramas, N. s. ^"^Tr: chandramdh, m. moon. "SFn^prachetas, N. s. UHrilt prachetdh, m., Nom. prop, of a lawgiver, f^^ofi^ divaukas, N. s. f^cfir: divaukdh, m. a deity. f^R^v^%«5, N. s. fag inn vihdydh, m. bird. TSC^K^apsaras, N. s. ^3n*ro apsardh, f. a nymph. HjTi*^ mahaujas, N. s. H^»n: mahaujdh, m. f. n. very mighty. TT^ pay as, N. s. TIT?: payah, n. milk. N. s. ^R: «y«^, n. iron. ^^ yasa^, N. s. T^r: yasafy, n. praise. N. s. ffa: ^flviA^ n. oblation. ^rNN^ archis, N. s. ^rf$: archih, n. splendour. ^rrg^ dyus, N. s. ^15: %wA, n. life, age. ^g^ vapus, N. s. ^j: vapuh, n. body*.

§ 166. 'STTJJara, old age, may be declined throughout regularly as a feminine. (See § 238.) There is, however, another base *K$(jaras, equally feminine t, and equally regular, except that it is defective in all cases the terminations of which begin with consonants.

* Any of these neuter nouns may assume masc. and fern, terminations at the end of a compound ; qg^(V nashtahavih, Nom. sing. masc. one whose oblation is destroyed.

t Boehtlingk (Declination im Sanskrit, p. 125) gave *&$(jaras, rightly as feminine; in the dictionary, though oxytone, it is by mistake put down as neuter.

DECLEN8IOX.

73

Base SINGULAR.

d

N.

A, ^(^ jar dm

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

V.

Base

SINGULAR. deest; term. ^

ya

i jardyd

N.A.V.

l.D.Ab.

G. L.

DUAL.

f jardbhydm jardyoh

PLURAL.

N.V. -TO^WA

A. "SfTTJ j'W/4 I. qfilf^jar^At'// D. Ab. »m»T* jardbhyah G. L.

mul jards-ah "5TC^* jards-ah "*[TTQ jards-i deest

DUAL.

"5TCHT jards-au

deest ; term. «IT bhydm

l^tTit jards-oh

PLURAL. K jards-ah

jards-ah deest ; term. f deest ; term. ** »IVtif jards-dm deest ; term. H

§ 167. In compositions, besides the regular forms from »m jara, viz. nirjard, fi^i. nirjaram, (ageless,) grammarians allow the base in before all terminations beginning with vowels f.

nirjarah, to be used

SINGULAR.

MASC.

N.

A. f«i»l< nirjaram or

I. Trj3ti,<u nirj arena or

D. fn »l i.1 M nirjardya or Ab. P«i»l<Lii^ nirjardt or

G. T*f5T^T nirjarasya or

L. fVi^f^ nirjare or

V. fV|5FC nir/ara

SINGULAR.

MASC. i I:M .

deest

""• nirjarasam nirjarasd nirj arose Tt nirjarasah ( nirjarasah ( nirjarasi deest

nirjarasina, masc.)

nirjarasdt, masc.) nirjarasasya, masc.

* The declension of ^^[jard, as a regular fern, in ^TTa, is given here by anticipation for the sake of comparison with the defective «H^./aras.

t By a pedantic adherence to the Sutras of Panini some monstrous forms (included in brackets) have been deduced by certain native grammarians, but deservedly reprobated by others. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. pp. 103, 141.)

J The declension of ftnfc nirjarah, as a regular masc. in ^ST cr, is given by anticipation for the sake of comparison with the defective f»i »i <.^ nirjaras*

L,

74: DECLENSION. § 1 68-

DUAL. DUAL.

N. A.V. Uf»i<J nirjarau or r*f*f<^T nirjarasau

I. D. Ab. fti<3 <jvqf nirjardbhydm deest

G. L. f»i>K*iu nirjarayoh or f«T^T^n* nirjarasoh

PLURAL. PLURAL.

N.V. Pri^lt nirjardh or fa^HSt nirjarasah

A. f^TT^ nirjardn or Pri^K.^ nirjarasah

I. f«T^T* nirjaraih deest (f^R%J nirjarasaik, masc.)

D.Ab. f*l *n,*n nirjarebhyah deest

G. f»T5fcU!!ff nirjardndm or fl*l<JRT nirjarasdm

L. PiTtO nirjareshu deest

Fern. fMfTT nirjard, like oRTTTT X:a»^. Neut. fH*rtmV/aram, like ^ifw kdntam.

Neut. Sing, deest (fr|*f<^ nirjarasam) ; Dual

nirjarasi; Plur. «i < ? nirjardmsi.

§ 168. ^nnn^ anehas, m. time, 'g^I^pMrwrfffm/as, m. name of Indra, form the Norn. Sing. vin^T anehd, ^^ ?\ \ purudamsd, without final Visarga. The other cases are regular, like "QTfif^sumanas, m. Voc. I? ^^"^t he anehah.

§ 169. ^T^^usanas, m. proper name, forms the Nom. Sing, o ^i ni usand and the Voc. Sing. ^T^^usanan or o^i«i« usanah or T^Rusana. (Sar. I. 9, 73.)

§ 170. (B.) Bases ending in radical f^s.

1. From ffepinda, a lump, and %fH(gras, to swallow, a compound is formed, fferf1{pinda-

gras, a lump-eater. From ni^ ^n's, to walk, and ^ ***> well, a compound is formed, ^Jnl^ supis, well-

walking. From Tj^ #ws, to sound, and ^J SM, well, a compound is formed, *jjj«^ SM/MS, well-

sounding.

2. In forming the Nom. Sing. m. f. (and neuter), the rules laid down before with regard

to nouns in which ^Sl^as, ^^is, "31!(us, belong to a suffix, are simply inverted. Nouns in j^«'s and "3^ us lengthen the vowel, nouns in ^K^as leave it short.

Ex. Nom. Sing. m. f. n. "ftf^U! pindagrah, ^fh supih, ^JJ sutuh.

3. In the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. of neuters, nouns in "ZR^as, ^(is, '^(us, nasalize their vowels, but do not lengthen them.

Ex. Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. neut. fq^fffS pindagramsi, Jjf4(Vi supimsi, "fffffa sutumsi.

4. Nouns in 3j^is and "3^ws lengthen their vowels before all terminations beginning with consonants.

Ex. Instr. Plur. 'gtrtfH: supirbhih, *pjf*l« suturbhih, *pj»3 sutuhshu.

5. The radical ^s of nouns ending in ?^w and T^MS, though followed by vowels, is not liable to be changed into ^sh. (See § 100, note.)

DECLENSION.

75

Base h*n\pindagra8, eating a mouthful, maac. fern. neut.

SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

pindagrafy pindagraaam pindagrasd pindagrase

DUAL.

FEM.

SINGULAR.

: pindagrah

SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

N.V. A. I. D . Ab.

L.

N. A.V.

N.V.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

N.A.V.

§ 171. Nouns derived from desiderative verbs change H s into Base fs M Hjt^ pipathis, wishing tcr read, masc. fern. neut. SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

pipathih

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

indagrasau I ftji

pindagrobhydm

> TTTnjr«n pindagrobhyah

pindugrobhih

NEUTER.

DUAL.

pindagrasi

well-sounding, masc. fern. neut. DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

sutusau

pindagratdm pindagrahsu

PLURAL.

pindagramsi

sutusam

suturbhydm

sut us ok

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

sutusah suturbhih suturbhyah

sutusdm

SINGULAR.

NEUTER.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

sutumsi

when necessary.

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

PLURAL.

MASC. FEM.

N. A.

D.

rMHf<j*f pipathisham

[• ft'^fT^J pipathishah G. J

L. f M M f<J PM pipathishi

pipathishoh NEUTER.

pipathishah pipathirbhih • pipathirbhyah

pipathisham :^ pipathihshu

SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

N. A.V.

t pipathih fn M (V H^ pipathishi

pipathishi (see § 172)

* Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 187. § 83.

76 DECLENSION. 0 172-

§ 172. The nouns 'STT'f^I^ dsis, fern, blessing, and ^*J^ sajush, masc. a companion, are declined like fTTf^ pipathis, except in the Nom. Ace. and Voc. Plur., if they should be used as neuters at the end of compounds*.

List of different Bases in ^s.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. INSTR. PL. Loc. PL.

MASC.FEM. NEUT. MASC.FEM. NEUT.

kind, m.f.n. sumandh1 -nah sumanasah sumandmsi sumanobhih sumanassu or -nahsu

Sjsftfrf^ sujyotis, ^^ftflTt id. *J jSftfiret ^JWtfTfrfa 3{ Wt fin T*T» 'p'frfff^ or °fr»*J

well-lighted, m.f.n. sujyotih svjyotishah sujyotimshi sujyotirbhih sujyotishshuoi-tihshu

f^'^T^'^fpindagras, ftfe?J! id. "nT^T^tt TOf^jnT f'JSiji'm* nh»?JW or °?I»^J

lump-eating,m.f.n. pindagrah pindagrasah pindagramsi pindagrobhih pindagrassuor-grahsu

^T3!fflchakds, splen- ^cfiTt id. ^"^iT^Tt ^fofiTtH *«|oftTf>Tt •*»<*! w or ^<*Ti3J

did, m.f.n. chakdh chakdsah chakdmsi chakdbhih chakdssu or chakdhsu

(Accent, P. vi. 1,171.) doh doshah * domshi dorbhih d6shshu or dohshu

^^•T^ supis, well- ^l^» id.3 ?jftnTJ ^Tfani ^"^rnH* ^tflt-^ or ^^»5

going, m.f.n. supih supisah4 supimsi supirbhih supishshu or supihshu

IffiHsutus, well- ^["ff* id. "fffiK 51^" ?^lf^* ?5^5 or ^?:3

sounding, m.f.n. sutuh sutusah sutumsi suturbhih sutushshu or sutuhshu

f^^<S^pipathis,^esiY- fiwftl id.3 f^Rf^^* ftr^frf^ fo^^ftf*!: ftf^<ft^5 or -^JJ

ous of reading, m.f.n. pipathih pipathishah pipathishi5 pipathirbhih pipathishshuor-thihsh

ous of acting, m.f.n. chikih chikirshah chikirshi^ chikirbhih chikirshu

^ftf^FHdsis, blessing, ^T^*dsih id. ^Tlf^I'RJ ^TT^n"P^ ^JTT^I^f*!* ^TT^ft^or

f. (Voc. id.) dsishah dsimshi dsirbhih dsishshu or dsi

"^^, saJus> compa- H^J saju/i id. «»fMt ^*|f^ ^^fHJ ^T5£

nion, m. (Voc. id.) sajushah sajumshi sajurbhih sajushshu or sajuhshu

^f^^SM/tim5,onewho ^n^r^ id. ^T^H* ^nffa ^f^frHt ^'^^

strikes well, m. f. n. suhin suhimsah suhimsi suhinbhih suhinsu6

3r W$ft*5

or dsihshu

* Some grammarians do not allow the lengthening of the vowels in ^STT^flfft dsimshi and sajumshi. (jTTTTfir ^^ I X(T0 ^. d« °iO. I H ^ -^^^1 ^ ^iJ^J JTlfiT M f^ <* N H4 W 1TO *ft JPOT1 ^TTnTrj II ^T^^t "3T cfi^R ^ i n tf 'fl * i^THTWTi 1 1) This may be right according

to the strict interpretation of Panini, but the Pratisakhya (xui. 7) gives the rule in a more general form, stating that every neuter ending in an Ushman has a long vowel before the Anusvara, the Anusvara being followed by si or shi.

1 The Vocative is *}*Ri sumanah. In the other paradigms it is the same as the Nominative.

2 <fft^c?os may be declined regularly throughout as a masculine. But it is likewise declined as a neuter. On its irregular or optional forms, see § 214.

8 Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 197. 4 ^s not changed into ^sh; see § 100, note.

5 Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 194. 6 See § 75.

— } 174. DECLENSION. 77

§ 173. VSR^dhvas (from V&^dhvarhs, to fall) and ^R^sras (from $3N^*rarfw, to fall), when used at the end of compounds, change their ^a into T^J, in the Nom. and Voc. Sing., and before terminations beginning with consonants.

N.V. ^JBfaefif parnadhvat N. A.V. Tn&wfT parnadhvasau N. A. s<!)tt««I parnadhvasah A.lfftVafQparnadhvasam I.D.Ab.'WRVSnfflparnadhvadbhydm I. ^^isfyl parnadhvadbhih I. T&SERTT parnadhvasd G. L. *riU«nffc parnadhvasoh L. TTO WJ parnadhvatsu

§ 174. Bases ending in ^s, f^sh, TS^clth, "^ksh, "^h.

Bases ending in these consonants retain them unchanged before all terminations begin- ning with vowels. Before all other terminations and when final, their final consonants are treated either like ^ t or like c£ k.

1. Bases derived from f^ST efts', to show, ^S^dris, to see, UFS^sprtf, to touch, change 3^*

into ^ k. (§ 126.)

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. NOM.PLUR. NEUT. INSTR. PLUR. LOG. PLUR.

f^S^ dis, f. country f^T dtk f^^It disah f^f^f dim& f^fnu digbhih $%%£ dikshu

2. Bases derived from TfS^nas, to destroy, change "S^s into 7 t or c^ AT.

BASE. NOM. SING. N. PL. N.PL.NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOG. PL.

'oil 3 H $(jfvana6, m.f .n . ^TMH^or0^ °7T5T: °«i% °»T^5T:or0TrfirH: °7T^Jor°»rEJ life-destroying jtvanat or -naA: -nasah -namsi -nadbhih or -nagbhih -natsu or -nakshu

3. All other bases in ST / change their final into <? t.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOG. PL.

is, m.f. n. one who enters f^vft f^llvtsah f^ffyvfmsi fa^falvidbhih f^

4. Bases derived from V^ dhrish, to dare, change *r sh into "^ k.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

dadhrik dadhrishah dadhrimshi dadhrigbhih dadhrikshu

5. All other bases derived from verbs with final ^sh change ^s& into 7f.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

ish,m.f.n. hating fjfZ dmt ffT^t dvtshah fsfadvimshi f^fWt dvidbhih fgr<J IJ dvitsu

6. Bases ending in "^ chh change ^ chh into 7 t.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

TfT3iprdchh,m.f.n. asking W^prdt W^'prdsah TTtf^T prdmsl riT^j*Tt prddbhth

f 7. Bases ending in T5T ksh change T3^ ksh into 7 t.

BASE. NOM. SING, NOM. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

.f.n. paring 17 tat* rHSfJ tdkshah if ffef tdmkshi If^fHJ tadbhih

* If differently derived fn^ta&sA may form its Nom. Sing. 7T3F tak. iffTE^goraksh, cow- herd, which regularly forms its Nom. Sing. *nT7<7ora£, may, according to a different derivation, form »Ui^ gorak. (See Colebrooke, p.9O,note; Siddh.-Kaum.vol.i.p. 187.) Sofav^pipat, Nom. Dual famsfipipakshau, desirous of maturing; f«J <4 *§vivak, Nom. Dual f«< «f «T« r/rar;tsAa«, desirous of saying ; f^V«F didhak, Nom. Dual f^lHSJT didhakshau, desirous of burning.

78 DECLENSION. § 175-

8. Most bases ending in ^ h change ^ h into ^ t.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC,PL.

lih, m.f.n. licking f^T lit fc5^» lihah fc^fir limhi fc5^fat lidbhih fcV&Q litsu , m.f.n. covering "^ <jrMf ^1 ^rw^aA ^T^ gumhi "5^fa» ghudbhih "JT^ ghutsu On the change of initial T $r into "*T <^, see § 93.

9. Bases derived from roots ending in ^ h, and beginning with ^ d, change ^ h into ^T k.

Likewise ^fWi^ ushnih, a metre.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. NOM. PL. NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOG. PL.

ij^duh, m.f.n. milking Vftdhuk g%l duhah |f^ dumhi T*fr*\ dhugbhih V^dhukshu

10. Bases derived from the roots ^ druh, to hate, ^muh} to confound, f^ snih, to love, ^f snuh, to spue, may change the final ^ h into T t or 'OR k.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. N.PL.NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

hating dhrutordhruk druhah druihhi dhrudbhih or dhruglhih dhrutsu or dhrukshu

ii. Bases derived from ^ nah, to bind, change ^ h into J{t.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.

^^^updnahtf. a shoe ^m^J(updnat 3H\3& updnahah vvwtklupdnadbh

Decline fnm^l vipds, f. the Beyah river in the Punjab. ft^cwA, f. ordure. f. anger. f%1£3viprush, f. drop of water. TufalS^viviksh, wishing to enter. "P^ snih, loving. *rk^ goduh, cow-milker. tPffictf^madhuHh, bee. fi^ tvish, f. splendour. 'Q^fiS'^bahutvish, m. f. n. very splendid. T^J1^ ratnamush, a stealer of gems. "§"^1 idris, m. f. n. such. «fi'^J'3T kidris, m. f. n. Which? *\n^*fS(marmaspri^f giving pain.

§ J75- l^T^Tf turdsdh, m. name of Indra, changes ^s into ^sh whenever ^ h is changed into ^ d or T t .

Norn. Sing. iJl!lHl<r turdsMt. Norn. Dual §u«r^ turdsdhau. Instr. Plur. TJTraT^fa: turdsMdbUh.

§ 176. •g^nTpwrorfa/, m. an offering, or a priest, is irregular. The Norn. Sing, is *f^teTt puroddh, and all the cases beginning with consonants (Pada cases) are formed from a base ^f\^^purodas. The Voc. Singular, too, is irregular, being identical with the Nom. Sing. (§ 152), though some grammarians allow ^ ^tt'J* he purodah.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. 1JCtTn puroddh g ^ 3 1 ^|T puroddsau ^CteTSTt puroddsah

A. j^Cl sT^T puroddsam ^X^"5T^TT puroddsau ^ Cl s I ^l! puroddsah

I. ifCtTT^n puroddsd gT^ThTT purodobhydm "$ftftf*K purodobhih

D. ^Tt5T% puroddse "yftftxti purodobhydm tpCtTteH purodobhyah

Ab. "grtTT^Tt puroddsah ^ft^«n purodobhydm g^Tt«Tt purodobhyah

G. ^Ct?T$n puroddsah ^Styftl purodds'oh ^^T^f puroddsam

L. IJ^Trf^I ^Mroc?<i&" ^^f T^ft: puroddsoh 3^»*J purodahsu

V. "g^TT: or °?t puroddh or -c?aA gOil^fi puroddsau ^^T^TJ puroddsah

- 179.

DECLENSION. 79

§ 177. Another word, 5<*^^||^ ukthatids, a reciter of hymns, is declined like puroddt.

Nom. J<+^^H'. ukthasdh. Ace. Sing. ?«r*i 311*1 uktha$dsam. Instr. Plur. ukthasobhih. Voc. Sing. 9«r^^iit or ^cr'q^iJ ukthasdh or uklhasah.

§ 178. Bases in *Tm.

Bases ending in ^m retain *Tm before all terminations beginning with vowels. Before all other terminations and when final, the ^m is changed into «^n.

Base Jf$Ki{pra$dm, mild.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. i I:M. MASC. KI;M. 1CA8C. FKM.

Nom. Voc. IRRTr^praJdn nywl prasdmau TT^IW! prasdmah

Ace. TTSfTPT prasdmam H^H«I! prasdmau 14311*0 prasdmah

Instr. U^TTTT prasdmd H^n^Tf pratidnbhydm H^I i f*Ht pras&nbhih

Loc. H^nr*ipra5^m» w^n*fU prasdmoh

2. NOUNS WITH CHANGEABLE BASES.

A. Nouns with two Bases.

J 179. Many nouns in Sanskrit have more than one base, or rather they modify their base according to rule before certain terminations. Nouns with two bases, have one base for the Nom. Voc. and Ace. Sing. 1

*- Nom. Voc. and Ace. Dual > of

masc. nouns

* .

I Nom. Voc (not Ace.) Plural J

Nom. Voc. and Ace. Plural of neuter nouns ; and a second base for all other cases.

The former base will be called the Anga base. Bopp calls it the strong base, and the terminations the weak terminations.

The second base will be called the Pada and Bha base. Bopp calls it the weak base, and the terminations the strong terminations.

The general rule is that the simple base, which appears in the Pada and Bha cases, is strengthened in the Anga cases. Thus the Pada and Bha base *m^prdch becomes in the Anga cases ufa prdnch. The Pada base of the present participle ^^ adaty eating, becomes ^T^ adant in the Anga

* Most nouns with changeable bases form their feminines in fy. A few, however, such as^TO^rfaman, are said to be feminine without taking the \i, and some of them occur as feminine at the end of compounds.

80

DECLENSION.

§ 1 80-

cases. This gives us the following system of terminations for words with two bases :

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC.

Nom.Voc. IE Ace. . 1	is (which is always dropt) X am	^ft au ^?T au	*: «^
^r: «/*
Instr. ^	ST d	wrf bhydm	fW: bhih
Dat. i	I e	wif bhydm	wjt bhyah
Abl. i	s: ah	wif bhydm	wjj bhyah
Gen. i	H: cih>	^nt oh	^TT tt/7i
Loc. 4	zi	^ftt 0$	^J5W

SINGULAR.

NEUTER. DUAL.

Nom. Ace.

1 80. Certain words derived from

, to move, have two, others

three bases.

TTT^ prach, forward, eastern, has two bases, TTI^T prdnch for its Anga, for its Pada and Bha base, and is declined accordingly t.

		SINGULAR.	DUAL.	PLURAL.
		MASC.	MASC.	MASC.
	N.V.	W&prdn £	TTT^T prdnchau	Rl^t prdnchah
	A.	W^prdncham	TTT^T prdnchau	ITr^J prdchah \\
	I.	TTT^T prdchd		mftvT. prdgbhih
	D. Ab. 1	TR^fprdche	}• ITFwn nrdabhydm J .	L TTFWi: prdgbhyah
	G. } L.	HTfNr prdchi	?• TIT^T: prdchok	TTT^f prachdm TRW prdkshu

* Anga base, or, according to Bopp, strong base with weak terminations. The termina- tions are called in Sanskrit the Sarvandmasthdna terminations.

t Compounds ending in ^1^ ach retain the accent on the preposition, except after prepositions ending in ^« or Tw. This rule does not apply to fa m and ^Qfaddhi (Pan. vi. 2,52-53). Hence "*R3*(pdrdch, ^^l^dvach, TTR prach, ^^udach^ also 'Zf^nyach, ^Hfl^ ddhyach • ^TVR^ sadhryach, f<t^ m'shvach : but TTT^ pratydch, ^T?^ samydch, anvdch.

stands for Trr^jprawfc; this || In the declension of words ending in ^^ach, the rule is. that if^f^ach has the Udatta, as in Hm-^pratydch, "QJq^samydch, ^(^^(anvdch (§ 180, note), all terminations, except the Sarvanamasthanas, take the Udatta (Pan. vi. i, 169-170). The rule Pan. vi. i, 182, refers to T&^anch, not to ^T^ ach. The rule Pan. vi. i, 222, is restricted in the Veda by vi. i, 170. is treated as if the accent were on the preposition.

-J 181.

SINGULAR.

DECLENSION.

NEUTER. DUAL.

81

PLURAL.

N.A.V. I.

pr

dchi

TTTfrf prdfichi

same as masc.

The feminine of tr^prdch is in^ prdchi , declined like fern, in ^ i. Decline im*(dvdch, downward, south. Strong base

B. Nouns with three Bases.

J 181. Nouns with three bases have their Anga or strong base in the same

cases as the nouns with two bases. In the other cases, however, they have one

base, the Pada base, before all terminations beginning with consonants ; and

another base, the Bha base, before all terminations beginning with vowels.

In these nouns with three cases, Bopp calls Anga base the strong base ;

the Pada base the middle base ;

the Bha base the weakest base.

This gives us the following system of terminations for words with three

bases :

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

Nom.Voc. ^s (always dropt) w au ^K ah
Ace. ^fr am	w au ^n at	>
Instr. ^Tf d Dat. * e Abl. <*: ah Gen. ^K afy Loc. ^ i SINGULAR.
wrf bhydm fa: MiA vqf *%^/w »n bhyah «lf bhydm wj: bhyah
^ft: o/i ^rf <^?»
^fh 0/1 g *M
NEUTER. DUAL. l-ll-KAl .
	** bi

Terminations included in two lines require Anga or strong base. Terminations included in one line require Pada or middle base. Terminations not included in lines require Bha or weakest base.

Words derived from ^^ anch, to move, with three bases.

TRV^pratyach, behind, has for its Anga or strongest base inq^ for its Bha or weakest Tfif^pratich. The Pada or middle base is tyach. Hence m^ pratyan, Nom. Sing. masc. ; HTTcR pratyak, Nom. Sing, neut. ; ITlft^ pratichz, Nom. Sing. fern.

M

82

DECLENSION.

§ 182-

	SINGULAR. DUAL. MASC. MASC.	PLURAL. MASC.
N.V. A.	H(*re pratydh ift*r*U pratydnchau TTW^T pratydncham Uw'^l pratydnchau	Hi«Nlt pratydnchah HcTta: pratfahdh*
I. D. Ab.	WfffclT pratfahd IIW&pratfcM JTiffat pratichdh	H(«<'*ri pratyagbhydm MKJJ*4JI pratyagbhydm Hi*f'*PT pratyagbhydm	JTflFfa; pratyagbMh IW«l! pratyagbhydh TTWTOK pratyagbhydh

G. Tnft^J pratichdh Mril^t pratich6h L. inftfa^ratfcfo' inft^t prattchth

Tllft^rt pratfahdm

H7TZ[ pratyakshu

N.A.

N.

SINGULAR.

FEM.

SINGULAR.

si cfl "^1 pratichi.

NEUTER.

DUAL.

pratfchi

The following words, derived from

ANGA OR STRONG BASE.

behind (Pan. vi. 2, 52) samydnchy right (vi. 2, 52) nyanch, low (vi. 2, 53)

h, accompanying (vi. 3, 95) ^p^sadhryach

, to move, have three bases :

PADA OR MIDDLE BASE. BHA OR WEAK BASE.

WF^pratyach

samyach

samich

following (vi. 2, 52) vishvanch, all-pervading

, upward (vi. 2, 52) frTM^ tirydnch, tortuous

Bases in

anvach ^•J^ andck

vishvach ftf^[ vishtich

udach 3^\ udich

firSf^ tiryach frf^ tirasch

and ^a^t i. Participles Present.

182. Participles of the present have two bases, the Pada and Bha base n ^fiatf, the Anga base in ^h^<m^ (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 173.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

	MASC.		MASC.	MASC.
N.V. ^ A. ^1	^TT addntam		•«f^cfT addntau vfqtiT addntau	vi <-nt addntah
vn;nJ adatdh
I. ^	RpfT adatd	^ftfJ adddbhih
D. ^ Ab-U G. J L. ^	1^ adatt f^Ht adatdh ^m adati	\	vi^wf adddbhydm '!^('^(\ adat6h	y vi^mt adddbhyah ^tjd't adatdm •si^iw addtsu
* Rv. 1. 173,5.

-J 184.

SINGULAR.

DECLENSION. NEUTER.

DUAL.

83

PLURAL.

N.A.

^K^In addnti

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. ^^n\adat{t &c., like § 183. There is a very difficult rule according to which certain participles keep the «^n in the Nom. and Ace. Dual of neuters, and before the \t of the feminine. This rule can only be fully understood by those who are acquainted with the ten classes of conjugations. It is this,

I. Participles of verbs following the Bhu, Div, and Chur classes must preserve the «^n. II. Participles of verbs following the Tud class may or may not preserve the «^n. The same applies to all participles of the future in ^H^syat, and to the participles of verbs of the Ad class in ^T d . III. Participles of all other verbs must reject the «Jn.

I. VRl(bhdvat.

II. ^J^tuddt. ^f^T^ *ffi^ ydt.

(fut.).

III.

Nom. and Ace. Dual Neut. *flhft bhdvantl

dtvyanti. chordyanti. tuddnti or iJ^Tft tudati.

bhavishydnti or Hfa«nft bhavithyati. ydnti or *ffift ydtt. Nom. and Ace. Dual Neut. wrftadatf.

*±d$J\ juhvatt. sunvatf. rundhatt.

Mndt. ^^Jdl Jcrinati.

The feminine base is throughout identical in form with the Nom. Dual Neut. Hence HTift bhdvantt, being, fern.; ij<; n\ tuddntt or ^n\tudant striking, fern.; ^a<pftae?af/, eatin'g, fern. The feminine base is declined regularly as a base in \t.

§ 184. Another rule, which ought not to be mixed up with the preceding rule, prohibits the strengthening of the Anga base throughout in the participles present of reduplicated verbs, except in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. Neut., where the insertion of *^n is optional. With this exception, these participles are therefore really declined like nouns in J(t with unchangeable bases.

Base rjftf^dddat, giving, from ^T ddt to give, <J^Tfa ddddmi, I give.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC.

N.V. <^TT dddat A. ^ff dddat am I. ^fndddatd

dddate

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

t dddatah dddati

MASC.

r <^m dddatau f- ^^ift dddati j^lOf dddadbhydm

J dddat oh

MASC.

NEUT.

f <<;ni dddatah ? ^^Pn dddati

dddadbhih

dddadbkyah

dddatdm ^7^ dddatsu

*0r

dddanti.

M

84:

DECLENSION.

The same rule applies to the participles vCB^jakshat, eating; *W4i(jdgrat, waking; <jfr%J{daridrat, being poor; ^m^sdsat, commanding; ^iTOT^ chaMsat, shining. But *\*\l(jdgat, neut. the worlcL forms Nom. Plur. *\*\fa jdganti, only.

§ 185. ^ftjmkdt, great, ^f^pr^shat, m. a deer, n. a drop of water, are declined like participles of verbs of the Ad class.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N.V. A.

brihdntam

brihdntau brihdntau

brihdntah

SINGULAR.

NEUTER. DUAL.

bnhatdh

PLURAL.

N.A.

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. 'pift brihati

$ 1 86. if^mahat, great, likewise originally a participle of the Ad class, forms its Anga or strong base in

SINGULAR.

MASC.

DUAL.

MASC.

PLURAL. MASC.

N. A.

f if mahdntam

mahantau mahdntau

» mahdntah

I. *T?nrT mahatd D. Hij.n mahat€

Ab. 1

rT?1T» mahatdh G. j

L. *}lt»fiT mahati V. T^«^ mdhan

SINGULAR.

* mahatdh t maJiddbhih

mahddbhydm

mahatdh

NEUTER. DUAL.

«l^fll mahati

t mahddbhyah

JT^WT mahatdm mahdtsu

PLURAL.

N.A.V.

The rest like the masculine. FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. *i^rfl mahati

Bases ending in the Suffixes

in itc^mant and

§ 187. The possessive suffixes ifi^ ma/ and ^ v«# form their Anga or strong base in i^ mant and ^ vaw#. They lengthen their vowel in the Nom. Sing. Masc. These suffixes are of very frequent occurrence.

, forming their Anga Bases

- 188.

DECLENSION.

85

, having fire.

SINGULAR.

MA8C.

DUAL.

MA8C.

PLURAL.

MA8C.

N. A.

agnimdn agnimantam

agnimantau

<i>/ ni, nu nt nu

agnimantah

V. ^ec ft 1*1*^ ayniman

SINGULAR.

NEUTER.

DUAL.

agnimatt

agnimatah

agnimanti

vidydvat, having know-

N. V. ^ f* ri»iii agnimat

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. ^M P* «i*i ifl agnimatt

^ va/ is used i . after bases in ^i a and ^J Ex. '^Fffl^jndnavat, having knowledge.

ledge. But wfi<\H\affnimat, having fire, •^rn^hanumat, having jaws.

2. After bases ending in nasals, semivowels, or sibilants, if preceded by v a

or ^n d. (Pan. viu. 2, 10.)

Ex. TF^rflpayasvat, having milk. ^R^tf udanvat, having water. But T*ft Pd *H AJyotishmat, having Light. I^IT girvat, having a voice.

3. After bases ending in any other consonants, by whatever vowel they may

be preceded.

Ex. f^j^vidyutvaty having lightning. There are exceptions to these rules. (Pan. vni. 2, 9-16.)

§ 1 88. Vffl^bhavat, Your Honour, which is frequently used in place of the pronoun of the second person, followed by the third person of the verb, is declined like a noun derived by "%1(^vat. Native grammarians derive it from HT bhd, with the suffix "^1(vat, and keep it distinct from *f33{bhavat, being, the participle present of *^bhu, to be.

f, Your Honour.

DUAL.

MASC.

bhavantau bhavantau

SINGULAR.

MASC.

N. ^^l^bhavdn A. HTcf bhavantam V. H^*^ bhavan or *

PLURAL.

MASC.

bhavantah bhavatah

bhok

SINGULAR.

N.A.V.

N.

NEUTER. DUAL.

bhavatf

PLURAL. HTfw bhavanti

FEM.

SINGULAR.

bhavatt

86 DECLENSION. § 189-

H^Tif bhavat, being, part, present.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N. H^f^ bhavan H4lu bhavantaw WffJ bhavantah

A. *r4lT bhavantam HTiu bhavantau VTO bhavatah

V.

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A.V. >T&toa* H^rft bhavanti Wffit bhavanti

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. ^T^ift bhavanti

& 1 80. ^RH ar^af, masc. horse, is declined regularly like nouns in ^lf vat, except in the

* *r \ ^ ^ _«£.__

Norn. Sing., where it has ^Tf arra. ^Rf^araew in ^R^awarvaw, without a foe, is a totally different word, and declined like a noun in W^aw; Nom. Sing, ^ftl anarvd; Nom. Dual ^nftTtlM anarvdnauj Ace. Sing. ^RtTOT anarvdnam; Instr. Sing. ^R^TT anarvand j Instr. Plur. WiT^fHt anarvabhih. The feminine of ^^c^orva^ is ^Jcfdl arvati.

§ 190. f^Rl^%a?, How much ? ^Ti^tyaf, so much, are declined like bases in Their feminines are

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. MASC. MASC.

N. f«hm«^ My an fon*iffT Myaniau ftF^J kiyantah

A. f<*4ri Myantam fonMiu kfyantau f%Tin kiyatah

I. fawn ttya*4 f^rcirf TciyadbJiydm fmfel MyadbUh

V. fen M^ My an

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. "fSFTi **yfl* Pqi^nl Hya^ fcfi^fn kiyanti

Bases in ^ir^an (^5(an, ii^man,

191. Words in ^^an have three bases : their Anga or strong base is ; their Bha or weakest base *{n ; and their Pada or middle base ^r a.

Mark besides,

1. That the Nom. Sing. masc. has WT d, not TO^ <&&($).

2. That the Nom. Sing. neut. has ^r a, not ^r«^ an.

3. That the Voc. Sing. neut. may be either identical with the Nominative,

or take *{n.

4. That words ending in i&^man and ^^van keep iceman and ^^van as

their Bha bases, without dropping the ^r a, when there is a consonant immediately before the ^ man and ^ v«ft. This is to avoid the concurrence of three consonants, such as ifi^parvn from

-$

DECLENSION.

87

or *m* dtmn from WTTR^ dtman. This rule applies only to words ending in i^ maw and ^ vaw, not to words ending in simple «A^ an. Thus TTfl^ takshan forms UWT takshnd ; *JV^ murd/tan, frjr mdrdhnd, &c.

5. That in all other words the loss of the V a is optional in the Loc. Sing., and in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Dual of neuters. The feminine, however, drops the ^r a ; thus TTlft rdjnt.

m. king. Anga, T&K*{rdjdn; Pada, TTHrdja; Bha,

SINGULAR.	MASCULINE. DUAL.	PLURAL.
N. TJ^fT rdjd A. <i*iirf rdjdnam	<i*lilT rdjdnau <j»li»lf rdjdnau	u*iini rdjdnah TT?t rdjnah
V. TJIf*^ rdjan D. TH% rdjne G. TT5T* rdjnah L. TTf%r rajni or 4^ fa rdjani »TWrfr naman, n. name. Anga, «rnrT5 SINGULAR.
TT«T«n rdjabhydm Tttfa rdjabhih TTlf^n rdjabhydm TnPTt rdjabkyah TTSf^TT rdjabhydm TT»Wt rdjabkyah
7T?fa r^jf/XoA TT5ff rdjndm
TT^ftt rdjnoh	T^rdjatH
\ ndmdn ; Pada, ?n*T w^ma ; Bha, TTT^ w^w NEUTER. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. A . tTTT n^ma Hl«y1 ndmni or mini ndmant	ni*il(«i ndmdni

V. »nH nama or HIH«^ nd

I. «fiyi ndmnd

D. *TT% n/mne

Ab. «TW ndmnah

G. f^t ndmnah

L. tiif^ n^mni or

•fW^H ndmabhydm «TT*f**<( ndmabhydm •TTT^n ndmabhydm

«ll»i(«TJ ndmabhih •TTT^K ndmabhyah «Ti»l*«4l ndmabhyah

; ndmnoh

ll^li namndm

man

»Tl*i^ ndmasu

§ 192. Nouns in which the suffixes H^wara and ^vara are preceded by a consonant, such as '3CT^ brahman, m. n. the creator, *T^^ yajvan, m. f^^an;aw, n. joint, form their Bha base in H^wara and ^va».

brahman, m. creator. Anga, ^WT^ brahman ; Pada, ^w brahmd ; Bha, ^CJ^ brahman.

88

DECLENSION.

§ J93~

SINGULAR.	MASCULINE. DUAL.	PLURAL.
N. WSTT brahmcl A. d<( Nil brahmclnam	^RTTOT brahmdnau	fl9H<u! brahmdnah
flSUiijI brahmdnau	"ff^m brahmdnah

V. ^t51<r^ brahman

I. 9(411111 brahmdnd D. fls*<u brahmdne Ab. ««<nt brahmdnah

G.

brahmdbhydm brahmdbhydm brahmdbhydm

««fat brahmdbhih brahmdbhyah brahmdbhyah

brahmdni

SINGULAR.

: brahmdnoh t brahmdnoh

NEUTER. DUAL.

01 41 ill! brahmdndm

PLURAL.

N. A. V.

brdhma or

brahman

yajvan, sacrificer ;

brdhmant

dtman, self ;

Decline virtuous.

Mfd R^ pratidivan, one who sports, from

the f^cft to ^t^, whenever the ^w is immediately followed by Sing. Hfrff^i pratidivd ; Nom. Plur. Hfrff^H: pratidivdnah ; l pratidivnah (§ 143).

brdhmdni

sudharman,

divyati, lengthens w. Nom. Ace. Plur.

§ 193. Words in ^T»^aw, like TTf^nf/aw, king, form their feminine in ^tf, dropping the ^f a before the 5^w; TT|ftra/w^ queen.

Words in ^f^paw, like vT«l«^c?Mflaw, fisherman, form their feminine in dhfvart, wife of a fisherman. (See, however, Pan. iv. i, 7,vart.)

Words in W^man, if feminine, are declined like masculines. ^i«i«\ daman, fern, rope; Nom. Sing. ^TTTe?ama, Ace. ^i*n«i ddmdnam; but there is an optional base <fRT rfam<f, Ace. Sing. ^TRT ddmdm. (Pan. iv. i, n; 13.)

§ 194. Nouns in ^T»^ aw, T«^ man, ^f^van, at the end of adjectival compounds, may either use their masculine forms as feminines, or form feminines in ^TT a. Those in ^n^aw, if in the Bha base they can drop the ^T a before the «^w, may also take fy (Pan. iv. i, 28). Thus, Nom. Sing. masc. and fern. ^pf*h sucharmd, having good leather, Nom. Dual *J-q*n«ul sucharmdnau; ^^T^T suparvd, ^M 5 i«uT suparvdnau : or, Nom. Sing. fern. sucharmd, Nom. Dual T$*(q sucharme, Plur. ^^Tt sucharmdh • ^1T§T su

suparvdh. Of 1<S*^^M^ bahurdjan, having many kings, the feminine may be,

1. «|J<J»1T bahurdjd, Dual 4£<MMT bahurdjdnau.

2. "^Jtnn bahurdjd, Dual ^TT% bahurdje.

3. «r^<T9^ bahurdjni, Dual «J^l^ir bahurdjnyau. dviddmni (Pan. iv. i, 27), having two ropes, is an exception.

Adjectives in "3<[van, which form their fern, in ^ft van, vffo*{dhivan, a fisherman, vtaO dhivarf, *4*\<*<\pivan, slqO pivari, fat, may do the same at the end of compounds, or

-J 196. DECLENSION. 89

take ^TT vd. ^J^<| bahvdhtvaH or f^qi bahudhivd, Norn. Dual ^IJMl bahudhtce, having many fishermen. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 209.)

§ 195. iffaHpathin, m. path, has

for its Anga base ^[^pdnthdn (like for its Bha base for its Pada base It is irregular in the Norn, and Voc. Sing., where it is ifar: pdnthdh.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.V. ^f\\ pdnthdh VFK$ pdnthdnau N. ^faTO pdnthdnah

A. *nn«f pdnthdnam s'qinl pdnthdnau A. ^HH pathdh

I. Wlpathcl ^fWT pathibhydm I. •qWW: ^atAt&AiA

The terminations after T^aM have the Udatta, because they replace a lost Udatta. (Pan. vi. 1,199.)

<^^f«l(rl ribhukshtn, m. a name of Indra, and ifo^mathtn, m. a churoing-stick, are declined in the same manner. The three bases are,

^tJ^f't, ribhukshdn 1

matht The Nom. and Voc. Sing, are '^tJHJi: rtbhukshdh and ^fai: mdnthdh.

*4\**<\pathin, ^^J T«|T^ ribhukshin, and «fa*{mathin form their feminines ^ft patht,

ribhuksM,

f 196. A word of very frequent occurrence is ^r^[ dhan, n. day, which takes ^rfaAas as its Pada base. Otherwise it is declined like

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

P. N. A.V. ^: dhah Bh. N. A.V. ^t dhnt* An. N. A.V. ^fTf^T dhdni

Bh. I. TS&dhnd P. l.D.Ab.*f$W\<ihobhydm P. I.

Bh. D. ^dhne Bh. G.L. ^?^ dhnoh P. D.Ab.

Bh. Ab.G. ^.dhnah Bh. G.

Bh. L. ^fdhni-t P. L.

The Visarga in the Nominative Singular is treated like an original ^r ($ 85). Hence *i^: ahar-ahah, day by day. In composition, too, the same rule applies ; ^ro: aharganah, a month (Pan. vm. a, 69) : though not always, ahordtrafr, day and night. (See § 90.)

Or ^ft dhant. f Or ^ff^T dhani. J Or ^H^:g dhahsu.

N

90 DECLENSION. § 197-

§ 197. At the end of a compound, too, ^i^ahan is irregular. Thus having long days, is declined :

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. ^Krr^T: dirgMhdh * N.A.V. <{t5l£ HIM dirghdhdnau N.V. <0§l£H!i: dirghdhdnah V. ^iSl^t dfrghdhah A. <0*njg; dirgMhnah

A. <fl Q I ^!<U dirglidhdnam I. ^ 5 1 ^l fa: dirghdhobhih, &c.

Feminine, <0§l^ dirghdhni (Pan. vm. 4, 7).

§ 198. In derivative compounds with numerals, and with fa vi and ^TR saya, ^j£ is substituted for ^K^aAaw; but in the Loc. Sing, both forms are admitted; e.g. dvyahnah, produced in two days; Loc. Sing, 'gfedvyahne or'Sjfgdvyahni or sA^^dvya (Pan. vi. 3, 1 10.)

§ 199. ^ $van, m. dog, 5^; yuvan, m. young, take sp( §un, ^ as their Bha bases. For the rest, they are declined regularly, like brahman, m. (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 182.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. '^rrW N.A.V. W$svc[nau N.

A. mi«i £odnam A.

V. ^^^» I.

The feminine of ^ &van is Tgpft ^ww^; of g^ ywvaw, ^f?K yuvatty; according to some grammarians, igftydni.

§ 200. W(3i{maghavant the Mighty, a name of Indra, takes W^t^maghon as its Bha

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. «m«n maghdvd N. A. V. «i^^i»iT maghdvdnau N. «iM^i«it maghdvdnak

A. HM^M maghdvdnam A. #i*T\ni maghtinah

V. T^^^wM^Aavaw I. *iM«l(«?J maghdvabhih^

The same word may likewise be declined like a masculine with the suffix ^U(vat or lff(mat; (see ^H P* *\*<{agnimat.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. nim\v{maghdvdn N.A.V. *i^i«JnT maghdvantau N. *mqnt maghdvantah

A. H^4rt maghdvantam A. HM^rit maghdvatah

V. *i M H«\ mdghavan I. *iM«i(st maghdvadbhik

The feminine is accordingly either H*fl»fl maghtini or HV4il) maghavatt.

§ 201. '5^jJwsA^ and ^SnNr^ aryamdn, two names of Vedic deities, do not lengthen their vowel except in the Norn. Sing, and the Nom. Ace. Voc. Plur. neut. ; (in this they follow the bases in ^(inj § 203.) For the rest, they are declined like nouns in ^T«^ an ; (see

* Pan. vm. 2, 69, vart. i; Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 194; but Colebrooke, p. 83, has

dtrghdhd as Nom. Sing. t Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, p. Si.

- 303.

DECLENSION. 91

NOM. SING. NOM. PL. ACC. PL. INSTR. PL. NOM. PL. NEUT.

pdshan, ptisha, pfahn pUshd pdshdnah pdshndh pUshdbhih ptisUni

aryaman, aryama, aryamn aryamd aryamdnah aryamndh aryamdbhih aryamani Loc. Sing. ^(jfaf pUshnf or «g«((Vr pdshdni; or, according to some, ^f^pUfhi. (S&r. 1. 9, 31.)

§ 202. The root "^han, to kill, if used as a noun, follows the same rule; only that when the vowel between ^ h and ^ n is dropt, ^ h becomes ^gh.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. ACC. PL. INSTR. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT.

^ ha, J^ghn ^T hd

t hanah

ghnah

: hub hi h

hdni

brahmahan, ha, ghn brahmaha brahmahdnah brahmayhndh brahmahdbhih brahmahani Loc. Sing. wwPH brahmaghnt or flw^fcj brahmahdni.

Bases in ^ in. J 203. Words in iftin are almost regular; it is to be observed that

1. They drop the ^n at the end of the Pada base.

2. They form the Nom. Sing. masc. in $i; the Nom. Ace. Sing. neut. in

^ i ; and the Nom. Ace. Plur. neut. in ffif ini.

SINGULAR.

MASCULINE.

DUAL.

N. V«ft dhan( A. Vnf»T dhaninam I. vf^HI dhantnd D. %r«in dhanine Ab. vP«i»i; dhanfaah, G. . Vflli dhaninah L. ^fVrf«T dhanini V. VfV| ctoonw

N.A. V.

SINGULAR.

dhantndu dhanfnau

Vf«T«ri dhanibhydm dhantbhydm dhanfohydm dhantnoh

Vf»T«fh dhantnok dhdninau NEUTER.

DUAL.

t dhan(nah dhantnah : dhantthih J dhan(bhyah dhantthyah Vf^RT dhanindm dhantshu dhdninah

PLURAL.

VftfH dhanfni

FEM.

SINGULAR.

N. Vni dhanint

Decline ^Vtf^ medhdvin, wise ; ^rfy^ yaisasvin, glorious ; loquacious; oirrft^AranX domg.

Note — These nouns in ^tn, (etymologically a shortened form of ^*Jcn,) follow the analogy of nouns in ^I»^an (like TTH^r^jan, «TW^«<£man) in the Nom. Sing. masc. and neut., and in the Voc. Sing, and in the Nom. Ace. Plur. neut. They might be ranged, in fact, with the nouns having unchangeable bases ; for the lengthening of the vowel in the Nom. and Ace. Plur. neut. is but a compensation for the absence of the nasal which is inserted in these cases in all bases except those ending in nasals and semivowels.

N 2

92

DECLENSION.

§ 204-

Participles in ^ vas.

£$04. Participles of the reduplicated perfect in ^ vas have three bases ; vdms as the Anga, ^ ush as the Bha, and ^ vas as the Pada base. According to Sanskrit grammarians, they change the ^s of ^(vas into T(t9 if the ^« is final, or if it is followed by terminations beginning with v^bh and T^S; (see J 173, 131.) But the fact is, that the Pada base is really '^vat, not vas.

Anga,

rurudvdms ; Pada, '^^(rurudvas ; Bha,

	SINGULAR.	MASCULINE. DUAL.	PLURAL.
N. A.	^t\5i«\ rurudvdn 4><\Si3T rurudvamsam	^$?fffT^ft rurudvdmsau ^J^SHH rurudvdmsau	«S«\si*n rurudvdmsah
^"^S^* furudushah

V. <^^§f<r^ rurudvan

I. D.

Ab.

G. L.

rurudushd rurudushe rurudushah

rurudushah rurudushi

rurudvddbhydm rurudvddbhydm rurudvddbhydm

rurudvddbhih

: rurudvddbhyah

rurudvddbhyah

SINGULAR.

FEM.

SINGULAR.

rurudushi

rurudushoh rurudushoh

NEUTER. DUAL.

rurudushi

rurudushdm

rurudvdtsu

rurudvdmsi

N.

f 205. Participles in ^v«5 which insert an ^ z between the reduplicated root and the termination, drop the ^ i whenever the termination ^ #a$ is changed into T^wM. Thus

tasthivdn, from 5^n 5/M, to stand, forms the fern. W^J^t tasthushi. pechivdn, from f^pach9 to cook, forms the fern. ^^joecAw^.

A very common word following this declension is fVgrir^ vidvan, wise, (for f^fsTSTT^ vividvdn) ; fern, •fagtft vidushi.

If the root ends in ^ i or ^ ^, this radical vowel is never dropt before -grtr^, the contracted form of ^vas. Hence from «ft ra£, PdHl^K ninivdn; Instr. ninyushd ; fern, ftfg^t ninyushi.

$ 207. DECLENSION.

Decline the following participles :

93

I'ADA MASK.

NOM. SING.

NOM. PLUR.

ACC. PLUK.

IN8TR. FLUE.

jufruvas

Jusruvdihsah

iusruvushah sujruvadbhih

pechivas

pechivdn

pechivdmsah

pechushah pechivadbhih

jagmivas jagmivdn jagmivdnisah

jagmushah jagmivadbhih

jaganvas jaganvdn jaganvdmsah jagmushah jaganvadbhih

jaghnivas jaghnivdn jaghnivdmsah

jaghnushah jaghnivadbhih

jaghanvdn

^ 206. Bases in Anga base in ^1^ iyd Pada and Bha base

jaghanvdmsah jaghnushah jaghanvadbhih

Bases in ^^ ivas. (termination of the comparative) form their

?, heavier ; Anga base MASCULINE.

SINGULAR.

N. * I O *4 1«\ gdriydn A. *iO<*i« gdriydmsam

gdrfydmsau gdriydrhsau

t gdriydmsah

V. I.

gdriyasd

SINGULAR.

N. TJSNT: gdriyah

gdriyobhydm NEUTER.

gdriyasi

gdriyasah

gdriyobhlhy &c.

gdriydthsi

FEM. SINGULAR.

N.

gdriyasi

Miscellaneous Nouns with changeable Consonantal Bases.

§ 207. Words ending in "m^tfc?, foot, retain ^T^^^c? as Anga and Pada base, but shorten it to tj^ad as Bha base.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.V.

A. tjHi^ supddam

supddau supddau

t supddah

(Anga)

gtf^: supadah (Bha) I. ^pllfk: supddbhih (Pada)

* ^m changed into «^n according to § 136.

94: DECLENSION.

The feminine is either tjm'^swpad or *JM<{1 supadi (Pan. iv. i, 8)j but a metre consisting

of two feet is called PrfM^I dvipadd.

§ 208. "Words ending in ^TT^ vdh, carrying, retain ^T^ vdh as Anga and Pada base, but

shorten it to "3fi| uh as Bha base. The fern, is ^t uU.

Final ^ h is interchangeable with ^dh, «?$, <f f. (See § 128 ; 174, 8.)

The "35 w of "^ uh forms Vriddhi with a preceding ^ a or ^5TT a (§ 46). Thus (4 HI '41 £

visvavdh, upholder of the universe. (Accent, Pan. vi. 1, 171.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.V. n*»a<u visvavdt

A. ftrflBRT^ visvavdham

J mfoauhdh

I.

§ 209. *yti«h# foetavdh is further irregular, forming its Pada base in ^(ras, and retain- ing it in the Nom. and Voc. Sing.; e.g. Nom.Voc. i^n<*\*svetavclh; Ace. HI rH I £ svetavdham • Instr. *%i\ls\ foetauhd ; Instr. Plur. »y n <f\ fa 3vetavobhfy,&;c.; Loc. Plur.^JCm^svetavahsu.

Some grammarians allow 5m«u^> tivetavdh, instead of *yiiiF fvetauh, in all the Bha cases (Sar. i. 9, 14), and likewise »aii^t 6vtiavah in Voc. Sing.

§ 210. A more important compound with ^T^r^A is w\s^anaduh, an ox, (i.e. a cart- drawer.) It has three bases : i. The Anga base 'Wisi^ anadvdh; 2. The Pada base iHHJ^. anadudj 3. The Bha base "wnj^. anaduh.

It is irregular besides in the Nom. and Voc. Sing.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. '^5HJI«^ anadvdn N. A.V. ^SMil^T anadvdhau N. xinsi^t anadvdhah

V. w\s*{anadvan I. D. Ab. *f«is«i anadudbhydm A. vins^t anaduhah

A. 'sins i ^ anadvdham G. L. vcnj^lt anaduhoh I. ^«isf«: anadudbhih

I. "*in^l»T anaduhd L. viH^rg anadutsu

If used as a neuter, at the end of a compound, it forms

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. ^InJ^ anadud w n «^1 anaduM •wi$\^ anadvdmhi

The rest like the masculine. The feminine is ^ini^ anaduM or ^nji^l anadvdhi (Pan. vn. i, 98, vart.)-

§ 2ii. ^r^ap} water, is invariably plural, and makes its ^r a long in the Anga base, and substitutes j(t for T^p before an affix beginning with *T bh.

Plural : Nom. ^TTTJ: dpah, Ace. ^R: apdfy, Instr. ^Hfe: adbhih,, Loc. ^n§ apsu. (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 171.)

In composition ^r^ap is said to form WF^svdp, Nom. Sing. masc. and fern., having good water ; Ace. ^TR svdpam ; Instr. ^m svapd, &c. Nom. Plur. ^rro svdpafy ; Ace. ^^ svapah, ; Instr. ^fe: svadbhili, &c. The neuter forms the Nom. Sing, ^f^svap; Nom. Plur. ^fftt svampi or ^fft svdmpi, according to different interpretations of Panini. (Colebrooke, p. 101, note.) The Sarasvati (i. 9, 62) gives ^ift ri^HHf*! svdmpi taddgdni, tanks with good water.

-§ 214. DECLENSION. 95

§ 212. "p^pwhs, man, has three bases: i. The Anga base ^^pumdrhs ; 2. The Pada base Jjftpum; 3. The Bha base ty^pums. (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 171.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N« ^mpumdn N.A.V. ;jnitn pumdmsau N. y\\*\ pumdmsah

V. tjfr^ puman I. D. Ab. y*lf pumbhyim A. ipn pumsdh

A.. *jptt pumdmsam G. L. tpffcjjumsrfA I.

I. nuwsa L.

The Loc. Plur. is written "pumsu, not jg^uwwAw or "f^punsu (§ 100, note). The Sarasvatt gives ^Qpunkshu (1.9,70). Panini (vin. 3, 58) says that "^num only, not Anusvara in general, does not prevent the change of ^s into ^*A,- and therefore that change does not take place in «j(V<^j svhinsu and ^^puihsu. In the first, «^n is radical, not inserted ; in the second, the Anusvara represents an original *^m. Cf. Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 186 :

Mi«l(»ir»i

In composition it is declined in the same manner if used in the masc. or fern, gender. As a neuter it is, Nona. Sing. SjyT supum, Nom. Dual 4JJJ40 supumsi, Nom. Plur. 4J^Hif<H supumdmsi.

§ 213. f^div or IJtfyu, f. sky, is declined as follows, (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 171; 183): Base flj^rfw, l[ dyu. (See § 219.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. J&ldyauh N.A.V. &"$ dtiau N. %t divah

A. ftfdfoam I. D. Ab. ^«rf dydbhydm A. f^T. divdh

I. f&Jdivd G.L. fffrldivfy I.

D. f^rftW D.Ab.

Ab. G. f^: divdh G. i^f divdm

L. f^ft dM L. ^5 dyushu

V. ifttrfyaSA

Another base Sift c?yo is declined as a base ending in a vowel, and follows the paradigm of *ft#o, § 219. (See Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p.. 138.)

Compounds like gft^sttefaj, having a good sky, are declined in the masc. and fern, like

Hence ^flrt sudyauh, *jfq4 sudivam, &c. In the neuter they form Nom. Ace. Voc. Sing. ^IJ sudyu, having a good sky ; Dual

sudivt; Plur. ^f^r<c sudivi. § 214. A number of words in Sanskrit are what Greek grammarians would call Metaplasia, i. e. they exist under two forms, each following a different declension, but one being deficient in the Sarvanamasthana cases, i.e. Nom. Voc. Ace. Sing, and Dual, Nom. Voc. Plur., and Nom. Voc. Ace. Plur. of neuters. (Pan. vi. i, 63.) Thus

DEFECTIVE BASE : BASE DECLINED THROUGHOUT :

*i. ^sran^asan, n. blood ; ^np^osn;, n.

*2. SHW^ dsan, n. face ; ^TT^T dsyay n.

*3- f^ udan, n. water ; "3^1 udaka, n.

4. datf m. tooth; Ace. PI. ^TH datdh; ^rf danta, m.

* No accent on Vibhakti. (Pan. vi. i, 171.)

96

DECLENSION.

315-

*5- <*^ doshan, (m.) n. arm ;

6. *&(nas, f. nose ; Ace. PL "TOt nasdhj

7. fff^T m's, f. night ; Ace. PL f«T$tt nisdh;

8. Tl^ac?, m. foot; Ace. PL T^t paddh;

9. *p^.pr**» f. army f; Loc. PL ipBpritsu;

10. TT^m^ms, n. meat^ ;

11. TT^mas, m. month || ; TPHt *I2. TO«l yafam, n- liverlf; *I3< "^g&iyushan, m. pea-soup; *I4. ^T«F^ sakan, n. ordure;

15. ^ SWM, n. ridge ;

16. ^ An'c?, n. (m.); Gen. Sing,

Hence in

dos, m. n. «TTftl«!fT ndsikd, f. P«i^|| msa, f. Ttff$pdda, m.

pritand, f. mdmsa, n. m.

hriddh;

No. I. N.V. A. Sing. is ^TCpJ? asrik only;

N.V. A. Dual is ~«m»il asriji only ;

N.V. Plur. is vttjf»i asrinji only ; No. 4. N. A.V. Sing. ia^jn^^dantah, am, a, only;

N.V. A. Dual is tflfr dantau only ; • ,

N.V. Plur. is <fffTi dantdh only; No. 1 1. N. A.V. Sing. isiran,0^Tj0^masaA,<

N.V. A. Dual is TPHT mdsau only ;

n. hridaya, n.

asrinji or amj a or

asdni.

but *

Du.^tpttlT asrigbhydm or^W^asabhydm. A. Plur. drlld dantdn or <5H

I. Sing. tpf«T dantena or tpTT rfa^.

only;

but

N .V. Plur. is No. 13. N. A.V. Sing, is N. A.V. Dual is N.V. Plur. is T

wia5<fA only ;

yushau only ; yusMh only;

I. Dual ^in«ri dantdbhydm or ^WT dadbhydm. A. Plur. TT^rr«^ mdsdn or TTOJ mdsah. I. Sing. ^TO«T mdsena or Hlfll wwfoa. I. Dual *n«T**rf mdsdbhydm or *rn*lima&%am. , only; fA. Plur. <^m*\ yushdn or ^{W* yushnah. but ^ I. Sing. ^W yushena or ^Ul|| yushnd.

[I. Du. ^HI »M I yushdbhydm or °^*ri -shabhydm. L. Sing. T^yws^e or0^U!J-s^am or °ft5t •

Grammarians differ on the exact meaning of Panini's rule ; and forms such as doshant, Nom. Dual Neut., would seem to show that in the Nom. Ace. Voc. Dual the base ^[***{doshan may be used. (See Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. pp. 107, 131, 141, 144.) By some the rule is restricted to the Veda.

2. Bases ending in Vowels.

315. Bases ending in vowels may be subdivided into two classes :

1. Bases ending in any vowels, except derivative ^r a and ^TT d.

2. Bases ending in derivative w a and ^TT d.

* No accent on Vibhakti. (Pan. vi. i, 171.) t Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 131.

J Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 141. |) The Sarasvati gives all cases of HT^mas (i. 6, 35).

IF Pan. vi. 1,63.

-J 218.

DECLENSION.

97

I. Bases ending in any Vowels, except derivative ^J a and *Tf a. J 2 1 6. Instead of attempting to learn, either according to the system followed by native grammarians, or according to the more correct views of comparative philologists, how the terminations appended to consonantal bases are changed when appended to bases ending in vowels, it will be far easier to learn by heart the paradigms such as they are, without entering at all into the question whether there was originally but one set of termi- nations for all nouns, or whether, from the beginning, different terminations were used after bases ending in consonants and after bases ending in vowels.

Bases in ^ ai and ^ au.

J 217. These bases are, with few exceptions, declined like bases ending in consonants. The principal rules to be observed are that before consonants ^ ai becomes ^rr dy while ^ au remains unchanged ; and that before vowels both $ ai and w au become ^TTT dy and ^crpf dv.

BsL$e\rai, TT^rdy9 m. wealth; (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 171.) f. ship; (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 168.)

SINGULAR. DUAL.

N.V. TK rd-h «ftt nau-h A. fTQrdy-am «nq nav-am I. TJTTray-^ D. Ab. G. L.

>• TTO rdy -ah «fRt ndv-dh

dy-au «TT^T ndv-c

nau-

Hl^t ndv-6h

PLURAL.

"dy-ah

tjm rdy-dh * Tjfa: rd-bh(h

: rd-bhydh dy-dm

ndv-ah ndv-ah . nau-bhih

Dech'ne

L tnftt ray-

k alauhy m. the moon.

Bases in ^ft o.

J 2i 8. The only noun of importance is iTtgo, a bull or cow. It is slightly irregular in Nom. Ace. Abl. and Gen. Sing, and in the Ace. Plur. (Accent, Pan. vi. i, 182.)

do-d

	SINGULAR.	DUAL.	PLURAL.
N.V. A.	if gd-m	r *TRT gdv-au	TTT^Tt gdv-ah TH gd-h
I.	TTT gdv-d	1	jftf*Tt gd-bhifr
D.	T^" gdv-e	> Tf^n g6-bhydm	JlffWK g6-bhyah
Ab.	Int: 6-h	}
G. L.	J tfa gdv-i	1 T^t gdc-oh	TRT gdv'dm 'ftj g6-shu

* In the Veda the Ace. Plur. of"\ rai occurs both as rdy ah (Rv. i. 68, 5; 98, 3; vn. 34, 22 ; viii. 52, 10 ; x. 140, 4) and rdydh (Rv. 1. 113, 4; in. 2, 15).

O

!

98

DECLENSION.

219-

If bases in J? ai, *K\ o, W au are to be declined as neuters at the end of compounds, they shorten 1* ai to ^ *, and ^n o and w au to T u, and are then declined like neuters in ^« and ^ u. The masculine forms, however, are equally allowed (if the base is masculine) in all cases except the Nom. Ace. Voc. Sing. Dual and Plural. Hence Instr. Sing. neut. 4j(XlJJI surind or ^CHTT surdyd; but only tj*j«iuwmma.

§ 219. rndyo, fern, heaven, is declined like *ft#o. It coincides in the Nom. and Voc. Sing, with f^^div, sky, but differs from it in all other cases. (§ 213.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.

A.

I.

D.

Ab

G

L.

V.

N dyauh f dydm * dydvd dydve

vau

dydvah

b. 1 , flffc

yrfbhydm

dy6bhih dy6bhyah

dydshu

: dyauh

Forms of dyu which occur in the Rig-veda :

Sing. N. dyausj A.d{vam,dydm; I. divd(dtvd, by day); D.dive*; G.divdh,dy6"h; dydm; V. dyaus (Rv. vi. 51, 5). Plur. N. dydvahz A. dyun ; I. dyubhih. Dual N. dydvd.

Being used at the end of a compound Inrfyo forms its neuter base as Igdyu; e.g. WQpradyu, eminently celestial, Dual H«*l1 pradyuni, Plur. WS^i pradyuni (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. pp. 144, 145); while from "R^cfo'p the neuter adjective was, as we saw, ^?T sudyu, having a good sky, Dual ^jP^cfl sudivi, Plur. tJ^Tq sudivi (Colebr. pp. 67, 73). IRSpradyu, as a neuter, cannot take the optional masculine cases (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 145).

Note — There are no real nouns ending in U e, though grammarians imagine such words as JJi eh, the sun, <TBR^ udyadeh, the rising sun ; Nom. Dual o«^<4l udyadayau, Nom. Plur. •9'CI^Mt udyadayah.

Bases in $t and -31 ti.

i. Monosyllabic Bases in^i and liu, being both Masculine and Feminine.

(A.) By themselves.

§ 220. Monosyllabic bases, derived from verbs without any suffix, like vftdM, thinking, "aft krt, buying, f5lu, cutting, take the same terminations as consonantal bases. Th< remain unchanged before terminations beginning with consonants, but change final fy am "31^ into ^*{iy and T^MU, before vowels. (Pan. vi. 4, 82, 83.) Their Vocative is the same as their Nominative.

(B.) At the end of compounds.

§ 221. These monosyllabic bases rarely occur except at the end of compounds. He

vi. i, 93.

- 221. DECLENSION. 99

they may either change \t and "31 4 into Iftiy and T^W, or into ^y and ^[r. They change it

1. Into ^(iy and T^wr.-

a. If the first member of the compound forms the predicate of the second, and the

second maintains its nominal character. Thus M4,*Hl: paramanth, the best leader, Ace. Sing. M*»I Tn 4 paramaniyam. Here "ifanih is treated as a noun, and seems to have lost its verbal character. ^T^ftt fuddhadhth, a pure thinker, a man of pure thought, Ace. Sing, ^pgfftri tuddhadhiyam; "$&: kudhth, a man of bad thought, Ace. Sing. Tffvni kudhiyam. (Sar.)

b. If ty and "&tt are preceded by two radical initial consonants. ^<M(\ljalakrth, a buyer

of water, makes Ace. Sing. »i ofwjalakriyam. Itpftt susrth, well faring, Ace. Sing. tj^scq sutriyam. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 1 19.) This is a merely phonetic change, intended to facilitate pronunciation. (Pan. vi. 4, 82.)

2. Into ^y and ^v, under all other circumstances, i.e. wherever the monosyllabic bases

retain their verbal character. i|WUfi: grdmanih, leader of a village, Ace. Sing. iJIHJUJ grdmanyam; here n\*\grdma is not the predicate of «TTt nth, but is governed by «^ nth, which retains so far its verbal character. U>fh pradhth, thinking in a high degree, Ace. Sing. T&Qpradhyam; here IT pro, is a preposition belonging to >ft dht, which retains its verbal nature. "&3ftl unnth, leading out, Ace. Sing. "ttQunnyam; here ^ ud is a preposition belonging to »ft nt. Though ^t is preceded by two consonants, one only belongs to the root. ^P^* suddhadhth (if a Tatpurusha compound), thinking pure things, would form the Ace. Sing. ygSUts'uddhadhyam, and thus be distinguished from ^JSVfc suddhadhih (as a Karmadharaya compound), a pure thinker, or as a Bahuvrihi compound, a man possessed of pure thoughts (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 119), which both have ^j-sfrra suddhadhiyam for their accusative. The general idea which suggested the distinction between bases changing their final * t and "31 u either into ^{iy and T^WP, or into ^T y and \v, seems to have been that the former were treated as real monosyllabic nouns that might be used by themselves (*fh dht/i, a thinker), or in such compounds as a noun admits of (^ft» sudhih*, a good thinker; SI3»*J*h Juddhadhih, a pure thinker or pure thoughted); while the latter always retained somewhat of their verbal character, and could therefore not be used by themselves, but only at the end of compounds, preceded either by a preposition (HVfc pradhth, providens) or by a noun which was governed by them. The nouns in which ^t and "3S u stand after two radical consonants form an exception to this general rule, which exception admits, however, of a phonetic explanation (§ 330), so that the only real exception would be in the case of certain compounds ending in ^bhu. Thus ^bhu becomes *$^bhuv before vowels, whether it be verbal or nominal. (Pan. vi. 4, 85.) Ex. ^*OJ» svayambhuh, self-existing, Ace. Sing, ^^^t svayambhuvam. (Sar. i. 6, 61. Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 119.) Not, however, in ^tpjt rarshdbhuh, frog, Ace. Sing. ^TV^ varshdbhvam (Pan. vi. 4, 84), and in some other compounds, such as «R*Jt karabhuh or ^TT^Jt Mrabhuh, nail, ^pT*Jt punarbhuh, re-born, '^J! drinbhuJt, thunder- bolt. (Pan. vi. 4, 84, vart.)

sudhth is never to be treated as a verbal compound, but always forms Ace. Sing. *jf>f*f sudhiyam, &c., as if it were a Karmadharaya compound. (Pan. vi. 4, 85.)

O 2

100 DECLENSION. § 222.

2. Polysyllabic Bases in ^ i and ^1 u.

§ 222. Polysyllabic bases in ^ and "3! u being both masculine and feminine, such as TJtfh papih, protector, the sun, tpftj yayih, road, and «JTg nrituh, dancer, are declined like the verbal compounds JT^fh pradhfh and ^3T<$* vrikshaluh, except that

1. they form the Ace. Sing, in \tm and ^

2. they form the Ace. Plur. in %*{in an

Remember also, that those in \i form the LOG. Sing, in ^ f, not in

vdtapramih, antelope, may be declined like i papth ; but if derived by i/), it may entirely follow the verbal Wftlpradhih (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 1 16). The same applies to nouns like 'Jiftt sutih, wishing for a son ; ^^* sukhih, wishing for pleasure. They follow the verbal H*Tfc pradhih throughout, but they have their Gen. and Abl. Sing. in "3*: uhj ^IJt sutyuh (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i.p. 120). If the final long \i is preceded by two consonants, it is changed before vowels into ^»'y. Ex. ^^tt sushkih, sushkiyau, &c.

$-222.

DECLENSION.

101

*•$

£ fe> = .

I 5 s $

ll

n

I

a ^ ,2

m

a

*4&i

rS* °

S "§• •«••<•§ S

58 °—|.|>ii

ftlf Iffll

Ht'Mll^8-

i

5-.

=§ s,

CH

i

<s K

ll

S °.

02

•- a

H

if

n

102

DECLENSION".

222-

1-

*

•a

-J 224.

DECLENSION.

103

§ 223. All these compounds may be used without any change, whether they refer to nouns in the masculine or in the feminine gender. If the head-borough or the sweeper should be of the female sex, the Dat. Sing, would still be t(i*i<w f$9R yrdmanye striyai, '4<4c4i4 0^1) khalapve striyai (Kasika i. 4, 3). Sometimes, however, if the meaning of a compound is such that it may by itself be applied to a woman as well as to a man, e. g. mftl pradhih, thinking, some grammarians allow such compounds to be declined in the feminine, like A^f\l lakshmih, except in the Ace. Sing, and Plur., where they take V am and VJ ah; TW pradhyam, TtW pradhyah, not IPffpradhtm ortpftlpradhth (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 136). A similar argument is applied to ^Tjt punarbhuh, if it means a woman married a second time. It may then form its Vocative ^ ^»f^ he punarbhu (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 138), and take the Jive fuller feminine terminations (§ 224).

MASC. AND FEM. SINGULAR.

N. m: pradhih

A. 1W pradhyam

I. TRflT pradhyd

D. Uttfr pradhye

Ab. 1TUK pradhyah

G. TWt pradhyah

L. yfapradhyi

V. TVfcpradhih

DUAL.

N. A.V. Jiwft pradhyau I.D.Ab. IwNff pradhibhydm G. L. Jn4h pradhyoh

FEM. ONLY. SINGULAR.

radhih

TTWT pradhyam

TFtR pradhyd or Tn*I pradhyai or 1HTK pradhydh or IHflTt pradhydh or TTW pradhydm or Tjfapradhi

DUAL.

UW pradhyau inft«ri pradhibhydm H**fo pradhyoh

N. IT^IJ pradhyah A. IT^n pradhyah I. TnfHWt^rarfAt^AtA D.Ab. lrft*K pradhibhyah G. HWT pradhydm L.

pradhyah pradhyah JUfffir. pradhibhih IWh'K pradhibhyah or MM)»TI pradhindm lT>fh| pradhishu

i. Monosyllabic Bases in \\ and ^su, det?z^ Feminine only. 224. Bases like >ft c?^z, intellect, ^ft srz, happiness, ^t Ar?, shame,

>rt 5A^, fear, and ^6Ar^, brow, may be declined throughout exactly like the monosyllabic bases in ^ £ and "35 ^, such as <jf &2, a cutter. Their only peculiarity consists in their admitting a number of optional forms in the Dat Abl. Gen. and Loc. Sing, and Gen. Plur. These may be called the five fuller feminine terminations in ^ ai, ^r: dh, ^rn ah, ^f am, and ?ff ndm.

104

DECLENSION.

I 225-

Monosyllabic, fern. only.

thought. SINGULAR.

N. tf : dhih A. fVrf dhiyam I. fwr dhiya

Ab. to: dhiydh G. to: L. V. vT

DUAL.

I.D. Ab. tf«ri dhibhydm G.L. tot:

PLURAL.

N. to

A. to: dhiyah

D.Ab. >rfatt dhibhydh G. tot dhiyam L. -qfar dhishu

Optional fuller forms.

fVni dhiyai tot: dhiydh : dhiydh dhiydm

Monosyllabic, fern. only.

earth. SINGULAR.

bhuvam

bhuvdh bhuvdh bhuvi bhuh

DUAL. bhuvau bhtibhydm bhuvofy

PLURAL. t bhilvah ; bhuvah,

: bhubhydh bhuvam bhushu

Optional fuller forms.

bhuvai : bhuvdh

$tff bhundm

2. Polysyllabic Bases in ^ i «wc? "31 u, being Feminine only. f 225. (i) These bases always take the full feminine terminations.

(2) They change their final ^ i and ^1 u into T^y and "^v before terminations

beginning with vowels.

(3) They take n^m and ^ s as the terminations of the Ace. Sing, and Plural.

(4) They shorten their final ^ i and "35 u in the Vocative Singular.

(5) Remember that most nouns in ^i have no ^5 in the Nom. Sing., while

those in "31 u have it.

Note — Some nouns in \f take ^s in the Nom. Sing. : ^T^h avih, not desiring (applied to women) ; o5TS*rh lakshmih, goddess of prosperity ; fTtt: tarfh, boat ; "rf^t: tantrth, lute. Versus memorialis : ^^c*y1rf'OH*<^Vl'

(Sar. p. 18 a.)

Base T^nadi and ^g^nady. SINGULAR.

FEM.

N. ^ nadi A. «Tcft' nadi-m I. "^ITT nady-d

Base '^vadhil and SINGULAR.

FEM.

N. Tf: vadhd-h A. 'zr^vadhu-m I. efsen vadhv-d

-§ 226. DECLENSION. 105

D. ?T& nady-ai D. ^d vadhv-ai

Ab. TOT: nady-dh Ab. TOTR vadhv-dh

G. TOT: nady-dh G. WT: vadhv-dh

L. tjlrf nady-dm L. ^Ulf vadhv-dm

V. -nddi V. q vddhu

DUAL. DUAL.

N. A.V. tfift nady-au N. A.V. ^t^ vadhv-au

I.D. Ab. ^fffarf nadi-bhydm I. D. Ab. ^nj«Tf vadhd-bhydm G. L. TOfc nady-6h G. L. TOffc vadhv-ty

PLURAL. PLURAL.

N.V. TO: nady-ah N.V. TO: vadhv-ah

A. ircfh wae?/-£ A. ^f vadM-h

I. Tflftf*: nadi-bhih I. ^(pr: vadhd-bhih

D. ^^wr: nadi-bhyah D. ^v«n vadM-bhyah

Ab. I^WT: nadi-bhyah Ab. ^njj*n vadhu-bhyah

G. «f<l^l nadi-ndm G. ^n vadhd-ndm

L. -H1 nadi-shu L. vadhd-shu

Compounds ending in Monosyllabic Feminine Bases in ^ i anc? "35 to.

§ 226. Compounds the last member of which is a monosyllabic feminine base in ^f or "3S w, are declined alike in the masculine and feminine. Thus -tpfi* sudhth, masc. and fern. * if it means a good mind, or having a good mind, is declined exactly like vh dhth. *J*|t subhruh, masc. and fern, having a good brow, is declined exactly like WJ bhruhlr, without

* The following rule is taken from the Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i . p. 136. If *nt dhfy, intellect, stands at the end of the Karmadharaya compound like trfapradhth, eminent intellect, or if it is used as a Bahuvrihi compound in the feminine, such as IFiftt pradkfy, possessed of eminent intellect, it is in both cases declined like c5VJ*fl: lakshmih. It would thus become identical with TFf\lpradhth, thinking eminently, when it takes exceptionally the feminine terminations (§ 223). The Ace. Sing, and Plur., however, take ^ am and ^1 ah. The difference, therefore, would be the substitution of T^y for ^^iy before vowels, the obligation of using the fuller fern, terminations only, and the Vocative in ^ «, these being the only points of difference between the declension of f*H*{1: lakshmih and vfc dhfh, fern. The Siddhanta-Kaumudf, while giving these rules for UVt: pradMh, agrees with the rules given above with regard to *J>fh sudhih, &c.

t The Voc. Sing. "^Jsw^rM is used by Bhatti, in a passage where Rama in great grief exclaims, ^T f^T: gjrftr % *JW hd pitah kvdsi he subhru, Oh father, where art thou, Oh thou fine-browed (wife) ! Some grammarians admit this Vocative as correct ; others call it . a mistake of Bhatti ; others, again, while admitting that it is a mistake, consider that Bhatti made Rama intentionally commit it as a token of his distracted mind. (Siddh.- Kaum. vol. i. p. 137.)

P

106

DECLENSION.

326—

excluding the fuller terminations (*Z ai, ^\\dh, ^TT dm, Iff worn)* for the masculine, or the simple terminations (*? e, VK ah, ^STt ah, \ i, ^TT dm] for the feminine. The same applies to the compound ^pfh sudhih, when used as a substantive, good intellect.

If the same compounds are used as neuters, they shorten the final \i or "31 u of their base, and are declined like ^tft! vdri and *g[ mridu, with this difference, however, that in the Inst. Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing. Dual and Plural they may optionally take the masculine forms.

Masc. and Pern.

Optional fuller forms.

Optional forms for neuters, except Nom. Ace. Voc.

good-tho ughted. SINGULAR.

SINGULAR.

N. gift: sudhih A. gf^R sudhiyam I. gfaxrr sudhiyd D. *jfv*r sudhiye Ab. gftro sudhiyah G. gftrc: sudhiyah L. gfvftr sudhiyi V.

sudhiyai ; sudhiyah gfw: sudhiyah "ffipti sudhiydm

DUAL.

N. A.V.

I. D. Ab.

G. L.

N.V. A. I. D.

sudhiyau sudhibhydm

PLUBAL.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

sudhiyafy : sudhiyah, : sudUbhih, : sudhibhyah

Ab.^ft«i: sudhibhyafy G. tjfimi sudhiydm L. >T^ sudhishu

sudhindm

SINGULAR.

sudhi sudhind sudhine : sudhinah : sudhinah sudhini or gv

DUAL.

sudhini or gfv«lf sudhibhydm or 4jf\f«fU sudhinofy

PLURAL.

sudhini sudhini sudhibhify sudhibhyah sudhibhyah sudhindm sudhishu

* I can find no authority by which these fuller terminations are excluded. In bahusreyasf, the feminine "^WJ1 sreyasi retains its feminine character (naditva} throughout (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 116); and the same is distinctly maintained for the compound TWffc pradhih, possessed of distinguished intellect, if used as a masculine (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 119),

DECLENSION.

107

Maso. and Fern.

Optional fuller forma.

Optional forma for neut/ra, except Norn. Ace. Voc.

N.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

V.

N. A. V.

I. D. Ab.

G.L.

N.V. A. I. D. Ab. G. L.

with beautiful brows. SINGULAR.

subhrtih

subhruvam subhruvd

subhruve subhruvah subhruvaJjt subhruvi

subhrufy DUAL.

subhruvau T subhrubhydm subhruvoh

PLURAL.

subhruvafy subhruvah subhrubhih subhrubhyah subhrubhyah subhruvam subhrushu

SINGULAR.

subhruvai ^^T! subhruvdh g«^r: subhruvdh g^f subhruvdm

SINGULAR.

g^ subhru

^subhru or g^WT subhrund or TT^JTTT subhrune or g^!K subhrunah or g^Trn subhrunah or «fiu subhruni

DUAL.

PLURAL.

DUAL.

subhruni

subhrubhydm

subhrunok PLURAL.

subhrum

subhruni : subhrubhih : subhrubhyah t subhrubhyah f subhrundm subhrushu

Compounds ending in Polysyllabic Feminine Bases in \ i and "3! ti.

§ 227. Feminine nouns like «T3(twac?f and ^^c^flmw may form the last portion of com- pounds which are used in the masculine gender. Thus ^^qttt bahusreyasi, a man who has many auspicious qualities (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. pp. 116, 117), and xi Pn -s^ atichamv, one who is hetter than an army (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 123), are declined in the masculine and feminine :

SINGULAR.

N. H^^^til bahusreyasi * A. ^T? ^nTOT bahusreyasim

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

V.

bahus'reyasyd bahusreyasyai t bahusreyasydh

bahusreyasydh

DUAL. PLURAL.

bahusreyasyau «i^^<4**<t bahufreyasyah

bahusreyasyau ~TS1smtO«^ bahusreyasin

bahusreyastbhydm ^HSHnftfat bahusreyastbhih Vin bahusreyasibhyah 1 bahu^reyas(bhyah T bahuSreyastndm

^M^l bahusreyasydm bahusreyasi

bahusreyastbhydm

bahusreyasyoh

bahusreyasyoh

bahusreyasyau

^^'•Mil^lM bahufreyastshu 1<sJ^^^^yt bahu&reyasyah

From f6«*ili lakshmfy, the Nom. Sing, would be

P 2

i atilakshmty.

108

DECLENSION.

SINGULAR. N. ^fflT^nTt atichamuh A. ^fftT^f^atichamum I. ^rfif^*^T atichamvd D. *iiPfi"^*^ atichamvai Ab.^rfn^^iJ atichamvah G. vtPfl-s*«u: atichamvah L. wPrr*f*«lT atichamvdm V. 'SfPtf'i'J atichamu Nouns like

DUAL.

atichamvau

atichamvau atichamubhydm atichamubhydm atichamubhydm atichamvofy atichamvoh

atichamvau

PLURAL. atichamvah atichamun : atichamubhih i atichamubhyah atichamubhyah atichamundm

atichamushu '* atichamvah*

Jcumdrt, a man who behaves like a girl, are declined like

bahusreyasi, except in the Ace. Sing, and Plur., where they form cjj*u*q kumdryam and kumdryah. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. pp. 118, 119.)

, woman, is declined like «T^ w«c?^, only that the accumula-

tion of four consonants is avoided by the regular insertion of an ^ i, e. g.

f^fT striyd, and not *?m 5/rya. Remember also two optional forms in the

Ace. Sing, and Plur.

Base npftstrt and ffa*{striy. (Accent, Pan.vi. i, 168.)

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. Tfiift stri N.A.V. P^j 4i striyau N. (tfl*<» striyah

A. ^pff sfrzm or ffepT striyam I. D. Ab. ^t^Tf stribhydm A. ^jjjfh s^rzA or Q^i I. ffam striyd G.L. f^|4fl: striydh I. ^ftfW: stribhih

D. "^^ striyai D. Ab. ^ft«i: stribhydh

Ab. G. f^TTt striydh G. ^lillis^/m (P

L. f^RT striydm L. ^1n strishu

V. %«^ (Pan. i. 4, 4) § 229. When ^jfl's^ forms the last portion of a compound, and has to be treated as a

masculine, feminine, and neuter, the following forms occur :

SINGULAR.

striyah

. 1 . 4, 5)

N. A. I. D.

Ab.G.

L. V.

t atistrih atistrim or atistriyam atistrind

\\ atistrih atistrim or atistriyam ^rPrfi^flJn atistriyd

atistri atistri

ffrf

atistrind

atistraye J atistreh

atistrau atistre

atistriyai or atistraye atistriydh or

t atistrefy

atistriyam or »JH Pri ^ T atistrau atistre

atistrine or atistraye \l atistrinah or L ^Pfi^t* atistreh

if^jjffijT atistrini or

atistrau atistre

\ 'SiPi

1 r L ^Itf

* The neuter is said to be N.A.V. Sing, o^^ilitfl bahusreyasi, N.A.V. Dual «rj^l*lt(l«il bahusreyasini, N. A.V. Plur. ^?^«4tflP«r bahusreyasini, Dat. Sing. bahusreyasyai (-sye ?) or -sfoe, &c.

-J 230.

N.A.V.

I.D.Ab.

G.L.

N.V. A.

I.

D.Ab. G. L.

MASC.

DECLENSION.

DUAL. FEM.

109

atistriyau atistribhydm atistriyoh

MASC.

atistrayah

atistrin or atistriyah '. atistribhih atistribhyah,

F atistrindm

atistrishu

atistriyau atistribhydm t atistriyoh

PLURAL. FEM.

i atistrayah atistrih or t atistriyah

atistribhih

J atistribhyah

atistrindm

atistrishu

In i

NEC*.

atistrini atistribhydm t atistrinoh

NEUT.

tu atistrtni atistrini

atistribhih atistribhyah

f atistrindm

atistrishu

In the masculine final ^fis shortened to ^t, and the compound declined like <=»(%. kavih, except in the Nom. Acc.Voc. and Gen. Loc. Dual. In the Ace. Sing, and Plur. optional forms are admitted. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. I. p. 134.)

The feminine may be the same as the masculine, except in the Instr. Sing, and Ace. Plur., but it may likewise be declined like ^ft stri in the Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing.

The neuter has the usual optional forms.

Bases in ^ i and "3 u, Masculine, Feminine, Neuter.

§ 230. There are masculine, feminine, and neuter bases in ^ i and ^ u. They are of frequent occurrence, and should be carefully committed to memory.

Adjectives in \i are declined like substantives, only that the masculine may optionally be substituted for the neuter in all cases except the Nom. and Ace. Sing. ; Nom. Ace. and Voc. Dual and Plur. Ex. wfa: suchify, masc. bright ; ^fVi: suchih, fern. ; ^jfa suchi, neut.

The same applies to adjectives in ^ u, except that they may form their feminine either without any change, or by adding ^ t. Thus P$IK laghuh, light, is in the fern, either ?5T[: laghuh, to be declined as a feminine, or cflMl laghvi, to be declined like «T^t nadi.

If the final T u is preceded by more than one consonant, the fern, does not take ^z. Thus ifl'gpdndu, pale ; fern. HTJJ pdnduh.

Some adjectives in ~su lengthen their vowel in the fern., and are then declined like ^v: vadhufy. Thus T}IJ: pahguh, lame; fern, tpj: pangufy. Likewise ^^: kurufy, a Kuru ; fern. ^^: kurufy : some compounds ending in •gi^: uruh, thigh, such a& •qwljc: vdmoruh, with handsome thighs, fern. 5 vdmorufy. ..

110

Base N. A. I. D.

Ab.G. L. V.

N.A.V. I.D.Ab. G.L.

N.V. A. I.

D.Ab. G. L.

Bases in

MASC. FEM.

DECLENSION.

SINGULAR.

NEUT. MASC.

§ 23°-

Bases in

15

NEUT.

15

< **3»x **W *^J

\_kavi, poet matt, thought vdri, water mridu, soft mridu, soft mridu, soft

J cFf%: *rfitt

[ kav{-h mati-h

J cfff^ Jffif

I kavi-m mati-m

mridu-h mridu-h mridu-m mridu-m

mridu mridu

\kavi-nd maty-a vdri-nd mridu-nd mridv-d mridu-nd

J ofi'«JM miTJmatdy-eoT «nftffl *t^cf ^W mriddv-e or *J^T mridu-ne or

[ kavdy-e TW maty -at vdri-ne mriddv-e ^ mridv-ai *f$3 mriddv-e

mridd-h or ^JjpT* mridu-nah or » mridv-dh ipjfc mridd-h mridau or IJ?'*T mridu-ni or T mridv-am f^T mridau or

f ^i^J Tlf J mate-h or

i . ^

[ kave'-h TrPTFt maty-dh vari-nah mrid6-h

\_kavau mf( maty -dm vari-ni mridau

\kavi

mate

*nft

wia/^

^ftv/re* mr/c?o DUAL.

vdri-nt mridu mridu

Ifgft

mridu-nf

L kavi-bhydm matt-bhydm vdri-bhydm mridu-bhydm mridu-bhydm mridu-bhydm

f^ffr* T?ftt <4ir<UUU Jpftt >pftt JJgrfttmn'c?M-woAor

[A:at?y-^A maty-6h vdri-noh mridv-6h mridv-dh JJ^tt mridv-dh

PLURAL.

J ofT^TIJ TiHT* ^TXVf% *pf^* 'J^*

[Aravay-fl/i matdy-ah vari-ni mriddv-ah mriddv-ah

J "^T*^ fffti ^tx^ftr «jg»^ ^51

[A:fli?»-w mati-h vdri-ni mridu-n mridu-h

mr

matt-bhih vdri-bhih mridu-bhih mridu-bhih mridu-bhih

IS**

[ kav{-bhyah mati-bhyah vdri-bhyah mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah

[ kavi-nam f mati-ndm vdri-ndm mridu-ndm mridu-ndm mridu-nam

r^rf^r^ ^^ '4i f<y *gj$ >j^5 If1!!

[kawi-shu mati-shu vdri-shu mridu-shu mridu-shu mridu-shu

* The Guna in the Voc. Sing, of neuters in ^ i, TM, ^[rt, is approved by Madhyandini Vyaghrapad, as may be seen from the following verse : ««iW»T 'iJ5ri;T^'^^TT ^TTIT 7HIT

r: n

t Nouns ending in short ^i, I'M, ^Jn, and ^Ta, and having the accent on these vowels, may throw the accent on "*tindm in the Gen. Plur. (Pan. vi. i, 177). Hence matf'ndm, or, more usually, matindm.

% The lines of separation placed in the transcribed paradigms are not intended to divide

- 233.

DECLENSION.

Ill

§ 231. ^ifif kati, how many, lf?f yati, as many (relat.), and Tffw tati, so many, are used in the Plural only, and take no terminations in the Nom. and Ace. Plural. For the rest, they are declined like *lifa kavi, and without distinction of gender.

Nom.Voc. Wfirfcto' Ace. Tffft kdti Instr. flufnfa; kdtibhih Dat. "arfirWT: kdtibhyah Abl. ^flfwr: kdtibhyah Gen. *fftni kdtindm Loc. ^ifriij kdtishu J 232. ^rftrsaMe, friend, has two bases :

for the Anga, i. e. the strong base. for the Pada and Bha base. It is irregular in some of its cases.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. TOfT sdkhd

A. tt<?H<4 sdkhdyam

sdkhdyau sdkhdyau

t sdkhdyah

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

V.

sdkhibhydm

sdkhye '*{fa*R sdkhibhydm

sdkhyuh ^rf%«n sdkhibhydm

sdkhyuh *fWfc sdkhyoh

sdkhyau W&\\\ sdkhyoh

5aA:Ae like Nom.

The feminine *^ft saMz is regular, like At the end of compounds, we find ^f Base tjtifW susakhi, a good friend, masc. SINGULAR. DUAL.

susakhd 4J4HslHu susakhdyau

susakhdyam ^[fl^lMl susakhdyau

susakhind IJ*ifW*li susakhibhydm

susakhaye ^« ftl«n susakhibhydm

susakheh *jufw«[i susakhibhydm

susakheh ^^t\l susakhyoh

susakhau 'QM&\\1 susakhyoh

susakhe ^^Isll^U susakhdyau

N.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

V.

At the end of a neuter compound

sdkhibhih sdkhibhyah sdkhibhyah sdkhfadm sdkhishu like Nom.

masc. declined as follows

PLURAL.

: susakhdyah* susakhln ri susakhibhih i: susakhibhyah i: susakhibhyah *jti<5i1»it susakhindm susakhishu susakhdyah (§ 230).

i is declined like

the real terminations from the real base, but only to facilitate the learning by heart of these nouns. Masculine nouns in short TM are HTg 6A4nu, sun, ^T$ rrfyu, wind, fq«^ ci^nu, nom. prop. "q^pWu, as masc., is the name of a tree; as neuter, the name of its fruit (Sar. i. 8, 17). Feminine nouns in short Tw are V*j: dhenuh, cow, T^p rqjjuh, rope, W^* fa»«*^> body. * Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 112.

112 DECLENSION. $ 233-

§ 233- Trf»T pati, lord, is irregular :

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. Ttfnipdtih N. A.V. ifftpdti N.

A. Tffftpdtim I.D.Ab. *rfw«ri pdtibhydm A.

I. TfTRpdtyd G. L. tfTftt pdtyoh I. *rffffa:

D. TTW^afye D. Ab. Trfk^K pdtibhyah

Ab. G. T7Jt pdtyuh G. "tjrfrfri pdtindm

L. ifiQipdtyau L. trfinj^aft'sfa*

V. tni pdte V. Tfimi pdtayah

trfTT ^a/i at the end of compounds, e. g. ^rfir bhtipati, lord of the earth, HHI MPri prajdpati, lord of creatures, is regular, like cirfa #aw. The feminine of Tfopati is tf^t patni, wife, i. e. legitimate wife, she who takes part in the sacrifices of her husband. (Pan. iv. i, 33.)

§ 234. The neuter bases 'SrfTSf akshi, eye, vj (Vi asthi, bone, ^f^dadhi, curds, ^^^ sakthit thigh, are declined regularly like ^%[f%.vdri; but in the Bha cases they substitute the bases «mM^ aksJin, ^T^1 asthn, '%l(dadhn, fSW*f sakthn. In these cases they are declined, in fact, like neuters in *%*[an, such as *\\*M\ndman. (See note to § 203.)

Anga and Pada base -«f f«sj akshi, Bha base wv^akshn.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N.A. itfqdkshi N.A.V. *fi%nft dkshint N.A.V. ' *ratftfor dkshtni

I. ^H^ill aksJind I.D.Ab.^Tf^«rf dkshibhydm I. ^r%ftT: dkshibhih

D. ^r^f oJtsA^ G.L. ^T^llft: akshn6h D.Ab.^rf^^* dkshibhyah

Ab. G. *2f«<{li aksJindh G. vi^ii akshndm

L. 4fPi9!l akshm and vuqfVj akshdni L. ^rf^J dkshishu

V. ^T^ a^s^e (or

Bases in ^ ri, Masculine, Feminine, Neuter. § 235. These bases are declined after two models :

SINGULAR.

I. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

Base «Tff ridptri, grandson ^T svdsri, sister VfiJ dhdtn, providence

N. •TRTwapfa ^WT svdsd V^dMtr{

A. «THTt ndptdr-am ^^TR svdsdr-am VT^ dMtri

I. '5TJJT ndptr-d ^THT svdsr-d VT^TT dhdtn-nd or VTWT dhdtrd*

D. *nfr ndptr-e ^H svdsr-e VTJJfr dhdtn-ne or VTW dhdtrd

Ab. G. "^rgt wajp^A ^^t syaswA VT^H dhdtrt-nah or VTg: dAaMA

L. «THft ndptar-i *3**r<.svdsar-i >l I «J fill dhdtr{-ni or >ll ri fll dhdtdri

V. ftfi:ndptah(r) ^[W. svdsah(r) VTJ cta^n or VTiT: dhdtah(r)

* If "^n has Udatta and becomes ^r and is preceded by a consonant, the feminine and the Ajadi Asarvanamasthana cases have the Udatta.

-$ 236. DECLENSION. 113

PLURAL.

N. HHKt ndptdr-ah ^STFTCt svdsdr-ah Vlilftu dhdiri-ni

A. •nffi ndptri-n *^TO svdsrt-h VTirft& dhdtri-ni

I. »H|fWj ndptri-bhih <3«f»?J svdsri-bhih VTjfa: dhdtri-bhih

D. «ryi* ndptri-bhyah T^W*tt svdsri-bhyah Viyn dhdtri-bhyah

Ab. "TW^* ndptri-bhyah ^H«T! svdsri-bhyah VTiJ«i: dhdtri-bhyah

G. «TTO!ri ndptri-ndm **m«!ji svdsrf-ndm (Ved.*ra«rtfm) VTTpuf dhdtri-ndm

L. *|M^ ndptri-shu «s«^ svdsri-shu VirtM dlidtri-shu

DUAL.

N.A.V. tfTTOnajp^r-au ««ttii<J svdsdr-au VT^TJTt dhdtrt-nt

I. D. Ab. «Tyn ndptri-bhydm ^^«Tf svdsri-bhydm VTJWlf dhdtri-bhydm

G. L. "5?^! ndptr-oh «3taU svdsr-oh XliJIlD* dhatri-noh

2. The second model differs from the first in the Ace. Sing., Nom. Ace. Voc.

Dual, and Nom. Plur., by not lengthening the ^r a before the T r.

Base fifflpitft, JTTff mdtri.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. MASC. i l.M. IfASC. I KM.

N. "fain />#</ TTfTT m^</ 1 fMnCt «iin*J fMdil pitdr-ah HIHU mdtdr-ah

A. ftcITp^ar-am TTiTtwa^aV-am J P^dr-au mdtdr-au fm^pitri-n TTiTt mdtri-h

I.

D.

/N . , ^ pitrt-bhydm matrt-bhydm f

Ab. IMH* pituh *1 lfl» Tfiatuh J J pitri-bhyah \ mdtn-bhyah

G. ftrjt^M^ TTgJ m^MA IftTWtt TTcft! PMrUUl^^rt-n/m HIH^Jjl mdtrt-ndm

L. MTTTrt pitdr-i ^\\t\\^mdtdr-i \pitr-6h mdtr-6h ^Vfl^ pitri-shu »nn^ mdtrt-shu

V. THH t ^piifa^ (r) TTiTJ mdtah(r) l^ftijpftarau 'UMitjmdtarau PS n <I pitarah *iinO mdtarah

• After the first model are declined most nomina actoris derived from verbs by the suffix T| M : ^TJ </a/rz, giver ; ^| A:ar/ri, doer ; W| tvdshtri, carpenter ; ^Vj Ao7n, sacrificer ; H^ bhartri, husband.

After the second model are declined masculines, such as «TJ bhrdtri, brother ; ^fiHIj jdmdtri, son-in-law ; ^| c?evn, husband's brother ; *T*fY savyeshthri, a charioteer : and feminines, such as jftrj duhitri, daughter ; »ftf^ ndnandri or *TRi; ndnandri, husband's sister ; ^15 ydtri, husband's brother's wife. Most terms of relationship in ^ n (except ^ svd&ri, sister, and ifR ndptri, grandson) do not lengthen their ^ ar.

Note — If words in ^J ri are used as adjectives, the masculine forms may be used for the neuter also, except in the Nom. and Ace. Sing, and Nom. Ace. Voc. Dual and Plural. The feminine is formed by \tj ^kartri, fern. WgffJcartri, like «T^frna(#.

§ 236. -sft| Jcroshtu, a jackal, is irregular ; but most of its irregularities may be explained by admitting two bases, -aftf kroshfu (like «g mridu) and kroshtri (like 7p| naptri).

114:

DECLENSION.

SINGULAR.

N.

A. *ntg|<. kroshtdram

I. J

kroshtund kroshtrd kroshtave kroshtre

N. A.V.

I.D.Ab.

''

kroshtuh kroshtau

DUAL.

kroshtdrau

kroshtubhydm

kroshtvoh kroshtroh

PLURAL.

N. "a^TO kroshtdrah A. "^tj*^ kroshtun

I. "Siftfa: kroshtubhih

D.Ab. sRtj«i: kroshtubhyah G. ^ITrff kroshtundm kroshtushu

V.

Jcroshto

The base JKf^kroshtri is the only one admissible as Anga, i.e. in the strong cases, excepting the Vocative. (^ "SRtl'I he kroshtah is, I believe, wrongly admitted by Wilson.)

The base ^t^kroshtu is the only one admissible as Pada, i. e. before terminations begin- ning with consonants.

The other cases may be formed from both bases, but the Ace. Plur. is T$f%*(kroshtun only. (Pan. vn. i, 95-97.)

Those who admit 'A^Jkroshtrln as Ace. Plur. likewise admit sjfr| kroshtum as Ace. Sing. (Sar.i.6,7o.)

The feminine is Vhlgl kroshtrt, declined like TSft nadt.

§ 237- *f WH> man, a word of frequent occurrence, though, for convenience sake, often replaced by «TT nara, is declined regularly like frj pitri, except in the Gen. Plural, where it may be either "TOT nrindm or ^pOT nrindm. (Pan. vi. 4, 6.)

DUAL. PLURAL.

SINGULAR. N. ff(nd A. tR ndram I. ^tW D. ^nr^(Ved. Ab. cjt nt^ G. g: nuh (Ved. L. rfft ndri V. The feminine is

ndrau

«TT* ndrah ff«^ wnw

nnbhydm ^«lf nnbhydm

nr6h ndrau

nnbhydh nnbhydh

nrindm or «p!n nrindm (Ved. naram) nrishu

»fC* ndrah

2. Bases ending in ^? a

J 238. This class is the most numerous and most important in Sanskrit,

like the corresponding classes of nouns and adjectives in us, a, urn in Latin,

* The accent may be on the first or on the second syllables in the Pada cases beginning with *>\bh and ^ *. (Pan. vi. i, 184.)

DECLENSION.

115

and oy, 77, oi> in Greek. The case-terminations are peculiar, and it is best to learn ^ihn kdntah, *hrr kdntd, SRTW kdntam by heart in the same manner as we learn bomis, bona, bonum, without asking any questions as to the origin of the case-terminations, or their relation to the terminations appended to bases ending in consonants.

MASC.

Base ifakdntd

SINGULAR.

PEM.

NKUT.

N.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

V.

kdntdfr kdntam kdnttna kdntdya

«hlri44| kdntdsya cRfij" Mntt IKUkdnta

cMdi kdntdm <*id*ll kdntdyd cfrfrtiM kdntdyai r: kdntdydh ft kdntdydh if kdntdydm W^kdnte*

DUAL.

«Kfaf kdntdm <*idHI kdntdya kdntdsya

N.A.V. Wt Jtoaw I.D.Ab. 3inrT*qi kdntdbhydm G. L. ehldjfl! kdntdyoh

kdntdn

N.V.

A.

I. D.Ab.

G.

L.

Note — Certain adjectives in

: kdntebhyah chlriMI kdntdndm kdnt&hu

fcfetf

kdntabhydm kdntdyoh ohld'jfh kdntdyoh

PLURAL.

fafeofiri

Jtantfni K kdntdbhih \\ kdntdbhyah <»ini«ii kdntdndm efiirtl*} kdntdsu

\ ah, TOT ^, TO am, which follow the ancient pronominal

kdntebhyah «nini«ii kdntdndm kdnteshu

declension, will be explained in the chapter on Pronouns (§ 278).

Bases in TOT a, Masculine and Feminine.

§ 239. These bases are derived immediately from verbs ending in TOT a, such as WTT dhmd. They are declined in the same way in the masculine and feminine gender. In the neuter the final TOT d is shortened, and the word declined like ifa kdntam.

Anga and Pada base fcmmvisvapd, Bha base fa"W{visvap, all-preserving, (masc. and fern.) The neuter is declined like «RTTT kdntam (§ 238).

* Bases in TOT d, meaning mother, form their Vocative in TO a; e. g. ^TS&akka, TO^ alia ! But TOWtST ambddd, TO?! c5T ambdld, and TO^PiT ambikd form the regular Vocatives bdde, ^H<llc* ambdlet ^^Kambike.

Q 2,

116

N.V. A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G. L,

DECLENSION. MASCULINE AND FEMININE.

340-

SINGULAR.

visvapd-h visvapd-m

visvapau visvapau

visvap-d visvap-e visvap-ah

visvap-ah visvap-i

visvapd-bhydm visvapd-bhydm l visvapd-bhydm

: visvapd-bhih visvapd-bhyah visvapd-bhyah

visvap-oh visvap-oh

NEUTER. visvape

Soma drinker;

visvap-dm

visvapd-su

visvapdni, &c. * sankhadhmdh, shell-blower;

N. fw^tf visvapam

Decline *fi^Hlt somapdh, dhanaddh, wealth giver.

§ 240. Masculines in ^TT d, not being derived by a Krit suffix from verbal roots, are declined as follows :

Base

SINGULAR.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

N.V.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

hdhdm

AaAe

hdhdbhydm hdhdbhydm hdhdbhydm

hdhauh

hdhauh

: hdhdbhih : hdhdbhyah t hdhdbhyah hdhdm hdhdsu

CHAPTER IV.

DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

$ 241. As every noun in Sanskrit may, at the end of a compound, form the final portion of an adjective, all the essential rules for the declension of such compound adjectives had to be given in the preceding chapter. Thus in the declension of neuter nouns in ^n-^ as, like Trf^ mdnas, mind, the declension of ^^(sumdnas, as an adjective masc. fern, and neut., was exhibited at the same time ($ 165). In the declension of nouns ending in consonants, and admitting of no distinction between masculine and feminine terminations, (this applies to

* The Sar. i. 6, 38, gives the optional form ^T^TJ hdhdh in the masculine. At the end of a feminine compound the same form is sanctioned in the Rupavali, p. 9 b.

-$ 247* DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES. 117

all nouns with unchangeable bases,) the special forms of the neuter in Nom. Acc.Voc. Sing. Dual and Plur. had to be exhibited. See § 158, Jrft9ftjalamukt *M*J*0 jalamucht, iraijfa jalamunchi. In the declension of nouns with changeable bases, the more important feminine and neuter forms were separately mentioned ; and in the declension of nouns ending in vowels, all necessary rules with regard to the same subject were fully stated.

J 242. The chief difficulty which remains with regard to the declension of adjectives is the exact formation of the feminine base, and the rules on this subject are often so complicated that they have to be learnt by practice rather than by rule. The feminine bases, however, once given, there can be no doubt as to their declension, as they follow exactly the declension of the cor- responding feminine nouns. A few observations on this point must suffice.

J 243. Adjectives* in ^r a form their feminines in *n d. Ex. ftnf priya, dear, masc. fire: priyah, fern, ftnn priyd, neut. ftrf priyam, to be declined like ^Fru kdnta ($ 238).

§ 244. Certain adjectives derived by ^HR aka form their feminines in ^9R ikd. Ex. m^<* pdchaka, cooking, masc. HM<*; pdchakafi, fern. *nf«l«RT pdchikd, neut. TTPW pdchakam. Likewise masc. *H«I£ sarvakaTi, fern. ttRcfcl sarvikd, every; 4K«*t kdrakah, doing, <*! fX<*l kdrikdj ^iscR ihatyakah, present here, $^fi*|<*l ihatyikd. But PHflJ«fcl kshipakd, fern, one who sends ; <*»M«tii kanyakd, fern. maiden; -q<;=fti chatakd, fern, sparrow; ni<j»i tdrakd, fern. star. Sometimes both forms occur ; vmcm ajakd and vif»icu ajikd, a she-goat.

$ 245. Bases in ^jrz and in ^n take ^ i as the sign of the feminine : w* kartri, doer, ofi^f kartri (§ 235) ; ^fe^ dandin, a mendicant, ffitfl dandint (J 203). Likewise most bases ending in consonants, if they admit of a separate feminine base : "VN^prdch, w^ftprdchi ($ 181) ; ig^foan, dog, ^n^suni (J 199) ; xm^bhavat, HTift bhavati (J 188). Some adjectives in ^ van form their feminine base in °3^vari: ifa^pivan, fat, •q^'^ pivari (§ 193).

§ 246. Many adjectives in ^Ta form their feminine base in \i (§ 225), instead of WTa.- i|*U*i<4* trinamayah, made of grass, ij<u*i<fl trinamayf ; ^t devahy god, dh-ine, ^^t devl; If^UJI tarunah or cT<5*Tt talunah, a youth, ntj*ul taruni; ^*n«,I kumdraJi, a boy, ^*fi-u kumdri; jffat gopah, cowherd, ^rftn^^qp^ his wife, but '*\\mgopd, a female shepherd ; l^«=»t nartakaA, actor, «in<*l nartaki; ^Tt mrigah, a deer, ipft win^, a doe ; H«RTJ sukaraJt, boar, <g^nrf sukari- ^^<*iO kumbhakdrah, a potter, ^H'«niO kumbhakdri. It will be observed, however, that many of these words are substantives rather than adjectives. Thus TOH matsyah, fish, forms *irwl matsi ("Qya being expunged before ^i) J «t*j«Hl manushyaJi, man, *i«j«u manushi.

§ 247. Certain adjectives in TTt ^a^, expressive of colour, form their feminine either in 7TT ft? or in «ftnf: "^TifJ syetah, white, ^WT/ye/a, ^pFftsyenf; 'ZiT.etaJi, variegated, T&n etd or ^ft enf; ^f^Wt rohitah, red, ^%iTT roAtVa or 0 f^^ll rohint, but ^Hi «?e/aA, white, svetd; ^(VieiTflstVa, white ; M Pc4 ri I palitd, grey -haired.

gunavachana, the name for adjective, occurs in Pan. v. 3, 58.

118 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. § 248-

§ 248. The formation of feminine substantives must be learnt from the dictionary. Thus J ajah, goat, forms v< »i i ajd. ^HSK asvah, horse, forms W *a I asvd. : bdlah, boy, forms WTc5T bald.

f SLUT swc?ra, a woman of the S'udra caste. : sudrah, a S'udra, forms 1 ** ,

[ ^rjl sudri, the wife of a Sudra.

t mdtulaJi, maternal uncle, forms Hl'j'cA mdtuli or *i \ ijc4 I *fl mdtuldm, an uncle's wife.

dchdryah, teacher, forms ^Ti-qwfl dchdrydnt* , wife of the teacher; but dchdryd, a female teacher. |)a/i$, lord, forms ^f^ patni, wife, &c.

Degrees of Comparison.

J 249. The Comparative is formed by TTC; tara, or ^q^ fyas (J 206) ; the Superlative by HT tama, or ^ir ishtha t. These terminations in: ^cr« and TW /ama are not restricted in Sanskrit to adjectives. Substantives such as tj nri, man, form «j?m: nritamah, a thorough man; ^ft 5^rz, woman, {pflrUf stritard\, more of a woman. Even after case-terminations or personal terminations, in: tara and H*T fawa may be used. Thus from ^tr%£ purvdhne, in the forenoon, ^t T%Jfft pdrvdhnetare, earlier in the forenoon (Pan. vi. 3, 17). From tH frl pachati, he cooks, T^fjr?fxf pachatitardm, he cooks better (Pan. v. 3, 57), M^fririHl pachatitamdm, he cooks best (Pan. v. 3, 56).

§ 250. "cRl fara and im ^«m«, if added to changeable bases, require the Pada base. Thus from Tfi^prdch (§ 180), m&Kprdktara; from (§ 203), >|ftTTt dhanitara ; from \f^j[^dhanavat (§ iftj), \Ftt from f%^^^6?va5 ($ 204), fzrsw* vidvattama ; from TTF^ pratyach (§ 181), VKTiK^pratyaktara. There are, however, a few exceptions, such as <^gii*U dasyuhantamah, from <^J^ dasyuhan, demon-killer ; ^i|fv(«riT: supathintarah, from *Jtrfa^ supathin, with good roads.

f 251. %*R(iyas and ^ishtha are never added to the secondary suffixes ^£H, Tt^fwaf, ^v«^, "3&vala9 f&^vin, JSftin. If adjectives ending in these suffixes require ^Tt iyah and ^5 ishtha, the suffixes are dropt, and the i^r: iyah and 3[S ishtha added to the last consonant of the original base. ^r<*H i^ bala- vdn, strong, '<4 <^1 n^ i«Z- tyas, wfe? bal-ishtha. ^rvdogdhri, milking, <£)^1 1|^ doh-iyas, ^f^r doh-ishtha. fcifi^ sragvin, garlanded, ^^^sraj-iyas, more profusely garlanded. *f?RT^wa^waft, wise, ^^mat-iyas, *rfire mat-ishtha.

* On the dental *^», see Gana Kshubhnadi in the Kas'.-Vritti.

f Before ?R ^ara and TfT ^«ma adjectives retain their accent; before %*&(iyas and ^T? ishtha they throw it on their first syllable (Pan. in. i, 4; vi. i, 197). There are a few exceptions.

% Feminines in \i, derived from masculines, must shorten the \i before JR. tara and rW tama; ^i^HJjft brdhmani forms WT^rftjUrm brdhmanitard. Other feminines in ^i or "^iw may or may not shorten their vowels ; ^f\ stri forms ^pprRT stritard or (^|ri<l stritard. Also ^JnrcrfafTT sreyasitard or ''SRftfilll sreyasitard; f«i^*ln<l mdushitard or vidushitard (Pan. vi. 3, 43-45).

-f 252.

DECLENSION. OF ADJECTIVES.

119

J 252. Other adjectives, too, lose their derivative elements before and ^ff ishtha, or are otherwise irregular by substituting new bases for the

Comparative and Superlative. MlfMtf pdp-ish(ha, worst.

TJTO pdpah, bad ;

SECOND BASE.

COMPARAT1VK.

i. ^ffn«n antika, near alp a, small

2.

3. T^j uru, wide

4. "^nr riju, straight

kshod

or

Vedic

5. *f $T krifa, lean

6. VttjH kshipra, quick

7. TJ$ kshudra, mean

8. T^^wrw, heavy

9. ^TT tripra, satisfied

10. ^W dirgha, long

1 1 . gT cJwra, far

12. TT3" dridha, firm "5^ dradh

13. H(V<J<S parivridha, exalted M (Xd ^ parivradh

14. ^^^n^M, broad TT^^ra^A

15. H ^l mprajasy a,praiseworthy TR fro.

nedtyas as alpiyas variyas rijtyas rajiyas krastyas ksheptyas kshodiyas g arty as

as

drdghiyas davtyas dradhtyas

pratMyas

or

1 6. ftftpriya, dear

17. "^J bahu, many

1 8. *^c5 bahula, frequent

19. ^F Mn/a, excessive

20. lg mridu, soft

21. fl^*^ywt?aw, young

Upra

22. '^TSvddha, firm

23. ^5T vriddha, old

or

or

varsh

*J5I^ bhuyas

bamhiyas bhra&yas mradiyas yaviyas kantyas sddhtyas

<**t[m{ varshiyas

24. ^ K.CH vrinddraka, beautiful ^ unndf

25. f^RsMtra, firm ^1 stha

26. ^c5 stMla, strong

27. f^TO sphira, thick

28. j[^ hrasva, short

vrindfyas stheyas

sthavfyas t*t»M^ spheyas

hrasfyas

pap-iyaSy worse ;

BCPERLATIVE.

iK-ilislithfl

kanishtha alpishtha

varishtha •^fTttf rijishtha

rajishtha * krasishtha "Sjftnf kshepishtha ttfif^B kshodishtha *II<I.H garishtha ^fs« trapishtha '^lfl|8 drdghishtha

davishtha

dradhishtha as s f<« PC s parivradhishtha nPM8 prathishtha IR! sreshtha

TfH preshtha

bhuyishtha bamhishtha t

Hf^Tff bhrasishtha mradishtha yavishtha kanishtha^

Kshthat varshishtha

vrindishtha stheshtha

sthavishtha spheshtha

hrasishtha

* Pan. vi. 4, 162. f See Phitsiitra, ed. Kielhorn, i. 7 ; 23 (20). t P&n- v- 3» 63-

120

NUMERALS.

§ 253-

§ 253.

7

8

9

10

1 1

^ 1^, if, if, 3 WQl, fro:,

CHAPTER V.

NUMERALS. Cardinals. ekah, ekd, ekam, one. (Base

, efoe, two. (Base ^r dva; in comp.

(Base

, trdyalj,, tisrdh, trmi, three. TOTft, chatvarah, chdtasrah, chatvdri, four. ^ chatur.)

5 M 'fapdncha, m. f. n. five. (Base

6 €f ^T 5^a^, m. f. n. six. (Base ^ shash.) 3 TOf saptdj m. f. n. seven. (Base

b ^T^ ashtau, m. f. n. eight. (Base m. f. n. nine. (Base (Base (Base as in

35 W

(Base

ashtan.)

«T3T

14 15

17 ^ 1 8 st 1 9 °l<*.

20 ^o

21 ^ 2,2, ^

23 ^

24 ^d

25 ^M

26 ^

27 ^S

28 ^b

29 ^

30 30

31 ^

32 ^

33 33

34 3^

a, m. f. n. ten.

ekddasa, eleven. /

dvddasa. trdyodasa. chdturda&a. ifa^T pdnchada&a. shodasa. saptddasa. ashtadasa. ndvadasa or ^^rfTTJ unavimfatih. I vimsdtih, fern. rfir: ekavimsatify. fitt dvdvimsatih.

mn.)

ffr: trayovimsatih. n chaturvimsatih. n panchavimsatify. shadvimfatih. ifrf: saptavimSatih. ^rrtJ ashtdvimsatih. navavimsatih. fern.

ekatrimsat. dvdtrimsat.

chatustrimsat.

ashtdtrimsat. navatrimsat. chatvdrimsdt, fern. ekachatvdrimsat. dvdchatvdrimsat or dvichatvdrimsat .

R\\J(trayaschatvdrimsat or l trichatvdrimsat. chatuschatvdrimsat.

36 ^ ^zf^ri shattrimsat.

37 3^

38 ^b

39 ^

40 do

41 d«i

42 ^^

43 83

44 $8

45 8M

46 ^i

47 d^»

48 8b

49 d<i.

50 MO

51 M°l ^cF^T^Ti^ ekapanchdsat.

52 M? ^IM^I^If^ dvdpanchdsat or

flTM^I^ dvipanchdsat.

53 M^ ^n^Nm^ trayahpanchdsat or

r^M^r^lr^ tripanchdsat.

shatchatvdrimsat.

r^.\\^ashtdchatvdrimsat or ashtachatvdrimsat.

navachatvdrimsat. fern.

253.

NUMERALS.

121

chatuhpanchdM.

54 MS

55 MM 56

57 MS

58 Mb

>HKM*II$1^ ashlapanchdM.

59 MQ. HMM^I^Ir^ navapanchdsat.

60 ^o trffc: shashlih, fern.

shatpanchdsat. saptapanchdsat. ashtdpanchdsat or

6 1 ^

62 ^

63 ^^

64 fc-S

65 ^M

66 $fa

67 ^>9

68 ^fc

69 ^<j.

70 so

71 S^

73 s^

73 S^

74 Sd

75 SM

100 «)oo

101 w

102 <^o^

103 «i<>3

104 «iod

105 «IOM 1 06 ^o^ 107 «ios 1 08 sot 109 soo.

ekashashtih. dvdshashlih or : dvishashtih. trayahshashtih or : trishashtify. chatushshashlih. panchashashtify. shatshashtih. saptashashiih. ashtdshashtih or ashtashashtil}. : navashashtih. saptatih, fern. : ekasaptatih. dvdsaptatih or dvisaptalih. J trayahsaptatih or t trisaptatih. chatuhsaptatih,. panchasaptatih. shatsaptatify.

saptasaptatih. ^tMUHfril ashtdsaptatify or

athtasaptatih. navasaptatih.

ekdsttify.

frt: chaturatttih. ri: panchdsitih.

shada&itib.

: saptdsitih.

77 $9

78 sb

79 <*

80 bo

81 ti

82 b*

83 t*

84 b*

85 fcM

86 ti

87 t9

88 bb

89 b*

90 <io

91 ^

92 0.3

93 q?

94^

95 *M

96 Q.^

97 <ts

98 ^b

99 <S.Q

satdm, neut. and masc. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. u. p. 635.)

B ^Tit ekddhikam §atam, hundred exceeded by one; or as a com- pound, 4£4ilfVj<*3M ekddhika-satam, or *^rrf* ekafatam, as before. f dvyadhikam Mam or %^nr dvifatam. (Pan. vi. 3, 49.) IT tryadhikam batam or f^nt trtiatam. '^nf chaturadhikam katam or :^T?f chatuh&atam.

navatih.

ekanavatifr. dvdnavatify or

dvinavatih. : trayonavatih or : trinavatih (not Tff n). chaturnavatih. : panchanavatih. shannavatih. : saptanavatib. ashtdnavatih or ashtanavatih. navanavatih or unasatam.

^TW panchddhikam §atam or "4^17? pancha&atam.

^Tff shadadhikam Mam or ^TTf saptddhikam katam or 3T»f ashtddhikam Mam or rff navddhikam Mam or

hatfatam.

saptafatam.

T ashtafatam. (Pan. vi. 3, 49.) navaMam.

122 JTUMEEALS. § 253.

no w ^nftnir sn? dasddhikam satam or ^FSlrf dasasatam.

in «m i^RT^nftraf snr ekddasddhikam satam or TOT^TW ekddasasatam &c.

or u^fiT^f STW ekddasam satam, i. e. a hundred having eleven (in

excess). Pan. v. 2, 45.

H2 <\<\^ IT^nfaoff ^nr dvddasddhikam satam or ^T^T W dvddasam satam. 113 ^3 ^fafsnfirir $nr trayodasddhikam satam or^[^^trayodasam satam. 1 14 ^8 ^t^IlfVoF ^IW chatur dasddhikam satam or '^njtST ^li chaturdasam satam.

115 ^M ''T^^TTfv^ ^panchadasddhikam satam or iHr^T ^panchadasam satam.

116 <|C|^ ^^rrfVr«lr ^rw shodasddhikam satam or *fhr$f ^Tif shodasam satam.

117 W ^m^^nftnfi ^ saptadasddhikam satam or TOT^I ^Tcf saptadasam satam. 1 1 8 <ttb ^Ifl^irftrar ^Tff ashtddasddhikam satam or -»5ilfT^^ "5^ ashtddasam satam. 119 «jc|<> rr^^Tf^Gir "^ navadasddhikam satam or ^^T ^TfT navadasam satam. 1 20 CI^Q f^^rwAl"<* $Trf vimsatyadhikam satam or f^r 3Tff vimsam satam *. 121 ^ TT5|if^rwfV% W ekavimsatyadhikam satam or Tjcfif^i W ekavimsam

satam*, &c.

1 30 <^^o f^^fv% $TiT trimsadadhikam satam or f^ SHT trimsam satam *. 140 «i$o ^^Tfr^fVNr ^TiT chatvdrimsadadhikam satam or ^fi3lfc$r ^nf chatvd^

rimsam satam*. 150 <wo i^^i\i%^/>a/icMsa^a^/:flms«/«morTj^T^^pfl^

or Fr§3Trf sdrdhasatam,, 100 +-J- (hundred).

160 ^o nwfV^r ^rf shashtyadhikam satam or ^fF$nf shashtisatam. 170 ^so ^nrmiVGR1 ^iif saptatyadhikam satam or tiHfri$('ri saptatisatam. 1 80 «^bo ^ifarfVrojr ^nr asityadhikam satam or xM^flfrtDM asitisatam. 190 SQ.O H5rwf\f% ^nr navatyadhikam satam or TT^ffT^nr navatisatam. 200 ^oo ir ^ cfoe sa/e or Pd^M dvisatam or ffT^nft dvisati. 300 ^oo ^% ^nnf5T ifrmi satdni or f^Tff trisatam. 400 ^oo ^r^rftl Tfnnf^T chatvdri satdni or ^g:^i^ chatuhsatam. 500 MOO 'q'q 'SfTlTT'PfT pancha satdni or "q^ITt panchasatam. 600 ^oo "^7 ^Idlfrf 5^a/ satdni or Ml^frl shatsatam. 700 500 TOT ^Mif*i 5«jo/a satdni or WHSlrl saptasatam. 800 fcoo ^n? ^lirrf'T ashta satdni or ^31 ri ashtasatam. 900 Q.OO IT^ ^nrrf*T w«va satdni or «T«r^ilf navasatam. 1000 ^ooo ^ ^TWrf?T <&zsa satdni or ^Sfl^nrt dasasati, fern., or ?H[H sahdsrani,

neut. and masc.t 2000 ^ooo i" ^H cfoe sahasre. 3000 ^ooo ^^Hril *T?W I Pill /rmi sahasrdni. 10,000 ^0,000 ^w ayutam, neut. and masc.f

* Pan. v. 2, 46. The same rules apply to ^IfH sahasram, 1000, so that ion might be rendered by ^'cmq^} 1Xig& ekddasam sahasram, 1041 by «i<*^r=nf^^I ^^5T ekachatvdrimsam sahasram, &c. t Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 635.

J 253. NUMERALS. 123

100,000 100,000 7TBJ laksham, neut. or fern.*, or fagw niyutam, ncut. and masc.t

One million, fljw prayutam, neut. or masc.*

Ten millions, Tsfrfz koti, fem.J

A hundred millions, ^TJ^ arbuda, masc. and neut.

A thousand millions, *T£I J<J mahdrbuda, masc. and neut., or TITI padma, neut.,

i. e. lotus.

Ten thousand millions, ^ kharva, neut., i. e. minute. A hundred thousand millions, fn^c5 nikharva, neut. A billion, H^IM-W mahdpadtna, neut. Ten billions, $vj sahku, masc., i. e. an ant-hill. A hundred billions, ^fa sahkha, masc. neut., i. e. a conch-shell, or *nj^

samudra, masc., i. e. sea.

A thousand billions, ^T^fa mahd&ahkha, or ^w antya, ultimate. Ten thousand billions, ^T^T hdhd, masc., or Hm madhya, middle. A hundred thousand billions, n&^imahdhdhd, or iQ&pardrdha, i. e. other half. One million billions, ^tf dhuna, neut. Ten million billions, *?^TVrf mahddhuna.

A hundred million biUions, ^«fff^ilfl akshauhini, fern., i. e. a host. A thousand million billions, q^iH^f^ft mahdkshauhini.

In the same manner as ^rfVcR adhika, exceeding, 'Sftuna, diminished, may be used to form numerical compounds. i}*ft«f ^Tff panchonam fatam or M -«ft H 51 tipanchonasatam, 100 — 5, i. e. 95. If one is to be deducted, "gR una, without £c|f ekat suffices. sjiHf^flT: unavimsatih or K^Tlfffci^ifiT: ekonavimSatih, 20 —i, i.e. 19. Another way of expressing nineteen and similar numbers is by prefixing ^«FTW ekdnna, i. e. by one not ; Jd 4 14(^31 ft: ekdnnavimsatih, by one not twenty, i. e. 19. (Pan. vi. 3, 76.)

Declension of Cardinals. SINGULAR. " eka> one- PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. *5K tkah l^RT tkd ^ tkam T&K eke ^BH ekdh

A. VFR tkam ^cRT ekdm ^ tkam U<*1»^ e'A:a» ^^iK ^roA

I. l*cJH eTcena T£Wm ekayd ^<*H ^tena ^%t eifcatA V^iT*?: ekdbhih

D. '&R& tkasmai ^afc^ ekasyai 5<*^ ekasmai l&Wle'kebhyah'&

Ab. ^cROTTi^efcasmaZ ^4^1: ekasydh Q<*W\^ekasmdt ^T«i: tkebhyah ^r«i: tkdbhyah ^W^l

G. ^<=M-M tkasya ^ <+^H 1 1 ekasydh ^ «h ^M ekasya <J<*Mf ekeshdm <;cni^f ekdsdm ^*im\ e'keshdm

L. ^(WT^efcasmm ^oh^MieArasyam'^flftTWr^e^aswit/i ^cF^e^e^M «{cni^ el-«5a ^"^T^ f A-esAu

V. ^8 ^3ta ^R eyte • ^R ^Jba *^T ^te ^BT: elaA ^BTfiT rtaiu

* Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 635. f Amara-Kosha in. 6, 3, 24.

£ A different string of names is given in theVajasan.-Sanhita xvn. 2. See also Woepcke, Memoire sur la propagation des chiffres indiens (1863), p. 70; Lalita-vistara, ed. Calcutt. p. 168.

B 2

124:

NUMERALS.

$254-

254* ft dvi, two, base ^ ^«, like cfffir Ararat (§ 238).

MASC.

DUAL.

FEM.

G.L.

$ 355. f<f £H, three, fern.

N.V. <?R: *r«ya# A.

dvdbhydm dvdyoh

fwrcfc (Pan. vi. i, 166) tisrdh *

D. Ab. fif*n tribhydh frfWH tisribhyah

G. d*U4lli traydndm (Ved. trindm) ftHprf tisrindm f L. "JW'3 trishu Irt^Mf tisrishu

§ 356. ^g^ chatur, four, fern. ^H^ chatasri. N.V. ^n^tc/mWra#(Pan.vii.i,98) ^rTHt chdtasrah A. ^if£* chaturah (Pan. vi. i, 167) I. ^jjf^» chaturbhih D. Ab. ^TJ**?* chaturbhyah G. ^i 5<U r chaturndm L.

chdtasrah* >Tt chatasribhih

t chatasribhyah •«in«<ui chatasrindm f ^irt-HM chatasnshu

l"T«n dvd'bhydm dvdyoh

tribhydh

traydndm trishu

chatvdri •^ r3 1 U. chatvdri : chaturbhih n chaturbhyah

chaturndm chaturshu

^, five, "^r shash, six. 4igc^ ashtan, eight.

ashtau or ^T? ashtd

r 5^4

shadbhih shadbhydh

shanndm ^

shatsu

i ashtdbhydh l ashtdndm If ashtdsu or

: ashtdbhih \\

t ashtdbhyah

ashtdsu

J ^57 N.A.V. iH^a'Ma

I. iHf^^ancAa^AiAt D.Ab. "*fa«tt panchdbhyah G. "4^ I «1 1 panchdndm If L. ""fajj panchdsu

Cardinals with bases ending in «^ w,, such as TOlr^ saptan, «T^ navan, dasan, <ichi^^ ekddasan, &c., follow the declension of "q^ panchan. \\vimsatih is declined like a feminine in ^i; those in TT f like feminines in "j^tf; ^HT satam like a neut. or masc. in ^r«.

§ 258. The construction of the cardinals from i to 19 requires a few remarks. *J«fi eka is naturally used in the singular only, except when it means some ; ^fi" ^frf eke vadanti,

* Not rf^n f&r?#, nor -«i n^ft chatasrth. (Accent, Pan. vi. I, i67,vart.; vn. 2,99, vart.) f Not fw^nf tisrindm, nor -«iri«ii]ri chatasrindm (Pan. vi. 4, 4), though these forms occur in the Veda and Epic poetry.

t Accent, Pan. vi. i, 180; 181. || Pan. vi. i, 172. If Pan. VH. i, 55.

- 259.

NUMERALS. 125

some people say. fif dvi is always used as a dual, all the rest from 3 to 19 as plurals. Ex. fafa: TjpT*fc tribhih purushaih, with three men ; «;<*i<^l ^w^ekddata pvrushdn, eleven men, ace. The cardinals after four do not distinguish the gender; <<*!<; 31 niOi ekadasa ndrih, eleven women, ace.

While the numerals from i to 19 are treated as adjectives, agreeing with their substan- tives in gender, if possible, and in number and case, fq^ifni vimsatih and the rest may be treated both as adjectives and as substantives. Hence f«i^|fdt ^ic^di vimtatih fatrundm, twenty enemies, or f=J5lfff! ^lei^'. vimsatih fatravah ; VftH fiji^q: shashtih sis'av'ih, sixty boys ; ^Tff MirilfH satam phaldni, a hundred fruits j fc^l n i ^fil tririrfatd vriddhaih, by thirty elders ; TfHT ^uflnl 6atam ddsindm or ^Trf $\mi satam ddsyati, a hundred slaves ; *H£H fi^ri'Ct sahasram pitarah, a thousand ancestors.

Exceptionally these cardinals may take the plural number : M^i^ns^Mt pailchdsadbhir liayaih, with fifty horses.

J 259. Ordinals.

H, prathamdh, d, am, "| °^5 agrimdfy, d, am, > the first. °H, ddimdh, d, am, } °^, dvitiyab, d, am, the second. :, °tTT, °^, tritiyah, d, am, the third. chaturthdh, z, ^77?^, "j turtyafy, d9 am, I the fourth. r, 0<§T, °§, turyah, d, am, :, °«ft, °?t, pafichamdh, i, am, the fifth.

¥, shashthdh, z, «w, the sixth. :, °ift, °»T, saptamdh, i, am, the seventh. :, °»ft, °4, ashtamdh, i, am, the eighth.

, navamdh, i, am, the ninth. t, °Jft, °JT, dasamdh, i, am, the tenth.

f, ekddasdfy, i, am, the eleventh. , am,

t, unavimbdh, i, am, S the nineteenth.

, °*, dnavimsatitamdh, i, am, j m^, I, am (Pan. v. 2,56), 1 ^ twentieth ^ vim&atitamdh i am }

i, °#, •* MmM*, r, «™, l the thirtieth>

^NH:, °»ft, °4, trimsattamdh, i, am, J

$ft, °^T, chatvdrimsdb, i, am, 1 ^ fortieth

:, °»ft, °H, chatvdrimsattamdh, i, am, J

MHi^rt, 0$ft5 °3T, patichdsdh, i, am, 'M^'I^MHJ, °<ft, °4, panchdsaitamdh, i, am, J

126 NUMERALS. J 260-

: shashtitamdh, the sixtieth *. t ekashashtitamdh

h, 1 .,

\ the sixty-first. ]

: ekashashtah, ; saptatitamdh, the seventieth.

riH: ekasaptatitamdh,]

> the seventy-first. : ekasaptatah, ]

: asititamdh, the eightieth.

: ekdsititamdfy, 1 ,, . , , _ 7 */*, 'i \ the eighty-first.

d&tdfr, \

*ft, °jf, navatitamdhj i, am, the ninetieth.

ekanavatitamdht\ ,, . n

> the ninety-first. : ekanavatdhj J

:, °*rt, °if, Satatamdh, i, am, the hundredth. (Pan. v. 2, 57.)

: ekasatatamdfy, the hundred and first. : sahasratamdb, the thousandth.

260. Numerical Adverbs and other Derivatives,

^f\ sakrit, once. ^cRVT ekadhd, in one way.

j, twice. ffTVT dvidhd or ^VT dvedhd, in "two ways.

J, thrice. f^>n tridha or ^>n tredhd, in three ways.

: chatuh, four times. ^§T chaturdhd, in four ways.

: panchakritvahj five times. Tfowpanchadhd, in five ways.

: shatkritvah, six times, &c. -qto shodhd, in six ways, &c. (or

ekasahy one- fold. isah9 two-fold. f^r: tri&afr, three-fold, &c. (Pan. v. 4, 43.)

"STf dvayam or ffinf dvitayam, a pair. (Pan. v. 2, 42.) «fi[ tray am or fdd4 tritayam or gifi' ^rayz, a triad. ^^•44 chatushtayam, a tetrad. ^(^nr^panchatayam, a pentad, &c.

These are also used as adjectives, in the sense of five-fold &c., and may then form their plural as "^n^fllpanchataydJ}, or tNTnr panchataye (J 283).

VFR^panchat, a pentad, ^r?^ dasat, a decad (Pan. v. i, 60), are generally used as feminine; but both words occur likewise as masculine in the commentary to Pan. v. I, 59, and in the Kasika-Vritti.

* The ordinals from sixty admit of one form only, that is TfT: tamahj but if preceded by another numeral, both forms are allowed (Pan. v. 2, 58). !Jfif satam forms its ordinal as t satatamah only (Pan. v. 2, 57).

- 261.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

127

CHAPTER VI.

261.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Personal Pronouns.

Base (in composition) IT? mad and Base (in composition) R^ tvad and

asmad.

y»T^ yushmad.

SINGULAR.

W /ram, thou

ftf tvdm, m tvd, thee

OTT tvdyd, by thee

Tjwi tubhyam, ^ te, to thee

from thee tfava, W te, of thee in thee

N. *n£ ahdm, I

A. *rf Wm, m wd, me

I. *RT wayd, by me

D. TO mdhyam, ^ me, to me

Ab. *n^wa/, from me

G. TO mama, ^ we, of me

L. *cfa mdyi, in me

DUAL.

i /

N. ^rni dvam, we two *pf yuvdm, you two

A. ^rref ^v^m, ^ waw, us two g^f yuvdm, ^f vawi, you two

I. W3T«li dvdbhydm, by us two *pn«li yuvdbhydm, by you two

D. VHNI*qf dvabhydm, »ft waw, to us two 5^T«rf yuvdbhydm, ^f vaw, to you two Ab. WTT«ri dvdbhydm, from us two g^T^rf yuvdbhydm, from you two G. SUN Ml: dvdyoh, ^ft ?zaw, of us two g^ft: yuvdyoh, ^f vaw, of you two L. VHN*ft: dvdyoh, in us two ^4 <TlJ yuvdyoh, in you two

PLURAL.

yfydm, you

yushman, ^: vaA, you : yushmdbhih, by you i yushmdbhyam, ^: vaA, to you *pn^ yushmdt, from you

yushmdkam, ^: vah, of you su, in you

N. A. I. D.

vaydm, we

asmdn, ^: wa^, us : asmdbhih, by us asmdbhyam, ^: waA, to us

Ab. ^ro\ a«ma/, from us

G. >HWli asmdkam, IT: w«A, of us

L. •srsm asmdsu, in us

The substitutes in the even cases, *n md, we, i 7?aw, ^ 7T te, ^f v^m, ^: vaA, have no accent and are never used at the beginning of a sentence, nor can they be followed by such particles as ^ cha, and, "^T vd, or, ^ eva, indeed, ^ ha, ^r^ aha.

128

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

§ 262—

262. Base (in composition) u^ tad, he, she, it. (Accent, Pan.vi. i, 182.)

MASC.

N. *H sdh

A. i(tdm

I. ^T

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

SINGULAR.

FEM.

NEUT.

HX tctm HT^tdt

IHIT ^aya cHT Una

MASC.

ff te TTF^ td'n

%: taik

PLURAL.

FEM.

WTt tdh irn tdh

infa: t

tdsmai

tdsydh ta'sya nt«lit tdsydh

tdsydm

tdsmai

i: tebhyah

MASC.

N. A. WT tau I. D. Ab. TTWf tdbhydm G. L. inftt ta'yoA

§ 263. Base (in composition) SINGULAR.

MASC. FEM.

N. W sydh ^TT syd

A. "FT ^«/^»i WT #y^m

tdsya tdsmin DUAL.

FEM.

rTT«n tdbhydm

MASC.

NEUT.

ITTf^ tdni Wrf«T tdni

%: tain

tdbhyah ff«H K tdbhyah W«i "rfTOT frf'sam W^f

Wg teshu

NEUT.

tdbhydm

PLURAL.

FEM.

mr:

NEUT.

wt

tydh

'I tydbhih mi tyaih

D. TIw tydsmai 7TO tydsyai T?w tydsmai Ab. mWTi(tydsmdt m^TTI tydsydh j\W\^tydsmdt Wm tytbhyah 7TW* tydbhyah W«l« tyebhyah G. mW tydsya ?T^TTt tydsydh 7TO tydsya W^f tyeshdm mi^lf tydsdm TH'^f tytshdm L. 'mfeff*[tydsmin 10X31 tydsy dm mftR^ tydsmin mjlty&hu mTQtydsu TT^tyeshu

DUAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT.

tybhydm

N. A. 7TT

I. D. Ab. mT«lf tydbhijdm mi^TT tydbhydm

G. L. T*nft* tydyoh W*ftl tydyoh

Possessive Pronouns.

§ 264. From the bases of the three personal pronouns, possessive adjectives are formed by means of ^T 2ya.

JT^fan, °^rr, °V, madtyah, yd, yam, mine. :, °*n, °^, tvadiyah, yd, yam, thine.

) °T^y tadiyah, yd, yam, his, her, its.

°^T, °^ asmadiyah, yd, yam, our.

/

:, °irr, °*r, yushmadiyah, yd, yarn, your.

, °4, tadiyah, yd, yam, their. Other derivative possessive pronouns are *n*?«R* * mdmdkah, mine ; riN<=K Idvdkah, thine; ^n^RT«R: dsmdkah, our; ^^RTcfi: yaushmdkah, your. Likewise

* Pan. iv. 3, 1-3; iv. 1,30; vn. 3, 44.

-f 269.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

129

: mdmakinak, mine ; rfN<*lHt tdvakinah, thine our ; i^mi^lnj: yaushmdkinah your.

Reflexive Pronouns. § 265. WQsvaydm, self, is indeclinable.

: dsmdkinafy,

vritavdn, I chose

it myself, thou chosest it thyself, he chose it himself; ^ni <Jd*Ml svayam vrita- vati, she chose it herself; ^4 ^fHff: svayam vritavantah, we, you, they chose it by our, your, themselves.

2,66. WtH*{dtmdn, self, is declined like WB^brahman (J 1 92). E ^T dtmdnam dtmdndpatya, see thyself by thyself, gnosce te ipsum; <fht "^TRidtmano dosham jndtvd, having known his own fault. It is used in the singular even when referring to two or three persons : uirHHl <$IHNIMJ ipn: dtmano desam dgamya mritdh, having returned to their country, they died.

f 267. ^:, ^r, ^, svdh, sva, svdm, is a reflexive adjective, corresponding to Latin suus, sua, suum. ^ ^ ^yr svam putram drish\vdt having seen his own son. On the declension of ^ sva, see f 278.

Demonstrative Pronouns. J 268. Base (in composition) ^?nT etadt this (very near).

MASC.

N. Tgm eshdh A. *nf etdm

*s

I. <lfn etena

D. KHW etdsmai

Ab.

G.

L.

SINGULAR.

FEM.

MASC.

sW

^fff efc^»

*nnrr eto'y<2 *nT«T etena TFitl etaih

^n<3 etdsyai «jnw etdsmai ^JW.etebhyah <jnt<(it etdsydh <{.n*»\i[etdsmdt

<fl<*ll etdsydm ^T^R^etdsmin DUAL.

ASC. FEM.

PLURAL.

FEM.

^TTT*

N'EUT.

: etdbhih

^nifn e/ani ^: efat'A

eteshdm

^jn^letdbhyah, "ZJW.etebhyah etdsdm <nm eteshdm

N. A.

I. D. Ab. *1TT«ri etdbhydm G. L.

J 269. Base (in composition) 3

vi. i, 171.)

SINGULAR. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N. ^^ aydm ^4 iydm ^ »c?aw

A. ^R imam "^\ imdm ^ iddm

I. vi»in an^na

D. "WW asmai

Ab. «iwii1 asmdt

G. ^BTO a5ya

L. -ejfWT asmtn

etdbhydm ^l!T*Tr etdbhydm

': etdyoh *.n<4\. etdyoh

idam, this (indefinitely). (Accent, Pan.

MASC.

PLURAL.

FEM.

r: W& r: tWA r. dbhih

imdni

r

asmat

asydh asydm

^f esA^'m

l ebhydh. eshcfm

asmin S

as*

130

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

I 370-

MASC.

DUAL.

FEM.

N.A.V.

I.D.Ab.

G.L.

im6

f dbhydm ; andyoh

imt

^TP*rf dbhydm vrn<4\J andyoh ^HT^ftj andyoh

§ 270. l&^etdd and 'Zftiddm, when repeated in a second sentence with reference to a preceding ^rf^ etad and ^ idam, vary in the following cases, by substituting ^»f ena, which has no accent.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.

A. IJ

I. <n«T

ewa/w <«1*(i enayd

A. 4i«tl«\ ewaw ^TH ewaA <niTn endni

enena

DUAL.

FEM.

Ex.

A. t enau G.L. JMJfl: enayoh

^ri««<<u*iMln payay the grammar has been studied by this person, teach him prosody.

anayoh pavitram kidam, enayoh prabhutam svam,

I enayofy ^«TMU enayoh

vydkaranam adhitam, enam chhando 'dhyd-

the family of these two persons is decent, and their wealth vast. Base (in composition) ^Qadas, that (mediate).

MASC.

271

N.

A.

I.

D.

Ab.

G.

L.

N.

A.

I. ^FftfH: amibhih D.Ab. ^Wt*i: am&hyah G. VH*^1*! amishdm L.

SINGULAR.

FEM.

asaii

NEUT.

^TT amum v«ijr|i amtind

amushmai

amushmdt amushya amushmin

. I. 29, 5)

amushyai l amushydh amushydh amushydm

amund amushmai

amushmdt amushya

amushmin

MASC.

PLURAL.

FEM.

NEUT.

J .

ni amuni

N.A.V.

I.D.Ab.

J amubhyah amushdm amushu

DUAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT. I

amubhydm

: ambhih amibhyah

G.L.

; amuyoh

-J 274. PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 131

Relative Pronoun. $ 272. Base (in composition) Tf^ydd, who or which.

SINGULAR. PLURAL.

MASC. i i M NKUT. MASC. FEM. NXUT.

N. IHy<a *Hy</ *T^y<fc $y£ TOy<& ifa yjni

A. *}y<£m *liyam *n^yrf£ *H«^y</n TJT! ydfe «ufn yon»

I. M»T y^ha Tm ya'y^ ^*T y^na *h ya/A TTfWt ydbhih *h ya<3i

D. *Tw ydsmai T^ ydsyai T^ ydsmai ^«T: ytbhyah TWt ydbhyah TW. ytbhyah

Ah. T&RXI^ydsmdt T^JT: ydsydJi 'H\&\1(ydsmdt T«Tt ytbhyah TJW. ydbhyah

G. ^TWyasya T^^lydsydh T&Q ydsya WT y&hdm

L. «<fw^ya5»nm <<t*ii ydsydm

DUAL.

MASC. FEM.

N.A.V. T^ I.D.Ab.

G. L. ^nt yayo^ Tt yrfyo^ 'n: ydyoh

Interrogative Pronouns. f 273. Base (in composition) f% ^m, Who or which 1

SINGULAR. PLURAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NKUT.

N. TXlkdk TXlkcl f*Mm %*6f W.kcth

A. 3ikdm -atikctm f^ktm "S^kcln ^FTt kdh

I. ^k^na WRkdyd ^ ktha %:kafy "SK^l kd'bhih %t kath

D. «I35R kdsmai «Pw kdsyai cR^ kdsmai ^««IJ k&hyah oRfl*n kd'bhyah IfW. ktbhyah

Ab. TQ&^kdsmdt iK&CMsydh ^^^(kdsmdt :&H\ktbhyah IKW.Ubhyah W*r.k#>hyah

G. «B^I Aroisya <=HMK kdsydh «K^T Araisya ^if k&hdm 4IUI Ara's^m WTT kfshdm

L. ^ftR^Ara.mm «F^f Jtasyrfwi «liftR^ kdsmin ^fTSktshu cRHJ Ar/«tt

DUAL.

MASC. FEM. NEUT.

N.A. 'a&fam' ^1*^ ^i*<f

I.D.Ab. •5KT»n^y(fm ^BT«n kdbhydm -361*6 kd'bhydm G. L.

§ 274. Pronouns admit the interposition of ^!«Jf ak before their last vowel or syllable, to denote contempt or dubious relation (Pan. v. 3, 71). r^HRT tvayakd, By thee! instead of WJT tvayd. ^^^\l yuvakayoh, Of you two ! ^Wotilf*?: asmakdbhih,Wiib us ! ^^4 ayakam. , &c. (See Siddh.-Kaum. vol. i. p. 706.)

S 2

132 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Compound Pronouns.

§ 375. By adding igs^dris, ^fdrisa, or "^driksha, to certain pronominal bases, the following compound pronouns have been formed :

tddri$9 irnjsr tddrisa, wr^f tddriksha, such like.

T etddrisa, ScTT^ etddriksha, this like. yddris, Mld^f yddrisa, HldKJ yddriksha, what like. idrisa, ^^ idriksha, this like.

kidrisa, ^ft^ Mdriksha, What like?

These are declined in three genders, forming the feminine in ^ i. ril^cf, tddrik, m. n. ; TTT^ft tddrisi, f. ; or HT^r:, °5ft, °^T, tddrisah, i, am. Similarly formed are HT^^I mddrisa, F^T^T tvddrisa, like me, like thee, &c.

J 276. By adding ^ va# and *n^ ya^ to certain pronominal bases, the following compound pronouns, implying quantity, have been formed : »

, so much, "1

, so much, ^declined like nouns in '^vat (J 187). , as much, J

3Tfil iyat, so much, 1

feni %«/, How much ? } ^^ iyan>

Note — On the declension of «fiflT Arrfri, How many? TfflT tdti, so many, and Tfa ya7i, as many, see § 231.

§ 277. By adding fq-f^ chit, ^R c^aw«, or ^ft «p^, to the interrogative pronoun f^ir kirn, it is changed into an indefinite pronoun.

kaschit, WiT^kdchit, fsK^f^kimchitj some one; also 'affai^kachchit, anything.

kaSchana, oFT^«T kdchana, f«fr^»T kimchana, some one. ^*, ofrrfTT Aropi, fohHfq kimapi, some one.

In the same manner indefinite adverbs are formed : oin*T &ac?a, When ? ddchit9 ch^m kaddchana, once ; n A:v«, Where ? «T W&* na kvdpi, not anywhere.

Sometimes the relative pronoun is prefixed to the interrogative, to render it indefinite : TK ^B: yah kah, whosoever ; iRS «fi^T yasya kasya, whosesoever. Likewise IT: «irf^y^^ kaschit, whosoever, or IT: ojrg yah kascha, or in <*<$H y«A kaschana.

The relative pronoun, if doubled, assumes an indefinite or rather distributive meaning : iff iy:, zn ^T, *T?T^, «/o y«S, y« y<^, yad yad, whosoever. Occasionally the relative and demonstrative pronouns are combined for the same purpose : yattad, whatsoever.

-f 278.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

133

Pronominal Adjectives.

} 278. Under the name of Sarvandman, which has been freely translated by Pronoun, but which really means a class of words beginning with sarva, native grammarians have included, besides the real pronouns mentioned before, the following words which share in common with the real pronouns certain peculiarities of declension. They may be called Pronominal Adjectives, and it is to be remembered that they are affected by these peculiarities of declension only if they are used in certain senses.

I. Tit sarva, all; 2. fira vtiva, all; 3. w ubha, two; 4. TOTJ ubhaya, both; 5. ^rsr any a, other; 6. ^araraT anyatara, either; 7. jifcitara, other; 8. w tva, other (some add w?^ tvat, other) ; 9. words formed by the suffixes Tfft tar a and T»TH tama, such as 9. qftX katara, Which of two? 10. "3S?TR katama, Which of many? 10. *nr sama, all ; 1 1. fan sima, whole ; 12. "sfa nema, half; 13. ^«R eka, one; 14. ^ pdrva, east or prior; 15. v&para, subsequent; 1 6. W9R avara, west or posterior; 17. ^frspff dakshina, south or right; 1 8. TJR uttara, north or subsequent ; 19. ^TTC apara, other or inferior ; 20. ^nrc adhara, west or inferior ; 21. ^T *va, own; 22. ^TfT antara, outer, (except ^rHl ^: antard puh, suburb,) or lower (scil. garment).

If OT 5flma means equal or even, it is not a pronominal adjective ; nor ^f0f*!T dakshina, if it means clever ; nor ^ sva, if it means kinsman or wealth ; nor ^Kt antara , if it means interval, &c.; nor any of the seven from ^ purva to ^rvn adhara, unless they imply a relation in time or space . Hence <fttJ*U! <nvj<*K dakshind gdthakdfy, clever minstrels ; TWn: "$^J uttardfy kuravah, the northern Kurus, (a proper name) ; THJirn ^T* prabhdtdfi svdh, great treasures ( Kas'. i . 1 , 35) ; grdmayor antare vasati, he lives between the two villages.

		MASCULINE.
	SINGULAR.	DUAL.	PLURAL.
N.	1X31 sdrvah*	T^H sdrvau	Tf^ 5art?e
A.	TR sdrvam	TJ%T sdrvau	tf5i»^ sdrvdn
I.	^ma5 sdrvena	'H?l*J4i sdrvdbhydm	TT^* sdrvaih
D.	ti5«^ sdrvasmai	5RTWn sdrvdbhydm	1ffi*m sdrvebhyah
Ab.	*HWin sdrvasmdt	Tftp'ri sdrvdbhydm	^nh'n sdrvebhyah
G.	H^T sdrvasya	«l"A sdrvayoh	ti^fm sdrveshdm
L.	ti«i(\H«^ sdrvasmin	*5«Tlt sdrvayoh	^%^ sdrveshu
V.	iftsdrva	^1% sdrvau	^PR sa'rre
		FEMININE.
	SINGULAR.	DUAL.	PLURAL.
N.	TITI sdrvd	TT^1 sarre	^tT:««rroA
A.	•c ^nn sarvdm	^S«'rre	TTqi: sdrvdh

* Accent, Pan. vi. i, 191.

134: PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. § 279-

I. ^f^TT sdrvayd ^T^WT sdrvdbhydm ^rflfat sdrvdbhih

D. *rf ^ sdrvasyai ^<=rt»*ri sdrvdbhydm ^T%«n sdrvdbhyah

Ab. *t5tHit sdrvasydh ^TtPTT sdrvdbhydm ^HtTWK sdrvdbhyah

G. «i«it«ii! sdrvasydh ^T^ftt sdrvayoh tf<=n*ii sdrvdsdm

L. «5«<*f sdrvasydm ^rt^ftt sdrvayoh ^^TCJ sdrvdsu

NEUTER.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. A.V. ^1% sdrvam 1$ sdrve ^qiP<y sdrvdni

The rest like the masculine.

§ 279. W*J awya, ^rsfiTT any at ar a, ^rfT itara, cRTR katara, cRnr katama, take f^/ in the Nom. Acc.Yoc. Sing, of the neuter : Nom. Sing. ^n*n any ah, masc. ; ^rarrawya, fern. ; ^ran^emya^ neut.

§ 280. w w5^« is used in the Dual only : Masc. N. A. V. -&ftubhau, I. D. Ab. Tm«n ubhdbhydm, G. L. •gwft: ubhayoh;

W w^^e, N. A. V. fern, and neut.

J 281. T>nr: ubhayah, 0"$t-yi, °4 -y«m, is never used in the Dual, but only in the Sing, and Plur. Haradatta admits the Dual.

MASCULINE. SINGULAR. PLURAL.

N. "WI* ubhayah - 7VR ubhaye

A. <JWT ubhayam ^WTT*^ ubhaydn

I. "SH^tT ubhayena ^TOJ ubhayaih

D. "3WTCR ubhayasmai, &c. ^3^^Wt ubhayebhyah, &c.

§ 282. The nine words from ^ jjzt/ra to ^Hfcantara (14 to 22), though used in their pronominal senses, may take in the Nom. Plur. ^z" or ^f! ahj in the Abl. Sing. WV?(smdt or ^n^a/; in the Loc. Sing. ftR^smiw or ^«.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. "^Ipurvah ^[%T purvau

A. ^^ purvam tj^T purvau

I. T$l$ purvena ^tl«n purvdbhydm ^l purvaih

D. ^w purvasmai "^^HWf purvdbhydm ^f«Jt purvebhya h

Ab. Tjfwn^w/rasma* or ^tn^pMnja^ "^tr^rf purvdbhydm Xj^fa: purvebhyah G. *£**** purvasya ^[%^I purvayoh

L. ^fw^^Mrvaswm or ^ purve "^^ftt purvayoh

§ 283. The following words may likewise take ^ft «A or ^ i in the Nom. Plur. masc. (Pan. 1. 1, 33.)

J prathamah, first, THWi prathamau, iniT prathame or n>4*iit prathamdhj fern.

nn prathamd.

t charamah, last, ^T?U charamau, ^T& charame or ^TflTt charamdh. PsnM* dmtayahy two-£^l, fern, fgrnfl dvitayt, and similar words in IHT #aya y fWrPTt tritayah, three-fold ; f^TTW tritayp or f^H^TTt tritayah.

-J 285. PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 135

dvayah, two-fold, fern, T^ft dvayt, and similar words in Hya ; ?HH trayah. I alpah, few, fT^Y alpe or *K-HI; alpdh. : ardhah, half, *tff ardhe or V^Tt ardArfA.

: katipayah, some, <*fdM^ katipaye or ^PnMMi; katipaydh. tt nemah, half, «T*T neme or •TTH nemdh. In all other cases these words are regular, like ^fa: kdntah.

§ 284. ftrufaj dvittyah and other words in tfhltfya are declined like ^ifa kdnta, but in the Dat. Abl. and Loc. Sing, they may follow *ft sarva.

MASCULINE. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. fedlM: dvitiyah fsnW doittyau fgrtl^Ti dvitiydh

A. f^ldl4 dvittyam Psrt1«iT dvittyau fgnlMl^ dvitiydn

I. HSdl^H dvitiyena PS nl M I *4 i dvltiydbhydm TS nl M i dvittyaih

D . fSdl^lfl dvittydya or fsnl<4«*f doitiyasmai T^mTWT dvitiydbhydm ism*!*'!! dvitiyebhyah Ab. Pi dl ^ I f(dvitiydt or fjj ifl ^ W I <\dvitiyasmdt frf id ^ I **4 1 dvittydbhydm PS r/1 M^I dvitiyebhyah G. ferri JJ44J dvitfyasya fsnlM^J dvittyayoh fsn1«<i«ii dvitiydndm

L. fkri*ft<fofrfye or rrfHl^rm^rfmViyo^mm feff^^nftt dvittyayoh fsnl^M dvitiyeshu

At the end of Bahuvrihi compounds the Sarvanamans are treated like ordinary words : Dat. Sing. "ftn^H^nT^nyo&Aayaya, to him to whom both are dear (Pan. 1. 1, 29). The same at the end of compounds such as irti^J mdsapurvah, a month earlier ; Dat. *liti^i<4 mdsapurvdya (Pan. 1. 1, 30). Likewise in Dvandvas; j5 1 M<UUi purvdpardndm, of former and later persons (Pan. 1. 1, 31), though in the Norn. Plur. these Dvandvas may take ^i; <j5m< purvdpare or ^=imUt purvdpardh. Only in compounds expressive of points of the compass, such as ^<R^<I uttara-purva, north-east, the last element may throughout take the pro- nominal terminations (Pan. I. i, 28).

Adverbial Declension.

§ 285. In addition to the regular case-terminations by which the declension of nouns is effected, the Sanskrit language possesses other suffixes which differ from the ordinary terminations chiefly by being restricted in their use to certain words, and particularly to pronominal bases. The ordinary case-terminations, too, are frequently used in an adverbial sense. Thus

Ace. fat; chiram, a long time.

Instr. P^«u chirena, in a long time.

Dat. P«RH4 chirdya, for a long time.

Abl. fa^u^chirdt, long ago.

Gen. TTC^T chirasya, a long time.

Loc. f^T chire, long. Other adverbial terminations are,

1. rTC tah, with an ablative meaning, becoming generally local.

2. ^ tra, with a locative meaning.

3. ^T dd, with a temporal meaning ; also raised to

4. UTi^ tdt, with a locative meaning.

136 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. § 285-

5. 1R thd, with a meaning of modality; likewise ^ tham

6. "UTR^sdt, expressive of effect.

7. ^TT a and ^rrf^ dhi, local.

8. "f| rhi, temporal and causal.

9. 1P£ tar, local. 10. "5 ha, local.

See also the terminations for forming numeral adverbs (§ 260). Kt tah, with an ablative meaning.

IHf I tatah, thence. Tin yatah, whence, ^rf J itah, hence ; (cf. ^flf iti, thus, j[^ iva, as.) , hence. opH frwtaA, Whence ? VSHJcU amutah, thence. *^J mattah, from me. t asmattah, from us. W<K bhavattah, from your Honour. ^^ purvatah, before (in a general local or temporal sense). Vf HJ sarvatah, always, ^(Jrt* agratah, before, like ^T?T fl^e. ^3r5?!f: abhitah, around, near. WTitt ubhayatah, on both sides. TTftw: paritah, all round. 5rRWt grdmatah, from the village. ^sJM'H. ajndnatak, from ignorance.

2. cl ^ra, locative j originally c^T trdt as in gotdi purushatrd, amongst men.

TfW tatra, there. '^ ya^ra, where. "<fW Aw^ra, Where ? ^Tcf a^ra, here. ^T|W amutra, there, in the next world. V&ffi ekatra, at one place, together. ^T^T sa^ra, with, and Tf^f satram, with (see ^ saAa).

3. ^T rfa, temporal.

IT^T tadd, then, and ri^THlT taddnim. *Tr?T yarfa, when. cIT^T &a£fcf,When? ^•H^l any add, another time. ^HfT sarvadd, always, at all times. ^oft^T ekadd, at one time. ^T sac?a, always. ^T idd, in the Veda, later ^m*) iddntm, now.

4. ITTi^^, local. W^fJT^prdktdt, in front.

Frequently after a base in ^ s :

before, vi M <.tn i f^ adharastdt, below, msaif^parastdt, afterwards. t, below. TMf<8 vt^uparishtdt, above.

thd, modal.

tathd, thus. T^TT y«/Aa, as. ^ft^n sarvathd, in every way. ^R^T ubhayathd, in both ways. ^SRT*IT anyathd, in another way. •«!•«< nvm anyatarathd, in one of two ways. ^rK^I itarathd, in the other way. ^TT vrithd, vainly (?). Or H tham, in «R^ katham, How? ^r*T ittham, thus. Or "*T #Aa, in ^HI aMa, thus.

6. ^TTi^saf, efPective.

<M^H»^ra/asa^, (TT$ft$\ftlf rdjno 'dhinam, dependent on the king.) H w^Il i^ bhasmasdt, reduced to ashes. ^b*\*\\t(^agnisdt, reduced to fire.

7. ^TT d and ^iHfc dhi, local.

^f^Wf^ dakshindhi, in the South, or ^Hsjiiu dakshind. ^'rKlH^ uttardhi, in the North, or T^T uttard. ^TiTTT antard (or °t -ram^ or °T! -re, or °T^ -rena), between. ^TT purd, in the East, in front, formerly, (or JJIS purah and ^*jf\\^purastdt, before.) 1&Rpa£chd, behind, (or **vt\<^paschdt.)

Adverbs such as ^pn mudhd, in vain, JplT mrishd, falsely, are instrumental cases of obsolete nouns ending in consonants.

-$ 287. CONJUGATION. 137

8. f^ rhi, temporal and causal.

etarhi, at this time, (Wilson.) f$% karhi, At what time? ifl? yarAf, wherefoie. tarhit therefore, at that time, (Wilson.)

9. HI! tar, local.

JTTHT/>nfrar, early, in the morning. ««jn«. sanutar, in concealment. 10. ^ An, locative.

, Where ? ^5 *^fl> here. *R£ saha, with.

CHAPTER VIL

CONJUGATION.

J 286. Sanskrit verbs are conjugated in the Active and the Passive. Ex. TjtafiT bddhati, he knows; yMni budhydte, he is known. f 287. The Active has two forms :

1. The Parasmai-pada, i.e. transitive, (from TJT^R parasmai, Dat. Sing. of

IR paray another, i. e. a verb the action of which refers to another.) Ex. <^i(rt daddti, he gives.

2. The Atmane-paday i. e. intransitive, (from mirM^ dtmane, Dat. Smg. of

•^HlcH^ dtman, self, i. e. a verb the action of which refers to the agent.) Ex. >sn<^c ddatte, he takes.

Note — The distinction between the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada is fixed by usage rather than by rule. Certain verbs in Sanskrit are used in the Parasmaipada only, others in the Atmanepada only; others in both voices. Those which are used in the Parasmaipada only, are verbs the action of which was originally conceived as transitive ; e. g. *jf% «ivfn bhumim manthati, he shakes the earth; HNf ^iqfff mdmsam khddati, he eats meat; tiiitnTn grdmam atati, he goes to or approaches the village. Those which are used in the Atmanepada only, were originally verbs expressive of states rather than of actions; e.g. FMfl edhate, he grows; t*«<;n spandate, he trembles; *f^n modate, he rejoices; $^ 4etet he lies down. Such roots are marked in the Dhatupatha as n-it or anuddtta-it (Pan. i. 3, 12).

In the language of the best authors, however, many verbs which we should consider intransitive, are conjugated in the Parasmaipada, while others which govern an accusative, are always conjugated in the Atmanepada. ^rfk hasati, he laughs, is always Parasmaipadin, whether used as transitive or neuter (Colebr. p. 297) : it is so even when reciprocity of action is indicated, in which case verbs in Sanskrit mostly take the Atmanepada ; e. g. «H

vyatihasanti, they laugh at each other (Pan. 1.3, 15, vart. 1,2). But W^ smayate, he smiles, is restricted by grammarians to the Atmanepada ; and verbs like tfUJd trdyate, he protects, are Atmanepadin (i. e. used in the Atmanepada), though they govern an accusative ; e. g. c*i<«3 TT trdyasva mdm, Protect me ! These correspond to the Latin deponents.

Verbs which are used both in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, take the one or the ' other form according as the action of the verb is conceived to be either transitive or reflective;

;138 CONJUGATION. § 288-

e.g. info pachati, he cooks; SMCI pachate, he cooks for himself; Mifif yajati, he sacrifices; ^«fff yajate, he sacrifices for himself. The same applies to Causals (Pan. i. 3, 74).

These distinctions, however, rest in many cases, in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, on peculiar conceptions which it is difficult to analyse or to realize; and in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, the right use of the active and middle voices is best learnt by practice. Thus "rf\ nt, to lead, is used as Parasmaipada in such expressions as *TJ TM «f*( fit gandam vinayati*, he carries off a swelling ; but as Atmanepada, in ^H fVn*^ krodham vinayate, he turns away or dismisses wrath; a subtle distinction which it is possible to appreciate when stated, but difficult to bring under any general rules.

Again, in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, some verbs are middle in certain tenses only, but active or middle in others; e. g. Atm. ^ffi vardhate, he grows, never '3§favardhati; but Aor. ^^f^avridhat, Par., or ^Rffo avardhishta, Atm. he grew. (Pan. I. 3, 91.)

Others take the Parasmaipada or Atmanepada according as they are compounded with certain prepositions ; e. g. fV^lfw visati, he enters ; but f iTq^n ni-visate, he enters in. (Pan. i. 3, 17.)

§ 288. Causal verbs are conjugated both in the Parasmaipada and Atmane- pada. Desideratives generally follow the Pada of the simple root (Pan. 1.3, 62). Denominatives ending in ^srTO ay a have both forms (Pan. i. 3, 90). The intensives have two forms : one in it ya, which is always Atmanepada ; the other without if ya, which is always Parasmaipada.

§ 289. The passive takes the terminations of the Atmanepada, and prefixes if yd to them in the four special or modified tenses. In the other tenses the forms of the passive are, with a few exceptions, the same as those of the Atmanepada.

§ 290. There are in Sanskrit thirteen different forms, corresponding to the tenses and moods of Greek and Latin.

I. Formed from the Special or Modified Base.

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

I. The Present (Lat) H^lfH bhdvdmi vfebhdve

2,. The Imperfect (Lan) ^sw4 dbhavam ^W% dbhave

3. The Optative (Lin) H^TI bhdveyam *^H bhdveya

4. The Imperative (Lot) H^rftr bhdvdni H% bhdvai

II. Formed from the General or Unmodified Base.

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

5. The Reduplicated Perfect (Lit) ^33 babhdva W$5 babhuve

6. The Periphrastic Perfect (Lit) ^fksf ^$5 choraydm babhuva vft<n[ ^ choraydm cha

7. The First Aorist (Lun) ^nffftri dbodhisham ^wfafa dbhavishi

8. The Second Aorist (Lun) ^*£$ dbhdvam ^rftr% dsiche

9. The Future (Lrit) Hfmmfir bhavishydmi Hfa*T bhavishye

* Cf. Siddhanta-Kaumudi, ed. Taranatha, vol. n. p. 250. Colebrooke, Grammar, p. 337.

291. CONJUGATION. 139

10. The Conditional (Lrin) 1w*fr«T dbhavishyam ^wfir«& dbhavithye

1 1 . The Periphrastic Future (Luj) Mflrdifw bhavitdsmi Hfaing bhavitdhe

12. The Benedictive (As'ir lih) ^m bMydsam *ftprta bhavishiyd

13. The Subjunctive (Let) occurs in the Veda only.

Signification of the Tenses and Moods.

$291. 1.2. The Present and Imperfect require no explanation. The Imperfect takes the Augment (J 300), which has always the accent.

3. The principal senses of the Optative are,

a. Command ; e. g. ?fr jppw *T^: tvam grdmam gachchheh, thou mayest go, i.e.

go thou to the village.

b. Wish ; e. g. mif^m!* bhavdn ihdsita, Let your honour sit here!

c. Inquiring; e. g. ^nfhftn T»r 7rl*nfhqffaj vedam adhiyiya, uta tarkam

adhiyiya, Shall I study the Veda or shall I study logic?

d. Supposition (sambhdvana) ; e. g. M<^*ft 3<MK*ft dHHIM!^ bhaved asau

vedapdrago brdhmanatvdt, he probably is a student of the Veda, because he is a Brahman.

e. Condition ; e. g. ^N H^wfo EM^glXm: IHTTt dandab chen na bhavel

loke vinasyeyur imdfy prajdh, if there were not punishment in the world, the people would perish. ~m T^T^ H ^ilM^r^ yafy pathet sa dpnuydt, he who studies, will obtain. *(€l^^H f^W^W^^^KHr^r. yad yad rocheta viprebhyas tat tad dadydd amatsarah, whatever pleases the Brahmans let one give that to them not niggardly.

f. It is used in relative dependent sentences ; e.g. *TW H*H ^^T *f m$ yach

cha tvam evam kuryd na frraddadhe, I believed not that thou couldst act thus. ^rll£$li: ^pnsr fH^dfmra yat tddrisdfy krishnam ninderann dscharyam, that such persons should revile Krishna, is wonderful

4. The Imperative requires no explanation, as far as the second person is

concerned ; e. g. ijj^ tuda, Strike ! The first and third persons are used in many cases in place of the Optative ; e. g. 3*41 ft HTT^^ii ichchhdmi bhavdn bhunktdm, I wish your honour may eat.

5. The Reduplicated Perfect denotes something absolutely past.

6. Certain verbs which are not allowed to form the reduplicated perfect, form

their perfect periphrastically, i. e. by means of an auxiliary verb. 7.8. The First and Second Aorists refer generally to time past, and are the

common historical tenses in narration. They take the Augment (§ 300). 9. The Future, also called the Indefinite Future ; e.g.

devcLS ched varshishyati dhdnyam vapsydmah, if it rain, we shall sow rice. ^N-nil^H^ <l^fri ydvaj-jivam annam ddsyatiy as long as life

T 2

140 SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES § 29!-

lasts, he will give food. Under certain circumstances this Future may be used optionally with the Periphrastic Future ; e. g. *K^T H^W kadd bhoktd or H^ffi bhokshyate, When will he eat?

10. The Conditional is used, instead 6f the Optative, if things are spoken of that might have, but have not happened (Pan. in. 3, 139) ; e. g.

szwmM^ died abhavishyat tadd subhiksham

abhavishyat, if there had been abundant rain, there would have been plenty. The Conditional takes the Augment ($ 300).

11. The Periphrastic or Definite Future ; e. g. 'snfaflT TO JI41rilftl ayodhydm

&vah praydtdsi, thou wilt to-morrow proceed to Ayodhya.

12. The Benedictive is used for expressing not only a blessing, but also a

wish in general; e. g, ^fhfTRJjni^ srimdn bMydt, May he be happy! fft *i1mif^ chiram jivydt, May he live long !

13. The Subjunctive occurs in the Veda only.

$ 292. The Sanskrit verb has in each tense and mood three numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural, with three persons in each.

CHAPTER VIII.

SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS.

J 293. Sanskrit grammarians have divided all verbs into ten classes, according to certain modifications which their roots undergo before the terminations of the Present, the Imperfect, the Optative, and Imperative. This division is very useful, and will be retained with some slight alterations. One and the same root may belong to different classes. Thus «TS^ bhrds, HTS^ bhlds, £*f bhram, *%?{ kram, ^jJT klam, ^3( tras, cJ7 trut, H1^ lash belong to the Bhu and Div classes ; «T$IW bhrd&ate or WT^m bhrdtyate, &c. (Pan. in. i, 70). Again, ^sku, w^stambh,ffcHstumbh} *^fo^skambh, ^tskumbh belong to the Su and Kri classes; ^rfiPff skunoti or ^rrfw skundti (Pan. in. i, 82).

J 394. The four tenses and moods which require this modification of the root will be called the Special or Modified Tenses ; the rest the General or Unmodified Tenses. Thus the root fa chi is changed in the Present, Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative into fqvj chi-nu. Hence fa»jR: chi-nu-mdli, we search; ^rf%»pr dchi-nu-ma, we searched. But the Past Participle f^nr: chitdh, searched, or the Reduplicated Perfect fa^aj: chichy-u^ they have searched, without the g nu. We call f% chi, the root, f^fj chinu, the base of the special tenses.

-$ 296. AND THE TEN CLASSES OP VERBS. 141

J 295. Verbal bases are first divided into two divisions : I. Bases which in the modified tenses end in *1 a. II. Bases which in the modified tenses end in any letter but W a.

This second division is subdivided into, II a. Bases which insert g nuy "9 u, or *ft nty between the root and the

terminations. II b. Bases which take the terminations without any intermediate element.

I. First Division. J 296. The first division comprises four classes:

1. The Bhu class (the first with native grammarians, and called by them

v^rf^ bhvddi, because the first verb in their lists is ^ bhd, to be).

a. iQ a is added to the last letter of the root.

b. The vowel of the root takes Guna, where possible (i.e. long or short t, u, r»,

if final ; short i, u, ri, (i, if followed by one consonant). Ex. yi budh, to know ; ^tvfiT bodh-a-ti, he knows. $£M, to be ; H^fir bhdv-a-ti,

he is.

Note — The accent in verbs of the Bhu class (as we know from the ancient Vedic language) rests on the radical vowel, except where it is drawn on the augment.

Many derivative verbs, — such as causatives, HmMiir bhdvdyati, he causes to be; desideratives, ^J?rflT bubhushati, he wishes to be, from *£bhu; intensives in the Atmane- pada, ^faild bebhidydte, he cuts much ; and denominatives, n*n«fii namasydti, he worships, ^ftiVdHlfa lohitdydti, he grows red, — follow this class.

2. The Tud class (the sixth with native grammarians, and called by them

U^rf^ tudddi, because the first root in their lists is ip tud, to strike).

a. ^r a is added to the last letter of the root.

b. Before this ^ a, final ^ i and ^ i are changed to ^ iy.

T u and ^l u to T^ uv.

^ri to ft^rty.

^ri to ^rjr ($ no).

Ex. "g^tud, to strike; ij^fif tud-d-ti. ft ri, to go; CUlTd riy-d-ti. \nd, to praise ; yMfcf nuv-d-ti. ^ mri, to die ; fa^ mriy-d-te. tf kri, to scatter ; foff^fw kir-d-ti*

Note — The accent in verbs of the Tud class rests on the intermediate ^? a j hence never Guna of the radical vowel.

3. The Div class (the fourth with native grammarians, and called by them

r^mf^ divddi, because the first root in their lists is f^divy to play), a. IT ya is added to the last letter of the root. Ex. t^; nah, to bind ; H^fri ndh-ya-ti. ^ budh, to awake ; "3«rffr budh-ya-te.

Note — The accent in verbs of the Div class rests on the radical vowel ; though there are traces to show that some verbs of this class had the accent originally on 1 ya.

SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES § 297-

4. The Chur class (the tenth with native grammarians, and called by them yiigf churddi, because the first root in their lists is ^ chur, to steal).

a. ^HT ay a is added to the last letter of the root.

b. If the root ends in a simple consonant, preceded by sr «, ^T a is

lengthened to ^n d. Ex. ^ dal, to cut ; ^l^^fd ddl-dya-ti, (many exceptions.)

c. If the root ends in a simple consonant, preceded by ^ i, -gr u, ^ rt, o£ #,

these vowels take Guna, while ^ri becomes $^ir.

Ex. fg^&fcA, to embrace ; %tnrflT 6lesh-dya-ti. ^ cMr, to steal ; ^Ulfff chor-dya-ti. ^ mrish, to endure ; *rl^W marsh-dya-te. cfi^ W£, to praise ; GR^S^rrr kirt-dya-ti.

d. Final ^i, ^, "3 u, "35^, ^H> an<i "^[r^ take Vriddhi.

Ex. fwyn,togrow old; ^ | m\ fajray-dya-ti. »ft m^, to walk; ifRnrflT mdy-dya-ti. ^ dhri, to hold; vn^rfK dhdr-dya-ti. v^pri, to fill ; ^RTfir pdr-dya-ti.

Note — Many, if not all roots arranged under this class by native grammarians, are secondary roots, and identical in form with causatives, denominatives, &c. This class differs from other classes, inasmuch as verbs belonging to it, keep their modificatory syllable ^HTaya throughout, in the unmodified as well as in the modified tenses, except in the Benedictive Par. and the Reduplicated Aorist. The accent rests on the first ^ a of ^R ay a.

II. Second Division.

J 297. The second division comprises all verbs which do not, in the special tenses, end in ^T a before the terminations.

It is a distinguishing feature of this second division that, before certain terminations, all verbs belonging to it require strengthening of their radical vowel, or if they take »J nu, ^ u, rft ni, strengthening of the vowels of these syllables. This strengthening generally takes place by means of Guna, but «ft ni is raised to *n nd in the Kri, and ^ n to *T na in the Rudh class.

We shall call the terminations which require strengthening of the inflective base, the weak terminations, and the base before them, the strong base ; and vice versd, the terminations which do not require strengthening of the base, the strong terminations, and the base before them, the weak base.

As a rule, the accent falls on the first vowel of strong terminations, or, if the terminations are weak, on the strong base, thus establishing throughout an equilibrium between base and termination.

-$ 299- AND THB TEN CLASSES OP VERBS.

II a. Bases which take g nu, lu, J 298. This first subdivision comprises three classes : I. The Su class (the fifth class with native grammarians, and called by

them ^rf^ svddi, because the first root in their lists is *| su). «J nu is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations, •ftwo before weak terminations.

Ex. g suy to squeeze out ; *frp: su-nu-mdfr, ist pers. plur. Pres.

^ffffa su-n6-mi, ist pers. sing. Pres.

a. The Tan class (the eighth class with native grammarians, and called by

them iMlty tanddi, because the first root in their lists is ir*^ tan). 7 u is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations, *ft o before weak terminations. Ex. JG^tan, to stretch; inpn tan-u-mdh, ist pers. plur. Pres.

rttftfa tan-6-mi9 ist pers. sing. Pres.

Note — All verbs belonging to this class end in »^n, except one, ^f kri, JiOfH karomi, I do. 3. The Kri class (the ninth with native grammarians, and called by them

ctylty kryddi, because the first root in their lists is "aft kri). •ft ni is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations, •H nd before weak terminations,

*{n before strong terminations beginning with vowels. Ex. "aft W, to buy; "aftarfa: kri-ni-mdfy, ist pers. plur. Pres.

kri-na-mi, ist pers. sing. Pres. kri-n-dnti, 3rd pers. plur. Pres.

II b. Bases to which the terminations are joined immediately. J 399. The second division comprises three classes :

i. The Ad class (the second class with native grammarians, and called by them ^ify adddi, because the first root in their lists is ^ ad, to eat).

a. The terminations are added immediately to the last letter of the base ;

and in the contact of vowels with vowels, vowels with consonants, consonants with vowels, and consonants with consonants, the phonetic rules explained above (§ 107—145) must be carefully observed.

b. The strong base before the weak terminations takes Guna where

possible ($ 296, i. b).

Ex. f?5^ lih, to lick : fc5TO lih-mdh, we lick ; ^ftr leh-mi, I lick ; Tyf^f lek-shi, thou lickest ($ 1 27) ; ctfte ttdhd, you lick (J 1 28) ; *c*<^ diet, thou lickedst ($ 1*8).

The accent is on the first vowel of the terminations, except in case of weak terminations, when the accent falls on the radical vowel.

144: SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS. § 299-

2. The Hu class (the third class with native grammarians, and called by them "Spftarf^ juhotyddi, because the first root in their lists is fr hut

a. The terminations are added as in the Ad class.

b. The strong base before the weak terminations takes Guna, where possible.

c. The root takes reduplication. (Rules of Reduplication, § 302.)

Ex. ? hu, to sacrifice : *J§H! ju-hu-mdh, we sacrifice ; sj^frfa ju-ho-mi,. I sacrifice. (Pan. vi. i, 192.)

The intensive verbs, conjugated in the Parasmaipada, follow this class.

The accent is on the first syllable of the verb, if the terminations are weak, likewise if the terminations are strong, but begin with a vowel. Ex. <f*nfff dddhdti; ^vfff dddhati (Pan. vi. i,. 189—190). Whether this rule extends to the Optative Atmanepada is doubtful.. We find in the Rig-veda both dddhita and dadhttd. Prof. Benfey, who at first accentuated dadhitd, now places the accent on the first syllable, like Boehtlingk and Bopp. The Agama siyut is, no doubt, avidyamanavat svaravidhau (Pan. in. 1,3, vart. 2); but the question is whether tta is to be treated as ajadi, beginning with a vowel, or whether the termination is ta with Agama i. I adopt the former view, and see it confirmed by the Pratyudaharana given in vi. i, 189. For if ydt of dad-ydt is no longer ajadi, then tia, in ddd-ita must be ajadi on the same ground. The reduplicated verbs bhi> hri, bhri, hu, mad, jan, dhan, daridrd, jdgri have the Udatta on the syllable preceding the terminations, if the terminations are weak. Ex. fwfff bibhdrti, but fwfif UbJirati (Pan. vi. i, 192).

3. The Rudh class (the seventh class with native grammarians, and called by them ^vrf^ rudhddi, because the first root in their lists is ^ rudh, T^qffg rundddhi, to obstruct).

a. The terminations are added as in the Ad class.

b. Between the radical vowel and the final consonant <{n is inserted, which

in the strong base before weak terminations is raised to 7f na. Ex. *[*{yuj9 to join : gr*n yu-n-j-mdh, we join ; g»lft*T yu-nd-j-mi, I join.

The accent falls on tf na, wherever it appears, unless it is attracted by the augment.

First Division.

Bhu class, with native grammarians, Bhvadi, I class. Tud class, Tudadi, VI class.

Div class, — — Divadi, IV class.

Chur class, — Churadi, X class.

Second Division.

Su class, with native grammarians, Svadi, V class. Tan class, Tanadi, VIII class.

Kri class, — Kryadi, IX class.

Ad class, — Adadi, II class.

Hu class, Juhotyadi, III class.

Rudh class, — — Rudhadi, VII class.

-§ 302. AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. 145

CHAPTER IX.

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

J 300. Before we can leave the subject which occupies us at present* viz; the preparation of the root previous to its assuming the terminations, we have to consider two processes, the Augment and the Reduplication, modifications of the root with which we are familiar in Greek, and which in Sanskrit as well as in Greek form the distinguishing features of certain tenses (Imperfect, Aorist, Conditional, and Perfect) in every verb.

$301. Roots beginning with consonants take short ^ d as their initial augment. This ^r a has the accent. Thus from iftbudh, Present Vtviftr btidhdmi ; Imperfect waftv dbodham.

Roots beginning with vowels always take Vriddhi, the irregular result of the combination of the augment with the initial vdwels. (Pan. vi. i, 90.)

*T a with ^r a, or ^T a, = wr d.

vst a with ^ iy \ f, ^ e, or ^ ai, = ^ ai.

^t a with T u, ^K d, ^ft o, or ^ft au, = ^ au.

^T a with ^ ri, or ^ri, = ^TP£ dr.

From ^^arch, ^rtfir archati, he praises, ^i^drchat, he praised. From ^T iksh, ^?r ikshate, he sees, ^Tf aikshatay he saw. From ^undy ^'nfrl unatti, he wets, ^ftq^aunat, he wetted. From i$ri, ^a[fir richchhatij he goes, ^r&l(drchchhat, he went.

In the more ancient Sanskrit, as in the more ancient Greek, the augment is frequently absent. In the later Sanskrit, too, it has to be dropt after the negative particle *n md (Pan. vi. 4, 74). ITT *fT^ <*mTi^ md bhavdn kdrshit, Let not your Honour do this! or *rr ^ «inftTwza sma karot. May he not do it!

Reduplication.

§ 302. Reduplication takes place in Sanskrit not only in the reduplicated perfect, but likewise in all verbs of the Hu class. Most of the rules of reduplication are the same in forming the base of the perfect of all verbs, and in forming the special base of the verbs of the Hu class. These will be stated first; afterwards those that are peculiar either to the reduplicatiori of the perfect or to that of the verbs of the Hu class.

The reduplication in intensive and desiderative verbs and in one form of the aorist will have to be treated separately.

146 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. § 303-

General Rules of Reduplication.

$ 303. The first syllable of a root (i. e. that portion of it which ends with a vowel) is repeated. ^ budh=z'3^^bubudh. v$J)hu is exceptional in forming ^t^babhu. (Pan.

vn. 4, 73.)

$ 304. Aspirated letters are represented in reduplication by their cor- responding unaspirated letters.

fas bhid, to cut, = fwfa^ bibhid. T^dhu, to shake, =^dudhu.

§ 305. Gutturals are represented in reduplication by their corresponding palatals ; ^ h by *(j. (Pan. vn. 4, 62.)

^Z kut, to sever, = ^^7 chukut.

to dig, = ^^R[ chakhan. , to go, = as, to laugh, =

$ 306. If a root begins with more than one consonant, the first only is reduplicated.

ipi kru$, to shout, = ^JST chukruf. fqpikship, to throw, = faffcp^ chikship.

$ 307. If a root begins with a sibilant followed by a tenuis or aspirated tenuis, the tenuis only is reduplicated.

^J stu, to praise, = "$% tushtu (J 103, i). W^stan, to sound, = irer^ tastan. ??nl spardh, to strive, = '^cf^paspardh. WT sthdj to stand, = if^n tasthd. ^3g\ Schyut, to drop, = ^gi^ chu&chyut. But ^ff 5mn, to pine, = TTCR sasmri.

§ 308. If the radical vowel, whether final or medial, is long, it is shortened in the reduplicative syllable.

i?T^ gdh, to enter, = »TTTT| jagdh. ^ kri, to buy, = fsnft chikri. ^ stid, to strike, = ^^ sushud.

§ 309. If the radical (not final) vowel is TJ e or ^ ai, it becomes ^ i; if it is ^ft o or ^ft auy it becomes ^ u.

%^ sev, to worship, = ftr^ sishev. ^c^ dhauk, to approach, = J^cfi dudhauk.

§ 310. Roots with final *e, %ai, ^ffro, are treated like roots ending in a, taking ^r a in the reduplicative syllable. ^ dhe, to feed, = ^ft dadhau. ^ gai, to sing, =s ^ft ^o, to sharpen, =

-$312.

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

147

uh.) (zu.)

(fvidh.)

f 311. The following roots are slightly irregular on account of the semivowels which they contain, and which are liable to be changed into vowels. (This change is called Samprasdrana.) Pan. vi. i, 17. BOOT. FIRST PERS. SING. EEDUPL. PERF. WEAK FORM*. WEAKEST Fomt-

(dja, to sacrifice, (for iprnr yaydja.) ^ tj. uvdcha, to speak. ^J^ tick.

uvdda9 to say. ^ dd.

uvdpa, to sow. fo, to wish.

vas = TTW uvdsa, to dwell.

vah = ytfig uvdha, to carry. ^ dh.

uvdya, to weave.

vivydcha, to surround.

= f^nv vivyddha, to strike. fafa^ vividh.

= fzpar^ vivyathe (Pan. vn. 4, 68). f^T^ vivyath.

= f^HlM sushvdpa, to sleep. $u$dva, to swell^f. vivydya, to cover. ft^rt riv?.

w, to grow old. ;a, to call (Pan. vi. i, 33). = f&pipye,to grow fat (Pan. vi. i, 29). — -^j^jagrdha9 to take.

= TO^ vavrdscha,to cut (Pan. vi. i, 1 7). ^^ vavrtich. paprdchchha9 to ask. TRF&paprachch

babhrdjja, to fiy. ^il^ babhrajj.

In the last three verbs the weak form in the reduplicated perfect is pro- tected against Samprasarana by the final double consonant. (Pan. i. 2, 5.)

Roots beginning with ^ va9 but ending in double consonants, do not change ^ va to ^ u. Ex. ^^ vavrite; ^^ vavridht.

J 312. Roots beginning with short ^ a, and ending in a single consonant, contract ^i a + ^ a into 5TI d.

^F£ ad, to eat, = <«u<{ arf.

* The weak forms appear in all persons of the reduplicated perfect where neither Vriddhi nor Guna is required.

t The weakest forms of these verbs do not belong to the reduplicated perfect, but have been added as useful hereafter for the formation of the past participle, the benedictive, the passive, &c.

J ^T{vay is a substitute for ^ve, in the reduplicated perfect (Pan. n. 4, 41). If that sub- stitution does not take place, then ^ve forms ^T vavau, ^t vavuh (Pan. vi. i, 40).

(1 Pan. vi. i, 38, 39. IF Or f^ITO ^svdya (Pan. vi. i, 30).

U 2

148 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. § 3T3"-

§ 313. Roots beginning with short ^r a, and ending with more than one consonant, prefi^ ^T^dn. (Pan. vii. 4, 71.) ^H^ arch = ^rt dndrch. (Also ^rsi as (Su), ^T«!^r dna&e.) Pan. vii. 4, 73.

J 314. The root ^j n forms the base of the reduplicated perfect as WT^ dr. Other roots beginning with ^ ri prefix w^ara. (Pan. vii. 4, 71.)

^^r^', to obtain, = ^TPpf dn-rij. "^p^ridh, to thrive, = ^TRJ>^a/zn^» These roots are treated in fact as if they were 'W^arch, -zw^ardh, &c.

§ 315. Roots beginning with ^ i or "su (not prosodially long), contract ^ + ^ i + i and tf + "$ u + u into ^ i and ^R u ; but if the radical ^i or ^r u take Guna or Vriddhi, i{ y and ^ v are inserted between the reduplicative syllable and the base. (Pan. vi. 4, 78.)

^^A = ^g: ish-dtuh, they two have gone. — ^^(iy-esh-a (Guna), I have gone. ^^ ukh = •grwg: ukh-atuh) they two have withered. = T^ftsf uv-okh-a (Guna), I have withered.

As to roots which cannot be reduplicated or are otherwise irregular, see the rujes given for the formation of the Reduplicated and Periphrastic Perfect.

Special Rules of Reduplication.

§ 3 1 6. So far the process of reduplication would be the same, whether applied to the bases of the Reduplicated Perfect or to those of the Hu class. But there are some points on which these two classes of reduplicated bases differ; viz.

1. In the Reduplicated Perfect, radical ^ ri, -^ri, whether final or medial,

are represented in reduplication by ^r a.

2. In the bases of the Hu class, final -^ri and ^ri (they do not occur as

medial) are represented in reduplication by \i.

REDUPLICATED PERFECT. f Hu CLASS. PRESENT, &c.

V[ bhri, to bear, = -qvrn: babhdra. ^ bhri = fWiff bibhdrti. ^ sri, to go, = TOCTC sasdra. ^ sri — ftmfS sisarti.

£ hriy to take, = vf^Ttijahdra. ^ hri = f^fS jiharti.

The root ^ri, to go, forms ^rf§ iy-arti; ^pn, to fill, fWa piparti.

§ 317. The three verbs f^^nij, f&^vij, and f^ vish of the Hu class take Guna in tfr$ red^plicated; syUahle. (Pan. vii. 4, 75.) f*1^ nij, to wash, ^T% nenekti, %f^ nenikte; f%*tvij, to separate, ^rf^ vevekti;

f%\vish, to pervade, TTJ? veceshti.

f 318. The two verbs TT ma, to measure, and i?T hd, to go, of the Hu class take ^z in the reduplicative syllable. (Pan. vii. 4, 76.)

*TT ma, (H*flri mimitej ^T hd, f*T%fft jiMtt.

§ 319. Certain roots change their initial consonant if they are reduplicated. *»«^ han, to kill, *in\*ijaff1idna. Likewise in the desiderative ftTO^rfw jighdmsati, and the

intensive «nT3W jahghanydte. (Pan. vii. 3, 55.)

ft[ hi, to send (Su), f*m\<*jigh$yq. Likewise in the desiderative f»nrt^fTT jighishati, and the intensive W*fNTiT jeghiydte. (Pan. vii. 3, 56.)

-$ 3^1- AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. 149

ftf ji, to conquer, (Vl'IIH jigdya. Likewise in the desiderative fwfMn jfyishati ; but not in the intensive, which is always ^hftTTTT jejtydte. (Pan. vn. 3, 57.)

fa c/tt, to gather, has optionally P«i>«u«4 chichdya or P^^IM chikaya. The same option applies to the desiderative, but in the intensive we have ^W)«in chechtydte only. (Pan. vii. 3, 58.)

Terminations.

J 320. After having explained how the verbal roots are modified in ten different ways before they receive the terminations of the four special tenses, the Present, Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative, we give a table of the terminations for these so-called special or modified tenses and moods.

$ 331. The terminations for the modified tenses, though on the whole the same for all verbs, are subject to certain variations, according as the verbal bases take ^? a (First Division), or »J nu, ^ut"^ni (Second Division, A.), or nothing (Second Division, B.) between themselves and the terminations. Instead of giving the table of terminations according to the system of native gramma- rians, or according to that of comparative philologists, and explaining the real or fanciful changes which they are supposed to have undergone in the different classes of verbs, it will be more useful to give them in that form in which they may mechanically be attached to each verbal base. The beginner should commit to memory the actual paradigms rather than the different sets of terminations. Instead of taking ^rre dthe as the termination of the * 2nd pers. dual Atm., and learning that the ^TT d of ^rr$ dthe is changed to ^i after bases in ^T a (Pan. vn. 2, 81), it is simpler to take ^ ithe as the termination in the First Division ; but still simpler to commit to memory such forms as «ftvvi bodhethe, fgmuj dvishdthe, ftwivj mimdthe, without asking at first any questions as to how they came to be what they are.

FIRST DIVISION. Bhd, Tud, Div, and Chur Classes. PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

Present. Imperf. Optative. Imperat. Present. Imperfect. Optative. Imperative.

i.^&faamt ^m ^Tjiyam^&f^ani ^i ^* ^ft'ya ^e

2.f*si lh ^lih -* $se *m thdh J^ttl ithdh ^ sva

3. fart 1(t ^(it ijta* ^te If ta ^W ita Iff tarn,

^Rava "^iva ^T^T ava W^avahe W<4 fi$ avahi ^f^ irahi ^R^ arahai ff tarn ^lf itam "ft tarn ^ ithe ^TT ithdm ^ttlRiydthdmJpRithdm

3. 1ft tah Iff tarn ^iff it dm WT tdm ^n ite ^iff it dm ^Minf iydtdm ^TTT it dm

i.^Rlamah ^Rama ^Rima ^>T ama ^HR^amahe ^SKf^amahi ^f^imahi WH$_ amahai

z.lftha If ta ^if«Va If ta U& dhve *4 dhvam ^131 idhvam l4 dhvam

^ nfe nT nta iran nff ntdm

* In the second and third persons TR1(tdt may be used as termination after all verbs, if the sense is benedictive.

150

AUGMENT, EEDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

SECOND DIVISION.

Su, Tan, Kri, Ad, Hu9 and Rudh Classes. PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

Present. Imperfect. Optative. Imperative. Present. Imperfect. Optative.

Imperative.

I.

Uf dhvam ^TrTf atdm

The terminations enclosed in squares are the weak, i. e. unaccented terminations which require strengthening of the base.

Note i — When f^ hi is added immediately to the final consonant of a root (in the Ad, Rudh, or Hu classes), it is changed to fv dhi (Pan. vi. 4, 101. See No. 162). The verb J hu, though ending in a vowel, takes fqdhi instead of f^ hi, for the sake of euphony. (Pan. vi. 4, 101.)

Kri verbs ending in consonants form the 2nd pers. sing. imp. in WT ana. (See No. 155. Pan. in. i, 83.)

In the 2nd pers. sing. imp. Parasm. verbs of the Su and Tan classes take no termination, except when ^ u is preceded by a conjunct consonant. (See No. 177.)

Note 2 — In the 3rd pers. plur. pres. and imper. Parasm. verbs of the Hu class and ^rvq^f abhyasta, i. e. reduplicated bases, take ^rfir ati and ^nj atu.

Note 3 — In the 3rd pers. plur. imp. Parasm. verbs of the Hu class, redu- plicated bases, and ft^ vid, to know, take 7: uh,, before which, verbs ending in a vowel, require Guna. "gt uh is used optionally after verbs in *&\ a, and after f&^dvish, to hate. (Pan. 111.4, 109—112.)

$ 322. By means of these terminations the student is able to form the Present, Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepade of all regular verbs in Sanskrit ; and any one who has clearly understood how the verbal bases are prepared in ten different ways for receiving their terminations, and who will attach to these verbal bases the terminations as given above, according to the rules of Sandhi, will have no difficulty in writing out for himself the paradigms of any Sanskrit verb in four of the most important tenses and moods, both in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. Some verbs, however, are irregular in the formation of their base ; these must be learnt from the Dhatupatha.

$322'

151

I

'i

? £ i

I

r

o

•§

152

* -8

(-H .0;

ji

<§

ve

r

ifkttll

g

I

rim

&

153

q

Oi o5

05 ^

I

t

»

lltlil

^

1111 M II

'I,

1

.Hill

n

ts:l

154

PS ^1

PL,

S'xs !<s)h« *

f 1 SI •

§ ^ te

ar ^ l^>^ fa

1 r

t

o

-g

I

3-

•§

">o *|^

mil

-i

v!

4

-•S .8 s- -t^e

•*— ^ fl — \<s> ^ ^ "r" ^

HilllMJ

&

>•§

155

<

Q <tj

—

W J5 <Jl

§ H «<

i i

t-

fit! I

iiti!.

'5

'%

o>

<:

2 <%

ft*

(*

l

immmsi

-41

15 fl

««lH*l

1

5

1

1

o

09

I

lj

I

1 1 el <!

I

.

ri

'^

sri

Pi

156

I a

i

I

tvr

- QJ

7 ^

g g

I s

« 1 ^ & $

•§ ^ I4 % o

'.g 7! '?|

vs P1 ^e W ^

§ .§

$3*2.

157

P

2

a,

W '

.1

6-

^ *».£

r-

•g •Kr'TS

* v?

~<

? £»

§» r 5? J ^ ^ * ^^5 I

ir^S

•S V-e

2 o

<^-

Bl

1^1 P^

'S3 «l

3 B«

1

~ & ^ J5 X2 fc

If Hi!

xe ^2

=8

J?S lir^ ^ KS fe)^

P

158

a

't

£

•Q 1045

4

•5

'is

-1

-J

GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

CHAPTER X.

GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

$323. In the tenses which remain, the Reduplicated Perfect, the Peri- phrastic Perfect, the First and Second Aorist, the Future, the Conditional, the Periphrastic Future, and Benedictive, the distinction of the ten classes vanishes. All verbs are treated alike, to whatever class they belong in the modified tenses ; and the distinguishing features, the inserted »j nu, *u97ft ni, &c., are removed again from the roots to which they had been attached in the Present, the Imperfect, the Optative, and Imperative. Only the verbs of the Chur class preserve their ^R dya throughout, except in the Aorist and Benedictive.

Reduplicated Perfect.

J 324. The root in its primitive state is reduplicated. The rules of reduplication have been given above. ($ 302—319.)

$ 325. The Reduplicated Perfect can be formed of all verbs, except

1. Monosyllabic roots which begin with any vowel prosodially long but

*T a or m d: such as fr id, to praise ; *vedh, to grow ; jp^indh, to light ; 'S^und, to wet.

2. Polysyllabic roots, such as 'l*w&( chakds, to be bright.

3. Verbs of the Chur class and derivative verbs, such as Causatives,

Desideratives, Intensives, Denominatives.

J 326. Verbs which cannot form the Perfect by reduplication, form the Periphrastic Perfect by means of composition. (J 340.)

So do likewise ^TI day, to pity, &c., ^n^ ay, to go, ^T^ as, to sit down (Pan. in. i, 37), WR(kds, to cough (Pan. in. I, 35); also WR(kds, to shine (Sar.); optionally ^re ush, to burn, (^fai oshdm), fas vid, to know, (fe^T viddm), *TFJ.M0T»» to wake, fapvftjdgardm, Pan. in. i, 38); and, after taking redupli- cation, tft bhi (fswrnbibhaydm),-%thri (^^jihraydm)^ ^ bhri and J hu ("SJ^T juhavdm. Pan. in. i, 39).

The verb ^ drnu, to cover, although polysyllabic, allows only of drnundva as its Perfect.

^5 richh, to fail, although its base in the Perfect ends in two consonants, forms only VMM^ dnarchchha. It is treated, in fact, as if ^^archchh. ($31 3.)

Terminations of the Reduplicated Perfect. SINGULAR.

2.

^ a
^Hitha

ishe

160 GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

DUAL.

1. ^ iva

2. ^rgt athufy

3. ^BTgj a£w#

PLURAL. i. ^IT ima

ivahe

imahe

or

These terminations are here given, without any regard to the systems of native or comparative grammarians, in that form in which they may be mechanically added to the reduplicated roots. The rules on the omission of the initial ^ i of certain terminations will be given below.

§ 327. The accent falls on the terminations in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, except in the three persons singular Parasmaipada. In these the accent falls on the root, which therefore is strengthened according to the following rules :

1. Vowels capable of Guna, take Guna throughout the singular, if followed

by one consonant.

fa^ bhid9 f^T^ bibhed-a, fsftf^q bibhed-itha, f^T^ bibhed-a. **F^budh, «j^fai bubddh-at ^ftftTO bubodh-itha, ^r«rtv bubddh-a. But *fatjiv, a long medial vowel not being liable to Guna, forms P»f»flcf jijw-a, PH jflfavjjy iv-itha, P*|»fl^ jijiv-a.

2. Final vowels take Vriddhi or Guna in the first, Guna in the second,

Vriddhi only in the third person singular.

nindy-a or PHHH nindy-a9 PHH^ ninetha or PfHP*4"i nindy-itha, ninay-a.

3. ^r a if followed by a single consonant, takes Vriddhi or Guna in the first,

Guna in the second, Vriddhi only in the third person singular.

^ hanS3&K*{jaghdn-a or Wttjaghdn-a, ^qfaRjaghdn-itha, v{*FRJaghdn-a.

Note — If the second person singular Parasmaipada is formed by ^ftha, the accent falls on the root ; if with ^ZJ itha, the accent may fall on any syllable, but generally it is on the termination. In this case the radical vowel may, in certain verbs, be without Guna, f%*(vij, f^3*1viveja, but P<P«=I PiT^T vivijitha. (Pan. 1.2,2; 3.)

§ 328. As there is a tendency to strengthen the base in the three persons

singular Parasmaipada, so there is a tendency to weaken the base, under

certain circumstances, before the other terminations of the Perfect, Parasmai

and Atmanepada. Here the following rules must be observed :

i. Roots like impat, i. e. roots in which ^ a is preceded and followed by a

single consonant, and which in their reduplicated syllable repeat the

initial consonant without any change (this excludes roots beginning

with aspirates and with gutturals; roots beginning with 'Zv, and

-f 330. GENERAL OE UNMODIFIED TENSES. 161

as* and ^ dad are likewise excepted), contract such forms as into Vl^pet, before the accented terminations, (including , Pan. vi. 4, 120, 121.) repack, TF&H papdktha, but ^fan pechithd, ^fqH pechimd, ^: pechufr. W^ to, dfdvi tenithd, Trf^Tf tenimd, ?hj: te/iM/r. a. Roots mentioned in $ 311 take then- weak form. ^ vah, 44I£ uvdha, <3lf^T uhimd. q^vach, TTT^ uvdcha, IPj: uchiih. Note — The roots TJ M, Hfc^Aa/, ^^bhaj, W^trap, TBF^srath (Pan. vi. 4, 122), and TT^r4c?A, in the sense of 'killing' (123), form their Reduplicated Perfect like ifl^pat. The roots »J jrf, Sn^&Aram, and ^5^/ras (124) may do so optionally; and likewise iPFF^Aan, TT3Trq/, WT^iAr^/, WTS^bhrds, VfTS^bhlM, ^Ef^syam, ^(^svan.

3. The roots Tp^gam, ^hant *f\jan, T&^khan, TR^ghas drop their radical

vowel. (Pan. vi. 4, 98.)

Ttf^gam, *{n*$jagmdtuh. '%z{han, "*m$ jaghnatuh.. ^^khanf^yf.chakh- ndtuh. TT^ ghas, »T^: jakshdtuh.

4. Roots ending in more than one consonant, particularly in consonants

preceded by a nasal (Pan. i. 2, 5), such as wi^manth, H^*ra/?w, &c», do not drop their nasal in the weakening forms. Ex. 3rd pers. dual : WSjtfj: babhrajjdtufy ; *nfa|: mamanthdtufy ; if&Rt sasramst.

5. The verbs ^^ranth, ij^granth, ^ dambh, and^^^va/i;, however, maybe

weakened, and form 'staij: krethatuh, ?T*np grethdtuh, ^^15: debhdtuk, imA sasvaje (loss of nasal and e, cf. Pan. i. 2, 6, vart.). But according to some grammarians the forms $|<&jvjg: sa&ranthdtuh &c. are more correct. J 329. Roots ending in ^srr a, and many roots ending in diphthongs, drop their final vowel before all terminations beginning with a vowel (Pan. vi. 4, 64). In the general tenses, verbs ending in diphthongs are treated like verbs ending in WT d.

The same roots take ^ au for the termination of the first and third persons singular Parasmaipada.

^T da, ^ dad-au, ^f^ dad-ivd, ^5: dad-dthuh, ^t dad-ire. § mlai, TtTjft maml-au, *rf^ maml-ivd, irygt maml-dthuh, nf|ft maml-ire*. Except ^vyet ^ hve, &c.; see $ 311.

J 330. Roots ending in ^ i, ^ iy ^ rit if preceded by one consonant, change their vowels, before terminations beginning with vowels, into *T y, ^ r.

If preceded by more than one consonant, they change their vowels into (§ 221.)

I Prasada, p. 13 a. In a later passage

the Prasada (p. 17 b) decides for both, ^RJ/as and

f ^ ri forms the perf. ^fR dra, 3rd pers. dual ^TO£ drdtuh. ^\ richh forms xim^a dndrchchha, 3rd pers. dual ^fM^g! dnarchchhdtuh. (Pan. vn. 4, 1 1.)

162 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. § 331-

Roots ending in 7 u, ^ u, change these vowels always into f*(w).

Most roots ending in ^ri, change the vowel to "^.ar (Pan. vn. 4, u).

niny-ivd, we two have led. fa £ri, fyfeiftra 6i&riy-ivd, we two have gone. *f kri, ^m^l chakr-dthuh, you two have done. ^ stri, ri**K^t tastar-dthuh, you two have spread. 5 yw, ^fJTJ! yuyuv-dthufy, you two have joined. ^ stu, "^f^l tushtuv-dthuh, you two have praised, eg #/•£, p chakar-dthufy, you two have scattered.

CHAPTER XL

THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i.

$331. Before we can proceed to form the paradigms of the Reduplicated Perfect by means of joining the terminations with the root, it is necessary to consider the intermediate ^i, which in the Reduplicated Perfect and in the other unmodified tenses has to be inserted between the verbal base and the terminations, originally beginning with consonants. The rules which require, allow, or prohibit the insertion of this ^ i form one of the most difficult chapters of Sanskrit grammar, and it is the object of the following paragraphs to simplify these rules as much as possible.

The general tendency, and, so far, the general rule, is that the terminations of the unmodified or general tenses, originally beginning with consonants, insert the vowel ^ i between base and termination ; and from an historical point of view it would no doubt be more correct to speak of the rules which require the addition of an intermediate ^ i than (as has been done in $ 326) to represent the ^ i as an integral part of the terminations, and to give the rules which require its omission. But as the intermediate S{ * has prevailed in the vast majority of verbs, it will be easier, for practical purposes, to state the exceptions, i. e. the cases in which the ^ Hs not employed, instead of denning the cases in which it must or may be inserted.

One termination only, that of the 3rd pers. plur. Perf. Atm., ^tire, keeps the intermediate 35 i under all circumstances. In the Veda, however, this 3[ i, too, has not yet become fixed, and is occasionally omitted; e. g. gpr duduh-re.

* In Sf fri, <[ dri, and "^ pri a further shortening may take place; ^KJJ! sasardtuk being shortened to $RT§i sasrdtuh, &c. (Pan.vn. 4, 12.)

-$ 332. THE INTERMEDIATE ^ t. 163

Let it be remembered then, that there are three points to be considered :

i. When is it necessary to omit the \i?

3. When is it optional to insert or to omit the ^ i ?

3. When is it necessary to insert the \ i ?

For the purposes of reading Sanskrit, all that a student is obliged to know is, When it is necessary to omit the ^ i. Even for writing Sanskrit this knowledge would be sufficient, for in all cases except those in which the omission is necessary, the ^ i may safely be inserted, although, according to views of native grammarians, it may be equally right to omit it. A student therefore, and particularly a beginner, is safe if he only knows the cases in which ^ i is necessarily omitted, nor will anything but extensive reading enable him to know the verbs in which the insertion is either optional or necessary. Native grammarians have indeed laid down a number of rules, but both before and after Panini the language of India has changed, and even native grammarians are obliged to admit that on the optional insertion of ^ i authorities differ; that is to say, that the literary language of India differed so much in different parts of that enormous country, and at different periods of its long history, that no rules, however minute, would suffice to register all its freaks and fancies.

§ 332. Taking as the starting-point the general axiom (Pan. vu. 2, 35) that every termination beginning originally with a consonant (except ^ y) takes the ^ •", which we represent as a portion of the termination, we proceed to state the exceptions, i. e. the cases in which the ^t must on no account be inserted, or, as we should say, must be cut off from the beginning of the termination.

The following verbs, which have been carefully collected by native grammarians (Pan. vu. 2, 10), are not allowed to take the intermediate ^ « in the so-called general or unmodified tenses, before terminations or affixes beginning originally with a consonant (except *(y). (Note — The reduplicated perfect and its participle in ^^rcrs are not affected by these rules ; see § 334.)

1. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^f[d.

2. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^ t, except ft* sri, to attend (21, 31)*; fa 4vi,to grow

(23,41). (Note — ftRsm*, to laugh, must take ^ » in the Desiderative. Pan. vu. 2, 74-)

3. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^f, except ^ df, to fly (22, 72 ; 26, 26. anuddtta), and

$ft si, to rest (24, 22).

4. All monosyllabic roots ending in *5u, except *fyu, to mix (24, 23; not 31,9); ^rw,

to sound (24, 24); "jjnw, to praise (24, 26; 28, 104?); TSJfoAt/, to sound (24,27); T9JJ kshnu, to sharpen (24, 28). ^ snu, to flow (24, 29), takes ^« in Parasmaipada (Pan. vu. 2, 36). (Note — *J stu, to praise, and *} sw, to pour, take ^ » in the First Aorist Parasmaipada. Pan. vu. 2, 72.)

* These figures refer to the Dhatupaflia inWestergaard's Radices Linguae Sanscrit*, 1841.

Y 2

164 THE INTERMEDIATE i.

332-

5. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^Jn", except ^t?n, to choose (31, 38).

Important exception : in the Fut. and Cond. in ^T sya, all verbs in ^J ri take ^ i (Pan.

vn. 2, 70). ^ svri, to sound, may take ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 44). ^ bhri, to carry, may take ^ i in the

Desider. (Pan. vn. 2, 49). ^ dri, to regard, >jc?An, to hold, and ^n, to go, take

^ i in the Desider. (Pan. vn. 2, 74, 75). In the Benedictive and First Aorist Atmanepada verbs ending in ^ ri and beginning

with a conjunct consonant may take ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 43).

6. All monosyllabic roots ending in TJ e, ^ ai, ^ft o.

Thereforej with few exceptions, as mentioned above, all monosyllabic roots ending in vowels, except the vowels ^5 u and ^ ri, must not take ^ i.

7. Of roots ending in cjf Jc, TfT^ fak, to be able (26, 78; 27, 15).

8. Of roots ending in ^ ch, ^f^pach, to cook (23, 27); *^vach, to speak (24, 55); ipf

much, to loose (28, 136); fa^sich, to sprinkle (28, 140); ft^n'cA, to leave (29, 4); 'fa^wcA, to separate (29, 5).

9. Of roots ending in "^ chh, Tf^prachh, to ask (28, 120). It must take ^ i in the Desider.

(Pan. vn. 2, 75).

10. Of roots ending in *(J, W^svanj, to embrace (23, 7); fV^tyaj, to leave (23, 17); ^T5T sanj, to adhere (23, 18); ^(bhaj, to worship (23, 29); T^ranj, to colour (23, 30; 36, 58); TS^yo;, to sacrifice (23, 33); f^^nij, to clean (25, n); f^w/, to separate (25, 12; not 28, 9, or 29, 23); [Kas'. ^mri;]; *[*{yuj, to meditate (26, 68), to join (29, 7); *n^sn)', to let off (26, 69; 28, 121); ^^bhrajj, to bake (28, 4, except Desider.) j Tr^majf/, to dip (28, 122); *^*{ruj, to break (28, 123); V[*{bhuj, to bend (28, 124), to protect (29, 17); lfc(bhafij, to break (29, 16).

1 1. Of roots ending in ^ d, "^ had, to evacuate (23, 8) ; ^^ skand, to step (23, 10) ; ^ ad, to eat (24, i) j ^pad, to go (26, 60) ; f&^khid, to be distressed, &c. (26, 61 ; 28, 142 ; 29, 12); "fa^w'eJ, to be (26, 62); "fe^sm'd, to sweat (26, 79); "g^tac?, to strike (28, i) ; "55 nud, to push (28, 2 ; 28, 132) ; ^ sad, to droop (28, 133) ; ^ sad, to perish (28, 134); f^vid, to find (28, 138? 29, 13; not 24, 56); fo^bhid, to cut (29, 2); f^ chhid, to divide (29, 3) ; T5H* kshud, to pound (29, 6).

12. Of roots ending in V(dh, *3p(budh, to know (26, 63) ; Ijftyudh, to fight (26, 64) ; ^ rudh,

with ^5T5J aww, to love (26, 65), to keep off (29, i); TT^rddh, to grow (26, 71; 27, 16); ^H(»ya^, to strike (26, 72); "^fcrwdA, to be angry (26, 80); ^1 kshudh, to be hungry (26, 81), except Part. "WfVrT kshudhita and Ger. ASlfVlr4l kshudhitvd (Pan. vn. 2, 52); ^JVswdA, to clean (26, 82); ftr^sz'dA, to succeed (26, 83); ^TTVsadA, to achieve (27, 16) ; ^6awc/A, to bind (31, 37).

13. Of roots ending in r^w, JR^han, to kill (24, 2), except the Fut. and Cond. (Pan. vn. 2,

70); likewise its substitute 'Q^badhj *&[man, to think (26, 67).

14. Of roots ending in \p, fft*{tip, to pour (10, i ?) ; 1£{srip, to go (23, 14) ; Jf^tap, to heat

(23, 16; 26, 50); STU/op, to swear (23, 31 ; 26, 59); 'SRvap, to sow (23, 34); svap, to sleep (24, 60) ; ''Srr^ap, to reach (27, 14) ; f^Jcship, to throw (28, 5) ; to cut (28, 137) ; f&{lip, to anoint (28, 139) ; °&^chhup, to touch (28, 125). (Note — fflj/np and ^^drip, which are generally included, may take ^ «, according to Pan. vii. 2, 45.)

15. Of roots ending in >T bh, t&(rabh, to desire (23, 5) ; "&*Xlabh, to take (23, 6) ; T*T yabh,

coire(23, n).

_$ 333- THE INTERMEDIATE J t. 165

16. Of roots ending in *^ro, T^ram, to play (20, 23) ; «T^nam, to incline (23, 12);

to cease (23, 15). But these three take ^ t in Aor. Par. (Pan. vn. 2, 73). If^cm, to go (23, 13), but it takes ^« before ^* of Put., Cond., and Desider. Par. (Pan. vn. 2, 58). Also W^kram, to step (13, 31), in Atm. (Pan. vn. 2, 36).

17. Of roots ending in 1{4, "J^Jtri^, to shout (20, 26) ; ^J^rfftl, to see (23, 19) ; $J(daih£,

to bite (23, 20) j fo&S^Ji/, to be small (26, 70; 28, 127); ft^rftV, to show (28, 3); , to hurt (28, 126); ft^rtf, to hurt (28, 126); Fpjaprtf, to touch (28, 128); , to enter (28, 130) ; iJSJmrtf, to rub (28, 131).

18. Of roots ending in "^sA, ff^krish, to draw (23, 21 ; 28, 6) ; ffr^tvish, to shine (23, 32) ;

fg^dvish, to hate (24, 3) ; ft^vtsA, to pervade (25, 13), to separate (31, 54; not 17, 47) J ^push, to nourish (26, 73 ; not 17, 50) j Jjf{4ush, to dry (26, 74) ; Tfttush, to please (26, 75) ; J^dusA, to spoil (26, 76) ; fe^tftsA, to embrace (26, 77); fjf^uA, to distinguish (29, 14) ; fq^pish, to pound (29, 15).

19. Of roots ending in ^s, ^^t?as, to dwell (23, 36), except Part. ^Cnn; ushitah and Ger.

TfoFTT ushitvd (Pan. vn. 2, 52) ; T&^ghas, to eat (17, 65, as substitute for W^cwJ).

20. Of roots ending in ^ A, ^? ruA, to grow (20, 29) ; ^ dah, to burn (23, 22) ; fo^ miA,

to sprinkle (23, 23) ; ^ vah, to carry (23, 35); J^ duh, to milk (24, 4; not 17, 87); f<^ dih, to smear (24, 5); fc5^ lih, to lick (24, 6); ^ naA, to bind (26, 57). § 333- Other roots there are, which must not take ^ * in certain only of the general tenses.

A. In the future (formed by ITT td\ the future and conditional (formed by W *ya), the

desiderative, and the participle in cT ta (Pan. vu. 2, 15; 44), the verb Jf^klip must not take ^ «, if used in the Parasmaipada. (Pan. vn. 2, 60.)

gr^^/ip, to shape, Fut. «h rWI kdlptd, Fut. oF^rfif kalpsyati, Cond. ^ «• rn« t^akalpsyat; Desid. (V|^i%rn cJiiklipsati; Part. giTK kliptah.

B. In the future and conditional (formed by **T sya), the desiderative base, and the

participle in IT ta, the following four verbs must not take ^ *, if used in the Parasmai- pada. (Pan. vii. 2, 59.) ^!(vrit, to exist, Fut. "TO^fa vartsyati, Cond. ^GRF!(avartsyatj Desid. rq^rofn vivritsati;

Part. ^: vrittah. (Pan. vn. 2, 15; 56.) ^(vridh,to growt¥ut.'5j&fKvartsyati, Cond.^31Q3(avartsyatj Desid. fq^wfn vivritsati;

Part. ^: vriddhah. ^^syand,to drop, Fut. ^Wft syantsyati, Cond. ^^4i^^asyantsyat ; Desid.

sisyantsati; Part. t«iq; syannah. 5J^ ^tc?A, to hurt, Fut. 314*) fri tartsyati, Cond. ^^i«3i^ asartsyat; Desid.

Mritsati; Part. ^fSf: sriddhah.

C. In the desiderative bases, and in the participle hi W /a, monosyllabic roots ending in

7w, ^!M, ^n, ^rl, and ?T^^«A, to take, and ^ ^uA, to hide, do not take ^ i.

(Pan. vn. 2, 12.)

^L&Att, to be, "yjjrfiff bubhushati; Part. ^IH MtftaA.

ITf i/rraA, f=H ^H| fAjighrikshati; Part. *prfa:$rn"AftaA (long f by special rule, cf. Pan. vn. 2, 37). 5f guh, 'SfflQfftjughukshati; Part. *J£: gudhah (cf. Pan. vn. 2, 44). (Verbs ending in ^rt and *J0ri are liable to exceptions. See § 337. Pan. vn. 2, 38-41.)

D. Participial formations.

i. Roots which may be without the ^ » in any one of the general tenses, must be without it in the participle in If ta.

166 THE INTERMEDIATE L

333-

(Remark that the participle in K ta is most opposed, as the reduplicated perfect is most

disposed to the admission of 5[ ».)

Monosyllabic roots ending in ^fu, ^u, ^n", ^ri, do not take 3[» before the participle in 7T ta, nor before other terminations which tend to weaken a verbal base. (Pan. vn. 2, u.)

3 yu, to join, JIT: yu-tah, ^jf^l^yu-tavdn, fFTT yu-tvd. (Pan. vn. 2, n.) <£Zw, to cut, cg«T: Zw-wa#, <&«HI«l lu-navdn, eSFTT Zw-taa. (Except ^pu, § 335, II. 6.) ^ »ft, to cover, ^Wt vri-tah, '^nm^vri-tavdn, ^r^T vri-tvd.

, to enter, may form (Pan. vn. 2, 44) the future as W^M gdh-i- hence its participle TT2't gddhah only.

, to protect, may form (Pan. vn. 2, 44) the future *frfWT#qp-i-fa or hence its participle TOTt guptak only.

2. Roots which by native grammarians are marked with technical ^TT « or \t do not take 5f t in the participle in K ta. (Pan. vn. 2, 14, 16.) *

'c?, to sweat (marked as f>i (*«*=! t;i nishvidd); Ptsrq* svinnah. *> to be ashamed (marked as vTlwil olaji}; H^J lagnah.

List of Participles in If ta or «T na wJ^ic^ for special reasons and in special senses

do not take ^ i.

f^T sri, to go ; f^Ilft fritah, T'JdqT fritvd. (Pan. vii. 2, n.) See § 332, 2.

"fa «w, to swell ; SHT: sMwaA. (Pan. vii. 2, 14.) See § 332, 2.

"^pr kshubh, to shake; ^"art Jcshubdhah, if it means the churning-stick. (Pan. vn.2, 18.)

See § 332, 15.

T3«^ svan, to sound ; ^flTt svdntah, if it means the mind. 13^ dhvan, to sound ; ScJTlf J dhvdntah, if it means darkness. ^, to be near; W?T* lagnah, if it means attached. mlechchh, to speak indistinctly ; ffn?J mUshtah, if it means indistinct. fTOT virebh, to sound ; fetatt viribdhah, if it refers to a note.

, to prepare ; Tfife: phdntah, if it means without an effort. vdh, to labour ; ^PSTt vddhah, if it means excessive.

, to be confident ; ^¥1 dhrishtah, if it means bold. (Pan. vii. 2, 19.)

, to praise ; tVsfUjcU visastah, if it means arrogant. drill., to grow ; 7g£l dridhah, if it means strong. (Pan. vii. 2, 20.)

parwrih, to grow ; HfY<|<sJ parivridhah, if it means lord. (Pan. vii. 2, 21.) , to try ; oFlft Jcashtah, if it means difficult or impervious. (Pan. vii; 2, 22.)

to manifest ; TJT?t ghushtah, if it does not mean proclaimed. (Pan. vii. 2, 23.) ^T^ ard, with the prepos. ^ saw, f^T wi, f^1 t?i, ^rfh arnnahj *i*i<5t samarnnah, plagued. (Pag.

vii. 2, 24.)

^I^arc?, with the prepos. ^rfa aZ»My WIWi abhyarnnah, if it means near. (Pan. vii. 2, 25.) it (as causative), WJ vrittah, if it means read.

* f*fc£ mid, to be soft, though having a technical W a, may, in certain senses, form its participle as «iP^nJ meditah or fa^J minnah (Pan. vii. 2, 17). The same applies to all verbs marked by technical ^TT a.

-$ 335* THE INTERMEDIATE J i. 167

Intermediate ^ i in the Reduplicated Perfect.

§ 334. The preceding rules, prohibiting in a number of roots the ^ t for all or most general tenses, do not affect the reduplicated perfect. Most of the verbs just enumerated which must omit ^ i in all other general tenses, do not omit it in the perfect. So general, in fact, has the use of the ^ i become in the perfect, that eight roots only are absolutely prohibited from taking it. These are (Pan. vn. 2, 13),

1. If kri, to do, (unless it is changed to ^f skri), ist pers. dual ^pf chakri-va; but

t»^«a(Vq samchaskariva; 2nd pers. sing. t^WX** samchaskaritha.

2. ^ sri, to go, tlljq sasri-va.

3. ^ bhri, to bear, f$3 babhri-va.

4. ^vri ty^vrirl and ^rnVi*), to choose, Par. ^^ ram-rat, Atm. ^p^ vavri-vahe,

^«4 vavri-she.

5. ?*J stu, to praise, IJJ^T tushtu-va. g*W tush^o-tha.

6. "5 dru, to run, J5^ dudru-va. J^T dudro-tha.

7. ^ srw, to flow, tjt^ SMsrw-ra. tjtaTiv susro-tha.

8. ^ ^irtt, to hear, ^^^T 4usru-va. 3JH>ftVJ susro-thn.

§ 335- IQ tne second person singular of the reduplicated perfect Par. the \ i before *T /Aa must necessarily be left out,

1. In the eight roots, enumerated before. (The form <*«H vavar-tha, however, being

restricted to the Veda, ^^^vavaritha is considered the right form. See No. 142, in the Dhatupatha.)

2. In roots ending in vowels, which are necessarily without 5[ « in the future (ifT td), Pan,

vn. 2, 61. See § 332, where these roots are given.

*TT yd, to go ; Fut. Mini ydtd; 4JJJIVJ yayd-tha.

f% cA«, to gather ; Fut. ^UT chetd; P'l'S'q chiche-tha.

3. In roots ending in consonants and having an ^? a for their radical vowel, which are

necessarily without ^i in the future (iTT td), Pan. vn. 2, 62. See § 332, where these roots are given.

Tf^pach, to cook ; Fut. ^Kfpaktd; HMTH papak-tha. But «pH(V krishati, he drags ; Fut. ctff T karshtd; 'qcuPHN chakarsh-i-tha. (Bharadvaja requires the omission of ^ i after roots with ^ ri only, which are necessarily without ^ i in the periphrastic future (Pan. vn. 2, 63), except root ^ ri itself. Hence he allows sf'H'q pechitha, besides MH«T^ papaktha; ^MPiiN iyajitha, besides ^I¥ iyashtha: also ^ftnr yayitha, f'UfilVI chichayitha, &c.)

4. All other verbs ending in consonants with any other radical vowel but ^ a, require ^*, and so do all verbs with which ^ i is either optional or indispensable in the future (ltt to).

* ^ t?nn, (27, 8) ^TTET t?arane, Su. ^t?r»n, (34, 8) SHN<jJ dvarane, Chur. ^ rrt», (31, 38) WW sambhaktau, Kri.

t The form <H(M vavarivay which Westergaard mentions, may be derived from another root "^vri, the rule of Panini being restricted by the commentator to ^Trrin and

168 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i.

Exceptions :

1. In Iffisrij and ^S^drif, the omission is optional.

^(srij, TO? sasrashtha, or UtjfaTVI sasrijitha.

2. The verbs ^rf% atti, ^rflf arti, awfff vyayati must take ^i. § 338, 7.

^Tad, ^nf^T dd-i-tha, (exception to No. 3.)

^ri, •«! i fvq dr-i-tha, (exception to No. 2.)

^T vye, fa «M PHV vivyay-i-tha, (exception to No. 2.)

Tables showing the cases in which the intermediate ^ i must be omitted between the Unmodified Root and the Terminations of the so-called General Tenses, originally beginning with a Consonant, except *^y.

• § 336. In these tables Jtta stands for the Past Participle; ff^san stands for the Desidera- tive ; ^T sya for the Future and Conditional ; HT td for the Periphrastic Future ; for the First Aorist ; f<3 lin for the Benedictive.

I. For all General Tenses, except the Reduplicated Perfect, Omit \ *',

1. Before Ttta, *fi^sare, ^(sya, rTT td, fti^sich, fc5^ lin :

In the verbs enumerated § 332.

2. Before Ttta, 'Q^san, ^sya, WT td:

In y^klip, if Parasmaipada. § 333, A.

3. Before IT ta, *R^san, *?? sya :

In ^?(vrit, ^fivridh, l&^syand, yfts^idh, if Parasmaipada. § 333, B.

4. Before 7f ta, ^H^ saw .•

In monosyllabic verbs ending in T, "3! u, ^, ^ rt, ^ grah, and J^ guh. § 333, C,

5. Before Tf ta:

a. All verbs which by native grammarians are marked with ^TTa, \t, or ~&u *.

b. The verb fwfri and others enumerated in a general list, § 333, D.

II. For the Reduplicated Perfect, Omit ^ i,

1. Before all terminations, except ^C ire :

In eight verbs, mentioned § 334.

2. Before "Htha, 2nd pers. sing.:

All verbs of § 332 ending in vowels 1 if without ^ » in the

All verbs of § 332 ending in consonants with ^Ta as radical vowel /periphrastic future.

Optional insertion of ^ i.

§ 337' F°r practical purposes, as was stated before, it is sufficient to know when it would be wrong to use the intermediate ^*,- for in all other cases, whatever the views of different grammarians, or the usage of different writers, it is safe to insert the ^ i.

As native grammarians, however, have been at much pains to collect the cases in which ^ i must or may be inserted, a short abstract of their rules may here follow, which the early student may safely pass by.

* The technical "ZRu shows that in the other general tenses the ^ i is optional. § 337, 1. 2.

-$ 337- THE INTERMEDIATE J t. 169

^ i may or may not be inserted :

I. Before any drdhadhdtuka (i. e. an affix of the general tenses not requiring the modified

verbal base) beginning with consonants, except ^y .

1. In the verbs *^svjn; Per. Fut. ^ffXill svar-i-td, or ^rtl svartd, &c. (Pin. vii. 2, 44.)

(Except future in fQsya, ^fTffTf svarishyati only. Pan. vn. 2, 70.) (as Ad and Div, not as Tud), wfatilsav-i-td, or *fhn*o/4, &c.

as Tud), Vftrf! dhav-i-td, or vtlfT rfAo*rf, &c. (Except aorist Parasmaipada, which must take ^ i. Pan. vn. 2, 72.)

2. In all verbs having a technical "91 tf (Pan. vii. 2, 44). TT^ptfA, Per. Fut. T^R gdh-i-td,

or *\\<z\ gddhd. (See § 333, D. i.)

But ^S^anj (though marked ^T^ariju) must take ^ » in the first aorist (Pan. vii. 2, 71.) 'wifai'ji dfijishuh.

3. In the eight verbs beginning with T^radh. (Pan. vn. 2, 45.) (26, 84) T>J radhy to perish, ^ftim radh-i-td, or T^T raddM.

(26, 85) »TSJ na£ to vanish, *Tf^nn na4-i-td, or «UTT namshtd.

(26, 86) y^/ry* to delight, rtf5iTT tarp-i-td, or IRfttarptd, or cHIT traptd.

(26, 87) "^Tl^nP. to be proud, ^Hni darp-i-td, or ^Trfarpf<f, or "JTH draptd.

(26, 88) "^T e?rw^, to hate, ^)f^HI droh-i-td, or ^t^VT drogdhd, or ^l<il drodhd.

(26, 89) lp£ wwA, to be bewildered, *Af^nf moh-i-td, or *ffr>n> mogdhd, or *ft7T modhd.

(26, 90) ^J^swwA, to vomit, n^lf^nr snoh-i-td, or ^^VTsno^rfAtf, or 'Wftnsnodhd.

(26, 91) f%^ sniA, to love, ^f^lTT sneh-i-td, or WVT snegdhd, or ^TT snedhd.

According to some this option extends to the reduplicated perfect ; but this is properly denied by others.

4. In the verb "^^kush (Chur class), preceded by f^ntr,- but here ^» is necessary in

the participle with if ta. (Pan. vn. 2, 46 ; 47.)

^ i may or may not be inserted :

II. Before certain drdhadhdtukas only :

1 . Before drdhadhdtukas beginning with 7f t :

In the verbs ^(ish (Tud only), ^ sah, "ty^lubh, Thrush, ft^rwA. (Pan. vn. 2, 48.) The participles in IT ta or «T na are treated separately under No. 7. Hence ^?J ishtah only, but either ^T ishtvd or ^PMHI ishitvd.

2. Before drdhadhdtukas beginning with ^s, but not in the aorist :

In the verbs Tfl^krit, to cut; ^cAnV, to kill; ^? chhrid, to play; ^ trid, to strike ; «Jl^nn7, to dance. (Pan. vn. 2, 57.)

3. Before the termination of the desiderative base (^J^san) :

In the verb ^ vri, and all verbs ending in l^rf. (Pan. vn. 2, 41.)

In the verbs ending in ^»V, and in "^P^ridh, ^S^bhrasj, ^^dambh, f^T^ri,

^yw, "gp^wrnM, ^J bhri (Bhu class), "^jiiap, *H^san; also J&^tan, Ifl^pat

daridrd. (Pan. vn. 2, 49.)

4. Before the terminations of the benedictive (fc5^ lin) and first aorist (ftr^stcA) in the

Atmanepada : In the verb ^ vri, and all verbs ending in ^ rt (Pan. vii. 2, 42). The ^ i* is

changed into ^«r or "^ ur. In verbs ending in "^ n and beginning with a conjunct consonant. (Pan. vn. 2, 43.)

170 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. $ 338-

5. Before the gerundial termination T^T tvd :

In verbs having a technical "31 u. (Pan. vn. 2, 56.) 3I*/am (flQgamu), Slftfri I samitvd or ^T^f\ sdntvd.

6. Before the gerundial termination r^T tvd and the participle in IT ta :

In the verb fjfR^klis. (Pan. vn. 2, 50.)

f^P^RK Misitvd or f^ifT klishtvd, ffrfspf: klisitah or fjf&: klishtah. In the verb ^pu. (Pan. vn. 2, 51.)

n\*tt*\ pavitvd or T$t31putvd, ^^Alpavitah or "JTTt putah. It must take ^» in the desiderative (Pan. vii. 2, 74).

7. Before the participial terminations If ta or "ff wa.; (see also § 333, D. 2, note) :

In the verbs %*[dam, to tame, ^f cH ddntah or ^f*Trf: damitah. (Pan. vii. 2, 27.) $T*T /am, to quiet, ^itcH sdntah or ^rf'Trf J samitah. ^Ttpur, to fill, ^jSt purnah or "%ftjK puritafi. <^ c?«5, to perish, ^cTJ dastah or ^iftnf t ddsitah.

, to touch, ^«re: spashtah or *Mlf$M: spdsitah. chhad, to cover, "SfflfJ chhannah or «(i(^fT! chhdditah. , to inform, ^Ijnaptah or ^rPTff t jnapitdh. i, to hurt, ^TT?i rushtah or ^PunJ rushitah. (Pan. vii. 2, 28.) am, to go, WrH aw^aA or ^i(*irtt amitah.

, to hasten, IT^J turnah or rqf^nJ tvaritah.

hush, to shout, UMV* sahghushtah or ^'^PMdt sanghushitah. (See § 333, D. 2.) <9«^^s»an, to sound, vti taint dsvdntah or vfi^rrtn; dsvanitah. (See § 333,

D. 2.)

^mA, to rejoice, ^?J hrishtah or ^f^W» hrishitah, if applied to horripilation. (Pin. vii. 2, 29.)

apa-chi, to honour, <smF*frrt apachitah or ^TH^irMnt apachdyitah *.

8. Before the participle of the reduplicated perfect in ^[pas.-

In the verbs TH #am, to go, ^fH1 H «ll ^jagmivdn or «f *l »4 [^jaganvdn f. ^«^ Aaw, to kill, ^ P« q \J(jaghmvdn or ^ M i^T^jaghanvdn.

ia7., to know, PqP3i\crir|[ vividivdn or f«cfc|g^ vividvdn. V, to enter, WV%^T«^ vimswdn or f%Pq *a l*^ vivisvdn. ris, to see, ^"T^TTP^ dadrisivdn or ^STSTT*^ dadrisvdn.

Necessary insertion of ^ i.

§ 338- ^ « must be inserted in all verbs in which, as stated before, it is neither prohibited, nor only optionally allowed (Pan. vii. 2, 35). Besides these, the following special cases may be mentioned : i. Before ^^pas, participle of reduplicated perfect:

In the verbs ending in ^TT d (Pan. vii. 2, 67). *TT pd,

In the verbs reduced to a single syllable in the reduplicated perfect (Pan. vii. 2, 67).

^TST as, to eat, Ssi I P^|«( i*^ dsivdn. In the verb fR^ghas, to eat, »i P«j «( \*{jaksMvdn. Other verbs reject it.

* Pan. vii. 2, 30. f Pan. vii. 2, 68.

-$ 34*. THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. 171

2. Before T*T*ya of the future and conditional r

' In all verbs ending in ^ri, and in ^ han (Pan. vii. 2, 70). In JTl^am, if used in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vii. a, 58).

3. Before the terminations of the first aorist (fa^ sick) :

In the verbs ^J stu, *J su, ^jdhH in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vii. 2, 72). Thus from fFJ stu, to praise, First Aorist (First Form), ^unlfqM astdvisham; but in the Atmanepada, vmflfM astoshi.

4. Before the terminations of the desiderative (*P^«an) :

In the verbs ^f krf, *lffrt, ^ dji, ^dh^-i, and fR^prachh (Pan. vii. 2, 75); and in

TpT^am, if used in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vn. 2, 58). In the verbs ftiR smi, ^pu, ^ n, ^*^ otij, and ^HT a/. (Pan. vii. 2, 74.)

5. Before the gerundial WT tvd and the participial termination K ta. (Pan. vn. 2, 52-54.)

In the verbs '3R(vas) to dwell; Ijftkshudh, to hunger; ^^ afich, to worship ; <y^/u£A, to confound (Dhatupatha 28, 22).

6. Before FTT tvd only :

In ^[jrt, to grow old ; '^{vras'ch, to cut. (Pan. vn. 2, 55.)

7. Before iftha, 2nd pers. sing, reduplicated perfect :

In W^arf, to eat; ^n, to go; ^ vye, to cover. Wlty"! dditha, against § 335, 3; •«n(V'H dritha, § 335, 3, note; PqcMPM^ vivyayitha.

J 339. The vowel 3[ i thus inserted is never liable to Guna or Vriddhi.

Insertion of the long \ i.

J 340. Long ^ i may be substituted for the short when subjoined to a verb ending in ^£ ri, also to ^ vri, except in the reduplicated perfect, the aorist Parasmaipada, and the benedictive. (Pan. vii. 2, 38-40.)

Per. Fut. nrfaT taritd or TtftriT taritd, &c.; but Perf. 2nd pers. sing. teritha ; I. Aor. Par. 3rd pers. plur. ^H H I PI.M: atdrishufi; Bened. 3rd pers. sing, 'rffimlif tarishishta *. ^ vri; Per. Fut. c(0in varita or Tfcn varitd; but Perf. ^^^<v| vavaritha;

Aor. Par. ^SHifoj: avdrishuh ; Bened. 'cifWte varishishta. § 341. In the desiderative and in the aorist Atm. and benedictive Atm. these verbs may or may not have ^[ * (Pan. vii. 2, 41-42), which, if used, is liable to be changed to ^ t; not, however, as far as I can judge, in the benedictive Atmanepada.

"ff tri; Des. fnii(V.«irir titarishati ; rddOMPrt titarishatij frtiflSfif titirshati; Aor. Atm. atarishta, ^fift^ atarishta, and ^Ti^§ attrshta; Bened. n PvHl 9 tarishishta, tirsMshta.

vjij Des. fqqfVMci vivarishate; feiqOHfi vivarishate; ^^ vuvurshate; Aor. Atm. avarishta, ^Tq<1s avarishta, and ^T^TT avrita; Bened. qf<M*l8 varishishfa, vrishishta.

The verb ?^ ^rraA, too, takes the long $ i, except in the reduplicated perfect, the desiderative, and certain tenses of the passive. (Pan. vn. 2, 37.)

?T^ grah; Per. Fut. il^HI grahitd; Inf. ij^lij grahitum; but Perf . »fjf^T jagrihima.

* The forms given in the Calcutta edition of Panini vn. 2, 42, MOMlV varishishta, starishishfa, are wrong. (See Pan. vn. 2, 39.)

Z 2

172 PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT. § 343-

Periphrastic Perfect.

$ 342. Verbs which, according to $325, cannot form a reduplicated perfect, form their perfect by affixing ^rf dm (an accusative termination of a feminine abstract noun in wr d) to the verbal base, and adding to this the reduplicated perfect of "cfkri, to do, *^bhuf to be, or ^r?(as, to be*

?, to wet, •g^NcFR, 'sr*$$, ^rrer, unddmchakdra, babMva, dsa.

?, to shine, ^cinflM<*K, ^J?, ^ira, chakdsdmchakdra, babhdva, dsa. bodhaya, to make known, ^hWHehTCj ^^, ^TTH, bodhaydmchakdra, babhuva, dsa.

After verbs which are used in the Atmanepada, the auxiliary verb «f kri is conjugated as Atmanepada, but ^^ as and ^ bM in the Parasmaipada. Hence from *j\rff edhate, he grows,

•N J

^VT^sR edh-amchakre ; but ^*j$ babhtiva and ^TW dsa. In the passive all three auxiliary verbs follow the Atmanepada.

§ 343. Intensive bases which can take Guna, take it before ^srf dm; desiderative bases never admit of Guna. (§ 339.)

w^bobhu, frequentative base of *^bM, ^T^T^cUR bobhavdmchakdra. But ^J^frfVr^ bubodhish, desiderative base of ^V budh, '^sTlfVjMMohK &c. bubodhishdm- chakdra &c.

Paradigms of the Reduplicated Perfect.

i. Verbal bases in ^TT a, requiring intermediate ^ i. i, to place.

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL, SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

dadhwd dadhimd dadhtf dadhivdhe dadhimdhe

2t1 > or _

\3$W dadhitha* dadhdthuh dadhd dadhisM dadhdthe dadhidhvt

3. ^u dadhati

dadhdtuh dadhuh dadht dadhdte dadhirf

2. Verbal bases in ^i and ^«, preceded by one consonant, and requiring intermediate <5[ i.

*ft ni, to lead.

(_ Mti^ nindya ninyivd ninyimd ninyf ninyivdhe ninyimdhe

\ r*iH*( nin&ha or Prj^fq: frf^T f«ff^^ f«i»Mi<i Prjf^^ or °<s (§ ion)

2. 1 ^ 4 vy «'

L P*l»lP<4^wmay^a* ninydthuh ninyd nmyishf ninydthe mnyidhveor-c

3. f*frfl}J nindya P«i**i^[J ^*5* f*T^ f'f^T'if frfpsq^

ninydtuh ninyuh niny£ ninydte ninyire

* § 335. 2^ and § 335, 3.

-$ 343- PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT. 173

3. Verbal bases in ^ ri, preceded by one consonant, and requiring intermediate ^ t.

Vdhji, to hold. f ^VTT dadhdra or

[f^rt, dadhdra dadhrvod dadhrimd dadhrt dadhrivdhe dadhrimdhe

2. <prQ dadhdrtha * <r^3* ^ qiMM ^WTM ^T»w or

dadhrdthuh dadhrd dudhrishe dadhrdthe dadhridhve' or -dhtf

dadhrdtuh dadhruh dadhre" dadhrdte dadhrirf

4. Verbal bases in "^J /•/, preceded by one consonant, not admitting intermediate ^ t.

*£ Art, to do.

chakdra or ^^T 1'^'^ ^^ ^*^j^ ^«p*f^

chakdra chakrivd chakrimd chakrt chakrivdhe chakrimdhe

2. ^RTO chakdrtha ^BT*J* lf" ^"^ ^J»IN 1^'?

chakrdthuh chakrd chakrisht chakrdthe chakridhvf

3. ^fSRi'C chakdra ^3>^» ^"5* ^» ^J^iH ^l^K

chakrdtuh chakruh chakre" chakrate chakrirf

5. Verbal bases in ^ t or \f, preceded by two consonants, and requiring intermediate ^ t.

"aft krt, to buy.

J f^rWT chikrdya or *• 1 r ._. . T -T f

\^%*\ chikrdya chikriyivd chikriyimd chikriye' chikriyivdhe chikriyimdhe

chikre'tha or fa fdiJJ VJJ f^fjli^ f^f^if^ fcfsfiJJIVf n^f^ifm? or °^

' [ f^»r«4^ chikrayitha chikriydthuh chikriyd chikriyisht chikriydthe chikriyidfivtor -dhv£

3. fWfliiiJ chikrdya fa£tHH$i r^fju^t f^f^W P«i r»<4 in P^rj»rM<

chikriydtuh chikriyuh chikriyd chikriydte chikriyire"

6. Verbal bases in TM or "31 u, preceded by one or two consonants, and requiring intermediate ^i.

3 yu, to join.

J ^MI«I yuydoa or ^^Pqq ^*jfaH iffl3 ^^^q^ ^^fq»i^

L^^0' yuydva yuyuvivd yuyuvimd yuyuv€ yuyuvivdhe yuyuvimdhe

yuywsdthuh yuyuvd yuyuvishe' yuyuvdthe yuyuvidhve* or -dhv£

yuyuvdtuh yuyuvuh yuyuve' yuyuvate yuyuvirf

7. Verbal bases in^M, preceded by one or two consonants, and not admittingthe intermediate ^».

*J stu, to praise.

L (H^ tushtdva tushtuvd tushtumd tushtuve" tushtuvdhe tushtumdhe

tushtuvdthuh tushtuvd tushtusht tushtuvdthe tushtudhcf

tushtuvdtuh tushtuvuh tushtuvt tushtuvdte tushtuvirf

* § 335» 2> and § 335, 3.

t If 3 yu is taken from Dhatupatfia 31, 9, it may form JpffaywyrffAa. (See § 335, 2, and Westergaard, Radices, p. 46, note.)

I Bharadvaja might allow fJHfq'<| tushtavitha even against Pan. vn. 2, 13.

174 PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT. § 343-

8. Verbal bases in ^J ri, preceded by two consonants, and requiring intermediate ? ».

UK stri, to spread.

f f^tTR tastdra or nwf^q 'fi^cffiJH HHT cUtlTi,^

I fftrtX tastdra tastarivd tastarimd tastare tastarivdhe tastarimdhe

2. "cTCcr^? tastdrtha

tastardthuh tastard tastarishe tastardthe tastaridhve or -dhve'

tastardtuh tastaruh tastarg tastardte tastarirt

9. Verbal bases in ^T n, requiring intermediate 3[ *. cF kri, to scatter.

f ^fom*. cJiaTcdra or

[ ^ofT^C chakdra chakarivd chakarimd chakare* chakarivdhe chakarimdhe

2. ^nKT^f chakaritha ^R^t ^^f^ ^^Ttt^ -4 «hCI ^ H <*R.SET or °e

chakardthuh chakard chakarishe chakardthe chakaridhvt or -dhve*

chakardtuh chakaruh chakarts chakardte chakarire'

10. Verbal bases in consonants, requiring intermediate ^[ ». lf^ tud, to strike.

i . ijm^ tut6da ^5*^^ 33'V** &$ ggfq^^ ^4^*'^

tutudivd tutudimd tutudf: tutudivdhe tutudimdhe

tutuddthuh tutudd tutudishe tutuddthe tutudidhvt

tutuddtuh tutuduh tutude tutuddte tutudire'

ii. Verbal bases in consonants, having 1J e, and requiring intermediate ^ i,

to stretch.

I rift 11 tat ana or 1,4

|_ fTfTrT tatdna tenivd tenimd tene" tenivdhe tenimdhe

2. dMV( tenitha

tendthuh tend tenisht tendthe tenidhve

3. ii(i"i«J tatdna rf»T^[J W^t ?T*f

tenuh tene

i.

12. Verbal bases in consonants, having Samprasarana, and requiring ^ *. TWyo/, to sacrifice.

J 5[^rr5f iyaja or ^TTT^1 *f»TT ^w S^Wqtj '^f^'H^

\^lf*fiydja ijivd ijimd tje ijlvdhe ijimdhe

J 5pPH? iydshtJia or ^'T^J ^5f ^ftf^ i(»TTT ^ftT^

'\^f3[Hiyajitha ydthuh ijd ijisM ijdthe ijidhvt

3. ^Tflifiydja ^*fij* t[5* ^ ^»TTn ^f»R

tjdtuh ijuh tj<? ijdte yire

-$ 344. PARADIGMS OP REDUPLICATED PERFECT. 175

13. Verbal bases in consonants, requiring contraction, and intermediate ^ i.

^»^ han, to kill.

J *! *4 1 ^\jaghdna or "^fiji-i aiiHM Ifn flii^^ »lfHH£

[ *\n<\jaghdna jaghnivd jaghnimd jaghnt jaghnivdhe jaghnimdhe

[fpfajaghdnthaoT WIT^I «fH "SfflT1^ 1HIM TfWT

[ *\ M PH Vjaghanitha jaghndthuh jaghnd jaghnisht jaghndthe jaghnidhvf

jaghndtuh jaghnuh jaghnt jaghndte jaghnirt 14. Verbal base ^JbhH (irregular).

babhuvivd babhuvimd babhuvt babhuvivdhe babhuvimdhe

2. **$yv<4babhuvitha H»J5^; ^*£? H«JJ^H ^<J5TM q'JJ^ufor^

babhuvdthuh babhtivd babhumsht babhuvdthe babhucidhv€or-dhi;£

babhuvdtuh babhuvuh babhuce babhuvdte babhuvirt

CHAPTER XII.

STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF THE VERBAL BASES IN THE SIX REMAINING GENERAL TENSES.

J 344. It may be useful, without entering into minute details, to dis- tinguish between two sets of general tenses, moods, and verbal derivatives, which differ from each other by a tendency either to strengthen or to weaken their base. The strengthening takes place chiefly by Guna, but, under special circumstances, likewise by Vriddhi, by lengthening of the vowel, or by nasalization. The weakening takes place by shortening, by changing •^ ri to ^ ir, or, before consonants, to ^T ir, by Samprasarana, or by dropping of a nasal. There are many roots, however, which either cannot be strengthened or cannot be weakened, and which therefore are liable to change in one only of these sets. Some resist both strengthening and weakening, as, for instance, all derivative bases, causatives, desideratives, and intensives (in the Atm.), which generally have been strengthened, as far as their bases will allow, previously to their taking the conjugational terminations.

176

STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VERBAL BASES

§ 344-

The base is, if possible, strengthened in :

1. The Future.

2. The Conditional.

3. The Periphrastic Future.

4. The Benedictive Atmanepada.

(Except bases ending in conson. or ^ ri, and not taking interm. ^i. Pan. 1. 2, n; 12. vn. 2, 42.)

5. The First Aorist, 1. II.

(Except First Aor. II. Itm. of verbs ending in conson., ^ ri, or . §350-352.)

The base is not strengthened, and, if

possible, weakened in : i. The Participle in K ta (unless it takes

intermediate ^ i).

1. The Gerund in i«n tvd (unless it takes intermediate 3f *).

3. The Passive.

4. The Benedictive Parasmaipada.

5. The First Aorist, IV.

6. The Second Aorist.

(Except verbs in ^ ri, &c. § 364.)

bho bhavishydti dbhavishyat

ift^ tod

dev

I. Root. Base Future.

strengthened.

bU

tud

div

chur

krt

su

tan

kri

Conditional. Per.Fut. Ben.Atm. First Aor. I. II.

(Except bases ending in cons, not taking interm. ^ »'.)

Atm. bhavishishtd dbhavishta

dtotsyat tottd (tutsishtd) dtautsit

VHtjP«|*Mi^ ^P«nu ^P^ifte ^«Hfl

i ddevishyat devitd devisMshtd ddevit

choray chorayishydti dchorayishyat chorayita chorayisMshtd

kar so

tan

% kre

dkanshyat karitd karishishtd dkdrit

^T^fhUT^ tTlrtT

dsoshyat sotd

^dP«i*Ui^ fiPniti

dtanishyat tanitd tanisMshtd

dkreshyat

dkraishit

dvish

1

hu

ho

*H

dvekshydti ddvekshyat dveshtd dhoshyat

dhaushit

-..^-..1^ VUrUlfl

drautsit

rudh rodh rotsydti drotsyat

^ Caus. <*i<^ ^«KP*i«MPff ^ToFRPH1^^

kri kdray kdrayishydti dkdrayishyat kdrayita kdrayishishtd

«F Des. f^T^"^ f%c|HfH^ttPrf wf^olftfH^ni f^offtf1^ WT fWohTT^tftv

kri chiMrsh chikirshishydti dchikirsUsJiyat chikirsUtd chikirshishishtd dchiktrsMt

^ Int. -«(rfil^ ^"SftP^^n •ei^unlPM'Mn ^wtftRfT ^rfTIPM'Oy -ef-qjn^f^

kri chekrty chekriyishydte dchekriyishyata chekriyitd chekriyisMshtd dchekriyishta

-f 345.

IN THE SIX REMAINING GENERAL TENSES.

177

II. Root. Base Part.TT/a, Ger. WT/tx?, Passive. not strengthened, without ^i. without^.

Ben. Par. Second Aor. First Aor.IV. and Sec. Aor.

bhu bM bhdtdk bhutvd bMydte

pr?r

kri

bhuydt tudyd't ktrydt

4UM

tud tud tunnd/i tuttvd tudydte

"*£ Vfa offhSt Afclr^T <*)3c$

Hr kirndh kirtvd kirydte

iv IjTCdyutdh VfjRldyutvd'faWdtvydte1

'pushydte

(*$Atf() ^"W^A, cAur (choray) (choritdh) (chorayitvd) (chorydte) (chorydt) dchuchurat

su su sutdh sutvd suydte suydt

/an

kri

dtutta W«fffr£ dktrth{a

THT:

tan & ta tatdh

kri

tatvd

nfter

tanydte

kritdh

fsv:

dvish dvish dvishtdh

55!^

hu hu hutdh

t any at krtydt

dvishydte dvishyat hutvd Mydte Mydt

dtata

ddvikshat

rudh ruddhdh ruddhva rudhydte rudhydt drudhat druddha

Tf Caus.

kri kdray kdritdh kdrayitvd kdrydte

* Des.f^^f fq^ftflTf: f^

kdrydt

chikirsh chikirshitdh chikirshitvd chikirshydte chikirshydt

dchflcarat

^ Int.

kri chekriy chekriyitdh chekriyitvd

§ 345- Certain roots which strengthen their base in a peculiar manner, by Vriddhi, like 'p^mry, by lengthening, like ^$rwA, by transposition, like *p^sn/, by changing \i into TSRd, like fa mi, by nasalization, like «T3^nos, drop all these marks of strengthening, in the weak forms.

I. Root. Base Future. Conditional. Per.Fut. Ben. Aim. First Aorwt.

strengthened.

f5T Tm4 HIVSfirH vj*iiYs<<rt Trtl ITMIMIK ^eftun/Tf^

mjij mdrj mdrkshydti dmdrkshyat mdrshtd mdrjishishtd dmdrkshit

or •uln^flff vfHrHn'M'n *nhnrtl (*j«/l») ^tfiiTt^

mdrjishydti dmdrjishyat mdrjitd (mrikshishtd) dmdrjti

§ M3-

2 Or

tanitvd. 3

4 Pan. vn. 2, 114. A a

178 STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF VERBAL BASES, &C. J 345-

guh guh ghokshydti dghokshyat godhd (ghukshishtd)

or

guhishydti dguhishyat guhitd guhishishtd dguhit srij sraj srakshydti dsrakshyat srashtd dsrdkshit

mi md mdsydti dmdsyat mdtd mdsishtd dmdstt

nas nams nankshydti dnahkshyat namshtd

srams srams sramsishydte dsramsishyata sramsitd sramsishishtd dsramsishta

bandh bandh bhantsydti dbhantsyat banddhd

dbhdntsfa

II. Root. Base Part.Wte, Ger.RTtoa, Passive. Ben. Par. Sec.Aor. First AorJV. not strengthened, without ^i. without^*, and II. Atm.

fa

mi

gudhdh srishtdh mitdh

gudhvd

mrij mrij mrishtdh mrishtvd mrijydte mrijydt

guh guh

snj ft

guhydte guhydt

^f5*nr ^^if^

srishtvd srijydte srijydt

f*ir^i *i!*i^ *nmr

mitvd miydte meydt

dghukshat

\ \

was nashtdh nashtvd nasydte nasydt dnasat srams sras srastdh srastva srasydte srasydt dsrasat

bandh badh baddhdh baddhvd badhydte badhydt

I Pan. vi. 4, 89. 2 Pan. vi. i, 38. 3 Pan. vi. i, 50. 4 Pan. vn. i, 60. 5 Pan. vi. 4, 24. 6 But with ^i, Hlf'Sfll mdrjitvd, not Hf^r^T marjitvd.

7 As to the long 3iM, see § 128. 8 Or 'jf^r^T guhitvd, § 337, 1. 2. 9 10 Roots which may thus drop their nasal, are written in the Dhatupatha with their nasal, or w^srams : while others which retain their nasal throughout, are written without the nasal, but with an indicatory ^ i; ^f^ nad, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 24 ; vn. i, 58). Two verbs thus marked by ^ i, c3fH lag and «fif^ kap, may, however, drop their nasal, the general rule not- withstanding, if used in certain meanings, f^^fTTT vilagitam, burnt ; f^cfrfiTfT vikapitam, deformed (Pan.vi.4, 24, vart. 1,2). ^f vrih, ^fftvrimhati, drops its nasal before terminations beginning with a vowel, but not before the intermediate ^ij ^"t^ffT varhayati, but sjfsg d'T vrimhitd. T^raw/, to tinge, may drop its nasal, even in the causative (i.e. before a vowel), if it means to sport; TJrfirfff rajayati (Pan.vi. 4, 24, vart. 3, 4). The same root, like some others, drops its nasal before sdrvadhdtuka affixes ; T^fff rajati, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 26). ^^(anch, if it means to worship, must retain its nasal (Pan. vi. 4, 30) and take the intermediate ^ i (Pan. vn. 2> 53) : ^N^ff* anchitah, worshipped ; otherwise ^T3u aktah or ^f^lfj anchitah, bent.

II Or

-f 347. AORIST. 179

Note— The verbs beginning with ^ ku( (Dhatupatha 28, 73-108) do not strengthen their base, except before terminations which are marked by *^fl or ^n; fT hif, to be bent, Put. ^fcmfd kujishydti, Per. Fut. $fzdl kutitd, First Aor. *^f\J(dlcuttt (Pan. I. 2, i). finery, to fear, never takes Guna before intermediate ^ »; Per. Fut. Alftlfll w>W(Pan. i. 3» a), ^H§ tfrntt, to cover, may do so optionally ; ^Nijfqni urnuvitd or w«5fqni vrnavitd (Pan. i. 2, 3).

CHAPTER XIII.

AORIST.

J 346. We can distinguish in Sanskrit, as in Greek, between two kinds of Aorists, one formed by means of a sibilant inserted between root and termi- nation,— this we call the First, — another, formed by adding the terminations to the base, this we call the Second Aorist.

Both Aorists take the Augment, which always has the Udatta, and, with some modifications, the terminations of the Imperfect.

J 347. The First Aorist is formed in four different ways.

Terminations of the First Aorist.

1. First Form. PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

^^ isham ^^ ishva ^QR ishma j^fa ishi ^^H? ishvahi ^**if^ ishmahi

$ltft ^ ishtam ^Tiishta ^T^ishthdh ^m«u ishdthdm ^$4 or ^ idhvam or idhvam

^# ^^ishtdm ^lishuh ^S ishta ^'mni ishdtdm ^TT ishata

In this first set of terminations the intermediate ^ i stands as part of the terminations, because all the verbs that take this form are verbs liable to take the intermediate ^ i. The first and second forms of the First Aorist differ, in fact, by this only, that the former is peculiar to verbs which take, the latter to verbs which reject intermediate ^ i. (See $ 332, 4, note.)

2. Second Form. PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

^ sam ^ sva ^R sma ft? si ^f\| svahi Wf^ smahi

re (

\ or If ta \or ^ITt thdh

sit

[or HT tarn «

A a 2

s/m ^rsffl

-( . ^: stth -{ ^IHI satam THT sata

[or HT tarn « [oriT^a

180 AOKIST. J 348-

3. Third Form.

There are some verbs which add ^ s to the end of the root before taking the terminations of the Aorist, and which after this ^ s, employ the usual terminations with ^ i, viz. ^4 isham, &c. They are conjugated in the

Parasmaipada only.

PARASMAIPADA.

s-i-sham ftt«*i s-ishva ftro s-ishma

s-ih (for ffSm sish(a)h) fftf? s-ishtam fav s-ishta

(for f^^^sish(a)t) faST s-ishtdm ftnf: s-ishuh

4. Fourth Form.

Lastly, there are some few verbs, ending in ^ s, f^sh, ^ h, preceded by ^ *, T u, ^ ri, which take the following terminations, without an inter- mediate ^ i (ksa).

PARASMAIPADA. ATMANEPADA.

r— sdvahi ~_

tTTq sava *ITH sama T^T si 4 r ^fTHT^ samahi

or «TT^ vahi

_ * sathdh . f ^?4 sadhvam

r: sah ^Trf sa/am *TrT sata 4 ^TT^n 5«^aw 4

[ or Ml J f hah [ or *^ dhvam

Wilsat ^tftsatdm 'ttsan 4 ^TTirf sdtdm ^K santa

[ or W ta

Special Rules for the First Form of the First Aorist. $ 348. For final vowel, Vriddhi in Parasmaipada*. c3 /w, to cut, dldvisham (Pan. vn. 2, i).

For final vowel, Guna in Atmanepada. <^ hi, ^r??f^f^ dlavishi. For medial or initial vowel, Guna (if possible) both in Par. and Atm. ^ budh, to know ; Par. ^Vf\ni dbodhisham ; Atm. ^TTtfafa dbodhishi.

The vowel ^r a, followed by a single final consonant, may or may not take Vriddhi in Par. if the verb begins with a consonant f. «F^T kan, to sound, ^ToFT- dkdnisham or ^rsfiftj^ dkanisham (Pan. vn. a, 7) ; Atm. ^rcfiftufa dkanishi.

* Except f^f svi, to swell, ^Tni*lTf^ asvayit; vTFIjdgri, to wake, ^»TT' « i.1 f^ ojdgarit (Pan. vn. 2, 5). "^l^wrwM, to cover, may or may not take Vriddhi; Wi ^«iTi^ aurnuvit, or ^TRV^J^aurndvit, or ^rr^qRT^aMrwat?^ (Pan. vii. 2, 6).

t Roots ending in ^c^aZ or ^:ar always take Vriddhi in the Parasmaipada ; ^€^jvalf to burn, ^'*n<ft?(djvdKt (Pan. vii. 2, 2). Likewise ^vad, to speak, and 'Gfi^vraj, to go (Pan. vii. 2, 3). Roots ending in ^ A, ^»»,^y, the roots T5prjA;sA<m, to hurt, ^R^&as, to breathe, and verbs of the Chur class, roots with technical TJe, do not take Vriddhi (Pan. vii. 2, 5). ^f^grah, to take, ^lf^J[^dgrahit j fQ^syam, to sound, TSR&*ftf{dsyamft; '&F{vyay, to throw, ^^ifl1?^ dvyayitj "^TJT kshan, to hurt, ^"SHUI1?^ dkshantij "^^ svfls, to breathe, stt ; "3i«T^Mway, to minish, ^n*flf('f(jiunay(t ; TJl^rag, to suspect, *Z(T?f\J(aragtt. «, to shine, ^ft vet- «, to desire, and ^fr^T daridrd, to be poor, drop their final vowels, according to the rules on intermediate ^ t ; ^ft.^[T daridrd,

-$ 35<5- AORIST. 181

§ 349. No Guna takes place in desiderative bases, "^budh; Desid. " Aor. ^TJ^tfvfrnt dbubodhishisham.

Intensives in ^y, if preceded by a consonant, must, certain denominatives in *Jy may, drop their final ^y. If the intensive ^y is preceded by a vowel, ^y is left between the final vowel and the intermediate ^t. fal^bhid, to cut; Int. base 4&iv{bebhidy ; Aor. Atm. TO'^faf^ftT dbebhidishi. *^bhd, to be; Int. base "^j^bobhuy ; Aor. Atm. ^^jftrfa dbo- bhuyishi. Denom. base l«it*^namasy, to worship ; Aor. VSprf^CR dnamasy-isham or <8MHfiHM dnamas-isham.

Special Rules for the Second Form of the First Aorist.

§ 350. Vriddhi in Parasmaipada. f^^kship, ^Brips dkshaipsam; fyi &, ^fhi dsaisham (Pan. vn. 2, i) ; v*(pach, *rmfa(dpdkshU (Pan. vn. 2, 3).

Guna in Atmanepada, if the verb ends in ^, ^ z, 7, "31 u (not in ^ rt, Pan. i. 2, 12); otherwise no change of vowel, f^r si, ^r^tfo dseshi ; but fq^kship, ^rftff^r dkshipsi; ^ £rz, ^i^rfa dkrishi. Final "^r^ becomes f^ 2r.

J 351. Terminations beginning with ^ET st or ^sth drop their ^* if the base ends in a short vowel or in a consonant, except nasals. Ex. 2. p. dual ^ri|Tf dkshaip-tam, 3. p. dual ^T%>rf dkshaip-tdmy 2. p. plur. ^fr%R dkshaip-ta, of f^^kship; 2. p. sing. Atm. »H<$VJT: dkrithdh, 3. p. sing, ^fudkritayof ifkri, Atm. But from JRT^ mdnyate, *HHW dmamsta.

§ 352. The roots FTT «/^^, to stand, ^rc?a, to give, VT dhdy to place, ^rfe, to pity, *f dhe, to feed, ^ do, to cut, change their final vowels into ^ i before the terminations of the Atmanepada (Pan. i. 2, 17). WT sthd, 3 \\ \ fal d updsthi-ta ; ff updsthi-shdtdm. In the Parasmaipada they take the Second Aorist.

($ 368.)

§ 353- The roots iftmi (mindti), to hurt, fa mi (minoti), to throw, and $ di, Atm., to decay, instead of taking Guna, change their final vowels into ^TTa in the Atmanepada; and cl^fr /*, to stick, does so optionally (Pan. vi. i, 50-51)*. Thus from *ft mi and fa mi, <w*iiw amdsta; from ^ di, 'W^i^cf addstaj from c5^ /», ^««iw aldsta or ^^H? aleshta. In the Parasmaipada these verbs take the Third Form.

§ 354« "%*{han, to kill, drops its nasal in the Atmanepada (Pan. i. 2, 14); V^H ah at a,

ahasdtdm, &c.

§ 355- 'T^^ffm, to go, drops its nasal in the Atmanepada optionally (Pan. i. 2, 13); or ^JT^cT agamsta. The same rule applies to the benedictive Atmanepada ; stshta or ^t^fh? gamstshta. § 35^' ^ yam drops its nasal, necessarily or optionally, according to its various meanings; 3<;<<n udayata, he divulged (Pan. i. 2, 15); <JMi^n vpdyata, he espoused, OP updyamsta (Pan. I. 2, 16).

* Prof. Weber (Kuhn's Beitrage, vol. vi. p. 102) blames Dr. Kellner for having admitted ^1*1 1 (Vi M*T amdsisham and similar forms, and denies that these forms are authorised by Panini. Dr. Kellner, however, was right, as will be seen from the commentary to Pan. vi. i, 50. The substitution of ^TT d takes place wherever there would otherwise have excepting in Sit forms.

182 AOEIST. § 357-

Special Rules for the Third Form of the First Aorist. f 357. Most verbs taking this form of the Aorist end in ^TT d, or in diphthongs which take w d as their substitute. This ^rr d remains unchanged. In the Atmanepada these verbs take the Second Form.

§ 358. The verbs *ft mi, to hurt, fa mi, to throw, and c^t li, to stick, in taking this form, change likewise their final vowels into ^SRT a. Ex. ^faifViM amdsisham, I threw, and I hurt ;

tf aldsisham (or ^Trt1! alaisham). § 353.

§ 359. Three roots ending in H m take this form ; TF^yam, to hold, T^rawi, to rejoice, nam, to bend, Aor. ^Hlftre ayamsisham, &c. (Pan. vn. 2, 73.)

Special Rules for the Fourth Form of the First Aorist. $ 360. The roots which take this form must end in SI ^ (as to ^j(dri$9 to see, cf. Pan. in. i, 47), T{sh, 1(s, ^ h, preceded by any vowel but ^T, ^n a. They must be verbs which reject the intermediate ^ z; § 332, 17—20; (Pan. in. i, 45.) Their radical vowel remains unchanged.

§ 361. The root fig^sUsh takes this form only if it means to embrace (Pan. in. i, 46) ; ^{f^renT aslikshat. Other verbs, such as "tjftpush and Tjre sush, are specially excepted. (§ 366.)

§ 362. The roots Z^duh, to milk, f^TeftA, to anoint, fe^ lih, to lick, TR^guh, to hide (Pan. vn. 3, 73), may take in the Atmanepada

1RI thdh instead of *T*n* sathdh. ^rf^ vahi instead of tu^f^ sdvahi.

If ta — ^Trf sata. ?4 dhvam - TOI sadhvam.

They thus approach to the Second Form of the first aorist in most, but not in all persons. Ex. gf] duhj 2. p. sing. Atm. ^g'^Tt adugdhdh or ^VTSpITt adhukshathdh. 3. p. sing. Atm. ^^V adugdha or 'STV'^fT adhukshata.

1. p. dual Atm. ^Ig3ffl» aduhvahi or ^V^T^f^ adhukshdvahi.

2. p. plur. Atm. ^npl«! adhugdhvam or vi^isjSel adhukshadhvam.

FIRST AORIST.

First Form, with intermediate 3J i-

a. Verbs ending in a vowel; c£ lu, to cut.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, Guna in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1. ^T?5Tf^ dldv-isham ^co l fq «*t dldv-ishva ^rcolPei'^T dldv-ishma

2. ^Tc5T^J dldv-ih ^?rtlf^^ dldv-ishtam ^Ic^Tf^F dldvi-shta

3. ^Ic^T^fT didv-it ^051^81 dldv-ishtam ^TrtlPq^t dldvi-shuh

ATMANEPADA.

1. ^Tc4'P«lfll dlav-ishi ^TcoTqwif^ dlav-ishvahi ^?<5ft^Tf^ dlav-ishmahi

2. ^r5f?l¥Tt dlav-islithdh ^Tc^r«i1miqT dlav-ishdthdm ^?c5T%l^ dlav-idhvam or °^ -dhvam

3. ^rafel? dlav-ishta ^r^f^^TUT dlav-ishdtdm ^cofqmi dlav-ishata

-$ 362. AORIST. 183

b. Verbs ending in consonants; wvbudh, to know.

Guna in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1. <vianPt<M abodh-isham ^WTttV1^ abodh-ishoa WqlP*!1!? abodh-ishma

2. ^Bnfftfh abodh-ih W^tfVn? abodh-ishtam W^fViB abodh-ishta

3. W^hrh^a&orfA-f/ ^H<»riP*4«i abodh-ishtdm ^TTtfv^: abodh-ishu/i

ATMANEPADA.

1 . ^BpfVfvftf abodh-ishi vi^P^t^p^ abodh-ishvahi ^T^ftfv^Rf^ abodh-ishmahi

2. ^«f\PM»iJ abodh-ishthdh ^T^tfVmxji abodh-ishdthdm TO^ffVl**J abodh-idhvam

3. ^I^tfw abodh-ishta ^ToTlfMmrff abodh-ishdtdm VH^PyMrf abodh-ishata

Second Form, without intermediate ^ i.

a. Verbs ending in consonants ; f^^ Ar^z/?, to throw.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1 . vjtsj'^i akshaip-sam «fB|MS akshaip-sva •s^K|^3k akshaip-sma

2. vj^tdj akshaip-sih ^T^fff akshaip-tam (§ 351) ^T!pT akshaip-ta

3. v^^tilf^ akshaip-sit ^I^Trt akshaip-tdm ^\^^l akshaip-suh

ATMANEPADA.

1. ^TTTSfftl akship-si ^TT^T^f^ akship-svahi "«iPe$M3Hn£ akship-smahi

2. vfPBj^xflJ akship-thdh ^rft^Tnrt akship-sdthdm ^T^Pf akshib-dhvam

3. isfPsiN akship-ta ^P^tiifli akship-sdtdm ^TPnjtirt akship-sata

b. Verbs ending in vowels (^, ^ z, ^r, ^ ^) ; tft wi, to lead.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, Guna in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

1 . ^Tn *f anaisham ^In^ anaishva "ci^**! anaishma

2. vf«iHiJ anaishih ^fn¥ anaishtam ^Tn? anaishta

3. ^sH'fli^anaisAft ^T%1T anaishtdm *I^Jt anaishuh

ATMANEPADA.

1 . "SfrPH aneshi vffiw^n^ aneshvahi ^ti^P^ aneshmahi

2. ^MiBit aneshthdh vt'imMi aneshdthdm »)H^ anedhvam

3. ^fn« aneshta vifiUmt aneshdtdm ^HMif aneshata

c. Verbs ending in ^ n; ^f Arz, to do. Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

i . xt'cRm akdrsham --Scfciu^ akdrshva rM=fl^ akdrshma

akdrshih %M<*|5 akdrshtam xM4l^ akdrshta

^nfinll akdrshtdm

184 AORIST. § 362,

ATMANEPADA.

1. '^ifa akrishi 'ST^i^f^r akrishvahi vi <y m fifc akrishmahi

2. ^I^i V I? akrithdh «fepm«fT akrishdthdm ^^f" akridhvam

3. ^T^i rf a&rzta ^TOi^TUT akrishdtdm ^TOi^ll akrishata

d. Verbs ending in ^?r a; ^r da, to give.

Atmanepada only j ^TT a changed into ^ t.

ATMANEPADA.

1. ^Hl^iM adishi ^TT^^f^ adishvahi ^?f^"^Tf^ adishmahi

2. ^ff^rn adit hah ^rf^m^qi adishdthdm ^%& adidhvam

3. ^rf^lT ac?^a ^rf^^TrTf adishdtdm vif^qn adishata

e. Verbs ending in ^jr?/ ^ */r^j to stretch.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, with intermediate ^i.

In Atmanepada the insertion of ^ i is optional. (See § 337, II. 4. Pan. vn. 2, 42.) If ^i is inserted, then Guna (§ 348) and optionally lengthening of ^i. (§ 341.) If ^ * is not inserted, then ^n changed to ^T2r. (§ 350.)

PARASMAIPADA.

^eiWlW astdrisham, &c., like First Form. First Form, ATMANEPADA. Second Form,

with ^ i. SINGULAR. without 3[ i'

or •*nsi*3"n? astarishi or astarishi "wWliM astirshi

or ^RarfanJ astarishthdh or astarishthdh vtwIeK astirshthdh

or vitclO? astarishta or astarishta ^TOft% astirshta

DUAL.

1. ^wft^fifJ or ^^TT^^f^ astarishvahi or astartshvahi viWl ^"f^ asttrshvahi

2. ^Kri'fXmvjj or '^wOMfifi astarishdthdm or astarishdthdm ^HWlSl^l astirshdthdm

3. ^i tsl U.H i nT or ^IwOmin astarishdtdm or astarishdtdm ^tfliHtclT astirshdtdm

PLURAL.

1. ^SMHlX^n^ or -^wO^Hn^ astarishmahi or astarishmahi ^n^l^\k astirshmahi

2 . ^T4df^£c( °^ or ^HWtH«f °^ astaridhvam -dhvam or astaridhvam -dhvam "«iWic astir dhvam

3. ^JMriPlXri or ^r^cTirt^Tf astarishata or astarishata vjtflUn astirshata

f. Verbs with penultimate ^ ri / ^ «n/, to let off. Peculiar Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.

PARASMAIPADA.

asrdksham ^^TSS asrdkshva ^t*H5^ asrdkshma

\l asrdkshih ^TFT? asrdshtam ^H5m asrdshta

3. 'STOTSffa^asra&s^ ^TWrKf asrdshtam ^T^rr^t asrdkshuh

ATMANEPADA.

1. ^njfrSf asnJfo^z ''H^iyr^ asrikshvahi »^^«*if^ asrikshmahi

2. ^T^fFTJ asrishthdh ^^VijIVjl asrikshdthdm vujsc asriddhvam

asrishta ^W^ITft asrikshdtdm ^ti«|n asrikshata

A01MST.

185

g. Verbs ending in

rfaA, to burn.

1 . ^i«4i«f adhdksham

2. ^nrnsft: udhdkshth

3-

1. viMf«| adhakshi

2. ^RpVTJ adagdhdh

3. ^H^V adagdha

PARASMAIPADA.

adhdkshva addydham addydhdm

ATM AN Ei> AD A.

adhakshvahi adhakshdthdm adhakshdtdm

adhdkshma addydha : udhdkshuh

adhakshmahi adhagdhvam *Mvr.fii adhakshata

aydsisham

i . <w«ij«f anamsishat*

2. virjtil: anamsih

3. "«f »T*i TlT anamsit

adiksham adikshah

adikshi ; adikshathdh adikshata

FIRST AORIST.

2%irrf Form. PARASMAIPADA ONLY.

in yd, to go.

aydsishva aydsishtam aydsisfy&m

tenant, to bend.

anamsishva anamsishtam anamsishtdm

FIRST AORIST. Fourth Form.

s, to show. PARASMAIPADA.

adikshdva

adikshatam

adikshatam

TMANEPADA. adikshdvahi

adikshdthdm adikshdtdm

aydsishma aydsishta aydsishuh

anamsishma anamsishta J anamsishuh

adikshdma adikshata v*f^K!«^ adikshan

adikshdmahi

adikshadhvam

adikshanta

1. MM«>f aghuksham

2. vi^«|J aghukshah 3.

irff ^rwA, to hide. PARASMAIPADA.

aghukshdva aghukshatam aghukshatdm Bb

aghukshdma aghukshata VH^V5|«^ aghukshan

186

aghukshi

AORIST.

ATMANEPADA. aghukshdoaU or

aguhvahi

I.

2. 41 ^ H|'V| [laghukshathdh or^PJcFK agudhdh ^H gHj I VJ 1 aghukshdthdm

3. ^nrefcf aghukshata or ^^ agudha vi^im aghukshdtdm

It may also follow the First Form, ^nrf^ agdhisham and

(I 337 > I- !•)

fc^; /£A, to smear.

PARASMAIPADA.

aliksham ^?fc5^T^ alikshdva

j aliksJiah ^rfoJ^iT alikshatam

. ^f&^l^alikshat ^rfc^^rrf alikshatam

ATMANEPADA. alikshi ^av^m^ alikshdvahi or vtrcodr^ alihvahi

i.

2. ^rfc4H|'m* alikshathdh or

3. "«i PC* ej n alikshata or

aUdhdh ^&*i\**\ alikshdthdm alidha w fra »Sj I if i alikshatam

I.

adhukshi

to milk. PARASMAIPADA.

adhuksham, &c. ATMANEPADA. f^ adhukshdvahi or ^SI'f^ aduhvahi

2. WJ^nt adhukshathdh or «f^' ^Tt adugdhdh

3. ^f^fcT adhukshata or ^87V adugdha

adhukshdtdm

. ^rftff^ adhikshi

? c?^, to anoint. PARASMAIPADA.

adhiksham, &c. ATMANEPADA.

4

or or

or

adhiksMthdm adMkshdtdm

$363-

aghukshdmahi or *Jf *icr * aghukshanta aguhishi.

alikshdma alikshata alikshan

alikshdmahi 2

or alikshanta

adhukshdmahi

or adhukshanta

adhikshdmahi or ^rfarSEJ 6 adhikshanta

SECOND AORIST.

J 3^3- Verbs adopting this form take the augment, and attach the terminations (First Division) of the imperfect to a verbal base ending in ^r «, like those of the Tud form.

1 aghukshadhvam or aghudhvam. 3 adhukshadhvam or adhugdhvam. 5 adhikshathdh or adigdhdh. 7 adhikshata or adigdha.

2 alikshadhvam or alidhvam.

4 adhiksMvahi or adihvahi.

6 adhikshadhvam or adhigdhvam.

-J 3*7-

AOKIST.

1*7

sich, to sprinkle. Pres.

nnchdmi ; Impf. wftK asincham.

asicham asichah asichat

ahvam 2. >Hd^i ahvah 3.

2.

PARASMAIPADA.

asichdva asichat am asichatdm

ATMANEPADA.

asichdvahi

agichdma

nail-lint n asichan

: asichat hdh asichata

asichethdm asichetdm

s anchdmahi asichadhvam

asichanta

ve, to call. Pres. ^rqrfH hvaydmi ; Impf. ^T^TT ahvayam ; General base

PARASMAIPADA.

ahvdva aJivatam ahvatdm

ahvdma ahvata

t ahvathdh alivata

ATMANEPADA.

ahvdvahi ahvethdm vi Q^ fii ahvetdm

iihrumnhi ahvadhvam ahvanta

§ 364. Roots ending in ^rr ^, ^ e, ^ i, drop these vowels, and substitute a base ending in ^ « : ^ Ave substitutes 3^ Ava, Aor. "??a^ ahvam ; fv& 6vi substitutes ig M;O, Aor. ^nS asvam. Roots ending in ^ H, and the root ^^ic?m, to see, take Guna (Pan. vn. 4, 16), and then form a base ending in short ^? a: ^sn', to go, ^STTO^asarfltf; ^5T drikt to see, ^^T^a£?ar^a/.

^365. Roots with penultimate nasal, drop it : T3fi<[ skand, to step,^ragi<* askadam.

J 366. Irregular forms are, ^^'M avocham, I spoke, from ^^ vach (according to Bopp a contracted reduplicated aorist, f 370, for ^^ci^ avavacham) ; ^rni apaptam, I flew, from itf^pat (possibly a contracted reduplicated aorist for VHIMri apapatam) ; ^3R^f anesam, I perished, Kas'. on Pan. vi. 4, 120 (possibly for xMHH^r anana&am) ; ^5?%^ a&isham, I ordered, from ^n^ ^«*; WTO dstham, I threw, from ^«s. (Pan.vii. 4, 17.)

§ 367. Roots which take this form are, ^^os, to throw (^rTO dstham), "Q^vach, to speak (^I^T avocham), WT Myd, to speak

(^af akhyam), if the agent is implied. (Pan. in. i, 52.) fe^Zip, to paint, "ftr^sicfc, to sprinkle, d£ Jive, to call (irregularly ^2^ ahvam), in Par.,

and optionally in Atm. (Pan. in. i, 53, 54). Par.^feHi^aftpaf, Atm. -wfcaHn alipata

or vifcoH alipta. The verbs classed as "^f^pushddi, beginning with "$\push (Dh. P. 26, 73-136), ^mfV

'dyutddi, beginning with ^^rfyi/^ (Dh. P. 18), and those marked by a technical "^ /t,

in the Parasmaipada. (Pan. in. i, 55.)

B b 2

188 AORIST. § 368-

The verbs ^ sri, to go, ^TP^sas, to order, and ^J ri, to go (^nt tfram), in Par. and Atm.

(Pan. m. 1,56.) Optionally, verbs technically marked by ^ir, but in the Parasmaipada only (Pan. in.

i, 57). ^fatC^abhidat or ^5W wl t^ abTiaitsit.

Optionally, *[ jri, to fail, ^ScPT stambh, to stiffen C^^f^l^astabhat or ^w^l^ ^J^mrMcA, to go (-Wyi^amruchat or ^rafNh^amrocMtf), °jr^mluch,to go, to steal, r^^gluch, to steal, *l£^$rZttnc^, to go (^Pcf^ agluchat or agluncUi), f^[ &z, to grow (irregularly ^HST?^ «&«£)» DU* in the Parasmaipada only. (Pan. m. i, 58.)

§ 368. There are a few verbs, ending in ^TT d, *J e, ^STt o, which take this form of the second aorist in the Parasmaipada; also ^bhu, to be. They retain throughout the long final vowel, except before the Tt uh of the 3rd pers. plur., before which the final ^?T d is rejected. In the Atmanepada these verbs in ^TT d take the Second Form of the first aorist, and change ^TT d to 3[ «.

^T da, to give. Pres. ^Tf daddmi; Impf. ^^ adaddm. PARASMAIPADA.

1. ^njf arfaw ^r^T"^ arfawa ^TT addma

2. ^T^Tt arfa/f iH^Irt addtam

3. ^R(Tf^a^ ^si^ini addtam

^6^w, to be. Pres. ^mPH bhavdmij Impf. Wft abhavam. PABASMAIPADA.

1. ^S^ abhuvam* ^*$$ abhuva ^^ abhuma

2. ^T^r: «5MA ^*J? abhutam ^^ abhuta

3. ^*£j{abhut ^T^WT abhutam ^^^abhuvan

Verbs which take this form are, IT #a, to go ; ^T c?«, to give ; >IT c?A«, to place ; *U pa, to drink ; WT sthd, to stand ; ^ c?e,

to guard; ^ do, to cut; *j^bhu, to be. (Pan. n. 4, 77.) Optionally, TIT # W, to smell ; V e?Ae, to drink ; ^ft so, to sharpen ; "sft chho, to cut ; ^fft 50,

to destroy. (Pan. n. 4, 78.)

§ 369. The nine roots of the Tan class ending in <fT n or Tff n may form the 2nd and 3rd

A \ *

pers. sing. Atm. in ^IT: thdh and Uta, before which the final nasal is rejected. If^tan, to

stretch; Aor. vjnPrig atanishta or ^TiTlf atata; ^IirfVn?TJ atanishthdh or ^-Nri^i: atathdh (Pan. ii. 4, 79). These forms might be considered as irregular Atmanepada forms of the second aorist, or of the first aorist II, with loss of initial ^s.

Second or Reduplicated Form of the Second Aorist.

§ 370. A few primitive verbs, and the very numerous class of the Chur roots, the denominatives and causatives in ^ro ay, reduplicate their base in the second aorist, taking the augment as before, and the usual terminations of the imperfect.

* Irregular in the ist pers. sing., dual, and plur., and in the 3rd pers. plur.

-$374- AORIST. 189

§ 371. The primitive verbs which take this form are, fof /ri, to go, "Jrfru, to run, ^ sru, to flow, ^^kamt to love (Pa?, ill. I, 48), if expressing

the agent. Ex. ^H f^i fa M r^ asitriyat. Optionally, fa wt, to grow, ^ dhe, to suck (Pan. in. i, 49), if expressing the agent.

Ex. Wpfltadadhat, § 364, (or \t^4\<^adhdt or ^MMl«1i^a<M<£sft.)

Their reduplicative syllable, as far as consonants are concerned, is formed like that of the reduplicated perfect.

tj he went. ^"^ i^ adudruvat, he ran. -wtj^qi^flstm-Hra/, he flowed. f, he loved. ^V^arfarfAa^, he sucked. "W f^| fvj JJ |^ asiiviyat, he

grew; also Sec. Aor. vimi^fl&af and First Aor. "Wll^afoaytt (Pan. in. i, 49). 2^ hve, to call, forms its Aor. Caus. W*\£W{ajuhavat (Pan. vi. i, 32).

$ 372. The verbs in «n{ay drop ^r^ay, and (with certain exceptions*) reduce their Guna and Vriddhi vowels to the simple base vowels : wr a to ^ a ; *eto^i; ^ho to *u; ^,^ar,to^H; $^fr to ^ri. (Pan. vn.4, 7.) Thus JTlr^frt mddayati would become if^ mad, (Aor. 1«nftiT^ amimadam.) bhedayati — fw^ bhid, (Aor. vtffa^ abtbhidam.)

modayati — — ij^ mud, (Aor. ^njjj^ amumudam.) § 373. In the exceptional roots, which do not admit this shortening process, ^T d, ty, ^ e, ^ ait 'md,'?fto,^au are represented in the reduplicative syllable by

mdlayati, ^rmrft amamdlam. zte&folikayati, ^ifc<f;cF atilikam.

cftcFTrfTT lokayati, ^?$&\3; alu/okam.

J 374. In the vast majority of roots, however, the shortening takes place, thus leaving bases with short ^i a, ^ iy ^u}^ri. Here the tendency is to make the reduplicated base, with the augment, either w — w or w w — . Hence all roots in which the shortened vowel is not long by position, lengthen the vowel of the reduplicative syllable (amdmudai). Those in which the vowel is long by position, leave the vowel of the reduplicative syllable short (ararakshat).

Where, as in roots beginning with double consonants, the vowel of the reduplicative syllable is necessarily long by position, it is not changed into the

* These exceptional verbs are (Pan. vn. 4, 2, 3), Certain denominatives : From Hlc4l mala, a garland, is formed the denominative *iioiMrrt

mdlayati, Red. Aor. ^*\*{\<A^amamdlat j "$f\1{6ds, Caus. ^utf^fn sdsayati, he punishes,

Red. Aor. •«< 31 31 1 « t[^a£a3dsat. Those with technical ^Jn- W^bddh, to hurt; Caus. "^PHlfTT bddhayati; Aor. SH^HIVTi^

ababddhat. ^dX^bhrdj, to shine, VX^bhds, to shine, *H^bhdsh, to speak, tf*{dip, to lighten, "SfNyfr, to

live, *ftc^ mil, to meet, tfrSpid, to vex, shorten their vowel optionally. Ex. *ff*{bhrdj;

'SRfc i »i <\ababhrdjat or ^M futiifi^abibhrajat (§ 374).

t %F^t?es^f«y, to surround, ^¥^ cheshtay, to move, take either ^ «" or ^ a in the reduplicative syllable ; ''Z&R'tn^avaveshtat or iH f<4^ 8 ^aviveshfat. inn^rfyo/ay, to lighten, takes ^t; ^?f^f n iadidyutat.

190 AORIST. § 375-

long vowel (achuchyutat , not achuchyutat). In roots beginning and ending in two consonants, this metrical rhythm is necessarily broken (achaskandat). § 375. In the roots which do not resist the shortening process,

^T a, ^ i, ^ uy ^J ri are represented in the reduplicative syllable by ^i, "3 u, T(i ; and all lengthened, where necessary.

Second or Reduplicated Form of the Second Aorist.

I. w — w .

pack, to cook, M H -M fri pdchdyati ; id, to cut, ^Tj^bheddyati;

, to rejoice, jft^rfff moddyati ; rit9 to exist, ^t^lfw vartdyati ;

rij, to cleanse, JJTihrfir mdrjdyati ; ^*fl*J«1 H dmimrijat. rit, to praise, -sftwqfn kirtdyati ; ^r^\^lT?(dcMkritat^. The lengthening becomes superfluous before roots beginning with two conso- nants, because the two consonants make the short vowel heavy (guru]. iq^ tyaj, to leave, Tm»RflT tydjdyati ; ^TT^ bhrdj, to shine, yi'H^fri bhrdjdyati ;

ip, to throw, "^TTTfw Jcshepdyati ; ^Tp^ PH| M i^ dchikshipat.

, to fall, ^ftTT^fTT chyotdyati ; svri, to sound, ^ Tlinfrf svdrdyati ;

, to protect, iHinfrf rakshdyati; bhiksh, to beg, fvnsprfir bhikshdyati ;

§ 376. If the root begins and ends with double consonants, this rhythmical law is broken.

, to ask, H-«**i Pit prachchhdyatij ^RWSSj^dpaprachchhat. skand, to step, <tai^<4fii skanddyati; *x ^ *5h^ dchaskandat. § 377. Roots with radical ^ri or ^n, followed by a consonant, may optionally take the w — w or w w — forms.

* 'TO^ gandy and cFTO^ kathdy take ^ i or ^T a optionally; ^*(\*\1&1{djiganat or ^ »nW?^ djaganat.

t The following verbs take *3f a instead of ^i or \i in the reduplicative syllable of the aorist in the causative :

^R smri, <? dri, 13T. tvar, TT^prath, ^ mrad, ^c[ stri,

fQsmri; Caus. ^WT<*( fff smdrdyoti j Aor. The same verbs which, as will be shown hereafter (§ 474), reduplicate ^l^av, (the Guna of ^, "35 u,) in the desiderative by "3"w, take T« instead of ^* in the reduplicated aorist: "^nuj Caus. ^\\^^tindvdyatij Des^^^v^fiKnundvayishatij A or. of Caus.^R ^C J Radical ^R a is reduplicated by ^T a if the root ends in a double consonant.

-J 380.

AOKIST.

191

ay,

^W vrit, to be, tli* vartdyati; W«<jn i^ dvivritat or ^iqqflf^aoacar/af. (Pan. vn. 4, 7.) TOmry, to cleanse, HlAnfrt indrjdyati; xi «i1«j »i i^ dmimrijat or ^i*i»i 1 »j f^ dmamdrjat. "5SFH M/, to praise, 4fc)ft^frt kirtdyati; TI V) <y n i^ dchikritat or wfrnflfrl^ dchikirtat.

J 378. Roots beginning with a vowel have the same internal reduplication, which will be described hereafter in the desiderative bases. Thus ^r^as forms the Caus. *n$fi{dsdy. This after throwing off and shortening the vowel, becomes w^a£; this reduplicated, and lastly, with augment and termination, ^nfifllfr d$-i6-am. In the same manner, 'WtfW archicham, vftfMir aubjijam, &c. ({ 476.)

§ 379. Are slightly irregular : m /«f, to drink, which forms its causal aorist as ^«Ml*«4i^ dpipyat (instead of

dptpayat}. Pan. vii. 4, 4. WT sthd, to stand, which forms its causal aorist as ^rnf»Mi dtishjhipat (instead of

TTT ghrd, to smell, which forms its causal aorist as

^ djighripat or

djighrapat.

1. 1«iiI'5tM ds'israyam

2. vif^i^Mt a6israyah

3. vi f^i ^ ^ i^ atisrayat

2.

asisraye I asisrayathdh asisrayata

REDUPLICATED AORIST. PARASMAIPADA. asifraydva asisrayatam asisrayatam

ATMANEPADA.

f^ asisraydvahi asisrayethdm as'israyetdm

asisraydma

uslsrayata

asisrayan

^ asisraydmahi a£israyadhvam asisrayanta

§ 380. In the preceding §§ occasional rules have been given as to the particular forms of the aorist which certain verbs or classes of verbs adopt. As in Greek, so in Sanskrit, too, practice only can effectually teach which forms do actually occur of each verb; and the rules of grammarians, however minute and complicated, are not unfrequently contradicted by the usage of Sanskrit authors.

However, the general rule is that verbs follow the first aorist, unless this is specially prohibited, and that they take the first form of the first aorist, unless they are barred by general rules from the employment of the interme- diate ^ i. Verbs, thus barred, take the second form of the first aorist.

The number of verbs which take the third form of the first aorist is very limited, three roots ending in JT m, and roots ending in ^T d.

The fourth form of the first aorist is likewise of very limited use ; see § 360.

As to the second aorist, the roots which must or may follow it are

192 FUTURE. § 381-

indicated in § 367, and so are the roots which take the reduplicated form of the second aorist in $ 371*

Roots which follow the second aorist optionally, or in the Parasmaipada only, are allowed to be conjugated in the first aorist, subject to the general rules.

CHAPTER XIV.

FUTUKE, CONDITIONAL, PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE, AND BENEDICTIVE.

Future. $381. Terminations.

PARASMAIPADA.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

1. i^*miH ishydmi Sf^TRJ isJiydvah 3pR*{\ ishydmah

2. 3^4 (Vi ishydsi ^3T*K ishydthah ^wfH ishydtha

3. ^Hjfrr ishydti S^tQTI! ishydtah ^<4ffl ishydnti

ATMANEPADA.

1. ^$tishy6 $*MI^ ishydvahe ^*MIH^ ishydmahe

2. ^W ishydse ^^fa ishyethe ^f&l ishyddhve

3. ^HT ishydte sfSTcT ishytie ^^TT ishydnte

The cases in which the ^ i of ^snfa ishydmi &c. must be or may be omitted have been stated in chapter XI, $ 33 1 seq. For the cases in which *(i is changed to ^ £, see $ 340. On the change of w sha and *r sa, see $ 100 seq. On the strengthening of the radical vowel, see chapter XII, $ 344 seq.

$ 382. The changes which the base undergoes before the terminations of the strengthening tenses, the two futures, the conditional, and the benedictive Atm. are regulated by one general principle, that of giving weight to the base, though their application varies according to the peculiarities of certain verbs. See illustrations in $ 344 (bhavishydmi) and $ 345 (mdrkshydmi). These peculiarities must be learnt by practice, but a few general rules may here be repeated :

1. Final U e, $" ai9 ^\ o are changed to ^TT d; ^ gai, to sing, JllHJlfa

gdsyami, &c.

2. Final ^ i and \i, ^u)^uj'^ ri and ^£ ri, take Guna ; f*tji, to conquer,

^mifajeshydmi; *%bhu, HfcujifH bhavishydmi; ^ kri} g»ft"5|rftT karishyami; ^ dri, to tear, ^fXmifH darishydmi or ^^NnfH darishyami. There are the usual exceptions, cF ku, to sound, ^f^RTfT kuvishydmi. (J 345, note.)

3. Penultimate ^ i, ^u9 ^ri, prosodially short, take Guna; ^ri becomes

%$ir; ^ budh, ^tfv^nfif bodhishydmi ;

-1 383-

FUTURE.

193

SINGULAR.

bodhishydmi

2. «Tl PM «M fa bodhishydsi

3. ^fViwifn bodhishydti

1 . ^ftftnifr bodhishyt

2. *ffrftnmi bodhishydse

3. *fl(V|*Mif bodhishydte

1 . <«MI(*I eshydmi

2. <«iU^ eshydsi

3. <«HPn eshydti

1. JHs eshytf

2. «i«Mti eshydse

3. «i^Hii eshydte

to know, with intermediate ^i. PARASMAIPADA.

DUAL.

; bodhishydvah t bodhlshydthak : bodhishydtah

ATMANEPADA.

«4iq^ bodhishydvahe

PLURAL.

ft bodhishyamah bodhithydtha TtfVTBTfTT bodhishydnti

? bodhishydmahe

bodhishy&he bodhishydte

\ i> to go,

without intermediate PARASMAIPADA. *. eshydvah eshydthah t eshydtah ATMANEPADA.

hydvahe eshytthe «l«Mn eshy&e

bodhishyddhve ^Vftn*Tn bodhishydnte

t eshydmah eshydtha «t*qfn eshydnti

«j«m»i^ eshydmaht eshyddhce eshydnte

Conditional.

J 383. The future is changed into the conditional by the same process by which a present of the Tud class is changed into an imperfect.

5^ fa^A, to know, with intermediate «.

SINGULAR.

PARASMAIPADA.

DUAL.

PLURAL.

i. ^^(VoT dbodhishyam abodhishyah <iT abodhishyat

2.

2.

dbodhishye t abodhishyathdh abodhishyata

dbodhishydva abodhishyatam ^^f^ronrt abodhishyatdm ATMANEPADA.

f^ abodhishydvahi abodhishyethdm abodhishyetdm

abodhishydma abodhishyata iVfvon^ abodhishyan

H$ dbodhishydmahi abodhishyadhvam 'SriT abodhishyanta

1. BT atshyam

2. <*4i aishyah 3.

without intermediate 3[ *• PARASMAIPADA. aishydva aishyatam aishyatdm C C

aishydma aishyata ^H^ aisJiyan

1 . J*tq aishye

2. «jwfqit aishyathdh

3. JrofiT aishyata

PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE.

ATMANEPADA.

aishydvahi

aisJiyetdm

$384-

aishydmahi aishyadhvam aishyanta

itdstha \ itarah

itdsmahe

Periphrastic Future.

§ 384. The terminations are,

PARASMAIPADA.

1 . ^niPw itdsmi ^dl^t itdsvah

2. ^ruP** itdsi $HIW itdsthah

3. ^cTT ltd ^rillJ itdrau

ATMANEPADA. i. i^HI*» itdhe ^fli*3 ^ itdsvahe

3. 3[HT ȣa ^rtl'U itdrau

These terminations are clearly compounded of in td (base ^ tfn), the common ( suffix for forming nomina agentis, and the auxiliary verb ^rc^ as, to be. There is, however, with regard to TTT td, no distinction of number and gender in the ist and 2nd persons, and no distinction of gender in the 3rd person.

On the retention or omission of intermediate ^ i or ^ i, see J 331 seq. On the strengthening of the radical vowel, see § 382.

*ry^ budh, to know,

with intermediate ^ i.

PARASMAIPADA.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

1. <BM fV ci i Ujf bodhitasmi

2. ^tfwrf?? lodhitdsi

3. «il TM ri I bodhitd

1. WTTVffll^ bodhitdhe

2. «Tl PM n itf bodhitd'se 3-

* bodhitdsthah bodhitdrau

ATMANEPADA.

bodhitdsvahe bodhitdsdthe

«nPviril^| bodhitd'stha bodhitdrak

WtfvnTO bodhitd'

rau

bodhitd'dhve bodhitd'rah

tdsmi

without intermediate ^ »'. PARASMAIPADA.

etdsvah etd'sthah <ni<J etdrau

I etdsmah

J etdrah

-§ 388. BENEDICTIVE. 195

ATMANEPADA.

i . FrT!^ etdhe JgrilH^ etdsvahe *ni«HC etdsmahc

2. ^rtlfi etdse <ni«im etdsdthe 3711*4 etddhte

3. ^TTT e/d «:niCf etdrau «niC et draft

Benedictive.

J 385. The so-called benedictive is formed in close analogy to the optative. It differs from the optative by not admitting the full modified verbal base, and, secondly, by the insertion of an "^s before the personal termina- tions. In the Parasmaipada this ^s stands between the TTT yd of the optative and the actual signs of the persons, being lost, however, in the 2nd and 3rd pers. sing. Thus, instead of

Opt. if, TK, TTT^, *TR, inf, Trnrf, *n*r, *rnr, 3:,

ydm, ydh, ydt, ydvay ydtam, ydtdm, ydma, ydta, yuh, we have Ben. 1TO, iTTt, TTT^, 1TTO, 1T^, ^IWI, *JTO, irer, TR}:. ydsam, ydh, ydt, ydsva, ydstam, ydstum, ydsma, ydsta, ydsuh. As the optative is a verbal compound of the modified base with an ancient second aorist of the root IT yd, the benedictive seems a similar compound of the unmodified base with an ancient first aorist of *TT yd. In *TH ydh and Tffl^ydt we have contractions of «n«^y<fos and <t\*(t{ydst. In the Veda the 3rd pers. sing, is HI y^. (See Bollensen, Zeitschrift der D. M. G., vol. xxii. p. 594; and Pan. vm. 2, 73—74.)

In the Atmanepada the ^ s stands before the terminations of the optative, e. g. T&nstya instead of ^IT iya. Besides this, the personal terminations originally beginning with j(Jt or ^ th take an additional ^s. Cf. $ 351. Thus, instead of

Opt. fs, ^n:, fw, f*ft>, ty^> t^> t1^* ^ t^l>

iya, fa/A, #a', foa'Ai, iydthdm, iydtdm, imdhi, idhvdm, trdn, we have Ben. TR^T, «l8it, ?ft7, filqf^, ^ilqiteqi, '*OilUHi, til^P^, ?fh^, <i"lv.^« siy«x, sfshthdh, sishtd, sivdhi, siydsthdm, siydstdm, simdhi, sidhvdm, sirdn. The benedictive in the Atmanepada is really an optative of the first aorist. Thus from ^bhu, Aor. ^wfq fa abhavishi, Ben. HfclMl^ bhavishfya; from ^J stu, Opt. Atm. stuvita, Aor. ^cft? astoshta, Ben. W*l 'il K stoshishta; from "S^Arf, Opt. Atm. ' Aor. VN^iMtf akreshata, Ben. ^TT^ArresA^ran.

§ 386. Verbal bases ending in ^H^ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. &c.) drop ^Tay before the terminations of the benedictive Par.: ^ft^choray, Ben. *«ft^nf chorydsam; but in Atm. " chorayishtyd. Denominative bases in ^y drop ^y in the Ben. Par. :

Ben. ^«1 «4 1 tt putriydsam ; but in Atm. ^cfl fMMll putriyishiyd.

§ 387. The benedictive Parasmaipada belongs to the weakening, the benedictive Atmanepada to the strengthening forms ($ 344). Hence from f^chit, Par. fa«qiti chitydsam, Atm. ^fWN chetishiyd.

§ 388. The benedictive Parasmaipada never takes intermediate ^ i. The benedictive Atmanepada generally takes intermediate ^ t. Exceptions are provided for by the rules § 331 seq.

c c a

196 BENEDICTIVE. $ 389-

Weakening of the Base before Terminations beginning with T y.

§ 389. Some of the rules regulating the weakening of the base, which is required in the benedictive Parasmaipada, may here be stated together with the rules that apply to the weakening of the base in the passive and intensive.

§ 390. While, generally speaking, the terminations of the benedictive, passive, and intensive exercise a weakening influence on the verbal base, there is one important, though only apparent, exception to this rule with regard to verbs ending in 3[ i, ^ u, ^J ri. Final ^i and Tw, before the ^y of the terminations of benedictive, passive, and intensive, are lengthened (Pan. vn. 4, 25), but not strengthened by Guna.

fa chi, to gather; Ben. -*ftm'i\chiyd't; Pass. **ft*tt chiydte; Int. ^T^falff chechiydte. Final ^J ri is changed to ft ri. (Pan. vn. 4, 28.) ^ kri, to do ; Ben. (VhHli^ kriydt; Pass. Pj**4H kriydte. (The Intensive has ^nO^n

chekriydte., Pan. vn. 4, 27.) In roots, however, beginning with conjunct consonants, final ^ r* ia actually strengthened

by Guna, and appears as ^R ar. (Pan. vn. 4, 29.)

^smri, to remember ; Ben. W*\\i[smaryc[t ; Pass. T&fasmarydte; Int. Wfwflrt sdsmarydte. Also in ^n, to go; Ben. ^^(arydt; Pass. ^f*fiT arydte; Int. ^C(5n ardrydte. Final ^Tn is changed to fjfr, and, after labials, to ^.ur.

^stri, to stretch; Ben. *sl\*\\^stirya[t; Pass. WlAd stirydte; Int. iNcfWft testirydte. ^pri, to fill; Ben. ^Tf^purydtj Pass. "$% purydte; Int. ^^fl popury ate. Exceptions : l$si is changed to TJP^s'ay. ^ft si, to He down; (Ben. $\m\i\sayydt does not occur, because the verb is Atmanepadin);

Pass. "^H^ff sayydte; Int. ^t I ^1^^" sdsayydte. (Pan. VIT. 4, 22.) 3[ i, after prepositions, does not lengthen the final 5f i in the benedictive. ^«, to go; Ben. \Hit(iydtj but ^T*\Wi(^samiydt. (Pan. vn. 4, 24.) "35^ uh, to understand, after prepositions, is shortened to 7^ uh. (Pan. vn. 4, 23.) Ben. &#[^uhydt; Pass. "Zv&lt uhydte . Ben. ti^^i i IT samuhydt; Pass. t4«j^in samuhydte.

§ 391* The following roots may or may not drop their final «^w, and then lengthen the preceding vowel. (Pan. vi. 4, 43.) *F[jan, to beget ; Ben. "SfT^m^/ay/jf or »P*ffity'arey<& ; Pass. Himtijdydte or *\«*njanydtej

Int. **R*fmft jdjdydte or «TW^TiT janjanydte. ^*{san,to obtain; Ben. WHTI^sdyd't orW^^anyat; Pass.^T'Tfl' sdydte or 'ff^ sany ate;

Int. tiitiiMrt sdsdydte or ^^Pmf samsanydte. ^*{khan, to dig; Ben. '^1^41^ khdy dt or !?(•*{ I ^khanydt; Pass. <sii*ifl khdydte or <?r*mi

khanydte; Int. ^KNI^rt chdkhdydte or ^«»<«n chahkhanydte. In the passive only, fT«^frw, to stretch; Ben. n«*\<(^tanydt; Pass. ni<qn #ay^e or n»Mn

tanydte; Int. ffrT^Rff tantanydte.

§ 392. According to a general rule, roots ending in ** ai and ^ o change then* final diphthong in the general tenses into ^TT d: "Wf dhyai, UTnTlf dhydydte. Roots ending in ^TT d retain it: "TT^a, TTTff pdydte, he is protected. But the following roots change their final vowel into \f in the passive and intensive; into "Ze in the benedictive Par.; and keep it unchanged before gerundial 1 ya. (Pan. vi. 4, 66, 67, 69.)

-$ 395- BENEDICTIVE. 197

The six verbs called *£ghu*, and the following verbs :

PASSIVE. INTENSIVE. BENEOICTIVE f. GERUND.

IJT ddy to give OMII diydte <;<{l<4n dediydte IpRl^deyctt Tf$\H praddya

ITT mdy to measure 'ffaTfl' miydte *i»il«4H memiydte *fami mey<& TFTR pramdya

WT s/H to stand Wtan sthiydte rfulqi) teshthiydte 'Wm^stheydt UWHT prasthdya

l\ gai, to sing ifbfKgtydte wfanT jegiydte ^Tf^geyclt Wmpragdya

TRpd, to drink TftTft piydte ^Mlqi) pepiydte Tfrtfl(jpeydt VKFlprapdya

^T Ad, to leave ^I^H Afy<ft<? ^IJInj'eAfyrffe ^Tn^Aey<& HfRpraWya

*ft so, to finish ^^(siydte tlH)<u) seshiydte HW^seydt HFR pra*/ya

§ 393. The following verbs take Samprasarana in the benedictive (Pan. in. 4, 104), passive, participle, and gerund. (Pan. vi. 1, 15.) ^racA, to speak; ^^waptH, to sleep; ^t?a/ (Pan.vi. i, 20), to wish; and the

«4»iif^ yajddi, i. e. those following *H^ yaj.

Ben. T^TTT^McAy^; Pass.T^ uchydte; Part. T1K u^<£A ; Ger. TW tt^t?/ The Mlif^ are, (23, 33-41) i&^yqj, to sacrifice; ^*{vap, to sow ; ^ vah, to cany ; T^ro*, to dwell; % vc, to weave; ^t?ye||,to cover; 3$ hve\\, to call; ^ rarf, to speak; f^Gf sut||, to grow.

§ 394. The | following verbs take Samprasarana in the benedictive, passive, participle, gerund, and intensive. (Pan.vi. i, 16.)

, to take; 'vlfljyd, to fail; **F^vyadh, to pierce; «H^t?yacA, to surround; vratch, to cut; Tf^prachh, to ask; VlTS^bhrajj, to fry. As to W^sca and ^ rye, see § 393, note ||.

; Ben . J|^I I c^ grihydt; Pass. JJ^lii grihydte; Part. Ji^lfft grihitdh; Ger. grihftvd; Int. »i 0 '^ t$l d jarigrihydte. § 395* ^T^ s&, to rule, substitutes f^T^ sish, in the benedictive, passive, participle, gerund, intensive, also in the second aorist. (Pan. vi. 4, 34.) Ben. fijl U|| i^ tishydt ; Pass. f^PRff sishydte ; Part. f^t?t &shtdh; Ger. (31^1 $ishtvd ;

Aor. ^ir^im^osisAa^.

Roots ending in consonants preceded by a nasal (which is really written as belonging to the root) lose that nasal before weakening terminations (Kit, Nit, Pan. vi. 4, 24). Thus

* This term comprises the six roots J^IM, ^Rff, ^T, ^, f*H^, and *te, all varieties of the radicals <JT dd and VT dhd; but not ^T^and ^^, i. e. <JTfrT ddti, he cuts, and ^mfin ddy at i, he cleans (Pan. 1. 1, 20). Hence fffrnt diyate, it is given; but ^mnddyate, it is cleaned.

t In other roots, ending in ^IT d or diphthongs, and beginning with more than one con- sonant, the change into ^e in the benedictive Par. is optional (Pan. vi. 4, 68). § glai, to wither ; jpffi^ gleydt or ^fT^T^gldydt. ^TT khyd, to call ; ^im^khydydt or wmi(khyeyd't.

J ^fl^svdp, to send to sleep, takes Samprasarana in the reduplicated aorist (Pan. vi. I, 18). ^f^^asushupat.

|| ^^ svap, to sleep, ^tpT syam, to sound, and ^ rye, take Samprasarana in the intensive also (Pan.vi. i, 19); tftMU^ soshupydte, ^PHWIn sesimydte, fql^n veviydte. f^ifvi takes Samprasarana optionally in the intensive (Pan.vi. i, 30); ^i\a^Mn so&ydtc or ^THlt^H sesviydte. % hve forms Int. ^\£*W johuydte (Pan. vi. I, 33). In the intensive forms Mcfclnlf cheMydte (Pan.vi. i, 21); ^pydy, ^TNTT pepiydte (Pan. vi. 1,29).

198 PASSIVE. § 396-

from ^R(srams, Part. &*$: srastdh, Pass. ^TR^ srasydte, Ben. HWi^ srasydt, Ger.

srastvd, Int.T&ft&QR sanisrasydte, ^on.^B^dsrasat ; fromt^ranj, Ben.

Pass. <Tl|ri rajydte, Part. t3K raktdh, Ger. TiiT rctoa (or tw ranktvd, Pan. vi. 4, 32).

$ 396. With regard to the benedictive Atm. see the general rules as to the strengthening of the base, $ 344, and particularly $ 348 seq. Remember, that if the benedictive Atm. does not take intermediate ^ i, penultimate ^ i, "3u,?$ri are left unchanged, whereas in other strengthening tenses they take Guna (f 344). Final ^ ri, too, remains unchanged, and ^ri becomes ^ ir, or, after labials, ^ 4r. fq^kship, to throw, ftfml4 kshipsiyd; ^pri, to fill,

Benedictive. PARASMAIPADA.

1. "JUJTtf budhydsam ^HITO budhydsva '3p$m budliydsma

2. ^TH budhydh ^*HHfl budhydstam ^«irai budhydsta

3. TURff budhydt J ^M I W I budhydstdm ^*Hi^t budhydsuh

ATMANBPADA.

1. '^IfM^^ bodhishiyd ^flfVM'HfV bodhishivdhi ^Vftml*tf^ bodhisMmdhi

2. ^fFmflaU bodhisMshthdh HtlVll^lW bodhishiydsthdm ^tfVT^?4 bodhishidJivdm

"T bodhishiydstdm ^i(VfMii5^ bodhishirdn

CHAPTER XV.

PASSIVE. 5 397. The passive takes the terminations of the Atmanepada.

Special Tenses of the Passive.

§ 398. The present, imperfect, optative, and imperative of the passive are formed by adding IT 2/a to the root. This if ya is added in the same manner as it is in the Div verbs, so that the Atmanepada of Div verbs is in all respects (except in the accent) identical with the passive.

Atm. •T^fff ndhyate, he binds ; Pass, rf^ nahydte, he is bound.

§ 399. Bases in ^T^ ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. &c.) drop ^T^ ay before t ya of the passive.

"*tt*n^bodhdy ', to make one know; ^tWrf bodh-ydte^ he is made to knuw. **TV<*^ chordy> to steal j ^§n chor-ydte, he is stolen.

Intensive bases ending in ^y retain their 1y, to which the lya of the passive is added without any intermediate vowel.

, to cut much j 3fico*sn loluyydte, he is cut much.

PASSIVE. 199

Intensive bases ending in *^y, preceded by a consonant, drop their ^y. qfal^bebkidy, to sever ; ^(*iwn bebhidydte, it IB severed.

<fhft didM, to shine, q^ vevt, to yearn, q(V.£' daridrd, to be poor, drop their final vowel, as usual.

^t*ft didhi, ^teti didhydte, it is lightened, i. e. it lightens.

$ 400. As to the weakening of the base, see the rules given for the benedictive, J 389 seq.

Passive.

SINGULAR.

I. 2. 3.

Pres. vj$bhdy6 $TH* bhuydse £07* bMydte

Impf. *ng$ dbhdye WgW. dbhdyathdh *T£qTT dbMyata

Opt. VgWbMyfya tgWCbMytthdh VgfrbMytta

Imp. ^bMya( *j*tt bhuydsva *gllft bhuydtdm

DUAL.

Pres. vgtt^bMydvahe ^q^ bh&ytthe *£& bhuytte

Impf. ^T^lT^f^ dbhuydvahi ^T^^lf dbhuyethdm ^J^iff dbhuyetdm

Opt. ^4*1^ bhuytuahi >J5^Rt bhuyfydtkdm ^Tnrf bhtiyfy&tdm

Imp. *JJJN^ bhtiydvahai *J^zn bhuytihdm ^iH bhuyttdm

PLURAL.

Pres. ^TR^ bhuydmahe *$$& bhuyddhve ^-qiT bhuydnte

Impf. ^UJTHHf^ dbhuydmahi ^T*J?T5«I dbhuyadhvam ^NJjTiT dbhuyanta

Opt. ^l*lf^ bhuytmahi ^^ bhuytdhvam V^f^bhuy^ran

Imp. ^Twt bhuydmahai ^^ bhuyddhvam ^TiTf bhuydntdm

General Tenses of the Passive.

f 401. In the general tenses of the passive, ^ya is dropt, so that, with certain exceptions to be mentioned hereafter, there is no distinction between the general tenses of the passive and those of the Atmanepada. The ifya of the passive is treated, in fact, like one of the conjugational class-marks (vikaranas), which are retained in the special tenses only, and it differs thereby from the derivative syllables of causative, desiderative, and intensive verbs, which, with certain exceptions, remain throughout both in the special and in the general tenses.

Reduplicated Perfect.

The reduplicated perfect is the same as in the Atmanepada.

Periphrastic Perfect.

The periphrastic perfect is the same as in the Atmanepada, but the auxiliary verbs ^ as and ^ bM must be conjugated in the Atmanepada, as well as ^ kri. (J 342.)

200

PASSIVE.

$403-

Aorist.

$ 402. Verbs may be conjugated in the three forms of the first aorist which admit of Atmanepada, and without differing from the paradigms given above, except in the third person singular.

The second aorist Atmanepada is not to be used in a purely passive sense *.

J 403. In the third person singular a peculiar form has been fixed in the passive, ending in ^ i, and requiring Vriddhi of final, and Guna of medial vowels (but ^r a is lengthened), followed by one consonant.

dldv-i. 1

,,,. > First Form. abodh-i. J

akshep-i.

Thus, instead of^wfay dlavishta, we find ^T^tfv? abodhishta, — ^rfojTT akshipta,

^T^rT akrita, —

anay-i. akdr-i.

— ^iftj addy-i. astirshta, — ^HsTTft astdr-i. asrishta, — ^T*rf^ asarj-i.

^xv adagdha, — TBrf^Tf adikshata, —

addh-i.

fc Second Form.

agtih-i. aleh-i. adoh-i. adeh-i.

Fourth Form.

alikshata, — adhukshata, — ^rftrep adhikshata, —

§ 404. Verbs ending in ^TT d or diphthongs, take T^y before the passive 2[ *. <fT da, »H^|ftl addyi, instead of ^fq'ff adita.

§ 405. Verbs ending in ^*{ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. &c.) drop ^f ay before the passive ^ t, though in the general tenses, after the dropping of the passive Hya, the original ^P^ay may reappear, i.e. the Atm. may be used as passive.

«H V*I bodhay, ^^nf dbodhi; ^\X*T choray, ^ef^TK achorij TT*fQrdjay, ^Ujf»i ardji. In the other persons these verbs may either drop ^^ay or retain it, being conjugated in either case after the first form of the first aorist."

abhdvisM, ^^ilVsiJ abhdvishtJidh, ^MTf% abhdvij or

f J abhdvayishthdh, ^MTf^f abhdvi. § 406. Intensive bases in T^y add the passive ^[ i, without Guna.

Int. Tft*$l(bobhuy, ^T^t>jftr abobMyi. Intensive bases ending in ^y, preceded by a consonant, drop ^y, and refuse Guna.

Int. ^fWST bebhidy; Aor. ^T^rftrf^ abebhidi. Desiderative bases, likewise, refuse Guna.

Des. ^hf^fbubodhishj Aor. ^R^rfvfa abubodhishi.

* This would follow if Jcartari extends to Pan. in. i, 54, 56.

-§ 4* I • PASSIVE. 201

§ 407. The following are a few irregular formations of the 3rd pers. sing, aorist passive : T>^ rabh, to desire, forms ^itf*? arambhi. (Pan. vn. i, 63.) See § 345, 10. ^ radh, to kill, ^rtfv arandhi. (Pan. vn. I, 61.)

yf^jabh, to yawn, ^Tiffa ujambhi. (Pan. vn. I, 61.)

>H^ bhafij, to break, - WTftf abhufiji or VMlfaf abhdji. (Pan. vi. 4, 33.) c5^ teM, to take, W^fa alambhi or <No6lfa a/«M«. (Pan. vn. i, 69.)

With prepositions c5^ /a6/i always forms Vcjftr alambhi. *&{jan, to beget, — W3ffa o/ant. (Pan. vn. 3, 35.) ^ badh, to strike, — Vffv abadhi. (Pan. vn. 3, 35.)

§ 408. Roots ending in V^am, which admit of intermediate 5[ » (§ 332, 16), do not lengthen their radical vowel. (Pan. vn. 3, 34.)

Tfl*T sam, SM^ifa ajami; "i&^tam, ^HrifH a/ami; but IT yam, W*JTfa aydmi. Panini excepts ^n^fleAam, to rinse, which forms ^TOfa dchdmi. Others add ^n^Jtaro, ^T vam, fTT nam (Pan. vn. 3, 34, vart.).

J 409. Thus the paradigms given in the Atmanepada may be used in the passive of the aorist, with the exception of the 3rd pers. sing. (See p. 182.)

alavishi vjcaTq^f^ alavishvahi ^c^f^^r^ alavishmahi

alavishthdh ^Mrtr«miMi alavishdthdm Wc?f%l4 or ° J alavidhvam or -dhvam aldvi xt^fciMiffi alavishdtdm w&fwn alavishata

The Two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive Passive.

J 410. These formations are identically the same in the passive as in the Atmanepada. Hence

Fut. ^tftnq bodhishye, I shall be known. Cond. (er«fl(V|*M dbodhishye, I should be known. Periphr. Fut. «flfilriUJ bodhitahe, I shall be known. Bened. •^ffrftNta bodhishiyd, May I be known !

Secondary Form of the Aorist, the Two Futures, the Conditional, and Benedictive of Verbs ending in Vowels.

§411. All verbs ending in vowels, in *r^ay, and likewise ^ han, to strike, ^ dns, to see, ^ grah, to take, may form a secondary base (really denominative), being identical with the peculiar third person singular of the aorist passive, described before. Thus from <g lu we have Wc4lfc aldvi, and from this, by treating the final 5 i as the intermediate ^ i, we form,

Sing, i . pers. ^rilfafii aldvi-shi, by the side of «c4rqfM aldvi-shi.

1. NSMlfcm: aldvi-shthdfy, ^wfaai: aldvi-shthdh.

3. WSlfa aldvi, wtfTfa aldvi.

D d

202 PASSIVE. § 411-

Dual r. pers. -?Hc*lP^Hf^ aldvi-shvahi, by the side of »Hc*P«iHP^ alavi-shvahi. i aldvi-shdthdm, — — 'HoiiVmvjj aldvi-shdthdm.

3. ^TcSTfr^Tiri aldvi-shdtdm, — — ^cSfamdl alavi-shdtdm. Plur. i. pers. ^TcSTfaTf^ aldvi-shmahi, by the side of •swfV^ng aldvi-shmahi. %. ^K&ifasafaldvi-dhvamor^^dhvam — ^roFfes«r aldvi-dhvam or °^. 3. »MlP<4Mff aldvi-shata, — ^c-ifMMH aldvi-shata.

Fut. c^TPM^J Idvi-shye, by the side of c*P<^tM Idvi-shye.

Cond. -flrtlfciui aldvi-shye, — ^Jc5p^ aldvi-shye.

Per. Fut. oSlfcrilj Idvi-tdhe, — c^P^ril^ Idvi-tdhe.

Ben. fyrP^t^ Idvi-sMya, — * e3P^*fln Idvi-shiya.

From f% chi, to gather, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. -4Mipjj achdyi; hence Aor. ^T^P^PM achdyishi, besides ^?^f^ acheshi, &(i. Fut. M i P<M^ chdyishye, — ^"^ cheshye. Cond. ^r-cftPnui achdyishye, — SH^ul acheshye. Per. Fut. xjiPuHI^ chdyitdhe, — ^TTT% cheiahe. Ben. ^iP^Mln chdyishiya, — ^"^hl cheshiya.

From inghrd, to smell, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^mfa aghrdyi; hence Aor. SHmHuPM aghrdyishi) besides SHUlPu aghrdsi. Fut. i||Pi|u) ghrdyishye, — TTT^ ghrdsye. Cond. -*{ || | Pn ul aghrdyishye, — ^.syif^ aghrdsye. Per. Fut. MlfMril^ ghrdyitdhe, — UMI^ ghrdtdhe. Ben. uiPijtflii ghrdyishiya, — l||^^ ghrdsiya. From i^ c?^t;n, to hurt, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^wsnft adhvdri; hence

Aor. ^rc^rfcfa adhvdrishi, besides ^Ifi|f^ adhvrishi or ^ruiftft adhvarishi. Fut. t^lfc^ dhvdrishye, — isrftw dhvdrishye. Per. Fut. «nfbn^ dhvdritdhe, — i9%1% dhvdrtdhe.

Ben. «nfbrfa dhvdrishiya, — sq^dhvrishiyaorvstfttvdhvarishtya*. From ^ ^«?z, to kill, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. ^iinP^ aghdni; hence

Aor. ^HlPnPK aghdnishi, besides ( ^ 3 Py Pn avadhishi). Pan.vi.4,62 t- Fut. MlPn^ ghdnishye, — ^Pnul hanishye. Per. Fut. TfiffTdl^ ghdnitdhe, — - ^ffrt hantdhe.

Ben. yifHMl^ ghdnishiya, — (c|Pififln vadhishiya). From ~^5{dri&, to see, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. ^f$t adar&i; hence Aor. ^n^tfa adarsishi, besides ^rfP«f adrikshi. Fut. ^f^^1 darsishye, — fiss drakshye.

Per. Fut. ^Pjlrii^ darsitdhe, — -5^^ drashtdhe. Ben. ^P$|*(hl dar&shtya, — ^l drikshiya.

* See § 332, 5.

f Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n, p. 270, seems to allow ^P* ahasi.

-J 414. PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 203

From TRyrah, to take, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^nft agrdhi; hence Aor. <{{jif]gfa agrdhishi, besides Wil^lfM agrahishi. Fut. ?rrfT*f grdhishye, inf^*f grahishye.

Per. Fut. Trfziri^grdhitdhe, IF&lrik grahitdhe.

Ben. yifgiflq grdhishiya, — i|^1*rlq grahishiya.

From JTT^ ramay, to delight, Caus. of t1^ ram, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. weft arami or ^Klfa ard/we ; hence

Aor. mfcCM aramishi or ^Tifirfa ardmishi, besides «KHfafo aramayishi.

§ 412. Certain verbs of an intransitive meaning take the passive ^* in the 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Atm. Thus IrqClff utpadyate (3rd pers. sing, present of the Atmanepada of a Div verb), he arises, becomes J^Mlty udapddi, he arose, he sprang up ; but it is regular in the other persons, o^MWini udapatsdtdm, they two arose, &c. (Pan. in. i, 60.)

§ 413. Other verbs of an intransitive character take the same form optionally (Pan. HI. 1,61) ;

(<j1u|d dtpyate, he burns, Div, Atm.), «*<1 fM adipi or ^<OrMK adipish^a. jan (*i\*M jdyate, he is born, he is, Div, Atm.; it cannot be formed from Iffy'an (Hu, Par.)> to beget), ^l»Tf*T ajani or ^enifne ajanishta.

(^«W budhyate, he is conscious, Div, Atm.), ^TTtfV abodhi or VJl abuddha. ^L^frt purayati, he fills, Chur.), •« ^T*. apuri or Wjfn? apurishta. (TTRff tdyate, he spreads, Bhu, Atm.; really Div form of Tan), «Mlfa atdyi or atdyishta.

dyate, he grows), xi»qif«l apydyi or -«*mrM8 apydyishta.

CHAPTER XVI.

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE.

$414. The participle of the present Parasmaipada retains the Vikaranas of the ten classes. It is most easily formed by taking the 3rd pers. plur. of the present, and dropping the final ^ i. This gives us the Ahga base, from which the Pada and Bha base can be easily deduced according to general rules (J 182). The accent remains in the participle on the same syllable where it was in the 3rd pers. plur. If the accent falls on the last syllable of the participle, and if that participle does not take a nasal, then all Bha cases and the feminine suffix receive the accent. (Pan. vi. I, 173.) Thus

H^f?T H^TT Nom. S. >T^ Ace. HWTf • Instr. >T^HT &c.

bhdvanti bhdvant bhdvan bhdvantam bhdvatd

tuddnti tuddnt tuddn tuddntam tudatd

dtoyanti dfvyant dirynn divyant am dtryatd

D d 2

204

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE.

$415-

Norn. S. ^K*J«^ Ace. ^TCTIT Instr. •qioiifi &c.

chordyant chordyan chordyantam chordyatd

&c. &c.

jtibvati

sunvdnt

tanvdnt

WtWi^

krmdnt

•s^i^

addnt

juhvat

sunvn

tanvdn "BfalF^

krmdn

addn juhvat

sunvdntam tanvdntam krmdntam addnt am juhvatam

krinatd ^fifrTT&c.

adatd

aJ«^riT (§ 184) juhvatd

rundhdnt

rundhdn

rundhdnt am

rundhatd

Intens. *TT*J^T^ «fl*j<if^ ^JTff "37*j^ni (§ 184)

bdbhuvat bobhuvat b6bhuvatam bobhuvatd

415. The participle of the future is formed on the same principle.

^fatq-^ Norn. S. Hftra^ Ace. H fa *M rf Instr. Hfcufri'l

bhavishydnti bhavishydnt bhavishydn bhavishydntam bhavishyatd

§ 416. The participle of the reduplicated perfect may best be formed by taking the 3rd pers. plur. of that tense. This corresponds, both in form and accent, with the Bha base of the participle, only that the ^ s, as it is always followed by a vowel, is changed to ^ sh. Having the Bha base, it is easy to form the Anga and Pada bases, according to § 204. In forming the Anga and Pada bases, it must be remembered,

1. That roots ending in a vowel, restore that vowel, which, before T: uh,

had been naturally changed into a semivowel.

2. That, according to the rules on intermediate ^ i, all verbs which, without

counting the "3: uh, are monosyllabic in the 3rd pers. plur., insert ^ i. (See Necessary ^ i, § 338, i ; Optional ^ i, § 337, 8.)

3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Ace. Sing. Instr. Plur.

babhuvuh babhuvushd babhuvdn

babhuvddbhih

ninyuh

tutuduh

f^f^t

didivuh

ninyushd tutudushd

didivushd

ninivdn

tJl^SlT^

tutudvdn

f^r^«ji»^

didivdn

nintvdmsam

tutudvdmsam

ninivddbhih

§3^fk»

tutudvddbhih

didivdmsam

didivddbhih

^ftonHTfirafg:

^TIj'nTPgJ ^K*(T*Jt4jlit ^TKTn^TMFT^T^ ^nT^TTTTf^T^T^f

choraydmdsuh choraydmdsushd choraydmdsivan choraydmdsivdmsam choraydmdsivddbhih

3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing.

fTO

sushnvuh

PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 205

Nom. Sing. Ace. Sing. Instr. Plur.

ten lilt

fafag:

chikriyuh

sushuvushd

cT»jm

tenushd

sushuvdn 7ff«TTF*^ tenlvdn

sushuvdihsam

tushuvddbhih •v

dduh juhuvuh

chikriytishd chikriodn

^IJtn ^Nlf^l^

ddushd ddivdn

*J?^^T ^Sc|[c^

juhuvushd juhuvdn

teniva/hsam

P*iftl<iiti

chikriodmsam

rurudhuh

rurudhushd

rurudhvdn

ddivdmsam

juhuvdmsam

rurudhvdmsam

tenivddbhih chikricddbhih

ddivddbhih

*lf '-ffe* juhuvddbhih

§ 417. In five verbs, where the insertion of ^ » before ^ get the following forms :

3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Ace. Sing.

rurudhvddbhih is optional (§ 337, 8), we

Instr. Plur.

or

jagmuh jagmushd jagmivdn or jaganvdn jagmivdrhsam jagmicddbhih

jaghnuh jaghnushd jaghnivan or jaghanvdn jaghnivamsam jaghnivddbhih

vividuh vividushd vividvan or vividivdn vividvdmsam vioidcddbhih

or

vivisuh vivisushd vivisvdn or vivisivdn vivisvdmsam vivifvddbhih

dris dadrisuh dadrisushd dadrisvdn or dadrisivan dadrisvdmsam dadrisvddbhih

§ 418. The participle of the reduplicated perfect Atmanepada is formed by dropping ^T ire, the termination of the 3rd pers. plur. Atm., and substituting ^TT»T dna.

babhdvire — ^L^M: babhuvdndfy chakrire — ^?W^n: chakrdndh dadire — ^R: daddnah, J 419. The participle present Atmanepada has two terminations, — ITR mdna for verbs of the First Division (J 295), ^R dna for verbs of the Second Division.

In the First Division we may again take the 3rd pers. plur. present Atm., drop the termination ^ nte, and replace it by JfRt mdnah.

In the Second Division we may likewise take the 3rd pers. plur. present Atm., drop the termination ^nr ate, and replace it by ^TR! dnafy.

* The same optional forms run through all the Pada and Bha cases.

206 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. J 420-

First Division. bhdva-nte — VRJTR: bhdva^mdnafy

tudd-nte — IJ^TRJ tudd-mdnah divya-nte— ^Nmr^r: divya-mdnah

chordya-nte — iJUquUU: chordya-mdnah tudyd-nte — ^HMt tudyd-mdnah

bhdvdya-nte — HN+HM: bhdvdya-mdnah

Des. ^^bubhusha-nte — ^JWT&: bubhusha-mdnah

Second Division.

sunv-dte— g^R: sunv-dndfy ^rnreff dpnuv-yte — ^MI^HM: dpnuv-dn*

: tanv-dnd

krm-dte — jfftaiFT: krin-dndfy ad-dte — ^f'^HS ad-dndh

uhv-ate — ^3^1 ~*{\ juhv-dnah, rundh-dte — %VT»f: rundh-dndfy

Int. ^ft^l^ bodhuyd-nte — "^JtWHt bobhuyd-mdnah

§ 420. The participle of the future in the Atmanepada is formed by adding : mdnah in the same manner.

bhavishyd-nte — ^P^U|Hri!j: bhavishyd-mdnafy R neshyd-nte — T^iMHRd: neshyd-mdnah totsyd-nte — iftwui^: totsyd-mdnah i edhishyd-nte — ^Puu(H|iii: edhishyd-mdnah

J 421. The participles of the present and future passive are formed by adding *TRt mdnah in the same manner. bhiiyd-nte — IJJJHH* bhtiyd-mdnafy

^i4^ budhyd-nte — IURT^T: budhyd-mdnah

stuyd-nte — ^TRTT: stuyd-mdnah

kriyd-nte — f&q*TO; Jcriyd-mdnafy HT^ bhdvyd-nte— HTsq^R: bhdvyd-mdnah

bhdvishyd-nte- — bhdvishyd-mdnah

ndyishyd-nte — ndyishyd-mdnah Or like the Part. Put. Atm.

The Past Participle Passive in 7H tah and the Gerund in i^T tva.

J 422. The past participle passive is formed by adding IT: tdh or eft ndb to the root. ^ fai, ^r?f: kritdh, done, masc. ; ^f?n kritd, fern. ; epf kritdm, neut. <J[ /i<, <g«T: lundh, cut.

This termination 7T ^a is, as we saw, most opposed to the insertion of inter- mediate ^ iy so much so that verbs which may form any one general tense with or without ^ i, always form their past participle without it. The number of verbs which must insert ^ i before if ta is very small. ($ 332, D.)

Besides being averse to the insertion of intermediate ^ i} the participial termination H ta, having always the Udatta, is one of those which have a tendency to weaken verbal bases. (See $ 344.)

$ 423. The gerund of simple verbs is formed by adding FTT tva to the root. ?f kri, "ag^R kritva3 having done, "^pu, Tg^lputvd or, from Tf^pun, MfaHl pavitva, having purified.

The rules as to the insertion of the intermediate ^ i before ?=rT tvd have been given before. With regard to the strengthening or weakening of the

-§ 430. PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 207

base, the general rule is that WT tvd without intermediate ^ i weakens, with intermediate ^ i strengthens the root (Pan. i. 2, 18). It always has the Udatta. In giving a few more special rules on this point, it will be con- venient to take the terminations w ta and iWT tvd together, as they agree to a great extent, though not altogether.

I. H: t ah "in I F7T t v;\, with intermediate ? i.

§ 424. If IT. tah takes intermediate 3[ », it may in certain verbs produce Guna. In this case the Guna before r^T tvd is regular. ^ft si, to lie down, ^|f<4ni fayitdh (Pan. i. 2, 19) ; 31 fora i $ayitvd.

avid, to sweat, ^jtyrit sveditdh or (V<lf|! svinndh ; ^ff^HI sveditvd. mtrf, to be soft, ^f^TTJ meditdh ; i^ni meditvd. k thrill. to drip, 8^1^ lit kshveditdh; a^i^rm kshveditvd. , to dare, vftlf* dharshitdh; Vnti^T dharshitvd.

, to bear, fftwt marshltdh (patient), (Pan. i. 2, 20) ; Hf*li«ll marshitvd. purify, ^f^lf* pavtidh (Pan. I. 2, 22) ; MP«ii<n^amW, from ^[^/wn. See No. 156. § 425. Verbs with penultimate T K may or may not take Guna before Tf fa with inter- mediate ^ *, if they are used impersonally.

Wi{dyut, to shine, ^fnn dyutitdm or iTl Pn n dyotitdm, it has been shining. (Pan. i. 2, ai.)

§ 426. If WT tod takes intermediate ^«, it requires, as a general rule, Guna (Pan. i. 2,

18), or at all events does not produce any weakening of the base. ^crtV, to exist, qfrfrti

vartitvd. ^^srams, to fall, tjiftfrm sramsitod (Pan. i. 2, 23). ^ pu (i. e. ^^pun)y to

purify, sfqrqi pavitvd (Pan. i. 2, 22).

Verbs, however, beginning with consonants, and ending in any single consonant except *^y or ^t>, preceded by ^, "^ror "3", "31 u, take Guna optionally (Pan. i. 2, 26) : Ip^cfyttf, to shine, tflfriril dyotitvd or '^PriHl dyutitvL The same option applies to Jfitrish, to thirst ; IJ^mmA, to bear; ^5^A:m, to attenuate (Pan. 1. 2, 25) ; "jfar^T trishitvd or nf^rqi tarshitvd.

§ 427. Though taking intermediate ^ *, rTT tvd does not produce Guna, but, if possible, weakens the base, in ^ rud, to cry, tjRrqi ruditvd (Pan. I. 2, 8) ; f^ md, to know, (%f<;rm viditvd; Ig^mush, to steal, ^fm^l mushitvd ; *J^ gra.h, to take, J]^1r«li grihitvd; ifcmrid, to delight, ijf^r^T mriditvd (Pan. i. 2, 7); ^ mrirf, to rub, «jH;i«ii mriditvd; ^TV^urfA, to cover, JjPviHI gudhitvd; f^iS^&fr/, to hurt, f^iP^IHI klisitvd; ^vad, to speak, uditvd; '3R(vas, to dwell, ^fm^fi ushitvd.

§ 428. Roots ending in "^fA or "^pA, preceded by a nasal, may or may not drop the nasal before WT tvd (Pan. i. 2, 23); iifVrti granthitvd or 44 fan i grathitvat, having twisted.

The same applies to the roots ^^vafich, to cheat, and rJ^/ancA, to pluck (Pan. I. 2, 24); vanchitvd or ^f-Hr^ I vachitvd.

II. Kl tah and WT tva, without intermediate ^ i.

§ 429. Roots ending in nasals lengthen their vowel before WJ tah and r^T ted (Pan. vi. 4, 15). SH* saw, to rest, ^TTTr: sdntdh, T^rfi^T sdntvd.

JfP{ Arram, to step, may or may not lengthen its vowel before i^T tvd (Pan. vi. 4, 18). WT kram, "ZRtf: krdntdh, jfclHI krdntvd or "air^T krantvd; also ^iP»irGU kramitvd.

§ 430. The following roots, ending in nasals, drop them before WJ taA and WT fp< vi. 4, 37-)

208 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. § 431-

TJ^yam, to check, TcH yatdh,Tfft[yatvd*; T^\rom, to sport, TTtt ratdh, TJ^T ratvd; *R namt to bend, 'ffttnatdh, ^^[natvdj '%*fkan, to kill, ^TfTt AafrfA, J&znhatvctj T* gam, to

/ '

go, TlTt gatdh, lli^R gdtvdj l&^man, to think, *HTt matdh, IfFRmatvdj "^^van, to ask; TT^faw, to stretch, fTTH fa£a$, ffi^T tatvdj and the other verbs of the Tan class, ending in 5^w.

Note — Of the same verbs those ending in «^w drop the nasal before the gerundial Hya and insert l^tj THTTT pramdtya (Pan. vi. 4, 38) : those ending in 1(m may or may not drop the nasal before the gerundial Hya; 11*171 pragdtya or WFRtpragdmya.

§ 431. The following verbs drop final *{n, and lengthen the vowel.

^ff^jan, to bear, ^Ttfljdtah, *\\ri\jdtvd: W^san, to obtain, OTtTi sdtah, '*Hril sdtvd; ^t^ khan, to dig, ^Trf: khdtah, Tsllril khdtvd.

1. Roots ending in t| cM, or "^v, substitute 3^^ and "3i w. (Pan. vi. 4, 19.)

, to ask, TJFI prishtah (§ 125), iffl prishtvd; f^div, to play, fpTJ dyunah, dyutvd.

2. Roots ending in "^ rc^A, or ^r», drop their final consonant. (Pan. vi. 4, 21.)

l^murchh, to faint, ^J murtah; ^ #wr», to strike, wftj turnah.

§ 432. The following verbs change their ^v with the preceding or following vowel into ^i u. (Pan. vi. 4, 20.)

, to ail, *T*!fcjurnah, *{r§T jurtvd; 13Ttvar, to hasten, "^t turnah, Hr^T turtvd; iv, to dry, ^JTH srutah, t|r«l I srutvdj *8*{av, to protect, ^Tft wtaA, wrqi w^a; , to bind, 1JTH wi^aA, ^^r^Tmw^.

§ 433. Roots ending in ^ ai substitute ^TT d; ^ dhyai, to meditate, "UTTfT: dhydtah, dhydtvd: or ^ I ,• T gai, to sing, *ft?H ^^«^, Iftr5TT ^i^a. Final TJ e and ^TT a, too, are changed to \i; fftpd, to drink, tjtff J pitah, M! rq i pitvd; v dhe, to suck, Vhftt dhitah,

§ 434. The following roots change their final vowel into ^ i. ^ do, to cut, f^TTt rf«7«^, f^rfl c?z^a (Pan. vn. 4, 40) ; ^ft so, to finish, ftfWJ sitah,

5toa; *TTma, to measure, ftlft rnzYa/^, (*ii«l! mitvd; l&l sthd, to stand, f&Tftl sthitah, f^Tr^T sthitvdj VT rf^a, to place, f^cf: AzYa^, f^T Ai^a (Pan. vn. 4, 42); ^T M, to leave (^*T: Mwa^), f^r=lT Az^a (Pan. vii. 4, 43).

§ 435. 'JJTWo, to sharpen, and «£t chho, to cut, substitute ^ i, or take the regular ^TT a. $ft so, %JT: AVa^ or ^TTrT: sdtah, f^JHI si'^a or $llril sa^a (Pan. vii. 4, 41).

§ 436. Exceptional forms :

<JT da, to give, forms ^: dattah^, c^STT dattvd (Pan. vii. 4, 46). sphdy, to grow, forms ^FRii'KJ sphitah (Pan. vi. i, 22).

ai, to call (with Tt pra), forms Mfeilri: prastitah (Pan. vi. i, 23) and Trert??: prastimah (Pan. vin. 2, 54).

/ai, to curdle, forms ^ft»Tt sinah, and ^ftrT» s^a^, cold ; but 'H^flT^J samsydnah, rolled up (Pan. vi. i, 24, 25).

, to grow, forms fft^lpinah; but "OfR: pydnah after certain prepositions (Pan. vi. i, 28). § 437. The verbs which take Samprasarana before Kt tah and WT taahave been mentioned

* See verbs without intermediate 3[ t. (§ 332, 13, and 16.)

t After prepositions ending in vowels, ^ da may be dropt, and the final 3[ « and ^ w of a preposition lengthened. H^rtl pradattdh, fffil prattah; "Q^'* sudattah, ^^J suttah.

-§ 442. PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 209

in § 393» as undergoing the same change in the benedictive and passive. ^WtwicA, to speak, T^K uktah, T15T uktvd, &c.

§ 438. Roots which can lose their nasal (§ 345, 10) lose it before WI tah and ill tod. H^ srams, to tear, ^RrT; srastah, tlMI srastvd.

But ^fi^ s*anrf, to stride, forms its gerund 3&r4l skantvd, and ^£ *yanrf, to flow, FT7VT *yantarf (Pan. vi. 4, 3 1 ), although their ^ n is otherwise liable to be lost. Part. ^R: skannah, fQftl syannah.

•T^na/, to perish, and roots ending in l{j, otherwise liable to nasalization, retain the nasal optionally before FIT tvd (Pan. vi. 4, 32). tT^T namshtvd or ^T nash(vd (but only •Wlnashtah); TW rahktvd or T1!T raktvd (but only TJKraktah)-, If^majj, to dive, mahktvd or HliT maktvd (Pan. VH. i, 60).

f 439. Causal verbs form the participle after rejecting *R ay a ; kdrayati, lifter: kdritah, but ^Rf^^T kdrayitvd.

§ 440. Desiderative verbs form the participle and gerund regularly; PM*Wrr chikirshati, Pqofclfiirf: chikirshitah, facfcirQ^t chikirshitvd.

§ 441. Intensive verbs Atm. of roots ending in vowels form the participle and gerund regularly ; ^jftift chekriyate, 3a>lfqrf: chekriyitah, ^f»1

chekriyitvd. After roots ending in consonants the intensive ^ y is dropt ; ^m bebhidyate, ^fafijrr. bebhiditah, ^f»rf^T bebhiditvd.

Intensive verbs Par. form the participle and gerund regularly ; charkarti, ^f3iH: charkritah, ^4f<HI charkaritvd.

*TJ nah instead of IT: tah iw Me Pa«^ Participle.

§ 442. Certain verbs take tK w«A instead of m faj in the past participle passive, provided they do not take the intermediate ^ i.

1. Twenty-one verbs of the Kri class, beginning with ^ Id, to cut, <£%:

lunah (Dhatupatha 31, 13 ; Pan. viu. 2, 44). The most important are, >jtf: dhunah, shaken ; ifhr: jinah, decayed. Some of them come under the next rule.

2. Twelve verbs of the Div class, beginning with ^sti (Dhatupa^ha 26, 23—35 ;

Pan. viu. 2, 45). The most important are, g?r: dunah, pained ; dinah, wasted ; jrfai: prinah, loved.

3. Verbs ending in ^ n, which is changed into $*.ir or ^ dr. 'j

W^\ stirnah, spread ; ^rtw: birnah, injured ; ^S: dirnah, torn ; jirnah, decayed.

4. Verbs ending in ^ d ; fk^ bhid, f*T$i bhinnah, broken ; ft^ chhid,

chhinnah, cut. But ^ mad, iTO mattah, intoxicated. In g^ nud, to push, f^ vid, to find, and ^ und, to wet, the substitution is optional (Pan. viu. 2, 56) ; »J^: nunnah or »pr: nuttah.

5. Verbs which native grammarians have marked in the Dhatupa^ha with

E e

210 PARTICIPLES, GEKUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. § 443-

an indicatory ^rt o; ^W bhuj (^ft bhujo, Dhatupatha 28, 124), to bend, ^T7f: bhugnah.

6. Verbs beginning with a double consonant, one of them being a semivowel,

and ending in ^1 d, or J? e, T* at, ^ o, changeable to ^n d (Pan. vin. 2, 43) 5 fl ^fl*> JJW gldnafy, faded. Except ^ dhyai, to meditate, w?r: dhydtah (Pan. viu. 2, 57) ; ^TT £%^, to proclaim, WTW: khydtah. In ^(trai, to protect, TRghrd, to smell, the substitution is optional ; grot trdnah or ^nr: fr*a/0# (Pan. viu. 2, 56.)

7. Miscellaneous participles in «T: wa/L- ^S: ptirnah, only if derived from

*£§pilr, and then with an optional form ^fTTH ptiritah (Pan. vii. 2, 27); while the participle of T^pri is said to be trS: purtah (Pan. viu. 2, 57) ; ^far: kshinah, from % &s^, to waste; ^R: dytinah, from f^.dit;, to play, (not to gamble, where it is inn dyutah) * ; cIP^Tt lagnah, from c^T /a^, to be in contact with (Pan. vii. 2, 18); also from c*^ laj, to be ashamed; ^fhr: sinah and 9^H: sydnah, coagulated, but $ffa: s^a^, cold; ^Nr: hrmafy or ^tlf: hritah, ashamed (Pan. viu. 2, 56).

§ 443. Native grammarians enumerate certain words as participles which, though by their meaning they may take the place of participles, are by their formation to be classed as adjectives or substantives rather than as participles. Thus "T^it pakvdh, ripe ; ^^ilsushJcah, dry (Pan.vi. i, 206); "tflRtkshdmdh,weak', T£$Kkrisdh,thiYi', H tctl 1 1 prastimdh , crowded; "J^: phulldh, expanded; isffat kshivdh, drunk, &c.

J 444. By adding the possessive suffix "^vat (§ 187) to the participles in w ta and «T nay a new participle of very common occurrence is formed, being in fact a participle perfect active. Thus ^K\ kritdh, done, becomes kritdvdn, one who has done, but generally used as a definite verb. ^ sa katam kritavdn, he has made the mat ; or in the feminine *rr sd kritavati, and in the neuter fTrepTT^^ kritavat. They are regularly declined throughout like adjectives in

Gerund in "q ya.

j 445. Compound verbs, but not verbs preceded by the negative particle ^T a, take IT ya (without the accent), instead of ?^T tvd. Thus, instead of *£3\bMtva, we find H*$$sambMya; but ^rftfi^T ajitvd, not having conquered.

j 446. Verbs ending in a short vowel take m tya instead of if ya. f*f to conquer, fartijitva, having conquered; but f%fww vijitya. ^ bhri, to carry, vp^T bhritvd ; but TOfFI sambhritya, having collected. Except frsy kshi, which forms TRsfaprakshiya, having destroyed (Pan. vi. 4, 59).

* Pan. viu. 2, 49, allows tJ»T cfywwa in all senses of the root f^ div, except in that of gambling; see Dhatupatha 26, i. ?J«T dyuna and <4P<.^H( paridyuna, pained, come from a different root, f^f div, to pain, Dhatupatha 33, 51.

-§453- VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 211

§ 447. Causative bases with short penultimate vowel, keep the causative suffix ^H{ ay before T ya (Pan. vi. 4, 56): WlWlfri sahyamdyati, *l«i*i«H sunyamdyya, having caused to assemble. Otherwise the causative suffix is, as usual, dropt : ifiMifii tdrdyati, nn\*\pratarya, having caused to advance. UHnifff prdpdyati forms UTO prapya and HIM*** prdpdyya, having caused to reach (Pan. vi. 4, 57).

$ 448. The verbs called "*J ghu (§ 392 *), *TT md, to measure, WT »thd, to stand, *TT gd, to sing or to go, TJT pd, to drink or to protect, ^T hd, to leave, ?ft *o, to finish, take ^JT d, not ^ ( (Pan. vi. 4, 69). ^ do, to cut, ^H^TO avaddya ; OT sthd, HWR prasthdya. But TRpd, to drink, may form Jim*f prapaya or wf\ft praptya (Sar.).

§ 449. Verbs ending in ^m, which do not admit of intermediate ^ », may or may not drop their *Tm. Ex. «T^«am, to bow, Vk*$+*\prandmya or H<u m pru ndty a ; T^^am, to go, ^SMIW| agamy a or WMIi^ dgdtya. Other verbs ending in nasals, not admitting of intermediate \i, or belonging to the Tan class, always drop their final nasal. Ex. ^Aan, Tf&lprahdtya; "ifr^ tan, nnm pratdtya^. ?f»^ khan and v&[jan form ^n^I khdnya or ^TT khdya, or "SfR j/ya.

§ 450. Verbs ending in ^n change it to fr tr, and, after labials, into "3Rdr. Ex. vittrya, having crossed ; ^p sampurya, having filled.

§ 451. Certain verbs are irregular in not taking Samprasarana. Thus % ve, to weave, forms Wmpravdya; "^\jyd, to fail, d M -rt| N upajydya ; ^vye, to cover, H<**m pravydya, but after ijftpari optionally ^ f^^M I *1 parivydya or ^ft^^I parivJy a (Pan. vi. i, 41—44).

§ 452. Some verbs change final ^ i and ^« into ^TT d. Thus *ft mf, ^liifff rntndti, he destroys, and fH mi, f*l«l\fff mindti, he throws, form f«i*ii*i nimdya; ^ ctf, to destroy, upaddya; c5^ /I, to melt, optionally f«lc6l*Ttn/tfya or f=ic4l*lt?i%a (Pan. vi. i, 50-51).

CHAPTER XVII.

VERBAL ADJECTIVES. Verbal Adjectives in cf^: tavyah (or tavyah), ^tfhi: aniyah, a/w/ IK yah

k (or yah and yah). § 453- These verbal adjectives (called Kiitya) correspond in meaning to the Latin participles in ndus, conveying the idea that the action expressed by the verbs ought to be done or will be done. <*ri^: kartavyah, <*uul4U karaniyah, cfir§: kdryah J, faciendus. Ex. VHMm «F^: dharmas tvayd kartavyah, right is to be done by thee.

t Versus memorials of these verbs : ifH3(*H*i1 ^fcTCg^rWT irfHHfn: I rPJ

% Another suffix for forming verbal adjectives is ^cOT eliinah, which is, however, of rare occurrence; Tf^pach, to cook, wf<?J*n TRiC pachelimd mdshdh, beans fit to cook; bhidelimali, brickie, fragile. (Pan. in. i, 96, vart.)

E e 2

212

VEEBAL ADJECTIVES.

$454-

J 454» In order to form the adjective in ffst, future, and instead of KT td put risq: tavyah.

^THT ddtd ^TW^ft ddtdvyah

TTtfT gdtd TTrf^J gdtavyah

STcT^K jetavyah

: tavyah, take the periphrastic

Thus ^T c?o, to give n gai, to sing f^Tjz, to conquer *£.bhu, to be of kri, to do /rl, to grow old

kshvid, to sweat

^J>I budh, to know i, to draw meeze

gdniyah *m*f\q:jaya

'TO ^eyaA

*?ferTT bhavitd

bhavitavyah : kartavyah

t bhavaniyah karantyah

: kdryc

kshveditd kshveditavyah kshvedaniyah kshvcdyah

bodhitd «H f^l H'«M J bodhitavyah «ft V*t1 **i bodhaniyah

kuchitd '^i P«i ri **|: kuchitavyah ^^l«fl<4t kuchaniyah

uchyc

mih, to sprmkle T^T medhd , to go 'TTfT Crania

rashtd

Caus.

•nV, to see hs, to bite ,to cause to be I^bubhush, to wish to be

^FT damshtd bhdvayitd

medhavyah gantavyah drashtavyah damshtavyah

darsaniyah • damsaniyah

bubhushitd

bhavaniyah

^rcfhr.

bubhushanfyah

bhdvyah

I^T:

bubhushyah

Int.-sft^bobhu Int. ^fftrir bebhidy

bobhuyitd bobhavitd bebhiditd

bobhuyaniyah

^riH«f«f)^;

bobhavaniyap,

^i^^rflu:

bebhidaniyah

bobhuyyah

«nH«qt

bobhavyah

bebhidy ah

§455. In order to form the adjective in ^Trfhj: aniyah, it is generally sufficient to take the root as it appears before inq: tavyah, omitting, however, intermediate ^ i, and putting ^»rfa: aniyah instead. Guna-vowels before ^nl^t aniyah have, of course, the semivowel for their final element, and there can be no occasion for the intermediate 3[ i. The ^n( ay of the causative and the ^ y after consonants of intensives and other derivative verbs are, as usual, rejected, '^^budh, ^tvqfif bodhayati, ^tVTfat bodhani- yah ; f>?<* bhidy "srftrenr bebhidy ate, "3rf*r<*rffan bebhidaniyah.

§ 456. In order to form the adjective in irt yah (i&jinyat, &c.) it is

1 karshtd or krashtd. 2 karshtavyah or krashtavyah. 3 § 456, 3.

4 Never takes Guna (§ 345, note), except before terminations which have This termination is

or

-$ 456- VBKBAL ADJECTIVES. 213

generally sufficient to take the adjective in ^nffar. aniyah and to cut off ani. Thus HqHl*T. bhav-am-yah becomes H*n bhavyah; ^rfffffar. chet-ani-yah, %W: chetyah; qq«flq: vay-ani-yah, $n: veyah; «f|i|Hl<j: bodh-ani-yah, ^m: bodhyah. A few more special rules, however, have here to be mentioned :

1. Final ^TT a, * e, $ cz, *ft o, become * e. ^T rfd, to give, ^itf deyah ;

itaai, to sing, *m: geyah. (Pan. in. i, 98; vi. 4, 65.)

2. Final ^i and ^z take Guna, as before vpfaaniya; filji, ^W.jeyah, to

be conquered, different from ^m: jayyafy, conquerable ; f% kshi, to destroy, ^^: ksheyah, different from Tspzn kshayyah, destructible (Pan. vi. i, 81). Final T u and 15 ^, under the same circumstances, are changed to *r^ avy or, after wsr^r avafya, when a high degree of necessity is expressed, to ^n^ dv; H*i: bhavyah or ^^^m«<: avasya- bhdvyah ; f^w ^friHl m^ viprena §uchind bhdvyam, a Brahman must be pure. Final 7 u if it appears as T^ uv before VMl*J anfya, appears as ^ u before °nya; i^gu, to sound, 'NHl ^ guvaniya, i^Qguya.

3. Final ^ n and ^£r£ before *r: ya/t, but not before w»fN: aniyah, take

Vriddhi instead of Guna. wA: kdryah ; trnfc pdryah. (Pan, in. i, 120, 124.)

4. Penultimate ^ ri, which takes Guna before vfiMlq: aniyah, does not take

Guna before ^: yaA, with few exceptions ; ^m: vridhyah, "%$m dri&yah (Pan. in. i, no). But tf^krip, to do, forms W&T. kalpyah; ^(^chrit, to kill, ^5: chartyah (Pan. in. i, no) ; ^vrish, to sprinkle, ^q: vrishyah or ^q: varshyah (Pan. in. i, 120), Penultimate ^re becomes ^^; c|7^ ferity «|i^: kirtyab.

5. Penultimate ^e and g'w take Guna before ij: ya/^, as before w?ffan aniyah;

fs^vid, ^ivedyah; yj^tush, $fta: soshyafy.

6. Penultimate ^r a, prosodially short, before m yah, but not before WH*N:

aniyah, is lengthened, unless the final consonant is a labial (Pan. in. i, 98; 124); ^ has, to laugh, *TRm: hdsyah ; ^ vah, TRH vdhyah. But $r^ s«jo, to curse, ^"0^ sapyah ; cyK /a6A, c?«i: labhyah. The ^J a remains likewise short in ^pw: fakyah, from ^ ^a^, to be able ; in *T?T. sahyah, from ^sah, to bear (Pan. in. i, 99), and some other verbs*. ^f^khan forms WTt kheyah (Pan. in. i, in), which, however, may be derived from ^ khai, to dig ; ^ hant W. vadhyah or Tmq: ghdtyah.

* Panini (in. i, 100) mentions only 1^ gad, T^ mad, ^^ char, 1H yam, if used without preposition. The Sarasvati (in. 7, 7) includes among the Sakadi verbs, $T^ s'ak, ^ sah,

214: VERBAL ADJECTIVES, § 457-

§ 457. The following are a few derivatives in *tt yah, formed against the general rules: 3Ji| guh, to hide, may form iTS'.guhyah or llt^K gohyah (Pan. in. 1, 109, Kasika);

to cherish, ^fmijushyahj ?J^ graJi, to take, *l^l grihyah, after TTHT prati and op*/ ^ vad, to speak, 73TJ udyah, in composition (Pan. in. i, 106; 114. «Jf*TT brahmodyd kathd, a story told by a Brahman) ; *J, bM, to be, &JIJ bhuya, in composition (Pan. in. i, 107. ^T^ TH* brahmabMyamgatah,&Yr\.ved atBrahmahood) j ^T^sas, to rule, f^T^T* s'ishyah, pupil.

We find IT £ inserted before *l« f/a$, in analogy to the gerunds in 1 jra, in the following verbs :

^ i, to go, ^mt ityah; ^ S^M> *° praise, ^JW* stwtyah- <3^vri, to choose, ^WJ vrityah; "<£ c?n, to regard, ^Wt drityah; *[ Z»^ri, to bear, ^m: bhrityahj *£ kri, to do, ejfiq: krityah. But many of these forms are only used in certain senses, and must not be considered as supplanting the regular verbal adjectives. Thus ^TJ guhyah and *fltjn gohyah both occur ; g^i: duhyah and <ftT?n dohyah, &c.

§ 458. Verbs ending in ^T ch or «^./ change their final consonant into cF A: or 'T ^ if the following 1 ya (nycit) requires the lengthening of the vowel. "^Spach, Hin«w pdkyamj ^pT bhuj, to enjoy, >rW bhogyam, but >;ft5*f bhojyam, what is to be eaten (Pan. vn. 3, 69).

There are, however, several exceptions. Verbs beginning with a guttural do not admit the substitution of gutturals. Likewise the following verbs: ^^^fl/, TR^ydch, ^T^rMcA, TR^ pravach, ^^ricJi, m*{tyaj, '%*{puj, ^H^ aj, '3*{vraj, ^^vanch (to go). Thus Mii^i ydjyam, *TRT ydchyam, Xt^T rochyam, n<4 \ •*! pravdchyam, W3? archyam, wirq tydjyam, (Prakriya-Kaumudi, p. 55 b).

Infinitive in W turn.

J 459. The infinitive is formed by adding g to&, which has no accent. The base has the same form as before the KT ta of the periphrastic future, or before the K*n\ tdvyah of the verbal adjective. «|*r budh, ^ftfVTJ bodhitum. (See J 454.) Ex. ^ratf ^ ^affrr krishnam drashtum vrajati, he goes to see Krishna ; >f «RTc5: bhoktum kdlah, it is time to eat.

Verbal Adverb.

J 460. By means of the unaccentuated suffix ^f am, which, as a general rule, is added to that form which the verb assumes before the passive ^ i (3rd pers. sing. aor. pass., J 403), a verbal adverb is formed. From *p^ bhuj, to eat, *hr bhojam ; from in pd, to drink, irni pdyam. Ex. ^ vfof 33Tfcf agre bhojam vrajati, having first eaten, he goes. This verbal adverb is most frequently used twice over. Ex. *ThT »rftf ?T»ffiT bhojam bhojam vrajati, having eaten and eaten, he goes (Pan. in. 4, 22). It is likewise used at the end of compounds; %VcfiTt dvaidhamkdram, having divided ; TincRTt uchchaihkdram, loudly.

-§ 46«- CAUSATIVE VEBBS. 215

CHAPTER XVIII.

CAUSATIVE VERBS.

J 461. Simple roots are changed into causal bases by Guna or Vriddhi of their radical vowel, and by the addition of a final ^ i. The root is then treated as following the Bhu class, so that ^i appears in the special tenses as ^Tir ay a. Thus \^bM becomes mfa bhdvi and ^T^Trrif bhdvdyati, he causes to be ; ^V budh becomes ^fv bodhi and qtaiifri bodhdyati, he causes to know. The accent is on the a of dya.

§ 462. The rules according to which the vowel takes either Guna or Vriddhi are as follows :

1. Final \i and \i, 'Su and "31 tf, ^ ri and ^ri take Vriddhi. Thus f*3H smi, to laugh, wi<4<*fci smdyayati, he makes laugh.

»ft m, to lead, niMMPn ndyayati, he causes to lead. ^plu, to swim, £i i q <4 fff pldvayati, he makes swim. V^bhu, to be, ^m^ffl bhdvayati, he causes to be. "8f kri, to make, cBK^fn kdrayati, he causes to make. cjT kri, to scatter, cFK^frt kdrayati, he causes to scatter.

2. Medial ^«, TM, ^n, "<5& followed by a single consonant, take Guna; ^rf becomes

Thus t?fc?, to know, q^n vedayati, he makes know.

fU budh, to know, «uv*4rn bodhayati, he makes know. ^Tff A;ri/, to cut, ^R«4ifl kartayatiy he causes to cut. JSj^klip, to be able, «n«4Mfn kalpayati, he renders fit.

3. Medial ^T a followed by a single consonant is lengthened, but there are many exceptions. TfffJ sac?, to sit, *u^*ffn sddayati, he sets. , to fall, ^TTHifir pdtayati, he fells.

Exceptions :

I. Most verbs ending in W^aw do not lengthen their vowel : ^TPTgram, to go, 'i*mfii gamayati, he makes go. "aW kram, to stride, ai^MPn kramayati, he causes to stride. Verbs in ^X^am which do lengthen the vowel are, cli^Jtam, to desire, 4rH^?f kdmayate, he desires; Caus. cFTTTfiT kdmayati, he makes

desire.

^SW am, to move, wiTn amati, he moves ; Caus. ^i*iMPn dmayati, he makes move. ^*T cAam, to eat, ^nrfTT chamati, he eats ; Caus. SIH*lfH chdmayati, he makes eat.

, if it means to see, ^IIWjflT sdmyati, he sees; Caus. ^n*mf« sdmayati, he shows; but ^nPjflrr samayati, he quiets.

, unless it means to eat, Tf^fftyachchhati; Caus. «<i*iMfiiyamffyaf»*, he extends; but *IH*|(H yamayati, he feeds.

216

CAUSATIVE VERBS.

$462-

«TH nam, to bend, optionally lengthens its vowel if it is used without a preposition ; *f 1*1*4 fr ndmayati or «i*f^Pff namayati, he bends. If preceded by a preposition, the vowel always ought to remain short (Dh. P. 19, 67).

^^vam, to vomit, optionally lengthens its vowel if it is used without a preposition; q«*i<4Pn vdmayati or ^*T*tfrf vamayati, he makes vomit. If preceded by a preposition, the vowel always ought to remain short (Dh. P. 19, 67)*.

II. A class of verbs collected by native grammarians, and beginning with ftf ghat (Dh. P. 19, i), do not lengthen their vowel. The same verbs may optionally retain their short vowel in the 3rd pers. sing, aorist of the causative passive (§ 405). The following list contains the more important among these verbs :

CAUSATIVE.

Eoot.

1 . THf ghat , to strive

2. ^T^T vyath, to fear

3. Tf^prath, to be famous

4. TEf<2[ mrad, to rub

5. "a^ro;), to pity

6. FTC £yar, to hurry

7. W^j^«r, to burn with fever

8. «nr nat, to dance

9. ^T*^*rfltfA, to kill

10. ^prJtMm, to actf

11. *3c*jval, to shine "f"

12. W smn, to regret

3rd Pers. Sing. Pres. Par. ghatayati vyathayati ' prathayati mradayati krapayati tvarayati ' jvarayati natayati srathayati pravanayati

prajvalayati smarayati

13. ? c?n, to respect, (not to tear) <;<«4fa darayati

14. ^IT sra, to boil

15. '^TTjna, to slay, to please, to

sharpen (?), to perceive 1 6. T^ cAa?, to tremble 17. T^ mac?, to rejoice, &c. 1 8. £el^c?^aw,to sound, to ring

19. ^<^ dal, to cut

20. ^W vaZ, to cover

21. Hdc^skhal, to drop

22. W^trap, to be ashamed

23. "^ kshai, to wane

srapayati

chalayati madayati dhvanayati dalayati (optional) valayati (optional)

skhalayati (optional) trapayati «jM<4flT kshapayati

3rd Pers. Sing. Aor. Passive. aghati

avyathi aprathi amradi akrapi atvdri

ajvari

or H 1 5e|"I fc^ prdjvali

asmari

or ^i. adari or ^TOTnJ asrapi or %i9rftf ajnapi

achali amadi adhvani adali

or or

or or or

or 'iHjaiPco askhali or ^TGtl PM atrapi or ^HJtP'if akshdpi

avali

* Dhatupatha 19, 67.

-^ '««riM «i IT^ ^MHI*i5IT^ft) . It seems indeed that the verbs without prepositions only, are optionally mit (i.e. short-voweled), while with prepositions they are mit, and nothing else. See, however, Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, p. 317, note. t Without a preposition, and optionally with a preposition. See note *.

-§ 4^3- CAUSATIVE VERBS. 217

24. *{*{jan (Div), nasci unufnjanayati ^BWfa or^miPn ajani

25. **[jri (Div), to grow old »n,MPn.;arflya/« "v »i P< or V 41 ft. ajari

26. T»frafl;(Bhu),tohunt,todye* <.n *4 fit or Tl|0 rajayati or raft/a- ^i<JPi or Tujfuartf/i 27- £H 3^t of flfftoi, to fade yssPn or «JiMMPn glapayati Tiyl% or ^*|ifM apiapi

28. ^WT *n4f, to wash ^MMPn or WIHMPfl gnapayati W^ or *!%HfVj asnapi

29. ^«J rant, to cherish flMin or qif^Pn vanayati ^mi«i or ^iqiPn ff»an»

30. TR^/jAaw, to go lh*UMlTT<)r 4n*UMllf(?)Jp/t«w«ya/* v Hi(Vl or ^i mifVj aphani

Note — Some of these verbs are to be considered as mil, i. e. as having a short vowel in the causative, if employed in the sense given above j while if they occur again in other sections of the Dhatupa^ha and with different meanings, they may be conjugated likewise as ordinary verbs.

§ 463. Some verbs form their causative base anomalously :

I. Nearly all verbs ending in *n a, and most ending in * e, ^ ai, isft o, change-

able to ^na, insert i{p before the causal termination. (Pan. vii. 3, 36.) Thus ^r da, to give, ^rflT daddti, he gives ; ^m^Prt ddpayati, he causes

to give.

^ de, to pity, ^q^ day ate, he pities ; ^iMilfrt ddpayati, he causes pity. ^t do, to cut, ^rfw ddti or ^rfff dyati, he cuts ; ^imifiT ddpayati, he

causes cutting.

t* dai, to purify, ^nrfw ddyati, he purifies ; <imifd ddpayati, he causes to purify.

II. Other irregular causatives are given in the following list. Their irregu-

larity consists chiefly in taking \p with Guna or Vriddhi of the radical vowel ; sometimes in lengthening the vowel instead of raising it to Guna ; and frequently in substituting a new base.

1. ^ *, to go, in T&ffyi adMte, he reads ; Caus. ^tuiimfd adhydpayati, he

teaches {. (Pan. vi. I, 48.)

2. ^ri,togo,^r&forichchhati; Caus. ^ftqfaarpayati, he places. (Pan. vi 1.3, 36.)

3. Jg{kniiy, to sound, Jgtffttknilndti; Caus. ^m^knopayatiy he causes to sound.

4. *aft kri, to buy, rfHiurfd krindti; Caus. arimfrf Jcrdpayati, he causes to buy.

5. ^n^ kshmdy, to tremble, U4{m^ kshmdyate ; Caus. HHIM^Pri kshmdpayati,

he causes to tremble. (Pan. vii. 3, 36.)

* If the causative means to hunt, the ^ n is rejected ; !>HjPd *JJ|I«^ rajayati mrigdn, he hunts deer; <nM(TT ^tf^'P*1-1 ranjayati vastrdni, he dies clothes. We may also form but vi^iPn ardnji is wrong,

t With a preposition, but optionally without a preposition. The usage of the best writers varies, and Indian grammarians vary in their interpretation of Dhatupatha 19, 67-68. See note (on preceding page).

J Rut -f- ^prati+i,to approach, forms its causal regularly when it means to make a person understand, M KI1 *W Prt pratydyayati. Otherwise the causative of ^t is formed

Pf

218 CAUSATIVE VEKBS. § 463-

6. fa chi, to collect, f^nftfif chinoti; Caus. *nnqP7T chdpayati, or regularly

^rqqPd chdyayati, he causes to collect. (Pan. vi. i, 54.)

7. ^ chho, to cut, "SFlfw chhyati ; Caus. ^m^Prf chhdyayati, he causes to cut.

8. *R*[jdgri, to be awake, W*tf%jdgarti; Caus. *wwfajdgarayati, he rouses.

9. -ftr/i, to conquer, *wfajayati; Caus. vWFtfnjdpayati, he causes to conquer. 10. ^fr^T daridrd, to be poor, ^ft^rfrT daridrdti ; Caus. ^(X.$qfr daridrayati,

he makes poor. 1 1 . ^hft c?^2, to shine, ^hflrf didhite ; Caus. ^fanifrr didhayati, he causes to shine.

12. <j^dush, to sin, g^fff dushyati; Caus. ^^qfcf dushayati, he causes to sin ;

also ^faqfif doshayati, he demoralizes. (Pan. vi. 4, 91.)

13. i^dhu, to shake, >JrftflT dhunoti ; Caus. VfT^rfw dhunayati, he causes to shake.

14. JJTjoa, to drink, ftRfiff pibati ; Caus. TTTPptrfTT pdyayati, he causes to drink;

also vpai, tfTOfw pdyati, to be dry.

15. iCTjt?^, to protect, mfa pdti; Caus. W5*lfTT pdlayati, he protects.

1 6. iftpri, to love, Tfanfir prindti ; Caus. iftTprfif prinayati, he delights.

1 7. ^R3^ bhrajj, to roast, ^J^5rflT bhrijjati ; Caus. ^r^irflT bhrqjjayati, he makes

roast, or >TWTfif bharjjayati, from gi^ 6Ary. 1 8. tft bhij to fear5 f^Hfir bibheti; Caus. >rrT^ bhdpayate or NlquH bhishayate,

he frightens; also regularly Hl^^lfd bhdyayati. (Pan. vi. I, 56.) 19. f?Tm^ to throw, fa^Til minoti, and ift mi, to destroy, PHHlfri mindti, form

their Caus. like *TT m<^. ^o. T:t ri, to flow, or to go, ufaff riyate; Caus.\cnrflT repayati, he makes flow. 2,1. ^ ruh, to grow, T^frr rohati; Caus. <|^qPff rohayati, ft^rfff ropayati,

he causes to grow. (Pan. vn. 3, 43.)

22. 3ft U, to adhere, Poifflfif lindti and ctftaw Uyate; Caus. oil H H Pd linayati,

Idpayati, and riH^Pri Idyayati; and, if the root takes the form c5T /a, also f7Te?niffTM/0y«^(Pan.vii.3539). The meaning varies ; seePan.vi. 1,48; 51.

23. ^T^a, to blow, *%\favdti; Caus. vfi ^ ^ PrT vdjayati, if it means he shakes.

24. "3ft vz, to obtain, ^fk #e^ ; Caus. ^Tq^rfiT vdpayati or ^nitrfif vdyayati, if it

means to make conceive. (Pan. vi. I, 55.)

25. ^ve, to weave, ^fRvayati; Caus. ^HRfw vdyayati, he causes to weave.

26. ^^t vevit to conceive, ^^^ vevite; Caus. M^nPrf vevayati.

27. ^ vye, to cover, ^^(vyayati; Caus. ^[T^?(vydyayati, he causes to cover.

28. jj^ tf/z, to choose, fjififnvlindti; Caus.^qqfftvlepayati, he causes to choose.

29. ^ sad, to fall, ^ftrrw siyate; Caus. ^iri^Pri $dtayati, he fells ; but not, if

it means to move. (Pan. vn. 3, 42.)

30. $ft s°> to sharpen, ^irfcf syati; Caus. ^ll^^Pri sdyayati, he causes to sharpen.

31. fw^sidh, to succeed, •teqfrr sidhyati; Caus. Tnwrfif sddhayati, he performs ;

but ^hnrfir sedhayati, he performs sacred acts.

32. *f) so, to destroy, ^rfr 5y«^; Caus. m^Pd sdyayati, he causes to destroy.

-$ 466. CAUSATIVE VERBS. 219

33. ^pc sphur, to sparkle, FJ*f?r sphurati ; Caus. tuUUlfd sphdrayati and

^Mttmfh sphorayati, he makes sparkle.

34. ^ORnsphdy, to grow, WHTUTT sphdyate; Caus. miiqqfa sphdvayati, he causes

to grow.

35. •fars?tti, to smile, w*fb smayate ; Caus. WIM^ smdpayate, he astonishes;

also WN^fri smdyayati) he causes a smile by something. (Pan.vi. i, 57.)

36. ^ Arz, to be ashamed, faff! fid jihreti ; Caus. ^Mlfff hrepayati, he makes

ashamed. (Pan. vu. 3, 36.)

37. %Ave, to call, ^[^hvayati; Caus. grnHTfo hvdyayati, he causes to call.

38. -^Aa/i, to kill, T$fnhanti; Caus. imnifiT ghdtayati, he causes to kill.

J 464. As causative verbs are conjugated exactly like verbs of the Chur class, there is no necessity for giving here a complete paradigm. Like Chur verbs they retain ^n^ay throughout, except in tfce reduplicated aorist and the benedictive Parasmaipada ; and they form the perfect periphrastically. The only difficulty in causative verbs is the formation of their bases, and the formation of the aorist. Thus ^ kri, as causative, forms Pres. Par. and Atm. •ZFUMfrf, °7fr, kdrayati, -te; Impf. %4<*im^, °J[, akdrayat, -ta; Opt. kdrayet, -ta ; Imp. cFTC^, °lff, kdrayatu, -tdm ; Red. Perf.

kdraydnchakdra, -chakre ($ 342) ; Aor. iH^cfc^, °u , achikarat, -ta ; Fut. uifd, °T^, kdrayishyati, -te; Cond. ^obKf<Mm, °^, akdrayishyat, -ta;

Per. Fut. ^Rfqril kdrayitd; Ben. wtfft\kdrydt ; <*!Ml? kdrayishishta.

J 465. If a causative verb has to be used in the passive, ^m ay is dropt (J 399), but the root remains the same as it would have been with ^n^ay. Hence Pres. ohliVfr kdryate, he is made to do ; Clmrt ropy ate, from CT ruh, he is made to grow. The imperfect, optative, and imperative are formed regularly. The perfect is periphrastic with the auxiliary verbs in the Atmanepada.

J 466. In the general tenses, however, where the n ya of the passive disappears ($ 401), the causative ^n^ ay may or may not reappear, and we thus get two forms throughout (see Colebrooke, p. 198, note):

Fut. ^mfrut bhdvayishye or mfV^ bhdvishye. Cond. iHmcjfijuJi abhdvayishye or ^HHifVuj abhdvishye. Per. Fut. HNfrdlf! bhdvayitdhe or Hlf^ril^ bhdvitdhe.

Ben. MHfrtflJI bhdvayishiya or Mrf^mln bhdvishiya. First Aor. 1. 1. p. ^MHfufa abhdvayishi or ^MtfVf^ abhdvishi.

2. p. ^WNfuai: abhdvayishthdh or ^wif^8T: abhdvishthdh.

3. p. ^Wli^ abhdvi.

220 DESIDERATIVE VERBS. § 467-

CHAPTER XIX.

DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

$ 467. Desiderative bases are formed by reduplication, the peculiarities of which will have to be treated separately, and by adding ^ s to the root. Thus from ^bh49 to be, ^^ bubhush, to wish to be. The accent is on the reduplicative syllable.

§ 468. These new bases are conjugated like Tud roots. ^J^TTfo bubhu- shdmiy "gij^fa bubhtishasi, ^£]tflT bubhushati, yj]TO: bubhushdvah, &c.

$ 469. The roots which take the intermediate ^ i have been given before (§ 33 Iy 34°) * as we^ as those which take intermediate ^ i. Thus from f%^ vid, to know, fefef^r vividish, to wish to know ; from TT tri, to cross, finrfT!^ titarish or firRfcttitartsh, to wish to cross.

§ 470. As a general rule, though liable to exceptions, it may be stated that bases ending in one consonant may be strengthened by Guna, if they take the intermediate ^ i. Thus ^V budh forms ^r«nfvflPil bubodhishati ; u^ div, !^P*f*lPiT didevishati: also <|r kri,

chikarishati; ^dri, f^fc^flT didarishati. But fa^ bhid, Des. f^ftTf^rfk bibhitsati (Pan. i. 2, 10); 3J? guh, *J"3^frf jughukshati (Pan. vii. 2, 12). In fact, no Guna without inter- mediate ?[ i>

§ 471. But there are important exceptions. In many cases the base of the desiderative is neither strengthened nor weakened ; ^ rud, ^^f^^fw rurudishati. Other bases may be strengthened optionally ; lp^ dyut, f^jfrf^fi didyutishate or f^rftflf^TI didyotishate. Certain bases which do not take intermediate ^i are actually weakened ;

1. Verbs which do not take Guna, though they have intermediate ^ i.

*$£ritdj to cry, l^jft^frt rurudishati j T3i$vid, to know, n^Ni^MuT vividishatij *|^ mush, to steal, ^rnHfn mumushisJiati. (Pan. i. 2, 8.)

2. Verbs which may or may not take Guna, though they have intermediate 3[ *.

Verbs beginning with consonants, and ending in any single consonant, except TI y or ^ v,

and having 3[ i or "3" u for their vowel. (Pan. i. 2, 26.)

^(^dyutf Pt^Prmfl didyutishate or f^ftfw^Icf didyotishate. But f^ div, r^r«mflf didevishati or, without ^ *, ^^5^ dudyushati (Pan. vii. 2, 49) ;

l^rrif, f^fiT^TI vivartishate or fe<JNirrt vivritsati.

3. Verbs ending in ^ i or ^T w, not taking intermediate ^[ i, lengthen their vowel; final ^[ ri

and ^ri become t^ir, and, after labials, "3ft ur. (Pan. vi. 4, 16.) f*{ji, to conquer, Mt'iT^nr jigishati; ^ yu, to mix, ^^HiTl yuyushati. «f kri, to do, P^iqi^rn chikirshati • IT tri, to cross, (anl^Ta titirshati. ^ mri, to die, *J*J^nT mumurshatij "^pri, to fill, *J^*ni pupurshatL If, however, they take intermediate 3{ i, they likewise take Guna.

f^Rsmi,to smile, ftrwftRW sismayishate j ^pu, to purify, fcT^fciUrt pipavishate; t^gri, to swallow, f*fl[ri^ff[jigarishatij ~£dri, to respect, f^U^ln didarishate.

- 472. DESIDERATIVE VERB& 221

4. *1*{gam, to go, as a substitute for ^«, to go, and f^Aan, to kill, lengthen their vowel

before the ^s of the desiderative. (Pan. vi. 4, 16.) IT^ yam, ^rfvfn'iitirt adhijigdmsate, he wishes to read ; but ftflftncfir jigami$hati, he

wishes to go. T^han, f«i MI* fri jighdmsati, he wishes to kill.

5. 71^ tan, to stretch, lengthens its vowel optionally. (Pan. v. 4, 17.)

"fl^tftn, fii cii^fcr titdrhsati or fflrtUfHI titariisati; but also rrtrtfHMfil titanishati. (Pan. vn. 2,49, vart.)

6. ^H^san, to obtain, drops its *^n and lengthens the vowel before the ^* of the desiderative.

(Pan. vi. 4, 42.) TO^san, ftis i « Pn sishdsati ; but (VmfnMfn sisanishati.

7. ?T^3TaA, to take, 1&{svap, to sleep, and Hi^racAA, to ask, shorten their bases by

Samprasarana. (Pan. I. 2, 8.)

3£T^ #raA, flT^TKjflT jsgrAfifoAalt. *3TR.sca/>, tjjjtifii sushupsati.

TX?^prachh, frnjf^a^fif piprichchhishati.

8. The following verbs shorten their vowel to ^ » before the ^* of the desiderative, insert

J{t (Pan. vn. 4, 54), and reject the reduplication.

*ft rni (HTHlfci mindti, to destroy, and fatitfif mino/t, to throw), Des. (•miTm mitsati.

m md (TlflT wia^', to measure, r*i«ilri mimite, to measure, TTrf mayate, to change), Des. farwfii mitsati, l»irwn mitsate.

^ da (^rfk rfarfa^', to give, c^w, Dh. P. 25, 9, rfrfw, Dh. P. 22, 32; Iffif c?ya/», to cut, do, Dh. P. 26, 39 ; but not ^Tfac?a/», to cut, dap, Dh. P. 24, 51, because it is not ghu, cf. § 392; ^ITfr day ate, to pity, den, Dh. P. 22, 66), Des. f<{ rW frt ditsati, f<Jcfhl ditsate.

VT c?A<f (^Vlfir dadhdti, to place, Vlflf dhayati, to driuk), Des. fVrofn dhitsati.

9. Other desideratives formed without reduplication :

, to begin (T>Trtra&£ate), Des. f^Hin ripsate. , to take (77HTT labhate), Des. fco ti n lipsate. , to be able (^T^tflT saknoti, ^r^fif sakyati), Des. ^151^ sikshati. to fall (Wfil^fl^^), Des. fa r« frf pif sa*i. to go (T&XH padyate), Des. Ps ro n pitsate. to obtain (-*n>flfK dpnoti), Des. ^tifn (psa/i. , to command ( siJIM ^ Prt jnapayati), Des. sflnffn jfttpsati. , to grow (^flftfff ridhnoti), Des. ^rSfrf frfsart.

, to deceive (^ftft dabhnoti), Des. vfHrfiT dhtpsati or fVr^rfk dhipsati. , to free (*J^flT munchati), Des. H^Hfd mokshate or ^g«|ri mumukshate, he wishes for spiritual freedom.

, to finish (THflfK rddhyati), Des. nfd Oli^ fd prati-ritsati, in the sense of injuring (Pan. vii. 4, 54, vart.), otherwise ful r« fd rirdtsati (not f^w Pn riritsati). § 472. Certain verbs which are commonly considered to belong to the Bhu class are really desiderative bases.

it, fafchrHrt chikitsate, he cures. ^ gup, '$*l**M jugupsate, he despises.

titikshate, he bears. Tlt^ man, HlHltlH mimdihsate, he investigates.

222 DESIDERATIVE VERBS. § 473-

^^ badh, "^WTT bibhatsate, he loathes. ^\^(ddn, ^^THn diddmsate, he straightens. sisdmsate, he sharpens.

Reduplication in Desideratives.

§ 473. Besides the general rules of reduplication given in § 302-319*, the following special rules with regard to the vowel of the reduplicative syllable are to be observed in forming the desiderative base : Radical ^r a and ^n d are represented by ^ i in the reduplicative syllable (Pan. vn. 4, 79).

if^pach, films; fri pipakshati ; ^qr sthd, PriKiuPff tishthdsati.

§ 474. ^B^ av and ^TT^ dv, standing as Guna or Vriddhi of radical ^ u or "SR w, are represented by 5[ » in the reduplicative syllable, provided they be preceded by ^ p, TR ph, m, Hy, Tr, <£Z, ^t>, ^j (Pan. vn. 4, 80).

fq<n*r f*l«l(lf pipdvayishati, (Red. Aor. <l lfl IH i^ apipavat.} See § 375.

mrimfri bibhdvayishati, (Red. Aor. ^nrfaRT^ abibhavat.) 3 yw, "ftnrf^ 1 Pn yiyavishati, and Caus. Desid. f<f *4 1 q f*< H fif yiydvayishati. *£ju, fnni «i P*t q Hr jijdvayisJiati, (Red. Aor. ^^il »i <m^ ajijavat.) But "5 WM, ^j«i I q Pq H (n nundvayishati, (Red. Aor. "** <j^i«n^antfna0a£.) See § 375 f.

§ 475. Roots f^sru, to flow, ^£ru, to hear, "grfrw, to run, T£pru, to approach, &plu, to swim, ^g cAyw, to fall, may under similar circumstances optionally take ^ * or T u in the reduplicative syllable.

nfri sisrdvayishati or tjtsmfVHrfi susrdvayishati ; but the simple desidera-

tive ^Jt^n susrushati only.

, the Caus. of ^{svap, forms ^J^TtrfirqfTf sushvdpayishati.

J 476. Roots beginning with a vowel have a peculiar kind of internal reduplication, to which allusion was made in $ 378. Thus (Pan. vi. I, 2)

forms ^f^T5T + ^fil a£is + ishati. at forms ^rfr^ + 5[^fTT «/^ + ishati. aA;5A forms ^rf%^ + ^ft achiksh + ishati. uchchh forms ^fc-cd 4- ^^fll uchichchh + ishati.

§ 477. If the root ends in a double consonant, the first letter of which is «^w, ^d, or ^ then the second letter is reduplicated.

^T^ arch, ^nK^^n archich-ishati. "^ und, ^(^r^Hfn undid-ishati.

o*j\ ubj, & 1*11*1*1111 ubjij-ishati. In "^Hrs% the last consonant is reduplicated.

Pn ir shy iy -ishati or $/Hifi^fii irshyish-ishati. (Pan. vi. 1, 3, vart.)

In the verbs beginning with cn^fi Jcanduyati (§ 498) the final ^y is reduplicated. CBSU kanduy, ""^T^fVrMHPcl kanduyiy -ishati.

* Exceptional reduplication occurs in MciiHn chikishati, besides ^fsin chichishati, from "N chi (Pan. vu. 3, 58) ; in f^TEThrfTf jigUshati from fi? M (Pan. vn. 3, 56), &c.

~$ 481. INTENSIVE VERBS. 223

CHAPTER XX.

INTENSIVE VERBS.

{ 478. Intensive, or, as they are sometimes called, frequentative bases are meant to convey an intenseness or frequent repetition of the action expressed by the simple verb. Simple verbs, expressive of motion, some- times receive the idea of tortuous motion, if used as intensives. Some intensive bases convey the idea of reproach or disgrace, &c.

$ 479. Only bases beginning with a consonant, and consisting of one syllable, are liable to be turned into intensive bases. Verbs of the Chur class cannot be changed into intensive verbs. There are, however, some exceptions. Thus ^T7 at, to go, though beginning with a vowel, forms vui<k|H aldtyate, he wanders about ; TO{ a£, to eat, VH^ll^ a&dsyate ; ^ rt, to go, <enj 5^ ardryate and 1wrfir ararti (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. u. p. 2 16) ; ifl^ tfrnu, to cover, **uT»JM^ drnonuyate (Pan. in. i, 22).

$ 480. There are two ways of forming intensive verbs :

1. By a peculiar reduplication and adding *i yd at the end. This yd has

the accent.

2. By the same peculiar reduplication without any modification in the final

portion of the base. The latter form occurs less frequently. It has the accent on the reduplicative syllable. Bases formed in the former way admit of Atmanepada only.

Ex. v$J)hu} ^^J5Tff bobhuydte.

Bases formed in the latter way admit of Parasmaipada only, though, according to some grammarians, the Atmanepada also may be formed.

Ex. v^bhu, qflHcTird bobhaviti or 'ql^fri bobhoti. The Atmanepada would be *ft*J7T bobhute.

Roots ending in vowels retain the TJ ya of the intensive base in the general tenses ; roots ending in consonants drop it. Hence ^fojifaiTT bobhuyitd, but '-Hto^faHT sosuchitd. (Pan.vi. 4, 49.)

$ 481. When Hya is added, the effect on the base is generally the same as in the passive and benedictive Par. ($ 389). Thus final vowels are lengthened: fq chi, to gather, ^rvflu^ chechiyate ; ^J 6ru, to hear, sft^d &o§ruyate. ^TT d is changed to \i : VT dhd, to place, ^frqrr dedhiyate. ^ ri becomes $$.ir, or, after labials, ^i^iir: W tri, to cross, TTiTfinr tetiryate; ^prit to fill, tfl^5d poptiryate. Final ^ ri, however, when following a simple consonant, is changed to tf rt, not to ft ri : ^ kri, to do, MdHqii chekriyate. When following a double consonant it is changed to we ar: m srtiri^ to

224: INTENSIVE VERBS. § 483-

remember, jTimffii sdsmaryate. These intensive bases are conjugated like bases of the Div class in the Atmanepada. It should be observed, however, that in the general tenses roots ending in vowels retain ^ y before the intermediate ^ i, while roots ending in consonants throw off the *r ya of the special tenses altogether. Thus from ^J?I bobhuya, ^tJjftnrT bobhu-y-itd; from ^rfozx bebhidya, ^rfaf^iTT bebhiditd.

§ 482. When T^ya is not added, the intensive bases are treated like bases of the Hu class. The rules of reduplication are the same. Observe, however, that verbs with final or penultimate ^j ri have peculiar forms of their own ($489, 490), and verbs in ^ri start from a base in ^ ar, and therefore have ^TT« in the reduplicative syllable. J^tri, tCTjar, cTTTTf* tdtarmi; 3rd pers. plur. IfTfirtfiT tdtirati.

§ 483. According to the rules of the Hu class, the weak terminations require Guna ($ 297). Hence from ift^^bobudh, ^twtfvr bobodhmi; but ^fawr: bo- budhmah. From ^^ bobhu, sftoftfa bobhomi, TTfwfrr bobhavdni ; but ^t^t bobhumah. Remark, however, that in 1.2. 3. p. sing. Pres., 2. 3. p. sing. Impf., 3. p. sing. Imp. \i may be optionally inserted :

T^ftfl bobodhmi or ^t^ftfo bobudhimi; ^TtfH bobhomi or ^t*f=flfH bobhavimi. And remark further, that before this intermediate ^ i, and likewise before weak terminations beginning with a vowel, intensive bases ending in con- sonants do not take Guna (Pan. vii. 3, 87). Hence ^tyftfa bobudhimi, "^fanJrfVl bobudhdni, ^{<sfl^^ abobudham. From f%^ vid,

PRESENT. IMPERFECT. IMPERATIVE.

or

vevedmi or vevidimi avevidam veviddni

^iw or Tf^tfq ^T^?^ or ^nf%^t: %f^fe

vevetsi or vevidishi avevet or avevidih veviddhi

^%fw or ^f%c(tfir ^T^Ti^ or ^P«|<(lf^ ^T^ or

vevetti or veviditi avevet or avevidit vevettu or veviditu

^"f^TJ vevidvahy &c. ^TTfol1 avevidva ^fc|^|'c( veviddva

Rules of Reduplication for Intensives.

f 484. The simplest way to form the peculiar reduplication of intensives, is to take the base used in the general tenses, to change it into a passive base by adding IT ya, then to reduplicate, according to the general rules of redupli- cation, and lastly, to raise, where possible, the vowel of the reduplicative syllable by Guna (Pan. vii. 4, 82), and ^{ a to ^TT d (Pan. vn. 4, 83). fq chi, to gather, ^ffar chiya, ^^NNrff chechiyate; ^%fw checheti.

to abuse, ^[qkrusya, '^Tsfiifft chokru&yate; ^sffaitffc chokroshti. trauk, to approach, ^R traukya, TTt^l^d totraukyate ; ff^^ftj totraukti.

-f 489- INTENSIVE VEEBS. 225

*r rek, to suspect, 3H retya, TT^nif rerekyate ; irfti rerekti. f kri, to do, frw kriya, %sfonr chekriyate (Pan.vn.4, 27); ^SrfS charkarti. ^ W, to scatter, tfHi foVya, ^frrft chekiryate ; ^rofft chdkarti. ($ 482.) rz, to fill, ^purya, Tft^ft popuryate ; TnrrfS pdparti .

n, to remember, w5 smarya, *nm*M sdsmaryate ; ?n5RfS sarsmarti *. T da, to give, <fhf <%a, ^fhrit dediyate ; ^T^rfTT c/arfa/«. /we, to call, ^ ^%a, ^fg&johuyate ; ift^fTT johoti.

§ 485. The roots ^raffcA, IZ^srams, VSR^dhvams, VR(bhrams, 1R(ka8, ^\patt ^pad, , place «ft n^ between the reduplicative syllable and the root. (Pan. vn. 4, 84.) , to go round, ^ffaxJTTf va nt vachyate; c|«/l^Mlfif vantvaficMti. , to tear, «n1tf*«K sa nt srasyate; WJ}y*X\fn sanisramstti. l4^ dhvams, to fall, ^»ilw<^W rfa nt dhvasyate; ^«ftt4^1 fd dantdhvamstti.

, to fall, TTttf^lT 6a nl bhrasyate- "Tfhj^ftflT bantbhramsiti. as, to go, ^T«fNr^Trf c^a nf kasyate; ^*flofcfflfd chanikasiti. , to fly, Mnlmsn^a nipatyate; M^l M dl fcf pantpattti. , to go, MrOs«n^a nipadyate; 'MHlMrflfd panipadtti. ^K^ skand, to step, ^^t^rETW cAa w* skadyate; H<\\*3«i\fa chanlskanditi. § 486. Roots ending in a nasal, preceded by ^T a, repeat the nasal in the reduplicative syllable (Pan. vn. 4, 85). The repeated nasal is treated like ^w, and the vowel, being long by position, is not lengthened.

, to go, »P i *H n jahgamyate ; »l'l*flfw jangamiti.

, to roam, ^^J^Iff bambhramyate; ^OTtfk bambhramtti. ^^ han, to kill, »i M »M n janghanyate; «nTrftfir janghaniti.

§ 487. The roots *F{jap, to recite, *{*^jabh, to yawn, <^T daA, to burn, <^cfem,/, to bite, >T5^6Aa%', to break, TO^as, to bind, insert a nasal in the reduplicative syllable. (Pan. vn. 4, 86.)

W^j'op, *\*\"injanjapyate; wNfijanjapfti. ^^T dams, <;^<4n damdaiyate; ^?j\£n daihda&ti. § 488. The roots ^cAar and TR^phal form theu- intensives as,

chanchuryate and ^-sOfn chaftchuriti or ^^fff chartchtirti. pamphulyate and M ^rt^fff pamphuliti or M^f^H pamphulti. (Pan. vin. 4, 87.) § 489. Roots with penultimate ^ ri insert Tit ri in their reduplicative syllable. vn. 4, 90.)

«p^tfnV, «<0<jiMn va n vrityate; lO^fllPn 0a r< vrittti. In the Parasmaipada these roots allow of six formations. (Pan. vn. 4, 91.) «l^rt 1111 va r vrittti. ^«nrf varvarti.

qf^nlfn va ri vritfti. qr^fS varivarti.

t?a rl vrittti. 'lO^fH vanvarti.

* This form follows from Pan. vn. 4, 92, and is supported by the Madhaviya-dhatuvrittu Other grammarians give Wwfd sdsmarti.

226 INTENSIVE VERBS. § 490-

§ 490. The same applies to roots ending in ^J n, if used in the Parasmaipada. (Pan.

vii. 4, 92-)

krij ^TTtfiT cha r kariti. ^%fS charkarti.

cha ri kariti. ^ft^ffff charikarti.

cha ri kariti. ^Tfarft charikarti.

§ 491. A few frequentative bases are peculiar in the formation of their base *. ^P^ svap, to sleep, «hf^*trf soshupyate; but ttKflPx sdsvapti. (Pan. vi. 1, 19.)

syam, to sound, ^?Ptu-Mn sesimyate; but ^T^TTff samsyanti. vye, to cover, q«fl*lrt veviyate; but qi«qiPfl vdvydti- or (§ 483) «n*tPn vdvyeti. T vus, to desire, '«IN^n vdvasyate; m^Ps vdvashti. (Pan. vi. i, 20.) , to regard, ^NftiW cheUyate; M*Pn cheketi. (Pan. vi. i, 21.) , to grow, ^fi^jMgrfytife; m*MiPn_p^py^». (Pan. vi. i, 29.) sw, to swell, 31)94*1*1} sosuyate or ^i*yl*4n sesmyate; ^nSfflT sesveti. (Pan. vi. i, 30.) A«n, to kill, ^Jll-M^ jeghniyate; ^TZfajanghanti. (Pan. vii. 4, 30, vart.) , to smell, %TTta7T jeghriyate; ll«iPn jdghrdti. (Pan. vn. 4, 31.)

, to blow, ^TWT^lTff dedhmiyate; ^TWnfff dddhmdti. (Pan. vii. 4, 31.) to swallow, ^HTtiiM ff jegilyate ; WT^TfS jdgarti. (Pan. vm. 2, 20.) , to lie down, ^H^^Mri sdsayyate; ^t^rfrf seseti. (Pan. vii. 4, 22.) $ 492. From derivative verbs new derivatives may be formed, most o1 which, however, are rather the creation of grammarians^ than the property of the spoken language. Thus from HH^Pri bhdvayati, the causal of ^ bM, he causes to be, a new desiderative is derived, f^HHf^MPlT bibhdvayishati, he wishes to cause existence. So from the intensive ^jrnr bobhuyate, he exists really, is formed ^jfrRfiT bobhuyishati, he wishes to exist really ; then a new causative may be formed, ^^pimrPrf bobhuyishayati, he causes a wish to exist really ; and again a new desiderative, ^jfj-mP^fa bobhuyisha- yishati, he wishes to excite the desire of real existence.

* The formation and conjugation of the Intensive in the Parasmaipada, or the so-called Charkarita, have given rise to a great deal of discussion among native grammarians. According to their theory "T^ yah, the sign of the Intensive Atmanepada, has to be sup- pressed by cj^i luk. By this suppression the changes produced in the verbal base by Tj^yaii would cease (Pan. i. i, 63), except certain changes which are considered as Anangakarya, phanges not affecting the base, such as reduplication. Changes of the root that are to take place not only in the Intens. Atm., but also in the Intens. Par., are distinctly mentioned by Panini, vii. 4, 82-92. About other changes, not directly extended to the Intens. Par., grammarians differ. Thus the Prakriya-Kaumudi forms *flHlPN soshopti, because Pan. vi. i, 19, prescribes TFnjpfiT soshupyate; other authorities form only UUjlPH sdsvapti

sdsvapiti. Colebrooke allows wfff cheketi (p. 332), because Pan. vi. i, 21, prescribes chekiyate, and the commentary argues in favour of ^fflT cheketi. But Colebrooke (p. 321) declines to form ^rfiffi sesinte> because it is in the Atm. only that Pan. vi. i, 19, allows *lPtf«ffl sesimyate. Whether the Perfect should be periphrastic or reduplicated is likewise a moot point among grammarians ; some forming "sffa^facKTC bobhavdnchakdra, others bobhuva, others ^TT^ bobhdva.

-§ 496' DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 227

CHAPTER XXI.

DENOMINATIVE VERBS.

§ 493. There are many verbs in Sanskrit which are clearly derived from nominal bases*, and which generally have the meaning of behaving like, or treating some one like, or wishing for or doing whatever is expressed by the noun. Thus from ^TR h/ena, hawk, we have 3*H»*M syendydte, he behaves like a hawk ; from ^ putra, son, yflWrt putriydti, he treats some one like a son, or he wishes for a son. Some denominatives are formed without any derivative syllable. Thus from ifm krishnd, ;£*nfif krishndti, he behaves like Krishna ; from f^pitri, father, fmnfn pitdrati, he behaves like a father.

These denominative verbs, however, cannot be formed at pleasure; and many even of those which would be sanctioned by the rules of native grammarians, are of rare occurrence in the national literature of India. These verbs should therefore be looked for in the dictionary rather than in a grammar. A few rules, however, on their formation and general meaning, may here be given.

Denominatives in ^ ya, Parasmaipada.

§ 494. By adding ^ yd to the base of a noun, denominatives are formed expressing a wish. From ift go, cow, Jnqfir gavyati, he wishes for cows. These verbs might be called nominal desideratives, and they never govern a new accusative.

J 495. By adding the same Hya, denominatives are formed expressing one's looking upon or treating something like the subject expressed by the noun. Thus from "^f putra, son, ijcfhrfa fsntf putriyati sishyam, he treats the pupil like a son. By a similar process imrr^W?f prdsddiyati, from mn^prdsdda, palace, means to behave as if one were in a palace ; HHU^I^frf ffigjf firer: prdsddiyati kutydm bhikshuh, the beggar lives in his hut as if it were a palace.

§ 496. Before this H ya,

I. Final ^T a and ^TT d are changed to \i; *pTT sutd, daughter, ^Jdl^PH surfyati, he wishes for a daughter t-

t and ^u are lengthened; rfftpati, master, McflMffl patty atiy he treats like a master; kavi, poet, «FV) *l fit kaviyati, he wishes to be a poet.

* They are called in Sanskrit fc5>{ lidhu, from fc^T linga, it is said, a crude sound, and ^ dhu, for *TfiJ dhdtu, root. (Carey, Grammar, p. 543.)

t Minute distinctions are made between ^^"^hrfff asaniyati, he wishes to eat at the proper time, and ~4i ^| 11 *fif! asandyati, he is ravenously hungry; between <J^ «nT Miff udakiyati, he wishes for water, and ^ ^ ^ fri udanyati, he starves and craves for water; bet ween V«1l«lffi dhandyati, he is greedy for wealth, and V«ffafH dhaniyati, he asks for some money. (Pan. vii. 4, 34.)

G g 2

228 DENOMINATIVE YERBS. § 497-

3. ^ri becomes ^ rt, ^ft o becomes *&^av, T au becomes ^TT^Tay; f^pitri, father, pitriyati, he treats like a father; »TT waw, ship, ^TRlflf ndvyati, he wishes

for a ship.

4. Final «T n is dropt, and other final consonants remain unchanged; <J»f«^ rdjan, king, ^1 »fl Jjfrf rdjiyati, he treats a man like a king; nm^payas, milk, MM^fK payasyati, he wishes for milk ; ^^vdch, speech, ^T^Tfcf vdchyati (Pan. i. 4, 15); «i«it^ namas, worship, «fHmfiT namasyati, he worships (Pan. in. i, 19).

Denominatives in if ya, Atmanepada.

$497. A second class of denominatives, formed by adding T* yd, has the meaning of behaving like, or becoming like, or actually doing what is expressed by the noun. They differ from the preceding class by generally following the Atmanepada*, and by a difference in the modification of the final letters of the nominal base. Thus

1. Final ^r a is lengthened ; ^frf syena, hawk, $7)r(m7i syendyate, he behaves

like a hawk ; $T^ sabda, sound, ^i«^|<Mri sabddyate, he makes a sound, he sounds ; *jpjr bhrisa, much, vpfrnfir bhrisdyate, he becomes much ; OFF kashta, mischief, oFFnTff kashtdyate, he plots ; tfoHr romantha, ruminating, dH«ITilrf romanthdyate, he ruminates. The final ^ i of feminine bases is generally dropt, and the masculine base taken instead; ^pT^t kwndri, girl, '$HKl4ri kumdrdyate, he behaves like a girl. (Pan. vi. 3, 36—41.)

2, and 3. Final ^ i and T u, ^ ri, ^rt o, ^ au are treated as in J 496 ; ^f%

£uchi} pure, "SJ^t^ suchiyate, he becomes pure. 4. Final 5^ n is dropt, and the preceding vowel is lengthened ; TTJf^ rdjan,

king, '<M|i|ri rdjdyate, he behaves like a king; ^'fcH^ ushman, heat,

<f«4^THW ushmdyate, it sends out heat.

Some nominal bases in ^s and i(t may, others must (Pan. in. i, n) be treated like nominal bases in ^j a. Hence from (Vg1^ vidvas, wise, vidvasyate or Pc|^||i|7i vidvdyate, he behaves like a wise man ; from milk, "MU^W payasyate or xnTFTW paydyate, it becomes milk ; from apsaras, xsmi^i^H apsardyate, she behaves like an Apsaras ; from ^TT brihat, great, ^^|i|H brihdyate, he becomes great. (Pan. in. i, 12.)

§ 498. Some verbs are classed together by native grammarians as Kandvadi's, i. e. beginning with Kandu. They take *T ya, both in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, and keep it through the general tenses under the restrictions applying to other denominatives in Tya (§ 501). Nouns ending in ^T a drop it before "*T ya. Thus from ^TT^ agada, free from

* Those that may take both Parasmaipada and Atmanepada are said to be formed by ^T^ kyash, the rest by ^T^ kyan. Thus from c^tf^W lohita, red, c5Vf^rrr^flf or °fl lohitdyati or -te, he becomes red. (Pan. in. i, 13.)

-$ 502. DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 229

illness, vf'itirt aaadyati, he is free from illness ; from *pl sukha, pleasure, *pwftf sukhyati, he gives pleasure ; from W£ kandu, scratching, «H|MPn or °n kanduyati or -te, he scratches.

Denominatives in ^ sya.

§ 499. Certain denominative verbs, which express a wish, take ^T sya instead of 1 ya. Thus from T5|fa kshira, milk, JSil^t^fn kshirasyati, the child longs for milk ; from <4*«Q lavana, salt, wsKUt^fn lavanasyati, he desires salt. Likewise WH4 fulfill ascasyati, the mare longs for the horse ; <jm^fd vrishasyati, the cow longs for the bull (Pan. vn. i, 52). Some authorities admit ^HT sya and ^TO asya, in the sense of extreme desire, after all nominal bases. Thus from *PJ madhu, honey, H^t« Pn madhusyati or TScHmflT madhvasyati, he longs for honey.

Denominatives in «ni**j kamya.

§ 500. It is usual to form desiderative verbs by compounding a nominal base with 4IWJ kdmya, a denominative from VR kdma, love. Thus ^<a <* i*<< Pn putrakdmyati, he has the wish for a son ; Put. «j <a «« I P*-q n i putrakdmyitd. Here the ^y, it is said, is not liable to be dropt. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 222.)

$501. The denominatives in ^ ya are conjugated like verbs of the Bhu class in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. Pres. y dim ft putriydmi, Impf. aputriyam, Imp. ^l^rrfin putriydni, Opt. "J^Hnc putriyeyam. Pres. kyendye, Impf. 4J$i|HHJ asyendye, Imp. ^Hltj Syenayai, Opt. fyendyeya. In the general tenses the base is ^f\\putriy or ^Hl^ but when the denominative ^ y is preceded by a consonant, TJ y may or may not be dropt in the general tenses (Pan. vi. 4, 50). Hence, Per. Perf. putriydmdsa (§ 325, 3), Aor. xH^lfMM aputriyisham, Fut.

putriyishydmi, Per. Fut. g^ftin putriyitd, Ben. ^iMIfi putriydsam. From ^nin"S Syendyate, Per. Perf. ^HI^IHI^I tyendydmdsa, Aor. a&yendyishiy Fut. ^JHlfrtM syendyishye, &c.

From ^f?T^ samidh, fuel, ^TfJTvrfiT samidhyati, he wishes for fuel ; Per. Fut. samidhyitd or ^rfJTfVnn samidhitd, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 50).

Denominatives in WT aya.

§ 502. Some denominative verbs are formed by adding ^SR aya to certain nominal bases. They generally express the act implied by the nominal base. They may be looked upon as verbs of the Chur class. They are conjugated in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, some in the Atmanepada only. They retain ^H^ay in the general tenses under the limitations that apply to verbs of the Chur class and causatives (viz. benedictive Par., reduplicated aorist, &c.)5 and their radical vowels are modified according to the rules applying to the verbs of the Chur class (§ 296, 4).

Thus from ^TT^T pdsa, fetter, r^m^iMrn vipdsayati, he unties; from w*{varman, armour, sathvarmayati, he arms, (the final «^n being dropt); from ^Smunda, shaven, mundayati, he shaves ; from ^P^ sabda, sound, ^i^MPn s'abdayati, he makes a sound (Dhatupatha 33, 40); from fifW mis'ra, mixed, fii^^fn misrayati, he mixes (Pan. m. i, 21; 25).

230 PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. § 503 —

Some of these verbs are always Atmanepada. Thus from Tp$ puchchha, tail, utpuchchkayate, he lifts up the tail (Pan. in. i, 20).

is to be added to nouns formed by the secondary affixes *H(mat, ^l(vat,

vin, these affixes must be dropt. From tsrf'q^ sragvin, having garlands,

srajayati.

If ^HT aya is added to feminine bases, they are generally replaced by the corresponding masculine base. From T^ffi syeni (§ 247), white, 3<4imfn syetayati, he makes her white (Pan. vi. 3, 36).

Certain adjectives which change their base before ^¥ ishtha of the superlative, do the same before ^HT aya. ijg mridu, soft, ^*tPn mradayati, he softens ; g^ dura, far, ^cf^fcf davayati, he removes.

Some nominal bases take ^T^PT dpaya. Thus from WiQ satya, true, ^KMiMMirr satydpayati, he speaks truly; from ^TO artha, sense, WinnTfr arthdpayati, he explains.

Denominatives without any Affix.

§ 503. According to some authorities every nominal base may be turned into a denominative verb by adding the ordinary verbal terminations of the First Division, and treating the base like a verbal base of the Bhu class. ^T a is added to the base, except where it exists already as the final of the nominal base ; other final and medial vowels take Guna, where possible, as in the Bhu class.

Thus from ^Wt krishna, effHUfH Jcrishnati, he behaves like Krishna; from 5RT?ST maid, garland, *Uc*5lflT mdldti, it is like a garland, Impf. vi*iic5if^ama/a£, Aor.

amdldsit; from olffe kavi, poet, cRTPrfff kavayati, he behaves like a poet ; from f^ vi, bird, ^rfff vayati, he flies like a bird ; from fxnj pitri, father, PM n ^.fn pitarati, he is like a father ; from TT»f^ rdjan, king, TT»TRflf rdjdnati, he is like a king (Pan. vi. 4, 15)-

CHAPTER XXII.

PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES.

§ 504. The following prepositions may be joined with verbs, and are then

called Upasarga in Sanskrit (Pan. i. 4, 58—61 ; § 148).

^rfcf ati, beyond, ^rfv adhi, over (sometimes fv dhi). ^Tcj anu, after.

^5itj apa, off. ^srftj api, upon (sometimes ft pi), ^rfa abhi, towards.

'Siw ava, down (sometimes ^va). W( d, near to. T^ ud, up. ^TJ upa,

next, below, g: duh, ill. fVr ni, into, downwards, fa: nih, without.

"q^ para, back, away, tjft pari, around, if pra, before. Trfif prati,

back. f% vi, apart. ^ sam, together. ^ «w, well. They all have the

uddtta on the first syllable except ^rfa abhi.

J 505. Certain adverbs, called Gati in Sanskrit, a term applicable also to the Upasargas (Pan. i. 4, 60), may be prefixed, like prepositions, to certain verbs, particularly to *^bhu, to be, ^R(as, to be, of kri, to do, and i\p{gam, to go.

-$ 5°7' PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. 231

achchha ; e. g. fUMIfl achchhagatya, having approached ($ 445) ; achchhodya, having addressed, ^nj: adah ; e. g. ^:^?l adahkritya, having done it thus, vrir^antar; e.g. ^wftW antaritya, having passed between. ^J?* alam; e. g. ^ic^T1' olaAkfilya9 having ornamented. ^TCcr astam; e. g. Wfei'lfl astahgatya, having gone to rest, having set. ^nfa: dvih; e. g. wfa»|jl dvirbMya, having appeared, fin:: tirafy; e. g. fir^pj tirobhuya, having disappeared, ip: purafy ; e. g. puraskritya, having placed before ($ 89, II. i). TRgiprdduh; e.g. prddurbhuya, having become manifest. *n^ sat and ^nn^ asat, when expressing regard or contempt ; e. g. Wtir^HJ asatkritya, having dis- regarded. Uiqif^ sdkshdt; e. g. Ul«J!r<sjit<J sdkshdtkritya, having made known. Words like ^raft suklt, in SJ^l^d suklikritya, having made white. (Here the final ^r a ofyr$§ukla is changed to ^ i. Sometimes, but rarely, final ^BT a or ^TT d is changed to ^n d. Final ^ i and TM are lengthened ; ^ ri is changed to "ftri ; final lG{an and "W^as are changed to ^1; e. g. TT»ri^[rw rdjikritya, having made king.) Words like iit^ urt, in *^<jw urikrityay having assented. Words like TQRl(khdtt imitative of sound ; e. g. i«fir«j<7T khdtkritya, having made khdt, the sound produced in clearing one's throat. § 506. Several of the prepositions mentioned in J 503 are also used with

nouns, and are then said to govern certain cases. They are then called Kar-

mapravachaniya, and they frequently follow the noun which is governed by

them (Pan. i. 4, 83).

The accusative is governed by ^rfir ati, beyond; ^rfa abhi, towards;

part, around; ufiff prati, against; ^rg anu, after; ^q upa, upon. Ex. t govindam ati ne&varah, Is'vara is not beyond Govinda; " haram prati haldhalam, venom was for Hara ; (4 UMH H ^ d vishnu-

manvarchyate, he is worshipped after Vishnu ; ^T*J ^ft ^Ut anu harim surah,

the gods are less than Hari.

The ablative is governed by Tfflf prati, Tjft part, ^rcr apat ^rr d- Ex. H%:

U^iT bhakteh praty amritam, immortality in return for faith; wr Jpffc d

t.mtyoh, until death; ^R f^TTW^ft ^ ^: apa trigartebhyo vrishto devah, it

has rained away from Trigarta, or xrft; f^TTW: pari trigartebhyah, round

Trigarta, without touching Trigarta.

The locative is governed by TQupa and ^rfv adhi. Ex. ITT fH^fi 4IMIMIU vpa

nishke Mrshdpanam, a Karshapana is more than a Nishka ;

adhi panchdleshu brahmadattah, Brahmadatta governs over the Pafichalas.

§ 507. There are many other adverbs in Sanskrit, some of which may here be mentioned. i. The accusative of adjectives in the neuter may be used as an adverb.

232 PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. § 507-

Thus from ^: mandah, slow, ^ $% mandam mandam, slowly, slowly ; ^fftr ttghram, quickly ; g^f dhruvam, truly.

2. Certain compounds, ending like accusatives of neuters, are used adver-

bially, such as TreT^rfli yathdsakti, according to one's power. For these see the rules on composition.

3. Adverbs of place :

^rTT antar, within, with loc. and gen. ; between, with ace. WO antard, between, with ace. SHiTOl antarena, between, with ace.; without, with ace. WKTi^ drat, far off, with abl. ^fff : vahih, outside, with abl. UH'41 samayd, near, with ace. f^T«F^T nikashd, near, with ace. Tqft. upari, above, over, with ace. and gen. "5rih uchchaih, high, or loud, tft^h nichaih, low. ^iv: adhah, below, with gen. and abl. ^re: avah, below, with gen, fro tirah, across, with ace. or loc. ^ iha, here. t(rT purd, before. W^samaksham, ^^^(sdkshdt, in the presence. '3&R\^(sakdsdt, from. ijTS purah, before, with gen. ^RT amd, ^r^T sachd, *nofT sdkam, ^WT samd, ^TTV sdrdham, together, with instr. ^r5T7r: abhitah, on all sides, with ace. 'WTrf: ubhayatah, on both sides, with ace. iwwn^samantdt, from all sides, gt duram, far, with ace., abl., and gen. ^rfrTcjf antikam, near, with ace., abl., and gen. «ty\)ch ridhak, 1^<* prithak, apart.

4. Adverbs of time :

nidi, prdtar, early, ^rnf say am, at eve. f^T diva, by day. -*Hj£|i| ahndya, by day. ^far doshd, by night. Tfii naktam, by night. T^T ushd, early. g7?^ yugapad, at the same time, ^nr adya, to-day. "?r: %«A, yesterday. ^f?r: purvedyuh, yesterday. ^: JvaA, to-morrow, ^glfk paredyavi, to-morrow. Tzfto^ jyok, long, fqt chiram, "Nr^T chirena, f^TTR chirdya, fgTTT^ chirdt, fro*T chirasya, long. ^RT *awa, *Hlt^ sandt, ^Rl^ sanat, perpetually, ^it «r«m, quickly. -51%: sanaih, slowly. ^j?r: sadyah, at once. TOffw samprati, now. 15^j9wwar, gj: muhuh, ^: bhuyah, ^rt vdram, again, ^r^ sakrit, once. "gtT jowm, formerly. ^ purvam, before. -gK§ urdhvam, after, ^n^ sapadi, immediately. iren^a^M^, after, with abl. *rnj./a/w, once upon a time, ever, ^npn adhund, now. ^inT iddnim, now. ^T 5ac?a, ^mi santatam, ^ifVf^ anisam, always. ^Tc5 a/am, enough, with dat. or instr.

5. Adverbs of circumstance :

ipn mrishd, fi^in mithyd, falsely. *nTTojr mandk, |ifi^ ^^«/, a little, rranflf tushnim, quietly. *pn vrz//«a, yn mudhd, in vain. *nfa 5am^, half. ^^TWTTf akasmdt, unexpectedly, -^fsj updm&u, in a whisper, firo mithah, together. m*r: pray ah, frequently, almost, ^nfhr ativa, exceed- ingly, cirrt kdmam, aft^ josham, gladly, -ei^^ avasyam, certainly.

-§ 510- COMPOUND WORDS. 233

kila, indeed. *nj khalu, certainly. t\»TT vind, without, with ace., instr., or abl. ^JTT rite, without, with ace. or abl. iftmndnd, variously. gg sushfhu, well, jj dush{hu, badly. f^WT dishtyd, luckily, mffir prabhriti, et cetera, and the rest, with abl. ffrl^ kuvit, really? ^if%T^ kachchit, really ? *ri katham, how ? ^fw t/t, ^ itthqm, thus. 5pT w0, as ; ^ftfiu Aarir tva, like Hari. ^va/, enclitic; ^fOTf^Aflrivo*, like Hari.

Conjunctions and other Particles.

508. ^ni atha, ^nft aMo, now then, ^fa i/e, thus, ijfij ya</i, when. yadyapi, although, rt^ifq tathdpi, yet. ^ cAc/, if. IT »a, ^ft no, not. ^ cAa, and, always enclitic, like gwe. "fiiw kimcha, and. »n f»4 or ITT FT md sma, not, prohibitively. TC vd, or. TTva— ^TV^, either— or. wi^i athavd, or. ^^ eva, even, very ; (*T *3 sa eva, the same.) rt evam, thus. •jrT nilnam, doubtlessly, ^^ydvat—'irt^ tdvat, as much— as. inn yathd— ff^ tathd, as -so. ^TJ yena— ?R tena, if^yad—j^ tad, and other correlatives, because— therefore. dvjif^ tathdhi, thus, for. ^ ^w, ^it param, ftirg kintu, but. f%w cAe/, ^IT chana, subjoined to the interrogative pronoun fa £iw, any, some ; as '^fly^ kaschit, some one ; odvj^H kathanchana, any- how. t\ Ai, for, because, "^if uta, TcTTfT utdho, or. tfTT ndma, namely. pratyuta, on the contrary, g TIM, perhaps. «rg wanw, Is it not 1 svit, n*fy?^ kimsvit, perhaps, ^rf^ fl/w, also, even, ^rftr ^1 api cha, again. »nf nilnam , certainly.

J 509. ^ ^e, Ht ^o, vocative particles, ^n? aye, ^ Aaye, Ah ! re, ^ are, Fie !

CHAPTER XXIII.

COMPOUND WORDS.

J 510. The power of forming two or more words into one, which belongs to all Aryan languages, has been so largely developed in Sanskrit that a few of the more general rules of composition claim a place even in an elementary grammar.

As a general rule, all words which form a compound drop their inflectional terminations, except the last. They appear in that form which is called their base, and when they have more than one, in their Pada base (§ 1 80). Hence ^cj^iu: deva-ddsah, a servant of god; IMg^t: rdjapurushah, a king's man ; lW*jy. pratyaamukhah, facing west.

H h

234 COMPOUND WORDS. § 511-

§511. Sometimes the sign of the feminine gender in the prior elements of a compound may be retained. This is chiefly the case when the feminine is treated as an appellative, and would lose its distinctive meaning by losing the feminine suffix :

kalydnimdtd, the mother of a beautiful daughter (Pan. vi. 3, 34) ; ^*T: kathibhdryah, having a Kathi for one's wife (Pan. vi. 3, 41). If the feminine forms a mere predicate, it generally loses its feminine suffix ; TjffrR>Tr§t sobhanabhdryap, having a beautiful wife (Pan. vi. 3, 34 ; 42).

The phonetic rules to be observed are those of external Sandhi with certain modifications, as explained in § 24 seq.*

$ 512. Compound words might have been divided into substantival, adjectival, and adverbial. Thus words like Hrg^J: tatpurushah, his man, •ftcSfara nllotpalam, blue lotus, f^n^ dvigavam, two oxen, ^rir«pjjft agni- dhumau, fire and smoke, might have been classed as substantival ; ^"aH^: bahuvrihih, possessing much rice, as an adjectival; and iWltyfffi yathasakti, according to one's strength, as an adverbial compound.

Native grammarians, however, have adopted a different principle of divi- sion, classing all compounds under six different heads, under the names of Tatpurusha, Karmadhdraya, Dvigu, Dvandva} Bahuvrihi, and Avyayibhdva. I. Tatpurusha is a compound in which the last word is determined by the preceding words, for instance, Wr^^J tat-purushah, his man, or rdja-purushah, king's man.

As a general term the Tatpurusha compound comprehends the two subdivisions of Karmadhdraya (I b) and Dvigu (I c). The Karmadha- raya is in fact a Tatpurusha compound, in which the last word is determined by a preceding adjective, e. g. Tfcyfajcfc ntlotpalam, blue lotus The component words, if dissolved, would stand in the same case, whereas in other Tatpurushas the preceding word is governed by last, the man of the king, or fire- wood, i. e. wood for fire.

The Dvigu again may be called a subdivision of the Karmadharaya, being a compound in which the first word is not an adjective in general, but always a numeral : figFR dvigavam, two oxen, or fg^j: dvigufy, bought for two oxen.

* Occasionally bases ending in a long vowel shorten it, and bases ending in a short vowel lengthen it in the middle of a compound; 3<(<kudaka, water, ^TT^ pdda, foot, .hridaya, heart, frequently substitute the bases "Z^udan (i.e. T^ udci), Tf^pad, and <£ hrid. ^t*T: hridrogah, heart-disease, or ^^TCto: hridayarogah. (Pan. vi. 3, 51-60.)

The particle "^ ku, which is intended to express contempt, as ^WTSr^TJ kubrdhmanah, a bad Brahman, substitutes cfftl kad in a determinative compound before words beginning with consonants : ^r^5J kadushtrah, a bad camel. The same takes place before T^f ratha, ^ vada, and TJJJT trina : ^i^^J kadrathah, a bad carriage ; <*^UI kattrinam, a bad kind of grass. The same particle is changed to WT kd before ^f^pathin and ^TCf aksha: kdpathaJi, and optionally before ^jTC purusha. (Pan. vi. 3, 101-107.)

-§ 513- COMPOUND WORDS. 235

These three classes of compounds may be comprehended under the general name of Determinative Compounds, while the Karmadharaya (I b) may be distinguished as appositional determinatives, the Dvigu (I c) as numeral determinatives.

II. The next class, called Dvandva, consists of compounds in which two words

are simply joined together, the compound taking either the terminations of the dual or plural, according to the number of compounded nouns, or the terminations of the singular, being treated as a collective term : ^rfr»njfll agni-dhumau, fire and smoke ; 3T$r$3IMr4l$u: fasa-kusa-paldsdh, nom. plur. masc. three kinds of plants, or 3l$l$3IMc4l3l sasa-kusa-paldsam, nom. sing. neut. They will be called Collective Compounds.

III. The next class, called Bahuvrihi by native grammarians, comprises com-

pounds which are used as adjectives. The notion expressed by the last word, and which may be variously determined, forms the predicate of some other subject. They may be called Possessive Compounds. Thus bahu-vrthih, possessed of much rice, scil. ^^K desak, country ; rupavad-bhdryah, possessing a handsome wife, scil. 4.1 *n rdjd, king.

Determinative compounds may be turned into possessive compounds, sometimes without any change, except that of accent, sometimes by slight changes in the last word.

The gender of possessive compounds, like that of adjectives, conforms to the gender of the substantives to which they belong.

IV. The last class, called Avyayibhdva, is formed by joining an indeclinable

particle with another word. The resulting compound, in which the indeclinable particle always forms the first element, is again indeclinable, and generally ends, like adverbs, in the ordinary terminations of the nom. or ace. neut. : ^rfvfi^f adhi-stri, for woman, as in

adhistri grihakdrydni, household duties are for women. They may be called Adverbial Compounds.

I. Determinative Compounds. § 513. This class (Tatpurusha) comprehends compounds in which generally the last word governs the preceding one. The last word may be a substantive or a participle or an adjective, if capable of governing a noun. i. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Accusative: ^Wfw: krishna-frritah, m. f. n. gone to Krishna, dependent on Krishna, instead of ^stf ftnr: krishnam sritah. |:*flrf1d: duhkha-atitafy, m. f. n. having overcome pain, instead of JtlsWdld: duhkham atitah. <nUfl'<ji varsha-bhogyahy m. f. n. to be enjoyed a year long. JjlHJirff: grdma- prdptah, m. f. n. having reached the village, instead of ?jn} UTH: grdmam

H h 2

236 COMPOUND WORDS. § 513-

prdptah : it is more usual, however, to say MlvtiflH: prdptagrdmah (Pan. ii. 2, 4). Similarly are formed determinatives by means of adverbs or prepositions, such as ^fjrflftL atigiri, past the hill, used as an adverb, or as an adjective, '^frffnfX: atigirih, ultramontane ; ^rfaj|^ abhimukham, facing, &c. 2. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Instrumental :

; dhdnya-arthah, m. wealth (arthaK) (acquired) by grain (dhdnyena). : sankuld-khandah, m. a piece (khandah) (cut) by nippers (sanku-

Idbhih}. ^l^f-gJTC ddtra-chchhinnah, m. f. n. cut (chhinnah) by a knife (ddtrena). ^ft^Trf: hari-trdtah, m. f. n. protected (trdtaJi) by Hari. ^^w: deva-dattah, given (dattah) by the gods (devaili), or as a proper name with the supposed auspicious sense, may the gods give him (Dieu-donne). fxj^nr: pitri-samah, m. f. n. like the father, i. e. pitrd samah. ^frl!*^: nakha-nirbhinnah9 m. f. n. cut asunder (nirbhinnaJi) by the nails (nakhaih). visva-updsyah, m. f. n. to be worshipped by all.

svayam-kritah, m. f. n. done by oneself.

Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Dative : IM^UV yupa-ddru, n. wood (ddru) for a sacrificial stake (ytipdyd). iftf^TT: go- hitah,m.f.n. good (hitaJi) for cows (gobhyah). (V*H§: dvija-arthah, m.f.n. object (arthd), i. e. intended for Brahmans. Determinative compounds, when treated as possessive, take the terminations of the masc., fern., and neut. ; e. g. finrr^TT *RT*r: dvijdrthd yavdguh, fern, gruel for Brahmans. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Ablative :

chora-bhayam, n. fear (bhayam) arising from thieves (chorebhyah). r: svarga-patitah, m. f. n. fallen from heaven. ^TJJJW: apa-grdmah, m. f. n. gone from the village.

5. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Genitive :

TTTJ^: tat-purushah, m. his man, instead of tasya, of him, purushah, the man*. TTafJ^: rdja-purushah, m. the king's man, instead of rdjnah, of the king, purushah, the man. tT5TH^» rdja-sakhah, m. the king's friend. In these compounds sakhi, friend, is changed to sakhah. cgHcRK: kumbha-kdrah, a maker (kdrah) of pots (kumbhdndm) . jft^nr go-sat am, a hundred of cows.

6. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Locative : *J<Uj§U: aksha-saundah, m. f. n. devoted to dice. TCfa": uro-jah, m. f. n.

produced on the breast.

* Most words ending in "J tri or «R ka are not allowed to form compounds of this kind. Hence ^TT^T ^TrTT katasya kartd, maker of a mat, not o^oF'ST katakartd; $TT H^T purdm bhettd, breaker of towns. There are, however, many exceptions, such as ^£»l«lu deva- pujakah, worshipper of the gods, &c.

COMPOUND WORDS. 237

§ 514. Certain Tatpurusha compounds retain the case-terminations in the governed noun.

T: sahasd-kritah, done suddenly (Pan. vi. 3, 3). riiw»tlH»: dlmand-shashtha/i, the sixth with oneself (Pan. vi. 3, 6). swm; parasmai-padam, a word for the sake of another, i.e. the transitive form of verbs (Pan. vi.3, 7,8). $ *4&lgJf krichchhrdl- labdham, obtained with difficulty. ^SHp*}^' svasuh-putrah, sister's son (Pan. vi. 3, 23). (^eitHCri: dioas-patih, lord of heaven. qi^rMPn; vdchas-patih, lord of speech. l devdndm-priyaJi, beloved of the gods, a goat, an ignorant person. t gehe-panditah, learned at home, i.e. where no one can contradict him. khecharah, moving in the air. tKJVui! sarasi-jah, born in a pond, water-lily. hridi-spris, touching the heart. jfvf^TJ yudhishthirah, firm in battle, a proper name (Pan. vi. 3, 9).

§ 515. To this class a number of compounds are referred in which the governing •element is supposed to take the first place. Ex. ^[5«bi«<; purva-kdyah, the fore-part of the body, i. e. the fore-body ; ^5<lcf! purva-rdtrah, the first part of the night, i. e. the fore- night ; JJ^iK rdjadantah, the king of teeth, lit. the king-teeth, i. e. the fore-teeth (Pan. n. 2, i). They would better be looked upon as Karmadharayas ; cf. § 517.

§ 516. If the second part of a determinative compound is a verbal base, no change takes place in bases ending in consonants or long vowels, except that diphthongs, as usual, are changed to ^\d. Hence *Tc$g^ jalamuch, water-dropping, i. e. a cloud; tftHMI soma-pdt Soma-drinking, nom. sing, ^ffam: somapdh (§ 239).

Bases ending in short vowels generally take a final J(Jt : Pq *a f»i i(visvajit, all-conquering, from ftfj'i, to conquer. Other suffixes used for the same purpose are ^T a, ^tn, &c.

I b. Appositional Determinative Compounds.

J 517. These compounds (Karmadharaya) form a subdivision of the deter- minative compounds (Tatpurusha). In them the first portion stands as the predicate of the second portion, such as in black-beetle^ sky-blue, &c. The following are some instances of appositional compounds :

nila-utpalam, neut. the blue lotus. m,H I rH I parama-dtmd, masc. the

supreme spirit. 3llomiPlH; sdka-pdrthivah, masc. a Saka-king, explained as a king such as the Sakas would like, not as the king of the Sakas. SHUd: sarva-rdtrah, masc. the whole night, from sarva, whole, and rdtrih, night. Rdtrih, fern., is changed to rdtra; cf. ^trra: purva-rdtrafy, masc. the fore-night; *T«lTra: madhya-rdtrah, masc. midnight; yiwu^: punya-rdtrah, masc. a holy night. i^TTW dvi-rdtram, neut. a space of two nights, is a numeral compound (Dvigu). H^Kl»T. mahd-rdjah, masc. a great king. In these compounds *nr?T inahat, great, always becomes JT^TwaM (Pan. vi. 3, 46), and {W*{rdjan9 king, Tf*fi rajah; as parama-rdjah, a supreme king : but 4}{j*U su-rdjd, a good king, kimrdjd, a bad king (Pan. v. 4, 69, 70). f!m«4i: priya-sakhah, masc. a dear friend. *T% sakhi is changed to ?re: sakhah. ^THT^: parama-ahah, masc. the highest day. In these compounds ^5^ ahan, day, becomes

238 COMPOUND WORDS. § 518-

^Tjf aha; cf. drHl^t uttamdhah, the last day. Sometimes ^r ahna is substituted for ^^ ahan; ^tr^: purvdhnah, the fore-QOon. f^^: Jcu-purushah, masc. a bad man, or cfirg^: kdpurushah,. TTT^T^: pra- dchdryah, masc. a hereditary teacher, i. e. one who has been a teacher (dchdryd) before or formerly (pro). -*\d\$(W. a-brdhmanah, masc. a non- Brahman, i.e. not a Brahman. ^T«TO an-asvah, masc. a non-horse, i.e. not a horse. ^nT^iTW ghana-sydmah, m.f. n. cloud-black, from ghana, cloud, and sydma, black. ^frXRcS: ishat-pihgalah, m. f. n. a little brown, from ishat, a little, and pingala, brown. srrfo^fT: sdmi-kritah, m. f. n. half-done, from sdmi, half, and krita, done.

§ 518. In some appositional compounds, the qualifying word is placed last. vipragaurah, a white Brahman; TT^TTVtt rdjddhamah, the lowest king; H^if^ro bharata- freshthah, the best Bharata ; ^v^CTTn purusha-vydglirah, a tiger-like man, a great man ; t govrindarakah, a prime cow.

I c. Numeral Determinative Compounds.

$ 519. Determinative compounds, the first portion of which is a numeral, are called Dvigu. The numeral is always the predicate of the noun which follows. They are generally neuters, or feminines, and are meant to express aggregates, but they may also form adjectives, thus becoming possessive compounds, with or without secondary suffixes.

If an aggregate compound is formed, final ^r a is changed to ^ i, fern., or in some cases to ^ am, neut. Final ^r^ an and ^n d are changed to ^z or ^ am. Tfarre pancha-gavam, neut. an aggregate of five cows, from panchan, five, and go, cow. iftgo (in an aggregate compound) is changed to imgava (Pan. u. i, 23), and tft nau to TTR ndva. tNg: pancha-guh, as an adjective, worth five cows (Pan. v. 4, 92). flg^fb dvinauh, bought for two ships. ST^cS1 dvy-ahgulam, neut. what has the measure of two fingers, from dvi, two, and angulih, finger; final i being changed to a. •gr^: dvy-ahah, masc. a space of two days ; ahan changed to ahah (Pan. n. i, 23). ^GRTTTc^: pancha-kapdlah, m. f. n. an offering (puroddsah) made in a dish with five compartments, from panchan, five, and kapdlam} neut. (Pan. n. i, 51, 52; iv. i, 88). f<^c5J<*l tri-loM, fern. the three worlds : here the Dvigu compound takes the fern, termination to express an aggregate (Pan. iv. i, 21). f^J^f tri-bhuvanam, neut. the three worlds : here the Dvigu compound takes the neuter termination. <^$l$HlO dasa-kumdri, fern, an assemblage of ten youths, "^f n chatur- yugam, neut. the four ages.

§ 520. The following rules apply to the changes of the final syllables in determinative compounds. Very few of them are general as requiring a change without any regard to the

-J 520. COMPOUND WORDS. 239

preceding words in the compound. The general rules are given first, afterwards the more special, while rules for the formation of one single compound are left out, such compounds being within the sphere of a dictionary rather than of a grammar.

1. ^^richt verse, ^pur, town, VT^ap, water, ^ dhur, charge, vfal^pathin, path, add

final ^ a (Pan. v. 4, 74); "WM1^: ardharchah, a half-verse. This is optional with nfa<\pathin after the negative ^a; XIM«I aputham or vfai: apanthdJi.

2. <j*i«\nf)'an, king, xi^aAan, day, *rfe sakhi, friend, become THT rdja, ^J^ aha, *Rf

sukha; H^KIH* mahdrdjah. (Pan. v. 4, 91.)

3. 7T^ wr0s, if it means chief, becomes TT^I urasa; Vinftui ascorasam, an excellent

horse (Pan. v. 4, 93). Likewise after TTf?T/>r«/i, if the locative is expressed; HrfJM< pratyurasam, on the chest (Pan. v. 4, 82).

4. isf\5f erArsAt, eye, becomes ^HSf aksha, if it ceases to mean eye. 'i«fiQft gavdkshah, a

window ; but j^f5J*tlifK| brdhmandkshi, the eye of a Brahman. (Pan. v. 4, 76.)

5. ^frft^anas, cart, TOS*^ a*m«w» stone, ^m^ ayas, iron, ^TO^sffras, lake, take final ^f a

if the compound expresses a kind or forms a name. <nicoi<4<f kdldyasam, black-iron; but *i^«*J sadayah, a piece of good iron. (Pan. v. 4, 94.)

6. ««H«\ brahman becomes WCf brahma, if preceded by the name of a country ; *}<jgtf«:

surdshtrabrahmah, a Brahman of Surashtra (Pan. v. 4, 104). After ^ ku and TffT mahd that substitution is optional (Pan. v. 4, 105).

7. n«j«^ takshan takes final ^T a after ?JTH ardma and «FT7 kauta; 141*1(1*3* yrdmatakshaJi,

village carpenter. (Pan. v. 4, 95.)

8. iJJ^/tfan, dog, takes final ^Ta after ^fnT ati, and after certain words, not the names of

animals, with which it is compared ; ^JlafiH^I* dkarshasvah, a dog of a die, a bad throw (?). (Pan. v. 4, 97.)

9. ^Tl«n^ adhvan becomes ^TUI adhva after prepositions ; TO*!* prddhrah. (Pan. v. 4, 85.)

10. *U«1«^ sdman, hymn, and cOm*^ loman, hair, become ^T*T sdma and rtl*i /owia after Unf

pro^", ^Tg anw, and ^T aray *j^rt\»t* anulomaJt, regular; ^T»Jo5ta anulomam, adv. with the hair or grain, i. e. regularly. (Pan. v. 4, 75.)

11. fTP^tamas becomes !T*TO tamasa after ^T^ a?;a, TTsam, and ^V andha; ^««in*i*i andha-

tamasam, blind darkness. (Pan. v. 4, 79.)

12. H?^ raAas becomes T^TT rahasa after ^"^ anu, ^8ft ava, and 1TR lapta; ^J^T^Tt

anurahasah, solitary. (Pan. v. 4, 81.)

13. "^^varchas becomes M^H varchasa after *^( brahma and fH^TAasf/; ««q^t* brahma-

varchasam, the power of a Brahman. (Pan. v. 4, 78.)

14. 'ft^o becomes *T3gava, except at the end of an adjectival Dvigu. M'S'iq panchagavam,

five cows ; but <lt^Jt ponchaguh, bought for five cows. (Pan. v. 4, 92.)

15. •ft nau, ship, becomes TTO ndva, if it forms a numerical aggregate ; ^^ni^panchandvam,

five ships : not when it forms a numerical adjective ; s^ntt panchanauh, worth five ships. (Pan. v. 4, 99.)

16. «n nau, ship, after ^IV ardha, becomes "^mndva; ^T^TT^ ardhandcam, half a ship.

(Pan.v. 4, 100.)

17. ^P^khdrt, a measure of grain, becomes ^tTZkhara as an aggregate; PS <s i <- drikhdram :

also after ^ ardha; ^I^lt ardhakhdram. (Pan. v. 4, 101.)

18. ^»ffc5 anjali, a handful, after f^ dvi or f^ tri, may, as an aggregate, take final ^ a;

dvyafijalain or si^lta dryarijali, two handfuls. (Pan. v. 4, 102.)

240 COMPOUND WORDS. § 521-

19. ^bjfc5fl%w/i, finger, after numerals and indeclinables, becomes *Te3 ahgula;

dvyahgulam, a length of two fingers. (Pan. v. 4, 86.)

20. UlVvj sakthi, thigh, becomes "QW*l saktha after "Z^^uttara, ipl mriga, and *$§ purva;

^N U optf purvasaktham. (Pan. v. 4, 98.)

21. ^rf^ra^ri, night, after "*f% sarra, after partitive words, after ti<?Min sankhydta,

punya, likewise after numerals and indeclinables, becomes TTc? rdtra; ^fW^T^ft sarva- rdtrah, the whole night; ^^TT^I purvardtrah, the fore-night; VST'Ucf dvirdtram, two nights. (Pan.v. 4, 87.)

22. ^C%*[ahan, day, under the same circumstances, becomes ^1^ aAwa; 4HI^$! sarvdhnah

the whole day : but not after a numeral when it expresses an aggregate ; 3R»* dvyahah two days. Except also ^'^H^ punydham, a good day, and JJoFI^ ekdham, n. and m a single day. (Pan. y. 4, 88-90.)

II. Collective Compounds.

§ 521. Collective compounds (Dvandva) are divided into two classes. The first class (called ^tftrR itaretara) comprises compounds in which two or more words, that would naturally be connected by and, are united, the last taking the terminations either of the dual or the plural, according to the number of words forming the compound. The second class (called MHI^K samdhdra comprises the same kind of compounds but formed into neuter nouns in the singular. ^frt'y! hasty -asvau, an elephant and a horse, is an instance of the former, ^WS[ hastyasvam, the elephants and horses (in an army), an instance of the latter class. Likewise 91 «fioh ujll sukla-krishnau, white and black :

4 *

gavdsvam, a cow and a horse.

If instead of a horse and an elephant, ^f^yji hastyasvau, the intention is to express horses and elephants, the compound takes the terminations of the plural, ^4-KJHji: hastyasvdh.

§ 522. SQme rules are given as to which words should stand first in a Dvandva com- pound. Words with fewer syllables should stand first : (Vqon^ni siva-kesavau, S'iva and Kes'ava; not W^r^ftfT^T kesavasivau. Words beginning with a vowel and ending in ^? a should stand first : $£(ep «!lt isa-krishnau, fs'a and Krishna. Words ending in ^ i (gen. Ut eh) and "3" u (gen. ^uJ o#) should stand first : *?fenCT hari-harau, Hari and Kara ; also bhoktri-bhogyau, the enjoyer and the enjoyed. Lastly, words of greater importance should have precedence : <^^m deva-daityau, the god and the demon ; cns(<J.i5ir<a<ii brdhmana- kshatriyau, a Brahman and a Kshatriya ; TTrTlftniTr mdtd-pitarau, mother and father, but in earlier Sanskrit 04 rRl*f I riTT pitard-mdtard, father and mother. (Pan. vi. 3, 33.)

§ 523- Words ending in ^J ri, expressive of relationship, or sacred titles, forming the first member of a compound, and being followed by another word ending in ^ ri, or by putra, son, change their ^J ri into W d (Pan. vi. 3, 25). TTiJ mdtn-\- f^fff pitri form T mdtdpitarau, father and mother; "faj pitri +1gW putra form f"4 ri I yyt pitdputrauj

fil potri ^orm ^^T^^Tfj hotdpotdrau, the Hotri and Potri priests. § 524. When the names of certain deities are compounded, the first sometimes lengthens its final vowel (Pan. vi. 3, 26). Thus fry N ^H(! mitrdvarunau, Mitra and Varuna; agmshomau, Agni and Soma. Similar irregularities appear in words like

-$ 528. COMPOUND WORDS. 241

cMf dydvd-prithwyau, heaven and earth ; SMIUH* ushdsd-naktam, dawn and night (Pan- vi. 3, 29-31).

§ 525. If the compound takes the termination of the singular, then final ^ ch, ^ chh, *(j> T* Jh> \d> ^sA> and ^ h take an additional Va. ^T*l vdch+'H^tvach form vdktvacham, speech and skin (Pan. v. 4, 106). V^^ahan, day (see § 90, 196), and rdtri, night, form the compound vcVuci: ahordtrah, a day and night, a (Pan. v. 4, 87).

§ 526. OTTO bhrdtarau may be used in the sense of brother and sister; '$& jtutrau in the sense of son and daughter; fHinJ pitarau in the sense of father and mother; *31TTt soasurau in the sense of father and mother-in-law. Man and wife may be expressed by »¥ i M is cil jdyd-pati, »Jsn*l jampatt, or ^Mnl dampatt.

III. Possessive Compounds.

J 527. Possessive compounds (Bahuvrihi) are always predicates referring to some subject or other. A determinative may be used as a possessive compound by a mere change of termination or accent. Thus *f1<^rMc6 nila- utpalam, a blue lotus, is a determinative compound (Tatpurusha, subdivision Karmadharaya) ; but in «ftr5taje5 JTCJ nilotpalam sarah, a blue lotus lake, nilotpalam is an adjective and as such a predicative or possessive com- pound; (see Pan. n. 2, 24, com.) In the same manner <H*g; anasvah, not-a-horse, is a determinative, ^M^ft T^T: anasvo rathah, a cart without a horse, a horseless cart, a possessive compound.

Examples : HiwV,«*t ^TH: prdpta-udako grdmah, a water-reached village, a village reached by water. ^^SH^ udha-ratho 'nadvdn, a bull by whom a cart (rathah) is drawn (udha). ^H^riMS^ ^5: upahrita-pabii rudrah, Rudra to whom cattle (pasuh) is offered (upahritd). ^HlflO ^fo pita-ambaro harih, Hari possessing yellow garments, inrih pra- parnah, leafless, i. e. a tree from which the leaves are fallen off. : a-putrah, sonless. f-*i'a*j; chitra-guh, possessed of a brindled cow. » riipavad-bhdryah, possessed of a beautiful wife. f?T^5l dvi- murdhah, two-headed : here murdha stands for iniirdhan. f^MK dvi-pdd, two-legged : here pad stands for pdda. ^^ su-hrid, having a good heart, a friend, ^fssnrfasn bhakshita-bhikshah, one who has eaten his alms. rft?ftT3i75'^g: nila-ujjvala-vapuh, having a blue resplendent body.

§ 528. Bahuvrihi compounds frequently take suffixes. The following rules apply to the changes of the final syllables in possessive compounds :

1. ^fen sakthi, thigh, and ^tfBSf akshi, eye, if they mean really thigh and eye, take final

^ a; cn«io5ns$: kamalakshah, lotus-eyed. (Pan. v. 4, 113.)

2. ^T^JTc? ahguli, finger, substitutes final ^T a if it refers to wood; JU^jrt ^If* dry angular*

ddru, a piece of wood with two prongs*. (Pan. v. 4, 114.)

, Prakriya-Kaumudi.

I

242 COMPOUND WOKDS. § 529-

3. Igfi^murdhan, head, substitutes final ^T a after "% dm and ffc trij %^VJ dvimurdhah,

having two heads. (Pan. v. 4, 115.)

4. ojta^/omaw, hair, substitutes final ^T a after ^TcT^ antar and ^f^t vahih; ^iic5i«t! antar-

lomah, having the hairy part inside. (Pan. v. 4, 117.)

5. Hir<H<*lwasz7;a, nose, becomes "^^nasa, if it stands at the end of a name ; *nntt! gonasah,

cow-nosed, i. e. a snake; but not after *?$& sthula; <^cO«llftloK sthiila-ndsikah, large-nosed, i.e. a hog. The same change takes place after prepositions; unnasah, with a prominent nose. (Pan. v. 4, 118, 119.)

6. After ^ «, g: duh, or tf su, f?fc3 kali, furrow, and tffflrq sakthi, thigh, may substitute

final ^a; ^T^cSt ahalah or ^("cot ahalih. (Pan. v. 4, 121.)

7. After the same particles, JHU pro/a, progeny, and HVTmec?Aa, mind, are treated like

nouns ending in ^H(asj g^ITt durmedhdh. (Pan. v. 4, 122.)

8. VT dharma, law, preceded by one word, is treated like a noun ending in

kalydnadharmd. (Pan. v. 4, 124.)

9. ifaljambhd, jaw, after certain words, becomes '^fo^jambhanj ^^TT sujambhd.

10. SfHJ./awM, knee, after Tlpra and IT 5aw, becomes ^Jnw^ U3J prajnuh (Pan. v. 4, 129).

This is optional after ttkurdhva (Pan. v. 4, 130).

11. *3\W(udhas, udder, becomes "3W^ w^aw ; ^$nft kundodhni. (Pan. V. 4, 131.)

12. V^[ dhanus, bow, becomes ^^^dhanvan; ^TV^T pushpadhanvd, having a bow of

flowers (Pan. v. 4, 132). In names this is optional.

13. iRRljdyd, wife, becomes iHfajdni; ^JH^TTf^TJ subhajdnih. (Pan. v. 4, 134.)

14. *TV gandha, smell, substitutes *tfVf $rawS/M after certain words; ^nfvt sugandhih. (Pan.

v- 4» 135-1370

15. ^l^pdda, foot, becomes ""n^^ac? after certain words; <=qi«Mi^ vydgJirapdd. (Pan. v. 4,

^ 138-140.)

16. <fiT danta, tooth, becomes ^c?a# after many words; flT^dwe/an, having two teeth,

(sign of a certain age) ; fern, fk^cft dvidati. (Pan. v. 4, 141-145.)

kakuda, hump, becomes '«h^^ kakud after certain words and in certain senses ajdtakakudj a young bull before his humps have grown. (Pan. v.

i46-i48.)X

1 8. '3T^ uras and other words belonging to the same class add final ^i kaj vyudhoraskah, broad-chested. (Pan. v. 4, 151.)

19. Words in ^t'n add final cR&a ih the feminine; ^^iHcM bahusvdmikd, having many

masters, from Wffo*{svdmin, master. (Pan. v. 4, 152.)

20. Feminine words in ^«, like ^T^ nadi, and words in ^J ri, add final ^ ka;

bahukumdrikah, having many maidens; ^J>roBJ bahubhartrikah, having many husbands. (Pan. v. 4, 153.)

21. Most other words may or may not add final cfi&a; «N $*i I c4 <*u bahumdlakah bahumdldkah or ^Jittc*: bahumdlah. (Pan. v. 4, 154.)

IV. Adverbial Compounds. $ 539. Adverbial or indeclinable compounds (Avyayibhava) are formed by joining an indeclinable particle with another word. The resulting com- pounds, in which the indeclinable particle forms always the first element, are again indeclinable, and generally end, like adverbs, in the ordinary. terminations of the nom. or ace. neut.

-J 531. COMPOUND WORDS. 243

Examples : vifij^fi: adhi-hari, upon Hari, instead of *ftf f adhi harau, loc. sing, ^froj anu~vishnu, after Vishnu, instead of ^Tej faujj anu vishnum, ace. sing. 3M«J»uu upa-krishnam, near to Krishna. fVrtfgpii nir-makshikam, free from flies, flylessly. ^ffff^H ati-himam, past the winter, after the winter, instead of ^HlT f^f ati himam, ace. sing. M^fKJilJ pradakshinam, to the right. Vfrj^q anu-rdpam, after the form, i. e. accordingly, instead of OTJ ^q anu rupam9 ace. sing, 'Jjvji^ifa yathd- Sakti, according to one's ability, instead of ^if^vji baktir yathd. inptt sa-trinam with the grass; ugmtjfe satrinam atti, he eats (everything) even the grass, instead of ipg*i ^ trinena saha, with the grass, ^N^l* ydvach-chhlokam, at every verse, ^rr^f^i amukti, until final delivery. vicjJNi anu-gahgam, near the Ganga. TT^TC]^ upa-saradam, near the autumn; from ^TO sarad, autumn (Pan. v. 4, 107). <5M^i^* upa-jarasam, at the approach of old age ; from iRQjaras, old age (J 167). 4MHPH^M/?a- samit or <5MHPH^ upa-samidham, near the fire-wood ; from *rfir^ samidh, fire-wood. ^m»T upa-rajam, near the king; from tr*F{rdjan, king.

§ 530. There are some Avyayibhavas the first element of which is not an indeclinable particle. Ex. fn8§ tishthad-gu, at the time when the cows stand to be milked ; M'S'i'i pancha-gahgam, at the place where the five Gaiigas meet, (near the Madhav-rao ghat at Benares); McM'^m pratyag-grdmam, west of the village.

§ 531. The following rules apply to the changes of the final syllables in adverbial compounds :

1. Words ending in mutes (k, kh, g, gh, cji, chh,j, jh, t, th> dy dh, t, th, d, dh, p, ph, b, bh)

may or may not take final *8a; ITRTfW upasamidham or zwfal^upasamit, near the fire-wood. (Pan. v. 4, in.)

2. Words ending in ^^an substitute final ^B? a; ^«rnT adhydtmam, with regard to one-

self. (Pan. v. 4, 108.)

3. But neuters in ^f^an may or may not; ^M^H upacharmam or ^•'H upacharma, near

the skin. (Pan. v. 4, 109.)

4. «T<^ nadf, *il<5*il4ll paurnamdsi, ^iiiisi^<u1 dgrahdyani, and mR^irt may or may not

take final ^ «; ^mf^ upanadi or <im^ upanadam, near the river. (Pan. v. 4, no, and 112.)

5. Words belonging to the class beginning with STC^ sarad take final ^ a ; 3*431 45

upasaradam, about autumn. (Pan. v. 4, 107.)

1 l

APPENDIX I.

DHATUPATHA OR LIST OF VERBS.

Explanation of some of the Verbal Anubandhas or Indicatory Letters.

^T a is put at the end of roots ending in a consonant in order to facilitate their pronunciation.

Accent. — The last letter of a root is accented with the acute, the grave, or circumflex accent, in order to show that the verb follows the Parasmai- pada, the Atmanepada, or both forms.

The roots themselves are divided into uddtta, acutely accented, and anuddtta, gravely accented, the former admitting, the latter rejecting the inter- mediate ^ i.

^TT d prohibits the use of the intermediate 3[ Hn the formation of the Nishthas (§ 333> -D. 2), Pan. vii. 2, 16. Ex. TJ^: phullah from fHMicftI niphald.

^i requires the insertion of a nasal after the last radical vowel, which nasal is not to be omitted where a nasal that is actually written would be omitted ($ 345, 10), Pan. vii. i, 58 ; vi. 4, 24. Ex. *f^f?f nandati from nadi3 Pass. tfera nandyate; but from ih^ or Hr^ month, Pres. manthati, Pass. Hs-MH mathyate.

^ ir shows that a verb may take the first or second aorist in the Parasmai- pada ($ 367), Pan. in. i, 57. Ex. ^r^l^achyutat or from "Vjfw^chyutir.

\ i prohibits the use of the intermediate ^ i in the formation of the Nishthas (§ 333> D. 2), Pan. vii. 2, 14. Ex. "33: unnah from -$$ undi.

^ u renders the admission of the intermediate ^ i optional before the gerundial tttva (§ 337, II. 5), Pan. vn. 2, 56; and therefore inadmissible in the past participle (Pan. vn. 2, 15). Ex. ^rfai^T samitvd or ^nFTT sdntvd from ^ig samu; but ^ifw: sdntah.

"& u renders the admission of the intermediate ^ i optional in the general tenses before all consonants but \y (§ 337, !• 2), Pan. vn. 2,44; and therefore inadmissible in the past participle (Pan. vii. 2, 15). Ex. ^T seddhd or iffwr sedhitd from fa\t^sidhu ; but ftr^t siddhah.

^ ri prevents the substitution of the short for the long vowel in the redupli- cated aorist of causals ($ 372*), Pan. vii. 4, 2. Ex. ^aftoin^ alulokat from fjffti lokri.

CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

245

75 li shows that the verb takes the second aorist in the Parasmaipada ($ 367),

Pan. iji. i, 55, Ex. *Pl*n{agamat from ng ffamfi. * e forbids Vriddhi in the first aorist ($ 348 *), Pan. vn. 2, 5. Ex. inrTfyawa-

thit from if^ maths. ^ o indicates that the participle is formed in tf na instead of n ta (J 442, 5),

Pan. vin. 2, 45. Ex. Tffa: pinafy from ^ffarnft opydyi. ^» shows that the verb follows the Atmanepada (Pan. I. 3, 12). *T/* shows that the verb follows both the Atmanepada and Parasmaipada,

the former if the act reverts to the subject (Pan. i. 3, 72). f*T ni shows that the past participle has the power of the present (Pan. in.

2, 187). Ex. TJ^: phullafy, blown, from fowl niphald. H w shows that the vowel is not lengthened in the causative (§ 462, note),

Pan. vi. 4, 92; and that the vowel is optionally lengthened in the aorist

of the passive (Pan. vi. 4, 93).

Bhu Class (Bhvddi, I Class). I. Parasmaipada Verbs.

i. ^J)huy to be.

Parasmaipada : P. i. *mfa Ihdvdmi, 2. H^ftr bhdvasi, 3 4. *^R: Ihdvdvah, 5. HTO bhdvathah, 6. Witt Ihdvatah, 7. 8. *r^*T Ihdvatha, 9. H^fif bhdvanti, I. i. ^nrt dbhavam, 2. ^ava/, 4. ^M^TR dbhavdva, 5. ^M^ff dbhavatam, 6. dbhavdma, 8. ^W^Trf dbhavata, 9. ^w^a^avaw, O. i.

Ihdvati, bhdvdmah, : dbhavah, dbhavatdm,

3

7. ^IHTR dbhavdma, 8. ^W^Trf dbhavata, 9. ^w^a^avaw, O. i. >i^ Ihdveyam,

2. VR: bhdveh, 3. H^i/iav^, 4. H^ Ihdveva, 5. >m bhdvetam, 6. *^rri bhdvetdm, 7. H^T&Mvema, 8. >TWlf Ihdveta, 9.^^: Ihdveyuh, l.i.*Fnfolhdvdni3 2.*&lhdva,

3. >T^g bftdvatu, 4. H^T^ bhdvdva, 5. H^TT bhdvatam, 6. *T^nf bhdvatdm, 7. *TqTR bhdvdma, 8. H^ff bhdvata, 9. «T| Ihdvantu \\ Pf. i. "^^5 babMva^ (see p. 175), 2. ^jfT*T babMvitha, 3. *nj<r babMva, 4. ^f^ babhuvivd, 5. ^pTj: babMvdthuh, 6. T$]snj: babMvdtuh, 7. ^f^iT babMvimd, 8. ^>J5 babMvd, 9. ^ijj: babhdvuh,

4 7 C. i

II A. i. ^r^ dbhdvam (see p. 1, 2. ^ij: azA, 3 5. ^*$$dbhutam, 6. ^Jlff dbMtam, 7. ^TJJIT dbhuma, 8

F. i. HP^uflfH bhavishyami, 2. Nfcuifo bhavishydsi, 3. bhavishyavafi, 5. HfrtTO bhavishydthah, 6. bhavishydmah, 8. T dbhavishyam, 2 dbhavishydva, 5. dbhavishydma^ 8.

bhavishydtha, 9. t dbhavishyafy, 3. dbhavishyat am, 6. dbhavishyata, 9.

bhavishydti, bhavishydtah, bhavishydnti, dbhavishyat, dbhavishyat 6m t dbhavishyan^

t The reduplicative syllable ^6a is irregular, instead of (Pan. i. 2, 6) ; the regular form would have been ^^ bubhdoa.

base, too, is irregular

246 BHU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

P. F. i.vrfacTTftR bhavitasmi, 2. Hfaffrftr bhavitdsi, 3. tf^TTT bhavitd, 4. bhavitasvah, 5. ^f^iTT^r: bhavitdsthah, 6. Hf%WT§ bhavitdrau, 7. ufarfiw: bhavi- tdsmah, 8. >rfVriHW bhavitdstha, 9. ^forTO bhavitdrah, B. i. JJITO bhtiydsam, 2. *gn: bhuydh, 3. ^fi-^bhuydf, 4. ^rns bhuydsva, 5. £m*T bMydstam, 6. $inw bhuydstdm, 7. JJ5TRR bhuydsma, 8. >J?n^r bMydsta, 9. ij^ng: bhuydsuh \\ Part. Pres. i?^ bhdvan, Perf. ^^T^ babhuvdn, Fut. HfmM^ bhavishydn, Ger. bhdtvd or °ijTr -bhuya, Adj. Hf^n^r: bhavitdvyah, H^»fti: bhavaniyah, bhavyah (J 456).

Atmanepada'"" : P. i. >r^ bhdve, 2. VR*i bhdvase, 3. *r^ff bhdvate, 4. bhdvdvahe, 5.^^ bhdvethe, 6. H^ bhdvete, y.HTR^ bhdvdmahe, 8.H«T vadhve, 9. H^W bhdvante, I. i. ^SM^r dbhave, 2. ^nnvji; dbhavathdh, 3. dbhavata, 4. ^nm^f^ dbhavdvahi, 5. ^WT*TT dbhavethdm, 6. ^TH^Hf dbhavetdm, 7. ^M^THf^ dbhavdmahi, 8. ^T>WEJ dbhavadhvam, 9. ^WRTT dbhavanta, O. i. bhdveya, 2. HT*n: bhdvethdh, 3. ^Tif bhdveta, 4. ^^rf^ bhdvevahi, bhdveydthdm, 6. HTTTTlf bhdveydtdm, 7. *RJ*ff bhdvemahi, 8. ^*4 bhdvedhvam, 9. >TTO^ bhdveran, 1. 1. *t bhdvai, 2. HW^ bhdvasva, 3. *R7TT bhdvatdm, 4. bhdvdvahai, 5. H^JT bhdvethdm, 6. *TTfl7 bhdvetdm, >j.*f3TP^bhdvdmahai} bhdvadhvam, 9. vr^irt bhdvantdm \\ Pf. i.'f^ babMve (see note f, page 245),

2. TT^f^ babhuvishe, 3. "^^ babMve, 4. ^ijf^t babhuvivdhe, 5. "sn^rre babhu- vdthe, 6. ^^5m Idbhuvdte, 7. ^Jjf^m% babhuvimdhe, 8. ^f^i^ or °^ babhuvidhve or -^Ave (see J 105), 9. ^jfft babhdvire, I A. i. ^wfaft dbhavishi, 2. ^^f^?r: dbhavishthdh, 3. ^nrf^? dbhavishta, 4. ^swf^f^f^ dbhavishvahi, 5. ^swi^TTf a&Aa- vishdthdm, 6.^wf^Tcrf dbhavishdtdm, 7. ^Mfr^rf^ dbhavishmahi, 8. ^wfe4 or °^ dbhavidhvam or -dhvam, 9. ^wf%mr dbhavishafa, F. vrfr^ bhavishye &c., C. ^THftrsir dbhavishye &c., P. F. i. *fa!TRf lhavitdhe, 2. Hf^TTO bhavitdse,

3. HfVtfT bhavitd, 4. ^f^ril^^ bhavitdsvahe, 5. ^f^dWR bhavitdsdthe, 6. HfaflW bhavitdrau, 7. >TfVffTWf bkavitdsmahe, 8. Hf^TTT^ bhavitddhve, 9. ^fViTR* bhavi- tdrah, B. i. HMfar lhavishiyd, 2. HW^Tt lhavishishthdh, 3.

shishtd, 4. ^ fmd^f^ bhavishwdhi, 5. ^f^Ml^ll^i bhavishiydsthdm, 6.

7. ^rf^^^f^ bhavishimdhi, 8. HP^«D^4 or 0S" lhavishidhvdm or -dhvdm, 9. Hf^hj^ bhavishirdn \\ Part. Pres. H^TRt bhdvamdnah, Perf. babMvdndh, Fut. yfarq'*^: bhavishydmdnah.

Passive : P. i. ^ lMye\9 2. ^PW bhuydse, 3. Jjrra1 Ihdydte, 4. Jjm ydvahe, 5.^^ Ihuyethe, 6.>J^ bhuyete, 7. ^TT^ bhuydmahe, 8.^W bMyddhve, 9. $?fir bhuydnte, I. ^^ aM%e &c., O. Jj^ij bhuyeya &c., I. ^ ^%az &c. u

be used in the Atmanepada after certain prepositions. Even by itself it is used in the sense of obtaining : *T f^R *T^ sa sriyam bhavate, he obtains happiness. (Sar. P- 4, 1. 3-)

in means to perceive, and may yield a passive.

BH& CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 247

Pf. *n*£$babMve &c., like Atmanepada, I A. i. wfofo or ^wrWw dbhavishi, 2. ^swfatfi: or ^wrftm: dbh&vilhjhdb, 3. *wrfa dbhdvi, 4. ^wf^fif dbhdvtihvahi &c., like Atmanepada, F. *f?n& or mf^ bhdvishye £c., C. wfro or dbhavishye &c., P. F. Hfadl^ or mfcirfig bhavitdhe £c., B. Hfrifa or bhdvishiyd &c. II Part. Pres. tgiJHM: bhdydmdnah, Fut. HfqqjHm: bhdvishyd- mdnaJi) Past $TT. bhutdfy.

Causative, Parasmaipada : P. Mi^ifa bhdvdydmi, I. ^XFTQ dbhavayam,

0. HN^ii bhdvdyeyam, I. HIMmfH bhdvdydni \\ Pf. HN^i^^iTC bhdvaydiichakdra, II A. wr^T^ dbtbhavam, F. UNfamifa bhavayishyanii^ C. WHnf'nQ dbhdvayi- shyam, P. F. WNf^rilfw bhdvayitasmi^ B. HT*TW bhdvyasam.

Causative, Atmanepada : P. nm bhdvdye, I. mm dbhdvaye, O. bhdvdyeya, I. HT^I bhdvdyai \\ Pf. HR*d'*n* bhdvaydiichakre, II A. dbibhave, F. m^fTO bhdvayishyt, C. ^TMNfauj dbhdvayishye, P. F. bhdvayitdhe, B. HNf-M ifl^ bhdvayishiyd.

Causative, Passive : P. HT^ bhdvye, I. ^MT^ dbhdvye, O. m*nr bhdvyeya,

1. HT^ Ihdvyai \\ Pf. HN^I^rii, °^^, °TT^, Ihdvaydiichakre, -babhdve, -dse, I A. ^WRftrfa dbhdvayishi or ^rmf^ dbhdvishi, F. HTCfirofr Ihdvayishye or

bhdvishye, C. ^wreftr^ dbhdvayishye or wrfa*T dbhdvishye, P. F. bhdvayitdhe or Hlf^ril^ bhdvitdhe, B. Hreftnfal bhdvayishiyd or bhdvishlyd.

Desiderative, Parasmaipada : P. "yj^rfa lulhushdmi, I. ^ryjw dbulhu- sham, O. "^J^W bulhusheyam, I. "J^mftT bubhushdni u Pf. ^JJ5T^BR bubhtishdii- chakdra, I A. ^rygfw dbubMshisham^ Y.^^f^snf^bubhushishydmi, dbubhilshishyam, P. F. ^^fMrfifiH bubhushitdsmi, B. *^)jTxn^ bubhushydsam.

Desiderative, Atmanepada : P. ^$5 bubhushe, I. ^^5a&MtAz(5A6, 0. bubhusheya, I. g^5 lubhushai \\ Pf. ^%MN*ft bubhushdiichakre, I A. dbubhushishi, 2. ^^jwr: dbubhushishthdh, 3. ^R$ftF dbubhushishta, bubhushishye, C. ^ijf^ dbubhushishye, P. F. gflfafn^ bubhushitdhe, B. ^ijfq^ bubhushishiyd.

Desiderative, Passive : P.-z^bubhiishye, I. ^»f ^ dbubhtishye, O. lubhushyeya, l.^-^lubhushyai u Pf.^^f^raiiwiA^A^icAaArre, I A. i.

dbubhushishi^ 2. ^^jjwr: dbubhushishthdh, 3. ^TJ^jf^ dbubhushi (see J 406), F. 5^^ bubhushishye, C. ^*jfaiq dbubhushishye, P. F. ^fwf^ bubhushitdhe, B. ^fq^rhr bubhiishishiyd.

Intensive, Atmanepada : P. i. -sft^bobhuye, 2. ^ivg&lobhuydse, 3. ^t$inr lobhuydte, 4. ^^JirT^t bobhuydvahe, 5. ^t^J^ bobhiiyethe, 6. ^^fff bobhuyete, 7. •sftjJTT'R^ bobhuydmahe, 8. ^t^TO bobhiiyddhve, 9.^$^ bobhuydnte, I. i . dbobhuye, 2. ^t^-q^n: dbobhuyathdh, 3. ^nrfr$5iT dbobhiiyata, 4. bhtiydvahi, 5. ^t$5*U dbobhuyethdm, 6. '3nft£inri dbobhdyetdm, 7.

dbobhuydmahi, 8. ^R^JjW dbobhuyadhvam, 9. ^^^?T dbobhiiyanta, O.

248 BHfi CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

lobMyeya &c., 1. 1. -aft^rr IdbMyat, 2. *ft»JTO lobhdydsva, 3. -sfhjTnri lobhuydtdm, 4. wfojTjret lobhuydvahai, 5. *ft$ifcrf bobhuyethdm, 6. ^^in lobMyetdm^ 7. ^*J5Tm| lobhuydmahai) 8. •sfrj^&sj bobhuyddhvam, 9. sftiJTriri lobhdydntdm \\ PF. -sfr^^bobhuydmchakre, I A. i. ^pfrjlfafa dbobhuyishi, 2. ^rsft^ftrsr. dbobhu- yishthdh, 3. ^nft^ftrf dbobhuyishta, dbobhdyishdthdm,

8. WTtijftrsor or °cT dbobhtiyidhvam or -dhvam, 9. ^l^iflfwiT dbobhuyishata, F. •sftsjnra bobhiiyishye, C. ^t^ft^ dbobhuyishye, P. F. ^frnn^ bobhuyitdhe, B. -sftsftpfta bobhuyishiyd.

Intensive, Parasmaipada : P. i. ^>^f»T bobhomi or ^ffartf*? bobhavimi, 2. ^^ft bobhoshi or ^ftaTfrfa bobhavishi, 3. ^tvrVlTf bobhoti or TmrtilT bobhaviti,

4. "sft$5: bobhuvdh, 5. ^t^: bobMthdh, 6. *frp: bobhutdh, 7. ^t^: bobhumdh, 8. *fh£*T bobhuthd, 9. •sftg^fiT bdbhuvati, I. i. ^RtH^ dbobhavam, 2. ^ftnt: dbobhoh or wqto^h dbobhavih, 3. ^iwt>Th^ dbobhot or ^Rfarh^ dbobhavit, 4. ^TWt^JW a^o- bhuva, 5. ^?^t)Jlf dbobhutam, 6. ^t^Jjrrf dbobhutdm, 7. ^t^»T dbobhuma, 8. ^^JJT dbobhuta, 9. ^nfta^t dbobhavuh, O. ^^ bobhuydm, I. i. ^HWTf^T bobhavdni, 2. Tfrsft bobhuhi, 3. ^^5 bobhotu or sftarfc| bobhavitu, 4. ^H^ra bdbhavdva,

5. ^t^Jrf bobhutdm, 6. "sft^HT bobhutdm, 7. ^T^TH bdbhavdma, 8. ^t^FT bobhutd, 9- ^J^l bobhuvatu \\ Pf. i.^fa^HroFTT bobhavdmchakdra, 4. ^fa^N^1 bobha- vdmchakriva, 7. ThT^f^fR bobhavdmchakrima ; also i. '«fiHm bobhdva or

bobhuva, 2. ^hff^T bobhuvitha, 3. '«rt)?R bobhdva or ^$^ bobhuva, 4.

bobhuvivd*, 5. Tt^T^: bobhuvdthuh, 6. Wt^J^t bobhdvdtuh, 7. ^t^f%JT bobhuvimd, 8. Wt$5 bobhdvd, 9. ^^jg: bobhuvuh, II A. i. ^TTt^5 dbobhuvam, 2. ^[^ dbobhufy or ^T^)J5^: dbobhuvih, 3. ^nft$^ dbobMt or ^T^t^Ttl^ dbobhuvit, 4. ^nsft£5 a&o- ^Mv«, 5. ^R^ijif dbobhdtam, 6. ^I^ft^ifrf dbobhutdm, 7. ^nA^5 dbobhuma, 8. dbobhuta, 9. ^rwt)J|: dbobhilvuh (not ^TT^5^ dbobhuvan), I A. i.f ^r

dbobhdvisham, 4. ^rwtHTf^B^ dbobhdvishva, 7. ^^Trfa1^ dbobhdvishma, F. "^fafranft bobhavishydmi, C. ^r^t^fVa} dbobhavishyam, P. F. 'sjfaf^rilfw bobha- vitdsmi, B. ^rijtrr^ lobhuydsam.

Note — Grammarians who allow the intensive without Tya to form an Atmanepada, give the following forms : Pres. ^ft$% bobhute, Impf. ^sft'JW dbobhuta, Opt. Tt^hf bdbliuvita, Imp. ^ftjlTT bobhutdm, Per. Perf. Tta^teTfi bobhavdmchakre, Aor. 'SI^Tf^ dbobhavishta, Fut. WNTfrHnT bobhavishydte, Cond. ^rwVHf^Efif dbobhavishyata, Per. Fut.

, Ben. TtHf^^ bobhamshishtd. (See Colebrooke, p. 194.)

* The form t$^ bobhuviva is not sanctioned by any rule of Panini.

t The first aorist is the usual form for intensives, but in ^5M it is superseded by the second aorist, this being enjoined for the simple verb. Some grammarians, however, admit the first aorist optionally for ^5M (Colebr. p. 193). The conflicting opinions of native grammarians on the conjugation of intensives are fully stated by Colebrooke, p. 191 seq.

CLASS, PAR ASM AI PAD A VERBS. 249

2. f^ chit, to think,

The Anubandha \t shows that the participle in Ifl tah takes no intermediate ^i. P. ^TiffiT, I. 'Hlrt^, O. *J?n^, I. ^IHJ II Pf. i. fa^lff, 2. fa ^ fall, 3. f^^Tf, 4 5. f^Pqn^:, 6. (Vifarijj:, 7. faf^fTW, 8. flP^rf, 9. "fafaljt, I A. i. W^fdM, 2.

3. ^?^?rh^, 4. ^ref?n^, 5. ^T^fifF, 6. ^rirfrfFf, 7. w*rfrr*T, 8. virf?nr, 9. F. ^finqfiT, C. wfinqr^, P. F. ^frnn, B. f^rwr^ u Pt. fro, f*f**r^, Ger. or fafwr^r, °f«niT, Adj. ^finnr:, ^jnrhi:, ^: u Pass, fra?*, Aor. ^fw, Caus. ^rnrfir, Aor. ^T^farn^, Des. f^fif^fTr or f^f^Omfir, Int. ^farnr, ^^fw.

3. -^ chyut, to sprinkle, (^fllT.) The Anubandha ^tr shows that the verb may take the first and second aorist.

P. -^ftiffff, I. ^^fTir^, O.^frTr^, I. •aftirg u Pf. i. ^pjfrf, 2. ^xiftfrvj, 4. ^gfirf, I A. i.^r^fVfinT, 2. ^fWVrftj, 3. w^ftrftir, 9. v^fir^:, or II A. 1.^*5^, 2. ^ngn:, 3. wajrn^, 9.^^^;, F. ^VfrofTT, C. ^r^ftfTnxnT, P. F. ^ftfinTT, B. •557^11 Pt. ^jfinr: or ^q>%lT:, -j^jH!^, Ger. ^aftfiraT or -^fiTr^T, Adj. **ftfrfiT«M: u Pass. Caus. ^tftfnrf?f, Aor. ^T^^Jtn^, Des. ^ftfiRfiff or ffrafii, Int.

4. 'QBI^schyut, to flow, , I.vS>4lflHi^, O.^firti^, I.vftiT^llPf.i.'Wvftir, 9.^^^:, IA. i.

:, or II A. I.TOJTT, F. wrfif^fiT, C.^^Trim^, P. F.wtfinn, B.

&c.

Note — This verb is sometimes written ^tj.

5. qi^manth, to shake.

P. Jhrfir u Pf. i. mfa, 2. ^nlftnr, 3. »nr^, 7. unTvjn, 8. M^: (Pan. i. 2, 5) or, less correctly, JT*nrg: (J 328, 4), I A. wWhr, F. ^ftroifTf, P. F. Hfwr, B. ($ 345^ 10) » Pt. Hftnr:, TH^JT^ or ^fwi^ (cf. § 395, note), Ger. irfapn or nfv (Pan. i. 2, 23; f 428),°JniT, Adj.nTv|d'*M;, J^IThi:, »m: u Des. fMftj^flf, Int. HlHanw, m4% or ^^^ftflT, Impf. 3.

Note — Roots ending in consonants preceded by a nasal, lose the nasal before weakening (kit, nit) terminations (Pan. vi. 4, 24) ; but not roots written with Anubandha ^. The terminations of the reduplicated perfect in the dual and plural are weakening (kit), except after roots ending in double consonants (Pan. i. 2, 5). According to some, however, the weakening is allowed even after double consonants : ^ff^ffiT I M*flMl<<f%fli»TiJ< I TT5JT ^

<5 foF^TT I <A»iijJ iA^jWrt1 II Roots, however, which thus drop the penultimate

nasal in the perfect, need not take ^ instead of reduplication : Prakriya-Kaumudi, p. 7 b.

Native grammarians admit a verb HVjfd (mathe), and another «i^ifn, which supply a variety of verbal derivatives.

6. "f^ kunth, to strike, (^fa.)

Roots marked in the Dhatupatha by technical final ^t keep their penultimate nasal throughout This root can take no Guna, on account of its final conjunct consonant.

P- •fTrfiT, I. *f ^, O. -f^, I. $ ^r§ u Pf. i. ^pr, 2. ^tf^ni, 9- ^^> l A-

K k

250 BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

, J 99> not

with lingual ^, as Carey gives it) u Pt. -f ftmr, Adj.-ffzm^i: II Pass, "f Wff, Caus.-fTrefir, Des. ^faitfTT, Int.

7. ftn{ sidA, to go (ftox), and fav sidh, to command (fan*).

P. *vfn (fMwftf *), I. ^^ " pf- 1. ft**» 2. ftrefw, 9. fttfw, I A. F. irftrofir, P. F. ftftrar, B. ftnsr^.

In the sense of commanding or ordaining, this root is marked by technical •gj (f^v ), and hence the intermediate ^ may be omitted. Thus Pf. 2.

or ftre^, 4. ftrfafire or fafasT &c., F. itfvnrfir or %wfiT, P. F. irfVnn or

I A. ^T^rtl^ (as before), or i. ^T%W, 2. ^rentfh, 3. ^Srtt'lf^, 4. viSr*3, 5.

, 7. 'sitr^T, 8. ^rite, 9. 'srirg: n Pt. ftr^.% Ger. irftn^r or ftr^r, °ftnff, Adj. or TO^i: II Pass, ftnflff, Caus. ihnrfw, Des. ftrefVmfif or ftff^rfiT (§ 103), Int. ^fTOff, H^fe

8. ^ khad, to be steady, to kill, to eat.

P. ^fff H Pf. i.^^T^ (a), 2. ^^ft^r, 3. M'«l^, 4. ^^f^, 5. ^^^t, 6. -q^gt, 7. ^^f^fT, 8. ^^, 9. ^^:, I A. ^^T^^ or W^(fi), (Pan. vn. JJ, 7; f 348),

F. ^^rfif, P. F. ^HT, B. ^Em^ u Pt. ^rf^ir:, ^T^TT^, Ger. ^f^r, °^Rr, Adj.

U Pass. ^?rw, Caus. yi^fii, Des. f^^f^flT, Int.

9. IT^ gad, to speak.

P. T^fw (nftpr^frr), I. *&I?T( (THRITT^), O. TT^, I. n^g u Pf. i. 2. *fTf^r, 9. •SFTg:, I A. ^nn^or ^SR^(a), (Pan. vn. 2, 7; $ 348), F.

C. ^rnf^n^, P. F. nf^wr, B^nim^ w Caus. in^rfw, Des. ftFrf^fir, Int.

10. T^ rad, to trace, to scratch. P. ^fif II Pf. i. TTT<? (&), 2. V^T, 9. ^ I A- ^H or ^K («)» (J

n. r^nad, to hum, (^.) P. »T^f7r (iro^fir, wfim^fif) u Pf. i. H«II^ («), 2. Hf^'M, 9. ^j:, I A. vfi< or

12. ^rf ard, to go, to ask, to pain.

P. ^rf fif, I. ^nfir ii Pf. i. wfrrf , 2. ^Tfjrff *r, 9. 'sri'Tjt, I A. wnfFf^, F. ^rf^'orfiT u Pt. ^f^jtt, not ^rra*, see also p. 166 II Caus. -si^fw, ^nf^TJ, Des.

13. ^ ind, to govern,

P. ^fir, 1."^, O. ^, I. ^rg u Pf. ^pq^R (I 325) or ^m( or

* The change of ^ into ^ is forbidden by Panini vin. 3, 113, when ftfV means to go. It is admitted by the Sar. The Anubandha <T is sometimes added to "ftr^ to go, but is explained to be for the sake of pronunciation only. Colebrooke marks it as erroneous. Its proper meaning would be that intermediate ^ is optional in the gerund, and forbidden in the past participle (§ 337, II. 5). The forms without intermediate ^ belong properly only to ftr^ to command. This verb must change its initial ^ after prepositions ;

BHU CLASS, PARASMAJPADA VERBS. 251

IA. i.FfH, a^W:, F. fomfr, C.Vf^nf, P.F.^in, B.jim^ n Pt. jfijTn, Perf. or Wlf«4|1^, Perf. Pass. ^Nftuu: or "^JTR: or

14. ffanind, to blame, (fiffft.)

P. fchjfir (uftfrsT or nM<«i, J 98, 8, 2) u Pf. frfrfc, I A. ^fHTfy F.

P. F. fctfsWT, B. fTOT^.

15. "Pro niksh, to kiss, (fiin^.) P. fa H| fa (R^^ITT, not RffffSffrr, $ 98, 8, 2) II Pf. fHfHHf, I A.

F. f»irKJU4Pn, P. F. f^Tf^TTT, B. frltt^m.

16. TGukh, to go.

P. vftwfrf (litarrf, § 43), I. y&U44|^ II Pf. i. T^T (J 314)) 2. J^favj, 3. 7. JlflSH, I A. 'sriWlc^, F. ^finwu^frf, C. VHrf^mf^, P. F. ^f?HfT, B. Pass. ^lUjd, Caus. ^n^fH, Des. ^ftf%f^nrfTT.

17. w*l andi, to go, to worship, (^^ and ^rfv.)

The Anubandha "7 w of ^^ aficAu allows the option of intermediate 7 i in the gerund,

anchitvd or "wm\ aktvd, and its nasal remains, except before weakening forms (see month,

PNo.5); but the Anubandha ^t of ^Tfafac/iirequiresthe nasal throughout (Dhatupatha 7, 6). P.^fff n Pf. i. 'srnH (§ 313), 9. ^rnf^t (but see No. 5, note), I A. w F. qjpqmfw, C. wf^tir^, P. F. <iPMd!, B. ^TT^ (may he worship), (may he go), § 345, 10.

Pass. ^^TT and ^NjTT, Caus. •«(1Mnf7f, Des. ^

Distinguish between •^faff! worshipped, Ger. vPqr«ii having worshipped, and moved (Pan. vn. 2, 53; vi. 4, 30); ^T never seems to lose its nasal when it means to honour: Pass. »a*MH he is honoured, iH^Mri he is moved. The two roots, however, are not always kept distinct.

1 8. ^r^dnchh, to stretch, farf%.)

P. WSrfTT II Pf. ^Ml^ or w^ (J 313), I A. Wflfli^ F. ^nTamfd u Caus. , Des. viiP«ir«a.Hrn.

19. mruch, to go, (33.)

^ii^Mfn, ^tafir

n This and other verbs enumerated $ 367 take optionally the first or second aorist ; mtfiWli^ or Wj*l^ II Pt. ^5:, Perf. ^^^|t^, Ger. HfBR^T, (Pan. i. 2, 26), or ^IRT.

20. j% hurchh, to be crooked, (5%.) P. fAfir (J 143) H Pf. ^|*, I A. wpefit n Pt. jf*r or |* (j 431, 2).

21. •snjwz/, to go. P. ^rsrfiT ii Pf. i. ^nr (a), 2. ^finT (f 328), I A. <n»fl^ or

F. <q Hn «<fif.

22. ^ vrq;, to go.

P. TnTft n Pf. i. ^niT (a), 2. ^^ftriT, I A. w*mrX (§ 34^*) » Pt

Caus. ^M^fd, Des. (^1^^, Int. ^id^fj

K k 2

252 BH# CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.

23. ^T5T«/, to go, to throw.

P. *mfw, I. ^n*fi^ II tf must be substituted in the general tenses before terminations beginning with vowels. Before all consonants except ^(Pan. u. 4, 56, vart.) this substitution is optional, i. e. both ^ and ^ may be used II

Pf. i. f^nmr (a), 2. f^j or ftnrftro (I 335, 3), [jsrrftnr], 3. f^ro, 4. fafere ($ 334), [^iftre], 5. f^i^r:, 6. faaiij:, 7. fafai* [^TTftnr], 8. fa*r, 9. f^j:, I A. ^%^ [>nrX]> 9. nty, F. TOfir (1 332, 3), C. ^nn^, P. F. Tin, B. [F. ^rf^TfTT, C. ^rf^ni;, P. F. ^fw?n] n Pt. tfir: [>ftTff:], Perf. Ijsnftnn^], Ger. ^terr [^ftr^r], °Thr, Adj. ^ff^r: [^ftnr*i:], -cf^H^:, w: u

Pass. ^7T, Caus. -qTHJ^frf, Des. f^Wrr [^ftTf^frr], Int. ?3tTR (WlT is not sanctioned by Panini).

24. fs? ^Ai, to wane, /r«/i*. to diminish, (Colebrooke.) P. H^fff u Pf. i. f^^Tir (a), 2. f%T5pr or f^^ffiT^r, 9. fafofft, I A. -si ^ tfl r^, F. -^BTflT, B. ^tinr^ (§ 390) II Pt. ftp: or -^tan U Pass. 'HjT^H, Caus. 3JH4Hfri, Des. fq^lMfrf, Int, ^Sjfaffir, %%fif. The Caus. ^qnfrt belongs to •% (f 462, II. 23) *.

25. oFT kaf, to rain, to encompass, (oF7.)

The Anubandha 1J e prevents the lengthening of the vowel in the aorist. P. -sreffT II Pf. ^^TJ, I A. *oh^(no Vriddhi, $ 348 1).

26. T£{(/up, to protect, (n^.)

The verbs ^J^^M^, to guard, W^dMp, to warm, ftr^ vichh, to go, "^TTT ^an, to traffic, tJ^ JJOTI, to praise, take WI aya in the special tenses, and take it optionally in the rest. (Pan. m. 1,28; 31.)

P. jfarrafir, I. wftum^, O. *i\m*n^, I. 'ftTnrg H Pf- i^m^i^auK (§ 325^ 3) or "spfhr, I A. ^TTfhrnft^ , ^RViffy or ^H'itmlrt (J 337, 1. 2), 6. "snmr, F. TrVqiftrofff,

or Tft^FrfiT, P. F. jfimrnHi, ^ftftnrr, or Tf^rr, B. jplm^iri or ^«ur^ u Pt. Trttrrftnr: or nir:, Ger. jilMif^Hi, nVftrf^T, or JTRT, Adj . Tft

or TU^K II Caus. JTfairflT or JntjTHnfjT, Des. ^'ItsPrt, WnfxjwTfTj 'T'TTnT^nT, or *FftTTftrefff, Int.

27. W^dhilp, to warm. P. vtmrfir U Pf. vqmNcFTC or ?WTJ (no Guna, because the vowel is long),

I A. ^JqFffa or

28. if^ tap, to burn, (J 332, 14.) P. rmfw II Pf. i. ffiTTxr (a), 2. rTH^ or wfxR (§ 335, 3), 3. cfffTtT, I A. i.

2. wrwt:, 3. ^nn^il^, 6. ^nrTrrt (f 351), F. -ax^rfiT, P. F. wm, B. TfTam^ n Pt.

* The causative cannot have short a, and though both Westergaard and Boehtlingk Roth give the short a, they produce no authority for it. The participle Hjf^ri: is equally impossible, and should always be changed into

CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VEKBS. 253

Ger. mjT, Adj. FTO:, TO: (short, because it ends in ^, § 456, 6) u Pass. rUMff, Caus. ATM<lfff, Des. fffn^fn, Int. nin«M?T9 fimfw.

Note — With certain prepositions TH^ takes the Atmanepada (Pan. I. 3, 37) ; THHTTf, fTfUTff it shines. It has an active sense in the passive (i.e. Div Atm.), if it refers to Iftj: austere devotion ; n*Mri nmxtiH«: the devotee performs austere devotion. In the sense of regretting (being burnt) it forms the Aor. ^tnw ; ^i«*iqinN MIMI ««*»«ui he was distressed by a sinful act. (Colebr.)

29. Vf cham, to eat, (*nj.)

The following verbs lengthen their vowel in the special tenses (Pan. vn. 3, 75, 76) : ^T cham, if preceded by ^TT d, to rinse, iMi'^iHfri dchdmati ; f^^shfhivt to spit, iThlfiff shthtvati (see No. 35) ; H5^ kram, to stride, fliT*tffT krdmati (see ^No. 30) ; ^H^kfam, to tire, "JITTfiT kldmati. ^ #wA, to hide, JJffrf guhati, follows a different rule, lengthening its vowel throughout, instead of taking Guna, when a vowel follows. (Pan. vi. 4, 89.)

P. *Rfw, but after the prep, ^n, WMIHfr II Pf. i. ^TTR (a), 2. ^ftro &c., I A.

(J 348^) u Pt. ^ifw: (§ 429), Ger. ^fr^r or ^farff, Adj. ^ftnw

(Pan. in. i, 126) u Caus. ^IHMfri (J 462).

30. W1 kram, to stride, ("^55.) JK$ kram, to stride, W5T bhrds, to shine, >TT5T 6^/<w, to shine, tfJJ bhram, to roam,

to fail, Gflft tras, to tremble, ^T trut, to cut, c5^?asA, to desire, may take 1 ya in the special tenses. Hence ^IW^fd bhrdmyati or WTftf bhramati. (Pan. in. i, 70.)

P. fRTHfiT or -jRTJsifr, I. ^^T^ or ^^i^^ u Pf. *nRT*, I A. -sniiirl^ (§ 348*), F. -aifinqfif, P. F. -afar, B. -ai^T^ n

•aw lengthens its vowel in the general tenses (sit) of the Parasmaipada (Pan. vii. 3, 76). Hence jMHfrf, but wti. It takes no intermediate ^ in the Atm.; Fut. <a$*IF, P. F. "^TTT, Aor. ^T^cT; but some grammarians admit intermediate ^.

Pt. -afar, Perf. ^^TRTT^, Ger. ^f^T (a) or ^fHr^T (§ 429), Adj. a fa dm: n Pass. "affq^r, Caus. WRflf, J 461, (after prep, also ailHqffl), Des. f^aif*T^flT or f^^^d, Int. v*w<^, ^Tfifif .

Note — It has been doubted whether "3RH in the Div class also lengthens its vowel. It is not one of the eight S'am verbs (Pan. vn. 3, 74) ; and in Pan. vn. 3, 76, tyan is no longer valid. The Prasada 'gives a^Pii ; but adds, ^jPTiT "§ ^44x4 fs ^&: j^i^nlfri I The Sarasvati decides for jnu-qPn, giving the general rule (n. i, 145) ^i«ii<{l»ii ql^i H^fTT McniV

"Rl and enumerating as ^ITrf^, ^IJT^^HH^^'^'aiHR^. But "aWis not a Samadi at all, and instead of "a»*T we ought to read UW. Taranatha in the Dhaturupadarsa gives ffMjffl, Rajaramas'astri supports jni*^fff.

31. HH yam, to stop.

The roots T*T gam, to go, THT yam, to cease, and "S^ish, to wish, substitute ^5 chchha for their final in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 77.)

P.-rarfir, I. XS^HII Pf. i.irow(5), 2. ir^for ^f»ni, 9. %:, I A. ^wh^($359)> F. Tfcqfir, p. F. iJTn, B. TH » Pt. ^nr:, ^^RT^, Ger. *I^T, °^^ or °TTW, Adj.

254 Bffft CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VEfcBS.

TOT: (fifinwr:) u Pass, *iT*rff, Caus. Tmnfa (a), (§ 461), II A.

Des. finfafiT, Int. TfanajTT or iRfiT.

Note — *PT may be used in the Atm. with the prep. ^TT, if it is either intransitive, t the tree spreads, or governs as its object a member of the agent's body ; he puts forth his hand. Likewise with the prep. ^5?T, ?T, "3^, if it is used

reflectively ; ^•od.H 'ril^l*^ he heaps together his own rice. Likewise after 1"*T, when it means to espouse ; TTTt *f)ril*JMH4ttf Rama married Sita: here the Aor. may also be OMIMH; like ^<JNrt he divulged another's faults. (§ 356.)

32. TH nam, to bow, (*PT.)

P. -^fw n Pf. i. •^n* («), 2. -JR^T or ^firo, 9. %, I A. ^Hfi^ (f 359), F.

P. F. tfiTT, B. Tfnrn^&c., like H»T. On the Causative, see $ 461.

— "qi? may be conjugated in the Atmanepada. (Pan. in. i, 89.) The Anubandha ^ given to it by some grammarians is declared wrong by others.

33. TTH^aw, to go, (IT*.)

P. n^fiT II Pf. i. ^TITR (a), 2. -STHrfVpz? or ^rf^, 3. ^17??, 4. <*fn^ (J 328, 3), 5. 3T"rg: &c., II A. ^riT^ (§ 367), F. TrfrofiT (J 338, 2), P. F. TTFT, B. JTWT n Pt. inr:, Perf. ^fn^n^ or ^TTP^T^, Ger. JTRT, °TT«I or OJTTT, Adj. TTTTO:,

Pass. J|Hjrl, Caus. j|*Hfn, Aor. ^^l^*iri, Des. firnfH^fiT, Int. ^J|*^ri or

Note — With prep. ^ it follows the Atm., if intransitive. The Caus. too, with the prep. S5TT, may follow the Atm., if it means to have patience; ^I'i»i1^ TTT^wait a little. In . the Atm. the final *T may be dropt in the Aor. and Ben. ; twin or ti^'iw, ^Urtilg or (See § 355.)

34. TKcfphal, to burst, (fHMWI.)

P. tfic5fff || Pf. i. -qTRTH (d), 2. ^ffTC (f 336, II. 2), 3. TTOc*, 4- I A. ^nfiTc^ (I 348*), F. TfifoTirfH II Pt. ipr: (Pan. vin. 2, 55), Ger. MifaHl II Pass. TB^TW, Caus. TBTT^irfff, Aor. ^IifliMr^ Des. f^tfifj^fiT, Int. qij^ri, TT^foff. (Pan. vn. 4, 87-89.)

35. f?^ shthiv, to spit, (fi^.)

P. -sWff n Pf. ftnhr or ftH I A. <3nNfy F. ^f%^?fiT n Pt. &g: u Pass.

({ 143), Caus. ^^fiT, Des. fff^f^fk or g^T^fff (Pan. vn. 2, 49), Int.

No Intensive Parasmaipada. Vowel lengthened in special tenses (see No. 29). Initial sibilant unchangeable (§ 103).

36. f^ji, to excel.

P. nMPff n Pf. i.f^rrnr («), 2. f«|j|vr or f^Jifiivi, 3.f*nrnr, 4. r5ff"?"=r, 5. ftn^rjt, 6. f^nrg:, 7. ftrfnur, s. ftrnr, 9. fsrg:, I A. ^^^ (J 350), F. imfr, P. F. inn,

B. 'sfhlTfl; II Pt. flTff:, Perf. fuDNl^, Ger. flfSrT, Adj. %rf^T:, ^HRhi:, ^H, and : (f 45^» 2)9 ftw* only with ^fe: (Pan. in. i, 117) II Pass, iftnw, Aor. Caus. ^TTRfff, Aor. ^nf^HTi^, Des. ftfnWff, Int. ^ft^, ^%fif. It

follows the Atmanepada with the prepositions TO and fw.

The change of l^into Txin the reduplicated perfect is anomalous (§ 319). It does

CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERB*. 255

take place in 7*n to wither ntllT, although the rule of Panini might seem to comprehend that root after it has taken Samprasarana. i*n forms its reduplicated perfect flT»*ii.

37. ^HS( aksh, to obtain, (v^.) ^^uksh follows also the Su class, Vt^jllftOl akshnoti &c. P. ^TE|fTT II Pf. i. -viiiGf, 2. vj|fiPB|X4 or xii»tK, 3. ^TPTSf, 4. VMfyq OF

5. vnisj^, 6. -winsjg'j 7. ^sTRfepr or *uri««f, s. wr«rcr, 9. «Mgr, I A. i. or ^rref, 2. VHIVSJ'):, 3. ^msfri^, 4. VNI(H|H or ^ror, 5. ^rrfsr* or ^m?, 6. ^rrf^jf or 7. vHifHf1*! or ^rrep, 8. wrftf^ or ^BTTF, 9. ^wrfiejg: or VTTJ:, F. vfujviffl or r, P. F. mftsfri! or ^??T II Pt. ^T?:, Ger. ^T or ^?ft|?^T n Pass. V^T?T, Caus. SH^Mfri, Aor. *snfa«t|i^, Des. vnf^nsjMfk (J 476).

K^, to hew, follows W^ throughout, also in the optional forms of the Su class.

38. ^ krish) to drag along, to furrow.

P. ^fr u Pf. i. *n*t, 2. •q^ft^, 3. ^it, 4. ^fVre (f 335, 3), I A. i.

2. viomefT;, 3. ^nirnsflfi^, 4. ^IcRn^, 5. *t*iS, 6. ^M«WKT, 7. V«CIIIQ»I, 8. ^K»ii, 9.

or ^nsr?| &c., or I A. 4. *?^rsf &c. If used in the Atmanepada, the two

forms would be,

I A. 2. i.WfflSf, 2.W£¥n, 3-

I A. 4. i. id. 2. *i$KfV|i:, 3.

I A. 2. 4. ^ejT^f^r, 5. ^cyGlixif, 6. Vf H||(ff,

I A. 4. 4. ^T^VSINf^, 5. id. 6. id.

I A. 2. 7. ^^fif, 8. ^S?^f , 9.

I A. 4. 7. -»Hc(ilSJIHflf, 8. ^p|l4, 9.

F. ai^frf or ^fw, P. F. TOT or ?R|T 11 Pt. f Bt, Ger. ^T " Pass. ^nr?r, Caus. Aor. xM^ohMH or ^T^^i^i^, Des. f^Effff, Int. ^O^f^lrt, ^0*1? or

The peculiar Guna and Vriddhi of ^, viz. ^and TT, instead of ^T^ and WIT, take place necessarily in '&*{, to emit, and "^ST, to see (Pan. vi. i, 58) j ^T¥T, "JFT, ^9T^TT^, and V^UJjIlT : optionally in verbs with penultimate ^, which reject intermediate ^ (Pan. vi. i, 59) '> 71 to rejoice, <3TTT or tT^T, Aor. vtni-^flTi^, 'STWT'^rh^ or

39. ^^rush, to kill.

P.tt^fwu Pf. i.^d*, 2.^df^r, 9.^^:, lA.^CiMX, F.dft^fir, P. F.

or df^n (I 337, II. i).

» 40. "S^ush, to burn.

P. ^ft^tlr, I. "sfrm^ u Pf. i. ^fteNoRn: or •gr^r^ (J 326), 2. ^fmy, 3.

&c., lA.'sftrh^, F.'sftfTOfrr, P. F.^>ftir, B. ^qr^ 11 Pt. ^ir. or

(§ 425) u Des. 'sftfafinrfiT.

41. t^; mih, to sprinkle. P. Mr ii Pf. i. fifWT> 2. f^f^zr, I A. <*f*ren^ (§ 360), F. TCjrfrr, P. F. «TT u

256 BHU CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.

Pt. *fte:, Perf. jf^T^(fafaa^), Ger. jft^T II Caus. *f trfrr, Wifift^, Des. Int. *fWff, wfe, (*frfe, Westerg.)

42. ^ dah, to burn.

P. ^ft II Pf. i. ^T*r (&), 2. \f^ or ^iv, F. vsgfr (J 118), P. F. <pvr, B. <mir1, I A. i. 'srvTEf, 2. wrcfttj 3. ^visf)^ 4- ^rorw, 5. ^FV, 5. ^PVT, 7. ^nn^r, 8. ^mr, 9. ^rorer: (see p. 185) u Pt. ^nsr. u Caus. ^qfw, Aor. ^^^, Des. f^rayfir, Int. ^3ff, ^fTV.

43. T% glai, to droop ; also J mlai, to fade. P. TcSnrfiT, O. r<3T^ II Pf. i. W&t (I 329), 2. STfroFZI or !Tc5T^, 3. ^Tc^,

^irfrc^r, 5.^0^5:, 6.^755:, 7. irfrcW, 8.^c7, 9. ^r^:, I A. i.«u?5Tftw (J 357), 2. ^P"c5nT^, 3. ^ri^nT^fTj 4. ^f<5Tftr^=r, 5. ^r^cyrfti'?} 6. ^PTSTftreij 7. ^^^TftT^Tj 8. ^T<3Tftre, 9. ^Tcjrftr-q:, F. T^i^rfF, P. F. TOnrT, B. ^Hrmi^or THU^ (J 3921) n

Pt. TOJPT:, Ger. r^TF^T, °'c5T^, Adj. THTW^:, TcSlWhKj ^WT. M Pass, (impers.) , Caus. Te^rinrfk or T^q^rcT (Dh. P. 19, 68), Des. fuFcsrefrf , Int. »n-

44- *tffai, to sing; also "\rctf, to bark, % kai, to croak. P. '1T*lftf II Pf. »Hn, I A. ^TTCrfa^, F. Jlimfrt, P. F. Jllril, B. «mir^ (§ 392)' Mark the difference between ^ and T§£ in the Bened. u Pt. *ffa:, Ger. jf)HI» T, Adj. JTTtTSJ^ TT^T^:, ^rm U Pass. ift^H, Aor. >HJ||f^, Caus. Tl^nfrf, Aor.

45. w shtyai) to sound, to gather; also TO styai, the same. ($ 103.) P. KMiMfifT (^ 103)? !• ^TPrnTW II Pf. ?TB»Tr, I A. ^STWT^T^IT, F. KMitMfn, P. F. KMirti)

B. wiHlr^ or INMIr^ H Pt. ^mi»TJ, Trcrt7fl, HWlTt (J 443).

Note — With regard to the initial lingual sibilant, the Prasada quotes the Varttika to

Pan. vi. i, 64, as ^SkTT^W^'Kfif^^T ^r^frf^Vi I A marginal note says, «<*ii^r»Mbrtit^'"

til «i im (*jtT*T^>?J"^1 HT^i'mopr^^^^ 3TTw*«i ^^fira «i i m flT W 31 «^*i M i n MI K.fn MC*<n

imr

46. " dai, to cleanse, This verb is distinguished by a mute ^ p from other verbs, like <fT da &c. It is therefore not comprised under the ^ ghu verbs (§ 392*); it takes the first aorist (3rd form), and does not substitute \i or TJ e for ^ST a.

P. ^nrfff u Pf. ^, I A. i. ^rftnr, 2. ^T^ft: &c., F. ^r^frr, P. F. ^m, B.

^RTf^ II Pt. ^Trf: II Pass. ^TOW, Caus. ^HnrffT, Des. f^T^fk, Int. ^T^n^, ^Tfif.

47. V 6?^e, to drink, (TIT.) This verb is one of the six so-called **£ ghu roots (§ 392), roots which in the general tenses

have for their base ^T da or VT dA<l

P. vrrfif u Pf. i.^, 2. ^mor ^VTO, 3. ^, 4. ^ftw, 5. ^Tj:, 6. ^>Tg:, 7 8.^V, 9.^:. It admits I A. 3. ($357), II A. ($368), and Red. II A. ($371):

BH6 CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 257

2. , 9.

F. vrofiT, P. F. vm, B. wi^ ii Pt. >far:, Ger. \flwr, °vnr H Pass, vhnr, Caus. vrWir (Atm. °T* to swallow), Aor. *r^him^ DCS. fvwfir, Int. ^vhrir, ^rvrfir, or, with the always optional f, ^rvfif.

48. pldrtf, tosee, (•£%*.) This root substitutes H^ pasi/a in the special tenses. P. iflRfir, I. WI^, O. H^, I. Wt% H Pf. i. <*<n$r, 2. <ji^N or ^8 ($ 335),

3. ^r, 4. <$fyif, 5. T?3Hp5 6. ^$nj:, 7. ^jfijm, 8. ^pr, 9. TfS}:, I A. i.

2. >ei£i3f1:, 3. ^ JIG|1^, 4. vi ji8«i, 5. xi JIK, 6. ^"^TTT, 7. ^^l«*l, 8. ^TJTF, 9.

(^ 360, 364); or II A. i. ^§, 9. *^, F. -j^rfir, P. F. -5*1, B. ^^ni^ u R.

:, Ger. ^, 0-piT, Adj. -5^^:, ^fN:, pu: H Pass. -5^, F. ^f§inr or (§ 41 1), P. F. ^f$rf! or "^T, B. ^f$«rts or ^Hjlg, Aor. W^i^, Caus. ij^hrnr, Aor. xM^^^lf^ or ^T^^, Des. f^K|H (Atm.), Int. ^O^^Mrf, ^fff .

"^^r and ^^ take ^ and IT? instead of ^T and ;3nr, as their Guna and Vriddhi before consonantal terminations (Pan. vi. i, 58). See No. 38.

Other verbs which substitute different bases in the special tenses (Pan. vir. 3> 7*0 : ^ forms ^a[f?f; ^, VRfw; ^, ^ft^W (Atm.); ^, tft^frr; "^IT, fM^fd ; UT, fiMPn ; "NTT, VTfiT ; ^JT, frtHPn ; ^T, HHfif ; ^T, ^(^rri.

49. ^ n, to go. P. '^TjAfif (dm SO, § 44), I. ^rrti^ u Pf. i. ^nr, 2. ^ifXvj (^ 338, 7), 3. ^IR,

4. ^rrfr^, 5. ^TR^:, 6. ^TRIJ:, 7. ^HifuH, 8. ^nr, 9. ^rr^:, I A. i.^fl, 2. ^rnflf:, 3. ^rr^ffr^, 9. ^rnj: ; the Second Aor. ^rrt is generaUy referred to the ^ of the Hu class, ^ufff ; F. ^rftwfTr (§ 338, 2), C. ^ftm^, P. F. *§r, B. ^T^ (§ 390) u Pt. -^TT: or ^n, Ger. ^r^T, °^w u Pass. ^^, Caus. ^ijfif, Des. ^fXCmfo,

Int. ^Xl5rt5 ^RfS, ^rftmfS, ^n^fif, VHr^OHn (exceptional intensive, { 479, with the sense of moving tortuously).

50. ^ sri, to go.

P. VT^rfw always means to run, while ^rcfk is used likewise in the sense of going u Pf. i. *raR(<£), 2. *rar$ (I 335, 3), 3. **TT, 4. **p9 5. wy., 6. ^TH?:, 7. wpT? 8. ^r, 9."^^:, I A. i. ^rarrt, 2. "^nrrtf:, 3. ^Hi*(T^; the Second Aor. ^rat is generally referred to the ^ of the Hu class ; F. ^r^mfri, P. F. ^HT, B. ftnm^ (I 390) u Pt. ww: u Caus. m^fd, Des. ftnfttfrr, Int. TO^TT,

($ 490)-

51. ^ tad, to wither, (^rjj.)

(The special tenses take the Atmanepada. P. ^fhrpr, I. sH^pjjri, O. •s^tWj I. ^fhnrf u Pf. i. 5151 1< («)? 2. ^nrw or Li

258 BHU CLASS, PARASMA1PADA VERBS.

9. ^[^t, II A. »^^^fi , F. ^i(t<fPfl, P. F. Tjr^T, B. tysi m II Caus. $(lrtHfirf (^fl^'Mfa he drives), Des. O^lrMPrt, Int. ^i^iejn, $|l$(Pr(.

52. ?re sad, to perish, ('*&•)

P. tflqPn (Pn^l^Pn) u Pf. i. TOTT^ («), 2. ^f^*r or ^rarr'zr, 9. $^:, II A. ^srnfff ('MH^r^), F. tutttPft, P. F. ^T^T, B. TOTn^ u Pt. ^r^t u Pass. USM, Aor. ^T^rrf^,

Caus. ^TT^ilfir, Aor. ^re^R^, Des. "ftr^wflT, Int. TtU(£lri, ¥T^rf%.

53. tn pd, to drink.

P. ftRfrr u Pf. i. ^nTTj 2. ^rf^^i or Tqrer, 9. ^ijjj II A. 'SRTIT, F. mmPrf, P. F. inirr, B. M*in^ (j 392) u Pt. "iffan, Ger. iflni, °^nr, Adj. tnTT^rt, mnl^it, "^rt u

Pass. tfhfF, Aor. ^Rlftr, Caus. mnijOT (or °^ to swallow), Aor. -fl ql m ^ (Pan. Vii. 4, 4), Des. fVnrwfir, Int. i|i(1^ri, m^iPn.

54. in ghrd, to smell, to perceive odour.

P. r^'iifrf) I. »itPii«f^, O. ftnn^, I. f^yg u Pf. i. *fw, 2. «iPiivi or ^vi^, 9. »nrr, II A. ^irn^j or I A. ^ * i til i^ (j 368, 357)5 F. Tn^rfw, P. F. nid r, B. ymiri or

392 1) H Pt. TTTiT: or UTOt, Ger. TTTr^T U Pass. ITR^", Aor. »Jj*j|p{{, Caus. ^rP5rn?^TfT or vi P^i pjj| 4 n (Pan . vu. 4? 6), Des. nisiiuPfi, Int. ^'ifl^rf, ^fTMlPri.

55. IRT dhmd, to blow. P. vrfrr n Pf. ^w? I A. »HMiin1i^, F. im^jPd, B. urnni^ or ^TTTH u Pt. i*mf* u

Pass. "WTRff, Aor. ^TWTTftr, Caus. iRm'Tfrr, Aor. ^Tfi*unTH, Des. f^urrafff, Int.

56. ^n sthd) to stand, (FT.)

P. firefr u Pf. K^ (^rfVfir^), II A. Tsn&m (**™0> 9- ^:> F- ^rr^fw, B. 392) u Pt. f^znr:, f^Tr^T, °OT*?, Adj. ^mr^:, wnl^:, ^i: n Pass,

Aor. -?H^j|ftr, Caus. Frm^fii, Aor. ^fdfs^r^, Des. Pd8rf«rri, Int. ri^/l^rf,

Note — After *t, W^", TT, and f^T, ^TT is used in the Aim. ; also after "33T, if it means to affirm; with "3"^, if it means to strive, not to rise ; or with "3^1, if it means to worship, &c. : Pres. f?r&W, Red. Perf. "jf^r, Aor. ^rfWiT, 9. ^ftfif^rf, Fut. WT^?ff, Ben. WRfte.

57. ^T mnd) to study.

P. T«TfiT II Pf. i. *TW? 2. *ir«xf or T^R, 9. TOt, I A. ^rwWlf^, B. ^rnrn^or #m^ II Pt. OTiT. U Pass, ^pm, Caus. OTTCfr, Aor.^rH^M, Des. fH^iqfff, Int. HltiNri,

58. ^r d», to give,

P. ^aiiT* (Trftr^^fw) n Pf. ^, II A. ^r^, B. ^in^ (f 392) u Pt. ^r:, Ger. (see No. 200, Pan. vu. 4, 46), °^T, Adj. ^nT^t, ^TTftiT:, ^q: H Pass. ^hlW, Caus. ^IMMfrf, Des. f^rHfri, Int. T^fanr, ^T^rfH1.

59. 5^ hvri, to bend. P. d^fW II Pf. i. ^d^K 0), 2. ^T^ (J 335), 3- W*, 4- ^fe (J 330, 334),

* After the preposition *T it may be used in the Atmanepada.

CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 259

9. iT5^:, I A. <a*rffy 9- **rf :, F. ^fr^fir (f 338), P. F. ^r, B. ($ 390) u Pt. ^rr:, Ger. 2^, °^w, Adj. ^a:, 3^fl^n, *ni: u Pass, Caus. s^mrfff, Des. 'rSfl!', Int. *lldgqrf,

60. "^ skand, to approach P. ^f?r (tfba^fw or Trfccfr^fir, P4n. vm. 3, 73, 74) u Pf.

or *n«fi?zr, 9. *n«fi*: or *raj: (see if^, No. 5), I A. TOKrafl^, 6.

9. *mifRr: ; or II A. ^r^f, F. Jsfcwfir, P. F. ^swr, B. ^urn^ ($ 345, 10) u Pt.

(§ 103, 6), Ger. ^RH (§ 438) u Pass. ^sir>, Caus. ^qfr, Aor.

(§ 374)» DGS' r*ll«ir^rH, Int. ^Hl^MI'ri (J 485), ^Hl**ffl.

61. TT M, to cross. P. tfrfiT u Pf. i. tnm: (a), 2. Ttfnr, 3. w?nt, 4. ?K^, 1 A. ^nnr^, F.

or irrNfTT (§ 340), P. F. wftin or inihrT, B. TrtSnj. In the Atmanepada

we generally find the verb used as Tudadi, P. firo, Pf. ST, Aor.

or ^mto or ^nnrte, F. Kftw^ (?), B. wfW? or ifWft? u Pt. irWh, Ger.

0Ht§ u Pass. ifHiw, Aor. ^nnft, Caus. dimfa, Des. rrtdfimfif or frirtOMfd or

finrfrtfir, Int. wrft^w, irnrfS.

62. t»^ ranji to tinge. This verb and ^(dams, to bite, ^3^saf?j, to stick, and T?T5{ svafij, to embrace (Pan. vi.

4, 25, 26), drop the penultimate nasal in the special tenses (§ 345, 10) and in the weakening

forms (§ 344, 395, note).

P. Mfri, I. ^t»n^, O. t^, I. T»fiJ II Pf. i. TT3T, 2. lAP»fV| or tt«pzr, 3. TT»T, 4. ttftm, 9. rig:, I A. mdvsfl^, F. i^iflT, P. F. t^r, B. 7^11^. Also used in the Atmanepada : P. Tinr, Pf. i. TT^, 2. rtfW^, I A. 3. ''st^i, 9. ^l«fd u Pt. T3i:, Ger. TW or TUT (Pan. vi. 4, 31, $ 438) II Pass. n^TT (Pan. HI. i, 90), Caus. M^Pri or M^frt to hunt (J 462, 26), Aor. ^Oi»f^ or VHU»if^, Des. fM.Hj(H, Int. iK^^l, TTtf^i .

63. f^ kit, to cure, (faff.)

This and some other verbs which are referred to the Bhu class always take the desiderative terminations, if used in certain senses. "fau^JhV, if it means to dwell, belongs to the Chur class, or, according to Vopadeva, it may be regularly conjugated as a Bhu verb ; but if it means to cure, it is P«i Pen w Pn chikitsati.

\ P. fatorfir, I. ^fawn^ &c. n Pf. f^fawrNsRK, I A. .niVcMn^, F. fa-

, P. F. r*i 14111*1 ril. In the same way are conjugated (J 472) :

i . IJT^ (to conceal), »jJjmrf he despises.

2. fir^ (to sharpen), ffffrr^TT he endures.

3. *TF( (to revere), Htaitiri he investigates.

4. "^ (to bind), «{tarUri he loathes.

5. <^ (to cut), ^1^1 U(H he straightens.

6. ^rr^ (to sharpen), ^ft^rNrfif he sharpens.

L! 2

260 BHU CLASS, ATMAKEPADA VERBS.

64. r^pat, to fall, P. tnrfff faftnTrrfff) II Pf. i. Wff, 9. %&, II A. WW (f 366), F. "qflT^fff R

Pt. trfrnr: n Pass. tjmff, Aor. ^nrrfw, Caus. inrRfir, Des. ftrofirefir or

(§ 337, H. 3).

65. ^wz$, to dwell.

P. 'cJ'uPri II Pf. i. 44144 (a), 2. •^ftr^T or T3W5 3. <HIU, 4. '^ifta, 5.

6. "3^:, 7. dufw, 8. irer, 9. "3n|i, I A. i. 'snntf ($ 132), 2. -sHirHl:, 3. 6. ^qi%ri (J 351), F. ^wfif, P. F. WT, B. -s^ni^ II Pt. -3-faH:, Ger. °T^I II Pass. T$, Aor. ^imftr, Caus. MltmPrf, Aor. ^m^^T^, Des. Int. ^Nf^Tf, mqftct.

66. ^vad, to speak.

P. ^fir u Pf. i. T^ (a), 2. ^f^zr, 9. -95:, I A. ^nn^^, F. tfiptfa, B.

u Pt. Tf^TT:, Ger. Tf^r^T U Pass. ^IW, Aor. ^^rf^9 Caus. Tr^fw, Aor. , Des. n=Ni^MfH, Int. TI^OT? *^R%.

67. f*$ svi, to swell, (£4?) fry.)

P. *y^Pri II Pf. i. "^TR («) or %y<j||i| (a), 2. "Sprf^I or f^mrMM, 3. or f^P^T'T? 4. 5J5jP=|^ or f^rf^f^W, 5. ^^"^i or f^lf^M^t, 9. "^1* °r I A. ^T^^l^, II A. ^ren^ or ^T%f^R(^ and ^T^Tji1^, F. ifffquiftr, P. F. B. ^nm( u Pt. ^15: u Pass, -gnr^, Caus. Tgn^fff, Aor. ^f$n3R^, Des. Int. 'md^H or

II. Atmanepada Verbs.

68. T&s^edh, to grow.

P. Wff, I. ^VJT, O. l^W, I. *TTHT II Pf. UVmm*, F. JjfVnqTT, C. $fVHHT, P.

T, I A. i. ^fvfw, 2. $fwr:, 3. SrfvF, 4. ^f^^f^, 5. ^(VtTqi, 6. 7. ^fv^rf^, 8. £faf or °i4, 9. ijftnfiT, B. ^fVpft^ n Pt. irfMrr: u Pass, umw, Aor $fv, Caus. Pres. Tj>nri7r, °ff, Perf. JJWTm, F. ^r^mPri, °7T, Cond.

°ir, P. F. Tjvfinrr, II A. $f^>^, °Tf, B. uvMte, Des. ^f\^w.

69. ^ iksh, to see.

P. ^^w? I. $^IT, O. ^?f, I. f[3nri n Pf. ^^rf^;, I A. $%?, F. C. £Pqmri, P. F. ^%in, B. |f^F u Pt. ^f^ff: u Caus. ^ufr, Aor. Des. ^PeiftjfMH.

70. ^ c?0c?, to give.

P. ^9 I. ^^r, O. ^r, I. ^rf ,, pf. 3. ^ (j 328, i), 6. ^*r?r, 9. (Pan. vi. 4, 126), IA.^f^, F. ^nnr, P. F. ^WT, B. ^^ n Pt. Pass, ^srff, Aor. ^Tf^, Caus. ^TrfTr, Aor. ^^c, Des. f^c(P^Mri, Int.

and ^^J5 are used in the Parasmaipada, ^"35 in the Atmanepada. It is only in the passive that ^n*T and ^$5 take Atmanepada terminations.

CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 261

7 1 . ctrta^ shvashk, to go. P. *!p3inr, T. qMm»rt » Pf. *i«nair, I A. **cfair*, F. «rfV*«nr, P. F. mrt*di,

B. «*|Pi.3|i*fltf.

Note— The initial ^is not liable to become ^. (See No 45 ; Pan. vi. i, 64, i. Colebrooke, p. 219.)

72. ^y^ rij, to go, to gain, &c.

P. ^nSr, I. *rr^?r u Pf. wnpfr, I A. *nftre, F. ^f^nnr, p. F. *f^r, B. "^ II Pass. ^-i*Jd (wi-r^ri), Caus. ^T^rfr, Aor. W|f3*1^, Des. vf

73. ^Hr wanj, to embrace.

T dams, '^safij, f*T*{svaflj drop their nasal in the special tenses (Pan. vi. 4, 25). See No. 62.

P. ^nrfr, I. ^H^nnr u Pf. TO^ or *^nr (Pan. i. 2, 6, vart.), I A. i.

2. ^^JofV/i:, 3. ^T^^J, 4. ^h^f^, 5. ^HHK|l^i, 6. ^HBfldf, 7. ^^VJ^f^, 8.

9. vi *s «| if, F. *^'>rHn, B. t«f«|l^ II Pass, ^-rtlri, Caus. ^'iMPn, Des. fa HUM,

Int. flll^Tt|H, H|f<jr*.

74. g^/ro/7, to be ashamed, (^p.)

P. crnr, I. ^RW u Pf. 3. w^ (Pan. vi. 4, 122), 6. ifar*, 9. £ftft, I A. i.

•w^rqfM or ^?cff»tf, 2. ^Tcffwn or ^Tcf'-'m:, 3. VH^fm; or XICIM, F. c^TMUjd or B. ^fMMlg or dufly.

75. f?T5^ ^y, to forbear.

P. fTTfffT|K n Pf. frifdKfi^^. I A. xMfdfrimv, F. fdfdfymri, B. rflfdP Caus. H»nrfif.

Note — See No. 63. The simple verb is said to form if «Tcf he sharpens.

76. TTCT pan, to praise.

P. WRff, I. ^TWTCH II Pf. miimNlfi or TO (without ^TT^). Thus likewise Aor. ^mnjTftn? or ^rtrJT^rg1, F. Miilif^uiii or 'Mftyujri, B. Miuif^^K or Ruimltf H Caus. ^iiiy*«riT, Aor. xN L/1 mil rj , Des. fimflUMrl, Int. ^M^n.

Note — This verb (see No. 26) takes ^TR, but, as it is mentioned by Panini HI. i, 28, together with T^, with which it shares but the meaning of to praise, it is argued that it does not take WT, unless it means to praise. It is likewise argued that ^T, if it takes WTTf, does not follow the Atmanepada, because the Anubandha, requiring the Atmanepada, applies only to the simple verb, "^P^, mtM he traffics. Other grammarians, however, allow both the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. The suffix ^TR may be kept in the general tenses. (Pan. ITI. i, 31.)

77. W\ kam, to love, (w%.)

P. -SBTO^, I. ^reT*nra n Pf. ^nrqf^ or ^OR^, I A. ^sr*rtai*ra or (without *ni)

(Pan. in. i, 48, vart.), F. -SF^rHiTr or^FmfWr, B. chfHMlg or ofimftnft? II

Pass, oh'ujri («), Aor. XS<*I(H (Pan. vn. 3, 34, vart.), Caus. <*l*^fd, Des.

Note — This verb in the special tenses takes ^HT, like a verb of the Chur class, and Vriddhi (Pan. in. i, 30). In the general tenses ^H^ is optional. Or, if we admit two roots, the one ^W would be defective in the special tenses, while the other ^RTH^is conjugated all through.

262 BHU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

78. ^nr ay, to go.

P. ^nrff, I. ^ntnr u Pf. ^nrNn* (Pan. m. i, 37), I A. i.^nftrftr, 2.

3. 'snfag'j 4. ^Tlftr^f^j 5. vnPMm'qi, 6. ^nfqmrfl, 7. ^nftr^Rfi^, 8. ^nftflc} or °^, 9. ^ i PM H7T, F. ^rftnmfj B. -«(P*(«flg U Caus. *5<|imPri, Des. wftrfir^.

With tflCT it forms *Ic3T*nf he flees (Pan. vin. 2, 19), Ger. ^c*5l«f ; with H, JTTTif J and with TTfr, m^i^n".

79. i^; ih, to aim.

P. ^, I. ^tf « Pf. t*Nfc> I A. ^ff?, F. ^m, B. |f^¥ u Caus. t^rfif, Aor. Jjftnr?^, Des. ^ftrf^ff.

80. SRTST Ms, to shine, (^BTST.)

P. SRT^TW || Pf. ^GRT^T or ehl3rMa (§ 326), I A. ^TSRTf^re, F. ^T%BTff U Caus. ^M^mffT, Aor. ^^chi^i^, Des. f^firf^ff, Int.

8 1. SRT^ Ms, to cough, P. "Sfimff II Pf. "SRmf^ (§ 326) II Caus. •SRHRfiff, Aor. SJM«hWr^ (f 372*).

82. fa^siv, to serve, (^.)

P. ^ (TTf^w) u Pf. ftr^, I A. ^f^, F. ^PmMH ii Caus. &Rfr, Aor. ^rftr^?^, Des. •ftref^w, Int. ^^q?r.

83. ITT yd, to go, (m^.)

P. 3. TTff, 6. TTTTT, 9. irm, ist pers. sing, ft, I. imrt, ist pers. sing, it, O. 5nr, I. ^1'iiff II Pf. 3. ^TT, 6. «i'iin, 9. »rfhT, I A. i. L»a*riftf, 2. ^TTTWTJ, 3. •si'iiw &c., F. TT^W, B. TTRrt? ii Pass, jffafif, Aor. '^iiTf^ Caus. TTItmfif, Aor. ^^IJIM^? Des. i) Int. ^TTtinf.

84. ^ ru, to go, to kill (?), to speak, (^.) P. T3% II Pf. 3. ^^, 6. wriff? 9- ^^Nt 9 I A- ^ffe? II Caus. iHJiPir, Aor.

85. ^ ^e, to protect, P. ^ II Pf. i. f^ (Pan. vn. 4, 9), 2. f^frift, 3. f, I A. i. ^ft, 2.

3. -^r^rf, F. ^i^Mtf, B. ^T^H^ u Pt. ^w: u Pass, ^fanr, Caus. ^m^Pn, Des. Int. ^^Hff.

Note — It is one of the 1| verbs ; ^, to protect, forms ^RTT in the present, but follows ^ in the general tenses.

86. tt(^dyut, to shine, (uiT.)

P. tftaK U Pf. f^re (Pan. vn. 4, 67), lA.'^rertfTTF or mSJrit^ 367: Pan. i. 3, 91; in. i, 55), F.sftfinirff, B. ?ftf?r^ u Caus. sftiRfiT, Aor. ^^7T^, Des. P^aiirtfK or P^silPn ^|^, Int. ^i&mff, ^eftfw.

Note — ^The verbs beginning with ^T^ optionally admit the II Aor. Parasmaipada (§ 367).

87. ^vrit, to be, (^.) P. ^ II Pf. *FW, I A. ^nrfre or ?n, F. ?rfff*nr or ^flf, B. ^fNte u Caus.

CLASS, ITMANKPADA VERBS. 263

or *nnrff (Pan. vn. 4, 7), Des. ftRfihw or f^pwfir, Int.

Note — The verbs beginning with ^, i. e. ^, ^, 3|V, ^^, ^, are optionally Parasmai- pada in the aorist, future, conditional, desiderative (Pan. i. 3, 91—93). The same verbs do not take ^ in their Parasmaipada tenses (Pan. vn. 2, 59) ; as to J^, see Pan. vn. 2, 60, and i. 3, 93.

88. ^^ syand) to sprinkle or drop, (FIJ.)

P. ^TTT II Pf. i.tKH^, 2. «*«JP<^ or *U4rt), 4. «**iP<<!£ or *mbr?. I A. 3. 6. ^^r^MMT ; or ^hf (6. ^fMrWIdi), or II A. *TO^ (not w*q^), F. or ^tenr or j-MimPri (Pan. vn. 2, 59; see No. 87), B.^pftF or wnrfte u Pt. t, Ger.Tqf^T or ^TWT (Pan. vi. 4, 31) u Caus. Tg^Trfir, Des. frwrf^TT or or ffc^TWfiT.

89. ip^krip) to be able, (^g.)

P. <*^ II Pf. ^|"^) I A. 3. ^cfcfVjy or ^TR, 6. ^r*mirtl, 9. ^5*ffif, or II Aor. Par. w<|Mi^, F. off^mrt or 4h«tmiH or cfc^^iifrf, P. F. 2. <+f^4riIW or «fc-Hl« or B. chfgMMl? or ^ft^ u Pt. ^rw: u Caus. 4-^ fa, Des. p^^rrMMff or Int. ^Tc9nmT or ^f^eR^orn or

90. «i^ vyath, to fear, to suffer pain.

P. srznr n Pf. f^g^ (Pan. vn. 4, 68), I A. *mfvjK, F. ^ftnqTT n Pass, Aor. ^nqfa («), (J 462), Caus. uiviqfri1, Des. fcf^nqMrf, Int. ^r^^r^, m^P^.

91. ^»T ram, to sport, (T«J.)

P. TH^; with fa, ^TT, trft, T^, optionally Parasmaipada; fanrfTT (Pan. i. 3, 83) u Pf.^R, I A. ^TOT, after prepositions 9|l«1^, F. tsnr U Pt. ^ir:, Ger. ^r, °THTor°Tjq II Caus. fRftf, Aor. ^CkHi^, Des.frt^TT, Int.tcwjTT,

92. r^T tvar, to hurry, (PHH^I.) The verbs *^jvar, r^ tvar, ffer^m>, ^T^av, iT^mat?, substitute ^/iir, TJJ tur,

"3\ u, l^mu (Pan. vi. 4, 20) before weakening terminations beginning with consonants, except semivowels, and if used as monosyllabic nominal bases. Hence "3JT&: jurnah, 7nih turnah, ^JfH srutaft, "^Rfft utah, ^TH mutah.

P.iror n Pf. rfi^t, I A. 3. ^Hft.g, 8. 15n^ft£4 or *wfi^*, F/nPiniri'ii Pt. TJ^: 432) or wftlT: H Caus. H^frt (§ 462, II. 6), Aor. ^dH^ (§ 375 1), Des. Hri.Mrd, Int. TTTrW^if, lf^<i|fw.

93. sah, to bear, (^.)

P. ^w n Pf. it , I A. ^raf^r, F. *f^ni7r, P. F. ^in or *ter (J 337, II. 2) n Pt. *fte:, Adj. *r?r: (^ 456, 6) u Pass, ^nprff, Caus. TnfrfiT, Aor. ^*»!M^, Caus. Des. fTOT^ftr^fir, Des. ftr^f^M^, Int. ^I^^H, wr^ftf^1.

Note — ^T? and ^? change ^T into 'Sn when ^ would be followed by ^T, the result of the amalgamation of ?[ with a following dental (§ 128). Pan. vi. 3, 112.

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

94. ?^ rdj\ to shine, (*T*|.) P. Tnffff, °?T II Pf. T^HT, XTT^ or "^ (Pan. vi. 4, 125), I A.

264: Birfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ITMANEPADA VERBS.

II Caus. tT*nrfJT, Aor. 41 UN 1^9 Des. f

F. TTf*i *MflTj °n? B. °ff, Int. miW?

95. ^f^ khan, to dig.

P. JjRfff* II Pf-3. -<WI«T, 6.^3:, 9. ^: (f 328, 3), I A. 4r«tfli^(a), ($ 348), but Atm. m<Pf|g only, F. ^fVfiqfir, B. T3"Hffi^ or ^T*TTi^ (§ 391) II Pt. TfTiT:, Ger. or JsrfVrrTT, Adj. ^q: (§ 456, 6) u Pass. ^RTff or ^n*?T (f 391), Caus. r, Aor. 'g^ffcRTT) Des. fVftlPHtPfl? °ff, Int. ^MH or ^n?rmw (§ 391)9

96. <£ An, to take,

P. ^cfTT U Pf. i. Tf^TT (a), 2. »T^^, 9. »Tj:, I A. ^T^T^, Atm. ^T£W (J 351), F. fficoifrr, P. F. -^T, B. Pgmi^ ii Pt. ^TT:, Ger. ^^r, Adj. ^: u Pass. Aor. ^nrfft, Caus. ^rciflfj Des. ftT^^fif, °rT, Int. ^^H^, irff^ &c.

^f guli takes "3i u before terminations beginning with vowels that would ordinarily

require Guna.

P. J^Prl || Pf. I. ^^9 2. ^7jf^^I Or »pft<?, 3. ^^9 4' "55^^' 5' 'J'vJ^* ^C>'

Atm. i. "^^9 2. "^"5% or ^|]f%^ &c., I Aor. see J 362, F. JjP^uiPrt or

P. F.^rf^JH or 77^19 Ben. Atm. nff $% or gHfl^ (J 345) n Pt. JT^:, Adj. n^n or

jft^l (^ 457) II Pass. ^plF, Aor. ^I1jf^9 Caus. ^qPir, Aor. »H»JJJ^H, Des.

(§ 470), Int. "sft'j^fn, ^jWtfe.

98. f^r sri, to go, to serve, (fa^.)

P. ^irfir u Pf. i. frjpsrrpf («), 2. Pijpjrftpzr, 3. f^i^jnr, 4. f^jforftR, 5. II A. ^r%f^ir^ (§ 371), F. -^fimfif, B. ^ftim^ u Pass, ^fturr, Aor. ^rerrfr, Caus.

TSITI^rflf, Aor. ^ff^T^^Tr^9 Des. f^l^rfn^PrJ or f^T^ft^flT (J 471, 3; jj 3379 H» 3)5 Int. ^P^ffafiT.

99. TT»T y«/9 to worship.

P. inrfflr u Pf. i. ^rr»f («), (^311), 2. ^iftnj or ^ir? (^ 335^ 3)? 4- ^Pi ^9 5.

5. ^nn?9 6. ^i^rr&T9 7. v*"*ii«*f, s. ^MIK, 9. ^Hnwt, I Aor. Atm. i. ^?^f%, 2. 3. ^*n?, 4. ^my P^, 5. ^H^ii^i, 6. '^mnfirii, 7. ^nrBstrf^j 8. ~«f*rse' (not

r, F. ^^rfw, P. F. ITFT (J 124), B. ^fi^ (^ 393) u Pt. ^:, Ger. ^, II Pass. ?^Tff, Caus. *{ \ ^ nftr, Aor. ^j^fli(5fffT, Des. ftnj^flf, Int.

P.

, F.

II Pf.

i.

100. ^t^vo/?, to sow, to weave,

(a), 2. ^fi|V| or ^ cjisj, 9. "35^:, I A.

Atm.

, P. F.

B.

u Pt. -TO u Pass.

* The Atmanepada forms will in future only be given when they have peculiarities of their own, or are otherwise difficult.

TUD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS. 265

ioi. ^ vah, to carry. P. **fir II Pf. i. TOTf (d), 2. ftf&l or TTtTS, 3. TO*, 4. *fa, 5.

6. •9^3:, 7. •grf^r, 8. •wf, 9. "315:, I A. i. ^nrraj, 2. ^ranraft:, 3. w*n0^, 4.

5. TicTlc, 6. xiqtaf, 7. ^t«n«*i, 8. viqW, 9. ^RT8{:, I Aor. Atm. i. ^ftf, 2.

3. ^ftr, 4. ^N*wf*, 5. ^vsjrvjf, 6. ^mfTcri, 7. ^msrfir, 8. *ritaf, 9. W^TT, F. wrfir, P. F. *fter, B. *jtm( n Pt. -37:, Adj. ^nra: u Pass. vir>, Caus.

Aor. ^refN, Des. f^^Hirrf, Int.

1 02. ve9 to weave, P. ^?fTf II Pf. 3. ^, 6. ^: (or BWj:), 9. ^: (or ^5:); or 3. T^T, 6.

9- ^"3* (? 311)* I A.» !• ^^if^1^, 2. ^Hitft:, 3. ^RT^rh^, Atm. ^wrer, F.

P. F. WT, B. <5RT^, Atm. TRrh? II Pt. Trf: (Pan. vi. 4, 2) U Pass, in^, Caus.

^iMMfn, Des. rq^ittfri, Int. ^HHi^ m^lfd.

103. ^ hve, to emulate, to call, (s$*T.)

P. asTTfir u Pf. r. *j^re (S), 2. ^f^r or -;pta, 3. -^r^, 4. -gfi^, II A (§ 363\ ^tm- ^TT> or I A. ^m, F. ^iwfrt, B. ^Tni^ u Pt. ^jn, Ger. Pass, i^w, Aor. SH^lHl, Caus. ^mJjfri, Aor. ^^^^ (§ 371), Des. Int.

Tud Class (Tudddi, VI Class). I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

104. ^ tud, to strike.

P. ij^fir n Pf. ^, F. fftwfir, P. F. ift^r, I A. *ri1t*fl^ Atm. ^w u Pt. Ger. psn u Pass, prff, Caus. ift^rfiT, Aor. WT, Des. ^rufrf, Int.

105. \=R^ bhrqjji to fry,

j takes Sampras&rana before weakening terminations, the same as

p^vyadh, ^^1 vat, *f^vyach, 'Z^vrasch, K^prachh (Pan. vi. i, 16). The terminations of the special tenses of Tud verbs are never strengthening, but weakening, if possible.

P. ^rftr II Pf. i. W^*, 2. TOfSR or w*, 9. TO^Jt (Pan. i. 2,5), or &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 47), I A. ^rorc^ or swrcjf^, Atm. ^«^ or wt, F. or H^fff, P. F. srer or >m, B. *prn^, Atm. wqte or ^Tfe n Pt. ^?: u Pass. , Caus. «l^|f7r, Aor. ^i^JWor ^^>ntl, Des. fw?|fff or fw^fir, Int

106. ^A:mA, to draw a line. (See No. 38.) P. f ^fir u Pf. ^R, I A. mim(r^ or *aiK/lf^ Atm. ^^^r or ^f?, F. or ^fw, P. F. -sufr or -g^r, B. f^n^, Atm. ^te u Pt. f¥: n Pass, Caus. chM^fifj Aor. S!M<*M!^ or ^r^fi^^, Des. f^^vsjfH, Int.

M m

266 TUD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

107. ^ much, to loosen,

Certain verbs beginning with *|^[ much take a nasal in the special tenses. They are, If^much, cf^/Hjp, to cut, f^ vid, to find, fc5^/«p, to paint, fa1^ sich, to sprinkle, ^ff(kritt to cut, f^TrJ khid, to pain, ftsi pi£ to form. (Pan. vn. i, 59.)

P. *hrfff u Pf. *pfN, I A. ^ripn^, Atm. ^^ (} 367), Des. ff^fff or jftspr

C$471! 9)-

108. f^ vid, to find, (f^f.)

P. %fw u Pf. ftR?, II A.^ft^, Atm. vftnr, F. TOfif or ^firvrfk (f 332, 1 1) u Pt. ft*.

109. fc£^ fej», to paint. P. f^ft u Pf. fo^t?, II A. ^rfc5^ (J 367), Atm. II A. vaifaMW or I A. ^rfo*

(5 3*7).'

II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

no. ^£nf, to cut, (^ift.)

P. f rTflf (see No. 107) n Pf. ^FW, I A. ^Toinff^, F. ^fd^fff or cF^flT (J 337, II. 2), P. F. SfifffrTT, B.funi^U Pt. if*: II Pass.^m^, Caus. omrfff, Aor. ^-qohS^ or ^r*fhfin^9 Des. f^^ifS^ftT or f^^rfk (J 337, II. 2), Int. ^T^mTT.

in. ^ kut, to be crooked, to bend.

Certain verbs beginning with ^7 kut (Dhatupatha 28, 73—108) do not admit of Guna or Vriddhi, except in the reduplicated perfect, the causative, and the intensive Parasmai- pada. (Pan. i. 2, i ; § 345, note.)

P. f*fw II Pf. i.^pite, 2.<3ffH IA.<*^fy F.^fradTT, P.F. ffrin u Caus.

112. 'Z^vrasch, to cut,

P. ^jfir (see No. 105) u Pf. i. T9^, 2. "^af^^ or TOr, I A. ^d^fl1^ or rcfh^ (f 337, 1. 2), F. wft^rfif or giv^Pir, B. 'jw^ n Pt. ^ro:.

113. OF W, to scatter. P. f%^ II Pf. 3. ^cfin:, 6. •^rWTTj:, 9. ^^F^: (Pan. vii. 4, n), I A. *«hlOr^ F.

or •onrhiflf (f 340), B. wftr^ U Pt. -sifhS: u Pass. -SR^W, Caus. Des.

Note — After ^^T and Tlflff, cF takes an initial ^ if it means to cut or to strike : 3 M he cuts, oM'qtaK. 5 UfTT(VpfHJV he cuts or he strikes (Pan. vi. i, 140, 141). Also he drops (Pan. vi. i, 142).

1 14. ^q^T spris, to touch.

P.^Sfrfrr u Pf. i|44|$i, I A. •»n^HiBfl'?^or »nwiHjTr^or ^trM«i^, F. B. ^q^li n Pt. ?: II Des. ftFflT Int. qO^^rt

115. H^prachh, to ask. P. ifSjfw (see No. 105) II Pf. i. ^JFSS, 2. *TlTfe*r or trfflF, 9' MM'-^J (} 3^)> , F. TT^rfw, B.Tj^nr^ n Pt. yv; u Pass, ipa.q'ff, Caus. Trssnrfrr, Des. Int. V

"PI

DIV CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA VERBS. 267

1 1 6. *JH*n/, to let off.

P. *J"^PiT u Pf. i. TOrif, 2. *mP$"i or TOU (see No. 48), I A. wuiuflj^ F. umfn \\ Pt mr

1 t. *1 C « .

117. Hl^ m«£/, to sink, (TOrt.)

^T^majj and *n^na.9 (Div) insert a nasal before strengthening terminations beginning with consonants, except nasals and semivowels. (Pan. vn. i, 60.)

P. H-njfrt II Pf. i. HH-nJ, 2. HHP«|VJ or HH4-VJ, I A. 3. ^HJK/1^ (J 345)1 6. WlifW,

9. *mrsr:, F. nv^fd, P. F. ifar n Pt. ijnr:, Ger. »hfl or TOT ($ 438) n Caus.

*n5nrfff, Aor. 'snPTWcT? Des. P*iH»jPrt, Int. 11*1 TJ*J

1 1 8. ^ ish9 to wish,

P. $*dPfl (see No. 31), I. il^Ad II Pf. i. ^^, 2. ^fMV|, 3. ^fa, 4. ^f^T, 5 6. ^j|*, 7. ^^*T, 8. ^Tj 9. ^H*> ^ •^L» ^*^fl> F. ^fmHffl, P. F. FFT or ^iMrti (^ 337» II. i) u Pt. ^?: Ger. ^yr or ^?n u Pass, ^q^, Aor. %ftr, Caus. smjfa, Aor.

III. Atmanepada Verbs.

119. ^Twn, to die, (*J^.)

^[ mri, to die, though an Atmanepada verb, takes Atmanepada forms only in the special tenses, the aorist, and benedictive. (Pan. i. 3, 61.)

P. fa*m*, I. ^rftnnr, O. f^t^n, I. ftnl u Pf. i. **«m., 2.1^, 3. *nrrc, 4. »iUif ,

5. *WK? I A. i. ^njfa, 2. ^^V|it, 3. ^HJIT, F. HfVmfrf, P« F. *inifw? B. Jpcn? u Pt. ^TTJ II Pass, ftnfif, Caus. HK^frt, Des. ig^Ori, Int.

1 20. "j dri, to observe,

P. f^ u Pf. ^, I A. ^|Tr, F. ^fbRff, P. F. ^r, B. -^rt? u Pass. Caus. ^Kqfd, Des. ^ft^ff (§ 332, 5). It is chiefly used with the preposition 'WT to regard, to consider.

Div Class (Divddi, IV Class). I. Parasmaipada Verbs.

121. f^ div9 to play, (f^J.)

P. ^faifiT ($ 143) u Pf. f^^> I A.^n^ir, F. ^f^uifH, P. F.^PMHI, B. ^1«mj^ n Pt. ^tf: or ^K: (J 442, 7), Ger.ijr^T (§ 431, i) or ^Pcfrii u Caus. ^^Prtj Des. f^^P<=mPn or g«*«Pir (j 474)5 Int« ^HliT.

122. ifl^nrit, to dance, («Jlft.)

P. «Ji<|Prf II Pf. 3. ffHri, 9. *T«J3J> I A. »i!Hrt7^, F. HPRvjPn or *if^Tn (} 337» II. 2) II Pt. TO: n Caus. ^ifir, Aor. ^T^TWrT or mlddii, Des. Pn^fdNPri or

* Final ^ is changed to ft (§ no) in the special tenses of Tud verbs, likewise before the *T of the passive and benedictive (Pan. vn.4, 28). Afterwards ft again becomes ft^, according to Pan. vi. 4, 77.

M m 2

268 DIV CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

r*i to grow old,

P. *Mfir* u Pf-s-^nrn:, 9. snrs: (Guna, § 330) or w^: (f 328, 2), I A. or II A. ^nro^ (f 367), F. irfbufir or ^rcftafir (f 340)5 B. -sffii^ \\ Pt. »fhS: n Caus. srcqfcr (J 462, 25), Des. firaFoifrf or firWlSPir (J 337? II. 3).

124. $ft Jo, to sharpen.

Verbs ending in ^ft o drop ^ft o before the *T ya of the Div class (Pan. vn. 3, 71); e. g. ^ft chho, to cut, ^U 50, to finish, <ft do, to cut.

P. ^rfk, I. SET^, O. ^, I. 3115 n Pf. 3i^ (} 329), I A. x^ruO^ or II A. VTQITI, F. srrafiT, P. F. snwr, B. smn^ (J 392) n Pt. $nw: or %r: (j 435) u

Pass, ^rnrffj Caus. tylJWffi, Des. f^n^rfrf, Int. ^TT^nTff.

125. BV 50, to finish.

P. ^ifr u Pf. *rcft, I A. ^mr^, II A. ^m\9 F. ^r^fw, P. F. *nn, B. ^mi (§ 39^) u Pt- ^^ Ger- °^nir II Pass, ^(hm (§ 392), Caus. ^N^fri, Des. f^rafFj Int. ^H)i(ri.

1 26. tqv vyadh, to strike.

P. frofir (see No. 105) n Pf. 3. f^qm (J 311), 9. f%ftv:, I A. i.

2. ^r^rn^ft*, 3. '^i^uWli^, 4. *i«mr*9, 5. ^^mi, 6. %t«m^|i, 7. -«i«mr9T, 8.

9. W3ffi§:, F.^TWfrT, P. F. ^|^T, B. f?nnr^ » Pt. f^t II Pass, f^m, Caus.

'Ull'imfifj Des. fcj ^4 rH Pff, Int. ^f^ziff.

127. ^£Hp? to delight.

P. q^fn II Pf. i. 7nr§, 2. TTiTf^T or rnn^r or rid1^ 3- Tnrt5 4. nqTMH or I A. ^HHMTc^ or ^wmflPi^ (J 337, I. 3) or ^Tdl^lf^ (see No. 38) or II A. F. -rTfcNrffl1 or in^flT or ^x^fir, P. F. ITf^WT, WWT or ^WT, B. ^Tr^ II Pt. Pass, -^w, Caus. irthrfir, Aor. ^snr^tfi^ or Winh^, Des. frijHtfri or Int. flOg<Hfl*

128. mw^, to be foolish.

P. g^rfir u Pf. i. yft^, 2. giftfi^ or gjftm or yf^, II A. ^rp^ (J 367, ^rf^) t,

F. Hl^fri or iftf^BTftr, P. F. Jf>vr or jffer (§ 129) or iftfigHT II Pt. yv: or ^: u

Pass. *J?fiT, Caus. *ft^TfWj Des. Jj4jHjf7, ^^P^Pfl °r *i^^4^? Int.

or

* Final ^, changed to ^, and lengthened before ^.

t The Sarasvati gives besides the second aorist the optional forms of the first aorist Wlsfh^ (§ 337, I. 3, OTf^) or ^^ (§ 360). According to Pan. in. i, 55 (§ 3^7), the forms of the first aorist are allowed in the Atmanepada only; but later gram- marians frequently admit forms as optional which are opposed to the grammatical system of Panini. Sometimes the evasion of the strict rules of Panini may be explained by the admission of different roots, as, for instance, in No. 130, where the first aorist Parasmaipada ^TSPfti^ given in the Sarasvati, which is wrong in the Div class, might be referred to the Kri class.

DIV CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 269

129. tTJI nas, to perish, (*U3T.)

P. «f^Pd ii Pf. 3. ?T?TO 9. %^j:, II A. *R^ (ynfi?) or w^n^ (§ 366), F. ?Tf?nqfff or HVSflfd (see No. 117) II Pt. TO, Ger. ?Tyi or ^T (§ 438).

130. Tflir 6am, to cease, (313.)

Eight Div verbs, fp(4am, IC^tam, Ip^dam, Vfi($ram, W{bhram, '^^kgham, Jf^klam, *V^mad, lengthen their vowel in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 74.)

P. ^rmifff ii Pf. 3. ^rro, 9. $3:, II A. *^nn^ F. ^rfTOfir, P. F. jrftnrr 11

Pt. sitm (§ 429), Ger. 5TTRT or ^rfar^T II Pass. ^TOW, Caus. Jinqfif ($ 462) he quiets, but $TT*nnr or °ftr he sees. (Dhatupatha 19, 70.)

131. f^midf to be wet, (fH(H<l.) f^mtrf takes Guna in the special tenses. (Pan. vii. 3, 82.)

P. ^irfir n Pt. fro: wet, or aflpi: (J 333, D. 2*).

II. Atmanepada Verbs. 132. ^^jant to spring up, (*n an substitutes IfTj'tf in the special tenses. (Pan. vii. 3, 79.)

P. ^TOW n Pf. ^ (f 328, 3), I A. ^irfng or ^rftr (f 413), F. irf^rir, P. F. , B. •rf«iMl8 u Pt. irnn, Caus. HITITITT, Des. r^HrnMd, Int. HMIMH or

133- *$Pa*9 t0 g°'

P.-quir ii Pf.^, I A. 3.wnf^(^4i2), 6.^nrwnfff, 9.^nrwir,F.TTWTr, P.F.^nrr,

B. Tntfte n Pt. TO u Caus. in^nfrt, Aor. ^MlM^, Des. fqwir ($471, 9), Int.

tnrtasra (J 485).

134. 'jv budh, to perceive. P. yz& u Pf. ^v, I A. i. *$fw, 2. wj^rr:, 3. ^3^ or ^fHv, 4. ^p^,

5. ^JrMI^I, 6. ^JrWIril, 7. ^Jrwf^, 8. ^T^, 9. ^RtHf, F. HWff. P. F. ^ST, B. ^Ert? U Pt. ^5: II Caus. ^>nrfw, Aor. '^T^sr^, Des. •J^TOTT (3^ of the Div class can never take intermediate 5, see J 332, 12; see also Kuhn, Beitrage, vol. vi. p. 104), Int.

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

J35- "T^ nah, to bind, (^.)

P. TRrfTT or °|^ n Pf. i. TpfTf, 2. «TT3 (J 130) or ^f^T, Atm. ^t, I A. i. 2. vfTtlwIt) 3. vtrnr^li^? 4. ^l^Tr^j 5. ^f«Ti^, 6. viniSl, 7. v«»llr9Tj 8.^«»i!«, 9

Atm. i.^nrfw? 2. xsn^i:, 3. ^H^J? 4. wrfr^f^, 5. vvirai^Yy 6.

8. ^Rf , 9. ^nranr, F. Hi^fri, P. F. TCT u Pt. TC:, Ger. »rfT, °?T?T u Pass.

Aor. ^fr((r^, Caus. «fr^rfir, Des. fHHrHF? Int.

270 CHUR CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS ONLY.

Chur Class (Churddi, X Class).

Parasmaipada Verbs only.

136. ^ chur^ to steal.

u Pf.^torhnRR, I A. ^, F.^f^rfir, P.F.^fkftnn, B.

(J 386) n Pt. <*ftn;:, Ger. ^frrTT ll Pass. ^§?T, Caus. ^frfr, Des. <f*rkftrefif. No Intensive (f 479).

137. fa cfo', to gather, (fa*r.)

The changes which roots undergo as causatives, take likewise place if the same roots are treated as Chur verbs. Hence according to f 463, II. 6, f% as a Chur verb, may form P. ^tprfTT or -mmCd, the vowel, however, remaining short because, as a Chur verb, fq is said to be f*n^($ 462, note) u I A. ^Ml^Mr^ or 'sreffa^, B. -OHHII^ or ^TOTr^.

Note — Several Chur verbs are marked as folj, i. e. as not lengthening their vowel, some of which were mentioned in § 462, among the causatives. Such are sf^to know, to make known ; ^t^to pound ; to pound ; *HT, if it means to feed ; ^c to live.

138. Wi^krit, to praise. P. qflfafrf ( j 463, 2) II I A. ^NtfTfr^ or 'SrfagftS^ (§ 377)-

Su Class (Svddi, V Class).

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

139. ^ su9 to distil, (*pT.)

P. ^fw, 1. 2. 33 (j 321 *) ji Pf. ^^, Atm. g^, I A. '^mTTh^jJ 332, 4) ;

cthe Sarasvati allows also ^PEutfh^ (but against Pan.vn. 2, 72), Atm.

the Sar. allows also ^raf^^ (but see Pan.vn. 2, 72); F. ^ffrqfif, P. F.

B. rTT ll Pass, ^iffi, Aor. ^wrf%, Caus. ^R^fir, Aor. ^, Des. 40, Int.

Note — The ^ of «J may be dropt before terminations beginning with ^ or *f, and not requiring Guna ; but this is not the case if »J is preceded by a consonant. This explains the double forms ^J*J^» and ^*^«5 ^J*jTt and tj»«Hj, ^f^J«J^ and ^TCp^, ^TCJ»T*T and ^TCp^T ; and Atm. tj^^ or 'p'^sf j 53^^ or ^p*l*r? ^nJ^f*£ or ^*J*^Vj i«^«jHf^ or ^TCprf^. The same rule applies to the Tan verbs.

140. "N chi, to collect, (f%>^.)

P. f%*ftf7r U Pf. 3. f^R or N chili, 2. "N^^I or (V^nf or, according to Bharadvaja (§ 335) 3)? fM^fMM or f^oRfrnzTj 9. f^^J* or f^Pjt, Atm. f^f'O) or f^<^ (Pan. vir.

3, 58), I A. vN^fcli^, Atm. ^r%^, F. ^ifiT, P. F. ^irr, B. <sffarn^ u

Caus. -^r^nrif or -qm^fn (j 463, II. 6, and No. 137)9 Des. f%^NfiT or (Pan. vii. 3, 58), Int. ^chrir.

141. ^cT stri, to cover, facT>T.)

e v e \ '

P. «<ui fn II Pf. riWK. Atm. H^CK, I A. ^^n^fif , Atm. ^Mfl^y (not

SU CLASS, PABASMAIPADA VERBS. 271

if wrfty or ^rwff ($ 332, 5, a rule which applies to the Atmanepada only), F. T*rfb*fir (§ 332, 5), P. F. *tfr, B. *rfT^, Atm. *jprfa or *rfWfr (§ 332, 5) u

Pass. ^riffi, Caus. WKljPri, DCS. PflfefliiPd, Int.

142. ^ vri, to choose,

P. ^ftftr n Pf. i. TOt (a), a. ^nr*, 3. ^TT, 4. ^r, 5. TW^, 6. 7. *pp, 8. TO, 9. *n|:, I A. wufti^ ($ 332, 5), Atm. wfty or *rofa ($ 340) or (J 337, II. 4), F. tcfYurPff or qOmPfl, P. F.^ftin or *flwr, B. ftnrn^, Atm.

(not tf'Oiflv, Pan. VH. 2, 39) II Pass, ftnrif, Aor. ^nrft, Caus. Des. r«fqRMfrt, P^clOMffr or Mfrl, Int.

II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

143. f^ Az, to go, to grow.

P. f^ft II Pf. ftnrR (Pan. vil. 3, 56), I A.^H^, F. l^fTT, P. F. B. ^hrn^ n Caus. ^N^ri!, Aor. *H*fl^iix (Pan. vn. 3, 56), Des. foiflMfii, Int.

144. ^nfi 6ak, to be able, (^rf .)

n Pf.3.^n^, 9.$^:, lA.^rarn;, F.^nsnir, P.F.^HRT n Pt.^r»: n Pass. $r^rff (^rw ^T^Tff it can be done), Caus. $M*^frt, Aor. ^^0^1*^, Des.

%8(riT, Int. 3!i3(<mri.

145. ^ §ru, to hear.

This verb is by native grammarians classed with the Bhu verbs, though as irregular. It substitutes 5T sri for ^ s'ru in the special tenses.

P. 3. sjwtfw, 6. 3ngir:, 9. ^TTRfiT ; 4. spg^: or ^?p: u Pf. i. 5j^N (5), 2.

(?334>8), 3. ^5TR, 4- '^^, 5- UTHP' 6'^^:' 7"

I A. VH^Itfl^, F. -^ft^TfTT, P. F. -^sftin, B. T^Tr^ II Pass. ^Tfr, Aor. *mifa, Caus. , Aor. ^IT^Rif or ^r%^Ti^(J 475), Des. ^*«Mri (Pan. I. 3, 57), Int.

146. *rm dp, to obtain, (^TTJ.)

P. 3. ^TntftfTT, 4. ^TTR^I, 9. VHI>j«ifH, I. >snNli^, O. ^i^*iir\, I. 3. Aor.^TT^, F.^r^^Pri, P.F.^TTTT H Pt.^mr: ll Pass.

Aor. ^rrftrm^, Des. ^fir.

III. Atmanepada Verbs.

147. ^T^ as, to pervade, (^1^.)

P. 3. ^^, 6. xM^mri^ 9. ^T^TT, 4. ^^t, I. i. VMIJgP^, 2. ^TCpn:, 3.

4. ^Hi^cjP^, 5. ^Hiiycuvjf, 6. ^TTg^nff, 7. ^i^nf^, 8.^rrgj4, 9. ^i^c,rt, O. I. i. ^rwl, 2. ^f«N, 3. ^renri, 4- '^w^i^tj 5- ^^^i^i, 6. «^i f n Pf. i.^r^ir, 2. ^T^R or ^rro, I A. i.

* According to Pan. vii. 2, 13, we might form ^T& ; but Pan. vn. 2, 63, would sanction j. The special restriction, however, of ^^ to the Veda in Pan. vn. 2, 64, is sufficient fix «HPi;t| as the proper form in ordinary Sanskrit. . • .

272 TAN CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

3. ^rn?, 4. ^nivyfV, 5. ^rrerrcrf, 6. ^rreprrf, 7. ^U4*ii\r, 8. ^rr^4, 9. vmsjn ; or i.

2. wf^rBK, 3. ^rrfifre, P. F. ^rei or ^tfyrft, F.^ujiri or ^fyWffj B. ^reffa? or ^rf^i'tfh? u Pt. *re: II Pass. ^5R7, Aor. ^n%, Cans. ^fRfr, Aor. ^nf$|$li^, Des. Int. ^li^Mn.

Tan Class (Tanvddi, VIII Class).

All verbs belonging to this class are Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

148. Tf^ tan, to stretch, (fT*J.)

P. rirflTri, I. ^nnftf^, O. TT»prn^, I. if *ftg ; Atm. P. TT^JfT, I. vin^n, O.

I. ft-jnr n Pf. 3. Tnrre, 9. ^g:, I A. WR^ or vriCHl^ (§ 348), Atm. 3. 'anrftre or ^TrTiT (§ 3^9), 2. ^Trrf^r^T: or w*n:, F. TTf^rfw, P. F. Tif?nrT, B. fr^rr^, Atm.

^ II Pt. cfff:, Ger. cT^n or TrfVn^T II Pass. TTnTff or in?m (J 391), Caus. Aor. ^snftlfrl1^, Des. fffTfffiMfrf or finrf^fiT, Int. HTnmf.

Note — Verbs of the Tan class may raise their penultimate short vowel by Guna; to go, TOfffW or ^ftflT. TnTT^^VTTr :[TTrft ^TT "faffr, Sar. n. n, 3.

149. TSfUT kshan, to kill, (^^.)

P. T^ftfw n Pf. ^m, I A. ^Hjiifl^ (J 348*), Atm. 3.^reyftre or ^^9 2.

vnsjPiyBit or vf«t;x4n.

150. fspn kshin, to kill.

P. fopsrVfrr or ^'iinfrr u I A. -^ ^ iiil H , Atm. ^Hfftiiy or ^rftjw.

151. "Q^san, to obtain, (^.)

P. ^nfrfk II Pf. **R, Atm. %^, I A. ^«M^ (a), Atm. ^^f«T? or ^T^rnr (Pan. 11.4,79; vi. 4, 42).

153. f ^ to do, (sopr.)

^ A:n before weak terminations becomes «fi^ kar, but before strong terminations ^^ kur. Before "^v and Hm, and the *f y of the optative, the Vikarana 7w is rejected, but the radical "3" u is not lengthened.

P. i. ^dfa? 2. wfiftr, 3. ^rdfrr, 4- ft'? 5- f ^n, 6. f ^ir:5 7. f H:, 8 9. ftfw, I. i.^i^t^, 2. ^rard:, 3. ^R?d^, 4. wf%, 5. ^ ^if, 6. 8. ^Tf^ir, 9. vt ^5 T^, O. i. -^$r, 9. -^|:5 1. 1. •grwftir, 2. f ^, 3.

5- f ^> 6- f ^f» 7- ^t3W, 8. f ^TT, 9. f % II Pf. i. ^^5R (a), 2.

4. ^^ 5. ^afg** 6. ^asg:, 7. ^^JT, 8. ^^a?, 9. ^"g:, I A. L^rar!, 2. ^oRr^f:, 3

4. ^?^rn%, 5.^r^T¥, 6. ^r^T'fr, 7. ^GFI^, 8. ^ToRrf, 9. ^rar^:, F. 4^^, P. F. CRTT, B. i. f^^TTO, 2. •farer:, '3. f^^Tf, 4. f^vTrer, 5. f^^nw, 6. f^Miwi, 7

Atmanepada : P. i.f%", 2.

8. f ^, 9. f%7T, I.i. ^Jf ft, 2. ^Tf^lT:, 3. ^If ^F, 4. ^Tf , 5

6. tinf, 7. «KT^wt, 8. ^i4, . trrf u Pf. i.

KRt CLASS, PAHASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VEBBS. 273

4. ^^r?, 5. ^»TO, 6. ^WTT, 7. ^pre, 8. ^, y. ^rffct, I A. i. , 2.

3. *T^iT, 4. wp-rfy, -. ^Kjmiqi, 6. Wf MITlf, 7. W^TOfV, 8. ^TJ, 9. ^HJWIf, F. <*fl,U|rt, B. 3. ojiifti?, 8. ^pftj H

Pt. ^nK, Ger. ^r n Pass, fa^nr, Aor. wuft, Caus. *TTSfir, Aor. Des. f^rarftfr, Int. TOftTT, TOfS &c., or ^irflfic &c. (§ 490).

CZoss (Kryddi, IX Class). I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

153- ** M9 to buy, (pftR.)

P. <af)<uiPn u Pf. i. ON am («), 2. N*nivi or iV^r, 3. fVarpr, 4. 5. fafWRy., 6. PqffliHg:, 7. r^rwrqi, 8. f^r*^, 9. f^fi^^:, I A. ^?%n^, Atm. F. TOft, P. F. wr, B. T^UTH, Atm. ^fty u Pt. nfhr: u Pass. nfN^, Caus.

tfUMMfn, Des. r^^lMfrt, Int. ^ifl^.

154. ift mt, to kill, (»rN.)

The roots ift wi^, fH mi (Su), and ^ rff (Div) take final VT <i whenever their %t or ^t would be liable to Guna or Vriddhi, and in the gerund in Tya (§ 452). Pan. vi. i, 50.

P. ^Tiifif u Pf. i. *nS, 2. ITTTT or irftro, 3. inft, 4. fafwH, 5. PHWJVJ:, 6. 7. ftrft^, s. fiT«T, 9. frrg:, I A. ^mTFh^ (J 353), Atm. TOTCT (f 353), F. P. F. HTWT, B. irhm^, Atm. *rnr^ u Pt. »rhf:, Ger. H^WT, °iniT u Pass, n^, Caus. mMMfff (f 463, II. 19), Des. ftmrflT (J 471, 8), Int. ^fhm.

155. W^stamlh, to support, (w$.)

The verbs WH stambh, Ig^stumbh, f&^skambh, ^ftskumbh, and ^sfo* may be conjugated

as Kri or as Su verbs.

P. wttifrf or Mtilfri &c., I.^cron^ O.^aVhrn^, I. i.Hvrfir,

4. ^TVfT^, 5. H^rtlT, 6. Jdtilril, 7. W^IH, 8. W*ftiT, 9. ^TVg II Pf« IRcN,

II A. 'TO*fjv (J 367), F. MfHmfd, P. F. ^ftnn, B. w«n^ n Pt. ^rw:, Ger. or ^T3JT II Pass. WITT, Caus. W>TTfTT, Des. rrtwf*mfff, Int. »rrcr«nr.

156. ^pd, to purify, (^.)

The Kri verbs beginning with ^ pu shorten their vowel in the special tenses (Pan. vn. 3, 80). They stand Dhatupatha 31, 12-32. The more important are, «£ /u, to cut, ^*/Hi *° cover, ^vrt, to choose, ^dhu, to shake, ^pri, to fill, ?drl, to tear, ^j'H, to wither.

P. ^nfir, Atm. grffir u Pf. tprre, Atm. ^, I A. *nntf n, Atm. wrf^, F.

r, P. F. trfVjn II Pt. TJti:, Ger. ^T (*Tfan: and MP^HI (J 424) belong to (Bhu class), see $ 333. D) U Pass. ^qiT, Caus. MNJjPri, Aor. ^MlMM^, Des. ^^fri (P^^P^^ri belongs to ^, TRTT, BhA class, Pan. vn. 2, 74), Int.

* Kri verbs ending in consonants form the 2nd pers. sing, imperative in wij § 321, note 2.

N n

274: KR! CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND iTMANEPADA VERBS.

157. q^; grah, to take.

This root takes Samprasarana in the special tenses and before other weakening terminations.

(Pan. vi. i, 16.)

P. Jl^slPri, Atm. Jl^lS, I. ^J]^lf^ Atm. ^]^"lri, O. '£%i1«<if^, Atm.

I. -M^sig (2. *J^TO), Atm. J]^1rti u Pf. i. *rarn» («)> 2. n^P?^ 3- *t«4's> 4-

5- *fJ1^3*> 6. *PJ^iJij 7. *TJT(Vi, 8. <5PT^, 9. 'fjf *i I A. i. »HiJ^H (§ 341 and $ 348 *),

UlffaTj B. JpjffiT, Atm. Jf^ifls II Pt. J^ld't, Ger. '£^lr«n II Pass. «^n, Aor. Fut. ij^luui or iJlP^uif) &c., Caus. ijl^^lPri, Des. PuM^fifT, Int. lO'^n, (not «Tnrfe),

II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

158. *wjyd, to grow weak.

This root takes Samprasarana in the special tenses and before other weakening terminations.

(See No. 157.)

P. P**H I Prt, I. ^n»i«in^ O. ftnffaffi^ I. Pn«i I g II Pf. i. PITH?, 2. P*iPa*<xf or Hn-rm^,

3. P;I[TMT, 4. f^ffsRT^T, I A. ^TTmttlfl 9 F. TMitrMirT, B. ?i{l<4iii II Pt. »n«TJ (i lift &S

participle would be wrong, see Pan. vin. 2, 44 ; but it occurs in the sense of old (Am. Kosha, ed. Loisel. p. 135), and in the Vedic Sanskrit; see Kuhn, Beitrage, vol. vi. p. 104), Ger. yqVll, °sirR n Caus. ^imjfd, Des.

Int. Wiflqri.

1^9. ^TT jndy to know.

This verb substitutes ^Rjd in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 79.)

P» llllPlI, I. Vj^flHillTj O. ^irl^mfl, I. *T1r('t3 " P^' 15v? I A. TBf'^i I tf I fl 5 F.

P.F. gtifT, B.frnrn^or IRT??^ u Pt. $rrif! u Pass.^rnWj Aor,^^Tf^, Caus. $»iwPri(«), (see § 462, II. 15)* Aor. ^rPH$m^, Des. HHsilUrt, Int. ^I^I^H-

1 60. ^V fiandh, to bind.

P. ^rtrPflj I. ^ramTTTj O. ^nft^rnij I. ^m^ ll Pf« i. ^^V, 2. ^^(V^ or ^^^f or I A. i. ^THirtf, 2. ^MTi^t) 3. ^THiiWln, 4. ^n4ir^*r5 5. %i«n-s9 6. ^H^T^ITj 7. ^WTr^?,

9. ^wh§:, F. 4wfnr, P. F. -snr, B. w«n^ 11 Pt. TO:, Ger. ^T n Pass.

T, Caus.*4>Rfrf, Aor. ^R^fVfT, Des.fwwfk, Int.

III. Atmanepada Verbs. 161. ^ vri, to cherish, (f^.)

P. ^Tjfft, I. ^rpjifhT, O. ^ftw, I. ^iftui n Pf. ^, I A. ^Rfts or ^^i!t« or

F. c(^ttTri or ^PCtaft, P. F. ^ftjH or ^ftlfT, B. ^ft^Nf or ^tF II Pt. ^H: II Pass. (VnH, Caus. <K4|fri (a), Des. fcmfmrt or f^OMW, Int. ^ifl^rf, ?%fff &c. Contracted forms of the Des. and Int., ^f§fw and ^t^jft.

AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 276

Ad Class (Adddi, II Class). I. Parasmaipada Verbs.

162. W^ ad, to eat. P. i.wfa, 2.wf?R, 3. wf%, 4. wy:, 5. WTO:, 6.ww:, 7. win, 8. WTO, 9.wi(f7r,

1. i.Wfi*, 2.WT^. (Pan. vii. 3, 100)*, 3. WT^, 4. WT*, 5. WTW, 6. WHlf, 7. WTO,

8. wrw, 9. WT?^J O. wirn^, I. i.w^rfVf, 2. w%t, 3. wij> 4. W^PI, 5. ww, 6. wwf,

7. WI»TR, 8. WW, 9. W^IJ II Pf. i. WTS, 2. wrfi^T &c., or substituting ^||, i. WTOI (a),

2. ^iMf^v, 3. *IMI«, 4. «iPB|«c, 5. »n^:, 6. insrij:, 7. HOsi1*, 8. «nsr, 9. f^[:, II A. i. WTO, 2. WTO:, 3. WTOT^, F. vid^fd, P. F. wwr, B. WVTH u Pt. wrrlf, Ger.

(Pan. ii. 4, 36) u Pass. wtHT, Caus. tll^ilftv, Aor. wrfi^TT, Des.

163. **\ psd, to eat.

9.w^rr^or w^: ($322!), O.^rnrn^, I.WTJ n I A. w^rnrfh^, F. ^I^PH, P. F. ^mn, B. ^rnm^ or ^m u Pass, ^ernnr, Caus. •^i^**rir, Des. riimi^Prt, Int. mmm^.

164. ITT md, to measure.

P. nrfir, 1. 3. xi«iif^, 9. WTF^ or wg:, O. imm^i I.wr^ n Pf. iw, I A. vmiul^, F. m^rfw, P. F. iTTin, B. ^n^ u Pt. ftnr:, Ger. fa^r, °JRR n Pass, iftirfr, Aor. ^1*1 1 P*i, Caus. ^m^Tif, Aor. finl^Mri , Des. ft w fff, Int. ^RN^, HPflfTI or

165. m yd, to go.

P. irfw, 1. 3. ^nrn^, 9. wn«^ or wg:, O. tiNi^, I. in^ H Pf. ^Sr, I A. F. in^rfir, P. F. wr, B. imm^ u Pt. inn: n Pass, uro, Caus. m^O, Aor.

WT^nT7^» Des. rMMitifn, Int. *<i*4i*4n.

»i66. ^n A:%a, to proclaim. P. ^nfir, I. *TPTT^, O. wnn^, I. ^n^ n Pf. ^^Wh II A. wwi^, F. wr^ifw,

P. F. OTT7TT, B. ^\m^ or ^TTTH II Pt. ^TTif : II Pass. WHW, Aor. WWlfo, Caus. , Aor. iBrfa^niT, Des. Pm&Ml^fd) Int. KJIJUJIIM.

167. "^ vas, to desire.

This foot takes Sampras&rana before the strong terminations of the special tenses, and in the

weakening forms generally.

P. i.^fipr, 2. "^rfty (§ 125, 120), 3. "ffV, 4-'^w> 5-^5 6. TF:, 7. T^n, s. IT, 9. "^rftf, I. i. ^R$t, 2. ^r^, 3. ^nr^, 4. w?j, 5. WP, 6. wrrf, 7. Wr^»f, 9. xil^f^, O. j^i, 1. 1. N^iifH, 2. 7, 3. ^j 4. ^^n^j 5- ^> 6- ^> 7-

* 'W^ inserts ^T before terminations consisting of one consonant. t When f^ is added immediately to the final consonant of a root, it is changed to (Pan. vi. 4, 101); § 321, note I.

|| In the tenses where ^KJ is deficient, "^is used instead.

IF This is formed from WS to eat, a reduplicated form of "^. (Pan. n. 4, 36.)

N n 2

276

AD CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS.

8. fv, 9. -rshj n Pf. 3. -3^, 9. grg:, I A. B. tfli II Pass. ^qff, Caus. 413111 ft, Des.

, F. Int.

, P. F.

1 68. frj; han, to kill.

This verb drops its final «^% before the strong terminations of the special tenses, and in the weakening forms generally, if the terminations begin with any consonants except nasals or semivowels (Pan. vi. 4, 37). Before strong terminations beginning with vowels, ^*^ han becomes f^ghn (Pan. vn. 3, 54). In the aorist and benedictive ^{vadh is sub- stituted. The desiderative, intensive, and the aorist passive are derived from TEff^ghan, the causative from '^^gJiat.

P. i. ffsJT, 2. tfa? 3. ^fff> 4- f^Kj 5- ^? 6- ^o 7- f*^ 8- ^9 9- Iffy !• J-

^si^f, 2. ^rj;, 3. ^^5 4- 'Wf^Tj 5- ^^TJ °~- ^l«rfj 7- ^T? 8. ^TT, 9.

0. f^TTf^, I. i. ^flftr, 2. *ff^ (Pan. vi. 4, 36), 3. ^, 4. ^TFT, 5- ^ 6-

7. "^UT, s. ^ir, 9. ir$ n Pf. i. "siTrnT («)? (Pan. vu. 3, 55), 2. Hvfaq or 3. »nrpT, 4. wftR, 5. wjrg:9 6. ^rcni:, 7. »rftr»T5 8. »nr, 9. ^t, I A. ^snnrtny F. ^Pnuirrf, P. F. ^m, B. ^uni^ u Pt. ^in, Ger. ^FIT, °^m (J 449) u Pass, ^am, Aor. V5nnr«f or -sr^fv (^ 407), Caus. inw^fir, Aor. ^nrhnn^, Des. nHiiiufd, Int.

^fil^ri or ^fHlnd (Pan. vn. 4, 30, vart., he kills), sHfjT.

169. g yu, to mix.

Verbs of this class ending in 7 u take, in the special tenses, Vriddhi instead of Guna before weak terminations beginning with consonants. (Pan. vn. 3, 89.)

P. i.Tfrfor, 2."5^f^, s.^tfw, 4.3^*? 5-3^*> 6.gm, 7.5^:, s.g^r, 9.g^fir, I. i.

2.^1^:, 3.^!^, 4- ^3^> 5-^3^5 6. ^TfiTf, 7-^1^9 8. ^fcT,

1. 1. Hqifi, 2. gff , 3. ing, 4. ITR, 5. $w, 6. girf, 7. irem, 8. gw, 9. ^^ u Pf. 3.

9- Si!*> J A- ^^Nlt^, F. ^temPd, P. F. irf^in, B. <^n^ u Pt. IT: n Pass.

, Aor. ^nnf^, Caus. TU^nrfir, Des. ^fcT or ftRf^fff, Int.

170. "?5 ru, to shout.

The verbs (J tu, ^ ru, ^ stu may take "^ z before all terminations of the special tenses beginning with consonants. (Pan. vn. 3, 95.)

P. i. THH or iXlfa, 2. "^fa or <cflfM, 3. ^f?T or <tflfd, 4. ^: or ^Hrt, 5. or ^t^n, 6. TETiTJ or ^'«4ldt, 7. ^flft or ^Tc(lHt, 8. ^T or ^fa, 9. ^^fw, I. i. 2. ^wt or <W>fl'!, 3. ^Tul^or 41^11^, 4. ^1^ or ^ ^'^l"^, 5. ^T^ff or -«f^«ilw, 6. or iH^ptflff, 7. ^T^R or ^I^1«T, 8. ^r^ff or "mgjlti, 9. ^H|v"c|^, O. ^TTf^ or I. i. cm Pill, 2. ^f^ or ^Tlf^, 3. TU^ or Ijfhj, 4. T^T^, 5. ^TT or ^Thr, 6. ?r or ^Thrf, 7. T^T^T, 8. ^7T or ^hf, 9. ^5 U Pf. 3. ^TT^5 9- ^1*, I A. »

F. tfrofir, P. F. tf^in, B. ^n^ u Pt. ^w: n Pass, ^nr, Caus. -n^fir, Des. ^s^rfifj Int. rt^^nr.

Note — The Sarasvati gives 'STn^l^j ^t'Slflfj and diTT; but see § 332, 4. It likewise extends the use of ^ to «J to praise.

171. 5 i, to go.

P. i. itf*, 2. ufa, 3. ufir, .4.^:, 5-^rc> 6.^:, 7.5^:, 8. ^r, 9. 4fw, I. i.^wrf,

AD CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA VERBS. 277

2. , 3., 4-> 5'W» 6.7l, 7. **T, 8. *W, 9.

3. *TJ, 4. WTR, 5. ^TT, 6. ^?rf, 7. ^in*r, 8. ^?r, 9. *nj n Pf. i. ^m (a), 2. ^jftro or ^f> 3- ^rnr, 4. t^> 5- 1^:> 6- ^HJ:> 7- 1^11' 8- t*» 9- tS:» * ^ i. wri (Pap. n. 4,45), 2. WTT.*, 3.^nrn^, 4. ^BTTFT, 5. vnw, 6. ^rrrnrt, 7. wrw, 8. WTTW, 9. w*j: ($ 368), F. *igfiT, P. F. *cn, B. ^n^ n Pt. JIT:, Ger. ^T, °^q n Pass, $irir, Aor. vunfa (J 404), Caus. Jmfr (Pan. n. 4, 46), Des. ffnrftrefir (Pan. n. 4, 47). But see § 463, II. i, and f 471, 4, with regard to this and cognate verbs if preceded by prepositions.

172. fo[ vid, to know.

P. i. *rfa, 2. %fw, 3. ^ffc, 4. "fry:, 5. "faro, 6. fVnrr, 7. fr?n, 8. I. i.*H 2.^: or ^ (Pan. vin. 2, 75), 3. ^ ($ 132^), 4. 6. ^if^nf, 7. wf^^, 8. ^rf¥w, 9. «fa<^ or ^f^:, O. fwnj, I. i.^^if*! (or f^hi

&c., Pan. in. i, 41), 2. f^%, 3. ^, 4. ^T^, 5. f^W, 6. ftnrf, 7. ^T*> 8.

9. f^§ n Pf. f^ or f^f^rn: (§ 326), I A. ^fh^, F. ^qfir, P. F. B. fron^ u

Another form of the Present is, i. $^, 2. ^W, 3. ^, 4. "fa*, 5. f^T^:, 6. 7. fr?r, 8. f^, 9. f^: u Pt. f^Tft, Ger. faf^HI n Pass. fTOK, Aor. w%ft, Caus. %^qfif, Aor. ^^lfc<<^, Des. fcfc^Hfri (Pan. i. 2, 8), Int.^fWff, ^ftr.

173. W(as, to be.

P. i. saftn, 2. ^srftr, 3. ^ri%, 4. ^:, 5. ^r:, 6. ^r:, 7. w, 8. w, 9. *rfk, 1. 1. 2. ^utilt, 3. 'iti^'if^, 4. «ri*!*> 5. ^rrer, 6. ^rrerf, 7. wsr, 8. wref, 9. ^iti^, O. i.

2. ^n:5 3. w^, 4. ^TR, 5. WIT, 6. ^rnrf, 7. WR, 8. **rnr, 9. ^:, 1. 1. ^rarrftr, 2.

3. ^TCFJ, 4. ^st^lq, 5. W) 6. Wj 7. 'Sfttiij 8. ^tT, 9. ^ II 'Pf. i. Wre, 2. *llftlV|,

4. ^nf^«4, 5. ^sTRT^t, 6. ^rrcnjt, 7. ^H i fan, 8. ^TTO, 9. ^n^: ; Atm. i. ^r^, 2. 3. ^rw, 4. vnftm^, 5. xutu^i, 6. ^rr^Tif, 7. ^1^*15, 8. ^rfroi, 9. ^nftRt.

174. if^mrij, to cleanse, (ifSj^.)

This verb takes Vriddhi instead of Guna (Pan. vn. 2, 114); it may takeVriddhi likewise before terminations that would not require Guna, if the terminations begin with a vowel (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 122).

P. i.HTftS, 2.mft|, 3. TrfS (§ 124), 4-^^» 5'W:> 6-^:> 7-3PIT:» 8-^> 9-

or iTTsrfiT, I. i.^Hi»f, 2.^nrr^, 3. ^HI^, 4.^npf, 5.^?, 6. ^npf, ;.^ip»T, 8.

9- "^pn^ or ^Hl^> O. IT«III^, I. i. H'l^lfH, 2. ^, 3. TTf , 4. ITHTR, 5. Jp, 6. 7. HT^i^f, 8. ^, 9. iJafTJ or inifg U Pf» i.HHI^, 2. *i*iifnM or JRHT?, 3. «I«II*T, 4. or *i*fifn^, 5. 'T^'f^t or H*TT^^I, 6. ^W^' °r TTT^gt, 7. «i«jn»i»i or #1*11 Pn»i, 8.

or *nrm, 9. ^^t or jwrif:, I A. wn*ff^ or ^HinfT^, F. mf^rfir or Hrafff, P. F. or inf T, B. ij5*TT U Pt. ip:, Ger. mfHHl or iffT, °^ST, Adj. JRTPSrt«q: or

t The perfect both in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada is chiefly used at the end of the periphrastic perfect.

278 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VEEBS.

«pr: or *rnh (Pan. m. i, 113) u Pass.iprfr, Aor.^srorfS, Caus. Des. ftii$|Pri or frmP»mPfl, Int. *iO*jTqn, *i*iife.

175. ^ vach, to speak. P. i. ^fs*r, 2. ^fsy, 3. ^%, 4. ^^:, 5. ^3*r:, 6. ^s, 7. T^JH, 8. ^*r, 9. ^fir or

, I. I. ^T^, 2. 4H'«^9 3. Viqe^, 4. 4Hxcf, 5. ?T^N?, 6. VSNchl, 7. iSHVI, 8.

9. -*H<^*, O. ^TaiTt^, 1. 1. q-qifri, 2. ^fNr, 3. ^R, 4. ^TC1, 5. ^Ifi, 6. ^f? 7.

8. ^», 9. ^3* u Pf. 3- TWTO 9. ira:, II A. *N^ (J 366), F. ^rfif, P. F. B. <fxMi^ u Pt. T3»: n Pass, ^nsqw, Aor. ^mfrl, Caus. m^^fri, Aor. Des. fqms|fWj Int. qiq-oin.

176. ^ rud, to cry, (^C.)

The verbs ^rwc?, W*{svap, ^^svas, ^^an, *i^jaksh take ?[ i before the terminations of the special tenses beginning with consonants, except ^ y (Pan. vn. 2, 76). Before weak terminations consisting of 6ne consonant, ^ I is inserted (Pan. vii. 3, 98) ; or, according to others, *& a (Pan. vn. 3, 99).

P. i. Ttf^fa, 2. dfc(fa, 3. Or^fn, 4. ^P^^:, 9. ^fri, I. i.swO<i, 2.^0<1: or

3. sHCi<{tf^ or ^T^I^, 4. -si^r^, 9. ^<$vi> ^- ^rf> i« !• ^*r«i, 2. ^r^r^, 3.

4. ^[TO, 5- ^^^ 6- ^Tfri> 7- ^W, 8. ^fi[Tf, 9. ^[ U Pf. ^d^, I A. ^Ttfefh or ^r^i^, F. ftf^rfir, P. F. df^in, B. ^m^ u Pt. ^rr: u Pass. ^r>, Aor. Caus. Clt^fd, Aor. -*l^^^, Des. fv"^'r^*4fii or ^ttft[^flf, Int.

177. ?(^jaksh, to eat) to laugh ||.

Seven verbs, ^T^jaksh, '3RT[jdgn, to wake, ^fX'£l daridrd, to be poor, 1ftft(chakds, to shine, $n^ sds, to rule, <c(Nt didht, to shine, T^ft ve^, to obtain, are called WTCcf abhyasta (reduplicated). They take ^ifw ati and 'Snj atu in the 3rd pers. plur. present and imperative, and ^l uh instead of ^fi^ an in the 3rd pers. plur. imperfect (§ 321 f).

P. 3. nf«ifPif, 9. *icjfn, I. -wn^lf^ or ^nf^fr^, O. if^ni^j I. 3. «lifVS/li^ or

9. *nrw: ($ 321 1) » Pf. snrcy, I A. ^^HfT^, F. nfqmfri.

178. *R*lJagrii to wake. (Pan. vi. i, 192, accent.)

P. i. *ii'i(«ij 2. miR, 3. in'ifS, 4. »rnpt, 5. »n*pn, 6. "srpprtj 7. 9. «iii|fri, 1. 1. ^nrmt, 2. ^rwnr:, 3. ^nrRt? 4. ^»<MI«*, 5. w»n'ji

8. ^i»iiMn5 9. ^^I'l^J? O. ni'jMii^j I. i. ni'mfiu, 2. au^P^, 3. «TTT59 4.

5. STPTif, 6. «ii'|ni9 7. ni'Ki*i9 8. ni'jflj 9. '«II«K^ H Pf. 3. ^IHNIK or TiiM<i-q<=tiK (Pan. in. i, 38), 9. mrm^:, I A. Wfm'O'i^ (see preface, p. ix), F. ^TMlft.mPH, P. F. Mi«i(Vifi9 B. ^iHiMit^ U Pt. «ii'iPi.n! U Pass, vu'i^kn, Aor. %i«iHiiP<. . Caus.

Des. nriHinnC'iPif. No Intensive.

* The 3rd pers. plur. present of ^does not occur (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 120); accord- ing to others the whole plural is wanting ; according to some no 3rd pers. plur. is formed from «T^.

|| *TSTto eat, from ^; "STWto laugh, from ^.

AD CLASS, iTMANEPADA VERBS. 279

179, ^ft^T daridrd, to be poor. (Pan. vi. i, 192, accent.)

In ^(V.£l daridrd the final ^T? d i* replaced by ^ » in the special tenses before strong termi- nations beginning with a consonant (Pan. vi. 4, 114). Before strong terminations beginning with vowels the WT d is lost (Pan. vi. 4, 112).

P. i. ^ftfclfa, 2. e^fVgifti, 3. sfVfcifw, 4. {OJgq:, 9. ^ft^fif, I. 3.

6.^ftf^?fT, 9. w^fi:, O. ^frf^n^ I- i.^V$if«u> 2.

5. ^jfl, 6. ^cfcfl, 7. qgitf, s. ^fcd, 9. ^pj " f' 5" °r

(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 125), I A. n^fljfl^or «j<*(X$itfl^(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 126), F. qftjftmrd (Pan. vi. 4, 114, vart.), P. F. qfljfrdl (not

1 80. jTT^&fo, to command, (^n^.) (Pan. vi. i, 188.)

^H^ yds ia changed to fifl^ sis before weakening terminations beginning with consonants, and in the second aorist. (Pan. vi. 4, 34.)

P. i. $11 (\W, 2. ^llfw, 3. ^llfw, 4. f^T^t, 9. ^iitifn, I. i. VIJIIJJ, 2. ^T|Tn or Vjm^, 3. ^[\\ (§ 132), 4- *%^5 5- ^ffifTF, 6. ^Huei, 7. ^n%^, 8. ^fifTF, 9. ^n^:, O.

f^i'Mif^, 1. 1. ^ntufn) 2. ^iifv ($ 132), 3. ^rraj, 4. ^n«iq, 5. %?, 6. fifref, 7. 8. f^r?, 9. ^iitig II Pf. 3I3IIU, II A. ^ff^rm^, F. 511^1^^, B. f^p«ni^ II Pt. Pass, f^rir, Caus. ^m^ffl, Des. njf^nftmrH, Int.

II. Atmanepada Verbs. 181. ^T8J chaksh, to speak, P. i.^$, 2.^T$, 3.^?, 4-^S%5 5. ^icn^, 6. •qtsjiff, 7. -swti^, 8.

1. 3. ^n?, 9. w«T8jTf, O. ^nfld, I. ^?f n Pf. 1«^%.

The other forms are supplied from ^n or «FJTT, the Red. Perf. optionally, (Pan. n. 4, 54, 55) : Pf. ^ft a II A. ^^ or °w, F. *nim(ri or °w, B. ^rnm^ or ^i|1^, or Atm. ^l«1«.

182. $^&, to rule. The root t^i« take« ^* before the 2nd pers. sing, present and imperative (Pin. vn. i, 77).

^ id and IT^jan do the same, and likewise insert ^ i before the and pers. pliur. present, [imperfect,] and imperative (Pan. vn. 2A 78). The commentators, however^ extend the latter rule to $3& See notes to Pan. vn. 2, 78.

P/x.^a.^,3.$M.*(^t3.H^

183. ^TT^ ds, to sit.

P. *n^, I. ^rrer, O. wrfhr, I. ^rcrt » Pf. ^nrrN^ (part, ^nf^, Pan. vn. 2, 83), I A. <*rftre, F. ^ftr«r>.

!84. ^^, to bear, fa.) P. ^, I. ^W, O. f^fhr, I. i. ^ (Pan. vn. 3, 88), 2. ^, 3.^TT, 4-

5. ^nrr, 6. ^nrf, 7. ^TR|, 8. ^i4, 9. ^irf » P£ g^, I A. ^wf^¥ or

280 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ^TMANEPADA VERBS.

(§ 337> I- *)» F- *fo*ft or *farft, B. *farrte or *>trte II Pt. *pr: (Pan. vin. 2, 45) II Pass. ^Tff, Aor. ^rarfa, Caus. ^T^nrfcTj Aor. <3WJT^, Des. ^{JM^ (Pan. vin. 3, 61), Int. ^frTOf.

185. 3ft si, to lie down, to sleep, (tfH^.)

The verb Tffts* takes Guna in the special tenses (Pan. vn. 4, 21), and inserts ^r in the 3rd pers. plur. present, imperfect, and imperative.

P. i. $nr, 2. tre, 3- W, 4- sfat? 5- snn$, 6. ^iw, 7. $*!, s. $d, 9. $t^ (Pan. vii. i, 6), I. i. ^njrfa, 2. ^fan, 3. ^%?r, 4. ^r^NfV, 5. ^ruivji, 6. 7. -»ii$Hr^, 8. ^r%i4, 9. ^ncw, O. yriftTr, 1. 1. SR, 2. %^, 3. ^nrf, 4- snrra^, 5.

6. 3NMI, 7. <5nTTH|, 8. ^?4, 9. ^cTf II Pf. f^^, I A. ^ff^, F. ^l^mri, B. ^nftlf II Pt. ^rfinr: n Pass, ^i^w (Pan. vn. 4, 22), Aor. ^^!Tft?, Caus. tymqPri, Des. f^rftn^rT, Int. ^(i^(<^7T, ^i^ifn.

1 86. ^ i, to go, (^.) (Pan. vi. i, 186, accent.)

This verb is always used with^SrfVa^i, in the sense of reading. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 1 18.)

P. ^rifir, I. 3. ^^w, 6. "swmri (Sar. n. 5, 8), 9. ^wnr, O. ^nrtifhf, I. i. 2. ^svhsf, 3. «t*fl'nfj 4. ^rwm^%, 5. •«t*n<4i'qi, 6. ^?^hrnrf, 7. ^itq*ti»t^, 8. ^nftt^j

II Pf. ^ftnfit (Pan. n. 4, 49), IA. 3. ^F, 6. ^T^nTTT, ' 9. ^iffi, or 3. ^fiflift^ (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. n. p. 119), 6. ^rapffar?rf, 9. ^UJJ^MH, F. Cond. ^!W5fiT or ^?upfNlT, P. F. ^ WT, B. ^iWte u Pt. ^^TT: ll Pass. Aor. ^iqinftl or ^nfllftr, Caus. ^mnmjfir, Aor. ^rtqifqxCf or ^wrifhrrc, Des.

or

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs. 187. fsr* dvish, to hate.

P. i.^rfrT) 2. s f«4f » s-iffe? 4. r§«f:, 9. rsr^ffl, I. i.^r^? 2.^5?s7, 3. ^r<r, 4. 9. ^ifir^ or ^rf?"jt (J 321 j), O. (Vmir^, I. i. ir^T'fiir, 2. firfr, 3. ^g, 4. 5. fin?, 6. %irf, 7. ifanr, 8. fe?9 9. feMg u Pf. f^^r? I A. ^iV^f^j F. P. F. iter, B. •fe'Hrn^, Atm. fir^te u Pt. fgr: n Pass, fe m ij, Aor. ^ft, Caus.

1 88. ^ c?w^, to milk. P. i. ^tftr, 2. vrf% 3. ^ffrv, 4.55^9 5. g7^ 6. grv:, 7.5^:, 8. |?v, 9.

I. I. ^n(l'55 2. ^Wto^, 3. ^ImoFj 4. ^fl^SI'j O. d^llri , I. I. (fl^lfWj 2. 5^^J 3'

4. "^I'^i^j 5. 3?^) 6. ^VT, 7. <{Tf»i*f, 8. 5^5 9- 5^3 " "^^' 5^^5 -^ A.* ^nr^Tf &c. (see ^ 363), F. Vl^frt.

189. 5f| stu, to praise, (l^T.)

P. i. wf*T or ««{l(»i (see No. 170)? 2. ^n(V or ^cilPM, 3. wfw or ^sNtfrf, 4. ^J^J or ^qi^J, 9. ^^nfT, I. i. ^?^rT^T, 2. ^Wr. or vi'tciqlt, 3. ^"wlii or ^'W «jlTT , 4. ^t^ or r, 9. ^ta^^, O. ^tPffif , Atm. ^5^ftw, I. i. ^KNiPtij 2. ^3f^ or ^ti^r^, 9.

HU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 281

or *nfcj n Pf. 3. $m, 2. iprta, 6. ijynj:, 9. 353:, I A. TOT*^ (J 338, 3), Atm.

^reffa, F. ^fttgfw, P. F. fcArtf, B. ^Mlfl, Atm. feftMl? (I Pt. *jjw: n Pass. Aor. viWTfa, Caus. wi^nfff, Aor. ^rg^, DCS. Ufir, Int.

190. T^^, to speak,

This verb takes $ t before weak terminations beginning with consonants in the special tenses (Pan. vii. 3, 93). The perfect ^TTf dha may be substituted for five of the persons of the present (Pan. HI. 4, 84). It is defective in the general tenses, where l^vach (No. 175) is used instead.

P. i. •arH'T, 2. dcfifM or OTTO, 3. wrtfir or or wr^Tj:, 7. ^r, s. ^r, 9. "^fir or *rrj:, 1. 1.

5. w»p, 6. ^af?rf, 7. ^5, s. ^rc|ir, 9. ^f«q^, O.

4. pncre, 5. •qw, 6. I^Tff, 7. pl^TT, 8. l|ir, 9. 7|%

191. "gp^ ^rww, to cover,

This verb may take Vriddhi instead of Guna before weak terminations beginning with con- sonants (Pan. vii. 3, 90, 91), except before those that consist of one consonant only. It takes the reduplicated perfect against § 325, and reduplicates the last syllable (Pan. vi. i, 8). In the general tenses the final ^ u, before intermediate ^t, may or may not take Guna (Pan. i. 2, 3).

P. 3. ^wsfifrf or iwoffrr, 9. ^ucjfrf, I. ^nwf^j O. **jj^n^ I. ^HUIJ} or Pf. i. <*4}HN (a), 2. WHf<m or ^rjf^v/, 3. ^'Hiq, 4- «^f*qq, 5.

6. "3n^^:, 7. •gi^f^H, 8. ^^5 9. **JJ3#» 1 A. w^Tl1^ or ^n^rii^ or

(Pan. vii. 2, 6), F. ^fWw or gp|f%tRfir, B. -3^511^ u Pass, -g^nf, Caus. Aor. ^ftjTbraf Des. "«flT or •TO^rfMHTd or <3orfaqfir, Int.

Hu Class (Juhotyddi, III Class).

I. Parasmaipada Verbs. 192. J hut to sacrifice. (Pan. vi. i, 192, accent.) P. g^fir, I. ^snpffy O. "gjm^, I. ^^ » Pf. ^i^r or ^^^TT (§ 326), I A. ^^^, F. ^Wir, P. F. -^tiTT, B. ?TmTx u Pt. fir: n Pass. ?^nr, Caus. ^mfrr, Aor. ^nj^r^, Des. ^^frr. Int. *fj£Mfi9 ^^Tn.

193. *ft bhi, to fear, (fwt.) (Pan. vi. i, 192, accent.)

This verb may shorten the final ^ i before strong terminations beginning with consonants in the special tenses. (Pan. vi. 4, 1 15.)

P. 3. fsnHir, 6. fwhr: or WHW:, 9. fowrfiT, I. 3. *rfw^, 6. ^fwiw or 9. ^f^:, O. fvftim^ or f^rqt^, I. ft&j n K ^^ or f^T- (J 326), I A. ^^h^, F. H^fiT, P. F. HITT, B. >rhn^ u Pt. tfU: » Pass. Aor. *mfr, Caus. HT^flf or HTOH^ or iflvni (see j 463, H. 18), Des. ", Int. ^w^*rff, %^fir.

o o

282 HU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

194. # hri, to be ashamed. (Pan. vi. i, 192, accent.)

P. 3. fnifr, 6. ftrrhr:, 9. ftf&fn (I no), I. ^fn^, O. ftr^mf, I.

Pf. 3. ftfFTO, 6. ftrfFfij:, 9. ftffig: or r^NdiK, I A. ^fhffy F. jvfo, P. F. fTTT, B. ^far^ u Pt. ^Nr: or jft: (Pan. vni. 2, 56) u Pass, -g^im, Caus. t^^fif, Aor. ^(W^ii^, Des. ftrgfafcf, Int. %]ffaiw.

195. TJ pri, to fill, to guard.

This verb, and others in which final ^ri is preceded by a labial, changes the vowel into "3^ur, except where the vowel requires Guna or Vriddhi. (Pan. VIT. 1, 102.)

P. i.fanfS, 2. ftreft, 3. ftnift, 4. ftr$%:, 5. f^§:, 6. ftr$w:, 7. fn^:, 8. ftr^S, 9. f^tfrr, 1. 1. -^rmu, 2.^rfTO (or ^rftro, Sar.), 3. ^rftR: (or 'srftnro^j 4. 5. ^ftr^w, 6. ^rf^wi, 7. ^rf^H, s. ^PM^W, 9. ^rftnr^t, O. fM^MFi^, I. i.

, 3. ft1*!, 4-<fr1|rcre, 5-^^ 6.fl^WT, 7. frlRIH, S.ftr^S, 9.f^fC3 II Pf. i.

(«), 2. MMfi.% 3. TTW, 4. ^itf<^, 5. 4Hvg: °r ^fr^:, 6. sn^g: or T«ni^:, 7. trqfbr,

8. TTMT, 9. -q^: or ijj: (Pan. vn. 4, n, 12), I A. ^RTTh{, F. •qftwfk (0, P- F. ^ftcTT or TtftaT, B. ^§T^ u Pt. ^w: (Pan. vni. 2, 57), ^§:, and ^fbr: are referred to TJT (§ 442, 7), Ger. fjtr, °f^ n Pass, ^ffir, Caus. ^R<lOr, Aor. ^M)^, Des, y^frr or filMf^fri (?), Int. M^Sn, ^mfS.

Several optional forms are derived from another root ij, with short ^j. Thus, P. 3. faxrfff, 6. fmjrit, 9. Pnufri, I. 3. ^fqM:, 6. ^rfrpjlff, 9.^rftnT^t, O. fuTJ^m^ U

I A. ^mtff^, B. ftnm^ u Pass, fma (§ 390), Int. ^hm (§ 481).

196. fT hd, to leave, (^ft^Tcjr.)

Reduplicated verbs ending in ^TTa (except the Jlghu verbs, see § 392 *) substitute \i for ^TTa before strong terminations beginning with consonants (Pan. vi. 4, 113). The verb ^T hd, however, may also substitute ^i (Pan. vi. 4, 116).

P. i. «i^ir«i, 2. »fi£Tftr, 3. 'STfrfrT, 4. ir^N* («), 5. "5?^^: («), 6. "snrfrrf: (?), 7. *\%\*: (*), 8. «nrfa (z), 9. »fffff, 1. 1. ^r»r^t, 2. w*ff n, 3. ^nr^n^, 4. ^»i^1^ (z), 9. ^nrj:,

O.^ni^ (Pan. vi. 4, 118), I. t.iffTf^, 2. ^f^ (?) or ir^rf^ (Pan. vi. 4, 117), 3. »TfTiJ, 4. ST^TW, 5. W^TT (?), 6. '^liii (f), 7. "ST^TH, 8. '^^Trf (?), 9. "5T^ U Pf. i. »T^I, 2. *if^xf or 5fin% 3. "ST^, 4- *tf&> B- <5^^«> 6- '5^*> 7- 'T^'T, 8. "5Tf , 9. »Tj:, I A.

, F. gimfri, P. F. frwr, B. ^ITT^ u Pt. ^hr:, Ger. f^n (Pan. vn. 4, 43), II Pass. ^hTff, Caus. ^nwfrf, Aor. '^"5^^, Des. fiTfmfff, Int.

, 1. 3. TO (or ^ro^), 6.

1. 1. ^rcrftr, 2. 5^, 3. ^r|, 4. ^^o^, 5. ^, 6. s^rif, 7. ^^TH, s. ^f, 9. ^ u Pf. i. ^TR, 2. *nfH I A. 'STK^, 9. ^nt^ (1 3^4), F. ^^rtaifTT, P. F. ^rtr, B.

II. Atmanepada Verbs. 198. HT md, to measure, (TTT.) P. i. far, 2. fwt^r, 3. fa*ftw, 4. (HH)«I^, 5. f^TT^, 6. "ftTTTff, 7. (*<HlH^, 8.

HU CLASS, PARA8MAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS. 283

9. f*i*ifl, 1. 1. v 1*1 1*1, 2. ^rn-nffan;, 3. *s 1*1*1 in, 4. TtmHlqff , 5. ^ti*f*ii*<i, 6.

y.ufHNlnfig, S.^lfinftttf, 9.*i(*i*in, O. f*i*fliT, I. i.fira, 2. f*fHl*J, 3. f»i*i1 «i, 4 5. (•iir^i, 6. famiii, 7. (»i*ii*i9> 8. f*i*i1l4, 9. fa*inf n Pf. i. *TO, a. iffim, 3. *TO,

5. *TOT^, 6. *r*rnr, 7.*rf*7*i^, 8. *rf*ii&, 9. «rf»TT, I A. i.^nnftf, a. ^nrrwr:, 3.

4. W4l440g, 5. ^HHIWll, 6. xi *i i<i ml, 7. xWlwfjg, 8. xWIUf, 9. WHI4A, F.

P. F. mwr, B. inwtY n Pt. fair:, Ger. ftrwr, °*TTO (not .rhr, Pan. vi. 4, 69) u Pass. «frtw, Aor. wnfa, Caus. Hm^fd, Des. "ftn^rifr, Int. ^*T^iri^.

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

199. ^ bhri, to carry, (ypr.)

P. i. (V»if*i, 2. "ftwf^, 3. f%»rfS, 4. ftnj^t, 5. fw*pn, 6. fw*jirt, 7. ^*prt, 8. ^p?, 9. f^>ifiT, Atm. i.fw, 2. fa*j^, 3.f^T*i7r, L3.^ff*r:, 6.^ir*pn, 9.wfir*T^:, Atm. 3. ^sf«f*jrT, 6. wf^»jnrf, 9. -wfW*j?r, O. f^^^ifl, Atm. ^^ftw, 1. 1. fwH^ilVi, 2. fw*jfr» 3. fwt n Pf. i. WR (5), 2. W^, 3-^n:, 4- fr*p tf 334J P^n. vn. 2, 13) or fir*Kh<*ii? I A. ^HT^, Atm. ^ryr, F. HiX^fy, P. F. *Sr, B. f*jnrr^, Atm. yfa n Pt. ^jw: u Pass, ftnnr, Caus. HrCTflf, Des. "yjtrfir, or fwft^fir, if it follows the Bhu class (Pan. vn. 2, 49), Int. Twhnfr, ^*>f&.

200. ^T da, to give, (^T^)

The ^J^Att verbs (§ 392*) drop WT d before strong terminations, when other reduplicated verbs (see No. 196) change "VI d to ^f. (Pan. vi. 4, 112, 113.)

P. i. ^rf*r, 2. <^tfa, 3. ^rfff, 4. ^s1*, 5- ^*K» 6. ^:, 7. «f?n, 8. ^ro, 9. ^fw, Atm.

i.^, 2. ^W, 3.^, 4- ^Sft, 5-^T^> 6. ^TF, 7.^W%, 8.^|, 9. ^7T, I. i.

a.^^r:, 3.^^, 4-^sr, 5-^^» 6- ^[^t, 7- *5*r, 8. ^r^, 9.^*^5:, Atm. i.

2. vf^fm;, 3.^?^, 4. ^pgrfl^, 5. «<^|Vj|, 6. SH^^Irtl, 7. VH^r*, S.V^f, 9. O. ^rr^, Atm. ^TT, 1. 1. ^Tftf, 2.^ff (Pan. vi. 4, 119), 3. ^TiJ, 4. ^T^, 5.

6. ^rf, 7. ^T*T, S.^tT, 9. ^, Atm. i. <& 2. ^r^T, 3-^rf, 4-^'^t, 5-^™t 6-

7. ^Rt, 8. ^, 9. ?[^n II Pf. i. ^, 2. ^T or ^TO, 3. ^, 4. ^f^, 5.

.^, 9.^5:, Atm. i.^, 2.^f^, 3.^, 4-^%t, S-'tT^* 9-^C, II A. i. ^f, 9. ^j:, Atm. ^f^(see p. 184), F. , P. F. ^TTTT, B. ^T\9 Atm. ^nrte n Pt. ^: (J 436), Ger. ^T, °^T n Pass. r, Aor. ^rftr, Caus. ^Ttnrfir, Aor. \H^!^M, Des. f^wfir, Int.

201. VT^M, to place,

This verb is conjugated like ^T. It should be remembered, however, that

the aspiration of the final v, if lost, must be thrown forward on the initial ^;

hence 2nd pers. dual Pres. vw: &c. (§ 118, note). The Pt. is f^in, Ger.

O O 2

284 KUDH CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND iTMANEPADA VERBS.

. "fair nij, to cleanse, The verbs f«T^wy, f^T vij, to separate, and f^^vish, to embrace, take Guna in their

reduplicative syllable. (Pan. vn. 4, 75.) Reduplicated verbs (abhyasta, § 32 if) having a short medial vowel do not take Guna before

weak terminations beginning with vowels in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 87.)

P. i. ^frFT, 2. %%ft|, 3. %%fo, 9. ^ftnrfcT, I. i. ^H(HJT, 2. ^R^T, 3. 7. ^Rfar*, 9. <3Rfa*j:, O. ?rft5*n^, I. i. ^fcnnfil, 2. ^Tf*I, 3. %^{ II Pf.

I A. ^r%^ or II A. wftnr^, F. %^r, P. F. TPJT, B. ftrwiTr, Atm.

Caus. ifinifiT, Aor. ^cftftnn, Des. frriiTT^fff, Int.

Rudh Class (Rudhddi, VII Class). I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs. 203. ^^rudh, to shut out, (^fv^.)

P. ^rfs, I. ^^^, O. %«m^, I. ^| u Pf. i. ^dv, 2. ^df>rzr, 3

7. ^ftm, 9. ^^:, I A. mhtfh^or II A. W^>T^, Atm. ^^, F. TtwfiT, P. F. B. ^UTT?^, Atm. ^ft^ II Pt. ^gr:, Ger. r, °ui u Pass, w, Aor. Caus. dv^rfw, Des. ^^^rfiT, Int.

II. Parasmaipada Verbs. 204. f^rs &'s^, to distinguish,

P. i. f^nrf^j 2. f^Rfsj, 3. f^Rfi?j 4- f^ftj 5. f$s*5 6. f^r?:, 7. f^far:, 8. 9. frfr^frr, I. i.^rf^Rw, 2.^r%^7, 3.^r%»T7, 4. ^if^r^, 5-^ff^? 6.

8. ^rf^F, 9. ^rf^fa^, O. f^T^TTi^, I. i. f^R^rfirr, 2. f^ifj (or f^fe), 3. %«Tf II fTO^, II A. ^%^, F. ^T^TfTf, P. F. $FT, B. f^TTr^ II Pt. %* : n Pass. Caus. ^N^fif, Des. f^rfjfTW^T? Int- $%^W? $^rf?.

hims, to strike,

P. ff^%, 1. 1. ^r^ri«, 2. ^T%H: or ^rf^r^, 3. ^rfi^n^(J 132), 4. ^rf^^, 5 6. ^r^wl, 7. 'srf^Rj 8. ^rf^^r, 9. ^rf^TF^, O. f^^rn^, 1. 1. f^H^ifn, 2. fi?fa, 3. P^HI^ u Pf. ftrf^r, I A. ^^, F. f^ftnqfir, P. F. f^ftnn, B. f^^nr^ u Pt. f^ftnr: n

Pass, f^qw, Caus. f^WrT, Aor. ^rftff^^, Des. ftrf^ftRflf, Int. 206. H»^ bhanj, to break, (n»5ft.)

P. wrfti, I. ^TVROF, o. 45?n^, I. *?rf n Pf. ^r^nr, I A. <3wreffy F. > P. F. H^ir, B. ^5^ u Pt. *nr: u Pass. HT^, Aor. <gwftr or Wftr (J 407),

Caus. >RPTfw, Des. f^l^frr, Int. "W^Tff, ^H%.

207. ^^ anj, to anoint, (^^.)

P. ^Rf?R, I. ^TT1?^, O. ^5^? I- ^R^l U Pf. ^TPTW, I A. ^TTWfy F. ^iftmflf or ^flfif, B. ^^n^TH U Pt. ^TSRt, Ger. ^rflTi^n or ^RT or ^TW (Pan. vi. 4, 32; J 438), 0:5r5?T n Pass. ^5*Tff, Aor. ^rff»r, Caus. 4*T*lTif, Aor. ^srffinrf, Des.

RUDH CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 285

208. Tft trih, to kill,

This verb inserts irr ne instead ofHSna before weak terminations beginning with consonants.

(Pan. VH. 3, 92.)

P. i. if^a, 2. yiHVr, 3. ipbfz, 4. ^3f:, 5. 37:, 6. ^n, 7. ^r:, 8. ^r, 9.

I. i.WJ?rt, 2.^5^, 3-'«l^<» 4-^J3^* 5. ^TJ7, 6. ^TT, 7.W?pr, 8. ^Hpf, 9. O. ij'Ul^, 1. 1. J51^if«i, 2. "jfT, 3. "5^ ii Pf. inf%, I A. v?nff?^or v^nn^, F. or ff^frf, P. F. frftur or Trtr, B. J[m\ H Pt. 77: n Pass, -^nr, Aor. ^nrff, Caus. Aor. Wdrt or <Wffl£i, Des. fflflflMfrt or fdi^frf, Int.

III. Atmanepada Verbs. 209. ^ indh, to kindle, (fa^ft.)

or ^, 1."^ or"Vv, O.^rhr, I. i.^A, 2.^T, 3.^f or ^ n Pf. (or ^, Pan. i. 2, 6), I A. VfV*, F. ^n^T, P. F. ^ftmr, B. ^nrfr n Pt. ^f: n Pass, ^um, Caus. nrfff, Des.

APPENDIX II.

On the Accent in Sanskrit.

§ i. Although in Sanskrit the accent is marked in works belonging to the Vedic period only, yet its importance as giving a clue to many difficult points of grammar is now so generally acknowledged that even an elementary grammar would seem imperfect without at least the general outlines of the system of Sanskrit accentuation. I determined therefore in this new edition of my grammar to mark the accent in all cases where it seemed to be practically useful, but in order not to perplex the beginner with the marks of accent, I have added them in the transliterated words only, so that a student may still learn his grammar and his paradigms in Devanagari, unconcerned about the accents, until the accents them- selves attract his notice, and enable him at a glance to see cause and effect in grammatical operations which otherwise would remain unintelligible. Thus if we look at trdyah, tres, but tribhih, tribus, and tritiya, tertius j at emi, I go, but imdh, we go ; at bddhdmi, I know, but tuddmi, I strike ; at vdktum, to speak, but uktdh, spoken, we see at once how the position of the accent, either on the radical syllable or on the termination, influences the strengthening or weakening of the base, and how this strengthening and weakening rested originally on a rational and intelligible principle.

§ 2. The accent is called in Sanskrit Svara, i. e. tone, and according to the description of native grammarians there can be no doubt that it was really musical. It meant the actual rising and falling of the voice, produced by the tension, the relaxation, and the wide- opening of the vocal chords; it was a musical modulation peculiar to each word, and it corresponded to what we call the singing or the cantilena of the speaker, which, though in modern languages most perceptible in whole sentences, may also be clearly perceived in the utterance of single words.

Ex. Maria! A j ^F=L but

Ma ri a Ma ry.

Whatever the accent became in later times, its very name of prosodia, accentits, i. e. by- song, shows that in Greek and Latin, too, it was originally musical, that tonos meant pitch, oxys, high pitch, barys, low pitch, and that perispomenos, drawn round, did not refer origin- ally to the sign of the circumflex, but to the voice being drawn up and down in pronouncing a circumflexed syllable.

§ 3. For grammatical purposes we have to distinguish in Sanskrit two accents only, the uddtta and the svarita. The uddtta is pronounced by raising the voice, the svarita by a combined raising and falling of the voice. All vowels which have neither of these accents are called anuddtta, i. e. without uddtta, though they might with equal justice be called asvarita, without the svarita. The anuddtta, immediately preceding an uddtta or svarita vowel, is sometimes called anuddttatara or sannatara*. (Pan. i. 2, 29-31.)

* Bopp, following Professor Roth (Nir. p. LVIII), calls this accent sannatatara, as if from sannata, depressed ; it is, however, derived from sanna, the participle of sad, to sink.

§ ;. ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. 287

In transliterated words I mark the uddtta by the acute, the original svarita by the circumflex.

Every syllable without either the mark of uddtta or svarita has to be considered as grammatically unaccented ; and an unaccented syllable before an uddtta or original starita, as phonetically anuddttatara. If the unuddtta must be marked in transliterated words, it can be marked by the grams. Thus in tt avardhanta, they grew, t€ has the uddtta, a the anuddtta. If the two words coalesce into te 'vardhanta, then e takes the svarita, tf 'vardhanta. Similarly, srucht+\va become sruch?va; tri+ambakam become trySmbakam.

§ 4. In Sanskrit the accents are indicated in the following way :

The uddtta is never indicated at all, but only the svarita, (whether original or dependent,) and the anuddttatara (sannatara), i. e. the anuddtta immediately preceding an uddtta or svarita syllable. The sign of the svarita is — , that of the anuddttatara is __. Whenever we find a syllable marked by _, the sign of the anuddttatara, we know that the next syllable, if left without any mark, is uddtta; if marked by — , it is svarita. Hence ^f'«it is agnfh, «R*U is kanydf. A monosyllabic word, if uddtta, has no mark at all. Ex. ft ydh, »J nu.

A monosyllabic word, if anuddtta, is marked by . Ex. ^t vah, T nah.

A monosyllabic word, if svarita, is marked by — . Ex. *& svdh.

§ 5. As a general rule every word has but one syllable either uddtta or svarita, the rest of the syllables being anuddtta. Any syllable may have the accent. But if an uddtta syllable is followed by an anuddtta syllable, its anuddtta is changed into what is called the dependent svarita. Ex. VlOtHl agnind. Here ^^ ag, originally anuddtta, is pronounced and marked as anuddttatara; f^T ni is uddtta, and is therefore without any mark; TT ndf originally anuddtta, becomes svarita, and is marked accordingly. In transliteration this dependent svarita need not be marked, nor the anuddttatara. Both may be treated as anuddtta, i. e. without grammatical accent, while their exact pronunciation in Sanskrit, to be described hereafter, is of importance to Vedic scholars only.

§ 6. If a word standing by itself or at the head of a sentence begins with several anuddtta syllables, they have all to be marked by the sign of anuddttatara. Ex. 'MI^Mi dpnuvdnah ; S<V"i«4l hridayydyd.

§ 7. By observing these simple rules, no doubt can remain as to the grammatical accent of any word in Sanskrit. The following is a list of the principal classes of accented words in Sanskrit :

1. A word consisting of one syllable which has the uddtta, is called uddtta. Ex. T£ yah,

»J nu, ^ kdm.

2. A word which has the uddtta on the last syllable, is called antoddtta. Ex. *tT'^: agnty,

^ifarti janitd.

3. A word which has the uddtta on the first syllable, is called ddyuddtta. Ex. ^ (ndrafi,

^tlft hdtd.

4. A word which has the uddtta on the middle syllable, is called madhyoddtta. Ex. *d*nni

agn{nd, ^fir*ffil agnibhih.

5. A word consisting of one syllable which has the original svarita, is called svarita.

Ex. 1$ kva, ^ svah.

6. A word which has the original svarita on the last syllable, is called antasvarita.

Ex. cn»q| kanyd.

288 ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. § 8-

7. A word which has the original svarita on the middle syllable, is called madhyasvarita.

Ex. <J^«i<4i hridayyayd.

8. A word which has the original svarita on the first syllable, is called ddisvarita.

Ex. T3"*!]R svarnare.

9. A word without uddtta or svarita, is called sarvdnuddtta. Ex. ^t vah, »Tt nah.

10. A word with two uddtta syllables, is called dviruddtta; i^tHPit: brihaspdtih. Here the

first syllable is uddtta, and is therefore not marked at all. The second syllable is anuddtta, and according to rule would become svarita. But as the next syllable is uddtta again, the anuddtta becomes anuddttatara, and is marked accordingly. The third syllable is uddtta, and the last, originally anuddtta, becomes svarita. In msfNtjxuT mitrdvdrunau, the first syllable is anuddtta, but becomes anuddttatara, because an uddtta follows. The second syllable is uddtta, so is the third, and hence neither of them has any mark. The fourth syllable, being anuddtta, becomes svarita, because it follows an uddtta. The last syllable is anuddtta and, as nothing follows, is left without a mark.

11. A word with three uddtta syllables, is called triruddtta ; ^^ii^tflin indrdbnhaspdti.

§ 8. If words come together in a sentence, the same rules apply to them as to single words. Thus if a word ending in uddtta is followed by a word beginning with an anuddtta syllable, the anuddtta syllable is pronounced as svarita. Thus *K + ^, i. e. yah -j- cha, become *P5T ydscha, where the mark of the dependent svarita on ^ cha shows that *T ya has the uddtta.

If a word ending in an anuddtta is followed by a word beginning with an uddtta or svarita, the anuddtta becomes anuddttatara. . Ex. vt*in*i^ djanayat + F tarn become ^I*1«l*m djanayat tdm.

If a word ending in a svarita, which replaces an original anuddtta, is followed by another word having the uddtta on the first syllable, the general rule requires the svarita, being originally an anuddtta, to become anuddttatara, so that we have to write *T5T Jft^yds cha tat. Here we see that *K yah has the uddtta, because otherwise, at the beginning of a sentence, it would have to be marked with anuddttatara. As ^ cha has the anuddttatara, we see that it was originally anuddtta, and became anuddttatara, because the next syllable Jfi^tdt has the uddtta, which need not be marked.

If instead of FIT tdt, which has the uddtta, we put ^I» hydh, which has the svarita, we should have to write *P3T ^h yds cha hyah, the sign of the svarita on ^K hydh showing first, that *?h hyah cannot be uddtta, for in that case it would have no mark, and would require svarita on the next following syllable ; and secondly, that it cannot be anuddtta, for in that case it could not be preceded by an anuddttatara.

If an original svarita follows after a final uddtta, it retains the sign of the svarita, but it is then impossible to say whether that sign marks the original or the dependent svarita. Ex. SBHilJI ffi dtmd+kva (Rv. I. 164, 4). Only, if an uddtta followed after Hi kva, its svarita would remain (see § 9), while the dependent svarita would become anuddttatara.

If a word such as ^^Ijf^HJ arunayugbhih, having the uddtta on yug, stands by itself, it must have the anuddttatara sign, not only under TO na, which immediately precedes the uddtta syllable, but likewise under ^ a and ^ ru. But if preceded by -stfri: agnih, which has uddtta on the last, the first syllable takes the svarita, the second requires no mark at all, and the third keeps its anuddttatara mark ; '^Tfri^sTOjJ'foT: agnir arunayugbhih.

-$IO. ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. 289

If instead of -wflq; agnih we put 3ft tndram, which has the dependent narita on the last, uddtta on the first syllable, then we write 45*<*>^f»4: indram arunayHgbhih, because there is no necessity for marking the anuddtta after a syllable which has the dependent narita.

§ 9. If an original narita is followed by an uddtta or by another original narita, it would be difficult to mark the accent. Thus if 9 kva, which has the original narita, is followed by TT& tdtra, we could not write either B !GJ( or B TTjfr. In the former case we should lose the anuddttatara required before every uddtta and independent narita; in the Utter, the sign of the original svarita being dropt, TJi kva would be taken for an anuddtta syllable. To obviate this, the numeral ^ is inserted, which takes both the narita and the anuddttatara marks *, UiS K^", and thus enables us to indicate what was wanted, viz. that kva is narita, and td in tdtra is uddtta. Ex. ^TO + T^: become TcRQ^^t:; ^fc + ^rt become Bf*lTtf (Rv. i. 105, 3).

If the vowel which has the original svarita is long, the numeral \ is used instead of % and the anuddttatara is marked both beneath the vowel and the numeral. Thus Rv. 1. 105, 7. ^Wn4t -f- ^Kl become ^TTvft^^Tt. Rv. 1. 157, 6. T5*rf + 4J"Jfat = T**n^ vi^fot.

Rv. x. 116, 7. Trgj: + ^ETfe-f ^5 become "TOt^s^ffj. Here kvo and 'ddhfn have the svarita, the first is marked by T^t^, the second by ^sjff.

Rv. x. 144, 4. IK + ^T^h become ^ft^s^n J. This sinking of the voice, as here indicated, from the highest svarita to the lowest anuddttatara pitch is called kampa, shaking.

§ 10. If two vowels at the end and beginning of words coalesce into a new vowel, their respective accents are changed according to the following rules :

1. Uddtta+uddtta = uddtta (Prat. 197). Ex. «JMI4UI 4- TR= *JMHUlM jushdni-\-upa-=.

jushdndpa. W^ + ^H = ^fctai apsu+d= apsvd.

2. Uddtta-}- anuddtta = uddtta. Ex. ^TT + ^f^ = ^fi£ /-ftfttss&i. See exception b.

3. Anuddtta -f anuddtta = anuddtta (Prat. 198). Ex. *?V + ^* = HV<Ffr mddhu + uda-

kdm = mddhudakam. irfTf + ^^^ = WK^^^ prdti + adrifran = prdtyadrisra*.

4. Anuddtta+uddtta^uddtta. Ex. ^ + WT = ^T <ndra+d= indri.

Ex. ^ + ^= H^ *t?a -f ft = i adyutye-\-dvase=.adyuty6'vase (Rv. i. 112, 24).

^,

6. Svarita+ anuddtta = svarita. Ex. li + f^ = ^ *pa+ica

^i§^T?ft kva+idd'nfm = kvedd'nfm (Rv. i. 35, 7). There are, however, some exceptions : a. If uddtta i coalesces with anuddtta t, the long i takes soarita (Prat. 188, 199). Ex.

^ = ^^t'^ srucM+iva = sruchfva. If, however, the first or second t is long, the

contraction takes uddtta. Ex. ff + f = ^f M+tm=hlm (Rv. x. 45, 4). 6. If an uddtta vowel becomes semivowel before an anuddtta vowel, the anuddtta vowel

becomes svarita (Prat. 188). Ex. *ffat + »J + 5$ = *ft»n f^TJ y#a+nw+iWra = y^'<f

* Some MSS. write

t Professor Bopp (Grammatik, § 30, 5) gives this as an instance of ^svarita followed by anuddttatara and svarita. In this case we should have to write r«lt TT*zrfa:. But the fact is that in rdthyebhih the first syllable has the uddtta.

I The statement of Professor Benfey (Grammar, 2nd ed., p. n) that the second narita is not marked is against the authority of the MSS.

pp

290 ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT; § II-

nvmdra. ^ + + ^T^T = JJWT i3*f evd+hi+asya = evd hydsya (Rv. i. 8, 8). Also, «T^ nadt, plur. »T?h nadyah, but gen. sing. «T?nt nadydh, because in the former the termination is originally anuddtta, in the latter uddtta. c. If an uddtta e or o coalesces with an (elided) anuddtta a, it takes svarita (Prat. 188).

Ex. W + ^raVff = "ffS^Pkhf te+avardhanta = te \ardhanta.

According to Mandukeya all uddtta vowels coalescing with another anuddtta vowel, become svarita. This is also the case in certain Brahmanas ; see Kielhorn, Bhashika- sutra, I. 5.

The accents produced by the coalescence of vowels have the following technical names, taken from the name of the Sandhi that gave rise to them :

1. Praslishta, the accent of two vowels united into one (samdvesa, ektbhdva).

2. Abhinihita, the accent of two vowels of which the second is the elided a.

3. Kshaipra, the accent of two vowels of which the first has been changed into a semivowel.

4. Tairovyanjana, the svarita, replacing an anuddtta, if separated by consonants from the

preceding uddtta. Ex. ^ ft »i*jQa agnim ile.

5. Vaivritta (or padavritta], the svarita, replacing an anuddtta, if separated by an hiatus

from the preceding uddtta (Prat. 204). Ex. 1 ^£ 2/a/ indra*.

6. Jdtya, the svarita in the body of a word, also called nitya, inherent. It is always

preceded by either y or v, and points to a period in the history of Sanskrit in which these semivowels retained something of their vowel nature. It may, in fact, be treated as medial kshaipra; and it is important that where the peculiar pronunciation of the different svaritas is described, that of the jdtya and the kshaipra is said to be identical (Vaj. Prat. I. 125).

§ ii. By applying these rules we can with perfect certainty discover which syllable in each word has the grammatical accent, whether uddtta or svarita. Unfortunately many words lose their accent in a sentence, particularly the verb which, in a direct sentence, is considered as a mere enclitic of the noun to which it belongs. Only in relative and conditional sentences, or when a verb begins a sentence, and under some other restrictions which are fully described by native grammarians, does the verb retain its independent accent. Vocatives also lose their accent, except at the beginning of a sentence, when they have the accent on the first syllable f. With these exceptions, however, every student, by following the rules here given, will be able to determine what is the real grammatical accent of any

* Besides the tairovyanjana and the vaivritta, which we should call the dependent svarita, other subdivisions are mentioned by some authorities. Thus if compound words are divided (in the Padapatha) by the avagraha, the tairovyanjana is called tairovirdma. Ex. *ftStim g6 'patau. If a word is divided in the Padapatha, the first half ending in a svarita preceded by an uddtta, and the second half beginning with an uddtta, the svarita is called tdthdbhdvya. Ex. TTrJ^Scflffi^. Here ta is uddtta, nu is svarita, then follows the avagraha or pause of division, and after that na, which is again uddtta. Here a kind of kampa takes place, and the svarita is marked accordingly. Though the name tdthdbhdvya is not mentioned in the first Pratisakhya, the peculiar accent which it is meant for is fully described in Sutra 212. In the commentary on the Vaj. Prat. (120) it would perhaps be better to write asamhitdvat instead of svasamhitdvat j Weber, Ind. Stud. vol. iv. p. 137.

t See Bhashika-sutra, ed. Kielhorn, II. 1-31; Whitney, in Beitrage zur vergleichenden Sprachforschung, vol. I. p. 187.

-J 12. ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. 291

word occurring in the hymns of the Rig-veda. The system of marking the uddtta and svarita in the Satapatha-Brahmana is slightly different, as may be seen from Professor Weber's introductory remarks, and particularly from Dr. Kielhorn's learned notes on the Bhashika-sutras.

§ 12. Quite different from the determination of the grammatical accent is the question how the accents should be pronounced or intoned in a sentence, and particularly in the hymns and Brahmanas of the principal Vedas. This question concerns the student of the Veda only, and different authorities differ on this point. The following short remarks must be sufficient. According to the Rig-veda-Pratisakhya (187 seq.), the uddtta is high, the (in in/tiff a low ; of the svarita one portion is higher than uddtta, the rest like uddtta, except if an uddtta or svarita follows, in which case the voice sinks down to the anuddtta pitch. This sinking down is called kampa, shaking. All anuddtta syllables, following after svarita (whether original or dependent) are pronounced with uddtta pitch (195), except the last, which is followed again by either uddtta or svarita, and takes the low pitch of anuddtta (196). This pronunciation of anuddtta syllables with uddtta pitch is called the Prachaya accent (205). We have therefore only three kinds of pitch, (no special anuddttatara pitch being recognized in the Pratis'akhya,) which in their relative position may be represented by

anuddtta, uddtta, svarita, prachaya.

Thus in *II^M*S ^*OT mdddyasva svarnare, *TT md is anuddtta, ^dais uddtta, ^ ya is svarita, is anuddtta, ^T^svar is svarita, *!TC nare, both anuddtta, but pronounced like uddtta.

, J J*3 , J*J J J |

JJJJ*ggj

ma d<£ ya sva svar nare.

In "«f^*<M*irflMUfrft ddabdhapramatir vdsishthah, TO a is uddtta, ^W dab is svarita, dhaprama are anuddtta, but pronounced like uddtta, fit ti is anuddtta, ^T ra is uddtta, sish is svarita, 7! £^a$ is anuddtta, but pronounced as uddtta.

P

O j j j

d dab dha pra ma tir vd sish (hah.

Other Sfokhas vary in the pronunciation of the accents, as may be seen from their respective Pratis'akhyas. Much confusion has been caused by mixing up these different systems, and, in particular, by trying to reconcile the rules of the Rig-veda-Pratis'akhya with the rules of Panini. According to Panini (i. 2, 29 seq.) the uddtta is high, the anuddtta low, but the svarita is half high and half low, and the anuddttas following after svarita (original or dependent) are pronounced monotonously (ekafruti), while the last of them, immediately

* Long after this was written I saw Dr. Haug's description of the accents in the Zeitschrift der D. M. G. vol. xvn. p. 799. He gives the intervals much smaller, so that if the anuddtta is c, the uddtta would be d, and the svarita would rise to e. This is no doubt right, and it will be easy to transcribe my own notation accordingly. I only retain it because it is clearer to the eye. What is very important, as confirming my view, is Dr. Haug's remark that in listening to the recitation of the Pandits he could not perceive any difference between the uddtta and the anuddttas if pronounced with prachaya svara.

P p 2

292 ON THE ACCENT IN SANSKRIT. § 12.

preceding a new uddtta or svarita, is lower than anuddtta, and hence called sannatara or, by the commentators, anuddttatara. This system, too, though different from the former, gives us only three kinds of musical pitch, which may be approximately represented by

P

anuddttara, anuddtta, uddtta, svarita, ekafruti.

Ekafruti is described as without any definite pitch (traisvarydpavdda), and might therefore be intended for mere monotonous recitative*.

* It is commonly used as synonymous with prachita; e.g. uddttamayam pracJiitam ekasrutiti parydyah, Vaj. Prat. iv. 138.

INDEX OF NOUNS.

NOTE— The figures refer to the §, not to the page.

akkd, mother, 238. akshi, eye, 234.

^P w^agnimath, fire-kindling, 157. ^M fn •«i«jv atichamu, better than an army, 227. atilakshmt, better than Lakshmi, 227.

'sfrt, better than a woman, m.f., 229. , eating, 182. n, 191.

anadud, ox, 210. anaroan, without a foe, 189. ^st n ^ anehas, time, 168. TSF^^anvach, following, 181. ^n^o/), water, 211. SwfW«ni ambikd, mother, 238.

, fire, 149.

aryaman, name of a deity, 201. w5i^an?a£, horse, 189. vHf^arflaw, hurting, foe, 189. ^H«iMi^ avaydj, priest, 163. ^W«M-<I avdch, south, 180. avt, f. not desiring, 225. , blood, 214. ;, blood, 161, 214. xt^ asthi, bone, 234. vf^ ahan, n. day, 196. Tf^-aAan, day, at the end of a compound,

197, 198. vi^'iiijr ahargana, month, 196.

, soul, self, 191, 192.

dpahj water, 149, an. is, blessing, 172. i, face, 214. dsya, face, 214. «n, 203.

*/, such, 174. -iyas, 206.

3<*^\\*{uktha6ds, reciter of hymns, 177. <j <; <* udaka, water, 214.

(, upward, northern, 181. water, 214.

unnf, leading out, 221. updnah, shoe, 174.

y, nom. prop., 169. ushnih, a metre, 174. urj, strength, 161.

ritvij, priest, 161. ^J^J^*^ ribhukshin, Indra, 195. ^T$>T kakubh, region, 157. «lrfw kati, how many, 231.

(, nail, 221. kavi, poet, 230. «UTiT kdnta, beloved, 238. ifHT kdntd, fern, beloved, 238. t'yaf, How much ? 190. kir, scattering, 164. kudhi, m. f. a bad thinker, 221.

kumdri, m. girlish, 227. kri, m. f. buying, 220. i, curlew, 159.

294

INDEX OF NOUNS.

kroshtu, jackal, 236. khanj, lame, .163.

, heavier, 206. , voice, 164. , guardian, 157. covering, 174.

j^rO, OX, 2l8.

iftf^goraksh, cowherd, 174. %\mift grdmani, leader of a village, 221. "*|flmt( chakds, splendid, 172. •«|o|,|Uj^ chakdsat, shining, 184.

, desirous of acting, 172. chitralikh, painter, 156. WQl^jakshat, eating, 184. »TJIi^ jag at, world, 184.

jaganvas, having gone, 205. jagmivas, having gone, 205. 1 *i »•«! ^ jaghanvas, having killed, 205. «f PH «i *H jaghnivas, having killed, 205. «RT jard, old age, 166.

m. f. a buyer of water, 221.

, cloud, 158. *(\"Hi{jdgrat, waking, 184. 'tt^taksh, paring, 174. n -tsfn takshan, carpenter, 191. iffrf tati, so many, 231. H^ft tantri, f. lute, 225. inft tart, f. boat, 225.

iryach, tortuous, 181. turdsdh, Indra, 175. r?^ tvach, skin, 158.

tvish, splendour, 1 74. , tooth, 214.

t, giving, 184. dadhi, curds, 234.

rish, bold, 174. <if danta, tooth, 214.

t, poor, 184. ddtri, giver, 235.

, rope, fern., 179, 193.

J ddrdh, wife, 149. didhaksh, desirous of burning, 174. iv and ^ dyu, sky, 213. "HpJT dis, showing, 174. T dis, country, 174. duh, milking, 174.

duhitri, daughter, 235.

, thunderbolt, 221. seeing, 174. , worshipper, 162. doshan, arm, 214. arm, 172, 214. ^ dyu and fl^div, sky, 213. tftdyo, sky, 219. ^ druh, hating, 174. 'gT^ dvdr, door, 164.

dviddmnf, having two ropes, 194.

, hating, 174. ^fn«X dhanin, rich, 203. VTJ dhdtri, n. providence, 235. VT dhtj m.f. thinkuig, 220. tf dM, f. inteUect, 224. l|)«iO dMvari, wife of a fisherman, 193.

, falling, 173. nadi, f. river, 225. «T1| naptri, grandson, 235. •T5T nas, destroying, 174. «T^wa5, nose, 214. »f?r nah, binding, 174- »1l*i«t, ndman, name, 191. ndsikd, nose, 214. ninivas, having led, 205. nirjara, ageless, 167. nri, man, 237.

m. f. dancer, 222. •ft nau, ship, 217. •**'*f nyacJi, low, 181.

m., ^T^pangu, fern, lame, 230. ti, lord, 233.

m, m. path, 195.

INDEX OF NOUNS.

295

foot, 214. trfl papt, m. f. protector, 222. TTCRfft paramanl, m.f. best leader, 221. H (X 4 |l^ parivrdj, mendicant, 162.

, leaf-shedding, 173. joint, 191.

dut m. f. n. pale, 230. -prfrf, foot, 207. foot, 214.

, lump-eater, 170. , father, 235.

, desirous of maturing, 1 74. w, wishing to read, 171. ifa$ pilu, m. n. a tree and its fruit, 230. , fat, fern. ntaO pioari, 194.

u, re-born, 221. , man, (pums), 212. , town, 164.

, Indra, 168. , an offering, 176. name of a deity, 201. army, 214. *pT«TT pritand, army, 214. f, deer, 185.

, having cooked, 205. prajdpati, lord of creatures, 233. pratidivan, sporting, 192.

, western, 181. HVfl" pradhi, m.f. thinking eminently, 221. fern., 223. , quieting, 178. Ttt^prdch, eastern, 180. W&prdchh, asking, 160, 174. worshipping, 159. badi, dark fortnight, 149.

having many kings, 194. °l ? W *4^H bahusreyast, auspicious, 227. ^^»T bahurj, very strong, 161. , knowing, 157. t, great, 185.

ironj brahman, creator, 193.

, Your Honour, 188.

, physician, 161. *ft /////, f. fear, 224. , being, 221. , f. earth, 224. ^ bhtir, atmosphere, 149. ^Jl^ bhrijj, roasting, 162.

, shining, 162. bhrdtri, brother, 235.

i, f. brow, 224. *IM«<«\ maghavan, Indra, 200. f;', diving, 161.

, 187.

matt, thought, 230. mathin, churn ing-stick, 195. madhulih, bee, 174. 191.

, great, 186. , meat, 214. *rNf mdthsa, meat, 214. t, mother, 235. , month, 214. muh, confounding, 174.

, head, 191. ;, cleaning, 162. mridu, m. f. n. soft, 230. an, liver, 214. ri'f, liver, 214. , sacrificing, 162.

sacrificer, 192. Ufa ya<», as many, 231. , f. road, 222.

young, 199. pea-soup, 214.

pea-soup, 214. , shining, 162. , king, 191. rajftf, queen, 193. , light, 158.

296

INDEX OF NOUNS.

ruj, disease, 161. ^^ rurudvas, crying, 204. ^^ rush, anger, 174. "^ rai, wealth, 217.

lakshmi, f. goddess of prosperity, 225. laghu, m. f. n. light, 230. fro? lih, licking, 174. <g lu, m. f. cutting, 220.

vanij, merchant, 161. t, 187.

, f. wife, 225. 191. J varshdh, rainy season, 149.

, frog, 221.

-vas, part, perfect, 204. vdch, speech, 158.

vdtapramt, antelope, 222. ^T^! vdr, water, 164. «nft vdri, water, 230.

carrying, 208. , knowing, 205. a river, 174. , drop of water, 174. f^RJT»T vibhrdj, resplendent, 162.

vaksh, desirous of saying, 174. iviksh, wishing to enter, 174. ? vis, entering, 174.

msvapd, all-preserving, 239. visvardj, universal monarch, 162. visvasrij, creator, 162. ish, ordure, 174.

vishvach, all-pervading, 181. . vrikshalu, tree-hewer, 222. risck, cutting, 159. 3(«h«^ sakan, ordure, 214. it, ordure, 214. sankhadhmd, shell-blower, 239.

, commanding, 184. suchi, m. f. n. bright, 230. suddhadhi, thinking pure things, 221.

£uddhadhi, a pure thinker, 221. sufruvas, having heard, 205. sushki, 222. ^TT sri, f. happiness, 224. , dog, 199. svetavdh and HJrHt^ svetavas, 209.

year, 149. ^rf^T sakthi, thigh, 234. sakhi, friend, 232. us, friend, 172. ! sadhryach, accompanying, 181.

, right, 181. j, sovereign, 162. sarvasak, omnipotent, 155. sdnu, ridge, 214. tufa sdmi, half, 149.

J sikatdh, sand, 149. sukhi, wishing for pleasure, 222. Tf sugan, ready reckoner, 154.

suchakshus, having good eyes, 165.

is, well-lighted, 165. suti, wishing for a son, 222.

, well-sounding, 170. sudhi, m. f. having a good mind, 226. zs, well- walking, 170. , m. f. having good brows, 226. sumanas, well-minded, 165. susri, well-faring, 221. susakhi, a good friend, 232. suhimsf well-striking, 172. *J^ suhrid, friendly, 157. /, creating, 162. somapd, Soma drinker, 239. stri, woman, 228. snih, loving, 174. snu, ridge, 214.

spueing, 174. is, touching, 174. ;, a garland, 161. sras, falling, 173.

INDEX OF NOUNS.

297

^ sruch, ladle, 158. sv ay am, self, 149. ^svayambhu, self-existing, 221. svar, heaven, 149. svasri, sister, 235.

, having good water, an.

, killing, 202.

green, 157. hdhd, 240. hi i'l, heart, 214.

hridaya, heart, 214. lirt, f. shame, 224.

INDEX OF VERBS,

NOTE — The number refers to the number of each verb in the Appendix.

, to pervade, 37. fl/, to go, to throw, (^ft vf), 23.

to go, to worship, 17. aftj, to anoint, 207. ad, to eat, 162. , to breathe, 176. , to go, 78.

ard, to go, to pain, 12. , to help, 92. ^, to pervade, 147. as, to be, 173. dnchh, to stretch, 18. , to obtain, 146.

to sit, 183. vii^ dha, to speak, 190. ^t,togo, 171.

^ i, to go ; ^nft adhi, to read, 186. ^ ind, to govern, 13. ^ indh, to kindle, 209. ^9 ish, to wish, 118, 31. tksh, to see, 69.

chhati), 49.

ls, to rule, 182. th, to aim, 79.

, to go, 1 6. T<^ ush, to burn, 40.

urnu, to cover, 191

ri, to go, (^j'^arir ri

ri, to go, 197.

ij, to gain, 72.

, to grow, 68.

kat , to rain, to encompass, 25. ^IW Aram, to love, 77. , to shine, 80. , to cough, 81.

it, to cure, ( f^l f*k W fif chikitsati), 63. Aiuf, to bend, in.

, to strike, 6. *ri, to do, 152. -nV, to cut, no, 107. rip, to be able, 89, 87. ^JT^ krishf to furrow, 38. ^H^ krish, to trace, 106. Qq

298

INDEX OF VERBS,

kri, to scatter, 113.

rft, to praise, 138. WT kram, to stride, 30, 29. jft kri, to buy, 153. "HW^klam, to tire, 29, 30, 130. tpff fcsfom, to kill, 149. T5f*T ksham, to bear, 130. f^T Arsfo', to wane, to diminish, 24. fop^fo^m, to kill, 150. ^ khad> to eat, 8. ^»^ khan, to dig, 95. f^ khid, to vex, 107. ^3TT khya, to proclaim, 166. Trf gad, to speak, 9. TFR 0aw, to go, 33, 31. TT 5-0, to go, 83. *n^£Mp, to protect, 26, 63. *J| guh> to hide, 97, 29. *t gai, to sing, 44. ?T| #r«A, to take, 157, 105, *"<% #?az, to droop, 43. "5 $^w-class, 46, 47, 200. TTT ^r^ra, to smell, 54. ^3FT^ ckakds, to shine, 177. ^TJT chaksh, to speak, 181.

, to pound, 137. cJiamy to eat, 29 » ohah, to pound, 137. c^», to collect, 137, 140.

it^to think, 2. T chur, to steal, 136.

chyut, to sprinkle, 3. cMo, to cut, 124.

, to eat, 177, 176. aw, to spring up, 132. Jdgri, to wake, 178, 177. *{ji, to excel, 36. *t jri, to grow old, 123, 156.

, to know, to make known, 137. ./na, to know, 159.

to grow weak, 158, 36, 105. *$£jvar, to suffer, 92. 7TEJ1 taksh, to hew, 37. 1T^ tan, to stretch, 148. W^tap, to burn, 28. TfT tarn, to languish, 130. fcnrft)', to forbear, (fii fd Hf ft titikshate), 75, 63. 5 *w, to grow, 1 70. ]J^ tud, to strike, 104. l[*{trip, to delight, 127, 38. Jf^ trih, to kill, 208. TT tri, to cross, 61.

i, to be ashamed, 74. ', to tremble, 30. c|"<? £rM£, to cut, 30. r^ tvar, to hurry, 92. <f$T dams, to bite, 62, 73. <^ dad, to give, 70. ^ dam, to tame, 130. ^fin^T daridrd, to be poor, 179, 177. <^T dah, to burn, 42. ^T rfa, to give, 58. <^T c?a, to give, 200.

^rafif diddmsati, to straighten, 63. Trfw, to play, I2i. rfl, to decay, 154. ift dtdMy to shine, 177. ^A, to milk, 1 88. "^ c?n, to observe, 120.

is, to see, (Vj(pa4)t 48, 38- | dri, to tear, 156. ?T de, to protect, 85. c?«», to cleanse, 46. ^ c?ai, to protect, 85. i, to cut, 124. ;, to shine, 86.

;, to hate, 187. ', to place, 201. \dhu, to shake, 156. i, to warm, 27.

NDEX OF VERBS.

299

$ dhe, to drink, 47. VTT dhmd, to blow, 55. , to hum, n. t, to bow, 32. ina£ to perish, 129, 117. nah, to bind, 135. 5T niksh, to kiss, 15. ny, to cleanse, 202. nine?, to blame, 14. •p^nnV, to dance, 122. *nff pan, to traffic, 26. mJTpan, to praise, 76. , to fall, 64. to go, 133. , to praise, 26, 76.

, to see, 48. ^T pd, to drink, 53.

's, to form, 107. , to purify, 156. >rT, to fill, 195, 156. UC^prachh, to ask, 115, 105. TITT psd, to eat, 163. 1R^ phal, to burst, 34. *V badh, <tflHrUr) bfbhatsate, to loathe, 63. "^V bandh, to bind, 160.

to perceive, 134. to speak, 190.

j, to break, 206. bhi, to fear, 193.

, to be, i. ^J 6Ar», to cany, 199. ^R1^ bhrajj, to fry, 105. WT bhram, to roam, 30, 130. r 6Ara&, to shine, 30. T 6^Z«5, to shine, 30. mo;)', to sink, 117. 1^ mad, to rejoice, 130. *T^ manth, to shake, to churn, 5. T^Twap, to bind, 92. TT ma, to measure, 164.

TT md, to measure, 198. TI«^ man, nwfcfl mtmdriuate, to search, 63. f*f mi, to throw, 154. fa^ mirf, to be wet, 131. T*T?T rttiA, to sprinkle, 41. *ft mf, to kill, 154. ^^ much, to loosen, 107. *^ wiuA, to be foolish, 128. ^ win, to die, 119. fS^ wiry, to clean, 174. OT mnd, to study, 57. ^^mrwcA, to go, 19. 1»^ yaj, to sacrifice, 99. TP(yam, to stop, 31, 58. », to feed, 137. to go, 165. 3 yu, to mix, 169.

)', to tinge, 62. rad, to trace, 10. ram, to sport, 91. ;, to shine, 94. ^j ru, to go, to kill, 84. ^j rw, to shout, 1 70. ^j^ rud, to cry, 1 76. ?S^ rudh, to shut out, 203.

i, to kill, 39. lash, to desire, 30. 'ip, to paint, 109, 107. >, to break, 107. "5 M, to cut, 156. ^T vach, to speak, 175.

[/, to go, 21. racf, to speak, 66.

>, to sow, to weave, 100.

to go, 105. ^ val, to h've, 137. ^51 vas, to desire, 167, 105. ^^t?as, to dwell, 65. ^ vah, to carry, 101, 93. vichh, to go, 26. Q q 2

300

INDEX OF VERBS.

>y, to separate, 202. r<£ vid, to find, 108, 107. [^ vid, to know, 172.

vish, to embrace, 202. Tt vi, see ^HTfl/.

^ cri, to choose, 142 ; Parasmaipada. *[vri, to cherish, 161; Atmanepada. "^H^vrit, to be, 87. ^V vridh, to grow, 87. i, to choose, 156. ve, to weave, 102.

vevi, to obtain, 177. ^^ vyach, to surround, 105. ^T^T vyath, to fear, to suffer pain, 90.

?, to pierce, 126, 105. \j, to go, 22.

tO CUt, 112, 105.

sak, to be able, 144. ^ sad, to wither, 51. i, to cease, 130.

in, $() tyl 44 fri sisdmsati, to sharpen, 63. ?, to command, 180, 177. sish, to distinguish, 204. $ft s% to lie down, 185. Sp^ s'ncZA, to hurt, 87. Tfft s'o, to sharpen, 124. ^K^schut, to flow, 4. TZnj^schyut, to flow, 4. <*5T*T sram, to tire, 130. frSf s'n, to go, to serve, 98. «, to hear, 145.

?, to breathe, 176. fat s'w, to swell, 67. CT shtyai, to sound, 45. fy^shthiv, to spit, 35, 29. ^^^shvashk, to go, 71. «afJ/, to stick, 62, 73. f, to perish, 52.

N*.o1

saw, to obtain, 151. sah, to bear, 93. sich, to sprinkle, 107. sidh, to go, and "ftW sidh, to com- mand, 7. r^sw, to serve, 82. 1J SM, to distil, 139.

to bear, to bring/orth, 184. sri, to go, 50.

rij, to let off, 116, 38, 48. so, to finish, 125, 124.

skand, to approach, 60. TsfiH skambh, to support, 155. ^j sku, 155.

^H" skumbh, to hold, 155. WH stambh, to support, 155. JsJ stu, to praise, 189. f^ stu, to praise, 170. ^^stumbh, to stop, 155. ^5T stri, to cover, 141. ^ff stri, to cover, 156. *« styai, to sound, 45. WT s^^, to stand, 56.

is, to touch, 114.

syand, to sprinkle, to drop, 88, 87. sriv, to go, to dry, 92. svanj, to embrace, 73, 62.

, to sleep, 176. , to kill, 168. *TT hd, to leave, 196. "H? hi, to go, to grow, 143. "fi|^ hims, to kill, 205. J hu, to sacrifice, 192. *r^! hurchh, to be crooked, 20. <£ hri, to take, 96. "^ hri, to be ashamed, 194. 3T hvri, to bend, 59. 3§ hve, to call, 103.

BNDIKC '

MAY3119B5

University of Toronto Library

DO NOT

REMOVE

THE

CARD

FROM

THIS

POCKET

Acme Library Card Pocket LOWE-MARTIN CO. LOOTED